Sarah Teather To Vote Against Benefit Cuts

0

Former Lib Dem minister Sarah Teather has said she will rebel against the coalition and vote against plans to cut benefit payments.

On Tuesday MPs will vote on the government’s proposal to restrict the rise in benefit payments to a below inflation 1% – a real terms cut.

Nick Clegg has argued that the Lib Dem presence in government prevented even harsher cuts to welfare payments. However this was not good enough for Teather.

“We have a huge problem with in-work child poverty and we’re only going to make this significantly worse,” she said on Monday.

Speaking on BBC Radio 4’s World at One programme, Teather added: “I feel deeply anxious about the policy and I will be voting against the Bill tomorrow very reluctantly and with a very heavy heart.”

The Brent Central MP, who faces a tough fight to hold on to her seat against Labour at the next election, lost her job as children and families minister in the September reshuffle.

Teather’s announcement that she intends to rebel against the coalition came just one hour before Clegg and David Cameron were due to host a joint press conference designed to show coalition unity or purpose.

She also attacked the “setting up” of a “strivers verses scroungers” narrative that drove “envy and division”.

“Families who are earning the least amount of money really struggle to be able to pay for their basics,” she said.

Catherine McKinnell: The Child Benefit Changes Are Chaotic, Unfair and Perverse

Bahrain jails anti-regime activists, overturns appeals

0

Bahraini Shiite Muslims wave their national flags and shout slogans during an anti-government protest in the Manama coastal suburb of Karbabad on December 28, 2012 (AFP Photo / Mohammed Al-Shaikh)

Bahraini Shiite Muslims wave their national flags and shout slogans during an anti-government protest in the Manama coastal suburb of Karbabad on December 28, 2012 (AFP Photo / Mohammed Al-Shaikh)

A top Bahraini court has overturned an appeal by 13 anti-regime activists on their sentences for protesting in 2011. The ruling could lead to further unrest by majority Sunni Muslim groups pushing for democracy in the Shiite-ruled kingdom.

Eight of the activists received life sentences for “plotting to overthrow the state” by participating in 2011’s anti-government protests. The other sentences ranged from five to 15 years in prison.

“This verdict is final, there are no more appeals possible, it is the last stage of litigation,” lawyer Mohammed al-Jishi told Reuters by telephone from a court in the nation’s capital Manama.

Human rights groups are calling for the activists’ release, claiming that no evidence was presented to show the leaders participated in any violence during the demonstrations in February and March 2011.

The ruling is likely to provoke heavy criticism from international human rights groups

The 13 whose appeals were overturned were originally part of a group of 20 activists taken into custody in 2011, eight of whom received life sentences.

All of the suspects were initially convicted by a military tribunal of conspiring against Bahrain’s Shiite royal family and “setting up terror groups to topple the regime.” They then lost an appeal in civilian court a year later last September, following which only thirteen resolved to appeal again.

Unrest in the island kingdom began in February 2011 at the outset of the Arab Spring, when pro-democracy movements began to hold protests in Manama. The demonstrators also demanded an end to the discrimination of Bahrain’s Sunni majority by the ruling Shiite monarchy.

Activists occupied a central monument in the Bahraini capital for a month. Bahraini rulers then called a state of emergency, and brought in soldiers from surrounding Gulf kingdoms as part of a brutal police crackdown on public dissent.

Bahrain, which is home to the US’ fifth naval fleet, has seen a recent outbreak of protest before New Year’s. Protesters called for the ouster of Prime Minister Khalifa, who has headed Bahrain’s government for more than 40 years. Government security forces dispersed the activists with teargas.

Violent crackdowns on protesters have become a regular occurrence in Bahrain, during which teargas, stun grenades, rubber bullets and even live ammunition are fired on demonstrators, Amnesty International reported.

Despite widespread humanitarian condemnation of the unrest rocking the nation, many nations have been hesitant to comment on the situation. The US has appealed to the nation’s rulers to negotiate with the opposition, but has stopped short of openly criticizing the regime.

Asma Darwish of the European-Bahraini Organization for Human Rights told RT that the “excessive use of violence” employed by the government showed “no actual intention of the authorities to enhance the situation or to have a real political reform on the ground in Bahrain.”

Eighty people have been killed and thousands have been arrested since unrest began in Bahrain. A 2011 investigation by the Bahrain Commission of Inquiry also revealed that many Bahraini activists and politicians were subjected to torture while in police custody.

Foreign Terrorists Wage War on Syria

0

Syrian authorities said so in 2011. Other reports acknowledged it then and now.

Syria is Washington’s war. It was planned years ago. America wants pro-Western puppet leadership replacing Assad.

All independent governments are targeted for regime change. Imperial rogue states operate that way.

Strategy used is longstanding. On January 4, Michel Chossudovsky discussed it. Current US proxy wars employ earlier tactics. Western-recruited death squads are used.

Using them “go(es) back to the Vietnam war.”

“Terror brigades (commit) targeted assassinations (and) countless atrocities.”

Since Syria’s conflict erupted in March 2011, Washington, key NATO allies, Israel, and other regional allies recruited, armed, trained, and directed death squads.

They’re still doing it. They’re imported from abroad. More on that below.

Washington prioritizes the “Salvador Option.” Rules of engagement proliferated massacres, torture, and gruesome atrocities in El Salvador, Guatemala, Honduras, and Nicaragua.

In Vietnam, Operation Phoenix (OP) did the same things earlier. It became a template for future counterterrorism operations.

From 1968 — 1973, CIA operatives, Special Forces, and Military Assistance Command Vietnam-Special Operations Group (MACV-SOG) conducted covert missions.

Their mandate was to crush National Liberation Front (Viet Cong) resistance. Strategy was to terrorize people into submission.

Operations were no holds barred. Indiscriminate mass murder and atrocities were committed. US military personnel and South Vietnamese government officials considered security risks were targeted.

High-value elements mattered most. Countless others were affected. Around 80,000 died before operations ended.

Later reports said OP failed. John Pilger called America’s Southeast Asian war “the grand illusion of the American cause.” What couldn’t succeed finally ended.

Many remember Washington’s humiliating April 30, 1975 Saigon embassy rooftop exit. Perhaps Middle East/North African/Central Asian ones await.

America considers state-sponsored terrorism success stories.

Johnson and Nixon prioritized them. So did Reagan, Bush I and II, Clinton and Obama. Rogue states operate no holds barred. Inviolable international and domestic laws are spurned.

Unchallenged global dominance alone matters. Unlimited body count totals and mass destruction further it. Wars of aggression are called liberating ones. Humanitarian intervention duplicity justifies them.

Patriotism means going along with criminal lawlessness. Truth is turned on its head. Media scoundrels suppress it. Rogue politicians betray their constituents.

It’s institutionalized. Empires never say they’re sorry. Policy is made through the barrel of a gun. It’s not pretty. It proliferates state terror globally. Most people haven’t a clue.

They’re hooked on bread and circuses. They’re mindless about what affects them most. Their dismissiveness compromises their own security. Their futures are jeopardized. Their children may not have one worth living. People are on their own to fight back.

Prioritized wealth, power, privilege and dominance undermine what’s too important to lose. Permanent imperial wars alone divert trillions of vitally needed dollars. They’re not available for essential domestic needs.

Popular ones go begging. Bailing out bankers and rewarding other corporate favorites matter more. So do imperial conquests. Permanent war is policy.

Direct and proxy ones are waged. Brutal assassins are used. They’re recruited abroad. A UN report said 29 countries supply them. The worst of cutthroat killers are hired guns. They’re enlisted to advance America’s imperium.

They’re waging war on Assad. It’s mischaracterized as civil. There’s nothing civil about Washington’s war on Syria. The same dirty game repeats. Independent states are targeted for regime change. All options are used.

They include full-scale war, mass killing, and gruesome atrocities. Nations are transformed into charnel houses. It’s done on the pretext of liberating them.

American-style freedom is slavery. Mainstream discourse doesn’t explain. It repeats long ago discredited notions. Responsibility to protect (R2P) duplicity justifies what demands condemnation.

Media scoundrels suppress imperial lawlessness. Western-inflicted violence and bloodshed go unnoticed. Victims are blamed for aggressor crimes. The same dirty game repeats.

Post-9/11, Afghanistan and Iraq were ravaged and destroyed. So was Libya last year. Now it’s Syria’s turn. Perhaps Iran comes next.

Most Syrians deplore violence. They oppose internal and external elements committing it. They support protective security forces. They represent a vital last line of defense.

Conflict continues without end. On January 1, Press TV headlined “Al-Qaeda, Israel’s Trojan horse in Middle East: Iranian MP,” saying:

Iranian Majlis National Security and Foreign Policy Committee member Mohammad-Hassan Asafari said:

“The Zionist regime has become the largest training base for active terrorists in the Middle East region and the footprint of this sinister regime can be easily traced in recent terrorist operations.”

Al Qaeda and like-minded terrorists wage war on Syria. They’re closely allied with Washington. They’re recruited throughout the region and beyond.

Israel provides training and intelligence support. A separate Press TV report headlined “US, Israel major players in Syria crisis: Iran cmdr,” saying:

“Chairman of Iran’s Armed Forces Joint Chiefs of Staff Major General Hassan Firouzabadi says the United States and Israel are major players in the Syrian crisis.”

“The number of terrorists in Syria, compared with the people and the popular army of this country, is not high and they are weak.”

“However, they have been provided with advanced weapons and shoot people from hiding places, and this is not a coherent and systematic move.”

The London Independent discussed the issue. It’s report was largely one-sided. It headlined “Foreign fighters fuel the sectarian flames in Syria.”

It called the conflict “sectarian.” Doing so implies civil war. It covered up a foreign invasion. It cited a duplicitous Human Rights Council International Commission of Inquiry for Syria report.

It claimed Syrian forces “resorted to aerial bombardments, including shelling of hospitals.” It called such attacks “disproportionate.” It blamed Assad for Western aggression.

The Media turn truth on its head. Managed news substitutes for the real thing. Readers and viewers aren’t told what they most need to know.

Offensive Patriot missiles arrived in Turkey. They’re positioned near Syria’s border. NATO maintains control.

On January 4, an AFRICOM statement said America began transporting 400 troops to Turkey. Additional equipment will arrive by sea.

US forces will be based at Gaziantep. It’s 50km north of Syria’s border. Missile batteries will be fully operational later in January. They’re for offense, not defense.

Plans may involve establishing a backdoor no-fly zone. Doing so would circumvent Security Council authority.

Washington-led NATO heads closer to full-scale intervention. The new year promises more bloodshed.

On January 6, Press TV headlined “Russian warships gathering off Syria waters to deter West: Report.”

The Sunday Times was cited. It said Russia sent sent five landing ships. On board are military vehicles, hundreds of marines, and combat vessels.

“Russia should be prepared for any developments as it believes the situation in Syria might reach its peak before Easter,” it said. An unnamed diplomatic source was quoted.

He added that Russia intends to deter “the West from deploying ground forces.” Moscow says its ships are to “improve the management, maintenance, and testing of the interaction of naval forces.”

Another Russian warship carrying marines heads for Tartus. Moscow maintains its only Mediterranean base in the Syrian port city.

On December 29, two other warships, the Azov and Nikolai Filchenkov, were deployed. They’ll arrive in Syrian waters shortly.

“In mid-December, Russia’s Defense Ministry announced that a fleet of Russian warships had been sent from the Baltic port of Baltiysk to the Mediterranean Sea near the Syrian waters.”

“Syria, Russia and Iran say” deploying offensive Patriot missiles near Syria’s border “could spark an eventual military action by NATO.”

On January 2, Iran’s Fars News Agency (FNA) headlined “Foreign Military Intervention in Syria: Red Line for Russia,” saying:

Mehdi Sanayee is a senior Iranian legislator. He’s a National Security and Foreign Policy Commission member. He’s also a Russian expert.

He told FNA:

“Causing developments through military intervention and remaining empty-handed in the developments in Syria are Moscow’s red lines.”

Deploying Russian forces represents a “new step” in the Syrian conflict.

“Russia tries to prove on the international scene that it is committed to its strategy, which is opposition to and confrontation against foreign military intervention and unilateral moves in Syria to show that it has not surrendered on them,” he said.

He referred to Vladimir Putin’s earlier comments. They suggested Moscow’s new position. It remains to be seen what follows.

Patrick Seale is a longtime Middle East analyst. On January 1, he offered grim new year tidings. “The coming year” won’t be “happy” for “the tormented Middle East,” he said.

“(T)he balance sheet of the past two years remains profoundly negative.” Nowhere throughout the region have “convincing sign(s) of peace and reconciliation” emerged.

Some countries suffered more than others. He called the “Palestine cause….all but lost. The two-state solution is virtually extinct.” He stopped short of saying it’s been that way for years.

He stressed the importance of preserving a “unitary Syrian state.” Doing so is essential to “containing Israel.” Resolving the conflict militarily can’t succeed.

The only solution is mutually agreed on ceasefire, halting weapons and funding sent insurgents, “isolat(ing) murderous extremists,” and resolving the conflict politically.

At issue isn’t whether Assad stays or goes. Syria is vitally important. It’s essential to protect its “unique historical heritage, its state institutions, its ancient minorities, and its vital role in the defense of Arab independence.”

On January 6, Assad delivered a major address. It’s his first in months. He called for “comprehensive national dialogue in the near future” with opposition elements and other political parties.

“Syria wants peace and reconciliation,” he stressed. At the same time, “(a)rmed groups must halt terrorist acts.” Outside forces direct them.

They’re “terrorists” and “criminals.” They want Syria’s government ousted. He vowed to defeat them. He called for “full national mobilization.”

“We meet today and suffering is overwhelming Syrian land. There is no place for joy while security and stability are absent on the streets of our country. The nation is for all and we all must protect it.”

“These are the enemies of the people, the enemies of God,” he said. “Eventually they resorted to terrorism to terrorize the people.”

“They call it a revolution, but it has nothing to do with revolution. A revolution needs thinkers. These are a bunch of criminals.”

“The first stage of a political solution would require that regional powers stop funding and arming (opposition forces), an end to terrorist operations, and controlling the borders.”

“We will not have dialogue with a puppet made by the West,” he stressed.

The Syrian Arab News Agency (SANA) reported what he said in detail.

He prefers responsible conflict resolution. He urged it all along. Mutually agreed on ceasefire is essential. Washington and key NATO partners spurn it.

For months, Assad made good faith efforts. A year ago, Syria’s constitution was rewritten. It was put to a popular referendum.

Despite opposition boycotts, threats, anti-Assad media campaigns, and turnout hampered in violence-torn areas, 89.4% of eligible voters approved it. Another 9% opposed, and 1.2% of ballots were invalid.

It includes 157 articles. Key reforms were instituted. They include political pluralism established for the first time. Presidential term limits and press freedom were mandated.

Last May, first time ever legislative elections were held. Doing so was a milestone political event. Independent candidates participated.

Despite ongoing insurgent violence, turnout was high. Voting went smoothly. Independent monitors supervised the process. They included intellectuals, legislators and judicial authorities from other countries.

Ba’ath party members won a 60% majority. Previously they held just over 50% control. With support from independent MPs, they comprise 90% of Syria’s parliament. Opposition party members were also elected.

Assad said nothing about stepping down. He, Russia, China, Iran, and other sources say Syrians alone should choose their government.

Outside interference is rejected. International law is clear and unequivocal. The UN Charter explains under what conditions intervention, violence and coercion (by one state against another) are justified.

Article 2(3) and Article 33(1) require peaceful settlement of international disputes. Article 2(4) prohibits force or its threatened use, including no-fly zone acts of war.

In addition, Articles 2(3), 2(4), and 33 absolutely prohibit any unilateral or other external threat or use of force not specifically allowed under Article 51 or otherwise authorized by the Security Council in accordance with UN Charter provisions.

Three General Assembly resolutions also prohibit non-consensual belligerent intervention. They include:

– the 1965 Declaration on the Inadmissibility of Intervention in the Domestic Affairs of States and the Protection of Their Independence and Sovereignty;

– the 1970 Declaration on Principles of International Law Concerning Friendly Relations and Cooperation among States in Accordance with the Charter of the United Nations; and

– the 1974 Definition of Aggression.

Under no circumstances may one or more nations intervene against another without lawful Security Council authorization. Doing so constitutes illegal aggression.

Article 8 of the 1933 Montevideo Convention of Rights and Duties says “No state has the right to intervene in the internal or external affairs of another.”

Under Article 10, differences between states “should be settled by recognized pacific methods.”

Article 11 calls sovereign state territory “inviolable….”

Washington and key NATO partners spurn international law repeatedly. In 1999, without Security Council authorization, nonbelligerent Yugoslavia was lawlessly attacked and ravaged. Afghanistan, Iraq and Libya followed.

Now Syria. America prioritizes attacking one nation at a time or in multiples. Unless stopped, doing so may end up destroying humanity in the process.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

 

http://www.dailycensored.com/foreign-terrorists-wage-war-on-syria/

5-time Olympics winner Davydova to train Synchro champs for Russia

0

Anastasia Davydova, who won the gold medal in the synchronized swimming's team events during the 2012 Summer Olympics, at London's Bosco Club (RIA Novosti / Ekaterina Chesnokova)

Anastasia Davydova, who won the gold medal in the synchronized swimming’s team events during the 2012 Summer Olympics, at London’s Bosco Club (RIA Novosti / Ekaterina Chesnokova)

After ending her record-breaking career this summer, five-time Olympics champion Anastasia Davydova has to turned to coaching, aiming to further raise Russia’s profile in the sport of synchronized swimming.

­Davydova won’t have to hide her trademark butterfly tattoos now that she is retired from competitive sports. Just a month shy of turning 30, the Olympic champion is now a full-time coach.

Her triumph in the London 2012 Olympic Summer Games still evokes sweet memories, she said.

“London Games was very emotional for me,” Davydova told RT. “Claiming gold number five is not something that happens to you every day. Going into the Games, I knew I’d be proud of myself for coming back and winning again. And so it turned out.”

Davydova had been retired for a year before her wins in the British capital made her the most-decorated synchronized swimmer of the games.

She now aims for further Olympic glory as a coach, even beyond the 2016 Rio Games. Bringing up the next generation of champions takes more than just skill — the swimmer-turned-coach spends up to 13 hours a day poolside

“Patience is the main thing, and I’m doing my best to always stay calm,” she explained. “Because when you’ve perfected your own sport, you just don’t understand how others can find it difficult. Other than that, I’m experienced enough to train others and I can explain to my charges what needs to be explained in great detail.”

Davydova could have earned more if the 13-time world champion had accepted one of many offers to work abroad. Her former duet partner Anastasia Ermakova has already moved to Italy to coach.

But Davydova rates results over money, praising Russia’s system for training future athletes.

“For us, sport comes before school,”
she said. “Of course, kids are still being educated but they either hire tutors or take exams without actually attending. Training takes up most of their time from about the age of nine. So they are fully prepared to compete for the national team if and when they are called up. This approach is unique.”

Russia has been a dominant presence in the sport since the 2000 Sydney Games. Even with a host of Russian greats now retired, the country’s national team still boasts stars such as Natalia Ischenko and Svetlana Romashina.

The Russian duet, consisting of Svetlana Romashina, foreground, and Anastasia Davydova, background, has won the gold in synchronized swimming technical routines at the 2009 World Aquatics Championships (RIA Novosti / Alexander Vilf)
The Russian duet, consisting of Svetlana Romashina, foreground, and Anastasia Davydova, background, has won the gold in synchronized swimming technical routines at the 2009 World Aquatics Championships (RIA Novosti / Alexander Vilf)

Lord Strathclyde Resigns From The Cabinet

0

Lord Strathclyde, the Conservative leader of the House of Lords, has stepped down with immediate effect, to revive a career in business.

He was appointed to the Lords by Margaret Thatcher in 1988, serving as leader of the Tories in the upper house for the past 15 years.

Lord Strathclyde, 52, was never fully behind Nick Clegg’s Lords reform plans and friends say that with that battle behind him now would be a good time to go.

In his resignation letter he wrote: “When I was invited to join the Government by Margaret Thatcher in 1988, I never believed it was a career for life.

“I didn’t expect it to consume me for as long as it has or that I would one day lead the Lords and sit in a Cabinet.

“I always promised myself that when I leave I would do so when I could make a smooth handover to a strong successor. Whatever my feelings on the matter, reform of the Lords is effectively over and now is a good time to mange that handover.”

David Cameron responded by expressing his sorrow at his departure but said: “After a quarter of a century on the front bench I entirely understand your desire to pursue other interests.

“You have been an outstanding Leader of the Lords.”

Although serving a relatively distinguished political career, his personal life was hit by scandal in 2011 when the Mirror exposed his alleged affair with a “penniless single mother”.

Lord Hill of Oareford will replace Lord Strathclyde. Lord Hill served as political secretary to John Major when he was PM and became a life peer in 2010.

He famously tried to quit after the cabinet reshuffle last year, but Cameron was apparently so distracted he failed to hear.

Ecuador vs The Bankers

0
RealNewsNetwork.com, Real News Network, Real News, Real News For Real People, IWT are trademarks and service marks of IWT.TV inc. “The Real News” is the flagship show of IWT and Real News Network.

All original content on this site is copyright of The Real News Network. Click here for more

Problems with this site? Please let us know

Linux VPS Hosting by Star Dot Hosting

Neoliberalizing Nature and Privatizing the Air

0

Context: As yet there are no context links for this item.

Bio

Patrick Bond is the Director of the Center for Civil Society and Professor at the University of KwaZulu-Natal in South Africa. Bond is the author and editor of the recently released books, Politics of Climate Justice and Durban’s Climate Gamble.

Transcript

PAUL JAY, SENIOR EDITOR, TRNN: Welcome to The Real News Network. I’m Paul Jay in Baltimore. And welcome to what is going to become a series of reports on environmental and climate change issues with Patrick Bond, who now joins us from South Africa.

Patrick is the director of the Centre for Civil Society and a professor at the university of KwaZulu-Natal in South Africa. He’s written many books. One of his latest is The Politics of Climate Justice and Durban’s Climate Gamble.Thanks for joining us, Patrick.PATRICK BOND, GLOBAL ECON. PROJECT DIRECTOR, INST. FOR POLICY STUDIES: Great to be with you again, Paul.JAY: So, looking forward to 2013, what do you think are going to be the big issues in terms of environmental and climate change questions?BOND: A lot of ground was broken in 2012 at the Rio Earth Summit–that was Rio+20–in June. And the phrases that your listeners, your audience would have heard are “green economy”, “payment for ecosystem services”, “natural capital”. And these were theorized, well, for many years.And the idea is that if you value the environment, you should put a price tag on it so that its destruction is not just a [free] activity–so say the proponents. But critics say this is equivalent to neoliberalizing nature or privatizing the air in the case of climate and carbon trading. And what became even trickier was in Doha the idea called loss and damage, which is another way of saying that the North owes the South a climate debt for the huge destructive force. I mean, Barack Obama just asked for some $60 billion from Congress to clean up after Sandy. And so this is the sort of huge scale of loss and damage, and even more so in the Third World, the main victims of climate change here in Africa, maybe 200 million deaths anticipated this century.And the big question we’ll all be asking in the coming months: can you put a price on it? And if you do so, in order for the North to pay up, does that mean that you endorse markets for the environment? And that’s a tricky situation for many environmentalists not wanting to go too far towards neoliberal nature, but on the other hand, demanding a climate and an ecological debt be paid.JAY: Well, you’ve got to–I guess if you need something paid, you’ve got to put a price on it. But that is a separate question, then, isn’t it, from whether it’s going to be a privatized solution or not. They’re two separate issues, aren’t they?BOND: That’s right. And one of the finest theorists, Larry Lohmann at Corner House group, explained it to me in Rio very simply, and I think we all should learn from Larry Lohmann. He said the difference between a fine on a big corporation, for example, Texaco–Texaco, now Chevron, polluted about $8 billion worth in the Ecuadoran Amazon, and a court found them guilty. Of course, they’re refusing to pay. They’re a big U.S. corporation. And the idea is they should be fined and then banned from doing that again. And that is an acceptable strategy for progressive environmentalists.The problem is if you allow that activity to be mandated through a fee, a fee for an ecosystem service. And it’s in that very nuanced distinction between putting a price on something because you value it and making someone who destroys it pay for the damage on the one hand, which I think is reasonable–on the other hand, the danger would be if you try to create markets. And this is what’s really running rampant. Here in southern Africa, natural capital will soon be actually calculated as a way to correct gross domestic product, something that’s way overdue, because GDP, what economists like to do to measure growth, ignores environmental destruction, not to mention women’s unpaid labor or community activism or crime or family breakdown. All of these important things are not measured. And the attempt to correct it, natural capital, if it’s used properly, would give us a whole new dimension on whether we should be extracting at the rate, for example, here in our platinum mines we do which led to the Marikana Massacre in August. And that’s the sort of question that I think environmentalists and community activists and labor movements, women’s groups, will be asking more and more. Is it really worth it? And should we not be calculating into a cost-benefit analysis the destructive capacity of capital when it meets nature, and then trying to prevent that process from becoming something like a carbon market or offsets for biodiversity? And a green economy strategy of the World Bank of many big agencies leans towards markets. And this is going to be the struggle of 2013, I predict.JAY: Well, the argument I guess you would hear from Wall Street or others that support what I’m about to say, which is that without the financialization of these issues, you can’t attract the kind of capital that’s required to either have mitigation programs or various things to reduce carbon emission, and that you need to harness the power of international finance, and the only way to do that is make it attractive for them–.BOND: Well, [indeed, that] for 15 years was the underlying assumption behind emissions trading. And to tell you how well that works, simply go to Chicago, where in 2010 they had to close the market. That was the one that former vice president Al Gore was involved in. And the European Union’s emissions trading scheme, which is the largest–over $100 billion a year worth of trading–it’s really crashing and hasn’t done well since here in Durban about a year ago we had the COP17, the climate summit. And as it was said by Bank of America, that summit, like the Doha, gave a little bit of confidence for traders that their system would still be in place. They said it was like a Viagra shot–but that doesn’t last very long, as many men know.I think the point is the carbon markets have demonstratively shown they cannot finance renewable energy. You really need about a $50 per ton price on carbon dioxide, and these markets are running at around $7 or $8, and so they just are unable to deliver the goods. And therefore there are NGOs out there who are calling for the European Union’s emissions trading scheme to be shut down, and instead, a replacement system, a regulatory system, a cap system that would then ban, eventually, the fossil fuels that threaten to destroy our planet.And I think that’s the way to go. Since markets have failed, we really have to turn to a regulatory approach. And the problem is, of course, there are still a lot of people, even in environmental groups, who still believe that the bankers can solve a problem this big, even after all the evidence of the last five years of destruction by bankers. I don’t understand them, but they still believe that.JAY: Alright. Thanks very much for joining us, Patrick. And we’re going to dig more into these issues with–I think we’re going to do this every week or every other week with Patrick. So thanks again, Patrick. BOND: Great to be with you, Paul. Thanks.JAY: And thank you for joining us on The Real News Network.

End

DISCLAIMER: Please note that transcripts for The Real News Network are typed from a recording of the program. TRNN cannot guarantee their complete accuracy.


Comments

Our automatic spam filter blocks comments with multiple links and multiple users using the same IP address. Please make thoughtful comments with minimal links using only one user name. If you think your comment has been mistakenly removed please email us at contact@therealnews.com

Please enable JavaScript to view the comments powered by Disqus.

WATCH: The Increasingly Fractious Coalition ‘Marriage’

0

David Cameron and Nick Clegg will announce on Monday that the coalition government is “steadfast and united”.

Really?

The Huffington Post UK had a little dig through the video archives and managed to splice together a slideshow for you that seems to suggest anything but.

From rivals to friends to rivals again.

All in less than two years. Oh well, surely the next two years must be better, right?

Speak up: Moscow introduces ‘Hyde Parks’ for public gatherings

0

AFP Photo / Kirill Kudryavtsev

AFP Photo / Kirill Kudryavtsev

Legislation establishing two special zones for popular political events in Moscow came into effect on January 7. Those hoping to organize demonstrations will no longer have to request authorization, only inform the park’s management.

­The two areas Moscow authorities designated for rallies and political debates are situated in two city parks: Gorky Park in the city center, and Sokolniki in the southeast. Each can host up to 2,000 people.

Starting January 7, anyone seeking to arrange a rally must inform the park’s management no earlier than 15 and no later than three days before the event.

Russian media and activists have dubbed the areas Moscow’s ‘Hyde Parks,’ referring to the London park where anyone can freely express himself in the ‘Speakers’ Corner.’

The amendments to the legislation regulating public gatherings were prompted by mass rallies in Moscow and in other cities throughout Russia last year. Thousands of people demonstrated to demand fair elections following accusations that Russia’s December 2011 parliamentary elections were fraudulent.

The specified areas will not be able to host massive rallies, which will still require a special permit from Moscow authorities, but aim to satisfy public demands for space for small gatherings.

Last year, the Moscow mayoral office received over 200 applications for different kinds of rallies with less than 1,000 participants.

Many members of the Russian opposition have expressed skepticism about the plan, complaining that the areas are too far from the city center and too small to host large rallies.

The amended legislation also stipulated that single-person pickets pursuing one common goal must now be authorized by authorities. Previously, a single-person picket could be held without a permit as long as there were no other protesters within 50 meters.

11 Secret Documents Americans Deserve to See

0

HuffPost |

Many documents produced by the U.S. government are confidential and not released to the public for legitimate reasons of national security. Others, however, are kept secret for more questionable reasons. The fact that presidents and other government officials have the power to deem materials classified provides them with an opportunity to use national security as an excuse to suppress documents and reports that would reveal embarrassing or illegal activities.

I’ve been collecting the stories of unreleased documents for several years. Now I have chosen 11 examples that were created — and buried — by both Democratic and Republican administrations and which cover assassinations, spying, torture, 50-year-old historical events, presidential directives with classified titles and… trade negotiations.

1. Obama Memo Allowing the Assassination of U.S. Citizens

When the administration of George W. Bush was confronted with cases of Americans fighting against their own country, it responded in a variety of ways. John Walker Lindh, captured while fighting with the Taliban in December 2001, was indicted by a federal grand jury and sentenced to 20 years in prison. José Padilla was arrested in Chicago in May 2002 and held as an “enemy combatant” until 2006 when he was transferred to civilian authority and, in August 2007, sentenced to 17 years in prison for conspiring to support terrorism. Adam Gadahn, who has made propaganda videos for al-Qaeda, was indicted for treason in 2006 and remains at large.

After he took over the presidency, Barack Obama did away with such traditional legal niceties and decided to just kill Americans who would previously have been accused of treason or terrorism. His victims have included three American citizens killed in Yemen in 2011 by missiles fired from drones: U.S.-born anti-American cleric Anwar al-Awlaki, Samir Khan, an al-Qaeda propagandist from North Carolina, and Awlaki’s 16-year-old son, Abdulrahman al-Awlaki.

Obama justified his breach of U.S. and international law with a 50-page memorandum prepared by the Justice Department’s Office of Legal Counsel. Attorney General Eric Holder argued that the killing of Awlaki was legal because he was a wartime enemy and he could not be captured, but the legal justification for this argument is impossible to confirm because the Obama administration has refused to release the memo.

2. 30-page Summary of 9/11 Commission Interview with Bush and Cheney

You would have thought that, in the interests of the nation, the Bush administration would have demanded a thorough investigation of the terrorist attacks of September 11, 2001, the deadliest assault ever on U.S. soil. Instead, they fought tooth and nail against an independent investigation. Public pressure finally forced President George W. Bush to appoint a bipartisan commission that came to be known as the 9/11 Commission. It was eventually given a budget of $15 million…compared to the $39 million spent on the Monica Lewinsky/Bill Clinton investigation. When the commission completed its work in August 2004, the commissioners turned over all their records to the National Archives with the stipulation that the material was to be released to the public starting on January 2, 2009. However, most of the material remains classified. Among the more tantalizing still-secret documents are daily briefings given to President Bush that reportedlydescribed increasingly worried warnings of a possible attack by operatives of Osama bin Laden.

Another secret document that the American people deserve to see is the 30-page summary of the interview of President Bush and Vice-President Dick Cheney conducted by all ten commissioners on April 29, 2004. Bush and Cheney refused to be interviewed unless they were together. They would not testify under oath and they refused to allow the interview to be recorded or transcribed. Instead the commission was allowed to bring with them a note taker. It is the summary based on this person’s notes that remains sealed.

3. 1,171 CIA Documents Related to the Assassination of President Kennedy

It’s been 49 years since President John F. Kennedy was shot to death in Dallas, yet the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA) insists that more than one thousand documents relating to the case should not be released to the public until NARA is legally required to do so in 2017…unless the president at that time decides to extend the ban. It would appear that some of the blocked material deals with the late CIA agent David Phillips, who is thought to have dealt with Lee Harvey Oswald in Mexico City six weeks before the assassination.

4. Detainee Assessment Briefs for Abdullah Tabarak and Abdurahman Khadr

In 2011, WikiLeaks released U.S. military files known as Detainee Assessment Briefs (DABs), which describe the cases of 765 prisoners held at Guantánamo Bay. However, there were actually 779prisoners. So what happened to the files for the other fourteen? Andy Worthington, author of The Guantanamo Files, has noted that two of the fourteen missing stories are especially suspicious: those of Abdullah Tabarak and Abdurahman Khadr.

Tabarak, a Moroccan, was allegedly one of Osama bin Laden’s long-time bodyguards, and took over bin Laden’s satellite phone in order to draw U.S. fire to himself instead of to bin Laden when U.S. forces were chasing the al-Qaeda leader in the Tora Bora mountains in December 2001. Captured and sent to Guantánamo, Tabarak was mysteriously released, sent back to Morocco in July 2003, and set free shortly thereafter.

Abdurahman Khadr, the self-described “black sheep” of a militant family from Canada, was 20 years old when he was captured in Afghanistan and turned over to American forces. He has said that he was recruited by the CIA to become an informant at Guantánamo and then in Bosnia. When the CIA tried to send him to Iraq, he refused and returned to Canada. His younger brother, Omar, was 15 years old when he was captured in Afghanistan and accused of killing an American soldier, Sergeant First Class Christopher Speer, during a firefight. He was incarcerated at Guantánamo for almost ten years until he was finally released to Canadian custody on September 29, 2012.

5. FBI Guidelines for Using GPS Devices to Track Suspects

On January 23, 2012, in the case of United States v. Jones, the Supreme Court ruled unanimously that attaching a GPS device to a car to track its movements constitutes a “search” and is thus covered by the Fourth Amendment protecting Americans against “unreasonable searches and seizures.” But it did not address the question of whether the FBI and other law enforcement agencies must obtain a warrant to attach a GPS device or whether it is enough for an agent to believe that such a search would turn up evidence of wrongdoing.

A month later, at a symposium at the University of San Francisco, FBI lawyer Andrew Weissman announced that the FBI was issuing two memoranda to its agents to clarify how the agency would interpret the Supreme Court decision.# One memo dealt with the use of GPS devices, including whether they could be attached to boats and airplanes and used at international borders. The second addressed how the ruling applied to non-GPS techniques used by the FBI.

The ACLU, citing the Freedom of Information Act, has requested publication of the two memosbecause they “will shape not only the conduct of its own agents but also the policies, practices and procedures of other law enforcement agencies — and, consequently, the privacy rights of Americans.”

To read the rest of the list of 11 documents, click here.

Distributed by RINF Alternative News

Canada Wages a “Low Level War” Against Iran

0

Context: As yet there are no context links for this item.

Bio

Yves Engler is a Canadian commentator and author. His most recent book is The Ugly Canadian – Stephen Harper’s Foreign Policy, and previously he published The Black Book of Canadian Foreign Policy and Canada in Haiti: Waging War on The Poor Majority

Transcript

PAUL JAY, SENIOR EDITOR, TRNN: Welcome to The Real News Network. I’m Paul Jay in Baltimore.

We’re continuing our series of interviews on Canadian foreign policy based on the book The Ugly Canadian. Now joining us is the author of that book, Yves Engler. As I said, he’s a Canadian commentator and author, and his book is–the full title–The Ugly Canadian: Stephen Harper’s Foreign Policy. He now joins us from Ottawa. Thanks for joining us again, Yves.YVES ENGLER, AUTHOR AND POLITICAL COMMENTATOR: Thanks for having me.JAY: So kick us off. Again, as we’ve been going through these interviews, I’ve been–keep saying it should be The Uglier Canadian, because it’s not that Harper’s setting a whole new course for Canada, but it does seem to be positioned in a more, what, militant way. Is that also true in terms of Canadian-Iranian relations?ENGLER: For sure, for sure. The Harper government has–that’s one where I think is–there is some–they’ve gone out of their way to be at the forefront in condemning Iran in shutting–they shut down–about two months ago, they shut down the Canadian embassy in Tehran and shut down the Iranian embassy in Canada and expelled Iranian diplomats, and that was a pretty aggressive move that is often seen as the step before a full-scale declaration of war.JAY: And why would they have done this? I mean, in a sense you would think with Canada having an embassy there, there’s some pragmatically useful role to having an outpost there. The Americans get to use it covertly. There’s some practicality to it. And closing it is sort of a symbolism for whom? Like, who cares that Canada closes their embassy?ENGLER: Yeah, well, that. And there is longstanding allegations of Canadians spying in Iran for Washington. And, of course, going back to 1979, obviously, the American diplomats that are, you know, taken into the Canadian embassy there and taken out of the country, which the movie Argo, Ben Affleck’s recent movie, is in large part about. So there is–that was clearly use of the embassy.I think the main reason for the timing of the shutting down of the embassy, one is that I think the Harper government wants to fully support Netanyahu’s belligerence vis-à-vis Iraq. And so this shutting down the embassy was a sort of a small contribution to that, sort of creating the dynamic for an attack against Iran, or at least to, you know, heighten sanctions and sort of controlling Iran.But I think the specific timing was motivated partly because two weeks before–ten days, two weeks before shutting down the embassy, Iran had the Nonaligned Movement, a very successful Nonaligned Movement meeting there, where I think it was 110 different countries represented, 60 heads of state. The head of–Ban Ki-moon from the UN was on visit even after both John Baird (Canadian foreign minister), Hillary Clinton from the Obama administration, and Netanyahu had all publicly criticized Ban Ki-moon for going and asked him not to go. So I think this was a reaction, this was a sort of an attempt to–after the successful Iranian meeting where they were able to break out of some of this isolation that the U.S. and Israel and Canada and some of Europe are trying to isolate, this was somewhat of a success. So the response that Canada did to that was to try to, you know, attack Iran diplomatically by shutting down the embassy.JAY: Which, as you say, supports Netanyahu’s narrative and may even be something they asked for.ENGLER: Exactly. That’s certainly possible [incompr.] And also there was some speculation even at the extreme end that this was to support Netanyahu when he was kind of in battle with Barack Obama, and there are some, you know, disagreements there where, you know, obviously, Netanyahu did the whole red-line thing at the UN, and this was sort of Canada’s kind of contribution to that. I’m not sure that that’s–necessarily was a conscious attempt to sort of somewhat undermine Obama’s decision. I don’t quite go that far, but certainly clearly wanting to support Netanyahu.And it fits within a longstanding–a lot of other different elements to Canada’s policy. There’s Canadian naval vessels patrolling off the coast of Iran, running provocative maneuvers alongside U.S. armada. There’s Canadian troops in Afghanistan, occupying country bordering Iran. There’s Joint Task Force 2, the Canadian special commandos in Afghanistan. Everything they do is secretive, so I have no proof of this, but I wouldn’t exclude the possibility that the JTF 2 were involved in crossborder incursions into Iran. So I think the Conservative government has really been [incompr.] I consider it a low-level war that Canada’s waging against Iran. The economic sanctions–the point of those sanctions is basically to have the Iranian economy [incompr.] You know. And what that means at a human level is people who are having difficulty getting milk and eggs having that much more difficulty getting those foodstuffs. And so the Conservative government has been participating in what should really be understood as a low-level war against Iran, and it’s having a consequence on, you know, millions of Iranians’ lives. Hopefully, it won’t escalate into a full-scale war, but that’s still a clear possibility.JAY: And we pointed out on The Real News many times that this sanctions war, economic sanctions, to quote Biden, killer sanctions still are taking place at a time when there’s no credible evidence from the IAEA that there actually is a nuclear weapons program in Iran, and American intelligence agencies, as far as we know, continue to say there’s been no decision to create a bomb in Iran, yet, quote-unquote, killer sanctions are on anyway, and, as you say, Canada’s fully part of it.Let me ask one other question. Canadian foreign policy traditionally is very connected to making money. It’s usually somehow to do with some trade advantage for Canada. It seems they’d be the overriding concern for most Canadian foreign policy. Is there some straight economic advantage in terms of this closer relationship with Israel which seems to be partly driving Canadian Iran policy?ENGLER: Yeah. Well, a couple of things just on that. One thing I’ll say about the–one of the reasons for closing down the embassy, why it was made easier to close down the embassy in Tehran, is the fact that the Harper government has had a policy of trying to dissuade economic relations with Iran. And so one of the main objectives of the Canadian embassy anywhere in the world is basically to advance the interests of Canadian corporations in that country. And because they’ve had–this campaign to try to dissuade economic relations with the radicals goes back before the actual formal sanctions, there’s so little Canadian business going on in Iran. So shutting down the embassy becomes that much easier, because you don’t have a pushback from, you know, sort of business interests that are active in that country. So that’s sort of one of the elements to sort of explaining the shutting down of the embassy in Iran.The other–in terms of the Israel element, I don’t know that–I don’t think it’s motivated by business interests. There are deepening ties between Canadian companies and Israeli companies, and that’s been going on for quite a while. There was a free trade agreement that a previous government in 1997 signed with Israel, and since that time there’s been a real growth of trade and investment between the two countries. And I think where there’s clear deepening of ties is at the corporate, if you like, the military-industrial complex level, where Canadian military companies are increasingly tied in with Israeli companies. And a lot of that’s facilitated by public money and different programs–the Canada-Israel Industrial Relations Accord, I think it’s called, where there’s $7 million of public money a year devoted to that. And so you have, you know, a Canadian company involved in drone-making with the Israeli company.JAY: Yeah, I was about to say I think a lot of people don’t know just how big an arms manufacturer Canada is. I mean, last time I looked, I think Canada was in the top ten. It’s the ninth or tenth biggest arms manufacturer in the world.ENGLER: Yeah, different groups have–I think it’s as high as six; between six and twelve is kind of–depending on the formula used to quantify such things. So there is significant–you know, Canada’s a huge aerospace country. I think it’s the third or fourth biggest aerospace industry in the world. And those aerospace–a company like CAE, Montreal-based company, they do–I think they’re considered sort of one of the best of the flight simulation. And so a big chunk of what they do is training, you know, military pilots. So there is a significant Canadian arms industry that goes right down into, you know, producing bullets, even, you know, at the–most of it’s more at the components level, tied into American military companies, but there are, you know, still Canadian companies that produce even, you know, sort of more traditional kind of weapons like bullets. And so they’re a big lobby. And Israel is a very successful high-tech military economy, and so from the standpoint of the Canadian military companies, developing ties with their Israeli counterparts is, you know, quite lucrative, and it’s sort of cutting-edge kind of stuff. And I think that’s definitely an important part of understanding the deepening of ties between Canada and Israel.JAY: Alright. Thanks very much for joining us. And we’re going to continue this series on Canadian foreign policy. If you’d like to see more programming like this, we need your support. We’re in our year-end fundraising campaign. Every dollar you donate gets matched until we reach $100,000 in this campaign. There’s a Donate button somewhere over here. If you don’t click on that, we can’t do this.

End

DISCLAIMER: Please note that transcripts for The Real News Network are typed from a recording of the program. TRNN cannot guarantee their complete accuracy.


Comments

Our automatic spam filter blocks comments with multiple links and multiple users using the same IP address. Please make thoughtful comments with minimal links using only one user name. If you think your comment has been mistakenly removed please email us at contact@therealnews.com

Please enable JavaScript to view the comments powered by Disqus.

America’s Biggest Killers: The Chart Anti-Gunners Don’t Want You To See

0

Mac Slavo,  SHTFplan.com

What we are hearing from bloviating gun control advocates in America is nothing short of emotionally driven irrationality.

According to statistics assembled from the Federal Bureau of Investigation, the Center for Disease Control and the Federal Government, firearms related homicides are minuscule in comparison to other the other “big killers” in the United States.

If we look at homicide statistics in the United States it’s clear that more murders are committed with knives, bats, hammers and poisons than with firearms. As Kurt Nimmo recently noted, “ the number of murders committed annually with hammers and clubs far outpaces the number of murders committed with a rifle.”

The facts, not the drivel being spewed by the anti-gun propaganda machine, leave us wondering why some State and Federal lawmakers are so adamant about restricting the sale and ownership of handguns and rifles, especially since the majority of gun owners — close to 99% — have never committed a violent crime in their lives, let alone used a gun to do so.

Here is the chart they never want you to see:

The chart above proves that politicians and those who would disarm Americans by going so far as to call for a repeal of the 2nd Amendment have ulterior motives — or they’re completely ignorant of the facts.

Perhaps their goal is to trigger a revolution in an effort to implement a total police state over the American people.

It wouldn’t be the first time that a government has tried something like this.

Sandy Hook School Massacre Timeline

0

Sandy_Hook_Elementary_School

The following timeline of the December 14 mass killing of 20 children and 8 adults in Newtown Connecticut attempts to demonstrate how the event was presented to the public by corporate news media. The chronological assemblage of coverage is not comprehensive of all reports published on the incident but rather seeks to verify how the storyline was to a substantial degree constructed by federal and to a lesser degree state law enforcement authorities and major media around the theory (prior to a complete and exhaustive police investigation) that 20-year-old Adam Lanza was the sole agent in the massacre.

From the outset, this scenario became an established reality through the news media’s pronounced repetition of the “lone gunman” narrative and meme. This proposed scenario significantly obscured the fact that police encountered and apprehended two additional shooting suspects on the school’s grounds within minutes of the crime. These suspects remain unaccounted for by authorities but the roles they may have played arguably correlate with the shifting information presented by authorities and major news media on injuries and weapons vis-à-vis the mass carnage meted out in the school. While the detainment of additional suspects was pointed to by alternative news media, in the days following the tragedy, the lone gunman narrative has become firmly established in the public psyche via an overwhelming chorus of corporate media reports and interpretations.

Note: Times of occurrences referenced are Eastern Standard Time and in some instances signify time of publication rather than the specific incident cited. Time of publication does not always correlate with exact time of incident. “n.t.” denotes “no time” of publication referenced.

2012

At the start of the 2012-13 academic year Sandy Hook Elementary School Principal Dawn Hochsprung announces in a public letter to families the Newtown School District’s new security system installed “in all elementary schools.” Under the newly-announced security regimen, “exterior doors will be locked during the day. Every visitor will be required to ring the doorbell at the front entrance and the office staff will use a visual monitoring system to allow entry. Visitors will still be required to report directly to the office and sign in. If our office staff does not recognize you, you will be required to show identification with a picture id. Please understand that with nearly 700 students and over 1,000 parents representing 500 SHS families, most parents will be asked to show identification. Doors will be locked at approximately 9:30 a.m.” “Principal Outlined New Security Procedures at Sandy Hook Elementary,” Hartford Courant, December 14, 2012, 8:25PM EST.

9:47AM
Sandy Hook Principal Dawn Hochsprung Tweets photo of emergency drill held at Sandy Hook fire station with Sandy Hook Elementary faculty and students participating. Esther Zuckerman, “The Sandy Hook Principal’s Twitter Feed is Haunting,” The Atlantic Wire, December 14, 2012.

n.t.
Following Obama’s reelection Senator Diane Feinstein is believed to be meeting with relevant federal agencies to lay groundwork for reenacting assault weapons ban. “Senator Diane Feinstein Moves to Ban All Assault Rifles, High Capacity Magazines, and Pistol Grips,” Market Daily News, November 7, 2012.

10:14AM
Hartford Courant publishes online Google map of Sandy Hook Elementary School. “Map of Sandy Hook Elementary School,” Hartford Courant, December 14, 2012.

10:47AM
Connecticut State Police report assisting Newtown police in a shooting at Sandy Hook Elementary School in Newtown, Connecticut. “The Hartford Courant [<-hyperlink is to a different story] reports there are multiple injures [sic] and unconfirmed reports that one of the shooters is dead while the other is still at large. The school superintendent’s office says the district has locked down schools to ensure the safety of students and staff. Crimeside Staff, “Connecticut School Shooting: Police Investigating Reports of a Shooting at Elementary School,” CBS News, December 14, 2012.

10:47AM
[Famous photo taken by Newtown Bee editor is distributed via CBS and other national media.]

Connecticut School Shooting: Police Investigating Reports of a Shooting at Elementary School,” CBS News, December 14, 2012, 1047AM EST.

11:30AM
A Newtown Volunteer Ambulance Corps dispatcher says a Sandy Hook Elementary School teacher was taken to hospital after being shot in the foot. “There are reports of multiple injuries,” CBS notes. The Newton Bee reports a student with apparently serious wounds was carried out of the facility by a police officer. The school superintendent’s office says all schools in the district remain in lockdown. Crimesider Staff, “Connecticut School Shooting Update: One Gunman Dead, One Teacher Injured at Elementary School,” CBS News, December 14, 2012.

11:34AM
Police say the shooter is dead and two weapons were recovered from him. “The source says one weapon recovered is a Glock and the other is a Sig Sauer.” Children and Adults Gunned Down in School Massacre,” CNN, December 14, 2012.

12:29PM
Hartford Courant mysteriously publishes online Googlemap of neighborhood of Lanza residence, which is 36 Yogananda St. “Map of 46 Yogananda St. Sandy Hook, CT,” Hartford Courant, December 14, 2012.

12:27PM
Anonymous witness and parent of student says that while attending a meeting with faculty regarding her child she heard “at least 100 rounds” being fired when the shooting began about 9:30 to 9:35AM. “There was a ‘pop pop pop’ in the hall outside the room. Three people went out of the room into the hall where the sounds had come from. ‘Only one person came back.’” The same witness says “she then called 911. She said she never saw the shooter but she later was escorted outside the room past two bodies lying in blood.” “Children and Adults Gunned Down in School Massacre,” CNN, December 14, 2012.

1:57PM
An anonymous federal law enforcement source informs news media the death toll is closer to 30 than 20, with most of those killed being children. The source, who says he is in contact with authorities on the scene, says the suspected gunman had a connection to the school but would not elaborate. Children and Adults Gunned Down in School Massacre,” CNN, December 14, 2012.

2:09PM
CNN is “told that 18 to 20 of the dead are children.” Children and Adults Gunned Down in School Massacre,” CNN, December 14, 2012.

2:11PM
An anonymous law enforcement official tells CNN that the suspect’s name is Ryan Lanza and he is in his 20s. Children and Adults Gunned Down in School Massacre,” CNN, December 14, 2012.

2:39PM
Anonymous federal law enforcement authorities say “the shooting happened quickly and happened in a concentrated area.” Children and Adults Gunned Down in School Massacre,” CNN, December 14, 2012.

2:52PM
Father of Sandy Hook Elementary School third grade student Stephen Delgiudice describes to CBS News what his daughter heard over the loudspeaker from the principal’s office. This prompted the teacher to lock the classroom door. “We have a pretty good program in Newtown,” Delgiudice says. “where basically a code red reverse 911 type of a call, and a, came through. [It said] there’s a shooting at the school and naturally I obeyed the speed limit and drove immediately to the school. And ah, y’know it was just mass-mass chaos. I finally got to my daughter–a friend of mine led me to my daughter. I wanted to see her face and hold her, which I did, and once I did that there was a sense of relief, but, uhm, it was just chaos.” Crimesider Staff, “Connecticut School Shooting: Father Says Student Heard Commotion Over Loudspeaker,” CBS News, December 14, 2012.

3:16PM
President Obama addresses nation. “As a country, we have been through this too many times. Whether it’s an elementary school in Newtown, or a shopping mall in Oregon, or a temple in Wisconsin, or a movie theater in Aurora, or a street corner in Chicago — these neighborhoods are our neighborhoods, and these children are our children. And we’re going to have to come together and take meaningful action to prevent more tragedies like this, regardless of the politics.” Children and Adults Gunned Down in School Massacre,” CNN, December 14, 2012.

3:51PM
A federal law enforcement official informs CNN that “shooter arrived and headed directly toward and to his mother’s classroom. That and the other information now emerging — another family member killed, police interviews — lead them to believe his mother was the primary target. But they note he also came armed with clear intention of mass killing.” Children and Adults Gunned Down in School Massacre,” CNN, December 14, 2012.

3:45PM
There were a total of 27 people dead at the school, Lt. Paul Vance of the Connecticut State Police tells assembled reporters. “Eighteen students were pronounced dead at the scene, and two others died at the hospital.” In addition, six adults were pronounced dead at the scene. Children and Adults Gunned Down in School Massacre,” CNN, December 14, 2012.

3:54PM
CNN now reports “three guns found at the scene … the third weapon found on the scene was a .223 Bushmaster. The other weapons, previously reported, are a Glock, and a Sig-Sauer. No word on the models of Glock or Sig-Sauer.” Children and Adults Gunned Down in School Massacre,” CNN, December 14, 2012.

6:34PM
Witnesses attest to seeing bloodied children, hearing as many as 100 shots, and “loud booms.” “It was horrendous,” parent Brenda Lebinski said, who rushed to the school where her daughter is a third grade student. “Everyone was in hysterics — parents, students. There were kids coming out of the school bloodied. I don’t know if they were shot, but they were bloodied.” Lebinski said another parent in the school “during the shooting told her a ‘masked man’ entered the principal’s office and may have shot the principal. Lebinski, who is friends with the mother who was at the school, said the principal was “’severely injured.’” Lebinski’s daughter’s teacher “immediately locked the door to the classroom and put all the kids in the corner of the room.” Nearby resident Melissa Murphy listened to events unfold on a police scanner. “’I kept hearing them call for the mass casualty kit and scream, “Send everybody! Send everybody!” Murphy said. ‘It doesn’t seem like it can be really happening. I feel like I’m in shock.’” A girl interviewed by an NBC Connecticut affiliate said she heard seven loud “booms” while in gym class. “A police officer came in and told us to run outside and so we did,” the unidentified girl said on camera. Dan Burns and Chris Kaufman, “Connecticut Gun Rampage: 28 Dead, Including 20 Children,” Reuters, December 14, 2012.

6:34PM
New York City Mayor Michael Bloomberg calls for greater gun control measures. “We need immediate action. We have heard all the rhetoric before. What we have not seen is leadership — not from the White House and not from Congress,” Bloomberg said. “That must end today.” Dan Burns and Chris Kaufman, “Connecticut Gun Rampage: 28 Dead, Including 20 Children,” Reuters, December 14, 2012.

6:44PM
US officials representing three different lettered agencies separately identify the suspected shooter as Adam Lanza, in contrast to what investigators said earlier in the day. No explanation is given regarding what prompted confusion among investigators. Lanza’s older brother, Ryan, was taken into custody for general questioning in Hoboken, New Jersey but was not labeled a suspect. “Children and Adults Gunned Down in School Massacre,” CNN, December 14, 2012.

7:13PM
Fox News presents “newly released police dispatch audio” of exchange between 911 dispatcher and Newtown Police and Connecticut State Police encountering two shooting suspects on school grounds. “I have reports that the teacher saw two shadows running past the building, past the gym which would be rear [inaudible].” “Yeah, we got him. He’s coming at me, down [inaudible].” “911 Call Dispatch Audio Reveals Police Response to Sandy Hook School Shooting,” Fox News, December 14, 2012, http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=16AfZXH33eQ

[Night]
Police recover long gun from automobile in Sandy Hook parking lot. “Police Find Long Gun in Trunk of Car in Sandy Hook Parking Lot, Newtown Connecticut,” NBC News, December 14, 2012.

n.t.
CBS correspondent notes how police have a second shooting suspect in custody who they are interrogating. “Well, they have an individual in custody, who they’re talking to. I am told they’re looking into the person as possibly a second shooter. Now that changes the dynamics here a little bit which goes from–if in fact this turns out to be confirmed–it goes from a lone gunman scenario where somebody has this argument with society and wants to take revenge with the most defenseless people in society to a team of individuals who’ve gotten together and conspired to do something like this.” “School Shooting: Possible Second Gunman in Custody,” CBS News Online, December 14, 2012.

n.t.
The Associated Press interviews an unidentified Sandy Hook Elementary student who describes seeing a shooting suspect prone on the ground in the school’s parking lot. Unidentified student: “And then the police like were knocking on the door, and they’re like, ‘We’re evacuating people! We’re evacuating people!’ So we ran out. There’s police about at every door. They’re leading us, ‘Down this way. Down this way. Quick! Quick! Come on!’ Then we ran down to the firehouse. There’s a man pinned down to the ground with handcuffs on. And we thought that was the victim [sic]. We really didn’t get a good glance at him because there was a car blocking it. Plus we were running really quick.” “Raw: Student Describes Scene at School Shooting,” Associated Press, December 14, 2012.

7:05AM
State Police Lt. J. Paul Advance on ABC’s Good Morning America with George Stephanopoulos.

Vance: This is something that’s going to take a significant amount of time. From the onset we’ve had teams looking into the background of [Adam Lanza], peeling back the layers of the onion, so to speak. We have many, many questions that we need to ask–that we need to explore.
Stephanopoulos: Three guns found on site?
Vance: We haven’t discussed that as of yet, but, uh, in excess of three guns.
Stephanopoulos: More than three guns. And we know also that the guns match those of his mother may have had. Have you been able to put that together yet?”
Vance: We’re–we’re–I don’t have that information specifically—
Stephanopoulos: Do you know if they were obtained legally?
Vance: Again, that’s something we would also have to explore during the investigation.

ABC News, “Tragedy at Sandy Hook Elementary School,” Good Morning America, December 15, 2012.

8:40AM
Sandy Hook resident Gene Rosen comes forth with story that he encountered six first grade children from Sandy Hook Elementary in his front lawn while feeding his cats. “I thought they were practicing for a play or Cub Scouts, and I went and approached them and it became clear that they were so distressed,” Rosen told CBS News. “And I took them into my house, and they were crying and talking, and I got them into my house, and they were crying and talking [sic], and I got them some stuffed animals.” “Neighbor Found Terrified Children on Front Lawn after School Massacre,” CBS New York, December 15, 2012.

3:45PM
MSNBC: “Connecticut Chief Medical Examiner H. Wayne Carver provides an update to the media after he and his team examined the victims’ bodies at Sandy Hook Elementary School in Newtown following Friday’s shootings.” In this exchange Carver and State Police drastically change the story on what weapons were used in the shooting, contending that the Bushmaster 223 was the sole weapon Lanza wielded. Carver exhibits an amazing degree of deferral to law enforcement and overall lack of knowledge about the postmortem operation he has just presided over. For example, a reporter asks, “Were [the students] sitting at their desks or were they running away when this happened?” Carver responds, “I’ll let the guys who–the scene guys talk–address that issue. I, uh, obviously I was at the scene. Obviously I’m very experienced in that. But there are people who are, uh, the number one professionals in that. I’ll let them–let that [voice trails off].” Shortly thereafter another reporter asks, “How many boys and how many girls [were killed]?” Carver shakes his head slowly, “I don’t know.” “Medical Examiner: Rifle Primary Weapon Used in Shootings,” MSNBC, December 15, 2012.

4:32PM
List of Sandy Hook Elementary victims is released. “Police Release Names of Newtown School Shooting Victims,” Hartford Courant, December 15, 2012,.

8:55PM
Federal authorities confirm there is no record of Adam Lanza using local Newtown shooting range. Michael Isikoff and Hannah Rappleye, “Mom of Suspected Shooter-First to Die–Was Avid Gun Enthusiast, Friend Says,” NBC News, December 15, 2012.

8:55PM
Federal officials claim Lanza took three weapons to Sandy Hook Elementary, a Glock and Sig Sauer, and a Bushmaster .223-caliber semiautomatic assault-style rifle. Authorities remain unclear on whether all guns were used in the attack. Michael Isikoff and Hannah Rappleye, “Mom of Suspected Shooter-First to Die–Was Avid Gun Enthusiast, Friend Says,” NBC News, December 15, 2012.

9:15PM
“An official with knowledge of the investigation” informs the Associated Press that three weapons were found inside Sandy Hook Elementary on or near Adam Lanza’s body–a Bushmaster .223-caliber rifle, a Glock 10mm pistol, and a Sig Sauer 9mm pistol. “Three other guns have also been recovered, but it was not clear where they were found, the official told AP. They were a Henry repeating rifle, an Enfield rifle and a shotgun.” Matt Appuzo and Pete Yost, “Connecticut Shooter Adam Lanza’s Guns Were Registered to Mother Nancy Lanza: Official,” Associated Press/Huffington Post, December 15, 2012.

11:31PM
Adam Lanza’s aunt Marsha Lanza describes Nancy Lanza as “meticulous” and “self-reliant,” pointing out that she kept three guns in the home “for self-defense.” “She would never leave the guns out,” Marsha Lanza asserts. Josh Kovner and Edmund H. Mahoney, “Adam Lanza: A ‘Quiet, Odd’ Loner Living on the Fringes,” Hartford Courant, December 15, 2012.

11:31PM
Law enforcement officials state the murder weapon was one of three guns owned by Nancy Lanza:  a semiautomatic rifle or two semiautomatic pistols. Josh Kovner and Edmund H. Mahoney, “Adam Lanza: A ‘Quiet, Odd’ Loner Living on the Fringes,” Hartford Courant, December 15, 2012.

11:31PM
Investigators believe Adam Lanza’s behavior was consistent with Asperger’s syndrome, a disorder within “the autism spectrum … marked by difficulty with social interaction. Many with Asperger’s are otherwise high-functioning people. There is no pre-disposition toward violence, experts said.” Josh Kovner and Edmund H. Mahoney, “Adam Lanza: A ‘Quiet, Odd’ Loner Living on the Fringes,” Hartford Courant, December 15, 2012.

11:44PM
Law enforcement authorities provide press with detailed information on event which becomes bedrock “official” storyline that Adam Lanza murdered 20 children and 6 adults at Sandy Hook Elementary School. After shooting his mother twice in the head while she lie in bed Lanza proceeded to Sandy Hook Elementary where he “fired a half-dozen thunderous rounds from a semiautomatic rifle to open a hole big enough to step through in one of the school’s glass doors.” He entered the school and shot Principal Hochsprung and school psychologist Mary Scherlach who after hearing the “sounds of gunfire and shattering glass, bolted into a corridor from a conference room across the hall from the classrooms … The first classroom Lanza reached was teacher Kaitlin Roig’s. Alarmed by the gunfire, Roig hid her students in a bathroom and closed her classroom door. Lanza passed by Roig’s classroom in lieu of substitute teacher Lauren Rousseau’s, shooting all 14 children who investigators believe were huddled and clutching one another in fear, in addition to Rousseau and a special education teacher who happened to be in the room. Lanza next arrived at teacher Victoria Soto’s classroom, who is believed to have hidden her 6- and 7-year old students in a closet. When Lanza demanded to know where the children were, Soto tried to divert him to the other end of the school by saying that her students were in the auditorium. As six of Soto’s students attempted to flee Lanza shot them, Soto and another teacher in the room. Searching for survivors police found the remaining seven of Soto’s students still hiding in the closet. They told the police what had happened. The two teacher’s aides who were killed were Mary Anne Murphy and Rachel Davino. It was unclear which aide was in which room when they were killed. The first officer arriving at the school found Lanza’s body near the door of Soto’s classroom. The intense violence lasted about 10 minutes. Lanza fired at least three, 30-round magazines with deadly accuracy. Two of the people he shot survived. All of the victims were shot multiple times. ‘I did seven (autopsies) myself with three to 11 wounds apiece,’ Chief State Medical Examiner Dr. H. Wayne Carver III said Saturday. ‘Only two were shot at close range. I believe everybody was hit (by bullets) more than once.’” Edward H. Mahoney and Dave Altimari, “A Methodical Massacre, Horror and Heroics,” Hartford Courant, December 15, 2012.

6:44AM
“We too are asking why. We have cooperated fully with law enforcement and will continue to do so. Like so many of you, we are saddened, but struggling to make sense of what has transpired.”–Adam Lanza’s father Peter Lanza said in a statement. Jonathan Dienst, “Conn. Shooting Suspect Adam Lanza’s Father: ‘We Too Are Asking Why,’” NBC News, December 16, 2012.

10:30AM
On CBS’s Face the Nation Bob Orr remarked that at least two computers at the Lanza residence were “smashed to smithereens.” CBS correspondent and former FBI agent John Miller noted “that subpoenas have been issued for all of the shooter’s email accounts and his mother’s accounts, including all of the ‘sent’ mail and ‘received’ mail over a long period of time. Miller said that Lanza’s mother, Nancy, had battled with the school system and eventually took her son out of the schools and home-schooled him.” Christopher Keating, “Newtown Update: CBS Says Two Computers ‘Smashed to Smithereens’ In Lanza Home in Newtown; Subpoenas for All Emails of Mother and Shooter,” Capitol Watch, Courantblogs, December 16, 2012, n.t. [Such programs are typically taped the preceding Friday afternoon.-JT]

12:12PM
Connecticut State Police Lt. Paul Vance states Adam Lanza possessed “an extraordinary amount of weaponry … In addition to an assault-style rifle and at least two handguns, he also had a shotgun in reserve in the car he drove to the school.” Lance claims that when Lanza’s body was found he “still had ‘hundreds of rounds’ of ammunition in multiple magazines, after having already fired hundreds of rounds inside the school.” M. Alex Johnson, “Very Heavily Armed Gunman Shot Mother Multiple Times Before Killing 26 at Connecticut School, Police Say,” NBC News, December 16, 2012.

12:12PM
Details emerge on Adam Lanza enrolling at Western Connecticut State University in 2008 at age 16. Lanza successfully completed six courses “including website production, data modeling, Philosophy 101 and ethical theory – and compiled a solid 3.26 grade-point average.” University officials claim Lanza presented no disciplinary concerns.  M. Alex Johnson, “Very Heavily Armed Gunman Shot Mother Multiple Times Before Killing 26 at Connecticut School, Police Say,” NBC News, December 16, 2012.

[Afternoon]
President Obama travels to Newtown to address grieving community and repeatedly allude to gun control legislation in an 18 minute speech. “We’re not doing enough. And we will have to change. Since I’ve been president, this is the fourth time we have come together to comfort a grieving community torn apart by mass shootings, [the] fourth time we’ve hugged survivors, the fourth time we’ve consoled the families of victims … Are we really prepared to say that we’re powerless in the face of such carnage, that the politics are too hard? Are we prepared to say that such violence visited on our children year after year after year is somehow the price of our freedom?” Daniela Altimari, “We Must Change, President Tells Nation,” Hartford Courant, December 16, 2012, 11:16PM EST.

4:52PM
Alex Israel was in the same class at Newtown High School with Adam Lanza, who lived a few houses down from her. “You could definitely tell he was a genius,” Israel says. “He was really quiet, he kept to himself.” Lanza’s former bus driver regarded Lanza as “’a nice kid, very polite’ like his brother.” Another former classmate remarked that Lanza “was just a kid” – not a troublemaker, not antisocial, not suggesting in any way that he could erupt like this.” Michael Martinez and David Ariosto, “Adam Lanza’s Family: Mom Liked Parlor Games, Guns; Dad, a Tax Exec, Remarried,” CNN.com, December 16, 2012.

8:06PM
Connecticut State Police Lieutenant J. Paul Vance tells the Huffington Post that Adam Lanza specifically used the Bushmaster .223 rifle to carry out all of the Sandy Hook murders. “Adam Lanza used a semiautomatic Bushmaster .223 rifle during his rampage through Sandy Hook Elementary School on Friday,” the Huffington Post reports, “firing dozens of high-velocity rounds as he killed 20 children and six adults … Lanza, 20, carried ‘many high-capacity clips’ for the lightweight military-style rifle, Lt. Paul Vance, a spokesman for the Connecticut State Police, told The Huffington Post in an email. Two handguns and a shotgun were also recovered at the scene. John Rudolf and Janet Ross, “School Shooter Adam Lanza Used Military-Style Bushmaster Rifle,” Huffington Post, December 16, 2012.

8:06PM
Senator Dianne Feinstein announces that she intends to introduce legislation reauthorizing a federal assault weapons ban originally passed in the early 1990s during the Clinton administration that was allowed to lapse in 2004. John Rudolf and Janet Ross, “School Shooter Adam Lanza Used Military-Style Bushmaster Rifle,” Huffington Post, December 16, 2012.

Health science and investigative writer Mike Adams observes that much like the Tucson Arizona, Aurora Colorado, and Wisconsin Sikh temple shootings, mass media are scrubbing their coverage and doctoring the storyline to obscure the fact that there were additional suspects and probable shooters at the crime scene. Mike Adams, “Newtown School Shooting Already Being Changed by the Media to Eliminate Eyewitness Reports of a Second Shooter,” Natural News, December 16, 2012, n.t.

12:51PM
Divorce records reveal the parents of Adam Lanza had joint custody of their son and that Lanza’s father paid yearly alimony totaling $240,000 in 2010, $265,000 in 2011 and $289,800 in 2012. Nancy and Peter Lanza’s divorce cited irreconcilable and was made final in September 2009. The divorce decree designated Adam Lanza’s primary residence with his mother in the Yogananda Street address which Peter Lanza quitclaimed to Nancy. Peter was designated as solely responsible for the cost of college for Adam and brother Ryan and for buying Adam a car. Nancy Lanza seldom discussed domestic affairs with friends. She was otherwise regarded as very open and generous. Allaine Griffith, “After Divorce, Lanzas Had Joint Custody of Adam,” Hartford Courant, December 17, 2012.

12:51PM
A spokeswoman for the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms and Explosives is uncertain whether Nancy Lanza brought her son to the range or whether he ever fired a weapon there. Allaine Griffith, “After Divorce, Lanzas Had Joint Custody of Adam,” Hartford Courant, December 17, 2012.

1:09PM
Sandy Hook Elementary nurse Sally Cox tells ABC of her encounter with gunman on the morning of December 14 as she crouched underneath her desk. “I could see him from the knees down, 20 feet away, his boots were facing my desk,” Cox said in an interview on Good Morning America. “It was seconds… and then he turned and walked out and I heard the door close.” The 60-year-old staff member then heard “loud popping noises” outside the infirmary. Cox was joined by a school secretary and together they dialed 911 before hiding in a supply closet. Lauren Effron, “Sandy Hook School Nurse Hid From Shooter, ‘His Boots Were Facing My Desk,’” ABC News, December 17, 2012.

1:15PM
Funerals for massacre victims begin in Newtown, with first being for 6 year old Sandy Hook first-grader Jack Pinto. “There are many ways to measure what was lost Friday morning at Sandy Hook,” the Washington Post observes, “a school shooting that has spurred a national debate about public safety and a speech by the president. But no accounting of the damage was as searing as the one that began Monday, when parents stepped behind lecterns and spoke about the children they would miss.” Eli Saslow and Steve Vogel, “Funerals for Newtown Massacre Victims Begin,” Washington Post, December 17, 2012.

1:26PM
Two witnesses in Sandy Hook school shooting are unidentified adults. “There are two adults that were injured in the facility–in the school–and suffered gunshot wounds and are recovering,” Connecticut State Police Lieutenant J. Paul Vance stated. “Our investigators will in fact speak with them when it’s medically appropriate, and certainly they will shed a great deal of light on the facts and circumstances of this tragic investigation that we’re undertaking.” [Vance’s emphasis] “Key Witnesses in Connecticut School Shooting are Survivors,” Hartford Courant, December 17, 2012.

6:39PM
New York City Mayor Michael Bloomberg unveils “Demand a Plan” campaign, sponsored by the Mayors Against Illegal Guns bipartisan coalition that requests Congress and President Obama move immediately on gun control measures. Bloomberg calls Washington’s inability to act a “stain on our nation’s commitment to protect our children.” Carlo Delaverson, “NYC Mayor Launches Campaign Against Gun Violence,” NBC News, December 17, 2012.

6:00PM
Infowars reporter Rob Dew utilizes overlooked excerpts from CBS and Associated Press coverage of the massacre to explain how there were additional shooter suspects apprehended by law enforcement on the morning of December 14 that have been left unaccounted for and since dropped from public view. Rob Dew, “Sandy Hook 2nd Shooter Coverup,” Infowars Nightly News, December 18, 2012.

1:07PM
Connecticut Medical Examiner H. Wayne Carver II says he will work with a University of Connecticut geneticist to determine what prompted Adam Lanza to act. “I’m exploring with the department of genetics what might be possible, if anything is possible [sic],” Carver says. “Is there any identifiable disease associated with this behavior?” David Owens, “Obama Calls for New Proposals for Gun Control in Wake of Newtown Massacre,” Hartford Courant, December 19, 2012.

11:16PM
Hundreds attend wake of Sandy Hook Principal Dawn Hochsprung, including U.S. Secretary of Education Arne Duncan, US Senator Richard Blumenthal and US Senator-elect Chris Murphy. Matthew Kauffman, “Communities Say Farewell to Four More Victims of Newtown Shootings,” Hartford Courant, December 19, 2012.

1:42PM
US Attorney General Eric Holder makes unannounced visit to Newtown to meet with Sandy Hook first responders following a meeting in Washington with Vice President Joe Biden, presumably to discuss forthcoming gun control legislation. “Holder to Meet with First Responders in Newtown,” Frederic J. Frommer, Associated Press/Hartford Courant, December 20, 2012.

n.t.
Further analysis by alternative news media points to additional Sandy Hook shooting suspects overlooked by corporate media. Niall Bradley, “Sandy Hook Massacre: Official Story Spins Out of Control,” Veterans Today, December 20, 2012; James F. Tracy, “The Newtown School Tragedy: More Than One Gunman?” Global Research, December 20, 2012.

7:20PM
Witness to shooting Becky Virgalla interviewed by Connecticut news media. [Video of interview at Hartford Courant website has since been taken down.] “Witness to the Sandy Hook Massacre,” Hartford Courant, December 26, 2012.

Attorney Irv Pinsky asks State of Connecticut Claims Commissioner J. Paul Vance Jr. for permission to file $100 million dollar lawsuit on behalf of unnamed 6-year-old Sandy Hook student for negligence and trauma suffered after hearing screaming, cursing, and gunfire over school’s intercom system. As a result, the “child has sustained emotional and psychological trauma and injury, the nature and extent of which are yet to be determined,” the proposed claim asserts. Pinsky’s claim also alleges “that the state Board of Education, Department of Education and Education Commissioner had failed to take appropriate steps to protect children from ‘foreseeable harm.’” Mary Ellen Godin, “Claim Seeks $100 Million for Child Survivor of Connecticut School Shooting,” Reuters, December 28, 2012.

Adam Lanza’s body reportedly turned over by Connecticut Medical Examiner to father Peter Lanza “sometime last week.” “Father Claims Adam Lanza’s Body,” Hartford Courant, December 31, 2012, 3:38PM.

3:12PM
Connecticut Attorney General says $100 million claim against state on behalf of 6 year old Sandy Hook student is “misguided,” and maintains that “a public policy response by the U.S. Congress and the Connecticut state legislature would be ‘more appropriate’ than legal action.” Edith Honan, “Connecticut Attorney General Says Newtown Legal Claim Misguided,” Reuters/Hartford Courant, December 31, 2012.

2013

11:49AM
State Attorney General George Jepsen says lawsuit brought against state lacks a “valid basis.” According to a report Jepsen said “the claims commissioner’s office was not the appropriate venue for a discussion about the shooting.” Amanda Falcone, Request to Sue State for Newtown Shooting Has No Basis, Attorney General Says,” Hartford Courant, January 1, 2013.

2:29PM
New Haven attorney Irving Pinsky withdraws claim on behalf of traumatized Sandy Hook student after receiving new evidence. “If the state were liable in this instance, where would the state’s liability ever end?” State Attorney General George Jepsen said. Brian Dowling and Hilda Munoz, “Attorney Withdrawing Request to Sue State in Sandy Hook Shootings,” Hartford Courant, January 1, 2013.

9:10PM
Jean Henry, a processing technician for the Connecticut Office of the Chief Medical Examiner is placed on a paid leave pending an investigation of an incident on December 16 where she permitted her husband, an unauthorized employee, to view the body of alleged mass killer Adam Lanza. Jon Lender and Dave Altimari, “State Worker Placed on Leave After Showing Husband Adam Lanza’s Body,” Hartford Courant, January 2, 2013.

[Morning]
Sandy Hook students return to classes 7 miles south of Newtown at Chalk Hill School in Monroe Connecticut. The school was closed about two years ago and recently cleaned and painted to accommodate students. Amanda Falcone, “Sandy Hook Students Back in Class,” Hartford Courant, 5:18PM EST, January 3, 2013.

6:18PM
Connecticut State Attorney’s Office and State Police refuse to give timeline for Sandy Hook shooting investigation. “It cannot be stated too often how invaluable and necessary the work of the United States Attorney’s Office, the Federal Bureau of Investigation, the United States Marshals Service, the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms and Explosives and other federal agencies was and is to this investigation,” State Attorney General Stephen J. Sedensky III said. Christine Dempsey, “No Timeline for Newtown Shooting Probe,” Hartford Courant, January 3, 2013.

New York City Mayor Michael Bloomberg meets privately in his office with former Arizona Congresswoman Gabrielle Giffords, who was almost fatally shot at a constituent meeting in Tucson in January 2011. The sit-down was not listed on Bloomberg’s public schedule and a Bloomberg aide refused to state what was discussed. Holly Bailey, “Bloomberg Meets with Gabrielle Giffords on Gun Control,” Yahoo News, January 3, 2013, n.t.

3:40AM
Former Arizona Congresswoman Gabrielle Giffords visits Newtown families who lost loved ones in the Sandy Hook shooting. John Christoffersen, “Wounded ex-Rep Giffords Meets with Conn. Families,” Associated Press/Yahoo News, January 5.

To be continued.

European Court orders damages for CIA torture victim

0

WSWS |

In mid-December 2012, the European Court of Human Rights (ECHR) in Strasbourg awarded damages of €60,000 to Khaled El-Masri, a German citizen of Lebanese origin. The judges accepted that Macedonian security services had illegally seized El-Masri at the end of 2003, subjected him to abuse and finally handed him over to agents from the CIA.

The CIA then transported El-Masri to a secret prison in Afghanistan, where he was tortured and mistreated for months. The court saw this as a serious violation of the European Convention on Human Rights, to which the Republic of Macedonia has acceded.

Although only representatives of the Macedonian government were accused, the verdict has broader significance. For the first time the brutal intrigues of the US government and its European accomplices in the so-called “war on terror” have been condemned by an international court for breaching international laws.

Previously, all El-Masri’s attempts to find justice in Macedonia, Germany and the US had been systematically thwarted. Investigations, if they were conducted at all, were carried out reluctantly and half-heartedly; information was withheld by the investigating authorities citing “state secrecy”.

The ECHR regarded all aspects of El-Masri’s evidence as credible and supported by international investigations. His complaint that the measures taken against him, his handing over to CIA agents and the hindering of his attempts to seek legal redress breached the central articles of the European Convention on Human Rights was sustained in every point by the court.

Khaled El-Masri was arrested by security forces on his entry to Macedonia on December 31 2003, and then taken to a hotel in Skopje, where he was held for 23 days without access to the outside world and under constant surveillance by secret service agents. Although he was not physically mistreated by the Macedonian secret service agents, they threatened to shoot him if he attempted to leave the hotel.

On January 23, 2004, El-Masri was handcuffed and blindfolded, and taken to Skopje airport where he was handed over to masked CIA agents and abused physically and sexually. He was then forcibly taken onto a plane, thrown to the floor, chained and sedated.

Since this happened in the presence of Macedonian security officials the Strasbourg court judged that the Macedonian authorities were jointly responsible for the torture El-Masri suffered and guilty of breaching Article 3 of the European Convention, which prohibits torture as inhuman and degrading treatment.

Also, according to the judges, the Macedonian security forces were aware that the CIA plane would transport El-Masri to Afghanistan, since they had access to the flight plans. It must therefore have been clear to them that El-Masri would face further torture, they said.

In Afghanistan, El-Masri was taken to the infamous “Saltpit” prison, where he was further mistreated and questioned for extended periods. In May 2004, after four agonizing months, he was transported to Albania and then to Germany. The CIA had finally come to the conclusion that El-Masri was completely innocent and had been falsely detained.

The court in Strasbourg made the Macedonian government jointly responsible for the torture he suffered in Afghanistan. El-Masri was arrested on Macedonian territory, although there was neither an arrest warrant nor a valid extradition request from the US government. That El-Masri was detained in a hotel and his arrest was not logged was regarded by the court as additional proof of the illegality of the actions of the Macedonian authorities.

His illegal detention was regarded by the judges as a breach of the right to freedom and security of the person (Article 5) and–on the grounds of the illegitimacy of the measures taken against El-Masri–also as an illegal intervention into private and family life (Article 8).

The fact the charges against persons unknown within the Macedonian security services filed by El-Masri were not pursued and eventually rejected was evaluated by the judges in Strasbourg as the hindering of a valid legal complaint, i.e., a breach of Article 13.

The Macedonian government initially claimed that El-Masri’s papers had merely been checked in Macedonia on the suspicion they may be counterfeit. Later, he was said to have travelled to Kosovo.

The Strasbourg court possessed a written statement by the then Macedonian Interior Minister Hari Kostov, who confirmed that El-Masri was arrested by the Macedonian security authorities, held in Skopje without contact to the outside world under the supervision of intelligence officials and was later handed over to a CIA team.

As well as El-Masri’s evidence, the judges also based their verdict on the statement by the former Macedonian interior minister and primarily on inquiries conducted by Dick Marty, the special investigator of the European Council. Marty had produced detailed reports in 2006 and 2007 showing the involvement of various European states in the crimes organised by the CIA under the guise of the “war on terror”. The case of Khaled El-Masri was characterised as a “documented transfer” as his transportation was well researched.

Nevertheless, El-Masri had been previously frustrated by all the courts in which he sought justice. Immediately following his return to Germany, El-Masri contacted a lawyer and sought to initiate a series of legal cases.

In the US, a suit filed by the American Civil Liberties Union (ACLU) against CIA Director George Tenet (1997-2004) and other CIA agents was rejected by the courts in December 2005. This was then upheld by the Supreme Court in October 2007, which ruled that the “state interest in protecting state secrets” outweighed “the individual claim for justice by El-Masri”.

In December 2008, the state prosecutor’s office in Skopje rejected El-Masri’s legal complaint against unknown Macedonian judicial officials.

The behaviour of German law enforcement authorities was particularly disgraceful. Despite the involvement of the Munich state attorney’s office in the case and a parliamentary committee of inquiry, as well as a mountain of evidence, no charges have been filed in Germany to the present.

The then-German Interior Minister Otto Schily (Social Democratic Party, SPD), who was informed about the case by the American ambassador Dan Coats, has remained silent to the present day. In 2005, Justice Minister Brigitte Zypries (SPD) said that “everything constitutionally possible was done to resolve the case”. Before that, Federal Prosecutor Kay Nehm had rejected that the case fell within the jurisdiction of the attorney general on the legally dubious grounds the El-Masri case was not one of “political abduction”.

But even that was not enough and the Munich public prosecutor had since effectively branded El-Masri as a criminal, ordering his surveillance. The phones of his lawyer Manfred Gnjidic were tapped for months, breaching the constitutionally enshrined lawyer-client privilege.

The Munich state attorney’s office, which had received an official legal complaint from El-Masri in 2004, finally issued an arrest warrant against 13 CIA agents at the beginning of 2007. But this was never served, since the federal government refused to lodge an extradition request with the American authorities. Berlin wanted to avoid straining relations with Washington under all circumstances, and therefore thwarted all El-Masri’s attempts to seek justice.

The diplomatic cables from the US embassy in Berlin in January/February 2007, published by WikiLeaks, show the compliance of the German authorities in covering up the crimes against El-Masri. For example, the then-deputy US ambassador John Koenig warned the German government that it should carefully weigh up the consequences to bilateral relations when issuing international arrest warrants.

In December 2010, a Cologne court finally dismissed El-Masri’s lawsuit against the federal government that had sought to enforce the extradition warrants against the CIA agents. As far as the German judiciary was concerned, the case was now at an end.

El-Masri also met a wall of silence at the parliamentary committee of inquiry, which until 2009 had been investigating the involvement of the German Secret Service in the Iraq war and German participation in the crimes of the US secret service.

Although the committee’s final report came to the conclusion that El-Masri’s presentation of the case was credible, it did not accept there had been any German involvement. In fact, the committee had been denied access to many files, on the grounds it might damage “state secrets”. Thus evidence of the involvement of German security forces in the mistreatment and transportation of El-Masri could not be pursued.

Nevertheless, members of the Free Democratic Party (FDP), then in opposition, found that the German government shared responsibility. Hellmut Königshaus (FDP) said in 2007 about the El-Masri case: “It is unacceptable that the federal government prevents the prosecution of serious crimes against a German citizen only for reasons of political expediency.”

In the final report, the FDP demanded that the government provide access to all files and information to the investigating authorities, and “support the German victims of the practice of rendition receiving damages from the culprits.”

But no sooner had the FDP joined the Merkel government in 2009, taking over the justice ministry, than their previous words proved to be just lip service. The minister responsible, Sabine Leutheusser-Schnarrenberger (FDP), has not lifted a finger to ensure that the wrongs done to Khaled El-Masri are acknowledged as such in a court of law.

While the German government has publicly condemned the illegal abductions, in practice it tolerated them or even collaborated with Washington. With the Strasbourg judgement, the systematic violation of basic democratic rights by the United States and its European allies has finally been acknowledged for the first time in a court of law.

Distributed by RINF Alternative News

US food stamps hits record of $80.4 bn

0
The US government has spent a record USD 80.4 billion on food stamps, the Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program (SNAP) that helps Americans who cannot afford to buy food.

According to the US Department of the Treasury, the federal government has paid out USD 80,401,000,000 for food stamps during fiscal year (FY) of 2012 (from October 1, 2011 to September 30, 2012), increasing the amount by USD 2.7 billion from previous year.

Since President Barack Obama took office, the amount paid out by the SNAP has increased yearly. In FY 2009, it was reported to be at USD 55.6 billion, meaning the amount has increased by USD 24.8 billion during the past three years until 2012.

Food stamps are government vouchers, restricting eligible consumers to buy only food at grocery stores and no hot meals.

The number of Americans using food stamps hit a record high in September of 2012 when 47.7 million received help from the SNAP.

Most often, the Americans living on food stamps live on about USD 4 a day to eat. That is a dollar and forty cents for each meal.

Official figures from September 2012 showed that more than 46 million Americans, 15 percent of the US population, are living in poverty, making it the highest rate during the past 40 years.

Distributed via RINF Alternative News

The Syria Endgame: Strategic Stage in the Pentagon’s Covert War on Iran

0

Iran and Syria flags combined

Since the kindling of the conflict inside Syria in 2011, it was recognized, by friend and foe alike, that the events in that country were tied to a game plan that ultimately targets Iran, Syria’s number one ally. [1] De-linking Syria from Iran and unhinging the Resistance Bloc that Damascus and Tehran have formed has been one of the objectives of the foreign-supported anti-government militias inside Syria. Such a schism between Damascus and Tehran would change the Middle East’s strategic balance in favour of the US and Israel.

If this cannot be accomplished, however, then crippling Syria to effectively prevent it from providing Iran any form of diplomatic, political, economic, and military support in the face of common threats has been a primary objective. Preventing any continued cooperation between the two republics has been a strategic goal. This includes preventing the Iran-Iraq-Syria energy terminal from being built and ending the military pact between the two partners.

All Options are Aimed at Neutralizing Syria

Regime change in Damascus is not the only or main way for the US and its allies to prevent Syria from standing with Iran. Destabilizing Syria and neutralizing it as a failed and divided state is the key. Sectarian fighting is not a haphazard outcome of the instability in Syria, but an assisted project that the US and its allies have steadily fomented with a clear intent to balkanize the Syrian Arab Republic. Regionally, Israel above all other states has a major stake in securing this outcome. The Israelis actually have several publicly available documents, including the Yinon Plan, which outline that the destruction of Syria into a series of smaller sectarian states is one of their strategic objectives. So do American military planners.

Like Iraq next door, Syria does not need to be formally divided. For all intents and purposes, the country can be divided like Lebanon was alongside various fiefdoms and stretches of territory controlled by different groups during the Lebanese Civil War. The goal is to disqualify Syria as an external player.

Since 2006 and the Israeli defeat in Lebanon in that year there was renewed focus on the strategic alliance between Iran and Syria. Both countries have been very resilient in the face of US designs in their region. Together both have been key players for influencing events in the Middle East, from the Eastern Mediterranean to the Persian Gulf. Their strategic alliance has undoubtedly played an important role in shaping the geo-political landscape in the Middle East. Although critics of Damascus say it has done very little in regard to substantial action against the Israelis, the Syrians have been the partners within this alliance that have carried the greatest weight in regards to facing Israel; it has been through Syria that Hezbollah and the Palestinians have been provided havens, logistics, and their initial strategic depth against Israel.

From the beginning the foreign-supported external opposition leaders made their foreign policy clear, which can strongly be argued was a reflection of the interests they served. The anti-government forces and their leaders even declared that they will realign Syria against Iran; in doing so they used sectarian language about returning to their “natural orbit with the Sunni Arabs.” This is a move that is clearly in favour of the US and Israel alike. Breaking the axis between Damascus and Tehran has also been a major goal of Saudi Arabia, Jordan, and the Arab petro-sheikhdoms since the 1980s as part of a design to isolate Iran during the Iraq-Iran War. [2] Moreover, the sectarian language being used is part of a construct; it is not a reflection of reality, but a reflection of Orientalist conjecture and desires that falsely stipulate that Muslims who perceive themselves as being Shia or Sunni are inherently at odds with one another as enemies.

Among the prostrating Syrian opposition leaders who would execute the strategic goals of the US has been Burhan Ghalioun, the former president of the Istanbul-based and foreign-sponsored Syrian National Council, who told the Wall Street Journal in 2011 that Damascus would end its strategic alliance with Iran and end its support for Hezbollah and the Palestinians as soon as anti-government forces took over Syria. [3] These foreign-sponsored opposition figures have also served to validate, in one way or another, the broader narratives that claim Sunnis and Shiites hate one another. In synchronization the mainstream media in the countries working for regime change in Damascus, such as the US and France, have consistently advertized that the regime in Syria is an Alawite regime that is allied to Iran, because the Alawites are an offshoot of Shiism. This too is untrue, because Syria and Iran do not share a common ideology; both countries are aligned, because of a common threat and shared political and strategic objectives. Nor is Syria run by an Alawite regime; the government’s composure reflects Syrian society’s ethnic and religious diversity.

Israel’s Stake in Syria

Syria is all about Iran for Israel. As if Tel Aviv has nothing to do whatsoever with the events inside Syria, Israeli commentators and analysts are now publicly insisting that Israel needs to deal with Iran by intervening inside Syria. Israel’s involvement in Syria, alongside the US and NATO, crystallized in 2012. It was clear that Israel was working in a conglomerate comprised of the US, Britain, France, Turkey, NATO, Saudi Arabia, Qatar, Jordan, Lebanon’s minority March 14 Alliance, and the NATO-supported usurpers that have taken over and wrecked the Libyan Arab Jamahiriya.  

Although it should be read with caution, it is worth noting the release of the hacked correspondence of Strategic Forecast Incorporated’s Reva Bhalla to her boss, George Friedman, about a December 2011 meeting in the Pentagon between herself (representing Stratfor), US, French, and British officials about Syria. [4] The Stratfor correspondence claimed that the US and its allies had sent in their military special forces to destabilize Syria in 2011 and that there actually were not many Syrian anti-government forces on the ground or, as Bhalla writes, “there isn’t much of a Free Syrian Army to train.” [5] The Daily Star, which is owned by Lebanon’s Hariri family which has been involved in the regime change operations against Syria, soon after reported that thirteen undercover French officers were caught by the Syrians conducting operations inside Homs. [6] Instead of a categorical no to the information about the captured French officers, the French Foreign Ministry’s response to the public was that it could not confirm anything, which can be analyzed as an omission of guilt. [7]

Days earlier, Hezbollah’s Al-Manar station revealed that Israeli-made weapons and supplies, ranging from grenades and night binoculars to communication devices, were captured alongside Qatari agents inside the insurgent stronghold of Baba Amr in Homs towards the end of April and start of March. [8] An unnamed US official would later confirm in July 2012 that the Mossad was working alongside the CIA in Syria. [9] Just a month earlier, in June, the Israeli government began publicly demanding that a military intervention be launched into Syria, presumably by the US and the conglomerate of governments working with Israel to destabilize Syria. [10]

The Israeli media has even begun to casually report that Israeli citizens, albeit one has been identified as an Israeli Arab (meaning a Palestinian with Israeli citizenship), have entered Syria to fight against the Syrian Army. [11] Normally any Israelis, specifically those that are non-Jewish Arabs, which enter Lebanon or/and Syria are condemned or prosecuted by Israeli authorities and Israeli news reports focus on this aspect of the story. Yet, it has not been so in this case. It should also be mentioned that the Palestinian opponents of Israel living inside Syria are also being targeted, just as the Palestinians living in Iraq were targeted after the US and UK invaded in 2003.

Syria and the Objective of Making Iran Stand Alone

The journalist Rafael D. Frankel wrote a revealing article for the Washington Quarterly that illustrates what US policymakers and their partners think about in Syria. In his article Frankel argued that because of the so-called Arab Spring that an attack on Iran by the US and Israel would no longer trigger a coordinated regional response from Iran and its allies. [12] Frankel argued that because of the events inside Syria an opportunity has been created for the US and Israel to attack Iran without igniting a regional war that would involve Syria, Hezbollah, and Hamas. [13]

Frankel’s line of thinking was not lost on circles in either NATO or Israel. In reality his line of thinking springs forth from the views and plans of these very circles. As a psychological enforcement of their ideas, his text actually found its way to NATO Headquarters in Brussels in 2012 for reading material. While the latter, Israel, released its own intelligence report about the subject.

According to the Israeli newspaper Maariv, the intelligence report by Israel’s Ministry of Foreign Affairs has concluded that Syria and Hezbollah will no longer be able to open a second front against Israel should it go to war with Iran. [14] During the Israeli report’s release, one senior Israeli official was quoted as saying “Iran’s ability to harm Israel in response to an attack on our part declined dramatically.”[15]

Many news wires, papers, and writers with hostile positions towards both Syria and Iran, such as The Daily Telegraph, immediately replicated the Israeli report’s findings about Iran and its regional allies. Two of the first people to reproduce the findings of the Israel report, Robert Tait (writing from the Gaza Strip) and Damien McElroy (who was expelled from Libya in 2011 by that country’s authorities during the war with NATO), summarize how significant the findings of the report are by effectively outlining how Iran’s key allies in the Levant have all been neutralized. [16]

The Israeli report has triumphantly declared that Syria has turned within and is too busy to join ranks with its strategic ally Iran against Tel Aviv in a future war. [17] The ramifications of the Syrian crisis have also placed Iran’s Lebanese allies, particularly Hezbollah, in an unsteady position where their supply lines are under threat and they have been politically damaged through their support of Damascus. If anyone in Lebanon should side with Iran in a future war the Israelis have said that they will invade through massive military operations on the ground. [18]

The new Egyptian government’s role in aiding US objectives under President Morsi also becomes clear with what the Israeli report says about his supportive role: “The foreign ministry report also predicted that Egypt would stop Hamas, the Palestinian Islamist movement, from helping Iran by launching rocket attacks from the Gaza Strip.” [19] This adds credence to the view that Morsi was allowed by the US and Israel to broker a peace between the Gaza Strip and Tel Aviv, which would prevent the Palestinians there from standing with Iran during a war. In other words the Egyptian truce was setup to bind the hands of Hamas. The recent announcements about moves by Morsi’s government to engage Hezbollah politically can also be scrutinized as an extension of the same strategy applied in Gaza, but in this case for unbinding Iran from its Lebanese allies. [20]

There is also clamouring for steps to be taken to de-link Hezbollah, and by extension Iran, from its Christian allies in Lebanon. The German Marshall Fund showcased a text essentially saying that the Lebanese Christians that are allies to Hezbollah, Syria, and Iran need to be presented with an alternative political narrative to replace the one where they believe that Iran will ultimately run the Middle East as a great power. [21] This too is tied to further eroding Iran’s alliance system.

Mission Accomplished?

The conflict in Syria is not merely an Israeli affair. The slow bleeding of Syria has other interested parties that want to smash the country and its society into pieces. The US is foremost among these interested parties, followed by the Arab dictators of the petro-sheikhdoms. NATO has also always been covertly involved.

NATO’s involvement in Syria is part of the US strategy of using the military alliance to dominate the Middle East. This is why it was decided to establish a component of the missile shield in Turkey. This is also the reason that Patriot missiles are being deployed to the Turkish border with Syria. The Istanbul Cooperation Initiative (ICI) and NATO’s Mediterranean Dialogue are components of these plans too. Additionally, Turkey has ended its veto against the further integration of Israel into NATO. [22]

NATO has been reorienting itself towards asymmetrical warfare and greater emphasis is now being put on intelligence operations. NATO strategists have increasingly been studying the Kurds, Iraq, Hezbollah, Syria, Iran, and the Palestinians. In the scenario of an all-out war, NATO has been preparing itself for overt military roles in both Syria and Iran.

Iraq is being destabilized further too. While Iran’s allies in Damascus have been weighed down, its allies in Baghdad have not. After Syria, the same conglomerate of countries working against Damascus will turn their attention to Iraq. They have already started working to galvanize Iraq further on the basis of its sectarian and political fault lines. Turkey, Qatar, and Saudi Arabia are playing prominent roles in this objective. What is becoming manifest is that the differences between Shiite Muslims and Sunni Muslims that Washington has cultivated since the Anglo-American invasion of Iraq in 2003 are now been augmented by Kurdish sectarianism.

It appears that many in the Israeli political establishment now believe that they have succeeded in breaking the Resistance Bloc. Whether they are correct or incorrect is a matter of debate. Syria still stands; the Palestinian Islamic Jihad (which was by far the most active Palestinian group fighting Israel from Gaza in 2012) and other Palestinians will side with Iran even if Hamas will have its hands tied by Egypt; there are still Tehran’s allies in Iraq; and Syria is not the only supply line for Iran to arm its ally Hezbollah. What is also very clear is that the siege against Syria is a front in the covert multi-dimensional war against Iran. This alone should make people reconsider the statements of US officials and their allies about having concerns for the Syrian people merely on the basis of humanitarianism and democracy.

NOTES

[1] Mahdi Darius Nazemroaya, “Obama’s Secret Letter to Tehran: Is the War against Iran On Hold? ‘The Road to Tehran Goes through Damascus,’” Global Research, January 20, 2012.

[2] Jubin M. Goodarzi, Syria and Iran: Diplomatic Alliance and Power Politics in the Middle East (London, UK: I.B. Tauris, 2009), pp.217-228.

[3] Nour Malas and Jay Solomon, “Syria Would Cut Iran Military Tie, Opposition Head Says,” Wall Street Journal, December 2, 2011.

[4] WikiLeaks, “Re: INSIGHT — military intervention in Syria, post withdrawal status of forces,” October 19, 2012: <http://wikileaks.org/gifiles/docs/209688_re-insight-military-intervention-in-syria-post-withdrawal.html>.

[5] Ibid.

[6] Lauren Williams, “13 French officers being held in Syria,” The Daily Star, March 5, 2012.

[7] Ibid.

[8] Israa Al-Fass, “Mossad, Blackwater, CIA Led Operations in Homs,” trans. Sara Taha Moughnieh, Al-Manar, March 3, 2012.

[9] David Ignatius, “Looking for a Syrian endgame,” The Washington Post, July 18, 2012.

[10] Dan Williams, “Israel accuses Syria of genocide, urges intervention,” Andrew Heavens ed., Reuters, June 10, 2012.

[11] Hassan Shaalan, “Israeli fighting Assad ‘can’t go home,’” Yedioth Ahronoth, January 3, 2013.

[12] Rafael D. Frankel, “Keeping Hamas and Hezbollah Out of a War with Iran,” Washington Quarterly, vol. 35, no. 4 (Fall 2012): pp.53-65.

[13] Ibid.

[14] “Weakened Syria unlikely to join Iran in war against Israel: report,” The Daily Star, January 4, 2013.

[15] Ibid.

[16] Damien McElroy and Robert Tait, “Syria ‘would not join Iran in war against Israel,’” The Daily Telegraph, January 3, 2013.

[17] “Weakened Syria,” The Daily Star, op. cit.

[18] “Syria and Hezbollah won’t join the fight if Israel strikes Iran, top-level report predicts,” Times of Israel, January 3, 2013.

[19] McElroy and Tait, “Syria would not,” op. cit.

[20] Lauren Williams, “New Egypt warms up to Hezbollah: ambassador,” The Daily Star, December 29, 2011.

[21] Hassan Mneimneh, “Lebanon ― The Christians of Hezbollah: A Foray into a Disconnected Political Narrative,” The German Marshall Fund of the United States, November 16, 2012.

[22] Hilary Leila Krieger, “Israel to join NATO activities amidst Turkey tension,” Jerusalem Post, December 23, 2012; Jonathon Burch and Gulsen Solaker, “Turkey lifts objection to NATO cooperation with Israel,” Mark Heinrich ed., Reuters, December 24, 2012; “Turkey: Israel’s participation in NATO not related to Patriots,” Today’s Zaman, December 28, 2012.

Civil liberties are still the victim in the War on Terror

Source |

“No nation could reserve its freedom in the midst of continual warfare.” – James Madison, 1795

The 9/11 tragedy marked a sea change in the course of U.S. politics. Civil liberties/privacy concerns, although constitutionally guaranteed, were quickly swept aside by an overwhelming desire to enact revenge on the terrorists. Quickly deliberated and facing negligible opposition, the USA Patriot Act was passed 45 days after 9/11 in the name of national security. The law was never debated, never run through a judicial vetting, and never subject to amendments to soften the impact of the act on civil rights/citizen privacy. The Patriot Act radically changed the ground rules for government surveillance. Safeguards built into the system were disregarded. It became easier, without judicial oversight, to monitor phone and email communications, track activities of innocent Americans on the Internet, and track bank and reporting records. The Patriot Act became the benchmark for the ongoing attack on civil rights and individual privacy. That which is left unexamined eventually becomes invisible, whether it is civil liberties, the war in Afghanistan, unaccountability or Guantanamo.

The current administration has continued its goverance in the shadows just as the previous administration did. The previous administration, which introduced the U.S. to torture, rendition, black sites, cover-ups, unparalleled spin, scare tactics, and the curse of civilian contractors would then legalize their actions after the fact. The previous administration disclosed as little as it could about government activities; the current administration is doing the same thing. Some have suggested the drone program can be used to monitor conversations and activities within the U.S.

A drone is an unmanned aerial vehicle, or UAV, armed and remotely controlled from areas spread out over the globe. The program has been greatly expanded in scope and lethality in the last few years. Both the CIA and the armed forces run the drone programs. Drone strikes are conducted in Afghanistan, Pakistan, Somalia, Yemen and possibly other countries. The government response to drone strikes is always the same: all strikes are carefully considered, the targets represent a terrorist threat to the U.S, subjects are precisely targeted, and collateral damage is always limited. Why is there no outcry about killing men, women and children based on a suspicion that someone is a terrorist? In a democracy, a program like this with no congressional authorization should not go unchallenged. Where are the checks and balances?

Civil rights/privacy suffered another lethal blow on New Year’s Eve 2011. The president signed the National Defense Authorization Act, or NDAA, which included provisions that allowed the armed forces to perform civilian law enforcement, to selectively suspend due process and habeas corpus as well as other rights guaranteed by the 5th and 6th amendments of the Constitution for terror suspects arrested in the U.S. The law codifed the power of indefinite detention.

The act has given the executive branch extraordinary authoritarian and unaccountable power. Our reputation as a leader in moral authority and law abiding citizens cannot be taken seriously. Our constitutional rights are eroding.

Historian Howard Zinn has observed “Terrorism has replaced Communism as the rationale for the militarism of the country, for military adventures abroad, and for the suppression of civil liberties at home. It serves the same purpose, serving to create hysteria.”

Our freedoms and civil liberties have been hard won: The U.S. government should not abrogate the Constitution.

Robert F. Collins lives in Fort Collins.

Distributed by RINF Alternative News

Hypocritical Obama advisor defends ramped-up use of illegal killer drones

LA Times |

As dean of Yale Law School, Harold Hongju Koh was among the fiercest critics of President George W. Bush’s “war on terror,” arguing that his administration had trampled the Constitution and tarnished America’s international standing by claiming the power to capture “enemy combatants” abroad and hold them without charges at the prison in Guantanamo Bay, Cuba.

The next administration must “restore the rule of law in the national security arena,” end “excessive government secrecy” and set aside the “claims of unfettered executive power,” Koh told a House panel in 2008.

But as the State Department’s legal advisor in that new administration, Koh helped set out a legal justification for policies that include a ramped-up use of unmanned drones to attack and kill suspected terrorists in Pakistan as well as in Yemen and Somalia, far from the combat zone in Afghanistan. Thousands have died, and the targets have included U.S. citizens who were seen as inspiring attacks against Americans.

Koh, who is preparing to return to Yale as President Obama’s first term comes to an end, has become a symbol of national security policies that many feel are not significantly different than those of Obama’s predecessor.

Koh has many defenders who say the administration’s anti-terrorism policies would have been harsher if he were not there. But the surprising turn has left some liberal critics puzzled. Did Koh change, or is there some “deeper pathology” that causes “top administration lawyers to rubber stamp power grabs?” Bruce Ackerman, another Yale law professor, wrote in a news blog.

Obama’s team unquestionably made progress on some fronts. The harsh treatment and even torture of prisoners was ended, and several dozen detainees were repatriated to other countries. But Congress blocked plans to close the Guantanamo prison and to prosecute its remaining detainees before civilian judges and juries.

The rhetoric was toned down as well. Officials no longer speak of a “global war on terror” or “enemy combatants.” They talk instead of applying the “rule of law” to cope with new problems.

But Obama’s drone policy has caused dismay among many human rights activists. When Koh stepped forward two years ago to offer a legal defense, it had a familiar ring. In wartime and in “response to the horrific 9/11 attacks,” the president “may use force consistent with the [nation’s] inherent right of self-defense,” Koh told the American Society of International Law.

As legal authority for the president’s action, he pointed to the congressional authorization for the use of military force adopted just after the Sept. 11 attacks, the same measure Bush’s advisors cited as justification for the Guantanamo detentions. “It is the considered view of this administration,” Koh said, “that U.S. targeting practices, including lethal operations conducted with the use of unmanned aerial vehicles, comply with all applicable law, including the laws of war.”

Conservative columnists were quick to lampoon Koh for what looked to be an about-face. Where the “old Harold Koh” was outraged by imprisoning suspected terrorists, the new Koh could defend the legality of killing them.

Koh said he heard the same at cocktail hours at conferences of liberals. “I get questions in the following form: ‘You’re a hypocrite, aren’t you?'” he said in a talk to one such group.

Koh declined to comment for this story, but many of his friends and liberal allies were glad to speak up for him. They said it was unfair to blame him for administration policies, and they say he has fought hard within the government for abiding by legal standards and strictly limiting the use of drones.

“I don’t see a contradiction between the old Harold and Harold now,” said Rosa Brooks, a Georgetown law professor who served as a Pentagon lawyer. “I’ve seen Harold in action. He was pushing for human rights, for setting legal standards. He’s very stubborn.”

“He’s exactly the kind of person you want in the government,” said Elisa Massimino, president of Human Rights First. She agreed the drone policy was “problematic,” but said, “Harold is always making the case for complying with international law and the laws of war.”

Many of Koh’s friends and supporters paused to confide he has a “huge ego” and can be “a real pain” to deal with. But they admire his tenacity and his devotion to human rights law.

Koh, 58, was born in Boston, the child of two Korean natives who lived under Japanese colonial rule and later under a Korean dictatorship. His father was a legal scholar and a diplomat and his mother was a sociologist, and both taught at Yale.

A stellar student, Koh studied at Harvard, Oxford and Harvard Law School and was a clerk at the Supreme Court for Justice Harry Blackmun. He first dealt with the Guantanamo prison in 1992 when he led a legal fight up to the Supreme Court on behalf of Haitian refugees who were being held there. His efforts so impressed the State Department that the Clinton administration appointed him an assistant secretary for human rights.

Some former Bush advisors say they are surprised at how little criticism the Obama administration has faced over the drone strikes.

“There was an outpouring of outrage over detainees at Guantanamo, but hardly a peep from foreign governments about the 3,000 reportedly killed by drones in Obama’s first term,” said John B. Bellinger III, the State Department legal advisor under Bush. That may change in Obama’s second term. Drones could become “Obama’s Guantanamo,” he said.

John C. Yoo, the Berkeley law professor who was the focus of ire in the Bush era for the so-called torture memo that justified harsh interrogations, said he found much to like these days.

“I don’t want to speak specifically about Koh’s record,” Yoo said. “There is no doubt that on issues ranging from drones to military commissions to Guantanamo Bay, Obama and his legal advisors performed a 180-degree turnaround once in office. But the nation’s security was better off that they were hypocritical, rather than maintaining a foolish consistency with the immature 2008 campaign views.”

The American Civil Liberties Union and the Center for Constitutional Rights have been as vehement in their criticism of the drone strikes as they were of the Guantanamo prison. In July, they filed a suit over the killing of three U.S. citizens, including a 16-year-old boy, in a drone strike in Yemen.

“When a 16-year-old boy who has never been charged with a crime nor ever alleged to have committed a violent act is blown to pieces by a U.S. missile, alarm bells should go off,” said Pardiss Kebriaei, a lawyer for CCR. “The U.S. program of sending drones into countries … against which it is not at war and eliminating so-called enemies on the basis of executive memos and conference calls is illegal, out of control and must end.”

Yale has announced that Koh will be back in New Haven, Conn., at the end of January. Some in the legal world will be listening closely to what he has to say once he is out of government.

“Academics can take strong positions when they are speaking for themselves, but when they go into government, they have to compromise. Koh was asked to join a team,” said University of Chicago law professor Eric Posner. “My guess: He believes he has done more good than not. But it will be interesting to hear what he has to say now.”

david.savage@latimes.com

Distributed by RINF Alternative News

British “learned nothing” from Falklands War

RT |

British Prime Minster David Cameron has said he would send troops to the Falkland Islands if Argentina attempts to invade and retake the territory. Aggressive rhetoric has recently flared between London and Buenos Aires.

Speaking on the BBC’s ‘Andrew Marr Show,’ Cameron emphasized the UK’s “extremely strong” position after Argentinian President Cristina Fernandez de Kirchner renewed her charge that the islands were stolen by Britain.

Kirchner has taken out advertisements in British newspapers saying in an open letter — initially sent to David Cameron — that the islands were taken from Argentina in a “blatant exercise of 19th Century colonialism.”

The move was in response to an advert placed by UK tabloid the Sun in English-language daily the Buenos Aires Herald, which warned Argentina to keep its “hands off the islands,” and claimed that British sovereignty over the isles dates back to 1765.

But Argentina-based journalist Daniel Schweimler told the BBC that across the entire country, Argentinians “believe that the Falklands belong to them.”

Opinion polls suggest that about two-thirds of Argentinians support Kirchner’s position on the Falklands.

Kirchner argued in her letter that in 1833, argentinians on the island were expelled, and “the United Kingdom subsequently began a population implantation process similar to that applied to other territories under colonial rule.”

The British Foreign Office posted on its website that an interim governor appointed by ministers in Buenos Aires was murdered by his own men, and a British warship subsequently “told” his 24-man garrison to leave.

The Falklands dispute has renewed in recent years — in 2007, Argentina reasserted its claim over the islands. Kirchner’s position has hardened since the discovery of potential oil reserves off the islands, as well as last year’s 30th anniversary of the Falklands War.

Argentina invaded the Falklands — known as the Malvinas in Argentina — in May of 1982. Then-Prime Minister Margaret Thatcher sent a task force to retake the islands, sparking a conflict that saw 255 British soldiers and 649 Argentinian troops killed.

Asked if Britain would defend the territory again, Cameron replied, “Of course we would, and we have strong defenses in place on the Falkland Islands, that is absolutely key, that we have fast jets stationed there, we have troops stationed on the Falklands.”

Cameron has been warned by admirals in Britain’s Royal Navy that the UK may no longer have the capability to retake the islands if Argentina invades. The UK no longer has any aircraft carriers, and the two being built won’t be ready until 2016 at the earliest.

Historian Hugh Bicheno told RT in May that the British “learned nothing” from the 1982 Falklands War. In a controversial book about the war called ‘Razor’s Edge,’ Bicheno argues that the fight could have gone either way at any time. He also claimed that in 1982, when the Royal Navy was far bigger than it is today, Britain did not have the capability to launch large-scale overseas military operations.

But Cameron insisted that Britain’s defenses are sufficient. “I get regular reports on this issue because I want to know that our defenses are strong, our resolve is extremely strong,” he said.

Cameron has maintained that Falklanders should be allowed to decide for themselves if they want to remain British or be governed by Buenos Aires.

“The future of the islands should be determined by the Falkland Islanders themselves, the people who live there. Whenever they have been asked their opinion, they say they want to maintain their current status with the United Kingdom,” Cameron told reporters during a January 3 visit to Preston.

Falklanders are holding a referendum on the issue later this year, and Argentina should respect their vote, which has Cameron’s “100 percent backing,” he added.

In a further escalation of the row between Argentina and Britain, cruise ships headed for the Falklands have been subjected to intimidation and protests upon docking in Buenos Aries.

There have been at least 12 reported incidents of cruise liners being disrupted, including officials refusing permission for entry into Argentinian ports, ships being delayed, and masked militants attacking and ransacking shipping company offices.

Many cruises will now no longer call at the Falklands — denying the islanders of an important source of income — in order to appease authorities in Argentina.

Last month, the UK government formerly summoned Argentinian Ambassador Alicia Castro to protest the incidents.

Distributed by RINF Alternative News

Obama Signs NDAA Bill Allowing Indefinite Detention; Obama Orders Assassinations with No Oversight

0

Context: As yet there are no context links for this item.

Bio

Michael Ratner is President Emeritus of the Center for Constitutional Rights (CCR) in New York and Chair of the European Center for Constitutional and Human Rights in Berlin. He is currently a legal adviser to Wikileaks and Julian Assange. He and CCR brought the first case challenging the Guantanamo detentions and continue in their efforts to close Guantanamo. He taught at Yale Law School, and Columbia Law School, and was President of the National Lawyers Guild. His current books include “Hell No: Your Right to Dissent in the Twenty-First Century America,” and “ Who Killed Che? How the CIA Got Away With Murder.” NOTE: Mr. Ratner speaks on his own behalf and not for any organization with which he is affiliated.

Transcript

PAUL JAY, SENIOR EDITOR, TRNN: Welcome to The Real News Network. I’m Paul Jay in Baltimore. And welcome to this week’s edition of The Ratner Report with Michael Ratner, who now joins us from New York City.

Michael is the president emeritus of the Center for Constitutional Rights in New York. He’s chair of the European Center for Constitutional and Human Rights in Berlin. And he’s a board member of The Real News.Thanks for joining us again, Michael.MICHAEL RATNER, PRESIDENT EMERITUS, CENTER FOR CONSTITUTIONAL RIGHTS: It’s always good to be with you. And happy new year to you and all your viewers.JAY: Thank you. And what are you following now?RATNER: You know, it’s–unfortunately, it’s more of the same, which is the war-on-terror excesses, first of the Bush administration, and now the Obama administration. We’re going into, really, the middle of the 11th year of what I consider to be a lawless way of carrying out the so-called war on terror. The model that has been used is essentially presidential fiat, congressional fiat, no due process, no trials, indefinite detention. And just this week the president signed–and it’s into law–the National Defense Authorization Act, which comes up every year. It’s a 620-page bill. It funds all our military adventures all over the world. But for my purposes, on the so-called war on terror what it does is continue what I call the Bush—Obama policies.The first of those policies is indefinite detention, that you can pick up people anywhere in the world–and what’s interesting: including American citizens–and hold them indefinitely without trial, and even hold them offshore. We expected this last Congress to try and put in legislation that would at least prohibit the holding of U.S. citizens. They didn’t, so it’s still authorized by the law. And, of course, that’s the lawsuit that Chris Hedges and Daniel Ellsberg had gone to court to try and declare that section of the old law, now of the new law, unconstitutional. So you have an NDAA that first allows indefinite detention of anyone in the world, including U.S. citizens. Secondly, it really destroys any chance of closing Guantanamo.JAY: Before you get into that, Michael, wasn’t there some amendment that came out of the Senate that ensures or at least is supposed to ensure habeas rights for U.S. citizens?RATNER: Well, they have a habeas right, but they can still be held indefinitely in detention.JAY: So explain what that means, a habeas right.RATNER: Okay. Everyone can now, because of the cases we won at the Center over the last ten years, has a right to go to court and say to the court, which will say to the jailor, the United States, are you holding me legally. The problem with it is is legally is now defined by the NDAA as holding someone in indefinite detention for their, quote, associational interests, or association with al-Qaeda or related forces. And so all that the government has to come into court and prove is that somehow this person has some relationship to al-Qaeda or whatever related forces means, which could be almost anything. And that’s the way it’s been used. So the U.S. picks up people, whether it’s in Afghanistan or Pakistan, or Yemen,–JAY: Or Pittsburgh.RATNER: –Pittsburgh, or Somalia, or anywhere, or England, or anywhere, and says, well, that person’s associated with al-Qaeda or associated forces. And then you have a right, yes, to go to court and challenge that.But the court has been completely unwilling to hear those challenges. The lowest court has heard them, and in some cases even said, well, the government’s not holding with a good reason; it goes to the court of appeals, and they have never actually let anyone out of Guantanamo or any other type of this indefinite detention. My problem, of course, is not that they give habeas rights. Sure, that’s good. But the problem is they use a indefinite detention model and not a law enforcement model. My view is no one should be held in indefinite detention. Every human being who’s picked up anywhere in the world should be charged with a crime if they’re going to be kept, and tried for the crime. Instead, you have these masses of people being held without being charged. And if we look at Guantanamo, it’s the perfect example. And that gets to the second part of the NDAA legislation. There’s 166 people left in Guantanamo. Eighty-six of those people have been cleared for release. That means they shouldn’t be there at all. The rest of them–whatever, 80 or so–have not been charged, with exceptions of a few, such as the so-called, you know, people who were allegedly involved in the conspiracy of the World Trade Center, which is a half a dozen people or so. So most of those people have never been charged. And, in fact, more than half have been cleared for release. So what does the NDAA do to those people? It says two things, which it said consistently year after year, that the president can’t transfer anybody to the United States, even those cleared for release. So that means: how do you get those people out of Guantanamo? And secondly, it puts very heavy restrictions on transferring any of those people to foreign countries. They have to notify the Senate, they have to approve it in certain ways. And, in fact, because of those restrictions, no one’s been transferred to a foreign country, or to the United States, obviously, in the last two years.Now, so that’s what you have. You have heavy restrictions. So that means you’re going to have trouble closing Guantanamo altogether. Now, Obama made all kinds of noises last year, and he made all kinds of noises this year, that he was going to veto the NDAA because of what he considers these restrictions on his presidential power to, one, transfer people out of Guantanamo to the United States, or transfer them to foreign countries. But last year he didn’t veto it, and this year he didn’t veto it. So what he does is he does a bunch of saber-rattling. But what he did was do a signing statement. Now, signing statements, I want to explain, have no legal efficacy. In the United States, you either have to approve legislation as the president or veto it. Obama, by approving it, basically says this is the law. He then signs something that says, well, I don’t like this law, I don’t think it’s constitutional, I don’t think this, I don’t think that, but that it has no legal efficacy. The law is the law, and he’s not about to necessarily disobey the law–he didn’t last year, and he didn’t this year.Now, what’s interesting about Obama’s signing statements is two things. One, he criticized them when Bush used them, saying, Bush shouldn’t be doing these signing statements; he should either veto the law or approve the law, but not say, I approve it, but–you can’t do that. And secondly, last year when he made a signing statement on the NDAA, he said, I will challenge this law as unconstitutional in these respects, etc., etc. This time, because it’s past the election, he didn’t even say that. And so we now have an NDAA that ostensibly allows the indefinite detention of American citizens, makes it impossible to close Guantanamo, and a president who is unwilling to challenge Congress about the law.JAY: And what’s the status of that lawsuit that Chris Hedges and his colleagues launched?RATNER: Well, Judge Forrest, who is a very good judge in the District of Columbia, actually ruled in favor of Hedges and Ellsberg that the law was unconstitutional because Ellsberg, Hedges, and others who challenge the law could actually be held in indefinite detention for the words that they spoke or what they wrote. And the government refused to say initially that they couldn’t be held like that. And so Judge Forrest, who is the judge, said, well, I’m ruling it’s unconstitutional. The government then, in the most aggressive way they could, Obama appealed that to the circuit court. The circuit court stayed the decision, which means they said, we’re not going to hold this unconstitutional; we’re going to stay it until we hear the entire argument again. So right now the NDAA is still good law, because the circuit court went against the district court, the lower court, and basically said, we’re going to allow the law to continue. So it’s still being heavily, heavily litigated. Now, it seems to me that two things are apparent to me. One is, of course, I don’t think it’s good to hold anyone in indefinite detention, citizens or not. Of course, Hedges attacked the most pernicious aspect and the most constitutionally protected aspect, which is holding an American citizen. And secondly, we’re still left with Guantanamo. Now, it brings me to–so we have an NDAA out there. Now, it brings me to a second issue that I want to get to in this short piece, which is Obama’s drone policy. Again, it comes up in the context of the murder of, killing of American citizens Anwar al-Aulaqi, his son, Rahman al-Aulaqi, and another American citizen, all in Yemen. The Center for Constitutional Rights challenged those killings initially. We lost. They were killed by drones after our lawsuit.We now have another challenge, challenging them in terms of trying to get damages for them. But an extraordinary decision was written this week by a judge about targeted assassinations by Obama and his administration. It was a case in which the ACLU and The New York Times went to court to try and get the legal basis under which Obama said he could designate people for death, American citizens and otherwise. And the judge said that they weren’t entitled, in the end, to the document that was written by the Department of Justice laying out the legal reasoning about why you could kill American citizens or others utterly outside a war zone, whether in Yemen or in Somalia or in the United Kingdom or here in the United States. The judge said–because it was classified, while the judge didn’t like giving the decision she did, she’d said, I can’t do anything about it, my hands are tied, I’m in a catch-22. And what she said about it was extraordinary. She said, look it, when we had torture in the United States, it was critical to get out the memos regarding the legal reasoning about why the U.S. could torture people, so that it could be fully, fully debated. Here my hands are tied. And what we should have is, like torture, we should get out the legal memos about why the president should be able to assassinate people outside a war zone so we can have a serious debate about it.JAY: Well, does the president have to show these memos to anybody?RATNER: Not really, no.JAY: There’s no congressional oversight? Not given the history of whatever oversight there’s been would mean that much, but is there? I mean, I don’t understand. The–then I don’t understand. The president could create any memo he wants and–?RATNER: Well, the Justice Department creates the memo, they give it to the president. He could technically withhold it from Congress. I don’t know whether Congress has asked him for it or whether he has withheld it, or whether Congress is entitled to find out much about the policy, because while the Congress is entitled to find out about, particularly, CIA covert operations, whether this falls within that is hard to say. And secondly, this isn’t only done by the CIA, but targeted assassination is done by Joint Special Operation Command, or JSOC, the military. Congress has no ability to really–or no law that requires the president to report to Congress on the murders or assassinations by JSOC. So you have this policy of the president on his own deciding who can be murdered or assassinated, even if they’re American citizens. And what was incredible about the judges’ decision, the judge said or implied that the president could actually be criminally prosecuted for killing of a U.S. citizen overseas and said the president is not exempt from the law that prohibits people or citizens in the United States or people anywhere in the world from killing U.S. citizens overseas. So she made an implication that it may be that the president could actually be prosecuted for these targeted assassinations around the world. So while she denied, ultimately, the memo, it’s just this opinion, which is some 75 pages long, just drips with anger and really, I think, what you would have to say is deep unease at the president saying on his own, without providing the American people with a legal basis, for assassinating American citizens anywhere in the world.Taken together, what you have here, you have the NDAA law which allows the indefinite detention of American citizens, you have the al-Aluaqi decisions, and this recent one which allows the targeted assassination of American citizens, both detention and killing, at the behest of one man. And what the judge says: this is supposed to be–supposed to be a democracy, a constitutional democracy based on the rule of law and not on the rule of men. And I guess she’s questioning whether that’s what we have any longer.JAY: Thanks for joining us, Michael.RATNER: Thanks for having me, Paul.JAY: And thank you for joining us on The Real News Network.

End

DISCLAIMER: Please note that transcripts for The Real News Network are typed from a recording of the program. TRNN cannot guarantee their complete accuracy.


Comments

Our automatic spam filter blocks comments with multiple links and multiple users using the same IP address. Please make thoughtful comments with minimal links using only one user name. If you think your comment has been mistakenly removed please email us at contact@therealnews.com

Please enable JavaScript to view the comments powered by Disqus.

Was the Irish Famine genocide by the British?

1

Independent.ie |

The Famine was our Holocaust. During the mid-19th Century, Ireland experienced the worst social and economic disaster a nation could suffer. A quarter of the island’s population starved to death or emigrated to escape truly appalling conditions.

The state of the country was such that the renowned British historian, AJP Taylor, declared “all Ireland was a Belsen”, a reference to the infamous Nazi concentration camp.

As one of this country’s most prolific and able writers, Tim Pat Coogan is critical of Irish historians as a class for their failure to do justice to the Famine. In his latest work, Coogan deploys the full range of his talents to passionately make the case that the Irish Famine was a deliberate act of genocide.

The maxim of the Young Ireland leader John Mitchell was that “God sent the potato blight but the English created the Famine”.

Coogan’s research gives credence to this view and he expertly catalogues a shocking combination of ambivalence, incompetence and malignance on the part of British policymakers.

Rapid population growth was at the root of the catastrophe that devastated Ireland in the 1840s. Between 1741, the date of the last big Famine, and the coming of the blight in 1845, the population of Ireland had tripled.

Feeding so many was already a problem before the Famine with bulk of the Irish population surviving on a subsistence diet.

Coogan demonstrates that the British government was not oblivious to the plight of Ireland. The Whatley Commission on Irish poverty in 1833 had suggested that large-scale emigration to the colonies be encouraged and proposed that fisheries be developed and land be reclaimed among other measures.

Had these recommendations been implemented, it would have done much to mitigate against the scale of the disaster which engulfed Ireland just over a decade later.

If a misguided faith in a pro-cyclical economics has caused financial hardship for this generation then the fact that laissez-faire economics was en vogue in the Famine era significantly contributed to the huge death-toll in Ireland.

Laissez-faire economics argued against the morality of assisting the poor because of the consequent risk of stultifying initiative and self-help among the Irish peasantry. One of laissez-faire’s most influential proponents, Thomas Malthus, warned that extending relief would swallow the resources of the entire nation and consequently the poor had “no claim of right to the smallest portion of food”.

Coogan’s research shows how too often British policymakers put an adherence to a callous economic theory above their humanitarian responsibilities.

It would be a mistake to dismiss Coogan’s work as a green-tinted history. He is not ungenerous to Robert Peel, the British prime minister at the time of the outbreak of the Famine and for so long the bête noire of Irish nationalists.

Coogan suggests that Peel did, in fact, attempt to alleviate the horrific situation in Ireland by facing up to the challenge of Corn Law reform and by making £100,000 available for the secret purchase of Indian corn in America.

Coogan also points out that Peel’s successor, John Russell, was outraged by the “lynch law of Irish landlords” in ruthlessly pursuing evictions at a time when this was akin to a sentence of death.

Russell’s efforts to offer legislative protection to Irish cottiers were, however, stymied by a powerful cabal in his own cabinet of Lord Palmerstown, the Marquis of Clanricarde and Lord Lansdowne, all of whom owned huge estates in Ireland.

This was a classic case of self-interest outweighing the public interest even though the lives of innocent people were in the scales.

Coogan’s work is a damning indictment of Charles Trevelyan, the assistant secretary to the Treasury, who was effectively in charge of Famine relief in Ireland.

Trevelyan, today, is remembered more in sorrow than in anger in the classic song ‘The Fields of Athenry’, but he surely ranks alongside Cromwell as one of the greatest villains in Irish history.

Trevelyan was motivated by racialism, laissez-faire dogmatism and anti-Catholicism. Coogan highlights in a variety of ways how Trevelyan’s policies consigned a generation of Irish people to death or exile.

But Trevelyan is most conclusively condemned in the dock of history by his own words.

The man whose policies held sway over the fate of a starving population wrote : “The judgment of God sent the calamity to teach the Irish a lesson, that calamity must not be too much mitigated . . . the real evil with which we have to contend is not the physical evil of the Famine but the moral evil of the selfish, perverse and turbulent character of the people.”

The Famine created an underbelly of resentment that helped poison Anglo-Irish relations until recent times.

Tony Blair deserves great credit for having the political courage in his first month as British prime minister to apologise for the Famine and to publicly acknowledge that “those who governed in London at the time failed their people”.

Blair’s statement helped to build trust with the incoming Taoiseach Bertie Ahern and put in place the solid foundations on which peace — the greatest memorial of all to the victims of the Famine — was ultimately built.

Brian Murphy is completing a PhD in the School of History and Archives, UCD. He was previously a speechwriter to two Taoisigh.

Distributed by RINF Alternative News

Overcrowded Schools in War-Torn Besieged Gaza

0

Context: As yet there are no context links for this item.

Transcript

Palestinians have long invested in education, as in investment in the future.

Out of Gaza’s 1.7 million population, about 400,000 students receive education at governmental, UN-run and private schools. Some 220,000 children in grades one through nine are currently taught in 245 UNRWA schools in the tiny Costal Strip.With more than 52% of Gaza’s population are children below the age of 18, this means more schools are needed in order to accommodate the growing number of students each year. Currently the majority of students suffer from overcrowding, with 90% of schools work on double shifts.Gaza’s classrooms are now severely overcrowded, and often accommodate up to 45 or more pupils in a class, with three children seated at a desk designed for two.where one school building serves two completely different sets of teachers and students, due to lack of classroomsThe ministry of education in Gaza say that there is a need to build at least 200 more new schools to overcome the increasing number of students in the tiny strip where the ongoing 6-year long Israeli siege has hampered the construction of new schools due to lack of construction materials. Israel has banned the delivery of construction materials to Gaza since it tightened its siege in June 2007, citing security concerns, except for certain projects run by international NGO’sAccess to education is a basic right, but some students do not enjoy this right. Since the siege came into effect in 2007, an estimated 70,000 people have lost their jobs adding to the soar unemployment rate, a big number of students dropped out from schools in order to support their familiesUN officials say that, through UNRWA’s education system it is spreading the message of universal respect for human rights, peaceful coexistence and tolerance in an atmosphere that since the blockade has become increasingly desperate and radicalized, children draw and paint and take part in art exhibitionsMeanwhile, experts say that a large number of children are suffering from severe psychological, social and behavioral disorders as a result of constant exposure to the traumas produced by the war, occupation and blockade.Living conditions of children and youth in Gaza under years of Israeli siege and military attacks have been deeply affected by the extremely difficult situation in the impoverished costal territory, a high number of them suffer from physiological problems especially after the recent Israeli 8-day war.With the help of some childrens’ associations and trauma centers, children are given the chance to reveal their hopes and fears, they take part in activities that help traumatized children overcome their emotional traumaThese children are capable of expressing themselves regardless of the pain, the hardships they have been enduring, in particular, the repeated shocks of the Israeli bombardment on Gaza a few weeks ago. However these children are still painting in vivid colors, they are showing smiles as well as tears and they are showing hope.These children and their parents are resilient in the face of aggression, but only just. There is not enough professional psychological support to help them and they wait in dread every day for the next bombardment. Every time they hear the roaring of F16s or buzzing drones they have flashbacks to the traumas of war.Yousef Al-HelouThe Real NewsGaza


Comments

Our automatic spam filter blocks comments with multiple links and multiple users using the same IP address. Please make thoughtful comments with minimal links using only one user name. If you think your comment has been mistakenly removed please email us at contact@therealnews.com

Please enable JavaScript to view the comments powered by Disqus.

Ex-officer is first in CIA to face prison for a leak

0

NY Times |

Looking back, John C. Kiriakou admits he should have known better. But when the F.B.I. called him a year ago and invited him to stop by and “help us with a case,” he did not hesitate.

In his years as a C.I.A. operative, after all, Mr. Kiriakou had worked closely with F.B.I. agents overseas. Just months earlier, he had reported to the bureau a recruiting attempt by someone he believed to be an Asian spy.

“Anything for the F.B.I.,” Mr. Kiriakou replied.

Only an hour into what began as a relaxed chat with the two agents – the younger one who traded Pittsburgh Steelers talk with him and the senior investigator with the droopy eye – did he begin to realize just who was the target of their investigation.

Finally, the older agent leaned in close and said, by Mr. Kiriakou’s recollection, “In the interest of full disclosure, I should tell you that right now we’re executing a search warrant at your house and seizing your electronic devices.”

On Jan. 25, Mr. Kiriakou is scheduled to be sentenced to 30 months in prison as part of a plea deal in which he admitted violating the Intelligence Identities Protection Act by e-mailing the name of a covert C.I.A. officer to a freelance reporter, who did not publish it. The law was passed in 1982, aimed at radical publications that deliberately sought to out undercover agents, exposing their secret work and endangering their lives.

In more than six decades of fraught interaction between the agency and the news media, John Kiriakou is the first current or former C.I.A. officer to be convicted of disclosing classified information to a reporter.

Mr. Kiriakou, 48, earned numerous commendations in nearly 15 years at the C.I.A., some of which were spent undercover overseas chasing Al Qaeda and other terrorist groups. He led the team in 2002 that found Abu Zubaydah, a terrorist logistics specialist for Al Qaeda, and other militants whose capture in Pakistan was hailed as a notable victory after the Sept. 11 attacks.

He got mixed reviews at the agency, which he left in 2004 for a consulting job. Some praised his skills, first as an analyst and then as an overseas operative; others considered him a loose cannon.

Mr. Kiriakou first stumbled into the public limelight by speaking out about waterboarding on television in 2007, quickly becoming a source for national security journalists, including this reporter, who turned up in Mr. Kiriakou’s indictment last year as Journalist B. When he gave the covert officer’s name to the freelancer, he said, he was simply trying to help a writer find a potential source and had no intention or expectation that the name would ever become public. In fact, it did not surface publicly until long after Mr. Kiriakou was charged.

He is remorseful, up to a point. “I should never have provided the name,” he said on Friday in the latest of a series of interviews. “I regret doing it, and I never will do it again.”

At the same time, he argues, with the backing of some former agency colleagues, that the case – one of an unprecedented string of six prosecutions under President Obama for leaking information to the news media – was unfair and ill-advised as public policy.

His supporters are an unlikely collection of old friends, former spies, left-leaning critics of the government and conservative Christian opponents of torture. Oliver Stone sent a message of encouragement, as did several professors at Liberty University, where Mr. Kiriakou has taught. They view the case as an outrage against a man who risked his life to defend the country.

Whatever his loquaciousness with journalists, they say, he neither intended to damage national security nor did so. Some see a particular injustice in the impending imprisonment of Mr. Kiriakou, who in his first 2007 appearance on ABC News defended the agency’s resort to desperate measures but also said that he had come to believe that waterboarding was torture and should no longer be used in American interrogations.

Bruce Riedel, a retired veteran C.I.A. officer who led an Afghan war review for Mr. Obama and turned down an offer to be considered for C.I.A. director in 2009, said Mr. Kiriakou, who worked for him in the 1990s, was “an exceptionally good intelligence officer” who did not deserve to go to prison.

“To me, the irony of this whole thing is, very simply, that he’s going to be the only C.I.A. officer to go to jail over torture,” even though he publicly denounced torture, Mr. Riedel said. “It’s deeply ironic under the Democratic president who ended torture.”

John A. Rizzo, a senior C.I.A. lawyer for three decades, said that he did not believe Mr. Kiriakou set out to harm national security or endanger anyone, but that his violation was serious.

“I think he wanted to be a big shot,” Mr. Rizzo said. “I don’t think he was evil. But it’s not a trivial thing to reveal a name.”

The leak prosecutions have been lauded on Capitol Hill as a long-overdue response to a rash of dangerous disclosures and have been defended by both Mr. Obama and his attorney general, Eric H. Holder Jr. But their aides say neither man ordered the crackdown, and the cases appear to have resulted less from a conscious policy change than from the proliferation of e-mail, which makes it possible to trace the origin of some disclosures without pressuring journalists to identify confidential sources.

When Mr. Kiriakou pleaded guilty on Oct. 23 in federal court in Alexandria, Va., David H. Petraeus, then the C.I.A. director, issued a statement praising the prosecution as “an important victory for our agency, for our intelligence community, and for our country.”

“Oaths do matter,” he went on, “and there are indeed consequences for those who believe they are above the laws that protect our fellow officers and enable American intelligence agencies to operate with the requisite degree of secrecy.”

Less than three weeks later, e-mails tripped up Mr. Petraeus himself. He resigned after F.B.I. agents carrying out an unrelated investigation discovered, upon examining his private e-mail account, that he had had an extramarital affair.

Neil H. MacBride, the United States attorney for the Eastern District of Virginia, hailed Mr. Kiriakou’s conviction in a statement: “The government has a vital interest in protecting the identities of those involved in covert operations. Leaks of highly sensitive, closely held and classified information compromise national security and can put individual lives in danger.”

The leak case is a devastating turn for Mr. Kiriakou, a father of five who considers himself a patriot, a proud Greek-American from Pennsylvania steel country whose grandfather, he recalls, “always talked as if F.D.R. personally admitted him to this country.” Discovering a passion for international affairs, he scrounged scholarships to go to George Washington University, where he was recruited by a professor, a former C.I.A. psychiatrist who spotted talent for the agency.

Read more

Distributed by RINF Alternative News

Another Republican Scandal: Did Boehner Bribe Republicans To Keep Him As Speaker?

Monica Davis, Before It’s News |

Ignorance of economics continues to make the American public vulnerable to propaganda and news manipulation. The nation continues to reel from one crisis to another. This neverending cycle of fear, paranoia and reactionary politics generates a manufactured crisis which makes the nation vulnerable to propaganda and instigated political emnity.

Crises don’t “just happen”. They are instigated and the public is manipulated. The public: that’s us.

Price/profit manipulation of stocks are a large part of what’s driving crises issues. Those manipulations are not created by the average investor, who doesn’t hold enough financial power to cause huge shifts, but by wealthier investors, who do. Hope and marketable shifts in public attitudes are talked up by brokers and media shows to create investment in stocks which then rise. Then comes a manufactured “crises” which will, predictably, cause uncertainty. The wealthy investors, who filled their portfolios at lower prices, now sell those shares and the average investors, who were only able to buy as the stock was rising, are put on an unavoidably losing trajectory. At best one can only hope to tread water by having bought a valuable stock early enough that it’s basic price can’t fall much lower than what it was purchased for. That can only be done by choosing established companies with high budgets that are integral to societal needs. READMOREHERE

One left wing pundit has set high goals for himself this year. But, are the American people willing to use their brains, instead of letting a biased media lead them around by the nose?

One of the things that I hope to successfully convey as Congress proceeds from the pooch punt that averted that “fiscal cliff” (that Congress created so that they could heroically avert it) to the fiscal crisis moment slated for March of this year, it’s that debt ceiling hostage takers are dangerous psychopaths. Yes, we can trace instances of Congresscritters shaking the chandeliers on the debt ceiling going back many presidential terms – heck, there was once a senator from Illinois named Barack Obama who troubled the Bush administration over it. It was a dumb idea then, as it is now.

But what’s changed to make things worse is that this is no longer mere idle talk and procedural bravado – there are people in Congress who truly see default as an ideal alternative to having to concede any points in what should be a rational process of negotiation and deal-making. Rep. Michele Bachmann made her willingness to destroy the global economy for the glory of Tea Party Caucus a central selling point for her presidential candidacy. And now, legislators who were once considered reasonable have become enablers to the lunatics. (And unfortunately for everyone, a key enabler to this madness has been that former Illinois Senator, who opened the door to negotiating over the debt ceiling back when he was still hopeful of a “grand bargain” on the debt.)

India govt tapped 1,300 e-mail IDs in last 3 months

0

Some 500 new e-mail IDs and 4,000 new phones were intercepted, on top of existing ones already under surveillance, bringing total to 1,300 e-mail IDs and 10,000 phones for last three months.

ZDNet |

India’s Home Affairs Ministry ordered the interception of about 1,300 e-mail IDs and 10,000 phones between October and December last year.

Indian Home Secretary RK Singh, the designated officer for authorizing a wire tap by a security agency, cleared some 4,000 new requests of phone surveillance, of which 700 were for tapping overseas connections. About 500 new e-mail addresses of individuals were also added to the existing 800 e-mail IDs already under surveillance, The Economic Times reported Thursday, citing a document it reviewed.

The report said between October and December last year, most of the surveillance requests came from the Intelligence Bureau, followed by the Narcotics Control Bureau, Directorate of Revenue Intelligence, Army’s Signals Intelligence Directorate, State Intelligence units and the police departments of Andhra Pradesh and Maharashtra.

A top-level committee, which members include Cabinet Secretary Ajit Seth, Telecom Secretary R Chandrashekhar, and Department of Legal Affairs Secretary BA Agrawal, had met on Dec. 10 last year, to review interceptions sanctioned by the Union Home Secretary in the last 90 days. This committee meets every three months to review the clear wire tapping under orders of India’s Supreme Court, the Economic Times report said.

About 460 clearances for the wire tapping of phones and e-mail IDs were given on the pretext of public emergency and threat to public safety, according to the article.

Interception requests from the Directorate of Revenue Intelligence and Intelligence Bureau were found to be in accordance with the Indian Telegraph Act, the committee members noted in the document.

Section 5(2) of the Indian Telegraph Act of 1885 states that the government is authorized to intercept or detain messages, if satisfied that it is necessary to do so in the interests of the sovereignty, integrity, security of the State, friendly relations with foreign States or public order or for preventing incitement to the commission of an offense.

However, wire tapping to detect tax evasion by Income Tax authorities is not permitted. The Economic Times report noted that the Center for Development of Telematics (C-DOT) is building a central monitoring system that will enable the government bypass having to engage telecom operators for legal interception. C-DOT is the Indian government-owned development center for telecom technology.

Distributed by RINF Alternative News

String of scandals hit bank bonuses

0

This is Money |

City bonuses will this year be clawed back more than ever before after the series of scandals that have hit the major banks.

Jon Terry, global head of financial services HR at accountant PricewaterhouseCoopers, said share awards made in previous years would be lower this year.

‘In previous years we had the PPI mis-selling scandal, which involved a fairly small number of banks,’ he said. ‘With the Libor-fixing scandal there have been a greater number of banks involved and it is not just UK banks.’

Royal Bank of Scotland, which is expected to be fined about £350million for its role in Libor fixing, is poised to claw back money from those of its staff who were involved.

Regulators are also more focused, meaning that banks will have to show they have clawed back awards, Terry added.

The City bonus season will kick off later this month when Goldman Sachs announces its awards for 2012. Bonuses are expected to be sharply down on previous years, with an estimated £2billion to be paid out to staff based in London.

European banks are likely to slash bonuses by up to 40 per cent, while US banks could increase payments in some cases by up to 15 per cent, according to PwC.

The full details of the clawbacks may not be disclosed. Only those involving board members would have to be revealed.

Terry said: ‘Some banks will think it is right to be transparent. I am doubtful they will put numbers on it. There is no requirement from the regulator to disclose for staff below board level.’

– The Financial Services Authority will later this month set out proposals to sweep away restrictions that prevent new banks from starting up, it is understood. Capital requirements for new banks may be reduced.

Distributed by RINF Alternative News

How British Control Freaks Exploited a Scandal To Impose Press Regulations

0

, Reason |

In a fascinating piece for the spiked review of books, Mick Hume finds strong clues as to the source not only of Britain’s sudden push for press regulation but also the details of the rules proposed by the Leveson Inquiry. The road map is essentially laid out for him in a screed titled, Everybody’s Hacked Off: Why We Don’t Have the Press We Deserve and What To Do About It, by Brian Cathcart, who is a journalism professor and the founder of the Hacked Off campaign, a group that came together to press for media curbs in the wake of the phone-hacking scandal that killed off the News of the World. As Hume describes, Cathcart has long been a champion of press regulation, and the high-profile fuss gave him and a small group of allies an opportunity to hand political figures a pre-packaged solution to a “problem” that doesn’t really exist. And yeah, there’s a lesson in there for everybody.

Britain’s phone-hacking scandal involved real misbehavior on the part of both journalists and government officials, but that conduct was already illegal – and some police officials were themselves implicated. So the Leveson inquiry into phone-hacking, which morphed into an inquisition into journalistic practices, is now proposing further regulations and oversight to prevent activity that was already illegal, and which was enabled, in part, by the last batch of people meant to prevent it.

That’s not the point of Hume’s piece, though. He uses his review of Cathcart’s book to explain how a demoralized press and defensive, unprincipled politicians were essentially rolled by a small group of radical advocates for media control.

In July 2011, the Guardian revealed that the News of the World had hacked the phone messages of murdered schoolgirl Milly Dowler in 2002. The resulting wave of outrage caused panic in high places, leading to the closure of the NotW. Cathcart describes how his little group, then effectively a two-man band, took advantage of this disarray by demanding — and getting — audiences with all the political-party leaders, taking the Dowler family with them. Hacked Off demanded, and got, a public inquiry. What is more, he says, they demanded that the inquiry should look into not just the phone-hacking scandal, but the entire ‘culture, ethics and practices of the press’. That was the exact brief that prime minister David Cameron gave Lord Justice Leveson when he appointed the judge to head the inquiry.

Once Leveson began his public hearings, the Hacked Off lobby was allowed to set the tone from the very start, with the first witnesses called being their high-profile and celebrity supporters such as [Hugh] Grant and [Steve] Coogan, to denounce the crimes of the tabloids they accused of creating a ‘culture of pure evil’. At the end of all this, Leveson produced a report based on the Hacked Off version of events and proposals centred on all of the demands listed in Cathcart’s book, for a new regulator underpinned by the law with the ‘clout’ to police and punish the press. The only real difference is that Cathcart wants a statute to ‘compel’ newspapers to sign up to the new system — an explicit form of state licensing of the press unseen in Britain for more than 300 years. Leveson instead proposed a statutory-backed regulator that could punish financially those that failed to submit — a sort of informal system of licensing by the back door. But his entire report was infused with the spirit of Hacked Off’s demands.

The whole thing was eased along by the lack of a strong lobby, in Britain, for protecting free speech and freedom of the press. Shami Chakrabarti, the head of Liberty, a sort of anemic, other-side-of-the-pond counterpart to the ACLU, actually participated in the Leveson inquiry. (Liberty is the sort of group that makes you really appreciate the ACLU, warts and all.)

Cathcart’s own words, quoted from his book, offer an enlightening peek at the mind-set behind the push for controls on the press.

Cathcart’s discussion of the ‘public interest’ rather gives the game away here. What does this oft-cited concept mean? ‘Well’, says Cathcart, ‘to start with it is obviously not the same thing as what interests the public…. That would legitimise all kinds of gratuitous cruelty and dishonesty, reviving the morality that permitted bear-baiting and public executions’.

The latest candidate for press-regulator, by the way, is the Privy Council – a secretive, 800-year-old body that hasn’t convened in decades and whose members are selected for life.

Read Hume’s whole article for a scary insight into how easily fundamental freedoms can be undermined when their defenders lose heart (and interest) and their opponents are organized and prepared to exploit an opportunity (Hrumph … hrumph … Newtown … hrumph).

Distributed by RINF Alternative News

United States considers creating “mutant soldiers”

Translated by: Lisa Karpova | 

Researchers could be considering doing genetic manipulation in the U.S. to make super soldiers

According to a report by three researchers at the California State Polytechnic University, the agencies involved in these projects evaluated using drugs, prosthetics, gene manipulation and other techniques on their soldiers. This is not the first time that the U.S. would experiment with their soldiers.

The U.S. Army is evaluating in order to develop a project to equip its soldiers with new genes that would allow them to become super soldiers that do not suffer from fear, and have more endurance and strength.

A series of experiments in the 1970s aimed at developing hallucinogenic weapons, the Pentagon gave soldiers LSD – apparently without the subjects fully understanding the consequences of using the drug. During the Cold War U.S. troops were also exposed to nerve gas, psychochemicals and other toxic substances on an experimental basis and without their consent.”

For those who conducted this most recent research, if carried out in a future existence with these mutant soldiers…there should be an international body that regulates howfar changes can be made in genes and also respond when these soldiers suffer or experience damage to their health.

Despite these warnings, the Armed Forces of the United States has used methods of drugs and stimulants to keep active component forces in the field.

It has been known that their pilots involved in long duration missions are prescribed Dexedrine, a drug that according to the chief military command, allows them to be vigilant and alert for an extended period of time.

U.S. medical organizations have said that Dexedrine can cause side effects such as depression, insomnia, hypertension and other health conditions.

The Food and Drug Administration warns that Dexedrine can cause “new or worse aggressive behavior or hostility,” thus providing grounds for the soldier to absolve himself of blame in the incident.

Investigators have requested the government to establish programs aimed at improving the human quality of of life for the military.

An enhanced soldier could also become an enhanced criminal.

Think Media Consolidation Is Good for Journalism? Think Again

0

Josh Stearns, Common Dreams |

The Federal Communications Commission is pushing a plan to gut its 30-year-old newspaper/broadcast cross-ownership ban. This proposal would allow one company to own a local paper, two TV stations and up to eight radio stations in a single market. Advocates of more media consolidation argue that allowing TV stations and newspapers to merge is critical to cutting costs and saving local journalism.

This is the same argument the Bush FCC used to try to push through the same bad rules in 2007. Back then, the Senate voted the rules down and the courts later threw them out. It’s time to put this argument to bed for good: More media consolidation won’t save journalism.

Banks have toxic assets. Journalism has media consolidation.

When we think about the state of journalism today, let’s not forget that media consolidation is largely what got us into this mess in the first place. Newspapers and TV stations have long been hugely profitable enterprises – and many still are.

Rick Edmonds at Poynter recently highlighted the fact that 2012 was a good year for newspaper stocks. Indeed, the top publicly traded newspaper companies remain quite profitable. In 2011, the McClatchy Company enjoyed 27 percent profit margins, Lee Enterprises had 24 percent profit margins and the Gannett Company’s profits were at 22 percent.

This sounds good, but not that long ago many media companies reported 30 or 40 percent profits. But instead of investing in their product during those flush times – hiring more journalists, diving head-first into the Web – most companies went on a buying spree. The biggest news organizations in the country got over-leveraged with debt as they gobbled up competitors.

Read more

Obama needs to explain drone strikes

The Obama administration, having killed a 16-year-old American boy, refuses to explain why in court.

Abdulrahman al-Awlaki was 16 years old when he was killed by a U.S. missile strike from CIA drone.

The boy, Abdulrahman al-Awlaki, was born in Denver and lived there until he was 7, when his family moved to Yemen.

Like many American kids, he had a Facebook page and a love of the Simpsons. No one ever accused him of any wrongdoing.

Yet on Oct. 14, 2011, a U.S. drone missile killed him and his teenage cousin while they were eating dinner at an open-air restaurant.

On Dec. 14, 2012, the Justice Department asked a federal court to dismiss a lawsuit in which Abdulrahman’s grandfather, Nasser al-Awlaki, is asking for an official explanation about why the boy died.

Until now, only unofficial explanations have been offered.

One anonymous government official told the media Abdulrahman’s death was a mistake.

Indefensibly, former White House press secretary and Obama campaign adviser Robert Gibbs said this October, “You should have a far more responsible father” if you don’t want to be killed. (Abdulrahman’s father, Anwar al-Awlaki, was suspected by the United States of terrorism and was killed by a drone two weeks before his son.)

But surely no one would suggest that children are fair game simply because their parents are suspected of wrongdoing.

And if the government made a mistake, it should explain why.

In court, government officials provided no explanation at all. Their response boiled down to an assertion that the government has the authority to kill Americans without having to account to any court for its actions.

But the U.S. Constitution requires due process when life is at stake. The government cannot be permitted to deprive an American child of his life without any judicial review, even after the fact.

More broadly, thousands of people have been killed by U.S. drones in a program that began in 2002 and has expanded dramatically under the Obama administration.

Part of the problem with the targeted killing program is the government’s vague and shifting legal standards.

The program has gone from targeting specific individuals on so-called kill lists to targeting groups of unidentified individuals who fit a secret profile. According to administration officials, the government even classifies any male who appears to be of military age as a “militant” when it tallies a strike’s casualties.

In the face of the government’s official silence about the death of his grandson, Nasser al-Awlaki went to court to seek answers. At issue in the lawsuit, which was filed by the American Civil Liberties Union and the Center for Constitutional Rights, is the government’s obligation to account for its actions in killing Abdulrahman, his father and another U.S. citizen, Samir Khan.

If this case is dismissed, as the government asks, a grieving grandfather will be left without any explanation or accountability for the death of his 16-year-old grandson.

And Americans will be left with a government that insists it has the unilateral and unreviewable power to kill people, including Americans, that it deems to present a threat to the nation’s security – even when, like Abdulrahman, they present no such threat.

That would be a terrifying precedent to set.

Source

California court overturns rape conviction because woman was unmarried

0

A man convicted of raping a woman by pretending to be her boyfriend in the darkness of her bedroom was granted a retrial by a California appeals court, which overturned the man’s rape conviction.

Julio Morales was accused of entering a woman’s bedroom after her boyfriend had gone home and after the woman had fallen asleep, initiating sexual intercourse while she was sleeping and under the influence of alcohol. The victim, who was not awake to see her boyfriend leave, believed the rapist was the one she was dating — until a ray of light flashed across his face, revealing his identity.

The woman pressed charges and Morales was sentenced to three years imprisonment. But California’s Second District Court of Appeals lifted these charges and called for a retrial after examination of an 1872 law, which considers a crime a rape only if the sleeping or unconscious victim “submits under the belief that the person committing the act is the victim’s spouse.” If the victim had been married, the act would have been considered a rape, but the law does not protect against a perpetrator deceiving a woman into believing he is her boyfriend.

“A man enters the dark bedroom of an unmarried woman after seeing her boyfriend leave late at night, and has sexual intercourse with the woman while pretending to be the boyfriend,” the court said in its ruling. “Has the man committed rape? Because of historical anomalies in the law and the statutory definition of rape, the answer is no, even though, if the woman had been married and the man had impersonated her husband, the answer would be yes.”

The victim alleges that after she realized Morales was not her boyfriend, she pushed him away and screamed until he left. Morales’ lawyers claim that their client does not remember being pushed away and that he did nothing against the woman’s will.

After claiming his conviction was faulty under the California penal code, Morales now has another chance at having his punishment lifted and walking free.

“We reluctantly hold that a person who accomplished sexual intercourse by impersonating someone other than a married victim’s spouse is not guilty of the crime of rape of an unconscious person,” the appeals court ruled.

A similar case occurred in 2009, in which a Connecticut man pretended to be his identical twin’s brother and deceivingly raped his twin’s girlfriend, continuing after she tried to fight him off. Jared Rohrig, a 25-year-old police officer, surrendered to authorities and was charged for first-degree sexual assault. Even though he surrendered, the man was able to avoid jail time with a plea deal. Rohrig served a 90-day home confinement and paid a $3,000 fee, but evaded the years of imprisonment that rape offenders are usually forced to serve in the US.

In 2010, a law resembling California’s  stopped an unmarried woman from pressing rape charges against a stranger in Idaho, who pretended to be her boyfriend. Idaho’s law was amended in 2011 to protect all women — both married and unmarried — from rape by men pretending to be their lovers. But since California has not revised its 19thcentury law, Morales may soon walk free for his deceitful actions while other rape offenders spend decades in the US prison system.

Source

Idle No More: Indigenous Peoples in Canada Actions in Support of Chief’s Hunger Strike

0
RealNewsNetwork.com, Real News Network, Real News, Real News For Real People, IWT are trademarks and service marks of IWT.TV inc. “The Real News” is the flagship show of IWT and Real News Network.

All original content on this site is copyright of The Real News Network. Click here for more

Problems with this site? Please let us know

Linux VPS Hosting by Star Dot Hosting

Guantanamo’s continuing legacy 11 years later and President Obama’s second term

0

Via 911 Blogger |

With President Obama’s second term about to begin, one of his administration’s first promises, that it would close the military detention center at Guantanamo Bay, Cuba, looks all but abandoned after he signed a defense bill late Wednesday that includes an array of tough restrictions on the transfer of detainees out of the facility.

Obama had threatened to veto the $633 billion National Defense Authorization Act but signed it, as he did last year, with a statement criticizing sections of the bill that he said are “unwarranted restrictions on the executive branch’s authority” by Congress.

In the case of Guantanamo, the legislation bars the transfer of detainees into the United States for any purpose, including trials in federal court. It also requires the defense secretary to meet rigorous conditions before any detainee can be returned to his own country or resettled in a third country.

Plea agreement rules

The measure may also have the little-noticed effect of reducing the number of prosecutions in military commissions at Guantanamo by making it more difficult for the government to reach plea agreements with defendants.

Until now, five of the seven completed prosecutions at Guantanamo have come through plea agreements, and a number of other detainees are anxious to strike deals with military prosecutors in return for a certain date of release, military officials and defense attorneys said.

Previously, the government could simply transfer out a detainee who had pleaded guilty and served his time without meeting stringent congressional reporting requirements. But the 2013 act removes that exception and requires the defense secretary to certify that such detainees will not be a future threat. The Pentagon has not been willing to provide that kind of certification for any detainee, including those cleared for release.

Read more

Data protection agency says Facebook violates law

0

Data protection commissioner says social network violates law by not allowing users to use a pseudonym

A German state data protection agency has threatened Facebook’s billionaire founder and chief executive Mark Zuckerberg with a €20,000 (£16,000) fine if Facebook does not allow Germans to have anonymous accounts on the social network.

In letters to Zuckerberg in California, and also to Dublin-based Facebook Ireland Ltd, the data protection commissioner for the northern German state of Schleswig-Holstein, Thilo Weichert, said the current rules violated German law by requiring users to provide their identities. “It is unacceptable that a US portal like Facebook violates German data protection law, unopposed and with no prospect of an end,” said Weichert.

Under German law, media services, including Facebook, must offer users the choice of using a pseudonym.

It is not the first time that German privacy watchdogs have taken on Facebook. In 2011, Schleswig-Holstein banned local organisations and companies from using Facebook’s “like” button, which it said allowed the site to monitor users; and the same year Hamburg’s data protection authority ruled that Facebook’s facial recognition feature violated German privacy laws. However, data protection experts said they thought it was unlikely that Facebook would comply with the latest attempt to force the site into line with German law.

“I think it is not very likely Facebook will change its business model for one country, or even just one region in Germany,” said Jörg Hladjk, a lawyer specialising in data protection at Hunton & Williams in Brussels. “Just from a business perspective, this does not make a lot of sense.”

Weichert said Facebook had filed for legal protection at the administrative court in Schleswig-Holstein, but there had been no change of position on Facebook’s side.

A Facebook spokesman said the orders were without merit and a waste of German taxpayers’ money. He added that the company would fight vigorously.

Source

9 Ways to Beat the Patriarchal Christian Right on Abortion

0

Abortion is a moral, sacred choice, but the religious right has twisted the truth in an effort to maintain their patriarchal power. Here’s how to win the conversation back.

January 4, 2013  |  

Heavy clouds are seen at sunset over Saint Peter’s Basilica in the Vatican in November 2012. An independent Roman Catholic newspaper in the United States called Monday for a campaign to reverse the Vatican’s refusal to allow women to become priests.

Like this article?

Join our email list:

Stay up to date with the latest headlines via email.

Most Americans think of childbearing as a deeply personal or even sacred decision. So do most reproductive rights advocates. That is why we don’t think anybody’s boss or any institution should have a say in it. But for almost three decades, those of us who hold this view have failed to create a resonant conversation about why, sometimes, it is morally or spiritually imperative that a woman can stop a pregnancy that is underway.

My friend Patricia offers a single reason for her passionate defense of reproductive care that includes abortion: Every baby should have its toes kissed. If life is precious and helping our children to flourish is one of the most precious obligations we take on in life, then being able to stop an ill-conceived gestation is a sacred gift. Deciding whether to keep or terminate a pregnancy is a process that is laden with enduring values: responsibility, stewardship, love, honesty, compassion, freedom, balance, discernment. But how often do we hear words like these coming from pro-choice advocates?

Can we reclaim the moral and spiritual high ground? Yes. But to do so will require a challenge to the status quo on two fronts. Rather than ignoring the right’s  claims, we must confront their arguments. We must also express our pro-choice position in clear, resonant moral and spiritual terms. In other words, in combination, we must show why ours is the more moral, more spiritual position.

This isn’t as hard as it sounds. Most “pro-life” positions aren’t really pro-life; they are no-choice. They are designed to protecttraditional gender roles and patriarchal institutions and, specifically, institutional religion. The Catholic Bishops and Southern Baptist Convention–both leaders in the charge against reproductive rights– represent traditions in which male “headship” and control of female fertility have long been tools of competition for money and power. They use moral language to advance goals that have little to do with the wellbeing of women or children or the sacred web of life that sustains us all.

The arguments they make to attain these ends are powerful emotionally but not rationally. They appeal to antiquated and brittle conceptions of God. They appeal to the crumbling illusion of biblical and ecclesiastical perfection–and the crumbling authority of authority itself. They corrupt the civil rights tradition and turn religious freedom on its head. They play games with our protective instinct and cheapen what it means to be a person. They lie.

That adds up to a lot of vulnerability in what should be the stronghold of the priesthood: their claim to speak for what is good and right. 

If we want Americans to understand and distance from the moral emptiness of the “pro-life” movement, we will have to challenge the patriarchs in on their home turf, in their position as moral guides.

Here, for openers, are a few ways we might change the conversation:

1.       Talk about the whole moral continuum. A moral continuum ranges from actions that are forbidden, to those that are allowed, to those that are obligatory. When it comes to abortion, we talk only about one half of this continuum–Is it forbidden or is it allowed?–when, in actuality, a women faced with an ill-conceived pregnancy often experiences herself at the other end of the continuum, wrestling with a set of competing duties or obligations. What is my responsibility to my other children? To society? To my partner? To myself? (To cite a personal example, my husband and I chose an abortion under circumstances where it would have felt like a violation of our core values to do otherwise.) The current conversation doesn’t reflect the real quandaries women face, one in which moral imperatives can and do compete with other moral imperatives. Nor does it reflect the wide range of spiritual values and god concepts that enter into the decision making process.

9 Ways to Beat the Patriarchal Christian Right

0

Abortion is a moral, sacred choice, but the religious right has twisted the truth in an effort to maintain their patriarchal power. Here’s how to win the conversation back.

January 4, 2013  |  

Heavy clouds are seen at sunset over Saint Peter’s Basilica in the Vatican in November 2012. An independent Roman Catholic newspaper in the United States called Monday for a campaign to reverse the Vatican’s refusal to allow women to become priests.

Like this article?

Join our email list:

Stay up to date with the latest headlines via email.

Most Americans think of childbearing as a deeply personal or even sacred decision. So do most reproductive rights advocates. That is why we don’t think anybody’s boss or any institution should have a say in it. But for almost three decades, those of us who hold this view have failed to create a resonant conversation about why, sometimes, it is morally or spiritually imperative that a woman can stop a pregnancy that is underway.

My friend Patricia offers a single reason for her passionate defense of reproductive care that includes abortion: Every baby should have its toes kissed. If life is precious and helping our children to flourish is one of the most precious obligations we take on in life, then being able to stop an ill-conceived gestation is a sacred gift. Deciding whether to keep or terminate a pregnancy is a process that is laden with enduring values: responsibility, stewardship, love, honesty, compassion, freedom, balance, discernment. But how often do we hear words like these coming from pro-choice advocates?

Can we reclaim the moral and spiritual high ground? Yes. But to do so will require a challenge to the status quo on two fronts. Rather than ignoring the right’s  claims, we must confront their arguments. We must also express our pro-choice position in clear, resonant moral and spiritual terms. In other words, in combination, we must show why ours is the more moral, more spiritual position.

This isn’t as hard as it sounds. Most “pro-life” positions aren’t really pro-life; they are no-choice. They are designed to protecttraditional gender roles and patriarchal institutions and, specifically, institutional religion. The Catholic Bishops and Southern Baptist Convention–both leaders in the charge against reproductive rights– represent traditions in which male “headship” and control of female fertility have long been tools of competition for money and power. They use moral language to advance goals that have little to do with the wellbeing of women or children or the sacred web of life that sustains us all.

The arguments they make to attain these ends are powerful emotionally but not rationally. They appeal to antiquated and brittle conceptions of God. They appeal to the crumbling illusion of biblical and ecclesiastical perfection–and the crumbling authority of authority itself. They corrupt the civil rights tradition and turn religious freedom on its head. They play games with our protective instinct and cheapen what it means to be a person. They lie.

That adds up to a lot of vulnerability in what should be the stronghold of the priesthood: their claim to speak for what is good and right. 

If we want Americans to understand and distance from the moral emptiness of the “pro-life” movement, we will have to challenge the patriarchs in on their home turf, in their position as moral guides.

Here, for openers, are a few ways we might change the conversation:

1.       Talk about the whole moral continuum. A moral continuum ranges from actions that are forbidden, to those that are allowed, to those that are obligatory. When it comes to abortion, we talk only about one half of this continuum–Is it forbidden or is it allowed?–when, in actuality, a women faced with an ill-conceived pregnancy often experiences herself at the other end of the continuum, wrestling with a set of competing duties or obligations. What is my responsibility to my other children? To society? To my partner? To myself? (To cite a personal example, my husband and I chose an abortion under circumstances where it would have felt like a violation of our core values to do otherwise.) The current conversation doesn’t reflect the real quandaries women face, one in which moral imperatives can and do compete with other moral imperatives. Nor does it reflect the wide range of spiritual values and god concepts that enter into the decision making process.

‘Big Brother’ CCTV Internet Company Expansion Slammed

0

Australians are now able to view CCTV footage in UK stores in a move slammed as “pointless and perverted.”

Cornwall-based website Internet Eyes offers rewards of up to £250 a month to people who detect shoplifting and other crimes on a network of security cameras.

Website founder Tony Morgan said CCTV was failing as a deterrent because shop-owners do not have time to watch the footage and this move would provide 24-hour coverage.

However civil liberties campaigners have described the expansion as “pointless and peverted”, slamming the website for offerring a “deviant’s dream.”

Its expansion into Australia means users some 12,000 miles away will be able to access footage from 200 cameras over the internet and pocket cash for identifying suspects.

But civil liberties campaigners Big Brother Watch (BB Watch) said the website was “a sad indictment of how out of control the British obsession with CCTV has become”.

BB Watch director Nick Pickles said: “This is a deviant’s dream, giving armchair snoopers the ability to sit and watch CCTV footage from across the country at their leisure.

“The people watching these cameras have no training, no legal oversight and have to pay to use the service.”

He went on: “What kind of person volunteers to spend their time watching CCTV cameras in shops they have no connection with in the vague hope of winning a prize?

“Given users don’t know where the camera they are watching is located, it’s also impossible for them to raise an alarm with the police. It’s a pointless and perverted system that puts privacy at risk and it baffles me that it’s even legal.”

Internet Eyes, which has around 8.000 subscribers and six employees, is available for £1.99 a month or £15.99 a year with each viewer allowed five alerts a month when they believe they have spotted a crime.

The viewer can watch 10 minutes of footage at a time before the camera switches location. Users can not access camera footage within 30 miles of their own location.

Shop-owners receive an email with a 30-second video clip of the moments leading up to the alert. If the alert results in detecting a crime, the viewer accrues reward points.

Mr Morgan, who also runs a B&B in Dawlish, Devon, said: “We find it difficult to see what we’re doing wrong.

He said Australian viewers, who were offered the service from December 21, would be up to 12,000 miles away and were unlikely to recognise anyone in the footage.

Last year government’s surveillance camera commissioner warned advances in CCTV technology could breach British human rights laws unless they are properly regulated.

High-definition cameras that can recognise people’s faces from up to half-a-mile away are being installed all over the country without any public consultation, Andrew Rennison said.

He is expected to report back to Parliament with any concerns over how CCTV and automatic number plate recognition (ANPR) systems are being used.

Source

Economist predicts US dollar will collapse in 2013

0
The US dollar is expected to take a value nosedive in 2013 if China refuses to continue financing Washington’s spiraling debt, an economic analyst tells Press TV.

Touching upon the recent tax law and spending cuts in the United States, Max Keiser noted in a Thursday interview with Press TV that when America takes on more debt than it is able to repay by collecting taxes, the difference is paid for and financed by China.

China’s support for the US debts has turned America into the worst G20 economy in terms of the gap between its spending and revenues, he pointed out.

Keiser noted that in 2013 “…the US dollar will collapse because China won’t finance it anymore and that is the risk that we are talking about, the risk that [the US President Barack] Obama does not tell his population and that is unconscionable; that is a lack of leadership.”

The analyst stated that US is heading into a “hyperinflationary economy” as a consequence of the catastrophe caused by “the very rich in America.”

He also warned of an imminent neo-feudalism in the global economy where there is an “incredible disparity” between the economic titans and the ordinary public.

On Wednesday, Obama signed into law the ‘American Taxpayer Relief Act of 2012’ to avert the so-called fiscal cliff.

On January 1, the House of Representatives voted 257 to 167, approving the bill, which entails raising taxes on the wealthiest Americans, while exempting others who earn less than $450,000 a year. It will also put off USD109 billion in budget cuts for two months.

The Congressional Budget Office has criticized the bill, saying it would add almost four trillion dollars to the federal deficit over a decade, since the deal continues to entitle nearly all Americans with low tax rates.

The International Monetary Fund said the bill was too limited to deal with the financial problems of the United States.

“Disposition Matrix” Sketched Out on How U.S. Decides to Kill Citizens

0

, Reason |

As noted on Reason 24/7, a federal judge has summarily dismissed FOIA requests by the New York Times and the ACLU for the legal justification used by the White House to order the killing of U.S. citizens. While officialdom is relatively silent on the workings of America’s drone war, the work to piece together how the U.S. might be operating based on what we know it’s doing continues. At the Atlantic Daniel Byman and Benjamin Wittes, fellows at the Brookings Institution, put together a “disposition matrix” of how the U.S. might go about deciding which U.S. citizens it suspects of terrorism it could/should kill.

 

more than a roll of the dice

Byman and Wittes note that in fact “the domestic criminal justice system is actually one of the workhorses of American counterterrorism” and so arrest, indictment and prosecution is the most common path along the flow chart (#2 if the target is in the United States). The next terminal point, “prosecution or detention by allied forces” might be better known as rendition. One U.S. citizen sued in 2009 after being captured in Kenya two years earlier. The 2011 National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA) made it easier for the government to rendition U.S. citizens.

The most serious terminal point, “target with lethal force” (#13), has only been reached once, that we know of, by the White House, when Anwar al-Awlaki was targeted in a drone strike in Yemen. Al-Awlaki was alleged by the U.S. government to have been an “operational leader” of Al-Qaeda, and Eric Holder insisted afterward that the U.S. can kill citizens when they present an “imminent threat,” though what imminent threat al-Awlaki might have posed has never been revealed. Of note, also, is the death of his teenage son, a U.S. citizen as well, in another air strike two weeks later. At first the government insisted al-Awlaki’s son was a 21-year-old Al-Qaeda fighter, but the Washington Post later printed his birth certificate. Robert Gibbs, working for the Obama campaign, suggested the teenager ought to have had “a far more responsible father.”  There are no indications that the teen was an operational leader or an imminent threat. As for the elder al-Awlaki, he had never been indicted for any terrorism-related charges by the U.S., and the most prominent terrorist act he’s been associated with in the press was the shooting at Fort Hood, which the U.S. government does not classify as a terrorist attack but an incident of workplace violence (Major Nidal Hasan is currently on trial in military court for the shooting spree).

The New York Times detailed some of the inner workings of the White House’s drone war last year.

Secret NSA program concerns privacy groups

0

CS Monitor |

The National Security Agency is spearheading a program, dubbed Perfect Citizen, to develop technology to protect the power grid from cyberattack. The project worries privacy rights groups.

Newly released documents confirm that the National Security Agency (NSA), America‘s top cyberespionage organization, is spearheading a cloaked and controversial program to develop technology that could protect the US power grid from cyberattack.

Existence of the program, dubbed Perfect Citizen, was revealed in a 2010 Wall Street Journal article. But intriguing new details are revealed in documents released by the NSA last month to the Electronic Privacy Information Center (EPIC), an Internet privacy group that petitioned for them in 2010 under the Freedom of Information Act.

Of the 188 pages of documents released by the agency, roughly half were redacted to remove classified information. Even so, the documents show Perfect Citizen to be in the fourth year of a five-year program begun in 2009. Valued at up to $91 million, the Perfect Citizen technology is being developed by Raytheon, the Waltham, Mass., the defense contractor in Waltham, Mass., that won it.

The released documents are the contract that the NSA drew up with Raytheon. A Raytheon spokesman referred all comments on the program to the NSA.

All along, the NSA has maintained that Perfect Citizen is “purely a vulnerabilities assessment and capabilities development contract” that “does not involve the monitoring of communications or the placement of sensors on utility company systems,” according to an NSA statement released in 2010 — and now rereleased to the Monitor.

What the documents reveal is an apparently small but robust program authorized to hire 28 software engineers, program managers, and laboratory personnel. This includes a pair of “penetration testers” — essentially good-guy hackers who specialize in breaking into networks.

Their assignment as part of the team: discover vulnerabilities that lie in the electronic interface that connects the computer networks of utility companies. Then the team can come up with software and hardware plugs to patch those digital holes.

“Sensitive Control Systems (SCS) perform data collection and control of large-scale distributed utilities or provide automation of infrastructure processes,” says the Perfect Citizen contract’s “Statement of Work” document. “The protection of SCS is essential to mission operations and has become a significant point of interest in support of the Department of Defense and the Intelligence Community.”

Further, the document says, “prevention of a loss due to a cyber or physical attack, or recovery of operational capability after such an event, is crucial to the continuity of the Department of Defense, the intelligence community, and the operation of [Signals Intelligence] systems.”

While most might agree the program’s national-security goal is laudable, the question of just how to go about protecting the power grid has been a controversial topic in Congress and among Internet privacy advocates leery of government control of the Internet. Of particular concern among such advocates is shielding privately owned corporate computer networks deemed to be “critical infrastructure” from potentially intrusive digital monitoring.

Citing unnamed sources, the original Wall Street Journal article said that the program did indeed involve placing sensors that can detect illegitimate cyberactivity. But the new documents don’t clarify this point. Deploying such sensors would be especially sensitive since the NSA is an arm of the Pentagon charged with collecting and analyzing foreign communications and defending US government communications and computer networks — not domestic spying.

Read more

Google Settles FTC Antitrust Probe

0

TechCrunch |

As expected, the Federal Trade Commission’s Chairman Jon Leibowitz just announced at a press conference in Washington, D.C., that the agency has settled with Google to resolve the 20-month antitrust probe into the company’s alleged anticompetitive behavior. While Google voluntarily agreed to make a number of changes to its business practices, the FTC did not levy any fines. It’s hard to look at today’s decision and not see Google as the clear winner.

Google is making two voluntary product changes:

  • More choice for websites: Websites can already opt out of Google Search, and they can now remove content (for example reviews) from specialized search results pages, such as local, travel, and shopping.
  • More ad campaign control: Advertisers can already export their ad campaigns from Google AdWords. They will now be able to mix and copy ad campaign data within third-party services that use our AdWords API.

It’s not clear how exactly this opt-out will work, but chances are that Google will offer a tag that competitors can use to tell Google’s search algorithm to exclude their content from certain Google products.

Interestingly, the FTC decided not to take any action in connection with the allegation that Google unfairly biased its own products over competing products, something that will likely upset many of its competitors.

Google also agreed with the FTC (PDF) that it “will seek to resolve standard-essential patent disputes through a neutral third party before seeking injunctions. This agreement establishes clear rules of the road for standards essential patents going forward.” Essentially, this means that Google has agreed to license certain patents to its mobile phone rivals.

The FTC says that “Google has agreed to a Consent Order that prohibits it from seeking injunctions against a willing licensee, either in federal court or at the ITC, to block the use of any standard-essential patents that the company has previously committed to license on FRAND terms.” Google also notes that “this agreement establishes clear rules of the road for standards essential patents going forward.”

“The changes Google has agreed to make will ensure that consumers continue to reap the benefits of competition in the online marketplace and in the market for innovative wireless devices they enjoy,” said FTC Chairman Jon Leibowitz. “This was an incredibly thorough and careful investigation by the Commission, and the outcome is a strong and enforceable set of agreements.”

This is, of course, not the first time the FTC has settled with Google and given the company a slap on the wrist. In August 2012, the FTC also settled with Google when the company knowingly bypassed Safari’s privacy settings in oder to place tracking cookies on users’ machines. Back then, Google paid $22.5 million to settle the charge.

When the FTC started its investigation, Google said that it would cooperate, but the company never admitted any wrongdoing. Instead, Google always argued that its actions have always been guided by “what’s best for the user” and worked to create loyal customers without locking them into its products.

After a similar investigation in Europe, Google is expected to also settle with the European Commission after it made a number of concessions over the summer.

The Decision

Here is the FTC’s description of the changes Google has agreed to:

Google will not seek injunctions to block rivals from using patents essential to key technologies

In 2012, Google paid about $12.5 billion to acquire Motorola Mobility (MMI), including MMI’s patent portfolio of over 24,000 patents and patent applications. These patents have been a significant source of revenue for at least a decade, and hundreds of MMI’s patents are essential to industry standards used to provide wireless connectivity and for internet-related technologies. These standards are essential for smartphones, tablets, gaming systems, operating systems, and the increasing number of devices offering wireless connectivity or high definition video.

Development and use of these types of standards is a cornerstone for many high-tech markets, and encourages innovation and investment in high-tech products, according to the FTC’s complaint. By agreeing to standards, companies can ensure that the numerous components of a device or a technology network can work together seamlessly, often called “interoperability.”

Setting a standard, however, can have the effect of giving market power to the owner of a patent that is deemed essential to the standard, according to the agency. That patent — even if it is only on a small component of a much larger and more complex device — can be used to “hold up” a licensee for an excessive royalty. To avoid this problem, technology companies involved in setting a standard commit to license standard-essential patents on “fair, reasonable and non-discriminatory” terms — known as FRAND terms.

The Commission’s complaint alleges that Google reneged on its FRAND commitments and pursued — or threatened to pursue — injunctions against companies that need to use MMI’s standard-essential patents in their devices and were willing to license them on FRAND terms. Specifically the company pursued injunctions in federal district court and at the United States International Trade Commission (“ITC”) to block competing technology companies from using MMI standard-essential patents.

The FTC alleged that this type of patent hold-up is what the standard setting organizations sought to prevent by instituting FRAND licensing requirements. According to the FTC, if left unchecked, this type of patent hold-up can lead to higher prices, as companies may pay higher royalties for the use of Google’s patents because of the threat of an injunction, and then pass those higher prices on to consumers. This may cause companies in technology industries to abandon the standard-setting process and limit or forgo investment in new technologies, according to the agency.

To remedy this concern, Google has agreed to a Consent Order that prohibits it from seeking injunctions against a willing licensee, either in federal court or at the ITC, to block the use of any standard-essential patents that the company has previously committed to license on FRAND terms.

Google will remove restrictions hampering advertisers’ management of their ad campaigns across competing ad platforms

Under a separate commitment, Google has agreed to remove restrictions on the use of its online search advertising platform, AdWords, that may make it more difficult for advertisers to coordinate online advertising campaigns across multiple platforms.

Advertisers who wish to use a search advertising platform spend considerable time, effort, and resources preparing extensive bids, including keywords, price information, and targeting information. Once an advertiser has entered the information necessary to create a search advertising campaign, the advertising platform sends critical data back to the advertisers that they need to evaluate the effectiveness of, and to further manage, their campaign. Advertising platforms use application programming interfaces, known as APIs, to give advertisers direct access to these advertising platforms so they can develop their own software programs to automatically manage and optimize their advertising campaigns.

Some FTC Commissioners were concerned that Google’s contractual conditions governing the use of its API made it more difficult for an advertiser to simultaneously manage a campaign on AdWords and on competing ad platforms, and that these restrictions might impair competition in search advertising.

Google will give websites the ability to “opt out” of display on Google vertical properties

Under the same commitment, Google also has promised to provide all websites the option to keep their content out of Google’s vertical search offerings, while still having them appear in Google’s general, or “organic,” web search results. The FTC investigated allegations that Google misappropriated content, such as user reviews and star ratings, from competing websites in order to improve its own vertical offerings, such as Google Local and Google Shopping. Some FTC Commissioners were concerned that this conduct might chill firms’ incentives to innovate on the Internet.

FTC’s investigation into allegations of search bias

The FTC conducted an extensive investigation into allegations that Google had manipulated its search algorithms to harm vertical websites and unfairly promote its own competing vertical properties, a practice commonly known as “search bias.” In particular, the FTC evaluated Google’s introduction of “Universal Search” — a product that prominently displays targeted Google properties in response to specific categories of searches, such as shopping and local — to determine whether Google used that product to reduce or eliminate a nascent competitive threat. Similarly, the investigation focused on the allegation that Google altered its search algorithms to demote certain vertical websites in an effort to reduce or eliminate a nascent competitive threat. According to the Commission statement, however, the FTC concluded that the introduction of Universal Search, as well as additional changes made to Google’s search algorithms — even those that may have had the effect of harming individual competitors — could be plausibly justified as innovations that improved Google’s product and the experience of its users. It therefore has chosen to close the investigation.

Judge: No TV broadcast of Guantanamo 9/11 trial

0

AP |

SAN JUAN, Puerto Rico – A military judge has denied a request to allow television broadcast coverage of the Guantanamo Bay war crimes tribunal for five men charged in the Sept. 11 attacks.

Defense lawyers requested TV coverage of proceedings at the U.S. base in Cuba. But the Defense Department had authorized only closed-circuit broadcast to several military bases in the northeast U.S.

The ruling from Army Col. James Pohl said the court had no authority to allow general broadcast. A Pentagon spokesman declined comment Thursday.

Defense attorney James Connell said the public should be able to view proceedings against five men accused of planning and aiding the attacks. A hearing in the case is scheduled for January but the trial is expected to be at least a year away.

The Real Murders Of Children

0

Dr. Elias Akleh |

The whole US was shocked when armed with automatic assault weapons 20 years old Adam Lanza murdered 20 first grade students in Newtown, Connecticut, yet very few, if any, Americans get shocked when their presidents murder thousands of similar children of other nations but call them heroes and defenders of freedom and democracy.

I was not chocked but heart broken when I heard of Lanza’s crime. Such crime is more common in the American culture than one would think of. Following the daily news one can find many reports of murder in every American state. They range from family violence against wives and children, gangs drive-by shooting, and school/university mass murder among others.

Such mass murder, especially in schools and universities, has become an increasingly common trend in the US. Newtown massacre is considered the nation’s second-worst school shooting. Few months earlier in April 2012 seven students were murdered in Oikos University in Oakland, California. In 2007 33 students were murdered at Virginian Tech University at Blacksburg, Virginia. In October 2006 6 students were murdered and 5 injured at West Nickel Mines School in Lancaster, Pennsylvania. In March 2005 8 students were murdered in Red Lake Senior High School in Red Lake, Minnesota. In April 1999, 15 students were murdered in Columbine High School, Littleton, Colorado. In March 1998, 5 students were murdered at Westside Middle School in Jonesboro, Arkansas. In August 1966, 16 students were murdered and 31 injured at the University of Texas, Austin, Texas. These are just examples of school/university mass murder among a long list, not mentioning the many other mass murders that took place in movie theaters, shopping malls, and other common places.

These crimes are reflections of the brutality of the American culture that had started with the discovery of the American continent with the mass genocides of the hundreds of millions of the Native American Indians and continues until our present day. The US is a war mongering culture that has been involved in continuous wars and genocides along its entire history. The American military budget exceeds all military budgets of all other countries combined. For 2013 alone the American administration had allotted a total of $560 Billions for the military. American presidents are war presidents as President George Bush, the son, kept on boasting: “I am a war president.”

After the Newtown massacre Americans; news media and politicians, focused on wrong solutions to this social sick phenomenon. Some called for weapons ban laws while others called for more arms for the people to defend themselves against such deranged criminals. Laws for arms control have been in place for a long time but could not stop violence. Many politicians, including governors and senators joined the National Rifle Association (NRA) CEO and president Wayne LaPierre’s insane call for arming school teachers and posting armed guards in every school and maybe every movie theater and shopping malls, stating that: “The only thing that stops a bad guy with a gun is a good guy with a gun.”

They all ignored the fact that this is solely an American cultural sickness. Many other countries have mentally sick people and weapons in the hands of their citizens. Yet none of them have school mass murder like the US. Americans are inflicted with a superiority complex. Like Zionist Israelis Americans believe they are better than the rest of the world, that they alone are better fit to lead this world, that they have the right to control natural resources of other countries, and that their ways are the ideals that should be spread all over the world even through brutal military intervention if needs be. America was founded on militaristic brutality. Its economy is built on military industry. A violent culture is needed to drive this military industry and to wage brutal wars against other cultures.

Violence is a learned behavior. Superiority, ethnicity, discrimination, segregation, division, and hatred of other groups are indoctrinated into the psyche of the new generations through indirect means of education, advertising and media. American history is so distorted and elitist. Social values are materialistic, egotistic, and militaristic. Violence, sadism and brutality are glorified in the movies and video games industries. American movies and TV shows have moved from innocent entertainment to violent criminality; murder, war, and sadistic stories. Violence, torture, murder and blood scenes are common and glorified in most of the movies. Gruesome violence, torture and murder in American movies, such as the eight academy awards winning movie “Inglourious Basterds”, are depicted as acceptable and glorified behaviors. Even cartoons and children movies contain violent scenes. The actors of such violent movies are glorified, honored and rewarded in order to become a role model for the very impressionable young generations. Almost all video games are in one way or another violent and militaristic. They give the players the impressions that killing others are fun and are safe without any negative consequences. Hollywood movies and TV shows have become effective brainwashing methods to teach impressionable young Americans that violence, drugs, and sexual deviations are acceptable and exciting behaviors.

In their response to the Newtown massacre the whole American media outlets, and President Obama himself, had expressed their shock and heart-broken feelings for those “beautiful little kids. They had their entire lives ahead of them..” as expressed by Obama, while pretending to wipe a shadow tear in the corner of his eye. The media is so hypocrite because they had never sympathized with the beautiful little kids of other countries murdered by American soldiers. Obama does not care about any child except, maybe, his own. He, like previous American presidents, had authorized the military to bomb the children of other countries while studying in their own schools, playing in their own backyards, or while asleep in the arms of their mothers.

Throughout American history, American presidents had murdered hundreds of thousands of children all over the world; in South American Latin countries, in Europe, in Asia, in the Middle East, and in Africa. The list of these murdered children is so long that we can not mention it here. Looking at the previous two decades only we can remember the 500 thousand Iraqi children who died due to the 1991 American imposed sanctions against Iraq, whom Madeleine Albright, then US Secretary of State, considered their death a price worth to pay. In 2003 unjustified American invasion of Iraq hundreds of thousands of undocumented Iraqi children were killed and maimed by American bombs and soldiers. Once of the gruesome mass murder was the 2004 attack on Fallujah where American soldiers used phosphorus, napalm and depleted uranium bombs to wipe off the town and to incinerate in the event thousands of citizens including children and women. The murder is still going on to this day where daily American sponsored terrorist explosions murder many Iraqi citizens.

For the last 11 years the American forces had invaded and occupied Afghanistan and have been murdering Afghani children. This murder was expanded to hit Pakistani children in the border town. In the American AfPak theatre the President authorized targeted drone strikes that had killed hundreds of innocent children. The use of drone strikes has also been conducted in other countries such as Yemen and Sudan, each incident is considered an act of war under the international law.

In proxy wars the American administrations had armed and supported all Israeli wars against its Arab neighbors. The US had supported Israel’s 1982 invasion of Lebanon that destroyed much of that country and caused the death of hundreds of thousands of Lebanese children. This invited the retaliation of Lebanese freedom fighters, who bombed the American embassy in 1983 killing 63 Americans. The US had also supported Israel’s 2006 bombing of South Lebanon providing Israel with heavy bombs and cluster bombs that killed hundreds of Lebanese children.

The US had also supplied Israel with the phosphorus bombs that were used against Palestinians of Gaza Strip during the 2008/2009 Israeli aggression, murdering hundreds of children while in their sleep, and incinerating civilians sheltered in schools. The US one more time supported Israel’s 2012 attack on Gaza Strip when hundreds of civilians including at least 18 children were killed.

The American open proxy war against Syria supporting and arming terrorist militia groups is causing the death of thousands of Syrian children.

I wonder what is the difference between the deranged Adam Lanza, who murdered 20 children out of mental sickness, and any sane American president, like President Obama, who authors the murder of hundreds of thousands of children in other countries with conscious determination and pre-meditations out of power hunger and greed for the natural resources of their countries! Such a president is called a hero, a war president, defender of liberty and freedom, and a democracy advocate, while Adam is called deranged, mad, inhuman, crazy and mentally sick. The president gets a noble peace prize while the mentally sick gets a bullet in the head. Such presidents are actually blood thirsty savages worse than a mentally sick murderer.

President Obama stated “If there is even one step we can take to save another child … then surely we have an obligation to try.” President Obama, try the following! Rather than wasting billions of dollars on weapons to murder children of other nations and to destroy their countries inciting global hatred and terrorism against America, spend this money wisely on health and education for your own people, in helping developing nations build their economy and their educational systems in order to gain their trust, their love, and access to their natural resources through fair trade rather than through war and murder of their children.

Isn’t time for the US to become the leader in humanity than the leader in brutality? Isn’t time to evolve into real humans?

Fiscal Cliff Postmortems

0

Stephen Lendman, rinf.com |

Congressional profiles in courage are sorely lacking. Pretenders usually vote party line when asked or pressured.

No House or Senate member explained what constituents most need to know. Fiscal cliff hype reflects doublespeak duplicity. Previous articles explained.

America’s social contract is targeted. Bipartisan complicity wants it eroded and destroyed. Heavy lifting comes later. Eleventh hour legislation ducked tough issues. The battle of 2013 awaits.

Expect something greater than August 2011’s debt ceiling crisis. Version 2.0 will demand more pounds of flesh.

Republicans have Obama where they want him. They conceded on extending most expiring benefits. They settled for half the mandated $1.2 trillion sequester.

Get even time approaches. Expect post-inaugural hardball. Middle income and disadvantaged Americans will suffer most. Congressional takeaways will way exceed benefits given.

They’ll come incrementally. Obama and most Democrats support them. Eroding Social Security, Medicare, Medicaid and public pensions are prioritized. Privatizing and/or ending them altogether is planned longterm.

America’s social contract will be downsized. Plans are to destroy it altogether. By 2023 or earlier, it may be entirely gone, or too little to matter will remain.

No one in Congress explains. Media scoundrels are silent. What most people need to know, they’re not told. A rude awakening awaits. It’s not the America this writer grew up in.

Post-WW II, anyone wanting work found it. High pay/good benefit jobs were plentiful. Economic growth provided them. America was unchallenged economically. Its manufacturing base hadn’t moved offshore.

Union representation was high. New Deal/Great Society programs hadn’t eroded.

Real inflation was low. Today it’s around 9% based on how calculated decades earlier. New homes, cars, and other major purchases were affordable.

So was college. Student loan debt entrapment didn’t exist. Nor did post-9/11 police state repression. America was never beautiful. Compared to now, it almost seemed that way.

Millions were marginalized and left out earlier. Everyone except America’s super-rich is vulnerable today. Bipartisan complicity has big plans.

Both parties want America transformed. Third-worldizing is planned. So is institutionalizing police state harshness. Wealth, power, privilege, and dominance are prioritized. Nothing else matters.

Popular needs are targeted for elimination. A race to the bottom is planned. Repressive crackdowns await nonbelievers. Today’s hard times reflect much tougher times ahead.

It’s hard imagining the kind of nation they plan. Much is already in place. Worse ahead is coming. Both sides agree.

Postmortem commentaries followed fiscal cliff legislation enactment. Michael Hudson added Part III to his two-part article. He discussed “Why Today’s Fiscal Squeeze Imposes Needless Austerity.”

“Public borrowing creates a dependency that shifts economic planning to Wall Street and other financial centers,” he said. “When voters resist, it is time to replace democracy with oligarchy.”

Prioritizing debt repayment imposes “austerity, depression, unemployment, emigration and bankruptcy.”

Popular opposition is quelled any way it takes. Financialized economies are destructive. They’re falsely “depicted as a natural way to gain wealth.”

Taking on more debt is prioritized. Tax rules favor bankers and other corporate giants. America’s sacrosanct military spending goes untouched.

Increasing amounts assure permanent wars. Unconscionable annual budgets aren’t debated. They’re rubber-stamped and enacted.

Something has to give to maintain them. America’s social contract is targeted. It’s on the chopping block for elimination.

Austerity is policy. Popular needs don’t matter. Debt reduction hypocrisy masks exponentially higher levels annually.

Quantitative easing creates “free money.” Trillions subsidize Wall Street. Open-checking amounts are readily available.

At the same time, destroying America’s social contract is planned. Washington spurns doing the right thing.

Political priorities “encourage financial and rent extraction that has become the major economic problem of our epoch. Industrial productivity continues to rise, but debt is growing even more inexorably.”

“Instead of fueling economic growth, this credit/debt threatens to absorb the economic surplus, plunging the economy into austerity, debt deflation and negative equity.”

America’s “financial system is broken.” Wall Street bosses control government policies. Public debt rises exponentially. Money printing madness sustains it.

Imperial and corporate priorities punish ordinary Americans most. The worst is yet to come. Bipartisan complicity plans it.

On January 1, London Guardian contributor Heidi Moore headlined “Congress’ manufactured non-solution to its manufactured fiscal cliff crisis,” saying:

“The fiscal cliff deal doesn’t stop tax hikes, doesn’t reduce the deficit, (and) doesn’t avoid spending cuts….and it’s not even a deal.”

Winston Churchill once said America eventually does the right thing after exhausting all other alternatives. He didn’t know how Washington operates today.

It manufactured a fake fiscal cliff crisis. Duplicitous fear-mongering hype substitutes for doing the right thing.

“The much-praised deal is as thoughtless and hasty as you would expect from anything cobbled together at the last minute.”

Instead of resolving debt problems responsibly, enactment and planned legislation assures “an even bigger cliff, a fiscal mountain.”

It grows annually. Expect 2013 legislation to fall woefully short of addressing it responsibly. Both parties share blame. So does Obama. Self-congratulatory postmortems conceal dark policies planned.

Moore quoted Professor Emanuel Derman’s reaction to Senate passage. “This is all theater,” he said. It’s “full of sound and fury, signifying nothing.”

Following House passage, Moore added it’s only “the first act.” It’s a pathetic tepid one. It conceals planned hardball 2013 legislation.

Dean Baker contributed his own Guardian article. He headlined “Obama’s tax threshold concession bodes ill for debt ceiling talks,” saying:

Congress and Obama ignored Congressional Budget Office (CBO) and other forecasts. They predict higher tax rates and large spending cuts risk tipping America’s fragile economy into recession.

John Williams and other responsible economists say America’s already in one. Its economy is in worse shape than acknowledged. Deeper recession is likely. Protracted Main Street Depression already affects most ordinary households.

Fed policy doesn’t stimulate economic growth. Tax increases, planned budget cuts, and force-fed austerity assure much tougher times ahead.

Financial Times (FT) contributor Martin Sandbu said “Small deal will deliver more subpar growth.”

“More economic damage” was caused by Washington’s inability “to decide and stick to policy. This uncertainty, which leaves businesses preferring to hoard cash rather than invest, is the chief cause of the disappointing US performance in the past two years.”

“The folks in Washington” legislated more of the same.

Separately, the FT said “Fresh stand-off looms after US cliff deal.”

“Far from ending (America’s) budget battles,” congressional action “simply sets the stage for fresh confrontations (ahead) over the deficit and economic policy.”

Tough decisions were delayed. Congress always operates this way. Hold the champagne, said Foreign Policy’s David Rothkopf. House passage yesterday starts “the countdown to the next crisis.”

A much greater one awaits. Congressional legislation and what’s planned assure more debt and taxes.

All working Americans face tax hikes. It’s the first time in 20 years. Their impact is economically negative. Average increases are as follows:

For $50,001 – $75,000 income earners: $822 annually.

For workers making $100,001 – $200,000: $1,784.

For people earning $200,001 – $500,000: $2,711.

For $500,001 – $1 million income earners: $14,812.

Super-rich elites making over $2.7 million will pay on average $443,910 more.

House and Senate provisions raise over $600 billion in new taxes over the next decade. Every worker is affected.

Tax code provisions got more complicated.

Fifty-two tax credits were extended. Most are for one year. New battles loom for further extensions.

Section 206 provides capital gains tax exemption for property contributed for conservation.

Section 312 offers faster tax deductions for motor sports and entertainment complexes.

Section 317 permits expensing film and television productions. Hollywood got what it wanted.

Corporate research tax credits were extended. So were others for government-approved energy initiatives. Energy-efficient new homes are subsidized. So are some existing ones, cellulosic biofuel, and Indian coal facilities.

The alternative minimum tax (AMT) became permanent. For the first time, it’s automatically indexed to scandalously manipulated low inflation.

Government ends up bigger than ever. Negotiations await on spending cuts. Whatever’s agreed on won’t stop deficits rising exponentially.

House and Senate legislation raised taxes more than reported. Top rates go from 35 – 41%, not 39.6%. The higher figure includes phased out deductions.

The personal payroll tax rises from 4.2 – 6.2%. Doing so represents a 50% tax increase for most Americans.

The estate tax goes from 35 – 40%. Amounts under $5 million are exempted.

Capital gains and dividends taxes increase from 15 – 23.8%, not 20%. The higher figure includes a 3.8% Obamacare investment income surtax.

Five new taxes help pay for Obama’s Affordable Care Act. Higher income workers now pay more for Medicare. So do people using flexible spending accounts to defray health expenses.

Their contributions are capped at $2,500 annually. Most employer provided ones are $5,000.

Medical deductions are more limited. Obamacare raised the threshold from 7.5% to amounts over 10%. Seniors and spouses are exempt until 2016.

Medicare Part A tax rates rise from 1.45 – 2.35%. Doing so affects individuals earning over $200,000 and families above $250,000. Married couples filing separately and earning over $125,000 pay more.

Medical device manufacturers face a 2.3% excise tax. It’ll be priced into products they sell. Buyers will bear the burden. So will consumers in higher medical bills.

Longtime Chicago financial adviser, Terry Savage, reports the “Savage Truth.” She wished followers a happy new year. She said “good riddance to a bad Congress.”

She called congressional toing and froing a “Mad Hatter’s Tea Party.” She told CNN viewers their legislation represented an “Alice in Wonderland” moment.

They accomplished nothing. They extended benefits that should have been agreed on months earlier. They left exponentially rising deficits unaddressed.

Much ado about nothing reflects policy. “Will the next Congress be more sensible,” she asked? Don’t bet on it. Fiscal discipline are four-letter words.

Bipartisan irresponsibility assures worse times ahead. Better ones are distant memories.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

http://www.dailycensored.com/fiscal-cliff-postmortems/

Everything We Tell Ourselves About America and the World Is Wrong

0

Charles Eisenstein |

Every culture has a Story of the People to give meaning to the world. Part conscious and part unconscious, it consists of a matrix of agreements, narratives, and symbols that tell us why we are here, where we are headed, what is important, and even what is real. I think we are entering a new phase in the dissolution of our Story of the People, and therefore, with some lag time, of the edifice of civilization built on top of it.

Sometimes I feel intense nostalgia for the cultural mythology of my youth, a world in which there was nothing wrong with soda pop, in which the Superbowl was important, in which the world’s greatest democracy was bringing democracy to the world, in which science was going to make life better and better. Life made sense. If you worked hard you could get good grades, get into a good college, go to grad school or follow some other professional path, and you would be happy. With a few unfortunate exceptions, you would be successful if you obeyed the rules of our society: if you followed the latest medical advice, kept informed by reading the New York Times, and stayed away from Bad Things like drugs. Sure there were problems, but the scientists and experts were working hard to fix them. Soon a new medical advance, a new law, a new educational technique, would propel the onward improvement of life. My childhood perceptions were part of this Story of the People, in which humanity was destined to create a perfect world through science, reason, and technology, to conquer nature, transcend our animal origins, and engineer a rational society.

From my vantage point, the basic premises of this story seemed unquestionable. After all, it seemed to be working in my world. Looking back, I realize that this was a bubble world built atop massive human suffering and environmental degradation, but at the time one could live within that bubble without need of much self-deception. The story that surrounded us was robust. It easily kept anomalous data points on the margins.

Since my childhood in the 1970s, that story has eroded at an accelerating rate. More and more people in the West no longer believe that civilization is fundamentally on the right track. Even those who don’t yet question its basic premises in any explicit way seem to have grown weary of it. A layer of cynicism, a hipster self-awareness has muted our earnestness. What was once so real, say a plank in a party platform, today is seen through several levels of “meta” filters to parse it in terms of image and message. We are like children who have grown out of a story that once enthralled us, aware now that it is only a story.

At the same time, a series of new data points has disrupted the story from the outside. The harnessing of fossil fuels, the miracle of chemicals to transform agriculture, the methods of social engineering and political science to create a more rational and just society — each has fallen far short of its promise, and brought unanticipated consequences that threaten civilization. We just cannot believe anymore that the scientists have everything well in hand. Nor can we believe that the onward march of reason will bring on social utopia.

Today we cannot ignore the intensifying degradation of the biosphere, the malaise of the economic system, the decline in health, or the persistence and indeed growth of global poverty and inequality. We once thought economists would fix poverty, political scientists would fix social injustice, chemists and biologists would fix environmental problems, the power of reason would prevail and we would adopt sane policies. I remember looking at maps of rain forest decline in National Geographic in the early 1980s and feeling both alarm and relief — relief because at least the scientists and everyone who reads National Geographic is aware of the problem now, so something surely will be done.

Nothing was done. Rainforest decline accelerated, along with nearly every other environmental threat that we knew about in 1980. Our Story of the People trundled forward under the momentum of centuries, but with each passing decade the hollowing-out of its core, that started perhaps with the industrial-scale slaughter of World War One, extended further. When I was a child, our system of ideology and mass media still protected that story, but in the last thirty years the incursions of reality have punctured its protective shell and have ruptured its essential infrastructure. We no longer believe our storytellers, our elites. We don’t believe the politicians, we don’t believe the doctors, we don’t believe the professors, we don’t believe the bankers, we don’t believe the technologists. All of them imply that everything is under control, and we know that it is not. We have lost the vision of the future we once had; most people have no vision of the future at all. This is new for our society. Fifty or a hundred years ago, most people agreed on the general outlines of the future. We thought we knew where society was going. Even the Marxists and the capitalists agreed on its basic outlines: a paradise of mechanized leisure and scientifically engineered social harmony, with spirituality either abolished entirely or relegated to a materially inconsequential corner of life that happened mostly on Sundays. Of course there were dissenters from this vision, but this was the general consensus.

When a story nears its end it goes through death throes, an exaggerated semblance of life. So today we see domination, conquest, violence, and separation take on absurd extremes that hold a mirror up to what was once hidden and diffuse. The year 2012 ended with just such a potent story-disrupting event: the Sandy Hook massacre. Even realizing that far more, equally innocent, children have been killed in the last few years by, say, U.S. drone strikes, it really got under my skin. No one was immune. I think that is because its utter senselessness penetrated every defense mechanism we have to maintain the fiction that the world is basically OK. Unlike 9/11 or Oklahoma City, and certainly unlike the horrors that go on around the world, there was no convenient narrative to divert the raw pain of what happened. We cannot help but map those murdered innocents onto the young faces we know, and the anguish of their parents onto ourselves. At the base of our Story of the People is separation, of humanity from nature, of me from you, of each from all, and this event united everyone, of whatever culture, nationality, or political persuasion. For a moment, we all felt the exact same thing. For at least a moment, I am sure, most people were in touch with the simplicity of what is important; I am sure many people had that fleeting feeling, “It doesn’t have to be that difficult, if only we could remember what is so obvious now, that love is all there is.” We humans have made such a mess of things, forgetting love. It is the same realization we have when a loved one is going through the dying process, and we think, “Ah, how precious this person is — why couldn’t I see that? Why couldn’t I appreciate all those moments we had together? All the arguments and grudges seem so tiny now.”

Following that moment, of course, people hurried to make sense of the event, subsuming it within a narrative about gun control, mental health, or the security of school buildings. Maybe I am imagining things, but I don’t think anyone really believes deep down that these responses touch the heart of the matter. Gun culture, we know, is a symptom of something deeper, and the violence that finds expression through guns would, even in their absence, come out in some other way. Mental illness too is a problem so vast that it is essentially unsolvable in our current system; it too comes from a deeper source. As for school security, a Chinese saying describes all the measures proposed: they stop the gentleman but not the villain.

No one would say that Sandy Hook was more horrible than the Holocaust, the Stalinist purges, or the imperialistic wars of the 20th century and 21st, but it was less comprehensible. Try as we might, we cannot fit it into our Story of the World. It is the anomalous data point that unravels the entire narrative — the world no longer makes sense. We struggle to explain what it means, but no explanation suffices. We may go on pretending that normal is still normal, but this is one of a series of “end time” events that is dismantling our culture’s mythology.

The evident futility of the responses that we are capable of imagining also points to this deep ideological breakdown. The responses are all about more control. Yet control, as we may or may not realize, is a key thread of the old story of humanity rising above nature, imposing technology and reason on the wild world and the uncivilized human. All around us, we see our efforts at control backfiring: wars to fight terrorism breed terrorism, herbicides breed superweeds, antibiotics breed superbugs, psychiatric medications lead to explosive outbursts of violence.

Looking back on the community schools a couple generations past, where children and parents could walk in and out of any door, can we say that the inexorable trend toward fortress schools in a fortress state is something anyone would have chosen? The world was supposed to be getting better. We were supposed to be becoming wealthier, more enlightened. Society was supposed to be advancing. Here I am in America, the most “advanced” nation on Earth, yet even as our financial wealth has doubled and doubled again in fifty years, we have lost wealth of a more basic form; for example, the social capital of feeling safe, feeling at home where we live. Is more security the best we can aspire to? What about a society where safety does not equal security? What about a world where no human being wields an assault rifle? What about a world where we mostly know the faces and stories of the people around us? What about a world where we know that our daily activities contribute to the healing of the biosphere and the well-being of other people? We need a Story of the People that includes all of those things — and that doesn’t feel like a fantasy.

Various visionary thinkers have offered versions of such a story, but none of them has yet become a true Story of the People, a widely accepted set of agreements and narratives that gives meaning to the world and coordinates human activity towards its fulfillment. We are not quite ready for such a story yet, because the old one, though in tatters, still has large swaths of its fabric intact. And even when these unravel, we still must traverse the space between stories, a kind of nakedness. In the turbulent times ahead our familiar ways of acting, thinking, and being will no longer make sense. We won’t know what is happening, what it all means, and, sometimes, even what is real. Some people have entered that time already.

I wish I could tell you that I am ready for a new Story of the People, but even though I am among its many weavers, I cannot yet fully inhabit the new vestments. In other words, describing the world that could be, something inside me doubts, rejects, and underneath the doubt is a hurting thing. The breakdown of the old story is kind of a healing process, that uncovers the old wounds hidden under its fabric and exposes them to the healing light of awareness. I am sure many people reading this have gone through such a time, when the cloaking illusions fell away: all the old justifications, rationalizations, all the old stories. Events like Sandy Hook help to initiate the very same process on a collective level. So also the superstorms, the economic crisis, political meltdowns… in one way or another, the obsolescence of our old mythos is laid bare.

We do not have a new story yet. Each of us is aware of some of its threads, for example in most of the things we call alternative, holistic, or ecological today. Here and there we see patterns, designs, emerging parts of the fabric. But the new mythos has not yet emerged. We will abide for a time in the space between stories. Those of you who have been through it on a personal level know that it is a very precious — some might say sacred — time. Then we are in touch with the real. Each disaster lays bare the real underneath our stories. The terror of a child, the grief of a mother, the honesty of not knowing why. In such moments we discover our humanity. We come to each other’s aid, human to human. We take care of each other. That’s what keeps happening every time there is a calamity, before the beliefs, the ideologies, the politics take over again. Events like Sandy Hook, for at least a moment, cut through all that down to the basic human being. In such times, we learn who we really are.

How can we prepare? We cannot prepare. But we are being prepared.

Charles Eisenstein is an essayist and author of the books Sacred Economics and The Ascent of Humanity. He is a contributor to Shareable, where this article first appeared.

Did DHS Award Ammunition Contract to a Shell Corporation?

0

James Smith, Activist Post | 

On the 18th of December, 2012 I wrote a story about how the Department of Homeland Security (DHS) had requested, through the Federal Law Enforcement Training Center (FLETC), an order for 200,000 rounds of 180 Grain, Jacketed Hollow Point Ammunition. Despite the fact that FLETC orders more ammunition that a human could possible expend in a lifetime.

And to be quite frank, these solicitations are very tiresome because we ask questions and no one seems to have any answers.

But once in a while you just fall onto a nugget that makes this task seem less Sisyphean and more of a worthy calling.

In reviewing the award granted to the “winner” of this contract, I see that the American Taxpayer is again, the loser. We’ll add up the tally later.

The winner of this contract is Evian Group, Inc. located at 105 South Eastern Ave, Las Vegas Nevada.

Well, congratulations Evian Group; you’ve shown the Federal Government what it means to be naïve.

Read more

 

Obama signs NDAA 2013 without objecting to indefinite detention of Americans

RT |

President Barack Obama signed the National Defense Authorization Act of 2013 on Wednesday, giving his stamp of approval to a Pentagon spending bill that will keep Guantanamo Bay open and make indefinite detention for US citizens as likely as ever.

The president inked his name to the 2013 NDAA on Wednesday evening to little fanfare, and accompanied his signature with a statement condemning a fair number of provisions contained in a bill that he nevertheless endorsed.

The NDAA, an otherwise mundane annual bill that lays out the use of funds for the Department of Defense, has come under attack during the Obama administration for the introduction of a provision last year that allows the military to detain United States citizens indefinitely without charge or trial for mere suspicions of ties to terrorism. Under the 2012 NDAA’s Sec. 1021, Pres. Obama agreed to give the military the power to arrest and hold Americans without the writ of habeas corpus, although he promised with that year’s signing statement that his administration would not abuse that privilege.

In response to the controversial indefinite detention provision from last year, Sen. Dianne Feinstein (D-California) introduced an amendment in December 2012 that would have forbid the government from using military force to indefinitely detain Americans without trial under the 2013 NDAA. Although that provision, dubbed the “Feinstein Amendment,” passed the Senate unanimously, a select panel of lawmakers led by Senate Armed Services Committee Chairman Carl Levin (D-Michigan) stripped it from the final version of the NDAA two week later before it could clear Congress. In exchange, Congress added a provision, Sec. 1029, that claims to ensure that “any person inside the United States” is allowed their constitutional rights, including habeas corpus, but supporters of the Feinstein Amendment say that the swapped wording does nothing to erase the indefinite detention provision from the previous year.

“Saying that new language somehow ensures the right to habeas corpus — the right to be presented before a judge — is both questionable and not enough. Citizens must not only be formally charged but also receive jury trials and the other protections our Constitution guarantees. Habeas corpus is simply the beginning of due process. It is by no means the whole,” Sen. Rand Paul (R-Kentucky) said after the Feinstein Amendment was removed.

“Our Bill of Rights is not something that can be cherry-picked at legislators’ convenience. When I entered the United States Senate, I took an oath to uphold and defend the Constitution. It is for this reason that I will strongly oppose passage of the McCain conference report that strips the guarantee to a trial by jury,” Sen. Paul added.

Although the Pres. Obama rejected the indefinite detention clause when signing the 2012 NDAA, a statement issued late Wednesday from the White House failed to touch on the military’s detainment abilities. On the other hand, Pres. Obama did voice his opposition to a number of provisions included in the latest bill, particularly ones that will essentially render his promise of closing the Guantanamo Bay military prison impossible.

Despite repeated pleas that Gitmo will be closed on his watch, Pres. Obama failed to do as much during his first term in the White House. Thanks to a provision in the 2013 NDAA, the Pentagon will be unable to use funds to transfer detainees out of that facility and to other sights, ensuring they will remain at the top-secret military prison for the time being.

“Even though I support the vast majority of the provisions contained in this Act, which is comprised of hundreds of sections spanning more than 680 pages of text, I do not agree with them all. Our Constitution does not afford the president the opportunity to approve or reject statutory sections one by one,” Pres. Obama writes.

Congress, claims the president, designed sections of the new defense bill “in order to foreclose my ability to shut down the Guantanamo Bay detention facility.”

“I continue to believe that operating the facility weakens our national security by wasting resources, damaging our relationships with key allies and strengthening our enemies,” he says.

Elsewhere, the president claims that certain provisions in the act threaten to interview with his “constitutional duty to supervise the executive branch” of the United States.

Before the 2013 NDAA was finalized, it was reported by the White House that Pres. Obama would veto the legislation over the provisions involving Guantanamo Bay. Similarly, the White House originally said the president would veto the 2012 NDAA over the indefinite detention provisions, although he signed it regardless “with reservations” on December 31 of that year.

Since authorizing the 2012 NDAA, the president has been challenged in federal court by a team of plaintiffs who say that the indefinite detention clause is unconstitutional. US District Judge Katherine Forrest agreed that Sec. 1021 of the 2012 NDAA violated the US Constitution and granted a permanent injunction on the Obama administration from using that provision, but the White House successfully fought to appeal that decision.

Commenting on the latest signing, American Civil Liberties Union Executive Director Anthony Romero says, “President Obama has utterly failed the first test of his second term, even before inauguration day.”

“His signature means indefinite detention without charge or trial, as well as the illegal military commissions, will be extended,” adds Romero. “He also has jeopardized his ability to close Guantanamo during his presidency. Scores of men who have already been held for nearly 11 years without being charged with a crime–including more than 80 who have been cleared for transfer–may very well be imprisoned unfairly for yet another year. The president should use whatever discretion he has in the law to order many of the detainees transferred home, and finally step up next year to close Guantanamo and bring a definite end to indefinite detention.”

Drones: From Afghanistan to Your Own Backyard

Adrienne Erin |

The Pentagon just loves its drones, unmanned planes ranging in size from passenger planes to ̶ if rumors are correct ̶ tiny devices as small as hummingbirds. Despite concerns with crashes, civilian causalities and charges of arbitrary executions, drones continue to play large roles in the Afghan and Iraqi theaters.

Oh yes, and they’re flying in U.S. Airspace as well. Well, I feel safe. And not worried about my privacy one little bit. Because there’s no possible way this could end badly, right? Sure . . .

Types of Drones

Despite the many varieties of drones, the unmanned aircraft come in two flavors: armed and unarmed. Armed drones carry missiles and bombs. Unarmed drones carry surveillance equipment and are used for reconnaissance, a gentlemanly way of saying they spy on people.

Armed Drones and the Nature of Combat

In President Obama’s first presidency, over 41 armed drone strikes took place in Afghanistan, and those are just the ones made public. But that’s okay, because you expect combat in a war zone, right?

Well yes, but not everyone agrees drone use counts as combat. Philip Alston, the United Nation’s Special Rapporteur for extrajudiciary and arbitrary executions, refers to drone use less as combat and more as “targeted killing.”

If drone-related rumors are accurate, their strikes don’t even count as targeted kills. Rumors abound of civilians on both sides of the Afghanistan / Pakistan border killed by unmanned drone strikes ̶ but at least a human pilot has a chance of spotting the difference between a marketplace and a military camp.

Videogame Syndrome

Actually, while some drones fly on preprogrammed instructions, many of the armed drones are controlled by flight crews on the ground, far removed from the theater of war. Specifically, drones in Afghanistan are piloted from the Nellis and Creech USAF base outside Las Vegas.

It’s valid to ask how distance affects a pilot’s judgment. His drone is a world away, and the only information he gets are images on a screen. Images on a screen aren’t people ̶ in fact, they look alarmingly like a video game.

Ever seen a young man play a first person war simulation? The body count is horrendous. That’s fine when the image is just an image, but terrifying when the image is of real people.

Coming to a State Near You

In January of 2012, President Obama signed a bill allowing the use of drones in U.S. airspace. Police have expressed interest in drones, as they would be able to conduct long-term surveillance from a safe distance.

Private industry also has an interest. If you get in a motorcycle accident, you hire a lawyer like Russ Brown. Now imagine the implications if your legal opponent provides drone tapes of the accident. Is such footage, taken without a warrant, legal in court?

Domestic drone use has another tiny problem. No, I’m not talking about flying versions of Robocop diving out of the sky at you, although the possibility of armed drones in domestic airspace is alarming. I’m talking about the disturbing tendency drones have to crash.

The military doesn’t like talking about it ̶ I mean, really doesn’t like talking about it ̶ but combinations of pilot error, mechanical failure and other problems have lead to more than a few drones nose-diving into the ground, some disturbingly close to airbases.

Unlike regular pilots, drone pilots have limited range of vision and no peripheral vision. A manned fighter drifting too close to a passenger jet can detect the problem and make adjustments. A ground jockey flying a drone?

Yeah, not so much.

Adrienne is a blogger at Pongra and aspiring writer. When she’s not blogging about tech and social media, you might find her practicing her French, whipping up some recipes she found on Pinterest, or obsessing over vintage postcards and stamps.

10 Ways the Drug War Is Causing Massive Collateral Damage to Our Society

0

From racial injustice to flawed foreign policy, the war on drugs causes harm on many fronts.

January 3, 2013  |  

Photo Credit: SHUTTERSTOCK.COM

Like this article?

Join our email list:

Stay up to date with the latest headlines via email.

The war on drugs is America’s longest war. It has been 40-plus years since Nixon launched our modern “war on drugs” and yet drugs are as plentiful as ever. While the idea that we can have a “drug-free society” is laughable, the disastrous consequences of our drug war are dead serious. While it might not be obvious, the war on drugs touches and destroys so many of the issues we care about and the values we hold. Below are 10 collateral consequences of the drug war and reasons we need to find an exit strategy from this unwinnable war.

1. Racial Injustice

The war on drugs is built on racial injustice. Despite roughly equal rates of drug use and sales, African-American men are arrested at 13 times the rate of white men on drug charges in the U.S. — with rates of up to 57 times in some states. African Americans and Latinos together make up 29 percent of the total U.S. population, but more than 75 percent of drug law violators in state and federal prisons.

2. Denied Access to Education, Housing and Benefits

Passed by Congress in 1998, the Higher Education Act delays or denies federal financial aid to anyone ever convicted of a felony or misdemeanor drug offense, including marijuana possession. A drug offense will also get you and your entire family kicked out of public housing. Thirty-two states ban anyone convicted of a drug felony from collecting food stamps.

3. Wasted Taxpayer Dollars

U.S. federal, state, and local governments now spend $50 billion per year trying to make America “drug free.” State prison budgets top spending on public colleges and universities. The prison industrial complex is ever more powerful. Nevertheless, heroin, cocaine, methamphetamine and other illicit drugs are cheaper, purer and easier to get than ever before.

4. Unsafe Neighborhoods

Most “drug-related” violence stems not from drug use, but from drug prohibition. That was true in Chicago under alcohol kingpin Al Capone and it is true now. The mass killings in Mexico and in many U.S. cities are not from marijuana or other drug use, but because the plants are worth more than gold and people are willing to kill each other over the profits to be made.  

5. Shredded Constitutional Rights

Armed with paramilitary gear, police break into homes unannounced, terrorizing innocent and guilty alike. Prosecutors seize private property without due process. Citizens convicted of felony offenses lose their right to vote, in some states for life. More and more Americans are subject to urine tests without cause. And the list goes on.

6. Bloodbath in Latin America

U.S. drug policies in Latin America have failed to reduce the supply of illicit drugs. Instead our policies have led to a bloodbath with more than 60,000 people killed in prohibition violence since 2006 in Mexico alone. Our policy and strategies have empowered organized criminals, corrupted governments, stimulated violence, assaulted the environment and created tens of thousands of refugees.

7. Compromising Teenagers’ Safety

The defenders of the failed war on drugs say that we can’t discuss alternatives to prohibition because it would “send the wrong message to the kids.” Ironically, the drug war is a complete failure when it comes to keeping young people from using drugs. Despite decades of DARE programs with the simplistic “Just Say No” message, 50 percent of teenagers will try marijuana before they graduate and 75 percent will drink alcohol. Young people also feel the brunt of marijuana enforcement and make up the majority of arrests. Arresting young people will often cause more damage than drug use itself. Teenagers need honest drug education to help them make responsible decisions. Safety should be the number-one priority.

UNDERSTANDING THE CRISIS

0



For a student of Marxist political economy, one of the last year’s highlights was the seven-part discussion of the global economic crisis, its causes, and consequences which was featured in Socialist Voice, the excellent monthly publication of the Communist Party of Ireland. Beginning in January with the review of a book on the crisis, two interlocutors–identified as NC and NL– surveyed the landscape of radical and Marxist explanations of economic crises and their meaning for the working class movement.
Several features of the discussion were remarkable.
First, the discussion was conducted in a comradely and respectful manner. Much of the academic “Marxist” dialogue is about scoring points and splitting hairs. The SV exchange, on the other hand, sought to construct and unify.
Second, the articles were free of jargon and pretension. Too often self-styled Marxist economists feel compelled to package their views in fashionable or “sophisticated” language to create an aura of profundity.
Third, the dialogue owes little to bourgeois economics. Outside of a few distinguished Marxists like Maurice Dobb, Ronald Meek, and Victor Perlo, in the English-speaking world, training in mainstream bourgeois economics has been more of a hindrance than a help in grasping and advancing Marxism. Likewise, formalism–the fetish of mathematical and logical constructs– has elevated issues like the so-called transformation problem or the “Okishio Theorem” to center stage at the expense of pursuing and elaborating the insights of Marx, Engels, and their successors. In most cases, the formalists and academicians would be well advised to return to a study of the opening chapters of Capital, an exercise that would render much of their exercises pettifoggery.
The Socialist Voice contributions cover briefly, but clearly and seriously, the theories of crisis ranging from the tendency-of-the-falling-rate-of-profit through underconsumptionism, stagnation, long cycles, and the general crisis of capitalism. They draw on a diverse group of theorists from Andrew Kliman and the Monthly Review adherents through Nikolai Kondratiev and Hans Heinz Holz.
The articles are to be found in the January, April, May, June, October, November, and December issues of Socialist Voice or online at:     http://www.communistpartyofireland.ie/sv/index.html.
I urge everyone interested in Marxist political economy to read them. Hopefully, this discussion will generate further research and debate over the many issues addressed. Developing a clear and full Marxist account of the current crisis is a work in progress. My own thoughts, offered in the same comradely spirit, are below:
SYSTEMIC CRISIS
1. Capitalist economic crises are of two types: cyclical and systemic. In the course of capitalist economic activity, imbalances occur between various departments of production, between suppliers and producers, between production and consumption, etc. These imbalances result in slumps or slowdowns in productive activity. Bourgeois economists refer to these as “business cycle” events, meaning that they are cyclical or self-correcting; recovery is on the horizon, perhaps the distant horizon, but on the horizon. Generally, bourgeois politicians apply conventional nostrums–interest rate adjustments, state spending, incentives or inducements–to adjust these cycles to their political ends. Even though these are episodic events, the ensuing damage generally falls on the backs of working people.
2. Systemic crises, on the other hand, are reflective of deep contradictions inherent in the capitalist system. As such, they are not subject to either patience or the usual menu of remedies. Capitalism, like a perpetual motion machine, violates the laws of nature. A system cannot continue forever that depends upon increasing complex social interactions while awarding the riches produced by those interactions to a few who are dissociated from the same social processes. In the long run, the accumulation of private, concentrated wealth tends to choke off the further accumulation of that wealth.
3. Systemic crises do not pass, but are temporarily suppressed or resolved through transformative change. That is, policy makers may blunt or postpone the harshest consequences of systemic crises, but eventually systemic changes are necessitated to exit the crisis. For example, despite New Deal boasts about resolving the Great Depression in the US, the Depression’s demise only came with the vast systemic changes that accompanied a world war– socialist-like economic planning, organization, investment, and production in war supplies and the massive destruction of material assets. In our time, the full impact of the 2001 technology crisis was suppressed only to exacerbate the 2008 crisis. The underlying dynamics of capitalist crisis remained, and still remain. 
4. Systemic crises are, in the final analysis, crises of accumulation. What cripples the mechanism of capitalism most decisively is the inability to generate sufficient profit. Conversely, those factors which restrain the growth of accumulation– retard the rate of profit– largely account for systemic crises. Thus, broadly speaking, crises are caused by a tendency within the system for the rate of profit to fall.
5. Basing systemic crisis on failing accumulation and not imbalances or unrealized consumption has the following political consequence: it cannot be overcome with liberal or social democratic panaceas. Wealth redistribution, public sector jobs programs, social insurance etc. will not directly restore profitability unless these programs are actually subterfuges for surplus transfer. Only the restoration of profit growth will stabilize the economy. We saw this in the US after mid-2009 when profits rebounded sharply (generated by intensified exploitation!). But even then earnings began to recede again by mid-2012. Thus, for the working class, the choice is really only between helping the capitalists restore profit or working to eliminate the capitalist system!
6. Paradoxically, the crisis exists because the accumulation process is overwhelmed by the huge pool of surplus in the hands of the few, the owners of the means of production, distribution, service, and finance. Just as before the Great Depression, investment opportunities in productive activities are outstripped by the sheer weight of accumulated surplus. The rate, as well as the expected rate, of profit sinks against the aggregate capital held by corporations, banks, and the rich.  They turn to speculation in scarce resources, property and financial schemes, the ever-active “hunt for yield.” And they take on debt which amplifies the folly of this ceaseless search for a return on available capital.
7. The systemic crisis should not be understood as foretelling an ultimate breakdown of the system. Henryk Grossmann’s pioneering work on Marx’s tendency of the falling rate of profit–because of its strict logical exposition–mistakenly led some to believe that capitalism would implode by its own logic. Similarly, academic Marxists divorced from the working class movement lean heavily on projected stagnation to force the departure of capitalism from the world stage. But capitalism always has extreme measures to fall back on for its self-preservation: a re-shuffling of the cards through war, forced-march capitalism through fascism, and many forms of direct and indirect enslavement. The only escape from capitalism is through the efforts of the most advanced, organized elements of the working class armed with an understanding of capitalism. 
MONOPOLY AND STATE-MONOPOLY-CAPITALISM
1. The theorists at Monthly Review are correct to persistently point to the never-ending concentration of capital into fewer and fewer hands as evidence for the rise of monopoly capital. Mergers and acquisitions, bankruptcies, and integration ensure that leading corporations grow stronger and fewer. At the same time, they understate the resiliency of capitalism to create and re-create new arenas of competition. Frederick Engels stated it well in the very first Marxist tract on political economy (Outlines of a Critique of Political Economy): “Competition is based on self-interest, and self-interest in turn breeds monopoly. In short, competition passes over into monopoly. On the other hand, monopoly cannot stem the tide of competition–indeed, it itself breeds competition…” It is this seemingly small point that eludes the “Monopoly Capital” (MC) school associated with Monthly Review.
2. Even in a hugely capital-intensive industry and a paragon of monopoly like automobile production, competition persists with new producers entering the industry through new technologies (e.g., electric cars) or national initiatives (Japan, Korea, and today China and India). While price competition persists (contrary to the MC school), competition is also expressed through technological features, fuel consumption, performance, warranty protection, and a host of other differences. Moreover, these differences are based in the techniques of production and costs of production and not merely sloughed away as “the sales effort” as Sweezy and Baran do in Monopoly Capital. They equally sidestep the competition between old and new, mainstream and alternate industries.
3. Despite the persistent concentration of capital, competition among capitalists and the thirst for a return on capital stocks will always steer the system towards systemic crisis.
4. Of greater use to the working class movement is the theory of state-monopoly-capitalism. While monopolization may bend, but not break the logic of capitalism, enormous monopoly corporations have succeeded in merging their interests with the functions of the state. The enormous power and reach of monopoly enterprises have commandeered all organs of the state and harnessed the state’s actions to the promoting of capital accumulation. While the theory of state-monopoly-capitalism has been dismissed in left circles since the demise of European socialism, the priority by the state given to the US/European bank bailouts surely underscores its validity and makes the critics pause to reconsider. The theory is an essential tool for understanding the behavior of EU and US policy-makers through the course of the crisis.
“FINANCIALIZATION” AND DEBT
1. “Financialization” is an unfortunate term–fashionable, but adding little light to our understanding. The growing role of finance has been noted since before the time of Lenin. The process culminated in finance accounting for over 40% of corporate profits in the US by the early twenty-first century–in part by its increasing absorption of stampeding surplus and in part by the decline and departure of manufacturing that formerly accounted for a far greater share of US profits.
2. Unquestionably finance took on a leading role in the US, the UK, and a few other advanced capitalist countries with the creation of a vast new pool of low-wage workers available to manufacturing after the destruction of Eastern European socialism, its socialist-oriented allies and the PRC’s opening to global markets. This reflected the new national division of labor in the global economy– manufacturing and export in the East and South and finance, management, and services in the West and North.
3. As the leading financial center, the US became the Mecca for those with pockets overflowing with cash and fewer investment opportunities in an era of low interest rates and cheap money.
4. Unlike in the world of commodity production where value is produced in real time, finance offers opportunities to appropriate future value through contractual instruments like mortgages, bonds, futures, and, in our era, even more exotic creations. These instruments trade in future value, hence challenging capitalism to find even more marginal investment opportunities to absorb surplus and potential surplus.
5. Debt–the offspring of easy credit and low interest rates–serves as an amplifier of financial investment, the critical bridge to ever-more reckless speculation. Thus, finance served up its many “innovations” designed to absorb the ocean of surplus accumulated over decades and in search of another round of accumulation in an environment of diminishing returns. In this manner, the tendency for accumulation to retard its own re-production found its expression in the financial crisis that broke out in the US in 2007-2008.      
OTHER CRISIS THEORIES
1. Wave theory– the notion that economic activity exhibits a wave-like trajectory from boom to bust and back to boom again–enjoys an almost mystical, spiritual attraction for many. Associated with the views of Nikolai Kondratiev in Marxist circles, the theory of a regular, periodic wave–long or short–is flawed for two distinct, but fatal reasons.
2. From an empirical perspective, it is impossible to settle on those features of economic history that are decisive in expressing the upturns and downturns of regularcycles. That is to say, the dependent variables are illusive and hazy. Moreover, when they are clearly stipulated–GDP, labor productivity, profits, etc–no incontrovertible pattern is revealed. Instead, only intuitive patterns are seen by those already disposed to see them.
3. From a theoretical point of view, there is no candidate for an independent variable that demonstrates a consistent and regular wave-like behavior throughout economic history (or the history of capitalism). Neither technological innovation, cultural or demographic change, nor any other candidate for the cause of cycles exhibits the kind of wave-like nature that would account for regular, periodic waves in the historic record. And where we find wave-like motion in nature (eg. Lunar cycles), there is no obvious causal connection with economic life.
4. In short, long cycles are impossible to discern without appealing to Rorschach-like impressionism and impossible to explain without assuming what it sets out to illustrate. When you want to see a face on the moon, you’ll see one.
5. We owe a great debt to Hans Heinz Holz, the late German Marxist philosopher, who brought new life to the long-standing Communist concept of the General Crisis of Capitalism (GCC). As Holz points out, Soviet social science mechanically and empirically attached the GCC to the historical stages ushered in by the Bolshevik revolution and the Second World War. This was a misleading interpretation dissolved by the setbacks to socialism.
6. Holz is correct in rehabilitating the GCC as a truly general crisis generated by capitalism’s internal mechanisms independently of important, but external events. He is correct to conceive of the GCC as a total crisis, not limited to the economic sphere but including social life, culture, ideology, and all other human relations.
7. Thus the GCC is not a theory of economic crisis. Instead, the systemic crisis of capitalism is one element–one causal element– in the General Crisis of Capitalism.
8. Much more work needs to be done in developing a full theory of the GCC with its consequences in every aspect of everyday life.
Zoltan Zigedy
zoltanzigedy@gmail.com

The Finance Industry Has Pried into Every Sector of the Economy, and Has Ended Up Running the Whole Show

0

Finance has moved to capture the economy at large, industry and mining, public infrastructure, and now even the educational system.

December 31, 2012  |  

Like this article?

Join our email list:

Stay up to date with the latest headlines via email.

Today’s economic warfare is not the kind waged a century ago between labor and its industrial employers. Finance has moved to capture the economy at large, industry and mining, public infrastructure (via privatization) and now even the educational system. (At over $1 trillion, U.S. student loan debt came to exceed credit-card debt in 2012.) The weapon in this financial warfare is no larger military force. The tactic is to load economies (governments, companies and families) with debt, siphon off their income as debt service and then foreclose when debtors lack the means to pay. Indebting government gives creditors a lever to pry away land, public infrastructure and other property in the public domain. Indebting companies enables creditors to seize employee pension savings. And indebting labor means that it no longer is necessary to hire strikebreakers to attack union organizers and strikers.

Workers have become so deeply indebted on their home mortgages, credit cards and other bank debt that they fear to strike or even to complain about working conditions. Losing work means missing payments on their monthly bills, enabling banks to jack up interest rates to levels that used to be deemed usurious. So debt peonage and unemployment loom on top of the wage slavery that was the main focus of class warfare a century ago. And to cap matters, credit-card bank lobbyists have rewritten the bankruptcy laws to curtail debtor rights, and the referees appointed to adjudicate disputes brought by debtors and consumers are subject to veto from the banks and businesses that are mainly responsible for inflicting injury.

The aim of financial warfare is not merely to acquire land, natural resources and key infrastructure rents as in military warfare; it is to centralize creditor control over society. In contrast to the promise of democratic reform nurturing a middle class a century ago, we are witnessing a regression to a world of special privilege in which one must inherit wealth in order to avoid debt and job dependency.

The emerging financial oligarchy seeks to shift taxes off banks and their major customers (real estate, natural resources and monopolies) onto labor. Given the need to win voter acquiescence, this aim is best achieved by rolling back everyone’s taxes. The easiest way to do this is to shrink government spending, headed by Social Security, Medicare and Medicaid. Yet these are the programs that enjoy the strongest voter support. This fact has inspired what may be called the Big Lie of our epoch: the pretense that governments can only create money to pay the financial sector, and that the beneficiaries of social programs should be entirely responsible for paying for Social Security, Medicare and Medicaid, not the wealthy. This Big Lie is used to reverse the concept of progressive taxation, turning the tax system into a ploy of the financial sector to levy tribute on the economy at large.

Financial lobbyists quickly discovered that the easiest ploy to shift the cost of social programs onto labor is to conceal new taxes as user fees, using the proceeds to cut taxes for the elite 1%. This fiscal sleight-of-hand was the aim of the 1983 Greenspan Commission. It confused people into thinking that government budgets are like family budgets, concealing the fact that governments can finance their spending by creating their own money. They do not have to borrow, or even to tax (at least, not tax mainly the 99%).

The Greenspan tax shift played on the fact that most people see the need to save for their own retirement. The carefully crafted and well-subsidized deception at work is that Social Security requires a similar pre-funding — by raising wage withholding. The trick is to convince wage earners it is fair to tax them more to pay for government social spending, yet not also to ask the banking sector to pay similar a user fee to pre-save for the next time it itself will need bailouts to cover its losses. Also asymmetrical is the fact that nobody suggests that the government set up a fund to pay for future wars, so that future adventures such as Iraq or Afghanistan will not “run a deficit” to burden the budget. So the first deception is to treat only Social Security and medical care as user fees. The second is to aggravate matters by insisting that such fees be paid long in advance, by pre-saving.

Cold War Politics Heats Up

0

Stephen Lendman, rinf.com |

Previous articles discussed how Washington reinvented the “evil empire.” On March 8, 1983, Ronald Reagan coined the term. He addressed the National Association of Evangelicals.

He called communism “the focus of evil in the modern world.” He said don’t “ignore the facts of history and the aggressive impulses of an evil empire….and thereby remove yourself from the struggle between right and wrong and good and evil.”

That was then. This is now. Cold War politics returned. Vladimir Putin is prime target. Boris Yeltsin was Russia’s first president. He played Washington’s game. He instituted neoliberal shock therapy.

He ignored essential human needs. He let corruption and other criminality flourish. He surrounded himself with likeminded apparachiks. He institutionalized pro-Western free market rapaciousness.

He let Russia’s oligarch class accumulate enormous wealth at the expense of suffering millions. Decades may be needed to recoup the enormous damage he caused.

Putin and former President Dmitry Medvedev haven’t done much to change things. Modernizing Russia’s economy inflicts horrendous harm. Creating a favorable investment climate makes ordinary people suffer.

At the same time, Putin asserts state sovereignty. He’s less compromising toward Washington than Medvedev. Russia under him is back. It’s proud and reassertive. He’s not about to roll over for America.

He wants greater Moscow influence. He wants rule of law principles respected. He wants Western meddling in the internal affairs of Russia, Syria, and other nations stopped.

He stresses Moscow’s “independent foreign policy.” He affirms the “inalienable right to security for all states, the inadmissibility of excessive force, and unconditional observance of international law.”

He and Obama disagree on fundamental geopolitical issues. Key is national sovereignty. So are war and peace. America claims a divine right to fight. Putin prioritizes conflict resolution.

Disagreements between both countries play out in dueling agendas. Russia’s gone all-out to prevent full-scale war on Syria. It’s valued regional interests are too important to sacrifice.

Washington notoriously plays hard ball. It retaliates different ways. For decades, Jackson-Vanik legislation remained a Cold War relic.

Section 401, Title IV of the 1974 Trade Act affected commercial relations with communist and former communist countries. It targeted nations. It influenced US/Russian relations until mid-December.

Repealing it came with strings. On December 6, House and Senate legislators passed the Magnitsky Act. On December 14, Obama enacted it. Congress and US media scoundrels hailed it as “an important step in the cause of human rights and democracy.”

Russia’s Foreign Ministry angrily responded. It called linking human rights to trade “cynical.”

“We regret that a US administration declaring its commitment to the development of stable and constructive bilateral relations was unable to defend its stated position against those who look to the past and see our country not as a partner, but rather an opponent – fully in line with the canons of the Cold War,” it stated.

Putin called the Magnitsky measure a “purely political, unfriendly act.”

“I don’t understand why Russian-US relations should be sacrificed for some domestic political gain,” he added.

“The government’s stance is to ignore crimes against Russian orphans adopted by US parents and not to punish the criminals. Russian observers are not even allowed to attend such trials and I find this unacceptable.”

“The US should better not humiliate Russia,” he stressed.

Russian Federation Council speaker Valentina Matvienko said:

“That law, the so-called Magnitsky law is aimed against Russian citizens whose guilt has not been proved by the court yet but who were a priori found guilty in the US.”

“This is a very unfriendly gesture to Russia. I am sure that some political forces are interested in the presence of constant political pressure on Russia.”

“If the US Congress adopted a universal law banning entry to the US for citizens of any country who violate human rights that could be understood.”

“But why is Washington doing such an unfriendly gesture amid the current reset of the US-Russia relations on which the global stability depends? Why did they chose Russia for it?”

Moscow promised “analogous restrictions” on US officials in response.

Key is anti-Russian sentiment. Sergei Magnitsky was a Russian attorney. In 2009, he died in police custody. His death drew international media attention.

He specialized in civil law. He did anti-corruption work. He uncovered evidence of tax fraud. He implicated police, judiciary figures, tax officials, bankers, and Russia’s mafia.

He accused them of stealing around $230 million dollars in 2007 through fraudulent tax refunds.

On issues relating to courts, taxes, fines, and civil law, he was called the “go to guy” in Moscow.

In November 2008, he was arrested, imprisoned, and treated abusively. For 11 months he was denied family visits. Serious health problems developed. Inadequate treatment followed.

On November 16, 2009, he died for reasons attributed officially to a “rupture to the abdominal membrane” and subsequent heart attack. If trial proceedings didn’t begin, he was due to be released eight days later.

His death sparked public outrage. Improving prison healthcare was demanded. Reducing the number of inmates awaiting trial was stressed.

In December 2009, an independent Moscow Public Oversight Commission said he was subjected to “psychological and physical pressure….”

Initially his death was blamed on medical neglect. Later claims suggested murder. Official investigations began. In July 2011, death by medical neglect was ruled.

The 2012 Sergei Magnitsky Rule of Law Accountability Act normalized US/Russian trade relations. Doing so came with strings. Moscow raised legitimate objections.

The legislation imposes visa bans, asset freezes, and other sanctions on Russian nationals accused of committing human rights abuses.

It mandates publishing and updating information on individuals the Secretary of State believes were responsible for detaining, abusing, and/or causing Magnitsky’s death.

Others accused of concealing what happened are targeted. So is anyone believed to have benefitted financially, as well as those involved in an alleged criminal conspiracy regarding his treatment and death.

Targeted offenses include extrajudicial killing, torture, and/or other human rights violations committed against individuals seeking to expose illegal Russian activity, or against persons promoting human rights and freedoms.

On December 21, Russia’s State Duma lower house retaliated. It passed the Dima Yakovlev bill.

On December 26, Russia’s upper house Federation Council followed suit. It passed the measure unanimously. It imposes visa bans and asset freezes on US officials accused of violating the rights of Russian citizens abroad.

It prohibits US-sponsored NGOs from operating in Russia disruptively. It also targets US citizens associated with them. Another provision bans US citizens from adopting Russian orphans.

At issue is neglect causing harm or death. Dima Yakovlev was a Russian boy. His adoptive father abused him. It led to his death. He was acquitted on manslaughter charges.

Reprehensible negligence caused Dima’s death. Lax US adoption laws and follow-through prevent knowing how other Russian orphans are treated.

America never signed the Convention on the Rights of the Child. Failure shows dismissiveness and contempt for children’s rights. It’s clear from how adopted Russian and other orphans are treated. Moscow reacted.

On December 28, Putin enacted Dima Yakovlev legislation. It’s effective January 1. Addressing a Thursday State Council session, he vowed “to adopt the decree granting support to orphans, children without parental care, and especially those kids who have health problems.”

US-Russia 2009 reset policies promised a “fresh start.” Rhetoric was more promise than fulfillment. Washington’s intentions prevent normalized relations. Obama is more belligerent than Bush. Conflict is prioritized over diplomacy.

NATO includes 10 former Soviet Republics and Warsaw Pact countries. Georgia, Ukraine and potentially others may join them.

Washington’s been systematically encircling Russia and China with bases. North Africa, the Middle East, and Eurasia are increasingly militarized.

Moscow isn’t happy about aggressive encroachment on its borders. America’s early warning radar and offensive missile defense systems target Russia belligerently.

Magnitsky legislation adds fuel to the fire. Russia knows America perhaps is more threat than ally. It’s back to the future.

US/Russian relations are strained. Global war risks are too high to tolerate. Instead of cooling tensions, US policies heighten them. Anything ahead is possible.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

http://www.dailycensored.com/cold-war-politics-heats-up/

The Myth That Slavery Has Ended

0

L. Muthoni Wanyeki |

Those of us who schooled in Kenya will remember the drawings of Tippu Tip found in our history textbooks. Termed “Arab” although he was obviously mixed race, he was the most famous of the Zanzibari ivory and slave traders, moving his “goods” from the hinterland to the coast out across the ocean to the Arabian peninsula.

He, like all racketeers, laundered his earnings through investments in more reputable Zanzibari clove plantations.

He also led many of the “explorers” we were taught “discovered” us into the interior – including Henry Morton Stanley. For his sins, Stanley proposed to King Leopold II of Belgium that Tippu Tip become Governor of the Congo Free State – a position he held for 13 or so years until his retirement back in Zanzibar in 1890.

The world had changed around him. The East African slave trade declined when Zanzibar, having become a British protectorate, abolished slavery in 1897.

Another centre of supply, Ethiopia, abolished slavery five years later in 1902. Notably, a key centre of demand, Oman, did not abolish slavery until 1970.

The transatlantic slave trade had been going through its own decline. As early as 1787, Sierra Leone began its life as a British colony intended for freed slaves. In 1822, Liberia followed suit to enable the “return” of freed slaves from North America. And in 1848, Gabon became a French colony for the same purpose.

Spain abolished slavery in all its colonies save three in 1811. A critical point for both ending the trade in human beings – and the freedom of those already enslaved – was the entry into force of the British Slavery Abolition Act of 1834.

The Act abolished slavery across the British Empire, on which the sun was said never to set. It eventually obliged a unique British naval squadron to intercept those still plying the trade and all colonies to emancipate those enslaved.

Portugal followed suit in 1836, thwarting demand in its South American colonies – notably Brazil.

What this rough overview from the perspective of formal, official power obscures, of course, is three things.

First, our participation – from east to west – in that trade. We can deny it. We can justify it, saying we had no idea what we were collecting and selling people into. But that we knew it was wrong is evident.

About a decade ago, the inquiries of a Somali filmmaker exploring slavery in Zanzibar were met with hostile silence – until he, frustrated, confessed to his own family having been a slave trading family.

A Senegalese historian, working with the recovery of oral history from members of the griot caste, has teased out a confession that all griots serving the main royal families were ordered to expunge from their poetic and sung records any reference to slavery several generations ago.

Second and more importantly, the resistance of those enslaved. There were always slaves everywhere who did what they could to end their involuntary servitude.

From smaller acts of sabotage to endless efforts to escape – some of them heartrending, like suicide and the murder of their own children. To organised armed resistance such as the wars waged by the Maroons in Jamaica and elsewhere in the Caribbean against the plantation owners and the colony.

Read more

Blair’s war crimes blocks Iraq inquiry

The Iraq inquiry is not to report before autumn 2013 due to the UK government’s reluctance to release papers showing former British Prime Minister Tony Blair’s conspiracy with ex-US President George Bush in waging an illegal war against the Arab country.

The inquiry chairman Sir John Chilcot said earlier that he will not be ready to publish the reports on the truth of Britain’s involvement in the Iraq war before the middle of 2013, two years behind schedule.

Reg Keys, the father of Lance Corporal Tom Keys, who was killed in Iraq in 2003, and a founder of the campaign group Military Families against the War said the delay was “frustrating”.

“I can understand why Blair and a few others don’t want things to come out because there was deceit behind closed doors. But for me and the other families the delays just keep poking a wound that you’re trying to heal. You try to put things in a box but until this is done and dusted you can’t move on,” he said.

Earlier in June, Sir John wrote to British Prime Minister David Cameron, saying that his ability to publish a “balanced, fair and accurate” report was being hampered by the Cabinet Office, The Stop the War Coalition campaign group reported.

The Inquiry has cost £6.1 million so far. It is estimated that another year of investigation could cost the public an extra £1.4 million.

Source

CONFIRMED: Feinstein’s Gun Control Legislation Will Ban Most Guns

0

Activist Post |

Just as many Second Amendment advocates have anticipated, gun control legislation being proposed by Senator Feinstein has gone far beyond what has become known as “assault rifles”. In fact the proposed law would ban almost every type of semiautomatic gun on the market including handguns and shotguns.

Feinstein is clearly trying to expand the definition of assault weapons to just about every firearm by claiming if they have “high-capacity ammunition feeding devices” then they are “military-style assault weapons”.

The following is a summary of the 2013 legislation:

Bans the sale, transfer, importation, or manufacturing of:

  • 120 specifically-named firearms;
  • Certain other semiautomatic rifles, handguns, shotguns that can accept a detachable magazine and have one or more military characteristics; and
  • Semiautomatic rifles and handguns with a fixed magazine that can accept more than 10 rounds.

Senate extends warrantless wiretapping under FISA

0

RT |

The Senate agreed on Friday to approve an extension of the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act, legislation that allows the NSA and other US intelligence agencies to wiretap conversations involving foreign citizens without obtaining a warrant.

Despite growing opposition to one of the most notorious and secretive US spying programs, the Senate voted 73-23 early Friday to reauthorize the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act, or FISA.

First signed into law in 1978, FISA prescribes how the US government collects intelligence from foreign parties that may be detrimental to national security. Of particular significance, however, is the FISA Amendments Act of 2008, or FAA, which includes a provision that puts any US citizen engaged in correspondence with a person overseas at direct risk of being spied on.

Under the FAA, the government can eavesdrop on emails and phone calls made or received by Americans, as long as they reasonably suspect those conversations to include at least one person residing outside of the United States.

In May 2012, Senators Ron Wyden (D-OR) and Mark Udall (D-CO) sent a letter to the National Security Agency asking for an estimate on just how many Americans have been targeted since the FAA went on the books. In response, Inspector General I. Charles McCullough replied that honoring their request would be “beyond the capacity” of the office, and that “dedicating sufficient additional resources would likely impede the NSA’s mission.”

“All that Senator Udall and I are asking for is a ballpark estimate of how many Americans have been monitored under this law, and it is disappointing that the Inspectors General cannot provide it,” Sen. Wyden told Wired’s Danger Room back in June. “If no one will even estimate how many Americans have had their communications collected under this law then it is all the more important that Congress act to close the ‘back door searches’ loophole, to keep the government from searching for Americans’ phone calls and emails without a warrant.”

On Thursday this week, Sen. Wyden echoed his concerns from earlier this year by warning that the threat to the Americans’ privacy “has been real and it is not hypothetical.”

The law should not be “an ‘end run’ around traditional warrant requirements and conduct backdoor searches for American’s communications,” he urged.

Even though Sen. Wyden sits on the Senate Select Committee on Intelligence, he says he has been told next to nothing about how FISA is used to target Americans. During Thursday’s debate, though, the committee’s chairperson, Sen. Dianne Feinstein (D-California), rebuffed Wyden’s concerns.

“No one should think the targets are US persons,” Feinstein said. “Thirteen members of the intelligence committee who have voted on this do not believe this is a problem.”

One person who did agree with Wyden’s concerns during Thursday’s debate was Sen. Rand Paul (R-Kentucky). The son of former presidential hopeful Ron Paul, the senator from Kentucky suggested that reauthorizing FISA would further relinquish what remains of the US Constitution.

“We allowed Congress and the courts to diminish our Fourth Amendment protection, particularly when our papers were held by third parties. I think most Americans would be shocked to know that the Fourth Amendment does not protect your records if they’re banking, Internet or Visa records. A warrant is required to read your snail mail and to tap your phone, but no warrant is required to look at your email, text or your Internet searches. They can be read without a warrant. Why is a phone call more deserving of privacy protection than an email?”

For proponents of FISA, though, renewing the act meant a necessary step in securing America’s role in the so-called war on terror. Senate Majority Leader Harry Reid (D-Nevada), who was instrumental in actually having the bill being brought before debate, attacked Sen. Paul’s stance and insisted that failing to act would allow America’s enemies the opportunity to attack.

“When the clock strikes midnight tomorrow, we will be giving terrorists the opportunity to plot against our country undetected. The senator from Kentucky is threatening to take away the best tools we have for stopping them,” Reid warned.

“We all remember the tragic Fort Hood shootings less than two years ago. Radicalized American terrorists bought guns and used them to kill 13 civilians. It is hard to imagine why the senator would want to hold up the Patriot Act for a misguided amendment that would make American less safe,” Reid said.

The US House of Representatives approved the reauthorizing of FISA and the FAA in September, but the Senate had been unable to agree on renewing the acts until Friday morning. Earlier this month, in fact, Sen. Saxby Chambliss (R-Georgia) asked his colleagues on Capitol Hill to reauthorize FISA without holding any debates in the Senate in order to pass the bill before it expired. Had no action occurred before December 31, the warrantless wiretapping provisions would have eroded and the NSA would no longer be able to eavesdrop on Americans’ communications.

Senator Reid responded by saying that FISA is “an important piece of legislation,” though “imperfect,” but nonetheless warranted a full-on debate in the Senate.

Even before the Senate convened this week, the Obama administration already acknowledged that they favored reauthorizing FISA and the FAA. In 2008, then-Senator Barack Obama voted in favor of FISA and the FAA, but said his attorney general would “conduct a comprehensive review of all our surveillance programs, and to make further recommendations on any steps needed to preserve civil liberties and to prevent executive branch abuse in the future.”

Not only did that never happen, but the Senate rejected a series of amendments proposed this week that would have provided privacy safeguards for Americans under FISA.

“Without Senate action these authorities expire in four days and that’s the reason the House bill is before us,”Feinstein said on Thursday. “That is why I urge my colleagues to vote no on all amendments.

“There is a view of some that this country no longer needs to fear attacks – I don’t share that view.“

President Obama must sign the bill before it officially is reauthorized for another five years.

Agenda Prevails Over Truth

0

Paul Craig Roberts, rinf.com |

In the Western world truth no longer has any meaning. In its place stands agenda.

Agenda is all important, because it is the way Washington achieves hegemony over the world and the American people. 9/11 was the “new Pearl Harbor” that the neoconservatives declared to be necessary for their planned wars against Muslim countries. For the neoconservatives to go forward with their agenda, it was necessary for Americans to be connected to the agenda.

President George W. Bush’s first Treasury Secretary, Paul O’Neil, said that prior to 9/11 the first cabinet meeting was about the need to invade Iraq.

9/11 was initially blamed on Afghanistan, and the blame was later shifted to Iraq. Washington’s mobilization against Afghanistan was in place prior to 9/11. The George W. Bush regime’s invasion of Afghanistan (Operation Enduring Freedom) occurred on October 7, 2001, less than a month after 9/11. Every military person knows that it is not possible to have mobilization for invading a country half way around the world ready in three weeks.

The Orwellian “PATRIOT Act” is another example of planning prior to the event. This vast police state measure could not possibly have been written in the short time between 9/11 and its introduction in Congress. The bill was already written, sitting on the shelf waiting its opportunity. Why? Who wrote it? Why has there been no media investigation of the advanced preparation of this police state legislation?

Evidence that responses to an event were planned prior to what the government said was a surprise event does suggest that the event was engineered to drive an agenda that was already on the books.

Many on the left-wing are immune to evidence that is contrary to the official 9/11 story, because for them 9/11 is refreshing blow-back from the oppressed. That the oppressed struck back is more important to the left-wing than the facts.

The right-wing can’t let go of the fantasy either. America in all its purity and wonderfulness was attacked because evil Muslims cannot stand our goodness. “They hate us for our freedom and democracy.” The right-wing vision of a great and good America wronged is essential to the right-wing’s sustaining ideology, an ideology that is prepared to commit violence in order to prove its righteousness.

Implausible stories can be useful to other agendas and thus be sustained by their use in other arguments. For example, the Obama regime’s story of the killing of Osama bin Laden is central to Charles Pierson’s story in the November 16-30, 2012, CounterPunch in which Pierson writes about the growing strains on the US-Pakistan alliance. Pierson writes that bin Laden resided next to Pakistan’s largest military academy and that bin Laden “did go next door every Wednesday to use the pool. If the Pakistani government was unaware of bin Laden’s presence this would mark an intelligence failure of heroic proportions.”

Is it plausible that Osama bin Laden, a hunted man (actually a man dead for a decade), visited the Pakistani army, a bought-and-paid-for entity used by Washington to launch attacks on Pakistan’s semi-autonomous tribal areas, to go swimming every Wednesday?

Or is this a fairy tale made possible by ignoring the live interviews of the neighbors of the alleged “bin Laden compound.” According to Pakistanis who knew the person living in “bin Laden’s compound,” the person Americans were told was bin Laden was a long-time friend who imported foreign delicacies. An eye witness to the “assault” on “bin Laden’s compound” reported that when the helicopter lifted off it exploded and there were no survivors. If there were no survivors, there was no sea burial of bin Laden. http://www.globalresearch.ca/pakistan-tv-report-contradicts-us-claim-of-bin-laden-s-death/25915

How is it that the US media can produce a story as fact that is contradicted by the news on the ground? Is the answer that the bin Laden assassination story served an agenda by providing evidence that we were winning?

Consider the Sandy Hook school shooting. This shooting serves as an excuse for “progressives” to express their hatred of guns and the NRA and to advance their gun control agenda. Few if any of those hyperventilating over the tragedy know any of the parents of the murdered children. They have shown no similar response to the US government’s murder of countless thousands of Muslim children. The Clinton regime alone killed 500,000 Iraqi children with illegal sanctions, and Clinton’s immoral secretary of state, a feminist hero, said that she thought the sanctions were worth the cost of one half million dead Iraqi children.

Suddenly, 20 US children become of massive importance to “progressives.” Why? Because the deaths foster their agenda—gun control in the US.

When I hear people talk about “gun violence,” I wonder what has happened to language. A gun is an inanimate object. An inanimate object cannot cause violence. Humans cause violence. The relevant question is: why do humans cause violence? This obvious question seldom gets asked. Instead, inanimate objects are blamed for the actions of humans.

In one of its reports on the Sandy Hook shooting, Time noted that such events “inevitably reopen debates about gun control, or more tenuously lead people to complain about American culture itself. Yet on the very same day, a 36-year-old Chinese man attacked 22 children with a knife at a primary school in China, suggesting that there is a critical factor with mass homicides that gets far less attention.” That factor, “the core of these events,” is mental health and “our failure to address it as a society.” http://ideas.time.com/2012/12/15/sandy-hook-shooting-why-did-lanza-target-a-school/?iid=obnetwork

That factor remains unaddressed, because the agenda-driven media is determined to use the Sandy Hook shootings as a means of achieving gun control. One wonders if there is a “knife control” agenda in China. What follows is not an argument that the report of the Sandy Hook shootings is a hoax. What follows is an argument that suspicions are created when agenda takes precedence over reporting and discrepancies in reports are left unresolved.

Agenda-driven news is the reason that apparent inconsistencies in the Sandy Hook story were not investigated or explained. According to some reports, the medical examiner said the children were shot with a rifle, but other reports say the accused was found dead inside the school with two pistols and that a rifle was found outside in the car. The police capture a man in the woods who says “I didn’t do it.” How would a person in the woods know what has just happened? Who was the man? Was he investigated and released? Will we ever know? http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ovspEgeMXb4

Some reports say the school was locked and admission is via security camera and being buzzed in. Why would a heavily armed person be buzzed in? Other reports say he shot his way in. Why wouldn’t such a commotion have alerted the school?

Another puzzle is the video of a father whose child has supposedly been shot to pieces. Prior to the interview he is caught on camera laughing and joking, and then, like an actor, he pulls his face and voice into a presentation of grief for the interview. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=urrRcgB581w and http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=oMINqFGNr-w

The spokesman for the Connecticut State Police is anxious to control the story, warns social media against posting information contrary to official information, but provides little information, refusing to answer most questions. The usual “ongoing investigation” is invoked, but Lanza has already been declared to be the killer and the number of dead reported. About the only hard information that emerges is that the police are investigating where every component of the weapons was manufactured. The relevance to the shooting of where the components of the weapons were manufactured is not explained. http://www.nydailynews.com/news/national/people-spreading-misinformation-sandy-hook-massacre-face-charges-police-article-1.1221554

The medical examiner’s press conference is weird. He is incoherent, unsure of what he is supposed to say, hasn’t answers to questions he should have, and defers to police.

Perhaps the best way to avoid fueling suspicion is for public officials not to hold press conferences until they are prepared to answer the relevant questions.

And where are the bodies? Like the alleged murder of Osama bin Laden by a SEAL, the crucial evidence is not provided. Paul Vance, the Connecticut State Police spokesman, said that the “victims’ bodies were removed from the school overnight” and that detectives “were able to positively identify all of the victims and make some formal notification to all of the families of the victims.”http://www.kens5.com/news/Sandy-Hook-victims-identified-bodies-removed-from-school-overnight-183647091.html?ref=next

Allegedly, no parent wanted to see the body of their dead child, but how do you know it is your child if you do not see the body? It is a strange kind of closure when it is provided to parents by impersonal detectives. Has anyone seen a body other than a state medical examiner and a few detectives? Where are the media’s films of body bags being carried out of the school? Why would Obama’s gun control agenda forego the propaganda of a procession of body bags being carried out of a school?

Perhaps the sensitivity issue prevailed, but with all the suspicion that already exists about the government and its claims, why fuel the suspicion by withholding visual evidence of the tragedy?

There are reports that when emergency medical help arrived at the school, the medical personnel were denied access to the children on the grounds that there were no survivors and the scene was too gruesome. Yet, there is a conflicting story that one six-year old girl had the presence of mind to play dead and walked out of her classroom unscathed. If the story is true, how do we know that other survivors did not bleed to death from wounds because the emergency medical personnel were denied access? Did police exercise more control over the scene than was warranted?http://www.globalpost.com/dispatch/news/regions/americas/united-states/121216/sandy-hook-shooting-girl-6-was-sole-survivor-her

It doesn’t seem to matter that questions are not answered and discrepancies are not resolved.http://www.globalresearch.ca/the-sandy-hook-school-massacre-unanswered-questions-and-missing-information/5316776 The story is useful to the gun control agenda. Progressives, in order to achieve their agenda, are willing adjuncts of the police state. The facts of the shooting are less important than the use of the incident to achieve their agenda.

Probably there are answers to the questions. Moreover, the news reports that are the basis for questions could be incorrect. But why aren’t the answers provided and confusions cleared up? Instead, people who ask obvious questions are dismissed as “insensitive to the tragedy” or as “conspiracy kooks.” This in itself deepens suspicion.

The Colorado movie theater shooting has its own unresolved discrepancies. One eyewitness claimed that there were two shooters. Apparently, the suspect was captured sitting in a car in the theater parking lot, which seems strange. There are claims that the accused, a graduate student in neuroscience, was involved with the Defense Advance Research Projects Agency in mind control research and that he doesn’t remember doing the shooting.

Do we actually know? Apparently not. Wouldn’t it be preferable to investigate these claims rather than to leave them as unanswered sources of suspicion? The loose ends of the Colorado movie shooting contribute to the suspicions caused by news reports of the Sandy Hook shootings.

A shooting incident occurs. The government puts out a story. Agendas form and take the place of the story. Unresolved issues disappear in heated dispute over agendas. Gun control advocates blame guns, and Second Amendment defenders blame other factors.

When the media permit agenda to take precedence over news, people lose confidence in the media and distrust spreads deeper into society. If the media and the government are opposed to conspiracy theories, they should not foster the theories by mishandling the news.

Neither the right-wing nor the left-wing has an interest in getting to the bottom of things. The right-wing is aligned with the police state in order to make us safe from “terrorism”— Muslim terrorism, not the terrorism of the unaccountable police state.

The American left is so feeble that it essentially doesn’t exist. Its issues are gun control, homosexual marriage, abortion, and taxing “the rich.” Such misfocus cannot slow the onrushing militarized police state. American liberals have such an abiding faith in government that they are incapable of believing that beloved government would be culpable in crimes—unless, of course, it was Ronald Reagan’s government.

As tyranny envelops the land, the main goal of the left-wing is to disarm the population.

The American left is the enabler of the police state, and the American right is its progenitor.

Americans began their descent into deception and tyranny in the final years of the 20th century with the Clinton regime’s aggression against Serbia and murderous sanctions on Iraq. These war crimes were portrayed by the US media and foreign policy community as great achievements of Western democracy and humanitarianism.

In the first decade of the 21st century Americans lost their constitutional protections and had their pocketbooks opened to indefinite wars. The latest report is that Washington is sending US troops into 35 African countries. http://rt.com/usa/news/us-deploying-troops-order-749/print/

Worse is to come.

Moscow Talks on Syria

0

Stephen Lendman, rinf.com |

Last September, Lakhdar Brahimi replaced Kofi Annan as UN/Arab League Syrian envoy/mediator. He’s strongly pro-Western. He’s Washington’s point man on Syria.

Kofi Annan’s peace plan was one-sided. It provided imperial cover for war. Brahimi picked up where he left off. His mandate is serving Western interests. Diplomatic cover hides his agenda.

On December 27, Reuters headlined “Peace envoy Brahimi, Syria diplomats in Moscow talks,” saying:

On December 24, Brahimi met with Assad in Damascus. UN spokesman Martin Nesirky said he’s due in Moscow December 29. Syrian officials will join him.

In Damascus, Brahimi said:

“Certainly it was clear in Geneva (last June), and it’s even clearer now that the change which is needed is not cosmetic or superficial.”

“I believe the Syrian people need, want, and aspire to genuine change, and everyone knows what this means.”

“A government must be created….with full powers. Full powers means this government must have all the powers of the state. (It) will hold power during the transitional period.”

“What is preferred is that we don’t present such a plan until we feel that all sides have agreed to it. That way, implementing it is easy.”

“It that doesn’t happen, the other solution could be to go to the Security Council to issue a binding resolution for everyone.”

On Wednesday, Syria’s Deputy Foreign Minister, Faisal Muqdad flew to Moscow from Beirut. On Thursday, he met with Russian Foreign Ministry officials. No details were disclosed.

Brahimi’s involved in brokering conflict resolution on pro-Western terms. Muqdad came to discuss what’s best for Syrians.

Russian Foreign Ministry spokesman, Alexander Lukashevich, said:

“In our talks with Mr. Brahimi and with our American colleagues, we are trying to feel a way out of this situation on the basis of our common plan of action that was agreed in Geneva in June.”

It was about ending armed conflict, achieving peace and stability, adhering fully with international law provisions, and providing for a Syrian led transition. Doing so should represent everyone equitably.

Lukashevich added that plans are to “discuss a range of issues linked to a political and diplomatic settlement in Syria, including Brahimi’s efforts aimed at ending the violence and the launch of a comprehensive national dialogue.”

He stressed Geneva principles have “no alternative.” He accused Washington of agreeing, then reneging.

“Our American colleagues and some others….have turned sharply from (Geneva), by 180 degrees,” he said. They support “the opposition and (refuse) dialogue with the government.”

It “put(s) the opposition in the mood for no dialogue with the authorities but for overthrowing” them.

According to Moscow Carnegie Center analyst Dmitry Trenin:

“The biggest disappointment….is that one side thinks Assad should leave at the start of the process.” That’s America’s position.

“The other side thinks his departure should be as a result of the process.” That’s Russia’s view.

Foreign Minister Sergey Lavrov stresses that neither side can prevail in armed conflict. Unless resolved peacefully, it’ll continue longterm.

On December 27, the Syrian Arab News Agency (SANA) headlined “Russian Foreign Ministry: No Russian-US Plan to Settle the Situation in Syria,” saying:

Moscow want Geneva principles implemented. Lukashevich calls them “irreplaceable for settling the situation in Syria.”

Dialogue alone can resolve things. Russia wants Syrians alone to determine their country’s future. On Saturday, Lavrov and Brahimi will hold talks. Diplomatic conflict resolution will be stressed.

Syria’s Deputy Foreign Minister, Faisal Muqdad, will participate. “Nowadays, there is a need for active and decisive measures to put an end to the violence,” said Lukashevich.

SANA cited Brahimi saying Geneva principles include enough ideas to resolve conflict. New ones added to them aren’t needed.

He rhetorically expressed opposition to extremist elements. He added that internal conflict threatens “neighboring countries and the world.”

Earlier reports said he wants UN peacekeepers. That he hoped to enlist support from participating countries. Weeks ago he denied it.

His current language suggests it’s true. He favors a “peacekeeping process.” All parties must agree. “The countries that will contribute to the (process) should be approved by the parties,” he says.

Security Council approval must authorize it. Doing so he claims isn’t occupation.

“The crisis in Syria can be resolved through rapprochement of views between the Syrians, and if they (are) unable to do so, the international community and people should help them for good and not for evil,” he added.

Peacekeepers are military occupiers. They serve Western interests. They do more harm than good. Instead of restoring and maintaining peace, they’re belligerent enforcers.

Their history is deplorable. They terrorize populations. They’re involved in mass rapes and sexual trafficking. They commit murder and crimes against humanity. It’s common wherever they’re deployed.

Brahmi left that and more unexplained. He said so far no proposal was presented. He’ll wait until “after the consent of all parties” or seek binding Security Council authority. Hopefully Russia and China won’t permit it.

He welcomes all ideas. He was briefed on Iran’s initiative. He doesn’t object, but wants no “interfere(nce) within an integrated plan.” In other words, he wants pro-Western diktats enforced.

On December 27, Press TV said Iran’s Syrian ambassador, Mohammad-Reza Raouf-Sheibani, and Brahimi held talks. Views were exchanged.

Iran’s peace plan was presented. Brahimi will discuss them further in Tehran.

“On December 16, Iran unveiled details of a six-point (conflict resolution) plan,” said Press TV. It calls for “an immediate end to all violent and armed acts.”

It urges humanitarian aid, removing economic sanctions, and helping Syrian refugees return home.

It wants all sides involved in talks. It recommends forming a “national reconciliation committee.”

What’s next remains unclear. SANA reported that Russia’s Lebanese ambassador, Alexander Zasypkin, said Moscow rejects outside interference in Syrian affairs.

Foreign Minister Lavrov and other Russian officials stress it often. Syrians alone should decide who’ll lead them. Other nations should keep hands off.

For nearly two years, conditions have been polar opposite. Longstanding US plans call for regime change. America wants pro-Western puppet governance replacing Assad.

Conflict resolution remains distant. Achieving it depends on Washington calling off its dogs. Instead, military, financial, and political support continue.

Expect violence and instability to persist in 2013. NATO intervention and full-scale war looms. Russia’s going all-out to prevent it. Future reports will discuss progress.

A Final Comment

On December 27, Israel National News reported than Israeli Vice Prime Minister Moshe Yaalon said Washington is “preparing to intervene in Syria.”

Doing so depends on whether Assad uses chemical weapons internally. Syrian officials repeatedly deny intentions to do so. False flag instigation may be planned.

Pretexts are easy to invent. Washington prioritizes them. A 2013 surprise may await.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

http://www.dailycensored.com/moscow-talks-on-syria/

Drones, phones and other 2012 privacy threats

0

Jaikumar Vijayan, Computerworld US |

Verizon’s attempt — unsuccessful so far — to secure a patent for a so-called ‘snooping technology,’ which in this case would let television advertisers target individual viewers based on what they’re doing or saying in front of their sets, capped another challenging year for privacy advocates.

Verizon’s snooping technology and TV ads

The Verizon technology, which includes a sensor/camera housed in a set-top box, would determine the activities of individual viewers — eating, playing, cuddling, laughing, singing, fighting or gesturing — and then trigger personal advertisements based on the activities.

Overall, the technology would serve targeted ads based on what the user is doing, who the user is, his or her surroundings, and any other suitable personal information, according to Verizon.

The U.S. Patent Office delivered a “non-final” rejection of Verizon’s application in November.

But analysts say that because engineers are already working on such technology, it’s a cinch that some kind of similar technology will be included in TV set-top boxes in the not too distant future.

Here, in no particular order, are other developments in 2012 that could have a major long-term impact on privacy:

The U.S. drone law: Eye in the sky

The Federal Aviation Administration Modernization and Reform Act of 2012, signed into law by President Barack Obama in February, was immediately slammed by rights groups, privacy advocates and lawmakers who contended that the law poses a major threat to the privacy of law-abiding citizens.

The bill, still largely unnoticed by the general public, opens up American airspace to commercial unmanned aerial vehicles (UAVs), better known as drones. Over the next few years, the FAA is expected to license the use of as many as 30,000 drones by border patrol agents, government agencies, state and local law enforcement agencies as well as businesses.

The powerful drone lobby has done much to highlight the benefits of drones in tracking fugitive criminals, managing traffic, monitoring crops, conducting land management activities, news reporting and filmmaking.

Numerous agencies, including the Department of Homeland Security, NASA, the FBI. the border patrol, and local police departments have secured licenses to operate drones in U.S. airspace.

Rights advocates argue that the law includes no meaningful guidelines for protecting privacy rights.

The advocates warn that drones equipped with facial recognition cameras, license plate scanners, thermal imaging cameras, open WiFi sniffers, and other sensors could be used for general public safety surveillance.

The Center for Democracy and Technology earlier this year noted that static surveillance technology like closed circuit television cameras cannot track individuals beyond their fields of vision. But drones, the group contended, can peek into backyards and be used — without a warrant — to track individuals pervasively.

A drone flying at a height of 400 feet or more would likely be considered to be operating in a public space. So, the center argues, while police would need a warrant to peer over a private fence, they would not need one to use a drone to observe an individual in his or her backyard.

Warrantless cellphone location tracking: What Fourth Amendment?

Despite a major U.S. Supreme Court ruling in January on the constitutionality of GPS tracking by law enforcement agencies, the overall issue of location tracking of individuals remained as murky as ever in 2012.

Cellphones and other mobile devices offer criminal investigators a powerful tool for tracking suspects. Local police departments often use realtime cellphone data track individuals. In addition, historical cellphone data is often gathered — without a warrant — by police to track past activities of suspected criminals.

In a case now being heard by the U.S Fifth Circuit Court of Appeals, federal prosecutors maintain that there can be no reasonable expectation of privacy in historical cell phone location data that is collected and maintained by phone companies.

According to prosecutors, the Stored Communications Act (SCA) of 1986 allows them to use a relatively easy-to-obtain court order to force a carrier to turn over a person’s historical cell-site location information.

Read more

Activists voice dismay as Senate renews government surveillance measure

0

, guardian.co.uk |

Civil rights campaigners voiced dismay on Friday over the US Senate’s re-authorization of the government’s warrantless surveillance program, and the defeat of two amendments that would have provided for basic oversight of the eavesdropping.

The Senate voted 73-23 to extend the law, called the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act Amendments Act, for five years. The House of Representatives has already passed the measure, which President Obama has said he will sign.

But while the program was extended as expected, campaigners saw a silver lining in that the vote was closer than when the legislation was first introduced in 2008.

“We’re incredibly disappointed, not just that it passed, but that they rejected some very moderate amendments that wouldn’t have interfered with the collection of intelligence,” said Michelle Richardson, an ACLU expert on surveillance issues.

An amendment by senator Jeff Merkley of Oregon would have required the secret court that oversees surveillance requests to disclose “important rulings of law.” It failed 37-54. An amendment by Merkley’s fellow Oregon Democrat Ron Wyden would have required the government to estimate the number of US citizens it had spied on. It fell by a narrower margin, 43-52.

“We’re actually pleased that so many [Senate] members today want more transparency,” Richardson said, pointing to the 43 votes for Wyden. “There were more members voting for transparency and accountability than there were in 2008. The amendments did better this time.”

Read more

The Matrix-like reality created by our media

0

Why the Washington Post killed the story of Murdoch’s bid to buy the US presidency

Jonathan Cook | 

Carl Bernstein, of “All the President’s Men” fame, has arevealing commentary in theGuardian today, though revealing not entirely in a way he appears to understand. Bernstein highlights a story first disclosed earlier this month in the Washington Post by his former journalistic partner Bob Woodward that media mogul Rupert Murdoch tried to “buy the US presidency”.

A taped conversation shows that in early 2011 Murdoch sent Roger Ailes, the boss of his most important US media outlet, Fox News, to Afghanistan to persuade General David Petraeus, former commander of US forces, to run against Barack Obama as the Republican candidate in the 2012 presidential election. Murdoch promised to bankroll Petraeus’s campaign and commit Fox News to provide the general with wall-to-wall support.

Murdoch’s efforts to put his own man in the White House failed because Petraeus decided he did not want to run for office. “Tell [Ailes] if I ever ran,” Petraeus says in the recording, “but I won’t … but if I ever ran, I’d take him up on his offer.”

Read more

Anti-NDAA Bill Introduced in Nevada

0

The Nevada Chapters of PANDA (People Against the National Defense Authorization Act, the NDAA) announce the introduction of BDR 728, The Nevada Liberty Preservation Act

Activist Post |

The Bill, sponsored by Nevada State Senator Don Gustavson, will be part of the 2013 Nevada State Legislative session which begins in February.

Passage of the Nevada Liberty Preservation Act will demonstrate the Legislature’s commitment to Constitutional Law and Individual Liberty by restoring the right to due process to all persons in Nevada.

The 2012 National Defense Authorization Act was overwhelmingly passed by Congress and signed into law by President Barack Obama on December 31, 2011.

The 2012 NDAA declares the United States to be a battlefield in the war on terror and Section 1021 & 1022 authorize the indefinite detention, without charge or trial, of all persons on US soil suspected of terrorist activity or accused of ‘belligerent behavior’. This violates at least 23 Articles of and Amendments to both the US and Nevada Constitutions.

Government threatens UK teachers with pay cuts as punishment for industrial action

0

Julie Hyland  |

Education Secretary Michael Gove’s demand that head teachers take “robust” measures against staff involved in industrial action is a declaration of war by the Conservative/Liberal Democrat coalition.

Its immediate target is an assault on the pay and conditions of teachers, which are to be decimated as part of the government’s drive to complete the carving up of public education by private sponsors under the guise of academies and Free Schools. But the government intends to create a precedent that will be used against all public sector workers to force through the privatisation of all social provision from the National Health Service to welfare.

Gove’s demand was made in a letter to the heads of all state schools in England. Referring to the current work-to-rule by members of the National Union of Teachers (NUT) and the National Association of Schoolmasters Union of Women Teachers (NASUWT) over jobs, pensions and working conditions, he published legal advice asserting that those taking action are in breach of their contracts.

“Pay deductions represent a lawful response, and the advice sets out how deductions can be made in a proportionate and reasonable way,” he threatened.

Demanding head teachers “support your school(s)” Gove wrote, “I am convinced that by working together in a coordinated way we can protect the pupils, parents, teachers and headteachers who would otherwise suffer because of this irresponsible industrial action.”

His claim to be acting in defence of pupils, parents and teachers is a barefaced lie. Public education has been deliberately run down and deprived of funds by successive governments for decades. The coalition is preparing to finish the job through a major offensive against teachers. Gove is considering legislation to outlaw industrial action by teachers and give schools new powers to dismiss staff, while Chancellor George Osborne has announced the government is to break-up national pay bargaining for teachers in favour of performance-related pay based on individual assessments.

This was backed by the School Teachers’ Pay Review Body. Chair Patricia Hodgson argued, “Individual schools are best placed to understand pupil needs and local circumstances and should be free to spend their money as they see fit, within the national framework.”

Read more

Do You Know the 5 Powerful Psychological Triggers Your Doctor Uses to Vaccinate Your Child?

0

Jeffry John Aufderheide, VacTruth.com |

If you’ve ever been in a doctor’s office with a child, you know what I mean.

Doctors are well known for applying psychological pressure to parents questioning vaccines. Maybe you’ve experienced this pressure?

Here are five psychological triggers doctors use against you, the parent, and some of the suggestions you can use to overcome them.

PSYCHOLOGICAL TRIGGER #1: POWER OF AUTHORITY

This is one of the most powerful psychological triggers, as you will see.

Doctors are in a position of authority — they went to medical school. (You didn’t.) This fact alone puts them in a unique position and you are paying for their advice.

Society in general makes assumptions that doctors know the absolute best information for your health relating to all topics — especially vaccines. Often, doctors repeat the information given to them by the Centers for Disease Control and the Food and Drug Administration.

The doctor’s assumption is this: if the FDA approves a drug and the CDC recommends it, it must be safe. Maybe they haven’t heard of 100,000 DEATHS yearly from adverse (FDA-approved) drug reactions? [1]

Taken to the extreme, some doctors abuse their power in a predatory fashion. The nature of their authority takes on a bully-like quality.

Should you listen to them about vaccines? After all, they are wearing a white coat.

Examples of the Power of Authority:

  • “According to Professor [Michael] Cohen, “in case after case, patients, nurses, pharmacists, and other physicians do not question the prescription.” “A physician ordered ear drops to be administered to the right ear of a patient suffering pain and infection there. But instead of writing out completely the location “right ear” on the prescription, the doctor abbreviated it so that the instructions read “place in R ear.” Upon receiving the prescription, the duty nurse promptly put the required number of ear drops into the patient’s anus…Yet neither the patient nor the nurse questioned it.” [3]

What You Can Do…

Realize the doctor may not have as much knowledge or training on vaccines as you think. The Latin word for doctor is “docere,” meaning to teach. Is your doctor teaching you how to build better health, or are they using their position to convince you to get your child injected?

Doctors only have as much power as you give them — he or she cannot make a guarantee that a vaccine will work, nor can they guarantee that it will be safe.

Recognize the power rests in YOU! The choice is yours to say “YES” or “NO!”

PSYCHOLOGICAL TRIGGER #2: GUILT TRIPPING OR SHAMING THE PARENT

Another common tactic is to make a parent feel bad for even questioning vaccines.

It takes the form of bluntly insulting the parent. It could also be underhanded remarks or comments (passive-aggressive behavior). The predictable result? It fills the parent with guilt or shame for questioning the doctor.

In turn, the parent may have unanswered questions but reluctantly goes along with the doctor’s orders and vaccinates their child.

This is a very powerful psychological trigger when combined with the power of authority in a one-on-one setting.

Examples of Guilt Tripping and Shaming:

Doctors (and nurses) have been reported as saying very cruel things to parents who question vaccines or do not vaccinate, such as:

  • You are a parasite to society.
  • You are being irresponsible.
  • You are a bad parent.
  • You are not a doctor.
  • Your child cannot go to school without vaccines.
  • Your child will die without “life-saving” vaccines.
  • You are free-loading off of society’s herd immunity.
  • You are getting the benefits of vaccination without paying the price.
  • You are an “Internet Mom.”
  • You don’t understand science.
  • You do not care about your child’s health or future.
  • Your ignorance is causing diseases to come back.

What You Can Do…

Recognize this behavior for what it is: a form of passive-aggressive behavior coming from the insecurities of the doctor. It’s pure emotion.

Most mothers attend the well-baby checkups by themselves. Have your husband or a good friend who supports your decision come with you to the doctor’s office.

Here are some suggested questions you can ask your pediatrician. Naturally, use your own discernment:

  • Will you read out loud and review with me the ingredients of the vaccine you intend to inject into my child?
  • How will the combined ingredients in vaccines make my child healthier?
  • If vaccines work, how is my child a threat to vaccinated children?
  • If vaccines work, what is the point of booster shots?
  • Since every child is different biologically, how do you know when a vaccine works and when it does not? How do you test that?
  • What scientific tests do you perform before and after vaccination to rule out my child is having an adverse reaction?
  • If you inject my child with multiple vaccines at once, if there is an adverse reaction, how do you know which vaccine is the culprit?
  • Can you show me the safety studies showing me the effects of injecting multiple vaccines at once?

Note: Your doctor will not likely know the answers to these questions and get angry with you. If they get angry, you may experience psychological trigger #4 immediately!!!

PSYCHOLOGICAL TRIGGER #3: SENSE OF URGENCY

If you are not prepared, this particular psychological trigger will catch you by surprise. Here’s how…

When you are in a medical setting — doctor’s office, birth room at the hospital, emergency room, etc. – doctors will use this setting with emotionally charged language to get your child vaccinated.

One caveat: Nurses can be very aggressive in this manner as well.

Nurses may inject a baby at any opportunity after birth — in the mother arms without asking (happened to me), while the baby is being “washed up,” or while the baby is being circumcised.

Example of Sense of Urgency:

One of the most outrageous examples I have been told is from an acquaintance of mine. Let’s call her Angie.

Angie’s child almost had his finger cut off in a freak accident at home. With the child’s finger dangling and needing to be addressed, the emergency room doctor started to pressure the mother into getting her child vaccinated on the spot!

If he didn’t get vaccinated right then and there, he was in imminent danger of getting a “life-threatening disease!” Can you believe it?

She stood her ground and told the doctor her son has already been through enough.

What You Can Do…

Why do you have to get a vaccine right on the spot? If you ask questions and want to find out more information about the toxic chemicals and dangerous biological agents a doctor injects into your child, you should have that right.

Recognize your doctor may use emotionally charged language. Here are some of the psychological keyword triggers to be aware of when your doctor refers to vaccines:

  • Referring to vaccines as being “life-saving.”
  • Referring to vaccines as being “safe and effective.”
  • Referring to vaccines as being “no-risk” or “very little risk.”
  • Using “death,” “debilitating,” and “deadly diseases” while referring to “vaccine-preventable diseases.”
  • Using the terms “vaccines” and “immunization” interchangeably as if they had the same meaning.

PSYCHOLOGICAL TRIGGER #4: FEAR OF LOSS

Fear of loss has recently become a hot favorite for pediatricians.

This relatively new tactic is called “Firing Your Patient,” originating from the American Academy of Pediatrics. Here’s how this psychological trigger works.

If a parent questions vaccines or what the doctor says regarding vaccination, the doctor simply tells the parent he/she will no longer be the family’s doctor.

This method works extremely well because it puts the mother into a stressful fear-based state. She is being told to vaccinate her child on the spot or lose her doctor. Fortunately, there are answers and this is just another manipulation tactic.

Example of Fear of Loss:

This mock conversation between a doctor and patient is inspired by a comment left by Shawn Siegel on a recent article and illustrates the point beautifully.

Pediatrician: We’re done measuring and weighing your son. The nurse will be in shortly with the vaccines.

Jenny: Before she comes in, can I ask you a few questions about the vaccines? I’m a little nervous.

Pediatrician: Of course. What are you worried about?

Jenny: I’ve been doing research on the ingredients in vaccines and…

Pediatrician: Where did you look for this information?

Jenny: On the Internet …

Pediatrician: You can’t trust everything you read on the Internet. There’s a lot of bad information out there. The ingredients in vaccines are in such small amounts, you have nothing to worry about. Do you think the FDA or Centers for Disease Control would allow anything dangerous to be put into the vaccines?

Jenny: I don’t know — my neighbor’s son became autistic right after being vaccinated. She swears it was the vaccine and…

Pediatrician: Vaccines do not cause autism! It has been scientifically refuted. Life-saving vaccines are protective. Not vaccinating your child is irresponsible. Now if you have no further questions, I’ll send in the nurse.

Jenny: But all of these vaccines at once? Can’t my son just have one today? I’d like to investigate these other vaccines a little more before he has all of them at once. I’ve heard we can do an alternative schedule.

Pediatrician: There is nothing else to talk about. If you do not protect your son according to the recommended guidelines, I am going to ask you to leave my office right now. If your son dies from a deadly, vaccine-preventable disease, I will not have that on my conscience.

What You Can Do…

First, be aware of your options!

What do pediatricians do? They measure and weigh your baby — and vaccinate them! Do they teach you about nutrition or good health practices? Have you ever tried to ask a pediatrician to give you sound advice on nutrition? If not or you don’t think so … read on.

We “fired” our pediatrician when we realized what they actually did. Now we see a “friendly” family doctor, a chiropractor, nutritionist, naturopath, and even a doctor of osteopathic medicine (D.O.).

Dr. Robert Medelsohn has written a fantastic book to help you overcome many of your fears and worries, entitledHow to Raise a Healthy Child in Spite of Your Doctor. [4]

PSYCHOLOGICAL TRIGGER #5: THE PROMISE OF HOPE

Doctors frame vaccines as a ‘preventative measure’ for disease while completely ignoring the major roles better nutrition, food storage and handling, sanitation, and hygiene have played in decreasing disease in society.

They want you to believe injecting vaccines laced with formaldehyde, aluminum, MSG, and viruses cultured off of animal tissue will protect your child from disease.

It really is a promise of false hope. Here’s why …

Doctors apply the same “answer” (vaccines) to every child expecting the same result. Parents know not every child is biologically the same — do doctors?

Example of The Promise of Hope:

You may hear analogies to how vaccines work. One of the recent favorites is comparing vaccines to seat belts. Doctors will tell you that if you get vaccinated it will be like protecting yourself as if you were wearing a seat belt and got into a car crash.

They say vaccines work in the same way — they protect you from any future “crash.” After your child is vaccinated, they are protected.

Here’s the rest of the story …

What You Can Do…

It seems like common sense and deserves repeating: good health does not come through the end of needle!

Let’s go with the seat belt analogy from above. Seat belts are not worn just once or twice. To be effective, you must wear them every time you get into the car. Similarly, good health requires your regular attention.

Here are some common sense suggestions you can take right now and “wear your seat belt” every day:

  • Wash your hands 5-6 times a day — especially after going to the bathroom or before preparing food.
  • Drink clean water
  • Eat or juice organic raw foods
  • Properly store and prepare your food

Here are some of my favorite resources regarding the topic:

CONCLUSION

Doctors push vaccines — and many do use a combination or all of the five psychological triggers mentioned above. Some are unaware of their manipulation — and unsuspecting parents are even more vulnerable to this pressure.

Lastly, the only way not to be affected by these psychological triggers is to be an informed parent — read books and vaccine package inserts. This information will give you the confidence and courage you need to stand up to an emotional doctor.

I haven’t covered every single psychological trigger used — so if you know of more or have a story to tell, share it in the comments section below.

References

  1. http://www.fda.gov/Drugs/DevelopmentApprovalProcess/
  2. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Milgram_experiment
  3. Cialdini, Robert (2007). Influence. The Psychology of Persuasion. HarperCollins Publishers. Pg. 219-220.
  4. Mendelsohn, Robert (1987). How to Raise a Healthy Child In Spite of Your Doctor. Random House Publishing.

Outrageous HSBC Settlement Proves the Drug War is a Joke

0

Rolling Stone |

If you’ve ever been arrested on a drug charge, if you’ve ever spent even a day in jail for having a stem of marijuana in your pocket or “drug paraphernalia” in your gym bag, Assistant Attorney General and longtime Bill Clinton pal Lanny Breuer has a message for you: Bite me.

Breuer this week signed off on a settlement deal with the British banking giant HSBC that is the ultimate insult to every ordinary person who’s ever had his life altered by a narcotics charge. Despite the fact that HSBC admitted to laundering billions of dollars for Colombian and Mexican drug cartels (among others) and violating a host of important banking laws (from the Bank Secrecy Act to the Trading With the Enemy Act), Breuer and his Justice Department elected not to pursue criminal prosecutions of the bank, opting instead for a “record” financial settlement of $1.9 billion, which as one analyst noted is about five weeks of income for the bank.

The banks’ laundering transactions were so brazen that the NSA probably could have spotted them from space. Breuer admitted that drug dealers would sometimes come to HSBC’s Mexican branches and “deposit hundreds of thousands of dollars in cash, in a single day, into a single account, using boxes designed to fit the precise dimensions of the teller windows.”

This bears repeating: in order to more efficiently move as much illegal money as possible into the “legitimate” banking institution HSBC, drug dealers specifically designed boxes to fit through the bank’s teller windows. Tony Montana’s henchmen marching dufflebags of cash into the fictional “American City Bank” in Miami was actually more subtle than what the cartels were doing when they washed their cash through one of Britain’s most storied financial institutions.

Read more

U.N. Report Reveals Secret Law Enforcement Techniques for Decrypting Online Communications

2

JG Vibes, theintelhub.com |

A new UN report gives some insight into new techniques that law enforcement is using to spy on suspects and activists. This information is especially useful for people who want to stay off the radar as much as possible while online. Many of the people caught in these situations were legitimately violent groups, but you can be sure that these same tactics are being used against peaceful activists as well.

Hacker10 writes:

“Buried inside a recent United Nations Office on Drugs and Crime report titled “Use of Internet for Terrorist Purposes” one can carve out details and examples of  law enforcement electronic surveillance techniques that are normally kept secret. The report includes real accounts of investigative techniques countering terrorist groups secure communication systems.”

Some of the most important points covered in the report are as follows:

  • Point 187: Members of the outlawed Turkish Revolutionary People’s Liberation Party-Front (DHKP-C) used steganography software called Camouflage to hide messages inside JPEG files and encrypted attachments with WinZip before emailing them. A joint Turkish and Italian police operation managed to decrypt the messages and arrest over a hundred people involved with the organization.
  • Point 194: An Alqeda affiliated webmaster managing a jihadist website from Brazil was specifically targeted by the police to grab him by surprise while he was still online to make sure that they would get his encryption keys thanks to which the investigators were able to open all relevant encrypted files.
  • Point 280: International members of the guerilla group Revolutionary Armed Forces of Colombia (FARC) communicated with their counterparts hiding messages inside images with steganography and sending the emails disguised as spam, deleting Internet browsing cache afterwards to make sure that the authorities would not get hold of the data. Spanish and Colombian authorities cooperated to break the encryption keys and successfully deciphered the messages.
  • Point 374: German citizens members of a group called Islamic Jihad Union used the dead email inbox trick to communicate in between them, the suspects did not send the email  to prevent wire tipping in transit, saving the messages to the draft folder instead for the other part to read and reply, coupled with accessing the Internet using insecure wireless access points of unsuspecting citizens with one of the suspects using encryption which forensics expert tried to access and failed.

View document here

Court Rules Peace Activists Can Sue the U.S. Military for Infiltration

Ruling marks the first time a court has affirmed people’s ability to sue the military for violating their First and Fourth Amendment rights.
 

In a potentially precedent-setting decision, the Ninth Circuit Court of Appeals ruled Monday that a Guild lawyer’s challenge to military spying on peace activists can proceed. The ruling marks the first time a court has affirmed people’s ability to sue the military for violating their First and Fourth Amendment rights.

“This has never been done before,” said NLG member attorney Larry Hildes, who is handling the case. “The U.S. government has spied on political dissidents throughout history and this particular plot lasted through two presidencies, but never before has a court said that we can challenge it the way we have.”

The ruling is the latest development in the lawsuit, Panagacos v. Towery, first brought by Hildes in 2009 on behalf of a group of Washington state antiwar activists who found themselves infiltrated by John Towery, an employee at a fusion center inside a local Army base. Fusion centers are multi-jurisdictional intelligence facilities which house federal and local law enforcement agencies alongside military units and private security companies. Their operations are largely secret and unregulated. There are currently 77 fusion centers in the United States.

The lawsuit names Towery as well as the Army, Navy, Air Force, FBI, CIA, Department of Homeland Security, and other law enforcement agencies. For at least two years, Towery posed as an activist with the antiwar group Port Militarization Resistance (PMR), a group that sought to oppose the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan through civil disobedience. The infiltration came to light when public records requests filed with the City of Olympia unearthed documents detailing an expansive surveillance operation. In addition to PMR, Towery targeted Students for a Democratic Society, the Olympia Movement for Justice and Peace, the Industrial Workers of the World, Iraq Veterans Against the War, an anarchist bookstore in Tacoma, and other activist groups.

The latest ruling denies the government’s appeal on the basis that the allegations of First and Fourth Amendment violations carried out by Towery are “plausible.” His lawyers have until December 31 to appeal the decision. If they do not appeal, the case will return to district court and the discovery phase will begin.

The National Lawyers Guild is the oldest and largest public interest/human rights bar organization in the United States. Its headquarters are in New York and it has members in every state.

Paul Craig Roberts: Agenda Driven News

0

Paul Craig Roberts, rinf.com |

I have known for a long time that US news is agenda-driven. Tonight (December 18) I was made aware of the extent to which agenda-driven US news drives the news of the rest of the world.

For reasons unbeknownst to me, Russia Today Moscow requested a live TV interview via Skype about the Newtown, Connecticut, school shootings that killed 20 young children and several adults. I was interested to know what was Moscow’s interest in the shootings, and I agreed to the interview.

I was surprised to see that RT Moscow’s interest was to spread the official US story of the shootings and to ask me if I thought “assault weapons” would be banned as a consequence.

Many things can be an assault weapon. A baseball bat, a knife, a fist, a foot, a single shot .22 rifle, a double-barrel shotgun, a fireplace poker, a six-shot revolver, a brick, a sword, a bow and arrow, a lance. A person can add many items to this short list.

Gun-control advocates have defined “assault weapon” to be a semi-automatic civilian version of military weapons, such as AR-15, the civilian version of the military M-16, and AK-47. During the Clinton administration the civilian version of these weapons was not permitted to have various harmless features because the features made the rifles have a military appearance, and the weapons were restricted to magazines that held no more than ten rounds.

Today 20 and 30 round magazines are available. For a professional, the capacity of the magazines is immaterial. With experience a person can change clips in a second. A button is pushed, the clip drops out and a new one is inserted. For reasons hard to follow, gun control advocates think that a ten-round clip turns an “assault weapon” into something else.

I told RT Moscow that the United States was the most complete police state in human history. Thanks to modern technology, Washington is able to spy on its subjects far beyond the capabilities of Joseph Stalin and Adolf Hitler. Even George Orwell’s imagination in his dystopian novel, 1984, has been surpassed by Washington’s current practice. The “war on terror” is the excuse for the American Police State.

A police state, I said, was inconsistent with an armed population, and as all other constitutional amendments have fallen, the sole remaining amendment, the Second Amendment, will not survive much longer.

But why RT Moscow’s focus on “assault weapons”? The accused, Adam Lanza, was immediately declared guilty. According to the Associated Press, the Newtown, Connecticut medical examiner, Dr H. Wayne Carver said that “all the victims of the Connecticut elementary school shooting were killed up close by multiple rifle shots.” http://www.staradvertiser.com/news/breaking/183651631.html

Yet Fox News http://www.fox5vegas.com/story/20346133/reports-of-multiple-dead-including-1-child-from-ct-elementary-school-shooting reports that “A CNN reporter said police recovered three weapons at the scene: a Glock and a Sig-Sauer, which are handguns, as well as a .223 Bushmaster rifle. The rifle was in the back seat of the car the gunman drove to the school, the handguns were inside the school.”

The same Fox News report says: “Security measures implemented this year at Sandy Hook [the school] kept doors locked during class hours, and people have to be buzzed in before entering. There is a camera to view whoever enters the building.” If this report is correct, how did an armed Lanza gain entry to the school?

I tried to point out to RT Moscow that these news reports indicate that the accused dead gunman, whom no one can interrogate, if he is indeed the culprit, killed the children with handguns, not with an “assault rifle” left in the car, but that the medical examiner said the children were killed with rifle shots.

The discrepancy is obvious. Either the news reports are incorrect, the medical examiner is wrong, or someone other than Adam Lanza shot the children.

This was too much for RT Moscow’s news anchor. She cut me off with her statement that the children were dead by whatever gun. Yet, the focus of the program was on “assault rifles.” This focus was reinforced when I was asked to stay online for a post-interview question.

The question from RT Moscow was whether I thought assault weapons would be banned. I answered that I thought all guns would be banned. I had already told the TV anchor that I thought that all guns would be taken away from US subjects, but that I doubted the efficacy of the ban. I told the news anchor that during the early part of the 20th century, the US, in all its wisdom, had a ban on alcohol, but alcohol was everywhere available. The alcohol ban was the origin of the crime syndicates’ fortunes. Today we have the drug ban, going back decades. The result is that drugs are everywhere, and drug syndicates are making billions. It will not be much different with a gun ban. England has a gun ban, but criminals have guns, and today the formerly unarmed British police are heavily armed. When I lived in England, guns were not banned and the police carried nightsticks, not firearms.

The focus on “assault weapons” is puzzling for another reason. According to news reports Lanza had a personality or mental disorder, or perhaps he was just different.

Regardless, he was on medication. So does the blame lie with guns or with medication?

As the agenda is to ban guns, the blame is placed on guns.

In the previous mass shooting at the Colorado movie theater, eyewitness accounts differed from the official account, and according to news accounts the suspect was involved with the government in some sort of mind control experiments and was found after the shooting sitting in a car in the movie theater parking lot.

Similarly, the Connecticut school shooting has puzzling aspects. In the real time report to the police, a teacher says that she saw “two shadows running past the gym.” http://sgtreport.com/2012/12/so-many-questions-too-few-answers-was-the-sandy-hook-massacre-an-organzied-false-flag-operation/The police radio recording also reports two men in a van at the school stopped and detained, and various news sources report that the police arrested a man in the nearby woods. The man says, “I didn’t do it,” but how would a man out in the woods know what had just happened? There are no TVs to watch in the woods; yet, the man denied doing the shooting. Very strange.

What often happens is that there are a number of initial false reports, such as in the Connecticut case the report that Lanza’s mother was a teacher at the school and was killed at the school, that Lanza had also killed his father, and that Lanza’s brother might have been involved. Any discrepancies in the official story then get thrown out with the false reports. As the media simply goes along with the official story and does not investigate, it is impossible to know what really happened. People just accept the official story.

It seems odd, however, that RT Moscow would uncritically follow the US media in reporting the official story after experiencing, for example, the US media’s intentional misreporting of the Georgian-Russian war, which was started by the former Soviet republic of Georgia but blamed on Russia. Does RT Moscow really believe the US media that the US missile bases surrounding Russia are directed at Iran?

Americans have been well armed for several centuries, but “gun violence” is new. Why?

Are there more disturbed people? More medicated people? Have Americans lost self-control, their moral conscience? Are Americans being molded by violent movies and video games and by eleven years of their government’s slaughter of other peoples? Have Americans lost empathy for others?

Tom McNamara, a lecturer at the French National Military Academy, asks: “Do Arabs Cry For Their Children Too?” http://www.counterpunch.org/2012/12/18/do-arabs-cry-for-their-children-too/print

The Connecticut school shooting is a tragedy in more ways than one. Children lost their lives, families lost their children, and the tragedy is being used to disarm Americans faced with a police state growing in power and menace.

US teen kills classmate with shotgun in South Dakota

0
A teenage boy has killed his classmate with a shotgun in the state of South Dakota after the two argued over a paintball game, reports say.

The 16-year-old victim, Dalton Williams, was found on Tuesday in the state’s capital, Pierre, lying in the shooter’s house with a wound in his chest, the arrest affidavit said on Wednesday.

The high school student was transferred to a nearby hospital, but later died of the gunshot wound.

Pierre Police Chief Bob Grandpre said that the shooter, also 16, was arrested at his home over a first-degree murder charge and was held in Hughes County on Wednesday.

A witness, who was with the boys inside the house, said Williams and the shooter wrestled playfully after they argued over the game.

The shooter then retrieved a shotgun and pointed it at the witness, the affidavit said. The shooter then took a shell from a drawer, loaded the gun and pointed it again at the witness.

The witness said he wanted to escape the scene through a sliding glass door, but Williams suddenly stepped in between the two schoolboys.

The shooter fired the gun and Williams fell to the ground. The witness left the house and called the police, the affidavit added.

The shooting came amid a new hike in the US gun violence. On December 14, a 20-year-old man, identified as Adam Lanza, killed twenty children and six adults at an elementary school in Newtown, Connecticut.

On December 15, a gunman opened fire at a hospital in the state of Alabama, injuring a police officer and two other people before a policeman shot and killed him.

On December 16, in a shooting in the state of Kansas, a gunman killed two police officers outside a grocery store in the city of Topeka.

The United States has experienced several mass killings so far in 2012, including the Colorado cinema shooting in July that killed 12 people and injured nearly 60 others. In August, a killing spree at a Sikh temple left seven people dead.

A New Earth? Potentially habitable planet discovered orbiting nearby star similar to our sun

0

RT |

Astronomers have discovered that the closest Sun-like star, Tau Ceti, is orbited by five planets, one of which is in the “habitable range”. If its existence is confirmed, the planet could be the closest potentially life-harboring world to our own.

Tau Ceti, twelve light years away, belongs to the same G-type yellow main-sequence class as our sun, which is relatively rare — only one in 25 stars has the same properties.

Its planets were detected not by direct observation, but by calculating the slight gravitational tug these as-yet-unseen planets exert on the orbit of their star. Previously, these star ‘wobbles’ could not be clearly separated due to a multitude of other factors, but scientists at several universities in the UK and the US, say they have cleared the ‘noise’ with sophisticated new techniques and have found five planets.

“This discovery is in keeping with our emerging view that virtually every star has planets, and that the galaxy must have many such potentially habitable Earth-sized planets. They are everywhere, even right next door,” said a statement from Steve Vogt, of the University of California, Santa Cruz, who is the co-author of the discovery, due to be published by the reputable journal Astronomy and Astrophysics.

One of the planets, tentatively designated HD 10700e, appears to be in the so-called “Goldilocks zone”, the relatively small corridor where temperatures are just right for water to remain liquid, and for life to possibly flourish. It is two to six times the size of the Earth, weighs five times as much, and orbits its sun every 168 days.

Tau Ceti is three times as far away as the closest star system to our sun, Alpha Centauri. Earlier this year, astronomers confirmed that Alpha Centauri contains a planet, but with a temperature of 1,200 degrees Celsius it is unlikely to host life.

Yet it is too early to believe that HD 10700e is an Earth-like paradise, waiting for us to arrive. It is not clear what it is made of, and what gases its atmosphere contains.

Some scientists remain to be convinced it exists at all.

“They’re really digging deep into the noise here,” Sara Seager, an astronomer at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, told Science magazine, referring to the techniques used by the scientists. “The astronomical community is going to find it hard to accept planet discoveries from signals so deeply embedded in noise.”

The astronomers behind the project themselves say the discovery may take as long as ten years to confirm, and insist they published the findings to attract others to studying Tau Ceti.

But the existence of HD 10700e should be relatively easy to confirm, compared to other potential planet candidates.

“Tau Ceti is one of our nearest cosmic neighbours and so bright that we may be able to study the atmospheres of these planets in the not-too-distant future,” James Jenkins, of the Universidad de Chile and the University of Hertfordshire, said in a statement.

There are currently 854 planets confirmed by observation outside our solar system, but only a few of those could potentially support life.

CIA documents give evidence of mind controlled shootings

0

Examiner |

The tragic Newtown school shooting and many other heartbreaking mass shootings in recent years have spread fear and panic among parents and the general public. Yet some are questioning if there isn’t more than meets the eye to these cruel and bizarre shootings. Is it conceivable that there might be a deeper agenda here?

This essay presents undeniable evidencethat secret government mind controlprograms have created assassins and murderers out of unsuspecting citizens.Could the Newtown shooter by a product of one of these secret programs to support a hidden agenda?

The astonishing excerpts below, taken verbatim from declassified CIA documents, reveal detailed mind control experiments in highly secret, government-sponsored experiments. Through hypnosis, drugs, and electric shock, CIA clinicians fractured personalities and induced multiple personality disorder (MPD) — also called dissociative identity disorder (DID).

These top secret experiments were successful in creating Manchurian Candidates or super spies programmed to carry out assassination, terrorist acts, sexual favors, and more without conscious knowledge of what they were doing. The army of Manchurian Candidates created may have played a key, hidden role in world politics.

To verify this startling information, links are provided to scanned images of the original CIA documents. Instructions are also available here to order any of these documents directly from the CIA using the Freedom of Information Act (FOIA).

Though dating from the 1950s and 60s, these revealing documents were not released for decades for reasons of “national security.” The U.S. government claims mind control experiments are no longer being carried out, yet how can we know? The existence of these programs was denied for decades, and certainly any recent documents would be classified secret under the rubric of “national security.”

A trusted CIA informant I know assures me that these programs are ongoing. These disturbing methods are used by various countries in clandestine operations around the world. Many might prefer not to look at these ugly wounds to the soul of our nation and world. Yet if we avoid or ignore them, they are likely to grow and fester.

Only by having the courage to look into the shadow parts of our world can we first understand and then begin to heal these wounds. See the What You Can Do section near the bottom of this essay for more valuable information on how you can help stop the craziness and bring this vital information to light.

Note: If you become overwhelmed by this material, please click here for support. If you think you may have been subject to some of the things mentioned here, click here for information on getting help and support in wonderful online communities. And for lots of reliable verifiable information from videos, major media articles, and more on these secret mind control programs, click here.

CIA document and page number: 190684, pp. 1, 4
Title: Outline of Special H Cases
Date: 7 January 1953
Page 1, Page 4

In a general request for volunteers [deleted names] volunteered for H [hypnosis] experimentation and were originally tested on 21 May 1951. Both girls, at this time, were nineteen years of age. These subjects have clearly demonstrated that they can pass from a fully awake state to a deep H controlled state via the telephone, via some very subtle signal that cannot be detected by other persons in the room, and without the other individuals being able to note the change.

It has been shown clearly that physically individuals can be induced into H by telephone, by receiving written matter, or by the use of code, signal, or words. Control of those hypnotized can be passed from one individual to another without great difficulty. It has also been shown by experimentation with these girls that they can act as unwilling couriers for information purposes, and that they can be conditioned to a point where they believe a change in identity on their part even on the polygraph.

Note: This document shows that CIA experimenters were successful in hypnotizing young women (19 years old in this case) to do things they would not do normally without any memory afterward, sometimes even unwillingly. Though they volunteered, these women were thus programmed to be Manchurian Candidates or super spies with no knowledge of what these men were doing to them.

CIA document and page number: 17395, p. 18
Title: ESP Research
Date: Unknown
Link to view image of original: Click here

Learning models will be instituted in which the subject will be rewarded or punished for his overall performance and reinforced in various ways — by being told whether he was right, by being told what the target was, with electric shock etc. … In other cases drugs and psychological tricks will be used to modify his attitudes. The experimenters will be particularly interested in disassociative states, from the abaissement de niveau mental to multiple personality in so-called mediums, and an attempt will be made to induce a number of states of this kind, using hypnosis.

Note: This document provides proof that the CIA was was using drugs and electric shock in attempting to induce MPD (multiple personality disorder). Though this document uses the masculine “he” to describe the subject, other documents show that most of the subjects used were young women who volunteered. The subjects were not informed about the deeper aspects and implications for which they were being trained. If you view the original, you will also find interesting information on ESP experiments.

CIA document and page number: 190691, p. 1, 2
Title: Hypnotic Experimentation and Research 
Date: 10 February 1954
Link to view image of original: Page 1, Page 2

A posthypnotic of the night before (pointed finger, you will sleep) was enacted. Misses [deleted] and [deleted] immediately progressed to a deep hypnotic state with no further suggestion. Miss [deleted] was then instructed (having previously expressed a fear of firearms in any fashion) that she would use every method at her disposal to awaken miss [deleted] (now in a deep hypnotic sleep), and failing this, she would pick up a pistol nearby and fire it at Miss [deleted]. She was instructed that her rage would be so great that she would not hesitate to “kill” [deleted] for failing to awaken.

Miss [deleted] carried out these suggestions to the letter including firing the (unloaded pneumatic pistol) gun at [deleted] and then proceeding to fall into a deep sleep. After proper suggestions were made, both were awakened and expressed complete amnesia for the entire sequence. Miss [deleted] was again handed the gun, which she refused (in an awakened state) to pick up or accept form the operator. She expressed absolute denial that the foregoing sequence had happened.

Miss [deleted] felt reluctant about participating further since she expressed her doubt as to any useful purpose in further attendance. The Operator thereupon proceeded in full view of all other subjects to explain to Miss [deleted] that he planned to induce a deep state of hypnosis now. The reaction was as had been expected. Miss [deleted] excused herself to make a telephone call (defense mechanism?). Upon her return a very positive approach was adopted by the operator whereupon a deeper, much deeper state of hypnosis was obtained.

Immediately a posthypnotic was induced that when the operator accidently dropped a steel ball in his hand to the floor … Miss [deleted] would again go into hypnosis. Miss [deleted] then advised that she must conclude her work for the evening. She arose to adjust her hair before the mirror. The ball was dropped and she promptly slumped back into the chair and back into hypnosis. It is the opinion of the operator the Miss [deleted] if properly trained (positive approach) will continue to improve.

Note: Here we have proof that these women could be converted into unsuspecting and even unwilling assassins. They could be programmed to assassinate anyone and would do so without any conscious knowledge afterward. Note also the questionable status of “volunteer” implied. Though these women originally volunteered, unwillingness to continue could be manipulated by the men running the program.

CIA document and page number: 190527, pp. 1, 2
Title: SI and H Experimentation 
Date: 25 September 1951
Link to view images of original: Page 1, Page 2
Note: SI stands for sleep induction and H for hypnosis

Prior to actually beginning the more complex experiments, several simple post H were worked with both of the girls participating. The first major experiment of the evening was set up as follows without previous explanation to either [deleted] or [deleted]. Both subjects were placed in a very deep trance state and while in this state, the following instructions were given:

(A) [Deleted] was instructed that when she awakened, she was to procede to [deleted] room. She was told that while there, she would receive a telephone call from an individual whom she would know only as “Joe”. This individual would engage her in a normal telephone conversation. During this conversation, this individual would give her a code word and upon mentioning the code word, [deleted] would go into a deep SI [sleep induction] trance state, but would be “normal” in appearance with her eyes open.

[Deleted] was then told that upon the conclusion of the telephone conversation, she would procede to the ladies room where she would meet a girl who was unknown to her. She was told that she would strike up a conversation with this girl and during the conversation she would mention the code word “New York” to this other girl, who, in turn, would give her a device and further instructions which were to be carried out by [deleted]. She was told that after she carried out the instructions, she was to return to the Operations Room, sit in the sofa and go immediately into a deep sleep.

(B) [Deleted] was instructed that upon awakening, she would proceed to [deleted] room where she would wait at the desk for a telephone call. Upon receiving the call, a person known as “Jim” would engage her in normal conversation. During the course of the conversation, this individual would mention a code word to [deleted]. When she heard this code word, she would pass into a SI trance state, but would not close her eyes and remain perfectly normal and continue the telephone conversation. She was told that upon conclusion of the telephone conversation, she would then carry out the following instructions:

[Deleted] being in a complete SI state at this time, was then told to open her eyes and was shown an electric timing device. She was informed that this timing device was an incendiary bomb and was then instructed how to attach and set the device. After [deleted] had indicated that she had learned how to set and attach the device, she was told to return to a sleep state and further instructed that upon concluding the aforementioned conversation, she would take the timing device which was in a briefcase and proceed to the ladies room.

In the ladies room, she would be met by a girl whom she had never seen who would identify herself by the code word “New York.” [Deleted] was then to show this individual how to attach and set the timing device and further instructions would be given the individual by [deleted] that the timing device was to be carried in the briefcase to [deleted] room, placed in the nearest empty electric-light plug and concealed in the bottom, left-hand drawer of [deleted] desk, with the device set for 82 seconds and turned on.

[Deleted] was further instructed to tell this other girl that as soon as the device had been set and turned on, she was to take the briefcase, leave [deleted] room, go to the operations room and go to the sofa and enter a deep sleep state. [Deleted] was further instructed that after completion of instructing the other girl and the transferring to the other girl of the incendiary bomb, she was to return at once to the operations room, sit on the sofa, and go into a deep sleep state.

For a matter of record, immediately after the operation was begun it was noted that a member of the charforce was cleaning the floor in the ladies room and subsequently, both [deleted] and [deleted] had to be placed … once again in a trance state and instructions changed from the ladies room to Room 3. It should be noted that even with the change of locale in the transfer point, the experiment was carried off perfectly without any difficulty or hesitation on the part of either of the girls. Each girl acted out their part perfectly, the device was planted and set as directed and both girls returned to the operations room, sat on the sofa and entered a deep sleep state. Throughout, their movements were easy and natural.

Note: You will note the frequent use of “girls” (young women) in these programs. Do you think the men in charge, having complete hypnotic control of these women, might have at times taken advantage of them sexually? Yet this would never enter the official documentation, with the one major exception below.

CIA document and page number: 140393, p. 1
Title: [Deleted] 
Date: 9 July 1951
Link to view image of original: Click here

On 2 July 1951 approximately 1:00 p.m. the instruction began with [deleted] relating to the student some of his sexual experiences. [Deleted] stated that he had constantly used hypnotism as a means of inducing young girls to engage in sexual intercourse with him. [Deleted], a performer in [deleted] orchestra, was forced to engage in sexual intercourse with [deleted] while under the influence of hypnotism. [Deleted] stated that he first put her into a hypnotic trance and then suggested to her that he was her husband and that she desired sexual intercourse with him.

Note: This document shows that an instructor being used by the CIA took advantage of his skill in hypnosis to sexually abuse young women without their having any knowledge of being abused. How many CIA hypnotists did likewise? Do you think a man involved in these programs might take advantage of a beautiful, young woman knowing she would not remember afterward? Note that for some reason this document is not available in the CIA’s three CD set and must be ordered individually at this link. See the What You Can Do section at the end of this page for suggestions on how we can stop this abuse.

CIA document and page number: 17441, p.8
Title: Continuation of Studies of Hypnosis and Suggestibility
Date: Unknown
Link to view image of original: Click here

Preliminary clinical research during 1955-56 has yielded promising leads in terms of knowledge of how hypnotizability can be influenced by pharmacological means.Experiments involving altered personality function as a result of environmental manipulation (chiefly sensory isolation) have yielded promising leads in terms of suggestibility and the production of trance-like states. There is reason to believe that environmental manipulations can affect tendencies for dissociative phenomenon to occur.

Note: “Dissociative phenomenon” refers to the ability of a person’s consciousness to leave and a new consciousness enter, thereby facilitation the creation of “alter” or multiple personalities. Besides hypnosis, drugs and electric shocks were developed as means to facilitate the creation of Manchurian Candidates.

CIA document and page number:17748, pp. 1, 2, 4, 6-9
Title: Report of Inspection of MKULTRA 
Date: 26 July 1963
Link to view images of original: Page 1, Page 2, Page 4, Page 6, Page 7, Page 8, Page 9.

It was deemed advisable to prepare the report of the MKULTRA program in one copy only, in view of its unusual sensitivity. The MKULTRA activity is concerned with the research and development of chemical, biological, and radiological materials capable of employment in clandestine operation to control human behavior. MKULTRA was authorized by then Director of Central Intelligence [DCI], Allen W. Dulles, in 1953.

The concepts involved in manipulating human behavior are found by many people both within and outside the Agency to be distasteful and unethical. Nevertheless, there have been major accomplishments both in research and operational employment. Some MKULTRA activities raise questions of legality implicit in the original charter. A final phase of testing of MKULTRA products places the rights and interests of U.S. citizens in jeopardy. Public disclosure of some aspects of MKULTRA activity could induce serious adverse reaction in U.S. public opinion. The DCI’s memorandum … exempted MKULTRA from audit.

Over the ten-year life of the program many additional avenues to the control of human behavior have been designated by the TSD management [Technical Services Division – under which MKULTRA operated] as appropriate to investigation under the MKULTRA charter, including radiation, electro-shock, various fields of psychology, psychiatry, sociology, and anthropology, graphology, harassment substances, and paramilitary devices and materials.

TSD initiated a program for covert testing of materials on unwitting U.S. citizens in 1955. TSD has pursued a philosophy of minimum documentation in keeping with the high sensitivity of some of the projects. The lack of consistent records precluded use of routine inspection procedures and raised a variety of questions concerning management and fiscal controls.

There are just two individuals in TSD who have full substantive knowledge of the program and most of that knowledge is unrecorded. In protecting both the sensitive nature of the American intelligence capability to manipulate human behavior, they apply “need to know” doctrine to their professional associates and to their clerical assistants to a maximum degree.

Note: Why did only two people have full substantive knowledge of the program? Could it be that sex abuse and political manipulations behind the scenes were so severe that no one was to be trusted? Do you think we could trust those two individuals? CIA Director Richard Helms, upon hearing there would be a Congressional investigation, ordered the destruction of all documents from these unethical and at times illegal mind control programs in 1973. He did not realize, however, that incriminating evidence remained in the financial files of the agency, which are what you read here. We can only imagine what secrets the destroyed documents held.

CIA document and page number: 87624, p. 3, 4 (also appended to 17748, p. 32, 33)
Title: Two Extremely Sensitive Research Programs
Date: 3 April 1953
Link to view images of original: Page 3, Page 4

Approximately 6% of the projects are of such an ultra-sensitive nature that they cannot and should not be handled by means of contracts which would associate CIA or the Government with the work in question.

We intend to investigate the development of a chemical material which causes a reversible non-toxic aberrant mental state, the specific nature of which can be reasonably well predicted for each individual. This material could potentially aid in discrediting individuals, eliciting information, implanting suggestion and other forms of mental control.

In a great many instances the work in field (a) must be conducted by individuals who are not and should not be aware of our interest. In all cases dealing with field (b), it is mandatory that any connections with the Agency should be known only to an absolute minimum number of people who have been specifically cleared for this purpose.

Experience has shown that qualified, competent individuals in the field of pharmacological, physiological, psychiatric and other biological sciences are most reluctant to enter into signed agreements of any sort which connect them with this activity since such a connection would jeopardize their professional reputations. Even internally in CIA, as few individuals as possible should be aware of our interest in these fields and of the identity of those who are working for us. At present, this results in ridiculous contracts, with cut-outs, which do not spell out the scope or intent of the work.

Note: In the three CD set, this document is found appended to document 17748 on pp. 30 through 37.

CIA document and page number: 190885, p. 1
Title: None Given
Date:1 January 1950
Link to view image of original: Click here

Drug Project – A project in the isolation and synthesis of pure drugs for use in effecting psychological entry and control of the individual.

Drugs and electricity – Research work on the effects of lysergic acid [LSD] on animals. Use of electric shock and the encephalograph in interrogation. Particular emphasis on the detection and prior use of electric shock and the ‘guaranteed amnesia’ resulting from electric shock.

Hypnosis – Investigation of the possibilities of hypnotic and post-hypnotic control.

CIA document and page number: 140394, pp. 2, 3 (not available in three CD set, order individually here)
Title: Interview with [Deleted]
Date: 25 February 1952
Link to view full text of both pages: Click here

Q: What are your experiences in general with hypnotism?

A: I have been a professional hypnotist for at least 15 years. At present, I am employed on a very confidential basis two days a week.

Q: Can you obtain information from an individual, willing or unwilling, by hypnotism?

A: Definitely, yes. Many of the medical cases I work on are involved in obtaining personal, intimate information, and through hypnotism, I have been quite successful in obtaining this. If an individual refuses to co-operate with hypnosis, the doctors with whom I work use drugs, always sodium amytal.

Q: How far do you think individuals could be controlled by hypnosis?

A: This is a very difficult subject. Post-hypnotics will last twenty years and will be very strong if re-enforced from time to time.

Q: Have you ever had any experience with drugs?

A: Yes, many times. I have worked with doctors using sodium amytal and pentothal and have obtained hypnotic control after the drugs were used. In fact, many times drugs were used for the purpose of obtaining hypnotic control.

Q: Do you have any ideas that hypnotism could be used as a weapon?

A: Yes, I have thought about this often. It could certainly be used in obtaining information from recalcitrant people particularly with drugs. It could be used as a recruiting source for special types of work. A good hypnotist running hypnotic shows for entertainment would pick up a great many subjects, some of whom might be exceptionally good subjects for us. These subjects could easily be tabbed and put to use.

Q: Have you ever been able to produce hypnosis without an individual’s knowledge?

A: Yes, through the relaxing technique and on rare occasions [I’ve] been able to produce hypnotism against a person’s will. However, you cannot count on this and to attempt to attach an individual who did not want to be hypnotized alone would be almost an impossible task. In that type of case, I would use sodium amytal and/or sodium pentothal.

Q: How effective are post-hypnotics; over what distances and time can they be effective?

A: Properly used post-hypnotics will last twenty years. They can be made more effective by re-enforcement from time to time. Post-hypnotics are not affected at all by time or travel or distance away from the person who placed the post-hypnotic. As a rule, post-hypnotics should be 100% effective in good subjects.

Q: Can individuals be made to do things under hypnosis that they would not otherwise?

A: Individuals could be taught to do anything including murder, suicide, etc. I do believe that you could carry out acts that would be against an individual’s moral feelings if they were rightly, psychologically conditioned.

Note: Individuals can be hypnotized without their knowledge. They can be programmed to commit murder, suicide, and much more. Think about the implications. How many “suicides” of important people we’ve heard in the news were not really suicides? How many murders were committed by people who didn’t even realize they were assassins? How much has this technology been used to manipulate world politics? Think about the Kennedys, Martin Luther King, Jr., and possibly those involved with 9/11 and other major terrorist attacks. Note this document is not available in the three CD set and must be ordered individually at this link.

CIA document and page number: 140401, pp. 6, 7 (not available in three CD set, order individually here)
Title: Special Research, Bluebird
Date: 1 January 1952 (approximate)
Link to view full text of both pages: Click here

Set out below are specific problems which can only be resolved by experiment, testing and research.

  • Can we obtain control of the future activities (physical and mental) of any given individual, willing or unwilling by application of SI [sleep induction] and H [hypnosis] techniques?
  • Can we create by post-H control an action contrary to an individual’s basic moral principles?
  • Can we in a matter of an hour, two hours, one day, etc., induce an H condition in an unwilling subject to such an extent that he will perform an act for our benefit?
  • Could we seize a subject and in the space of an hour or two by post-H control have him crash an airplane, wreck a train, etc.?
  • Can we by H and SI techniques force a subject (unwilling or otherwise) to travel long distances, commit specified acts and return to us or bring documents or materials?
  • Can we guarantee total amnesia under any and all conditions?
  • Can we “alter” a person’s personality?
  • Can we devise a system for making unwilling subjects into willing agents and then transfer that control to untrained agency agents in the field by use of codes or identifying signs?
  • Is it possible to find a gas that can be used to gain SI control from a gas pencil, odorless, colorless: one shot, etc.?
  • What are full details on “sleep-inducing machine”?
  • How can sodium A or P or any other sleep inducing agent be best concealed in a normal or commonplace item, such as candy, cigarettes, liquer, wines, coffee, tea, beer, gum water, aspirin tablets, common medicines, coke, tooth paste?
  • Can we, using SI and H extract complicated formula from scientists, engineers, etc., if unwilling?

Note: Reading all of the declassified CIA documents listed in this essay suggests that the answer to most, if not all of the questions above appears to be yes. Note that sleep inducing agents were being placed in candy, aspirin, Coke, and more. Think about the implications if even just a few of the men in these programs decided to use such things outside of the office to manipulate others for their personal benefit. It’s time that this information be made public so we can all be aware of what’s going on and work to stop the abuses. Note for some reason this document is not available in the three CD set and must be ordered individually at this link.

Science Digest Article, pp. 44 – 53 (Not a CIA document, but directly related to the mind control programs)
Title: Hypnosis Comes of Age
Date: April 1971
Link to view full text of article: Click here

Psychologist G. H. Estabrooks reminisces about his long career as a hypnotist. Dr. Estabrooks discusses how he “programmed” American spies with hypnosis and how he helped businessmen and students with his skills. Dr. Estabrooks is a Rhodes Scholar. He took his Doctorate at Harvard (’26), and has authored many articles and books on clinical hypnosis and human behavior.

One of the most fascinating but dangerous applications of hypnosis is its use in military intelligence. This is a field with which I am familiar through formulating guidelines for the techniques used by the United States in two world wars. I was involved in preparing many subjects for this work during World War II.

One successful case involved an Army Service Corps Captain whom we’ll call George Smith. Captain Smith had undergone months of training. He was an excellent subject but did not realize it.I had removed from him, by post-hypnotic suggestion, all recollection of ever having been hypnotized. Outside of myself, Colonel Brown was the only person who could hypnotize Captain Smith. This is “locking.” I performed it by saying to the hypnotized Captain: “Until further orders from me, only Colonel Brown and I can hypnotize you. We will use a signal phrase ‘the moon is clear.’ ” The system is virtually foolproof.

By the 1920’s, not only had they learned to apply post-hypnotic suggestion, [they] also had learned how to split certain complex individuals into multiple personalities like Jeckyl-Hydes.

During World War II, I worked this technique with a vulnerable Marine lieutenant I’ll call Jones. Under the watchful eye of Marine Intelligence, I spilt his personality into Jones A and Jones B. Jones A, once a “normal” working Marine, became entirely different. He talked communist doctrine and meant it. He was welcomed enthusiastically by communist cells, was deliberately given a dishonorable discharge by the Corps (which was in on the plot) and became a card-carrying party member.

The joker was Jones B, the second personality, formerly apparent in the conscious Marine. Under hypnosis, this Jones had been carefully coached by suggestion. Jones B was the deeper personality, knew all the thoughts of Jones A, was a loyal American, and was “imprinted” to say nothing during conscious phases. All I had to do was hypnotize the whole man, get in touch with Jones B, the loyal American, and I had a pipeline straight into the Communist camp.

Note: Note that in the 1920s, U.S. military intelligence had already developed the capability to cause split personalities. The created super spy or Manchurian Candidate has been a reality for nearly a century, yet very few people know anything about it. These unknowing spies could plant bombs, provide sexual favors, and even assassinate top political leaders. Consider that many countries and key powerful, elite groups have had and used this technology for many decades. Watch the movie Manchurian Candidate to see how real it is.

Brief Summary

After reading all of these revealing documents, you may now understand why there is a major part of our history which has never been written. You may better understand how the Kennedy and King assassinations, 9/11, and other terrorist acts were likely manipulated. Beautiful young women could be programmed to seduce, influence, and if necessary even poison top political leaders. And remember certain powerful, elite groups who have access to large volumes of money also have access to these technologies and often are secretly using them to battle each other. There is an entire hidden history of our world of which few are aware.

For a highly revealing documentary showing powerful evidence of child sexual abuse by powerful elites leading up the steps of Congress, see Conspiracy of Silence available here. For an astonishing, yet inspiring 10-page summary of a revealing book by a woman who once served top politicians in this capacity, click here. By choosing to be aware of such matters and to spread the news on the importance of bringing all this to light, we can make a big difference. And if you are feeling overwhelmed by all this information, please click here.

For a very enlightening essay on mind control, including both the secretive aspects and how it is now being used to help heal people in most transformative ways, don’t miss the powerful lesson from the Insight Course available here. The same technologies that have caused murder and mayhem can also be used to transform our lives and world. You can help bring all this information to light and promote positive transformation. Please see below for how you can help, and thank you for caring.

New York Times Fiscal Cliff Duplicity

0

Stephen Lendman, rinf.com |

A previous article explained what’s at stake. Both parties agree on destroying America’s social contract. Fiscal cliff hokum conceals their agenda. Media scoundrels don’t explain.

Ongoing debate refers to expiring yearend tax breaks and unemployment benefits. Automatic sequestered/largely discretionary yearend $1.2 trillion in cuts address them for starters. Trillions more will follow.

Bipartisan agreement occurred long ago. Daily reports conceal what’s ongoing and planned. Ordinary households will be hardest hit.

Wall Street, war profiteers, other corporate favorites, and America’s super-rich can rest easy. Their gain is middle and poor America’s loss.

It’s baked in the cake and agreed. Final language remains to be reported. Expect something by yearend or sooner. Headline news won’t explain what’s happening and why it matters.

The New York Times reflects scoundrel media misreporting. It conceals what readers most need to know. Its November 9 editorial headlined “The Fiscal Cliff Opener,” saying:

Voters “re-elected a president who promised to fight for higher taxes on the wealthy, for more public investment and for careful cuts in spending.”

“Three days later, President Obama challenged Republicans to extend the Bush tax cuts for the middle class, right now, and said he would not accept a deal that does not require the wealthy to pay a bigger share.”

Fact check

Obama’s February 18, 2010 Executive Order 13531 established the Simpson-Bowles National Commission on Fiscal Responsibility and Reform (NCFRF).

He authorized identifying “policies to improve the fiscal situation in the medium term and to achieve fiscal sustainability over the long run.”

“Specifically, the Commission shall propose recommendations designed to balance the budget, excluding interest payments on the debt, by 2015.”

“This result is projected to stabilize the debt-to-GDP ratio at an acceptable level once the economy recovers. The magnitude and timing of the policy measures necessary to achieve this goal are subject to considerable uncertainty and will depend on the evolution of the economy.”

“In addition, the Commission shall propose recommendations that meaningfully improve the long-run fiscal outlook, including changes to address the growth of entitlement spending and the gap between the projected revenues and expenditures of the Federal Government.”

Deceptive language hid dark intentions. Anti-populist commission members were charged with institutionalizing austerity, eroding middle America, increasing unemployment and poverty, destroying future hopes for millions, and ending the nation’s social contract incrementally over time.

At the same time, increased corporate and elitist rights were planned. Robin Hood economic recommendations followed. They included sharply lower corporate taxes and permanent research and development tax credits.

Other proposals offered ways to implement budget cutting on the backs of people least able to afford it. The train left the station. Yearend initial measures will be announced. If not then, expect early 2013 clarity.

They’ll conceal what’s really at stake. Destroying America’s social contract is planned. Key is eroding Social Security, Medicare, Medicaid, and public pensions en route to eliminating them altogether in their present form.

Before taking office, Obama fully agreed. Otherwise, someone else would have been the Democrat’s standard bearer. Only those willing to spurn essential rights, erode those in place, and wage war on humanity need apply.

Obama qualified long before arriving in Washington. He was chosen for his support for wealth, power and privilege. He proved it multiple times in office.

He instituted numerous austerity cuts. Biggers ones lie ahead. He and House Speaker John Boehner are close to announcing initial measures. They’ll impose crushing burdens on millions least able to afford them.

Robin Hood economics best describes them. New York Times duplicity portrays Obama as people friendly. His anti-populist harshness is hidden.

Times rhetoric reinvented him as opposing “budget cuts in a weak economy,” demanding “Bush tax rates expire,” and offering Republicans “no give on his campaign promise to ensure that the rich will pay more as part of” any deal struck.

He’s “show(n) more determination and will to fight than he has at time in the last four years.”

Republicans practice “political extortion.” They’re “used to (his) yielding to it. They may be waiting to see it he blinks again.”

He campaigned and won on a pledge to “reduce the deficit while still making the investments we need to build a strong middle class and a strong economy.”

Economist Paul Craig Roberts appears often on the Progressive Radio News Hour. He cuts through deceptive rhetoric, promises and policy.

Sham deficit cutting and tax increases over the next decade will do little to address the problem, he says. Whatever both parties agree, “the ‘fiscal cliff’ is going to happen either way.”

Economic straight talk explains that “double-barrel (forced) austerity delivered to a faltering and recessionary economy” assures a greater problems than it solves.

Honest economists explain say stimulus, not austerity, is needed during hard times. Humans aren’t nourished by starving them. Economies can’t expand without growth producing investment.

Times editors didn’t explain. Neither did writer Jonathan Weisman. On December 17, he headlined “Obama’s New Offer on Fiscal Crisis Could Lead to Deal,” saying:

Obama’s “new offer (may) resolve the pending fiscal crisis, a deal (to) raise revenues by $1.2 trillion over the next decade but keep in place (Bush) tax rates for any household with earnings below $400,000.”

Boehner proposed something similar. Both sides “expressed confidence that they were (close to agreement) well before January.”

Fact check

For starters, both parties agreed months ago to cut around $4 trillion over the next decade. Out years will be most affected. Future announcements will explain.

Greater cuts are also planned. Spending won’t decline so deficits will keep rising exponentially. Neither party worries about them or debt. Saying so is doublespeak deception.

“Comprehensive tax reform” is agreed. Minor increases on super-rich elites will be offset by major corporate and personal income tax cuts.

Whatever’s agreed on includes serious erosion of Social Security, Medicare, Medicaid, public pensions, and other longstanding safety net obligations.

Obama’s on board. He agreed to wreck these programs over time. TimesSpeak conceals what’s planned. Readers weren’t told what they most need to know.

Bipartisan complicity planned selling out ordinary households long ago. It’s coming incrementally in stages.

Social programs will be sacrificed on the alter corporate welfare, super-rich elitism, and America’s addiction to permanent wars.

Crushing new burdens will be imposed on people least able to bear them. Poverty will grow exponentially. So will unemployment, homelessness, hunger, despair and public rage.

Instead of prepping readers and viewers for what’s coming, The Times and other media scoundrels suppress what they most need to know and how to fight back. The worst of times awaits.

A Final Comment

Planned cuts are supposed to include domestic and military ones. Don’t be fooled. America’s war machine will be generously funded annually.

Military spending cuts will be for administration, inefficiencies, weapons Pentagon officials don’t want in lieu of others they won’t sacrifice and new ones planned, force reductions on least important overseas bases, and veterans benefits most of all.

Retirees will pay higher healthcare premiums and co-pays. Overall benefits will be cut.

Naked Capitalism explained more in an article headlined “Stealth Target of Defense Spending Cuts: America’s Highly Effective Socialized Medicine Provider, the VA System, and Military Benefits Generally.”

Covert efforts plan “gut(ting) military benefits by privatizing them.” Doing so rarely (if ever) deliver(s on promised) better performance and/or lower costs.”

As part of America’s military budget, it’s “an egregious (scheme) for looting.”

Wall Street and Pentagon spenders do it best. Trillions of dollars disappear in black hole pillaging. Contractors steal taxpayers blind. It’s part of their business model.

Pentagon waste is replete with thousand dollar wrenches and toilet seats. They’re pocket change. They reflect much greater scams. Billions are stolen. Over time they become trillions.

At the same time, neoliberal harshness transformed America’s military from one taking care of its own to a new version preparing vets to fend for themselves.

Privatizers dream of running healthcare and pensions. Goldmine profits await. Under false claims about choice, military programs are eroded to benefit profiteers.

“On the healthcare side, this is simply an excuse for the medical industrial complex to get its blood suckers into the huge military budgets.”

Limitless amounts await to be plundered. Profiteers will benefit hugely at the expense of vets. What used to be guaranteed is disappearing. Even wounded and disabled ones increasingly are on their own.

Promises were made and broken. Deficit scaremongering is being used to rape federal programs. Whatever government can do, business does better is claimed. Truth is turned on its head. Kids sent to war theaters are spurned when they return.

Obama, Boehner, and congressional conspirators plan hitting them harder. It part of their grand scheme to consign America’s social contract to history’s trash bin.

A special place in hell awaits them. In the meantime, unconscionable human suffering awaits America’s poor, disadvantaged, elderly, war weary/wounded/and disabled. Political duplicity sold them out. So did media scoundrels for not explaining.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

http://www.dailycensored.com/new-york-times-fiscal-cliff-duplicity/

Water Is Invaluable

0

Mary Grant |

A range of private players in the water arena, including water service companies like American Water, are part of a relatively new corporate effort to coordinate public outreach about the “Value of Water.”

It is a fairly clever PR tactic that plays on two meanings of the word value: importance and monetary worth. The idea seems to be to convince the public to pay more for water service by tying water’s importance to its price.

The argument goes: Something of great value is worth a lot and should be priced accordingly, so if you think water is important, you should pay more for it. Although illogical, this line of thought is supposed to make people more amenable to hikes in their water bills and even to pricing water on a market.

Without a doubt, water is important. In fact, it is too important to let whims of Wall Street dictate access to it and too important to let price force families to go without it.

Xylem, Inc., a water technology firm that spun off from ITT Corp. last year, is one company that has been touting the Value of Water.

The firm was a sponsor of the American Water Summit, an industry conference held last month, and used the venue to talk about its Value of Water campaign. Xylem CEO Gretchen McClain was one of the conference’s keynote speakers and presented the findings of her company’s 2012 Value of Water Index, a national poll of U.S. voters about water infrastructure issues.

Read more

Media corporations: too big to fail?

0

As with the banking system, Britain needs to shake up the way its media works as a whole: nothing less can tackle the unaccountable power of the industry giants.

The news that Swiss bank UBS has been fined nearly £1 billion for fiddling the Libor and Euribor rates is the latest in a rash of decisive rulings against the financial sector for corrupt behaviour. This follows the £290 million fine levied against Barclays for similar crimes as well as the £415 million penalty awarded against Standard Chartered for breaking sanctions against Iran let alone the £1.2 billion fine slapped on HSBC for money laundering. This is the closest thing we’ve had to a run on the banks for many years.

Many in the banking community have accepted the need for radical reforms of their institutions in the light of these fines and in their desperation to restore some credibility to banks given the public’s view that they were largely to blame for the great crash of 2008.

So, for example, the former City minister Lord Myners has called for the splitting up of British banks while there is a strong lobby in the US led by former Fed chairman Paul Volcker advocating a return to the Glass-Steagall restrictions that were designed to separate commercial and investment banking (and that were repealed during the deregulatory heyday of the 1990s). A 128 page report from the German Berenberg Bank supports a break-up of European investment banks while even the notoriously free market Wall Street Journalhas called for ‘a Congressional plan either for allowing large banks to fail or for breaking them up.’

For the US economist Nouriel Roubini, one of the few to predict the 2008 crash and ensuing recession, it’s not enough just to tackle the activities of a small number of bankers, you have to confront the system itself. ‘The incentives of the banks is still to cheat and do things that are either illegal or immoral.’ In the context of a culture of law-breaking and immorality, he argues that the only way to challenge this ‘is to break up these financial supermarkets.’

How is this relevant to the situation that the UK news media find itself in? The BBC has just been lambasted for its shelving of a Newsnight report into allegations of sexual abuse involving its former presenter Jimmy Savile. Nick Pollard’s report highlighted the micro-management and over-bureaucratisation of the corporation’s news division but found no evidence of a corporate cover-up. The BBC desperately needs to open up its decision-making and governance structures but at least it cannot be accused of attempting to bury the bad news.

Lord Justice Leveson, on the other hand, has recently published a 2000 pagereport, following a year-long inquiry brought about by the phone hacking crisis, that excoriates the behaviour of the press, accusing it of ‘wreaking havoc with the lives of innocent people’ and of repeatedly declining to investigate its involvement in accusations of criminal activity.

How have ministers and the press reacted to this? By calling for sustained action to shake up the industry and make sure that newspapers clean up their act? Certainly not. Instead, they have spent most of their time organising systematically to undermine Leveson’s key recommendation for a new, independent self-regulator audited by a body rooted in law.

So where are the voices arguing for a more decisive form of action and to move beyond addressing not just the players but the system as a whole?

Well, there has been no shortage of people calling for the break-up of the BBC– from conservative blogger Guido Fawkes to openDemocracy’s own David Elstein and from SNP leader Alex Salmond to the Daily Mail’s editorial page which recently asked whether the BBC is ‘simply too big for its own good?’. Strangely, no such critique has been launched against the ‘behemoths’ of print culture by its own residents.

Labour leader Ed Miliband did make a popular speech in July 2011 when he called for the dismantling of the Murdoch empire but he has failed, thus far, to pursue this course of action. Former prime minister John Major gave evidence to the Leveson Inquiry calling for ownership limits to protect media plurality but Leveson declined to follow this up and, indeed, failed to make any recommendations at all along these lines.

Yet, just as British banking is still dominated by the ‘Big 5’ retail banks, we have three news organisations in the UK that control 75 per cent of daily circulation, two groups which account for over 50 per cent of commercial radio listening hours and a single operator, BSkyB, by far the largest broadcaster in the country, with an effective monopoly over pay television.

If nothing is done to break up this kind of unaccountable market power inside the media, then we will continue to fall short of the diversity of voice that we need for a democracy. In all likelihood, we will also see more examples of phone hacking, blagging and intrusion that persists in a system that puts ratings above responsibility and the prolonging of a culture of impunity in some newsrooms that has long been fostered as a result of their size and influence.

Those of us in groups like the Media Reform Coalition and Avaaz who have identified concentrated private ownership as a barrier to a responsible and plural media will continue to press for the ownership caps and public interest obligations hat we believe are key to the UK news media winning back credibility amongst the public.

If there are strong voices from within the financial sector calling for serious reform of the banks, why is it still so unthinkable for leading voices from within government and the industry to call for the break-up of media empires?

Originally published on Open Democracy

The Achievements of Hugo Chavez

0

CounterPunch |

While Venezuela’s president Hugo Chávez is fighting for his life in Cuba, the liberal press of both sides of the Atlantic (e.g., El Pais”) has not stopped  trashing his government. The significance of his victory (12 points ahead of his contender) has yet to be analysed properly, with evidence. It is remarkable that Chávez would win, sick with cancer, outgunned by the local and international media (think of Syriza’s Greece election) and, rarely acknowledged, an electoral map extremely biased towards the middle and upper classes, with geographical barriers and difficult access to Ids for members of the working classes.

One of the main factors for the popularity of the Chávez Government and its landslide victory in this re-election results of October 2012, is the reduction of poverty, made possible because the government took back control of the national petroleum company PDVSA, and has used the abundant oil revenues, not for benefit of a small class of renters as previous governments had done, but to build needed infrastructure and invest in the social services that Venezuelans so sorely needed.  During the last ten years, the government has increased social spending by 60.6%, a total of $772 billion [i].

Poverty is not defined solely by lack of income nor is health defined as the lack of illness. Both are correlated and both are multi-factorial, that is, determined by a series of social processes. To make a more objective assessment of the real progress achieved by the Bolivarian Revolution in Venezuela during the last 13 years it is essential to review some of the key available data on the social determinants of health and poverty: education, inequality, jobs and income, health care, food security and social support and services.

With regard to these social determinants of health indicators, Venezuela is now the country in the region with the lowest inequality level (measured by the Gini Coefficient) having reduced inequality by 54%, poverty by 44%. Poverty has been reduced from 70.8% (1996) to 21% (2010). And extreme poverty reduced from 40% (1996) to a very low level of 7.3% (2010). About 20 million people have benefited from anti-poverty programs, called “Misiones” (Up to now, 2.1 million elderly people have received old-age pensions — that is 66% of the population while only 387,000 received pensions before the current government.

Education is a key determinant of both health and poverty and the Bolivarian government has placed a particular emphasis on education allotting it more than 6% of GDP. UNESCO has recognized that illiteracy been eliminated furthermore, Venezuela is the 3rd county in the region whose population reads the most. There is tuition free education from daycare to university; 72% of children attend public daycares and 85% of school age children attend school. There are thousands of new or refurbished schools, including 10 new universities. The country places 2nd in Latin America and 5th in the world with the greatest proportions of university students. In fact, 1 out of every 3 Venezuelans are enrolled in some educational program.[ii] . It is also a great achievement that Venezuela is now tied with Finland as the 5th country with the happiest population in the world.[iii] .

Before the Chavez government in 1998, 21% of the population was malnourished. Venezuela now has established a network of subsidized food distribution including grocery stores and supermarkets. While 90% of the food was imported in 1980, today this is less than 30%. Misión Agro-Venezuela has given out 454,238 credits to rural producers and 39,000 rural producers have received credit in 2012 alone. Five million Venezuelan receive free food, four million of them are children in schools and 6,000 food kitchens feed 900,000 people. The agrarian reform and policies to help agricultural producers have increased domestic food supply. The results of all these food security measures is that today malnourishment is only 5%, and child malnutrition which was 7.7% in 1990 today is at 2.9%. This is an impressive health achievement by any standards.

Some of the most important available data on health care and public health are as following [iv],[v],[vi]:

*infant mortality dropped from 25 per 1000 (1990) to only 13/1000 (2010);

*An outstanding 96% of the population has now access to clean water (one of the goals of the revolution);

*In 1998, there were 18 doctors per 10,000 inhabitants, currently there are 58, and the public health system has about 95,000 physicians;

*It took four decades for previous governments to build 5,081 clinics, but in just 13 years the Bolivarian government built 13,721 (a 169.6% increase);

*Barrio Adentro (i.e., primary care program with the help of more than 8,300 Cuban doctors) has approximately saved 1,4 million lives in 7,000 clinics and has given 500 million consultations;

*In 2011 alone, 67,000 Venezuelans received free high cost medicines for 139 pathologies conditions including cancer, hepatitis, osteoporosis, schizophrenia, and others; there are now 34 centres for addictions,

*In 6 years 19,840 homeless have been attended through a special program; and there are practically no children living on the streets.

*Venezuela now has the largest intensive care unit in the region.

*A network of public drugstores sell subsidized medicines in 127 stores with savings of 34-40%.

*51,000 people have been treated in Cuba for specialized eye treatment and the eye care program “Mision Milagro”; has restored sight to 1.5 million Venezuelans

An example of how the government has tried to respond in a timely fashion to the real needs of its people is the situation that occurred in 2011 when heavy tropical rains left 100,000 people homeless. They were right away sheltered temporarily in all manner of public buildings and hotels and, in one and a half years, the government built 250,000 houses. The government has obviously not eradicated all social ills, but its people do recognize that, despite any shortcomings and mistakes, it is a government that is on their side, trying to use its resources to meet their needs. Part of this equation is the intense political participation that the Venezuelan democracy stands for, that includes 30,000 communal councils, which determine local social needs and oversee their satisfaction and allows the people to be protagonists of the changes they demand.[vii]

The Venezuelan economy has low debts, high petroleum reserves and high savings, yet Western economists that oppose President Chávez repeat ad nauseam that the Venezuelan economy is not “sustainable” and predict its demise when the oil revenues stop. Ironically they do not hurl these dire predictions to other oil economies such as Canada or Saudi Arabia. They conveniently ignore that Venezuela’s oil reservoir of 500 billion barrels of oil is the largest in the world and consider the social investment of oil revenues a waste or futile endeavour. However these past 13 years, the Bolivarian government has been building up an industrial and agricultural infrastructure that 40 years of previous governments had neglected and its economy continues to get stronger even in the face of a global financial crisis.

An indication of the increasing diversification of the economy is the fact that the State now obtains almost as much revenue from tax collection as from the sale of oil, since it strengthened its capacity for tax collection and wealth redistribution. In just one decade, the State obtained US$ 251,694 million in taxes, more than its petroleum income per annum. Economic milestones these last ten years include reduction in unemployment from 11.3% to 7.7%; doubling the amount of people receiving social insurance benefits, and the public debt has been reduced from 20.7% to 14.3% of GNP and the flourishing of cooperatives has strengthen local endogenous economies. In general, the Venezuelan economy has grown 47.4% in ten years, that is, 4.3% per annum. [viii]. Today many European countries would look jealously at these figures. Economists who studied in detail the Venezuelan economy for years indicate that, “The predictions of economic collapse, balance of payments or debt crises and other gloomy prognostications, as well as many economic forecasts along the way, have repeatedly proven wrong… Venezuela’s current economic growth is sustainable and could continue at the current pace or higher for many years.”[ix] .

According to Global Finance and the CIA World Factbook ,the Venezuelan economy presents the following indicators.[x]: unemployment rate of 8%; 45,5% government (public) debt as a percent of GDP (by contrast the European Union debt/GDP is 82.5%); and a real GDP growth: GDP per capita is $13,070. In 2011, the Venezuelan economy defied most forecasts by growing 4.2 percent, and was up 5.6 percent in the first half of 2012. It has a debt-to-GDP ratio comfortably below the U.S. and the UK, and stronger than European countries; an inflation rate, an endemic problem during many decades, that has fallen to a four-year low, or 13.7%, over the most recent 2012 quarter. Even The Wall Street Journal reports that Venezuela’s stock exchange is by far the best-performing stock market in the world, reaching an all-time high in October 2012, and Venezuela’s bonds are some of the best performers in emerging markets.

Hugo Chavez’s victory had an impact around the world as he is recognized as having spearheaded radical change not only in his own country but in all Latin America where progressive governments have also been elected, thereby reshaping the global order. The victory was even more significant considering the enormous financial and strategic help that the USA agencies and allies gave to the opposition parties and media. Since 2002, Washington channeled $100 million to opposition groups in Venezuela and this election year alone, distributed US$ 40-50 million there. [xi] But the Venezuelan people disregarded the barrage of propaganda unleashed against the president by the media that is 95% privately owned and anti-Chavez. [xii]. The tide of progressive change in the region has started to build the infrastructure for the first truly independent South America with political integration organizations such as Bank of the South, CELAC, ALBA, PETROSUR, PETROCARIBE, UNASUR, MERCOSUR, TELESUR and thus have demonstrated to the rest of the world that there are, after all, economic and social alternatives in the 21st century.[xiii] . Following a different model of development from that of global capitalism in sharp contrast to Europe, debt levels across Latin America are low and falling.

The changes in Venezuela are not abstract. The government of President Chávez has significantly improved the living conditions of Venezuelans and engaged them in dynamic political participation to achieve it [xiv]. This new model of socialist development has had a phenomenal impact all over Latin America, including Colombia of late, and the progressive left of centre governments that are now the majority in the region see in Venezuela the catalyst that that has brought more democracy, national sovereignty and economic and social progress to the region.[xv] . No amount of neoliberal rhetoric can dispute these facts. Dozens of opinionated experts can go on forever on whether the Bolivarian Revolution is or is not socialist, whether it is revolutionary or reformist (it is likely to be both ), yet at the end of the day these substantial achievements remain. This is what infuriates its opponents the most both inside Venezuela and most notable, from neocolonialist countries. The “objective” and “empiricist” The Economist will not publicize this data, preferring to predict once again the imminent collapse of the Venezuelan economy and El Pais, in Spain, would rather have one of the architects of the Caracazo (the slaughter of 3000 people in Caracas protesting the austerity measures of 1989), the minister of finance of the former government Moises Naim, go on with his anti-Chávez obsession. But none of them can dispute that the UN Human Development Index situates Venezuela in place #61 out of 176 countries having increased 7 places in 10 years.

And that is one more reason why Chavez’s Bolivarian Revolution will survive Venezuela’s Socialist leader.

Carles Muntaner is Professor of Nursing, Public Health and Psychiatry at the University of Toronto. He has been working on the public health aspects of the Bolivarian Revolution for more than a decade including Muntaner C, Chung H, Mahmood Q and Armada F. “History Is Not Over. The Bolivarian Revolution, Barrio Adentro and Health Care in Venezuela.” In T Ponniah and J Eastwood The Revolution in Venezuela. Harvard: HUP, 2011

María Páez Victor is a Venezuelan sociologist, specializing in health and medicine.

Joan Benach is a professor of Public Health at the Universitat Pompeu Fabra, Barcelona. He has collaborated in a number of studies on the public health policies of the Bolivarian Revolution.


[i] Páez Victor, Maria. “Why Do Venezuelan Women Vote for Chavez?” Counterpunch, 24 April 2012

http://www.counterpunch.org/2012/04/24/why-do-venezuelan-women-vote-for-chavez/print

[ii] Venezuela en Noticias, Venezuela en Noticias < >’; document.write(‘<a ‘=”” +=”” path=”” ‘\”=”” prefix=”” ‘:’=”” addy38683=”” ‘\’=””>’); document.write(addy_text38683); document.write(‘<\/a>’); //–>\n ; Venezuela en Noticias, Venezuela en Noticias  venezuelaennoticias@minci.gob.ve” style=”margin:0px;padding:0px;color:rgb(207, 16, 40)”>venezuelaennoticias@minci.gob.ve

[iii] Gallup Poll 2010

[iv] Muntaner C, Chung H, Mahmood Q and Armada F. “History Is Not Over. The Bolivarian Revolution, Barrio Adentro and Health Care in Venezuela.” In T Ponniah and J Eastwood The Revolution in Venezuela. Harvard: HUP, 2011 pp 225-256; see also 4, Muntaner et al 2011, 5, Armada et al 2009; 6, Zakrison et al 2012

[v] Armada, F., Muntaner, C., & Navarro, V. (2001). “Health and social security reforms in latin america: The convergence of the world health organization, the world bank, and transnational corporations.” International Journal of Health Services, 31(4), 729-768.

[vi] Zakrison TL, Armada F, Rai N, Muntaner C. ”The politics of avoidable blindnessin Latin America—surgery, solidarity, and solutions: the case of Misión Milagro.”Int J Health Serv. 2012;42(3):425-37.

[vii] Ismi, Asad. “The Bolivarian Revolution Gives Real Power to the People.” The Canadian Centre for Policy Alternatives Monitor , December 2009/January.http://www.policyalternatives.ca/publications/monitor/latin-american-revolution-part-iv

[viii] Carmona, Adrián. “Algunos datos sobre Venezuela”, Rebelión, March 2012

[ix] . Weisbrot, Mark and Johnston, Jake. “Venezuela’s Economic Recovery: Is It Sustainable?” Center for Economic and Policy Research, Washington, D.C., September 2012.

[x] Hunziker , Robert. “Venezuela and the Wonders of Equality”.  October 15th, 2012

[xi] Golinger, Eva. “US$20 million for the Venezuelan Opposition in 2012”, http://www.chavezcode.com/2011/08/us-20-million-for-venezuelan-opposition.html

[xii] Páez Victor, Maria. “Chavez wins Over Powerful Foreign Conglomerate Against Him”, Periódico América Latina, 11 October, 2012

[xiii] Milne,Seumas. “The Chávez Victory Will be Felt Far Beyond Latin America” , Associate Editor, The Guardian, October 9, 2012:

[xiv] Alvarado, Carlos, César Arismendi, Francisco Armada, Gustavo Bergonzoli, Radamés Borroto, Pedro Luis Castellanos, Arachu Castro, Pablo Feal, José Manuel García, Renato d´A. Gusmão, Silvino Hernández, María Esperanza Martínez, Edgar Medina, Wolfram Metzger, Carles Muntaner, Aldo Muñoz, Standard Núñez, Juan Carlos Pérez, and Sarai Vivas. 2006. “Mission Barrio Adentro: The Right to Health and Social Inclusion in Venezuela”. Caracas: PAHO/Venezuela.

[xv] Weisbrot, Mark.”Why Chávez Was Re-elected”. New York Times. Oct 10th 2012

Quentin Tarantino: The War on Drugs = Slavery

0

Writer and director Quentin Tarantino sits down with George to talk about his new movie ‘Django Unchained’, which opens on December 25th. In this clip, Quentin talks about the modern ‘War on Drugs’ in the United States, and its parallels with slavery.  On December 13th, ‘Django Unchained’ was nominated for five Golden Globe awards, including ‘Best Picture – Drama’.

20 Signs That The U.S. Poverty Explosion Is Hitting Children And Young People The Hardest

0
Michael Snyder,  Activist Post |

The mainstream media continues to insist that the economy is “getting better”, but the poverty numbers for children and young people just continue to explode. For example, did you know that the poverty rate for families with a head of household under the age of 30 is a whopping 37 percent? Children and young people sure didn’t cause our recent economic downturn, but they sure are getting hit the hardest by it.

According to the U.S. Department of Education, for the first time ever more than a million U.S. public school students are homeless. That seems like an impossible number, but it is actually true. How in the world could the “wealthiest nation on earth” get to the point where more than a million children can’t count on a warm bed to sleep in at night?

Sadly, a huge number of American children can’t count on a warm dinner either. About a fourth of them are enrolled in the food stamp program. What do you do if you are a parent in that kind of situation? How do you explain to your kids that you can’t afford a nice home like everybody else has or that you can’t afford to go to the grocery store and buy them some dinner?

Young people are experiencing very rough times right now as well. If you are under the age of 30, it is really, really difficult to get a job in America today. The competition for the few decent jobs that seem to be available is absolutely crazy. Unemployment among young people is at a level that we have not seen since World War II, and this is causing major problems.

German regulators slam Facebook’s ‘real name’ policy

0

German regulators have called on Facebook to stop requiring the use of real names on the social network.

IT Portal |

The Unabhaengiges Landeszentrum fuer Datenschutz (ULD) data protection agency said that German law protects “the fundamental right to freedom of expression on the Internet.” German citizens should be able to use Facebook “largely unnoticed and without fear of unpleasant consequences,” the ULD said.

“It is unacceptable that a US portal like Facebook violates German data protection law unopposed and with no prospect of an end,” Thilo Weichert, Privacy Commissioner and head of ULD, said in a statement. “The aim of the orders of ULD is to finally bring about a legal clarification of who is responsible for Facebook and to what this company is bound to.”

The ULD pointed to recent changes to Facebook’s terms, which replaced the “Who can send you Facebook messages?” section of its privacy controls with “new filters for managing incoming messages.” The move means “our initiative is more urgent than ever,” Weichert said.

“It is the role of individual services to determine their own policies about anonymity within the governing law — for Facebook Ireland European data protection and Irish law,” a Facebook spokesman said in a statemnet. “We believe the orders are without merit, a waste of German taxpayers’ money and we will fight it vigorously.”

 

According to Facebook’s name policy, “Facebook is a community where people use their real identities. We require everyone to provide their real names, so you always know who you’re connecting with.” As a result, users are not permitted to craft MySpace-esque names with symbols, numbers, unusual capitalization, repeating characters, or punctuation.

Using real names means people know who they’re connecting with, which “helps keep our community safe,” Facebook said.

In February, Facebook started testing a verification process for people with a large number of subscribers. It allowed those who submitted a government-issued ID to display an alternate name, like a nickname, maiden name, or pen name. “This update makes it even easier for subscribers to find and keep up with journalists, celebrities and other public figures they want to connect to,” Facebook said at the time.

There is now the option to display an alternate name, like a maiden name, via Account Settings, though there is the possibility that it could be rejected by Facebook.

The rules, of course, don’t stop people from using fake names or creating bogus profiles. In August, Facebook said that 8.7 per cent of its then 950 million monthly active users (MAUs) were, in fact, duplicate, misclassified, or “undesirable” accounts. That works out to about 83 million accounts that are either trying to spam you, in violation of Facebook’s rules, or are just confused.

Big Brother? State will ‘count’ unemployed’s job searches

0

Government urge unemployed to sign up for jobs site which can detect number of searches

The Week

THE GOVERNMENT is courting controversy over a new scheme to monitor the computers of the unemployed in an effort to detect how hard they are looking to find work.

The jobless are being urged to look for work through a new Universal Jobmatch website, which it claims will help match their skills to jobs on the market.

However their activities, including the number of job searches they make, will be tracked using “cookies” so that their Job Centre advisers will know how long they are spending on the site and whether they are turning down opportunities.

Critics of the scheme claim that even though new users of the Jobmatch site are asked if they are willing to be monitored, it is a Big Brother-style intrusion on privacy. The EU has reiterated its stance that monitoring behaviour online without the user’s consent is not allowed.

Iain Duncan-Smith, the Work and Pensions Secretary, admitted job advisers would be able to impose sanctions such as “mandatory work activity” if they feel the unemployed are not searching hard enough on their computers reported the Daily Telegraph.

IDS is an enthusiastic advocate of the website, claiming that anyone who doesn’t find a job after signing up to the scheme lacks “imagination”.

The site also allows employers to search for new workers among the unemployed and send messages inviting them to interviews. Around 690,000 people have signed up to it so far, with more than half giving their job adviser access to their profile and activities.

There are just over 2.5 million people unemployed in the UK at present, according to The Guardian.

Ex-BBC Producer Ted Beston Denies Allegations In Jimmy Savile Scandal

0

Huff Post |

Former BBC radio producer Ted Beston has “vehemently denied” historic allegations put to him by detectives investigating the Jimmy Savile sex abuse scandal.

Mr Beston, 76, was arrested by Operation Yewtree detectives on Wednesday morning on suspicion of sexual offences, then later bailed until February.

In a statement released through his lawyers on Thursday, the former Radio 1 producer said he was shocked by the allegations.

The statement added: “What emerged in October 2012 was a side of Savile that Mr Beston never knew.”

The statement, released today by Ewings and Co Solicitors, said: “Yesterday, Ted Beston, the former Radio 1 producer, was arrested by officers from Operation Yewtree. Mr Beston was not charged.

“Mr Beston vehemently denies the historic allegations put to him by the police.

“When the Savile story surfaced in October, Mr Beston made clear then that he was shocked by the allegations…

“For the time being, Mr Beston will be saying nothing further and we request that Mr Beston, who is now 76, be allowed to deal with these false claims without undue intrusion.”

Operation Yewtree detectives are looking at three strands within their inquiry: claims against Savile, those against Savile and others, and those against others.

Mr Beston, who was arrested under the strand of the investigation termed “Savile and others”, became the eighth person to be arrested in the inquiry.

Other high profile names include former pop star Gary Glitter, comedian Freddie Starr and publicist Max Clifford.

On Monday, Starr and Clifford were re-bailed to return on dates in February and March pending further inquiries.

Glitter, whose real is Paul Gadd, and a man in his 70s, reported to be former television producer Wilfred De’Ath – were previously re-bailed to dates in February.

Last week, police said a total of 31 allegations of rape have been made against Savile.

Some 589 people have come forward with information relating to the scandal, with a total of 450 complaints against the BBC presenter and DJ, mainly alleging sexual abuse, Scotland Yard said.

Detectives have recorded 199 crimes in 17 force areas in which Savile is a suspect, with 31 allegations of rape recorded against him in seven force areas.

RINF Video: US & European Orwellian Surveillance Deepens

0

RINF News reports that Germany is now considering adopting a new level of Orwellian surveillance similar to the UK, while the United States installs spy technology on buses and subways to record private conversations.

Read More:
http://www.spiegel.de/international/zeitgeist/bonn-bomb-triggers-calls-for-gr…
http://www.spiegel.de/international/germany/deadly-berlin-beating-highlights-…
http://www.thenewamerican.com/usnews/item/13973-city-after-city-buses-are-bei…

Man who stabbed 23 kids ‘influenced’ by doomsday rumor

0

Just hours before the Newtown, Conn., massacre, a man stabbed 23 children in a rural Chinese elementary school.

CS Monitor |

Chinese police said Monday that the man who stabbed 23 children in a rural Chinese elementary school just hours before the Newtown, Conn., massacre may have been “influenced” by doomsday predictions.

A belief that the Mayan calendar predicts an apocalypse this Friday, Dec. 21, has gained peculiar currency here. And the knifing spree is the darkest manifestation yet of how end-of-the-world rumors have taken hold in China.

Doomsday rumors, generally lighthearted spoofs, have been especially widespread on the Chinese Internet since the success of the Hollywood blockbuster “2012.” That was the first major American film to portray the Chinese as “good guys,” builders of “arks” that offer salvation to some survivors of a cataclysmic flood. But Chinese authorities, nervous about threats to social stability, have been showing increasing signs of concern about the public’s willingness to believe the rumors.

Police and government media are warning people not to be fooled by doomsday-related scams, alleged doomsday cultists have been arrested, and shoppers fearful of coming darkness have bought up all the candles they can find.

Police in Guangshan county, in the central Chinese province of Henan, said they were holding the suspect, Min Yongjun, in Friday’s school stabbings “for further investigation into his motives” and medical history, according to an announcement on the local government’s website.

The police “suspect” that Mr. Min “injured innocent people and children with a knife because he was influenced by doomsday rumors,” the statement added. None of the wounded children died of their injuries.

Chinese are susceptible to doomsday reports, suggests social psychologist Wei Zhizhong, because “scientific knowledge is still not widespread in China. People have abandoned their traditional mystical relationship with nature, but they are still exploring scientific ways of coexisting” with the natural world.

Lost in the transition, says Mr. Wei, a researcher at Wuhan University’s Psychological Research Institute, “some people respond to things like doomsday rumors.”

Last week the People’s Daily, the official newspaper of the ruling Communist Party, urged the government to “release timely, authoritative information to avoid some people taking doomsday jokes seriously, which may trigger irrational panic and chaos.”

The media “should not follow the trend of feeding doomsday emotion but should guide the public with rationality,” the paper suggested.

The role of the media

For some observers, though, the Chinese media are poorly placed to influence public opinion since censorship has undermined their authority.

“One reason that rumors prevail is because of the damaged credibility of traditional media,” wrote Liu Xiaocong, a TV producer, in an opinion piece for the English-language edition of Global Times last week. “In countries where the media is regularly subject to restraints imposed from above … people lose faith in it and seize onto stories that haven’t been put through the official filters.”

The People’s Daily published its warning in the wake of reports that in two provinces, shoppers had cleaned local shops out of candles, spooked by reports that the world would be plunged into three days of darkness on Friday.

The Shanghai police issued a caution earlier this month on their Weibo account, similar to a Twitter feed, saying they had received 25 reports in a 24-hour period of people spreading doomsday rumors, apparently as some sort of scam.

“The police warn citizens that ‘doomsday’ is simply a rumor,” the Weibo post read.

Some are putting the rumors to political use, according to state-run media. The government is cracking down on a group that it says is urging a “decisive battle” against the “Red Dragon” Communist Party, according to the provincial Shaanxi Daily.

Members of the “Almighty God” group, which has been described as a cult by the state media, have been distributing leaflets announcing the end of the world this year, the paper said. Dozens of them have been arrested in different provincial cities, according to official statements.

IDF Police Interrogate, Gag Blogger, Demand Whistleblower’s Identity

0

Richard Silverstein |

Before beginning this post, I want to note that there is a great deal we don’t know about this case thanks to the Israeli police’s pressure on the victim to maintain silence. But here, I’ll say what I know and then speculate about what I don’t know when I think there’s enough independent evidence to do so.

We know that an anonymous Israeli blogger calling himself Eishton (“Newsman” or “Paperman;” perhaps also a play on “Bibiton,” a derisive reference to Yisrael HaYom) was “invited” by the Israeli military police for interrogation, at which he was presented with unspecified “violations” of the law he’s alleged to have committed. At the end of his first interrogation there was debate among the authorities about whether to continue his remand or release him. He was released, but not before he was forced to sign a statement promising not to divulge the content or nature of his interrogation or the charges against him.

For that reason, he has been unable to comment in any detail on what happened to him. Haaretz’s Barak Ravid has written about this. Since Ravid is usually a conduit for the Israeli political establishment, I’m guessing he was leaked this story by someone in the PM’s office or the like:

…I am now under investigation by the Military Police and the Israel Police. In the past two days, several posts have been written about this in the blogosphere, and now in Haaretz too, with speculations about my situation.

1.        I’m not in custody. I was detained for questioning, at the end of which the policemen had an argument about whether or not to release me. I was released with an “invitation” for another interrogation and…

2.        I was made [ed., or “forced”] to sign [an agreement] prohibiting me from speaking about the content of the interrogation. If I violate this (illegal) demand, the list of things I am accused of at the moment will have another offense added, and in addition (it says on the page I signed) the state will confiscate money/property from me, and that is something that I cannot afford at the moment (this, in addition to the financial damage that has already been caused to me, and about which I also cannot talk.)

2.        I wish to apologize if what I said left too large an opening for interpretations (beyond the sock that’s currently shoved in my mouth). Beyond several humiliations, the financial damage, and the stress, I have not been physically hurt and I am not currently in custody. I thank everyone for their concern, and the two journalists who set up free initial consultation with Jacques [or Jack] Chen for me, and I want to thank him for the this initial direction. (To journalists — there’s no point in pestering him. This was only an initial consultation and he does not represent me. Beyond that, there’s attorney’s privilege, and beyond that — he also doesn’t know whom he was advising.)

My anonymity is important to me. In the past it was also important to me in order to prevent what I’m going through right now, but our State is light on the trigger with orders — and the [web host] companies providing us with services do not fight to protect our information. But other than that reason, which has become a thing of the past, there are other reasons that make me prefer anonymity.

The blog tends to update every few days. If this pace of updating is not interrupted, I ask that you do not investigate further nor try — at the moment — to understand the nature of the investigation, because I do not want the police to use this opportunity (on purpose or by chance) to leak or expose my name, especially as I have not yet been charged and there is not, in fact, any public interest in doing that. If and when this becomes possible, I will explain the subject of the investigation myself. Even so, if their demand for a gag has any foundation (and we’re arguing about that right now), even if someone does investigate the subject, they will not be able to write about it in the media (and if the police sees fit to leak information while gagging me, I will see that as a signal that there is no foundation for the gag and it will not remain unilateral.)

The police want something more. They will not get it from me. Excessive exposure will only make it harder for me to do so [tell them what they want], and beyond hurting me (more interest in the matter might turn the barks into bites), it would substantially harm others.

Thanks again for the interest and concern, but my intention was solely to set up an insurance policy in the event I’d be arrested or the site shut down, and not to try — at the moment — to open the subject. This is not the first time Eishton has been detained, and interrogations — stressful as they may be — are something I know how to handle.

I will try to resume writing…tomorrow.

(translation: Dena Shunra/Richard Silverstein)

Read more

Facebook Censorship over Sandy Hook School Massacre

Despite the fact that the mainstream media got key facts wrong in early reporting

Paul Joseph Watson, Infowars.com |

Facebook is suspending user accounts that question the official narrative behind the Sandy Hook school massacre, following a warning by Connecticut State Police spokesman Lt. J. Paul Vance that “misinformation” posted on social media sites could result in prosecution.

An image posted in the aftermath of the shootings that questioned whether “a clumsy 20-year-old autistic kid” could have pulled off the murders of 26 people was deleted and the user’s account hit with a three day suspension.

“I was informed the reason for this punishment was the result of a meme I had shared,” writes the editor ofSecretsOfTheFed.com. “Facebook told me it “…violates Facebook’s Statement of Rights and Responsibilities”. I was further warned that “If you continue to abuse Facebook’s features, your account could be permanently disabled.”

On Saturday, Connecticut state police warned that people posting “misinformation” on social media websites would be “investigated and prosecuted.”

However, this threat could apply to the vast majority of the mainstream media, who in their haste to get out ahead of the story reported numerous details that soon turned out to be completely incorrect.

– It was initially reported that Adam Lanza’s mother, the first victim of the rampage, was a teacher at the school, which was not true.

– It was initially reported that Lanza had also killed his father, which was not true.

– It was initially reported that the culprit behind the massacre was Ryan Lanza, Adam Lanza’s brother, which was not true.

– Initial reports that a “second gunman” arrested in the woods behind the school was involved in the massacre were later dropped without explanation.

Given that most of the “misinformation” about the shooting came from corporate media sources, the fact that Facebook is punishing users for asking questions about the proper sequence of events — essentially labeling such activity a thought crime — is a worrying development.

As we have previously highlighted, Facebook occasionally deletes images and posts that it claims violate “Facebook’s Statement of Rights and Responsibilities,” yet constitute little more than political conjecture or a healthy skepticism of official narratives on current events.

In September 2011, Infowars reporter Darrin McBreen was told by Facebook staff not to voice his political opinion on the social networking website.

Responding to comments McBreen had made about off-grid preppers being treated as criminals, the “Facebook Team” wrote, “Be careful making about making political statements on facebook,” adding, “Facebook is about building relationships not a platform for your political viewpoint. Don’t antagonize your base. Be careful and congnizat (sic) of what you are preaching.”

*********************

Paul Joseph Watson is the editor and writer for Infowars.com and Prison Planet.com. He is the author of Order Out Of Chaos. Watson is also a host for Infowars Nightly News.

Putin’s Arms Dealers Are Selling More Weapons to More Dirtbags Than Ever

0

Wired |

Vladimir Putin wants to build a big friggin’ army. But to pay for it, the Russian president has expanded the amount of Russian weapons sold around the globe, and he isn’t being all that discriminating about who he sells them to.

“Let’s talk about our results – they are positive,” Putin said on Monday while meeting with officials. “We are reaching a record level of weapons exports. Their total volume was above $14 billion.” That would be the highest ever for Moscow.

The problem is that a lot of these weapons are going to presidents and potentates that are not-so-friendly with the United States. There’s Assad in Syria, who Russia has sold more than one billion dollars worth of weapons in 2011, sales which continued into 2012. Hugo Chavez in Venezuela is also a big recipient. Foreign military sales for Russia also underwrites domestic military production and a major Russian arms build-up. In other words, this also helps Putin’s army – while extending Russia’s influence around the globe.

Then on Tuesday, Bloomberg reported that Russia may have secured a major $7 billion arms deal with India for fighter jets and fighter engines, which could be announced on Christmas Eve during Putin’s upcoming visit to the country. First, India is reportedly looking at buying another 42 advanced Su-30 fighters, on top of the more than 150 Su-30s currently fielded by New Delhi. And on top of the fighters, India may also buy up to 1,000 turbine engines for the jet.

“These will be truly historical deals if signed,” Konstantin Makiyenko of the Moscow-based Center for the Analysis of Strategies and Technologies, told Bloomberg. “I don’t remember a contract for 1,000 engines at all and deals for over 40 planes happen twice in a decade.”

 

It’s also a sign that India isn’t slowing down its own arms build-up. Russia’s arms exports have grown in countries large and small, of which many fear a more powerful Chinese military. India is Russia’s biggest customer, and is paying for all the new gear with a rapidly growing defense budget that’s doubled in size in a decade. Vietnam and Malaysia have also ranked highly, according to Russian news service RIA Novosti. Outside of China’s backyard, a big arms build-up in Venezuela under Hugo Chavez has also accounted for a portion of the sales, although these are opaque and heavily financed by Russian loans.

Another big customer, at least in 2011,  was Syria. Russia exported an estimated $1 billion in arms to Syria that year, but has dialed back the sales in 2012, as Bashar Assad has become increasingly isolated around the world, and besieged at home by a rebel uprising. Russian leaders have also changed their language, and while they haven’t turned against Assad, it does seem like the relationship has been put out to pasture. Last week, Moscow’s deputy foreign minister Mikhail Bogdanov said Assad’s forces were “losing more and more control and territory.”

Meanwhile, Russia is reportedly mobilizing a small fleet of ships to rescue its citizens from the country. “Unnamed naval sources,” according to Russian news agency Interfax, have said that Moscow has sent “two assault ships, a tanker and an escort vessel” to the Syria port of Tartus, where Russia has a naval base, “for a possible evacuation of Russian citizens.” The deployment was also carried out in a hurry.

Russia is caught in a tricky place for an international arms merchant, not the least of which is having clients collapse in civil war and revolution. Another reason is that the United States is still far and away the world’s largest arms exporter, at some $30 billion per year for the past several years. (Russia is second.) And U.S. military technology is pretty top-notch by global standards, although more expensive than much of the competition. That means smaller countries in Asia and Africa – that want to shop for airplanes or missiles – might instead choose Russia as a reliable bargain buy.

But China is also seeking to expand the number of weapons it sells around the world, and do it more cheaply than Russia. Moscow’s hope is that countries stick to their existing Russian equipment bought back during the Cold War, and keep going back for upgrades. “We understand that competition in this sector of the international economy is very high and very serious,” Putin said on Monday. But competition may also fuel more countries wanting to get strapped with Russian gear.

Top 10 Legal Drugs Linked to Violence

0

Time |

When people consider the connections between drugs and violence, what typically comes to mind are illegal drugs like crack cocaine. However, certain medications – most notably, some antidepressants like Prozac – have also been linked to increase risk for violent, even homicidal behavior.

A new study from the Institute for Safe Medication Practices published in the journal PloS One and based on data from the FDA’s Adverse Event Reporting System has identified 31 drugs that are disproportionately linked with reports of violent behavior towards others. (More on Time.com:New Hope For An Anti-Cocaine Vaccine)

Please note that this does not necessarily mean that these drugs cause violent behavior. For example, in the case of opioid pain medications like Oxycontin, people with a prior history of violent behavior may seek drugs in order to sustain an addiction, which they support via predatory crime. In the case of antipsychotics, the drugs may be given in an attempt to reduce violence by people suffering from schizophrenia and other psychotic disorders – so the drugs here might not be causing violence, but could be linked with it because they’re used to try to stop it.

Nonetheless, when one particular drug in a class of nonaddictive drugs used to treat the same problem stands out, that suggests caution: unless the drug is being used to treat radically different groups of people, that drug may actually be the problem. Researchers calculated a ratio of risk for each drug compared to the others in the database, adjusting for various relevant factors that could create misleading comparisons. Here are the top ten offenders:

10. Desvenlafaxine (Pristiq) An antidepressant which affects both serotonin and noradrenaline, this drug is 7.9 times more likely to be associated with violence than other drugs.

9. Venlafaxine (Effexor) A drug related to Pristiq in the same class of antidepressants, both are also used to treat anxiety disorders. Effexor is 8.3 times more likely than other drugs to be related to violent behavior. (More on Time.com: Adderall May Not Make You Smarter, But It Makes You Think You Are)

8. Fluvoxamine (Luvox) An antidepressant that affects serotonin (SSRI), Luvox is 8.4 times more likely than other medications to be linked with violence

7. Triazolam (Halcion) A benzodiazepine which can be addictive, used to treat insomnia. Halcion is 8.7 times more likely to be linked with violence than other drugs, according to the study.

6) Atomoxetine (Strattera) Used to treat attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD), Strattera affects the neurotransmitter noradrenaline and is 9 times more likely to be linked with violence compared to the average medication.

5) Mefoquine (Lariam) A treatment for malaria, Lariam has long been linked with reports of bizarre behavior. It is 9.5 times more likely to be linked with violence than other drugs.

4) Amphetamines: (Various) Amphetamines are used to treat ADHD and affect the brain’s dopamine and noradrenaline systems. They are 9.6 times more likely to be linked to violence, compared to other drugs.

3) Paroxetine (Paxil) An SSRI antidepressant, Paxil is also linked with more severe withdrawal symptoms and a greater risk of birth defects compared to other medications in that class. It is 10.3 times more likely to be linked with violence compared to other drugs. (More on Time.com:Healthland’s Guide to Life 2011)

2) Fluoxetine (Prozac) The first well-known SSRI antidepressant, Prozac is 10.9 times more likely to be linked with violence in comparison with other medications.

1) Varenicline (Chantix) The anti-smoking medication Chantix affects the nicotinic acetylcholine receptor, which helps reduce craving for smoking. Unfortunately, it’s 18 times more likely to be linked with violence compared to other drugs – by comparison, that number for Xyban is 3.9 and just 1.9 for nicotine replacement. Because Chantix is slightly superior in terms of quit rates in comparison to other drugs, it shouldn’t necessarily be ruled out as an option for those trying to quit, however.

Related Links:

Placebos Work Even if You Know They’re Fake: But How?

What Does Meth Research Have to Do With Addiction and Autism Treatments? (It’s Oxytocin.)

Powerful Hallucinogen Eyed as Treatment for Alzheimer’s, Chronic Pain

Read more: http://healthland.time.com/2011/01/07/top-ten-legal-drugs-linked-to-violence/#ixzz2FQaRS07D

Security Chief: US seeks ‘world supremacy’ through advanced weapons

RT |

The Secretary of the Security Council of Russia has provided his views on a number of national security issues, including the importance of preserving Russia’s nuclear arsenal against potential adversaries.

Nikolay Patrushev, commenting on how atomic weapons play more of a political role than a military one, said the consequences of even a “limited nuclear intervention” are so catastrophic that it makes the usage of such weapons absolutely impossible.

Nuclear arsenals therefore continue to serve as an effective deterrent against any possible large-scale war, Patrushev told Komsomolskaya Pravda newspaper in an interview.

Patrushev spoke candidly on the nature and source of threats to Russian security, and what those challenges mean for the country.

“We…understand that the atomic weapons of leading western counties are aimed mainly against Russia,” he said. “In these conditions — and given the insufficient strength of Russia’s conventional armed forces — the preservation of the nuclear potential is a priority task.”

While ruling out the possibility of total nuclear disarmament, Patrushev nevertheless explained that a new generation of weapon systems — including anti-ballistic missiles — is changing the nuclear calculus.

Earlier, Deputy Prime Minister Dmitry Rogozin spoke on the threat of mobile, naval-based elements of the US missile defense system “suddenly appearing” on Russia’s coastline. Such an event would trigger “the harshest reaction from Russia,” he warned.

Rogozin said that Russia is now taking definite steps to counter US warships “equipped with the Aegis integrated naval weapons system.” 

Moscow has frequently warned of “another arms race” unless a bilateral agreement is reached on NATO’s plans for missile defense near the Russian border.

Patrushev continued that theme in his interview, underlining the technological advances that have changed the face of war.

Not long ago, any state that possessed nuclear weapons was undoubtedly a “dominating force” in the international arena, he noted. However, in a clear reference to US plans for a naval-based missile defense shield in Eastern Europe, Patrushev mentioned that a new generation of weapons is being developed, and that “the United States has proven successful in this field of research.”

Patrushev explained that Russia, which has seen success in developing state-of-the-art technology, had not given enough attention to that field of research. As new weaponry appears, the US appears to be reconsidering the role of strategic nuclear arms in the fulfillment of a “geopolitical idea of world supremacy,” the security official added.

Political Challenges from the West

Unfortunately, as political events over the last year have proven, challenges to Russia from the West are not limited to the realm of military technologies.

“Last fall, Russia became (the target of) informational, organizational and other external leverages of interference into its internal affairs,” the Security Chief noted.

Patrushev talked about the mass protests that followed parliamentary elections last December and the presidential elections in March this year. Thousands of demonstrators took to the streets amid allegations from the political opposition that the election results were fraudulent.

While acknowledging the “constitutional right” of the demonstrators to assemble and protest, the Security Chief said that such actions should be carried out within the framework of the law. Unfortunately, this was not always the case.

Some members of the opposition and radical groups attempted to use the street movement as an opportunity to“provoke mass disorder,” he noted.

In response to these activities both at home and abroad, the state was forced to take measures to maintain order and stability.

The Russian government adopted amendments to the legal code and “halted activities of a number of NGOs, some of which were directly financed by the US Department of State,” Patrushev said.

In September, for example, Russian officials informed USAID that their services were no longer required.

According to the Foreign Ministry, USAID was attempting to manipulate the political winds inside the country.

“The character of the agency’s work…did not always comply with the declared aims of cooperation in bilateral humanitarian cooperation,” the Foreign Ministry said in a statement on its website. “We are talking about issuing grants in an attempt to affect the course of the political processes in the country, including elections at different levels and institutions in civil society.”

Steps undertaken by the Russian government to offset the damage “proved to be efficient” and the law enforcement officials managed — in a legal manner — to provide for the safety of the population, he added.

Patrushev indicated the leaders of the protests and their foreign supporters will continue in their efforts to wreak havoc on the Russian people.

“The situation is absolutely clear,” he said. “The ‘directors’ and sponsors of the anti-government rallies are known and they are not going to drop their plans.”

Despite their efforts, there are no preconditions for a color revolution in Russia, Patrushev assured. National security“will remain stable” in 2013.

Jewish advocacy groups slam Israel construction plan

0
American Jewish advocacy groups have called on the Israeli regime to stop its plan to construct illegal settler units in the Occupied Palestinian Territories, warning the move will “violate Palestinian human rights.”

Over 400 American Jewish rabbis, cantors, and students signed a letter, published on Monday, protesting Tel Aviv’s plans to expand illegal settlements in East al-Quds [Jerusalem] and the West Bank, particularly in the controversial E1 area.

The signatories warned that “the current situation in the occupied territories violates Palestinian human rights.”

They also said “if Israel builds in E1, it will cut East Jerusalem off from its West Bank surroundings and effectively bifurcate the West Bank.”

The letter also criticized Israel’s Monday approval of the construction of some 1,500 illegal settler units in East al-Quds.

Tel Aviv announced the plan for new settler units on November 30, just a day after the UN General Assembly voted 138-9 with 41 abstentions to upgrade Palestine’s status to non-member observer state.

Construction in E1 would violate repeated commitments that Israeli regimes “have made to the United States since 1994 not to build there,” the letter also said.

The US has also condemned Israel’s plan on Monday, calling on the Israeli authorities to refrain from “unilateral actions.”

On December 10, the European Union criticized the Israeli regime over its plan to build thousands more illegal settler units on the occupied territories, saying the bloc is “deeply dismayed” by the move.

More than half a million Israelis live in over 120 settlements built since the 1967 Israeli occupation of the Palestinian territories of the West Bank and East al-Quds.

The settlements are considered illegal by the UN.

The Visible Government How the U.S. Intelligence Community Came Out of the Shadows

0

Tom Engelhardt, ICH |

December 17, 2012 “Information Clearing House” – Weren’t those the greatest of days if you were in the American spy game? Governments went down in Guatemala and Iran thanks to you. In distant Indonesia, Laos, and Vietnam, what a role you played! And even that botch-up of an invasion in Cuba was nothing to sneeze at. In those days, unfortunately, you — particularly those of you in the CIA — didn’t get the credit you deserved.

You had to live privately with your successes. Sometimes, as with the Bay of Pigs, the failures came back to haunt you (so, in the case of Iran, would your “success,” though so many years later), but you couldn’t with pride talk publicly about what you, in your secret world, had done, or see instant movies and TV shows about your triumphs. You couldn’t launch a “covert” air war that was reported on, generally positively, almost every week, or bask in the pleasure of having your director claim publicly that it was “the only game in town.” You couldn’t, that is, come out of what were then called “the shadows,” and soak up the glow of attention, be hailed as a hero, join Americans in watching some (fantasy) version of your efforts weekly on television, or get the credit for anything.

Nothing like that was possible — not at least until well after two journalists, David Wise and Thomas B. Ross, shined a bright light into those shadows, called you part of an “invisible government,” and outed you in ways that you found deeply discomforting.

Their book with that startling title, The Invisible Government, was published in 1964 and it was groundbreaking, shadow-removing, illuminating. It caused a fuss from its very first paragraph, which was then a shockeroo: “There are two governments in the United States today. One is visible. The other is invisible.”

I mean, what did Americans know at the time about an invisible government even the president didn’t control that was lodged deep inside the government they had elected?

Wise and Ross continued: “The first is the government that citizens read about in their newspapers and children study about in their civics books. The second is the interlocking, hidden machinery that carries out the policies of the United States in the Cold War. This second, invisible government gathers intelligence, conducts espionage, and plans and executes secret operations all over the globe.”

The Invisible Government came out just as what became known as “the Sixties” really began, a moment when lights were suddenly being shone into many previously shadowy American corners. I was then 20 years old and sometime in those years I read their book with a suitable sense of dread, just as I had read those civics books in high school in which Martians landed on Main Street in some “typical” American town to be lectured on our way of life and amazed by our Constitution, not to speak of those fabulous governmental checks and balances instituted by the Founding Fathers, and other glories of democracy.

I wasn’t alone reading The Invisible Government either. It was a bestseller and CIA Director John McCone reportedly read the manuscript, which he had secretly obtained from publisher Random House. He demanded deletions. When the publisher refused, he considered buying up the full first printing. In the end, he evidently tried to arrange for some bad reviews instead.

Time Machines and Shadow Worlds

By 1964, the “U.S. Intelligence Community,” or IC, had nine members, including the CIA, the Defense Intelligence Agency (DIA), and the National Security Agency (NSA). As Wise and Ross portrayed it, the IC was already a labyrinthine set of secret outfits with growing power. It was capable of launching covert actions worldwide, with a “broad spectrum of domestic operations,” the ability to overthrow foreign governments, some involvement in shaping presidential campaigns, and the capacity to plan operations without the knowledge of Congress or full presidential control. “No outsider,” they concluded, “can tell whether this activity is necessary or even legal. No outsider is in a position to determine whether or not, in time, these activities might become an internal danger to a free society.” Modestly enough, they called for Americans to face the problem and bring “secret power” under control. (“If we err as a society, let it be on the side of control.”)

Now, imagine that H.G. Wells’s time machine had been available in that year of publication. Imagine that it whisked those journalists, then in their mid-thirties, and the young Tom Engelhardt instantly some 48 years into the future to survey just how their cautionary tale about a great democratic and republican nation running off the tracks and out of control had played out.

The first thing they might notice is that the Intelligence Community of 2012 with 17 official outfits has, by the simplest of calculations, almost doubled. The real size and power of that secret world, however, has in every imaginable way grown staggeringly larger than that. Take one outfit, now part of the IC, that didn’t exist back in 1964, the National Geospatial-Intelligence Agency. With an annual budget of close to $5 billion, it recently built a gigantic $1.8 billion headquarters — “the third-largest structure in the Washington area, nearly rivaling the Pentagon in size” — for its 16,000 employees. It literally has its “eye” on the globe in a way that would have been left to sci-fi novels almost half a century ago and is tasked as “the nation’s primary source of geospatial intelligence, or GEOINT.” (Don’t ask me what that means exactly, though it has to do with quite literally imaging the planet and all its parts — or perhaps less politely, turning every inch of Earth into a potential shooting range.)

Or consider an outfit that did exist then: the National Security Agency, or NSA (once known jokingly as “no such agency” because of its deep cover). Like its geospatial cousin, it has been in a period of explosive growth, budgetary and otherwise, capped off by the construction of a “heavily fortified” $2 billion data center in Bluffdale, Utah. According to NSA expert James Bamford, when finished in 2013 that center will “intercept, decipher, analyze, and store vast swaths of the world’s communications as they zap down from satellites and zip through the underground and undersea cables of international, foreign, and domestic networks.” He adds: “Flowing through its servers and routers and stored in near-bottomless databases will be all forms of communication, including the complete contents of private emails, cell phone calls, and Google searches, as well as all sorts of personal data trails — parking receipts, travel itineraries, bookstore purchases, and other digital ‘pocket litter.’” We’re talking not just about foreign terrorists here but about the intake and eternal storage of vast reams of material from American citizens, possibly even you.

Or consider a little-known post-9/11 creation, the National Counterterrorism Center (NCTC), which is not even a separate agency in the IC, but part of the Office of the Director of National Intelligence. According to the Wall Street Journal, the Obama administration has just turned that organization into “a government dragnet, sweeping up millions of records about U.S. citizens — even people suspected of no crime.” It has granted the NCTC the right, among other things “to examine the government files of U.S. citizens for possible criminal behavior, even if there is no reason to suspect them… copy entire government databases — flight records, casino-employee lists, the names of Americans hosting foreign-exchange students, and many others. The agency has new authority to keep data about innocent U.S. citizens for up to five years, and to analyze it for suspicious patterns of behavior. Previously, both were prohibited.”

Or take the Defense Intelligence Agency, which came into existence in 1961 and became operational only the year their book came out. Almost half a century ago, as Wise and Ross told their readers, it had 2,500 employees and a relatively modest set of assigned tasks. By the end of the Cold War, it had 7,500 employees. Two decades later, another tale of explosive growth: the DIA has 16,000 employees.

In their 2010 Washington Post series, “Top Secret America,” journalists Dana Priest and William Arkin caught a spirit of untrammeled expansion in the post-9/11 era that would surely have amazed those two authors who had called for “controls” over the secret world: “In Washington and the surrounding area, 33 building complexes for top-secret intelligence work are under construction or have been built since September 2001. Together they occupy the equivalent of almost three Pentagons or 22 U.S. Capitol buildings — about 17 million square feet of space.”

Similarly, the combined Intelligence Community budget, which in deepest secrecy had supposedly soared to at least $44 billion in 2005 (all such figures have to be taken with a dumpster-ful of salt), has by now nearly doubled to an official $75 billion.

Let’s add in one more futuristic shocker for our time travelers. Someone would have to tell them that, in 1991, the Soviet Union, that great imperial power and nemesis of the invisible government, with its vast army, secret police, system of gulags, and monstrous nuclear arsenal, had disappeared largely nonviolently from the face of the Earth and no single power has since arisen to challenge the United States militarily. After all, that staggering U.S. intelligence budget, the explosion of new construction, the steep growth in personnel, and all the rest has happened in a world in which the U.S. is facing a couple of rickety regional powers (Iran and North Korea), a minority insurgency in Afghanistan, a rising economic power (China) with still modest military might, and probably a few thousand extreme Muslim fundamentalists and al-Qaeda wannabes scattered around the planet.

They would have to be told that, thanks to a single horrific event, a kind of terrorist luck-out we now refer to in shorthand as “9/11,” and despite the diminution of global enemies, an already enormous IC has expanded nonstop in a country seized by a spasm of fear and paranoia.

Preparing Battlefields and Building Giant Embassies

Staggered by the size of the invisible government they had once anatomized, the two reporters might have been no less surprised by another development: the way in our own time “intelligence” has been militarized, while the U.S. military itself has plunged into the shadows. Of course, it’s now well known that the CIA, a civilian intelligence agency until recently headed by a retired four-star general, has been paramilitarized and is now putting a significant part of its energy into running an ever spreading “covert” set of drone wars across the Greater Middle East.

Meanwhile, since the early years of the George W. Bush administration, the U.S. military has been intent on claiming some of the CIA’s turf as its own. Not long after the 9/11 attacks, then-Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld began pushing the Pentagon into CIA-style intelligence activities — the “full spectrum of humint [human intelligence] operations” — to “prepare” for future “battlefields.” That process has never ended. In April 2012, for instance, the Pentagon released the information that it was in the process of setting up a new spy agency called the Defense Clandestine Service (DCS). Its job: to globalize military “intelligence” by taking it beyond the obvious war zones. The DCS was tasked as well with working more closely with the CIA (while assumedly rivaling it).

As Greg Miller of the Washington Post reported, “Creation of the new service also coincides with the appointment of a number of senior officials at the Pentagon who have extensive backgrounds in intelligence and firm opinions on where the military’s spying programs — often seen as lackluster by CIA insiders — have gone wrong.”

And then just this month the head of the Defense Intelligence Agency, originally a place for analysis and coordination, announced at a conference that his agency was going to expand into “humint” in a big way, filling embassies around the world with a new corps of clandestine operators who had diplomatic or other “cover.” He was talking about fielding 1,600 “collectors” who would be “trained by the CIA and often work with the Joint Special Operations Command.” Never, in other words, will a country have had so many “diplomats” who know absolutely nothing about diplomacy.

Though the Senate has balked at funding the expansion of the Defense Clandestine Service, all of this represents both a significant reshuffling of what is still called “intelligence” but is really a form of low-level war-making on a global stage and a continuing expansion of America’s secret world on a scale hitherto unimaginable, all in the name of “national security.” Now at least, it’s easier to understand why, from London to Baghdad to Islamabad, the U.S. has been building humongous embassies fortified like ancient castles and the size of imperial palaces for unparalleled staffs of “diplomats.” These will now clearly include scads of CIA, DIA, and perhaps DCS agents, among others, under diplomatic “cover.”

Into this mix would have to go another outfit that would have been unknown to Wise and Ross, but — given the publicity Seal Team Six has gotten over the bin Laden raid and other activities — that most Americans will be at least somewhat aware of. An ever-greater role in the secret world is now being played by a military organization that long ago headed into the shadows, the Joint Special Operations Command (JSOC). In 2009, New Yorker reporter Seymour Hersh termed it an “executive assassination ring” (especially in Iraq) that did not “report to anybody, except in the Bush-Cheney days… directly to the Cheney office.”

In fact, JSOC only emerged into the public eye when one of its key operatives in Iraq, General Stanley McChrystal, was appointed U.S. war commander in Afghanistan. It has been in the spotlight ever since as it engages in what once might have been CIA-style paramilitary operations on steroids, increases its intelligence-gathering capacity, runs its own drone wars, and has set up a new headquarters in Washington, 15 convenient minutes from the White House.

Big Screen Moments and “Covert” Wars

At their top levels, the leadership of the CIA, the DIA, and JSOC are now mixing and matching in a blur of ever more intertwined, militarized outfits, increasingly on a perpetual war footing. They have, in this way, turned the ancient arts of intelligence, surveillance, spying, and assassination into a massively funded way of life and are now regularly conducting war on the sly and on the loose across the globe. At the lowest levels, the CIA, DIA, JSOC, and assumedly someday DCS train together, work in teams and in tandem, and cooperate, as well as poach on each other’s turf.

Today, you would be hard-pressed to write a single volume called The Invisible Government. You would instead have to produce a multi-volume series. And while you were at it — this undoubtedly would have stunned Wise and Ross — you might have had to retitle the project something like The Visible Government.

Don’t misunderstand me: Americans now possess (or more accurately are possessed by) a vast “intelligence” bureaucracy deeply in the shadows, whose activities are a mass of known unknowns and unknown unknowns to those of us on the outside. It is beyond enormous. There is no way to assess its actual usefulness, or whether it is even faintly “intelligent” (though a case could certainly be made that the U.S. would be far better off with a non-paramilitarized intelligence service or two, rather than scads of them, that eschewed paranoia and relied largely on open sources). But none of that matters. It now represents an irreversible way of life, one that is increasingly visible and celebrated in this country. It is also part of the seemingly endless growth of the imperial power of the White House and, in ways that Wise and Ross would in 1964 have found inconceivable, beyond all accountability or control when it comes to the American people.

It is also ready to take public credit for its “successes” (or even a significant hand in shaping how they are viewed in the public arena). Once upon a time, a CIA agent who died in some covert operation would have gone unnamed and unacknowledged. By the 1970s, that agent would have had a star engraved on the wall of the lobby of CIA headquarters, but no one outside the Agency would have known about his or her fate.

Now, those who die in our “secret” operations or ones launched against our “invisible” agents can become public figures and celebrated “heroes.” This was the case, for instance, with Jennifer Matthews, a CIA agent who died in Afghanistan when an Agency double agent turned out to be a triple agent and suicide bomber. Or just last week, when a soldier from Seal Team Six died in an operation in Afghanistan to rescue a kidnapped doctor. The Navy released his photo and name, and he was widely hailed. This would certainly have been striking to Wise and Ross.

Then again, they would undoubtedly have been no less startled to discover that, from Jack Ryan and Jason Bourne to Syriana, the Mission Impossible films, and Taken, the CIA and other secret outfits (or their fantasy doppelgangers) have become staples of American multiplexes. Nor has the small screen, from 24 to Homeland, been immune to this invasion of visibility. Or consider this: just over a year and a half after Seal Team Six’s super-secret bin Laden operation ended, it has already been turned into Zero Dark Thirty, a highly pre-praised (and controversial) movie, a candidate for Oscars with a heroine patterned on an undercover CIA agent whose photo has made it into the public arena. Moreover, it was a film whose makers were reportedly aided or at least encouraged in their efforts by the CIA, the Pentagon, and the White House, just as the SEALs aided this year’s high-grossing movie Act of Valor (“an elite team of Navy SEALs… embark on a covert mission to recover a kidnapped CIA agent”) by lending the film actual SEALs as its (unnamed) actors and then staging a SEAL parachute drop onto a red carpet at its Hollywood premier.

True, at the time The Invisible Government was published, the first two James Bond films were already hits and the Mission Imposible TV show was only two years from launch, but the way the invisible world has since emerged from the shadows to become a fixture of pop culture remains stunning. And don’t think this was just some cultural quirk. After all, back in the 1960s, enterprising reporters had to pry open those invisible agencies to discover anything about what they were doing. In those years, for instance, the CIA ran a secret air and sizeable ground war in Laos that it tried desperately never to acknowledge despite its formidable size and scope.

Today, on the other hand, the Agency runs what are called “covert” drone wars in Pakistan, Yemen, and Somalia in which most strikes are promptly reported in the press and about which the administration clearly leaked information it wanted in the New York Times on the president’s role in picking those to die.

In the past, American presidents pursued “plausible deniability” when it came to assassination plots like those against Congolese leader Patrice Lumumba, Cuba’s Fidel Castro, and Vietnam’s Ngo Dinh Diem. Now, assassination is clearly considered a semi-public part of the presidential job, codified, bureaucratized, and regulated (though only within the White House), and remarkably public. All of this has become part of the visible world (or at least a giant publicity operation in it). No need today for a Wise or Ross to tell us this. Ever since President Ronald Reagan’s CIA-run Central American Contra wars of the 1980s, the definition of “covert” has changed. It no longer means hidden from sight, but beyond accountability.

It is now a polite way of saying to the American people: not yours. Yes, you can know about it; you can feel free to praise it; but you have nothing to do with it, no say over it.

In the 48 years since their pioneering book was published, Wise and Ross’s invisible government has triumphed over the visible one. It has become the go-to option in this country. In certain ways, it is also becoming the most visible and important part of that government, a vast edifice of surveilling, storing, spying, and killing that gives us what we now call “security,” leaves us in terror of the world, never stops growing, and is ever freer to collect information on you to use as it wishes.

With the passage of 48 years, it’s so much clearer that, impressive as Wise and Ross were, their quest was quixotic. Bring the “secret power” under control? Make it accountable? Dream on — but be careful, one of these days even your dreams may be on file.

Tom Engelhardt, co-founder of the American Empire Project and author of The United States of Fear as well as The End of Victory Culture, his history of the Cold War, runs the Nation Institute’s TomDispatch.com. His latest book, co-authored with Nick Turse, is Terminator Planet: The First History of Drone Warfare, 2001-2050.  You can see his interview with Bill Moyers on supersized politics, drones, and other subjects by clicking here.

Follow TomDispatch on Twitter @TomDispatch and join us on Facebook. Check out the newest Dispatch book, Nick Turse’s The Changing Face of Empire: Special Ops, Drones, Proxy Fighters, Secret Bases, and Cyberwarfare.

Copyright 2012 Tom Engelhardt

Torture: America’s other national pastime

Don’t let “Zero Dark Thirty” fool you. The suffering we inflict is psychological — and has lasting consequences

This piece originally appeared on TomDispatch.

If you look backward you see a nightmare. If you look forward you become the nightmare.

There’s one particular nightmare that Americans need to face: in the first decade of the twenty-first century we tortured people as national policy. One day, we’re going to have to confront the reality of what that meant, of what effect it had on its victims and on us, too, we who condoned, supported, or at least allowed it to happen, either passively or with guilty (or guiltless) gusto. If not, torture won’t go away. It can’t be disappeared like the body of a political prisoner, or conveniently deep-sixed simply by wishing it elsewhere or pretending it never happened or closing our bureaucratic eyes. After the fact, torture can only be dealt with by staring directly into the nightmare that changed us – that, like it or not, helped make us who we now are.

The president, a Nobel Peace Prize winner, has made it clear that no further investigations or inquiries will be made into America’s decade of torture. His Justice Department failed to prosecute a single torturer or any of those who helped cover up evidence of the torture practices. But it did deliver a jail sentence to one ex-CIA officer who refused to be trained to torture and was among the first at the CIA to publicly admit that the torture program was real.

At what passes for trials at our prison camp in Guantanamo, Cuba, disclosure of the details of torture is forbidden, effectively preventing anyone from learning anything about what the CIA did with its victims. We are encouraged to do what’s best for America and, as Barack Obama put it, “look forward, not backward,” with the same zeal as, after 9/11, we were encouraged to save America by going shopping.

Looking into the Eyes of the Tortured

Torture does not leave its victims, nor does it leave a nation that condones it. As an act, it is all about pain, but even more about degradation and humiliation. It destroys its victims, but also demeans those who perpetrate it. I know, because in the course of my 24 years as a State Department officer, I spoke with two men who had been tortured, both by allies of the United States and with at least the tacit approval of Washington. While these men were tortured, Americans in a position to know chose to look the other way for reasons of politics. These men were not movie characters, but complex flesh-and-blood human beings. Meet just one of them once and, I assure you, you’ll never follow the president’s guidance and move forward trying to forget.

The Korean Poet

The first victim was a Korean poet. I was in Korea at the time as a visa officer working for the State Department at the U.S. Embassy in Seoul. Persons with serious criminal records are normally ineligible to travel to the United States. There is, however, an exception in the law for political crimes. It was initially carved out for Soviet dissidents during the Cold War years. I spoke to the poet as he applied for a visa to determine if his arrest had indeed been “political” and so not a disqualification for his trip to the U.S.

Under the brutal military dictatorship of Park Chung Hee, the poet was tortured for writing anti-government verse. To younger Americans, South Korea is the land of “Gangnam Style,” of fashionable clothing and cool, cool electronics. However, within Psy’s lifetime, his nation was ruled by a series of military autocrats, supported by the United States in the interest of “national security.”

The poet quietly explained to me that, after his work came to the notice of the powers that be, he was taken from his apartment to a small underground cell. Soon, two men arrived and beat him repeatedly on his testicles and sodomized him with one of the tools they had used for the beating. They asked him no questions. In fact, he said, they barely spoke to him at all. Though the pain was beyond his ability to describe, even as a poet, he said that the humiliation of being left so utterly helpless was what remained with him for life, destroyed his marriage, sent him to the repeated empty comfort of alcohol, and kept him from ever putting pen to paper again.

The men who destroyed him, he told me, entered the room, did their work, and then departed, as if they had many others to visit that day and needed to get on with things. The Poet was released a few days later and politely driven back to his apartment by the police in a forward-looking gesture, as if the episode of torture was over and to be forgotten.

The Iraqi Tribal Leader

The second torture victim I met while I was stationed at a forward operating base in Iraq. He was a well-known SOI leader. The SOI, or Sons of Iraq, were Sunni tribesmen who, as part of Iraq War commander General David Petraeus’s much-discussed “Anbar Awakening” agreed to stop killing Americans and, in return for money we paid them, take up arms against al-Qaeda. That was 2007. By 2010, when I met the man, the Sons of Iraq, as Sunnis, had no friends in the Shia-dominated government of Nouri al-Maliki in Baghdad and the U.S. was expediently allowing its Sunni friendships to fade away.

Over dessert one sticky afternoon, the SOI leader told me that he had recently been released from prison. He explained that the government had wanted him off the street in the run-up to a recent election, so that he would not use his political pull to get in the way of a Shia victory. The prison that held him was a secret one, he told me, under the control of some shadowy part of the U.S.-trained Iraqi security forces.

He had been tortured by agents of the Maliki government, supported by the United States in the interest of national security. Masked men bound him at the wrists and ankles and hung him upside-down. He said that they neither asked him any questions nor demanded any information. They whipped his testicles with a leather strap, then beat the bottoms of his feet and the area around his kidneys. They slapped him. They broke the bones in his right foot with a steel rod, a piece of rebar that would ordinarily have been used to reinforce concrete.

It was painful, he told me, but he had felt pain before. What truly wounded him was the feeling of utter helplessness. A man like himself, he stated with an echo of pride, had never felt helpless. His strength was his ability to control things, to stand up to enemies, to fight, and if necessary, to order men to their deaths. Now, he no longer slept well at night, was less interested in life and its activities, and felt little pleasure. He showed me his blackened toenails, as well as the caved in portion of his foot, which still bore a rod-like indentation with faint signs of metal grooves. When he paused and looked across the room, I thought I could almost see the movie running in his head.

Alone in the Dark

I encountered those two tortured men, who described their experiences so similarly, several years and thousands of miles apart. All they really had in common was being tortured and meeting me. They could, of course, have been lying about, or exaggerating, what had happened to them. I have no way to verify their stories because in neither country were their torturers ever brought to justice. One man was tortured because he was considered a threat to South Korea, the other to Iraq. Those “threatened” governments were among the company the U.S. keeps, and they were known torturers, regularly justifying such horrific acts, as we would also do in the first years of the twenty-first century, in the name of security. In our case, actual torture techniques would reportedly be demonstrated to some of the highest officials in the land in the White House itself, then “legalized,” and carried out in global “black sites” and foreign prisons.

A widely praised new movie about the assassination of Osama bin Laden, Zero Dark Thirty, opens with a series of torture scenes. The victims are various Muslims and al-Qaeda suspects, and the torturers are members of the U.S. government working for the CIA. We see a prisoner strapped to the wall, bloody, with his pants pulled down in front of a female CIA officer. We see another having water poured into his mouth and lungs until he wretches in agony (in what during the Middle Ages was bluntly called “the Water Torture,” later “the water cure,” or more recently “waterboarding”). We see men shoved forcibly into tiny confinement boxes that do not allow them to sit, stand, or lie down.

These are were among the techniques of torture “lawfully” laid out in a CIA Inspector General’s report, some of which would have been alarmingly familiar to the tortured men I spoke with, as they might be to Bradley Manning, held isolated, naked, and without sleep in U.S. military prisons in a bid to break his spirit.

The movie scenes are brutal, yet sanitized. As difficult to watch as the images are, they show nothing beyond the infliction of pain. Horrific as it may be, pain fades, bones mend, bruises heal. No, don’t for a second think that the essence of torture is physical pain, no matter what Zero Dark Thirty implies. If, in many cases, the body heals, mental wounds are a far more difficult matter. Memory persists.

The obsessive debate in this country over the effectiveness of torture rings eternally false: torture does indeed work. After all, it’s not just about eliciting information – sometimes, as in the case of the two men I met, it’s not about information at all. Torture is, however, invariably about shame and vengeance, humiliation, power, and control. We’re just slapping you now, but we control you and who knows what will happen next, what we’re capable of? “You lie to me, I hurt you,” says a CIA torturer in Zero Dark Thirty to his victim. The torture victim is left to imagine what form the hurt will take and just how severe it will be, almost always in the process assuming responsibility for creating his own terror. Yes, torture “works” – to destroy people.

Khalid Sheik Mohammed, accused 9/11 “mastermind,” was waterboarded 183 times. Al-Jazeera journalist Sami al-Haj spent six years in the Guantanamo Bay prison, stating, “They used dogs on us, they beat me, sometimes they hung me from the ceiling and didn’t allow me to sleep for six days.” Brandon Neely, a U.S. military policeman and former Guantanamo guard, watched a medic there beat an inmate he was supposed to treat. CIA agents tortured a German citizen, a car salesman named Khaled el-Masri, who was picked up in a case of mistaken identity, sodomizing, shackling, and beating him, holding him in total sensory deprivation, as Macedonian state police looked on, so the European Court of Human Rights found last week.

Others, such as the Court of Human Rights or the Senate Intelligence Committee, may give us glimpses into the nightmare of official American policy in the first years of this century. Still, our president refuses to look backward and fully expose the deeds of that near-decade to sunlight; he refuses to truly look forward and unambiguously renounce forever the use of anything that could be seen as an “enhanced interrogation technique.” Since he also continues to support robustly the precursors to torture – the “extraordinary rendition” of captured terror suspects to allied countries that are perfectly happy to torture them and indefinite detention by decree – we cannot fully understand what men like the Korean poet and the Iraqi tribal leader already know on our behalf: we are torturers and unless we awaken to confront the nightmare of what we are continuing to become, it will eventually transform and so consume us.

Close

To stay on top of important articles like these, sign up to receive the latest updates from TomDispatch.com here.

Peter Van Buren, a 24-year veteran Foreign Service Officer at the State Department, spent a year in Iraq leading two Provincial Reconstruction Teams. Now in Washington and a TomDispatch regular, he writes about Iraq, the Middle East, and U.S. diplomacy at his blog, We Meant Well. Following the publication of his book We Meant Well: How I Helped Lose the Battle for the Hearts and Minds of the Iraqi People (The American Empire Project, Metropolitan Books) in 2011, the Department of State began termination proceedings, reassigning him to a make-work position and stripping him of his security clearance and diplomatic credentials. Through the efforts of the Government Accountability Project and the ACLU, Van Buren will instead retire from the State Department with his full benefits of service in late September. We Meant Well has recently been published in paperback. Van Buren is currently working on a second book, about the decline of the blue-collar middle class in America and the roots of the “99 percent.”MORE PETER VAN BUREN.

EU Ministers to Create New World Order Bank

0

Luis Miranda,  theintelhub.com |

Contributed by The Real Agenda

Ministers of Economy and Finance of the European Union reached an agreement early Thursday on the legal framework that will allow Europe to create a single banking supervisor.

The pact is the first step towards joining the euro zone bank and comes hours before the EU summit on Thursday, which will ratify the commitment.

It is expected that the bank becomes operational in March 2014.

During the hours leading up to the agreement, the main hurdle was the distribution of power and scope of the supervising entity, which as explained in previous reports published during 2012, will become the economic and financial beast the bankers have always dreamed about.

Germany wanted to exempt regional banks and savings banks from the control of the supervisor, while France, like Spain, defended the institution to supervise all institutions without exception.

The bank union is full of technicalities, but in reality it comes down to one detail: who has the power.

Germany has convinced others that the ECB will only oversee the nationalized banks and the largest institutions; those with assets in excess of 30,000 million or 20% of GDP, about 100 entities, to leave others in the hands of national supervisors.

Although initially it was thought that the supervisor could only have the power to control, at any given time, any entity in difficulty, Germany blocked that option, leaving out of the ECB’s orbit Länder banks, which are supposedly loaded up with toxic assets.

These banks will remain under the supervision of the German Bundesbank.

Germany also imposes a watered down solution for the common guarantee fund (consisting simply of standardized national funds) and a considerable delay to the bank resolution fund (a mechanism to close banks if necessary), which at some point could be a form of mutualisation of euro problems to be done through back door deals.

And almost everything else gets delayed from the original schedule, against the advice of Italy, France and especially Spain, the country most affected by the financial cliff.

The bankers are already salivating due to the agreement. “Historic agreement on the supervisor!” said the European Commissioner for Internal Market and Financial Services, Michel Barnier, after 14 hours of meetings.

Read more

The Illusion Of Democracy: Liberal Journalism, Wikileaks And Climate Deceptions

0

David Cromwell, Media Lens |

In an era of permanent war, economic meltdown and climate ‘weirding’, we need all the champions of truth and justice that we can find. But where are they? What happened to trade unions, the green movement, human rights groups, campaigning newspapers, peace activists, strong-minded academics, progressive voices? We are awash in state and corporate propaganda, with the ‘liberal’ media a key cog in the apparatus. We are hemmed in by the powerful forces of greed, profit and control. We are struggling to get by, never mind flourish as human beings. We are subject to increasingly insecure, poorly-paid and unfulfilling employment, the slashing of the welfare system, the privatisation of the National Health Service, the erosion of civil rights, and even the criminalisation of protest and dissent.

The pillars of a genuinely liberal society have been so weakened, if not destroyed, that we are essentially living under a system of corporate totalitarianism. In his 2010 book, Death of the Liberal Class, the former New York Times reporter Chris Hedges notes that:

‘The anemic liberal class continues to assert, despite ample evidence to the contrary, that human freedom and equality can be achieved through the charade of electoral politics and constitutional reform. It refuses to acknowledge the corporate domination of traditional democratic channels for ensuring broad participatory power.’ (p. 8)

Worse, the liberal class has: ‘lent its voice to hollow acts of political theater, and the pretense that democratic debate and choice continue to exist.’  (pp. 9-10)

This pretense afflicts all the major western ‘democracies’, including the UK, and it is a virus that permeates corporate news reporting, not least the BBC. For example, the BBC’s political editor Nick Robinson has a new book out with the cruelly apt title, ‘Live From Downing Street’. Why apt? Because Downing Street is indeed the centre of the political editor’s worldview. As he explains in the book’s foreword:

‘My job is to report on what those in power are thinking and doing and on those who attempt to hold them to account in Parliament.’ (Added emphasis).

Several observations spring to mind:

1. How does Nick Robinson know what powerful politicians are thinking?

2. Does he believe that any discrepancy between what they really think and what they tell him and his media colleagues is inconsequential?

3. Why does the BBC’s political editor focus so heavily on what happens in Parliament? What about the wider spectrum of opinion outside Parliament, so often improperly represented by MPs, if at all? What about attempts in the wider society to hold power to account, away from Westminster corridors and the feeble, Whip-constrained platitudes of party careerists? No wonder Robinson might have regrets over Iraq, as he later concedes when he says:

‘The build-up to the invasion of Iraq is the point in my career when I have most regretted not pushing harder and not asking more questions.’ (p. 332).

4. Thus, right from the start of his book Robinson concedes unwittingly that his journalism cannot, by definition, be ‘balanced’.

But, of course, corporate media professionals have long propped up the illusion that the public is offered an ‘impartial’ selection of facts, opinions and perspectives from which any individual can derive a well-informed world view. Simply put, ‘impartiality’ is what the establishment says is impartial.

The journalist and broadcaster Brian Walden once said: ‘The demand for impartiality is too jealously promoted by the political parties themselves. They count balance in seconds and monitor it with stopwatches.’ (Quoted, Tim Luckhurst, ‘Time to take sides’, Independent, July 1, 2003). This nonsense suggests that media ‘impartiality’ means that one major political party receives identical, or at least similar, coverage to another. But when all the major political parties have almost identical views on all the important issues, barring small tactical differences, how can this possibly be deemed to constitute genuine impartiality?

The major political parties offer no real choice. They all represent essentially the same interests crushing any moves towards meaningful public participation in the shaping of policy; or towards genuine concern for all members of society, particularly the weak and the vulnerable.

The essential truth was explained by political scientist Thomas Ferguson in his book Golden Rule (University of Chicago Press, 1995). When major backers of political parties and elections agree on an issue ­— such as international ‘free trade’ agreements, maintaining a massive ‘defence’ budget or refusing to make the necessary cuts in greenhouse gas emissions — then the parties will not compete on that issue, even though the public might desire a real alternative.

US media analyst Robert McChesney observes:

‘In many respects we now live in a society that is only formally democratic, as the great mass of citizens have minimal say on the major public issues of the day, and such issues are scarcely debated at all in any meaningful sense in the electoral arena.’ (McChesney, Rich Media, Poor Democracy, The New Press, 2000, p. 260).

As the Washington Post once noted, inadvertently echoing Ferguson’s Golden Rule, modern democracy works best when the political ‘parties essentially agree on most of the major issues’. The Financial Times put it more bluntly: capitalist democracy can best succeed when it focuses on ‘the process of depoliticizing the economy.’ (Cited by McChesney, ibid., p. 112).

The public recognises much of this for what it is. Opinion polls indicate the distrust they feel for politicians and business leaders, as well as the journalists who all too frequently channel uncritical reporting on politics and business. A 2009 survey by the polling company Ipsos MORI found that only 13 per cent of the British public trust politicians to tell the truth: the lowest rating in 25 years. Business leaders were trusted by just 25 per cent of the public, while journalists languished at 22 per cent.

And yet recall that when Lord Justice Leveson published his long-awaited report into ‘the culture, practices and ethics of the British press’ on November 29, he made the ludicrous assertion that ‘the British press — I repeat, all of it — serves the country very well for the vast majority of the time.’

That tells us much about the nature and value of his government-appointed inquiry.

Read more

The Fiscal Cliff Is A Diversion: The Derivatives Tsunami and the Dollar Bubble

0

Paul Craig Roberts, rinf.com |

The “fiscal cliff” is another hoax designed to shift the attention of policymakers, the media, and the attentive public, if any, from huge problems to small ones.

The fiscal cliff is automatic spending cuts and tax increases in order to reduce the deficit by an insignificant amount over ten years if Congress takes no action itself to cut spending and to raise taxes. In other words, the “fiscal cliff” is going to happen either way.

The problem from the standpoint of conventional economics with the fiscal cliff is that it amounts to a double-barrel dose of austerity delivered to a faltering and recessionary economy. Ever since John Maynard Keynes, most economists have understood that austerity is not the answer to recession or depression.

Regardless, the fiscal cliff is about small numbers compared to the Derivatives Tsunami or to bond market and dollar market bubbles.

The fiscal cliff requires that the federal government cut spending by $1.3 trillion over ten years. The Guardian reports that means the federal deficit has to be reduced about $109 billion per year or 3 percent of the current budget. http://www.guardian.co.uk/world/2012/nov/27/fiscal-cliff-explained-spending-cuts-tax-hikes More simply, just divide $1.3 trillion by ten and it comes to $130 billion per year. This can be done by simply taking a three month vacation each year from Washington’s wars.

The Derivatives Tsunami and the bond and dollar bubbles are of a different magnitude.
Last June 5 in “Collapse At Hand” http://www.paulcraigroberts.org/2012/06/05/collapse-at-hand/ I pointed out that according to the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency’s fourth quarter report for 2011, about 95% of the $230 trillion in US derivative exposure was held by four US financial institutions: JP Morgan Chase Bank, Bank of America, Citibank, and Goldman Sachs.

Prior to financial deregulation, essentially the repeal of the Glass-Steagall Act and the non-regulation of derivatives—a joint achievement of the Clinton administration and the Republican Party—Chase, Bank of America, and Citibank were commercial banks that took depositors’ deposits and made loans to businesses and consumers and purchased Treasury bonds with any extra reserves.

With the repeal of Glass-Steagall these honest commercial banks became gambling casinos, like the investment bank, Goldman Sachs, betting not only their own money but also depositors money on uncovered bets on interest rates, currency exchange rates, mortgages, and prices of commodities and equities.

These bets soon exceeded many times not only US GDP but world GDP. Indeed, the gambling bets of JP Morgan Chase Bank alone are equal to world Gross Domestic Product.

According to the first quarter 2012 report from the Comptroller of the Currency, total derivative exposure of US banks has fallen insignificantly from the previous quarter to $227 trillion. The exposure of the 4 US banks accounts for almost of all of the exposure and is many multiples of their assets or of their risk capital.

The Derivatives Tsunami is the result of the handful of fools and corrupt public officials who deregulated the US financial system. Today merely four US banks have derivative exposure equal to 3.3 times world Gross Domestic Product. When I was a US Treasury official, such a possibility would have been considered beyond science fiction.

Hopefully, much of the derivative exposure somehow nets out so that the net exposure, while still larger than many countries’ GDPs, is not in the hundreds of trillions of dollars. Still, the situation is so worrying to the Federal Reserve that after announcing a third round of quantitative easing, that is, printing money to buy bonds—both US Treasuries and the banks’ bad assets—the Fed has just announced that it is doubling its QE 3 purchases.

In other words, the entire economic policy of the United States is dedicated to saving four banks that are too large to fail. The banks are too large to fail only because deregulation permitted financial concentration, as if the Anti-Trust Act did not exist.

The purpose of QE is to keep the prices of debt, which supports the banks’ bets, high. The Federal Reserve claims that the purpose of its massive monetization of debt is to help the economy with low interest rates and increased home sales. But the Fed’s policy is hurting the economy by depriving savers, especially the retired, of interest income, forcing them to draw down their savings. Real interest rates paid on CDs, money market funds, and bonds are lower than the rate of inflation.

Moreover, the money that the Fed is creating in order to bail out the four banks is making holders of dollars, both at home and abroad, nervous. If investors desert the dollar and its exchange value falls, the price of the financial instruments that the Fed’s purchases are supporting will also fall, and interest rates will rise. The only way the Fed could support the dollar would be to raise interest rates. In that event, bond holders would be wiped out, and the interest charges on the government’s debt would explode.

With such a catastrophe following the previous stock and real estate collapses, the remains of people’s wealth would be wiped out. Investors have been deserting equities for “safe” US Treasuries. This is why the Fed can keep bond prices so high that the real interest rate is negative.

The hyped threat of the fiscal cliff is immaterial compared to the threat of the derivatives overhang and the threat to the US dollar and bond market of the Federal Reserve’s commitment to save four US banks.

Once again, the media and its master, the US government, hide the real issues behind a fake one. The fiscal cliff has become the way for the Republicans to save the country from bankruptcy by destroying the social safety net put in place during the 1930s, supplemented by Lyndon Johnson’s “Great Society” in the mid-1960s.

Now that there are no jobs, now that real family incomes have been stagnant or declining for decades, and now that wealth and income have been concentrated in few hands is the time, Republicans say, to destroy the social safety net so that we don’t fall over the fiscal cliff.

In human history, such a policy usually produces revolt and revolution, which is what the US so desperately needs.

Perhaps our stupid and corrupt policymakers are doing us a favor after all.

Washington Targets Syria and Iran

0

Stephen Lendman, rinf.com |

US policies threaten both nations. Doing so imperils the region and beyond. Syria’s now in focus. Iran’s turn awaits.

What’s likely should terrify everyone wanting America’s imperium defeated and peace restored. Doing so remains a distant dream. Potential worst of times loom.

On December 17, the Syrian Arab News Agency (SANA) cited Syrian Vice President Farouk al-Sharaa saying continuing armed conflict favors neither side.

Opposition elements can’t topple Assad without creating endless violence and chaos, he stressed.

He urged conflict resolution and national unity. “We are not protecting some particular person or regime. We are fighting for the very existence of Syria,” he explained.

Elements committing crimes in Syria, and nations supporting them, lost all national, moral, and humane sense, he said. Government forces are duty-bound to restore and preserve public safety.

The longer conflict continues, the harder peaceful resolution becomes. He has no simple solutions to propose. Both sides must commit to find them.

Washington, key NATO partners, Israel, and regional allies maintain hidebound policies. They support continued conflict. They want Syria destroyed. They want Assad replaced by pro-Western extremists. Most Syrians deplore them.

He thanked Syria’s real friends. He named Iran, Hezbollah’s Hasan Nasrallah, Russia and China.

On December 17, Voice of Russia (VoR) discussed a December 17-18 Rome conference. More than 30 internal and external interests are involved.

Moscow hopes discussions may smooth the way for constructive conflict-ending dialogue. Hope springs eternal. Fulfillment remains distant.

The National Coordination Committee for Democratic Change (NCC) organized the conference. Its members favor peaceful conflict resolution. They reject continuing violence. They deplore outside elements pursuing violence and destruction.

Moscow Middle East expert Said Gafurov is cautiously optimistic. The conference may “contribute to resolving the Syrian gridlock,” he said.

It’s “an important step because it may help participants to sit down for parleys with the government.”

“It’s hard to say whether the conference will see any breakthroughs, but I don’t rule out that the gathering will at least pave the way for isolating irreconcilable militants.”

At the same time, FSA elements “want power, not democracy.” They’re “loath to consider the fact that at least 60 percent of the Syrian population supports” Assad.

After many months of conflict, the vast majority likely support him. He’s their last line of defense. Without him, they’re at the mercy of Washington-recruited Islamofascist killers.

They want their will forcibly imposed. They reject peace talks. They take orders from Washington. America’s in charge. US officials plot what type future they plan for Syrians.

Moscow-based Institute for Middle Eastern and Israeli Studies head Yevgeny Satanovsky added:

“Some opposition activists are really poised for talks free from foreign interference.”

“Most opposition figures, including those from the Free Syrian Army (FSA), are oriented towards outside forces and the fall of the Assad regime.”

“They call for the physical liquidation of President Assad and his family members, as well as representatives of religious and confessional minorities whom they describe as ‘heretics.’ ”

Elements in Rome hope fruitful discussion will be prelude for a late December Cairo conference. Some see a chance to open dialogue between Assad and moderate opposition forces wanting peace.

On December 16, SANA quoted Nasrallah saying:

“Whoever thinks that the armed opposition in Syria is capable of resolving things militarily on the ground is mistaken.

Insurgents can’t emerge victorious, he added. Western nations lured Al Qaeda and other extremist fighters to Syria. They sent them on a fool’s errand.

“I warned Al-Qaida. The Americans and the European countries and Arab and Islamic countries have set a trap for you in Syria, and opened for you a battlefield so you come from across the world to be killed and to kill each other.”

Days earlier, Russia denied one of its senior diplomats said Assad is losing control of his country.

Deputy Foreign Minister Mikhail Bogdanov was misquoted. Media scoundrels claimed Moscow believed he was doomed. His real assessment was:

“The fighting will become even more intense, and (Syria) will lose tens of thousands and, perhaps, hundreds of thousands of civilians.”

“If such a price for the removal of the president seems acceptable to you, what can we do? We, of course, consider it absolutely unacceptable.”

Russia’s Foreign Ministry said Bogdanov “has not made any statements or (given) special interviews recently.” His comments were made in a recent speech.

On December 17, senior Iranian lawmaker Gholam Ali Haddad Adel condemned Washington and Western allies. He denounced their double standard hypocrisy on Iran’s nuclear program.

“If you are concerned about (it), why do you support the Zionist regime which does not abide by UN resolutions,” he asked?

Tehran fully complies with NPT provisions, he stressed. Israel spurns them. No evidence whatever suggests an Iranian nuclear weapons program. High US, other Western, and Israeli officials know but won’t say.

Israel’s had a powerful arsenal for decades. It’s the region’s only nuclear power. It threatens to use them if endangered. It refuses inspections.

Iran’s UN ambassador, Mohammad Khazayee, earlier denounced Israel’s refusal to join NPT and allow IAEA inspections.

“Iran considers Israel as the prime suspect in the field of possessing nuclear weapons and not abiding by the NPT. The international community should exert pressure on the Zionist regime to join the NPT,” he added.

On December 17, Haaretz/Reuters headlined “Iran FM: Tehran, world powers must end impasse over nuclear program,” saying:

FM Ali Akbar Salehi said both sides “reached a conclusion that they must exit the current stalemate.” More talks are needed. Serious ones. He expects them. He’s not sure when.

Washington obstructed earlier P5+1 talks. Successful future ones depends on cutting that gordian knot. They also depend on recognizing Iran’s right to pursue nuclear power generation peacefully.

Its program replicates dozens of other countries. Iran alone is criticized. Doing so is red herring cover for regime change. Tehran wants its rights respected. It wants lawless sanctions ended.

Its sovereignty is inviolable. It won’t surrender to Washington, other Western nations and Israel.

Reports suggest possible new talks early next year. Unless conducted constructively, they’ll fail like earlier ones.

On December 15, Mossad-connected DEBKAfile (DF) claimed Washington and Tehran held “secret one-on-one” talks. They failed.

Resolution isn’t possible as long as America remains obstructionist. DF quoted senior Iranian negotiator Mostafa Dolatyar saying talks went nowhere.

Washington demands Iran relinquish its legitimate right to enrich uranium to 20%. He added that world powers “made certain connections with purely technical issues and something purely political.”

As long as this attitude holds, resolution isn’t possible.

DF said US/Iranian talks were held in Lausanne, Switzerland. They began on December 1. Dolatyar heads Iran’s Foreign Ministry Political and International Studies think tank.

He’s also a senior nuclear negotiator. His remarks carry weight. They’re authorized by the highest level’s of Iran’s government.

DF cited a December 5 Wall Street Journal article. It’s titled “From Bushehr to the Bomb.” It attracted little attention. It deserved none.

It said Washington began monitoring Bushehr more closely “after Iran had unexpectedly removed fuel rods containing between 22 and 220 pounds of weapons-grade plutonium.”

America earlier claimed Bushehr posed little proliferation risk.

At the same time, uranium isn’t the only bomb-making material. “Iran has long been at work on a plutonium-breeding heavy-water reactor in the city of Arak.”

Tehran says it’s for research. Bushehr spent fuel rods are supposed to be returned to Russia for storage. In October, they were removed. Iran says they were returned to the core reactor.

The Journal’s bottom line is that Iran produced enough plutonium for “24 Nagasaki-type bombs.” No evidence whatever suggests Iranian nuclear materials of any type are intended for bomb-making.

DF headlined the story. “Tehran can easily manufacture plutonium bombs without building a large” reactor like Arak. It cited baseless threats repeated many times before. They long ago wore thin.

DF, Netanyahu, other Israeli hardliners, and US ones never quit. Their claims lack credibility. No evidence supports them.

At the same time, nuclear expert Helen Caldicott calls all nuclear plants atom bomb factories. A 1,000-megawatt reactor produces 500 pounds of plutonium annually.

Ten pounds can produce a bomb able to destroy a large city. At least 53 countries operate nuclear reactors. Most do solely for power generation and other peaceful purposes.

Regional nations alone include Algeria, Egypt, Niger, Nigeria, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Sudan, UAE, and, of course, Israel and Iran.

Tehran alone is called threatening. Israel’s menace is ignored. So are Iran’s peaceful intentions. Having the ability to produce bomb-related material falls way short of proving intent. DF and the Journal left that unexplained.

A Final Comment

Over the weekend, reports said Pentagon authorities quietly recalled the USS Eisenhower battle group and USS Iwo Jima Amphibious ready group with 2,000 marines on board.

On December 19, they’re expected home in Norfolk, VA. They’ve been stationed for weeks off Syria’s coast. An unnamed flight deck problem was named. Repairs are needed.

One CVN (carrier/fixed wing-vice rotary wings/nuclear) remains in the Gulf.

The USS Nimitz was scheduled to replace the Eisenhower in January. It needs two month’s work for flight deck resurfacing. The Roosevelt will be back in service soon. Several months are required to return three carrier groups to the Gulf.

Offensive Patriot missiles expected in place in January will replace sea power capability. Washington also has extensive air power nearby. So do Turkey and Israel. French and British warships have their own.

Pulling US naval power for now may delay US Syrian plans. It’s hard knowing for sure. Continued conflict to oust Assad continues. Post-holiday season, what’s next may be clearer.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

27 Items Every Prepper Should Carry While Traveling

0
Gaye Levy, Activist Post | 

This is the time of year when families travel to visit friends and relatives near and far. When taking a road trip, it is easy to throw a bug-out-bag and extra food and clothing into the trunk of your car but what if you are traveling by air? Not only do you have those pesky baggage weight limits to deal with, but you also have the scrutiny and probing eyes of the TSA to avoid. Can you imagine what might happen if you show up at the airport with a fully stocked survival kit? I am being just a wee bit facetious but these days, you can never be too sure what will happen if someone decides to label you as a prepper.

TSA notwithstanding, today I would like to share a reminder that no matter where you go, you should include some basic preps in your carry-on or in your check-through luggage so that no matter what, you will be prepared to deal with bumps along your journey.

Here in list form, and in no particular order, is a list of vacation and travel preparedness items to take along on your next trip.

Items Every Prepper Should Carry While Traveling

Instagram to sell users’ photos to advertisers without consent

0

Instagram, the photo-sharing site owned by Facebook, has made changes to its privacy policy which means that the company can sell its users’ photos to advertisers without their consent.

The updated privacy policy also gives Instagram permission to share information about its users with Facebook and affiliates.

Users are warned that unless they delete their account by 16 January, they cannot opt out of the changes.

The new policy states: “We may share your information as well as information from tools like cookies, log files, and device identifiers and location data with organisations that help us provide the service to you… (and) third-party advertising partners.

“To help us deliver interesting paid or sponsored content or promotions, you agree that a business may pay us to display your username, likeness, photos, in connection with paid or sponsored content or promotions, without any compensation to you.”

Source

SpongeBob app pulled over children’s privacy complaint

0

A SpongeBob app became the latest game to be pulled following a complaint it had violated children’s privacy rights.

Nickelodeon removed SpongeBob Diner Dash from Apple’s iTunes app store after a US advocacy group contacted the Federal Trade Commission (FTC).

The Center for Digital Democracy said children’s email addresses had been collected without parental consent.

Last week another children’s app, Mobbles, was temporarily pulled after the CDD filed a similar complaint.

The Washington DC-based group urged the FTC to investigate Nickelodeon and mobile game-maker PlayFirst’s privacy practices.

It said their “deceptive” mobile marketing technologies had violated the Children’s Online Privacy Protection Act (COPPA).

“The SpongeBob Diner Dash game asks children to provide a wide range of personal information, including full name, email address, and other online contact information, without providing notice to parents or obtaining prior parental consent, as required by the Children’s Online Privacy Protection Act,” a statement said.

“Nor does the app provide an adequate description of the personal information it collects or how it is used”.

The advocacy group said the app’s use of technologies such as unique device identifiers (UDIDs) allowed companies to send customised messages to individual children in the form of “push notifications” that required online contact information – considered personal information under the COPPA rules.

Nickelodeon was unable to be reached for comment.

The app is free to download, but is designed to encourage users to buy virtual “coins” that can be spent on items for SpongeBob like shoes or a frying pan, or to buy upgraded versions of the game.

Need for informed choices

Laura Moy, a lawyer at Georgetown Law’s Institute for Public Representation, which prepared the complaint on behalf of the Center for Digitial Democracy (CDD), said: “It is disturbing to learn that a well known children’s brand such as Nickelodeon is flouting basic privacy protections for children. Even more troubling, Nickelodeon tells parents that it complies with the law protecting children’s privacy when it does not.”

Last week the game Mobbles, in which children collect and care for virtual pets, was temporarily pulled from the Apple App store and Google Android Play store.

The FTC last week published a report on mobile apps for children that showed parents were not being provided with information about what data an app collected, who would have access to that data, and how it would be used.

The report said that nearly 60% of the apps examined by the FTC were transmitting information about a user to an advertiser or other third party.

FTC Chairman Jon Leibowitz said: “While we think most companies have the best intentions when it comes to protecting kids’ privacy, we haven’t seen any progress when it comes to making sure parents have the information they need to make informed choices about apps for their kids.”

“In fact, our study shows that kids’ apps siphon an alarming amount of information from mobile devices without disclosing this fact to parents,” he added.

“All of the companies in the mobile app space, especially the gatekeepers of the app stores, need to do a better job. We’ll do another survey in the future and we will expect to see improvement.”

Source

Government admits they WERE snooping on people’s homes

0

Communities and Local Government minister Eric Pickles has confirmed that there was a ‘big brother’ spying operation into people’s properties under the last Labour government. It is not clear when the surveillance stopped.

Media stories which claimed that people’s homes would in future be taxed on amenities such as their views and gardens, had previously been attacked as sensationalist.

However, the confirmation, contained in a ministerial statement by Pickles on changes to planning proposals, says that snoopers were indeed at work.

At the very end, his statement says: “… we have also discontinued the revaluation database and ceased the intrusive collection of data on the scenic views, gardens and patios of families’ homes.”

The Government announced in the autumn of 2010 that it would not carry out a council tax revaluation in the life of this parliament.

At that time, Pickles said: “A local authority breakdown of the property attribute information collected on people’s homes, including number of bedrooms, patios, value of significant gardens and scenic views, has also been published in the interests of transparency to make the public aware of the datasets that have been gathered under the last government.

“In addition, an independent data protection audit of the Valuation Office Agency’s council tax database is to be carried out to make sure people’s privacy is protected when the agency assesses properties and stores data. This is in keeping with the Coalition’s desire to defend civil liberties and to restore the rights of individuals.”

The Valuation Office Agency had signed a contract with Rightmove to gather the data. See the link at the end of this story for an earlier report on EAT.

In the rest of his latest statement, Pickles says that ‘consequential improvements’ will be abandoned.

These ‘consequential improvements’, dubbed a conservatory tax, would have required home owners improving their properties, for example by adding a conservatory, to upgrade the rest of their property in terms of energy performance.

Pickles said that research by the Energy Saving Trust showed that consequential improvements would have put off four in ten households from going ahead with improvements.

The statement refers to other reforms, promising more details soon. It is understood that the Government may also have back-tracked on allowing large new extensions to be built without the need for planning permission.

Incidentally, when you look at the link — it’s interesting to see the posts. The earlier ones stick to the story, but the others go off-piste somewhat.

http://tinyurl.com/bwo3jjn

Source

Verizon turns voyeur. A Peeping Tom watching me, watching you, watching us

0

One of the most outrageous attempts by any company or country anywhere (including North Korea, Iran and Stalinist Russia) to spy on private citizens has been made public in the US after the Patent and Trademark Office published a Verizon patent application that would see motion detectors, infrared cameras, microphones and other detection devices embedded in personal digital video recorders (DVRs) to target advertising at individuals. By Martyn Warwick.

More Big Brother stuff looms on the horizon. It may still be some way off but the time to start worrying is now. Verizon has filed a patent application for something it calls “Detection Zone”, a system that uses motion detectors, infrared cameras microphones and other surveillance devices embedded in personal digital video recorders (DVRs) to eavesdrop on the private conversations (including fixed line and mobile telephone calls) and actions of private individuals within their own homes and use that data to target advertising at them.

According to Verizon’s filing, anything happening within the range of the Detection Zone will be picked up, analysed and used to send ads “appropriate” to any given situation. For example, were the system to decide that raised voices and the sound of smashing crockery to be evidence of marital discord, it would send out ads for marriage guidance counseling. Fortunately it wouldn’t happen, there’d be an teapot put through the TV screen long before the ad arrived.

Verizon’s patent application is called “Methods and Systems for Presenting an Advertisement Associated with an Ambient Action of a User” and was actually filed more than a year and a half ago. The company kept very quiet about it but all was eventually revealed because under US law the Patent & Trademark Office has to publish details of all patent applications within 18 months of them being filed,

The patent application says, “If detection facility detects one or more words spoken by a user (e.g., while talking to another user within the same room or on the telephone), the advertising facility may utilize the one or more words spoken by the user to search for and/or select an advertisement associated with the one or more words.”

The system would also sense if a person is eating, exercising, eating, laughing, singing or playing a musical instrument and target ads based on activities and implied moods and emotional states. The system can also determine when there are pets in a room as well as inanimate objects such as furniture, pictures and ornaments.

But back to Verizon’s patent application: “If detection facility detects that a user is playing with a dog, advertising facility may select an advertisement associated with dogs (e.g., a dog food commercial, a flea treatment commercial, etc.).” Good luck with getting the goldfish to spend a bit more.

But never mind, you can advertise to them every five minutes and it’ll be an entirely new experience for them.

Verizon’s far from altruistic intent is to provide “the user with advertising content that is relevant to the user’s current situation and/or likely to be of interest to the user.” Thus if the sensor system detected by noises and movement that a couple might be getting a bit fruity with one another on the sofa in front of the TV in the lounge they would be targeted with ads for “a romantic getaway vacation, a commercial for a contraceptive, an advertisement for flowers or romantic movies.” Utterly sickening, utterly vile and utterly wrong.

And apart from the potential for such foul intrusion into a person’s sex life, the Detection Zone technology would also be able to work out if an individual is using a mobile device and then communicate with the laptop, tablet or smartphone to determine if the person is “browsing the Web, drafting an email, reviewing a document, reading an e-book, etc.” What’s more it could grab a sample of the content being access and pass it on up the line and across the ether.

The Verizon patent application says, “If detection facility detects that the user is holding a mobile device, advertising facility may be configured to communicate with the mobile device to direct the mobile device to present the selected advertisement. Accordingly, not only may the selected advertisement be specifically targeted to the user, but it may also be delivered right to the user’s hands.” Yeah, whether the user wants it or not.

You may think that this can’t get any worse, but it can. Consumers would also be bombarded with ads based on “one or more physical attributes” which means things like height, build, length of or absence of hair, facial features (ears, nose teeth, goitres, warts, zits), tone of voice and accent. Not only will the system recognise these it will also be able to tell if and what you are eating and drinking.

Beth Givens, the director of the Californa-based, not-for-profit Privacy Rights Clearing House commented. “Of all the privacy-intrusive technology developments that I’ve become aware of in recent years, this one is at the extreme end of the scale. One of the things that troubles me most about this patent, aside from the extraordinary privacy-invasiveness of it, is that there are engineers at Verizon sitting around thinking up such things. It’s quite obvious that for this to have gotten to the patent-filing stage, Verizon engineers have been allowed – even encouraged – to take privacy-intrusion to the max, all in the name of advertising dollars.”

In response a Verizon mouthpiece, having had the compulsory corporate irony-bypass and spin-doctoring so fast then he’s corkscrewing himself down to the earth’s core as we speak said, “Verizon has a well-established track record of respecting its customers’ privacy and protecting their personal information.”

Fortunately the US Patent Office has had the gumption to try to nip this one in the bud and has rejected the Verizon application. However the judgement is a “non-final Office action” meaning that the patent file has been sent back to Verizon for it “to reconsider”.

You couldn’t make this stuff up. Well, actually George Orwell did. The book is called 1984.

Source

RINF Video: Corrupt British Government buys Silence on Torture

RINF News reports that the British government is set to pay out millions of pounds in an attempt to circumvent the wheel of justice and conceal its crimes against humanity by paying off a Libyan dissident and his young family, who were kidnapped by MI6, returned to Libya and subsequently tortured.

The Woes of an American Drone Operator

A soldier sets out to graduate at the top of his class. He succeeds, and he becomes a drone pilot working with a special unit of the United States Air Force in New Mexico. He kills dozens of people. But then, one day, he realizes that he can’t do it anymore.

Nicola Abé |

For more than five years, Brandon Bryant worked in an oblong, windowless container about the size of a trailer, where the air-conditioning was kept at 17 degrees Celsius (63 degrees Fahrenheit) and, for security reasons, the door couldn’t be opened. Bryant and his coworkers sat in front of 14 computer monitors and four keyboards. When Bryant pressed a button in New Mexico, someone died on the other side of the world.

The container is filled with the humming of computers. It’s the brain of a drone, known as a cockpit in Air Force parlance. But the pilots in the container aren’t flying through the air. They’re just sitting at the controls.

Bryant was one of them, and he remembers one incident very clearly when a Predator drone was circling in a figure-eight pattern in the sky above Afghanistan, more than 10,000 kilometers (6,250 miles) away. There was a flat-roofed house made of mud, with a shed used to hold goats in the crosshairs, as Bryant recalls. When he received the order to fire, he pressed a button with his left hand and marked the roof with a laser. The pilot sitting next to him pressed the trigger on a joystick, causing the drone to launch a Hellfire missile. There were 16 seconds left until impact.

“These moments are like in slow motion,” he says today. Images taken with an infrared camera attached to the drone appeared on his monitor, transmitted by satellite, with a two-to-five-second time delay.

With seven seconds left to go, there was no one to be seen on the ground. Bryant could still have diverted the missile at that point. Then it was down to three seconds. Bryant felt as if he had to count each individual pixel on the monitor. Suddenly a child walked around the corner, he says.

Second zero was the moment in which Bryant’s digital world collided with the real one in a village between Baghlan and Mazar-e-Sharif.

Bryant saw a flash on the screen: the explosion. Parts of the building collapsed. The child had disappeared. Bryant had a sick feeling in his stomach.

“Did we just kill a kid?” he asked the man sitting next to him.

“Yeah, I guess that was a kid,” the pilot replied.

“Was that a kid?” they wrote into a chat window on the monitor.

Then, someone they didn’t know answered, someone sitting in a military command center somewhere in the world who had observed their attack. “No. That was a dog,” the person wrote.

They reviewed the scene on video. A dog on two legs?

Invisible Warfare

When Bryant left the container that day, he stepped directly into America: dry grasslands stretching to the horizon, fields and the smell of liquid manure. Every few seconds, a light on the radar tower at the Cannon Air Force Base flashed in the twilight. There was no war going on there.

Modern warfare is as invisible as a thought, deprived of its meaning by distance. It is no unfettered war, but one that is controlled from small high-tech centers in various places in the world. The new (way of conducting) war is supposed to be more precise than the old one, which is why some call it “more humane.” It’s the war of an intellectual, a war United States President Barack Obama has promoted more than any of his predecessors.

In a corridor at the Pentagon where the planning for this war takes place, the walls are covered with dark wood paneling. The men from the Air Force have their offices here. A painting of a Predator, a drone on canvas, hangs next to portraits of military leaders. From the military’s perspective, no other invention has been as successful in the “war on terror” in recent years as the Predator.

The US military guides its drones from seven air bases in the United States, as well as locations abroad, including one in the East African nation of Djibouti. From its headquarters in Langley, Virginia, the CIA controls operations in Pakistan, Somalia and Yemen.

‘We Save Lives’

Colonel William Tart, a man with pale eyes and a clear image of the enemy, calls the drone a “natural extension of the distance.”

Until a few months ago, when he was promoted to head the US Air Force’s Remotely Piloted Aircraft (RPA) Task Force in Langley, Tart was a commander at the Creech Air Force Base in Nevada, near Las Vegas, where he headed drone operations. Whenever he flew drones himself, he kept a photo of his wife and three daughters pasted into the checklist next to the monitors.

He doesn’t like the word drone, because he says it implies that the vehicle has its own will or ego. He prefers to call them “remotely piloted aircraft,” and he points out that most flights are for gathering information. He talks about the use of drones on humanitarian missions after the earthquake in Haiti, and about the military successes in the war in Libya: how his team fired on a truck that was pointing rockets at Misrata, and how it chased the convoy in which former Libyan dictator Moammar Gadhafi and his entourage were fleeing. He describes how the soldiers on the ground in Afghanistan are constantly expressing their gratitude for the assistance from the air. “We save lives,” he says.

He doesn’t say as much about the targeted killing. He claims that during his two years as operations commander at Creech, he never saw any noncombatants die, and that the drones only fire at buildings when women and children are not in them. When asked about the chain of command, Tart mentions a 275-page document called 3-09.3. Essentially, it states that drone attacks must be approved, like any other attacks by the Air Force. An officer in the country where the operations take place has to approve them.

The use of the term “clinical war” makes him angry. It reminds him of the Vietnam veterans who accuse him of never having waded through the mud or smelled blood, and who say that he doesn’t know what he’s talking about.

That isn’t true, says Tart, noting that he often used the one-hour drive from work back to Las Vegas to distance himself from his job. “We watch people for months. We see them playing with their dogs or doing their laundry. We know their patterns like we know our neighbors’ patterns. We even go to their funerals.” It wasn’t always easy, he says.

One of the paradoxes of drones is that, even as they increase the distance to the target, they also create proximity. “War somehow becomes personal,” says Tart.

‘I Saw Men, Women and Children Die’

A yellow house stands on the outskirts of the small city of Missoula, Montana, against a background of mountains, forests and patches of fog. The ground is coated with the first snow of the season. Bryant, now 27, is sitting on the couch in his mother’s living room. He has since left the military and is now living back at home. He keeps his head shaved and has a three-day beard. “I haven’t been dreaming in infrared for four months,” he says with a smile, as if this were a minor victory for him.

Bryant completed 6,000 flight hours during his six years in the Air Force. “I saw men, women and children die during that time,” says Bryant. “I never thought I would kill that many people. In fact, I thought I couldn’t kill anyone at all.”

Read more

Watch what happens when Guns are banned in Australia

0

Youtube |

“Laws that forbid the carrying of arms… disarm only those who are neither inclined nor determined to commit crimes… Such laws make things worse for the assaulted and better for the assailants; they serve rather to encourage than to prevent homicides, for an unarmed man may be attacked with greater confidence than an armed man.”
~Thomas Jefferson

Propaganda War on Syria Rages

0

Stephen Lendman, rinf.com |

Propaganda wars precede hot ones. Conflicts and other forms of violence are glorified in the name of peace. Doublespeak duplicity claim it. Wars are waged to prevent it.

Ongoing ones assure more ahead. Unconscionable death counts rise. America, Israel, key NATO partners, and regional allies bear full responsibility. Humanity hangs in the balance.

Humanitarian intervention and responsibility to protect (R2P) mask ravaging one country after another. Slaughter and mass destruction are called liberating struggles.

Plunder is for economic development. Exploitation and dominance are called democracy building. Media scoundrels invert truth for public support.

When America goes to war or plans them, they march obediently in lockstep. Administration, congressional and Pentagon propaganda get reported as news and information.

Big Lies make headlines. They’re repeated ad nauseam. Media scoundrels are so addicted to lying, perhaps their employment contracts mandate misinformation, deceit and distortion while avoiding truth at all cost.

What better way to explain scoundrel journalism. Fundamental good reporting principles are spurned. Ethical standards are ignored.

The history of sensationalism, yellow journalism, and lying about what matters most in America is long and sordid. It dates back centuries. Accurate reporting is most important when lives, human welfare, and perhaps humanity are on the line.

Television is worst of all. In a June 1950 commencement address, Boston University President Daniel Marsh said, “If the (television) craze continues….we are destined to have a nation of morons.”

Famed comedian Ernie Kovacs (1919 – 1962) once called it a medium because it’s neither rare or well done.

He’d be horrified by what goes on now. It fails on all counts. So do scoundrel print media. They give news, information, and opinion reporting bad names.

Long before television arrived, journalist Walter Lippmann called the public “the bewildered herd.” In policy matters, they’re considered “spectators,” not “participants.”

“The common interests elude public opinion entirely,” he said. That’s how it should be, he added.

America’s privileged class alone should manage policy. Only they need proper education and training. Treat others like mushrooms – well-watered and in the dark. Distract them with bread and circuses. Misinform them with managed and junk food news.

Media scoundrels betray the reading and viewing public. They’re best served by walking away, tuning out, and choosing credible sources for what they most need to know. Greater numbers now do it. One day perhaps everyone will.

Scoundrel media wars rage against Syria. People are being systematically lied to and manipulated to accept more war. Western-recruited proxies wage it no-holds barred. They specialize in gruesome atrocities. Managed news reports suppress them.

Full-scale intervention looms. It could happen anytime. Early next year looks most likely.

Global Research associate Julie Levesque highlights ” ‘chemical propaganda’ and fabricated evidence.” When threats don’t exist, they’re invented.

When headlined enough most people believe them. War followed hyping nonexistent Iraq WMDs for months. False claims precede all wars. They’re based on lies and deception. It happens every time.

No matter how often people are fooled, they’re easy to deceive again. They’re being prepared for full-scale war on Syria. It’s deja vu all over again.

Michel Chossudovsky highlighted the “Syria Chemical Weapons Saga.” Perhaps another “US-NATO Humanitarian Disaster” awaits. It’s likely given how often the same scenario played out earlier.

After detailed planning and implementation, it’s hard imagining Washington now going soft. Don’t expect it. It won’t happen. Before Syrian ravaging ends, it may exceed the worst of charnel house Libya.

With about four times the population, imagine the possible death, injury, and mass destruction toll. Imagine potential cutthroat killer Islamofascist rule replacing Assad governance most Syrians support.

Libya 2.0 on a much uglier scale looks possible. Chemical propaganda and other misreporting precede what looks likely.

Chossudovsky says people are being manipulated to believe “that a ‘frustrated’ and ‘desperate’ (Assad) is planning to use deadly chemical weapons against his own people.”

Doing so would be like putting a gun to his head and pulling the trigger. The possibility of using them internally is nil except perhaps against NATO foreign invaders. Even then it’s unlikely unless Western WMDs are used on Syrians.

Managed news reports invent the worst about Assad. Chossudovsky quoted NBC News claiming “Syria’s military has loaded nerve-gas chemicals into bombs and are awaiting final orders from al-Assad.”

Media hype rages “full gear.” “Fake reports” make headline news. We’ve heard it all before many times. It’s repeated because it works. Only the war theaters, heads of state, and fakery vary.

Otherwise it’s an old script rerun. Propaganda films follow at times. History is re-invented. Facts are turned on their head. Bad guys are them, not us. The worst of all possible worlds is called the best.

An ending too gruesome to imagine perhaps looms. Humanity may not survive. America’s imperium matters most. Those in charge go for broke, and let the devil take the hindmost.

That’s how imperial rogues think. Media scoundrels share responsibility. Thoughts of blood on their hands never enter their minds. Only wealth, power, privilege, dominance, and winner take all matter.

Body counts are a small price to pay. It’s hard imagining how these people were raised. Perhaps they forgot moral lessons taught. Maybe they remember but don’t care. It shows in what they support and tolerate.

Wednesday reports hyped Abbas firing scud missiles inside Syria. Western headlines feature it. Unnamed US officials are sources. Ones preferring anonymity lack credibility. So do journalists using them.

At issue isn’t whether scuds, other missiles or rockets are used. It’s implying use of or plans to use chemical weapons.

Reports follow scurrilous ones about Assad loading sarin nerve agents or other deadly chemicals in bombs. They also suggest intensified Assad belligerence. Implied is that more civilians in his line of fire are dying.

At her daily press briefing, State Department spokeswoman Victoria Nuland said:

“As the regime becomes more and more desperate, we see it resorting to increased lethality and more vicious weapons moving forward, and we have in recent days seen missiles deployed.”

She added that Washington is concerned about a weapon called a “barrel (incendiary) bomb.” She said it contains inflammable materials. Human Rights Watch claimed he used them. More on that below.

“It’s sort of a napalm-like thing and is completely indiscriminate in terms of civilians, so very, very concerning and indicative of the regime’s desperation and the regime’s brutality,” said Nuland.

What’s most “indicative” is ignoring America’s longstanding use of napalm, agent orange in Southeast Asia, biological and chemical poisons, depleted and enriched uranium weapons, as well as other illegal toxins. It’s official US policy in all wars Washington wages.

Large areas of Afghanistan, Iraq, Libya, Vietnam and elsewhere America attacked aren’t safe to live it. Toxicity levels are too high. Uranium contamination is permanent.

No evidence whatever shows Assad uses chemical or other toxins. Suggesting he does or may hypes fear ahead of likely full-scale intervention.

On December 13, his Foreign and Expatriates Ministry “denied as untrue rumors about the Syrian Arab Army using Scud Missiles to confront the armed terrorist groups.”

It responded to falsely circulating claims. It named Turkey and partnered countries conspiring against Syria.

On December 12, Human Rights Watch (HRW) was back to its old tricks. It shills for US direct and proxy wars as well as others planned. It features anti-Assad propaganda. It headlined “Syria: Incendiary Weapons Used in Populated Areas.”

It claimed Assad used them “in at least four locations….since mid-November.” Anti-Assad witnesses said so. Unverified video footage was shown. It’s been fake before. It’s simple to do.

HRW admitted it’s “investigating unconfirmed reports of the use of incendiary weapons in (various) parts of Syria.” Proper analysis demands doing so first, finding clear evidence if it exists, then reporting the findings.

HRW so far has nothing more than dubious video evidence and suspect witnesses. They’re not named or identified. Numerous earlier reports were falsified.

No verifiable evidence suggests this one is legitimate. HRW’s last comment said “Syria is not known to be a producer or exporter of incendiary weapons.” It claims a stockpile of Soviet origin remains.

If any were obtained that long ago, their usefulness may have expired. Chemical and biological weapons lose potency over time. Their shelf life is limited. Perhaps it’s true also for incendiaries.

The New York Times was most responsible for misreporting on non-existent Iraq chemical weapons. Judith Miller’s rewritten daily front page Pentagon handouts proved effective propaganda.

Her writing became a weapon of mass destruction. She featured an entire Noah’s Ark of scam artists hyping fake threats. War followed. The “cradle of civilization” was destroyed.

Iraq is permanently occupied. Libya followed. Afghanistan boils. Syria looms. The Times plays the lead propaganda role. Miller is gone, but other disreputable writers replaced her. No shortage exists in Times Square or foreign venues.

On December 12, Michael Gordon and Eric Schmitt headlined “Syria Uses Scud Missiles in New Effort to Push Back Rebels.”

Both writers called a Western-generated foreign invasion a “civil war.” Nothing “civil” characterizes what’s going on. Neither one explained.

At least six “Soviet-designed” scuds were fired. They’re “not known for their precision.” Obama’s red line stresses using chemical weapons internally.

Assad may have calculated he “can resort to such lethal weapons without the fear of international intervention….”

Former Army intelligence officer Joseph Holliday was quoted saying he “views every weapon short of chemicals as fair game.”

He “escalated its use of force whenever the rebels’ strength has presented a significant challenge to the regime.”

The detailed article omitted heavy weapons supplied foreign fighters. It ignored their atrocities. They’re committed regularly. Pro-Assad loyalists are targeted. Civilian neighborhoods are raided. Slaughter follows. Neither writer explained.

Death squads are considered liberators. They’re not “rebels.” They’re foreign mercenary killers. They’re paid or otherwise enlisted to murder and destroy.

Their ranks are infested with Islamofascists. Syrians deplore what they represent. They have no say in what Washington plans. No do civilians in other US targeted countries.

Rogue states demand unchallenged dominance. Popular sentiment isn’t tolerated. Imperial wars rage. The entire region and beyond is threatened.

Potential death and mass destruction too gruesome to imagine looms. Stay tuned. More reports will follow.

Battling over the Internet

0

Binoy Kampmark, dissidentvoice.org |

It was once deemed the ungovernable frontier, ironic for the fact that it, itself, arose as a feature of the U.S. state apparatus. But states have been attempting to impose some regulatory framework over the internet since it became a fundamental feature of public communication. As with any international framework, who is to decide?

These were the issues that cropped up at the World Conference on International Telecommunications (WCIT), a busy gathering in Dubai at which delegates attempted to hammer out an acceptable treaty. The United States, the UK, Canada and various other European powers don’t feel that equality is the rule of the game here in terms of Internet governance. Terry Kramer, the U.S. Ambassador to the World Conference on International Communications, stated the position. “It’s with a heavy heart and a sense of missed opportunities that the U.S. must communicate that it’s not able to sign the agreement in the current form” (BBC News, December 13). No agreement, no treaty.

Various groups involved at the conference have registered their disappointment at the outcome. Lynn St. Amour, CEO and President of the Internet Society, outlined several concerns in a statement (December 14). “It was extremely important that this treaty not extend to content, or implicitly or explicitly undermine the principles that have made the Internet beneficial.” It was conceded that some progress had been made in various areas such as transparency in international roaming fees. The divisions lay elsewhere, though coherent statements about the disagreements have been hard to come by.

Delving deeper into this, one finds that the opposing countries would rather that other countries stayed out of dabbling in such matters as the net’s address system, a product of American derivation. Russia, China and Saudi Arabia, ahead of the Dubai WCIT event, were pressing for a greater equality of control in terms of the Internet’s technical development. That bone of contention will be hard to resolve. Creators are always reluctant to let others tamper with their goods.

Read more

UK doctor acted ‘dishonestly’ in Iraq

A former British army doctor has been found guilty of dishonest conduct over the death of an Iraqi prisoner.

The charges against Dr Derek Keilloh date back to 2003, when hotel receptionist Baha Mousa died after being arrested by British soldiers in Basra.

Mousa suffered 93 seperate injuries while in their custody – but Dr Keilloh had repeatedly denied any knowledge of the injuries.

Now, a medical watchdog has found him guilty of acting dishonestly – and failing to protect detainees.

Al Jazeera’s Andrew Potter reports.

 

Secretary Clinton won’t testify before Senate on Benghazi attack

0

RT |

US Secretary of State Hillary Clinton will not have to testify before a Senate hearing concerning the deadly attack on the US consulate in Benghazi after she fainted and sustained a concussion last week.

Clinton, 65, is currently recovering at home following last week’s incident, when extreme dehydration caused by a stomach virus resulted in her losing consciousness on Thursday. The concussion that she sustained while falling further aggravated her condition, which required regular medical attention.

Clinton had to cancel a number of trips last week, as well as visits to North Africa and several Gulf countries scheduled to start on Monday because of her health. She promised to return to work soon, but has thus far carried out her duties from home.

The fainting incident occurred a week before Clinton was scheduled to testify in House and Senate hearings on the results of the investigation into the September 11 attack on the American consulate in Benghazi.

Clinton was expected to be grilled in the Senate hearing on Thursday by her Republican rivals over foreign security issues and US intelligence concerning the attack which killed Ambassador Christopher Stevens and three other Americans.

Republicans have repeatedly attacked the Obama Administration for its handling of the investigation into the Benghazi incident, arguing that the incident could have been prevented.

The Obama Administration insisted that Islamic extremists hijacked a spontaneous protest against the US-made anti-Islam video ‘The Innocence of the Muslims.’

Republicans criticized the White House’s version of events, naming an inadequate reaction by the State Department to security threats to US diplomats in Libya as among the reasons the tragedy unfolded in the manner it did.

Now it has become clear that neither the Senate Foreign Relations Committee nor the House Foreign Affairs Committee will hear Hillary Clinton’s scheduled testimony on Libya next Thursday.

Senator John Kerry, chairman of the Senate Foreign Relations and the man most likely to succeed Clinton as Secretary of State, has announced through his communications director Jodi Seth that given Clinton’s condition, she “could not and should not appear” for the hearings.

Earlier, it was the Republican chairman who insisted that Clinton “has committed to testify before the committee before the end of the session [of Congress].”

It is expected that at both hearings, Clinton will be replaced with senior State Department officials William Burns and Thomas Nides.
The US Secretary of State Hillary Clinton has announced earlier she would step down from the Obama administration early next year. America’s top diplomat has also denied rumors of a presidential bid for the 2016 elections.

Congress To Move Against Guns: “It Will Ban the Sale, the Transfer, the Importation and the Possession”

0

Mac Slavo, SHTFplan.com |

Amid heated debates about what to do in the aftermath of the Connecticut school shooting which took the lives of 20 children and six adults, Senator Diane Feinstein (D-CA) is prepared to take action on the first day Congress meets after their current break.

Come January 1, 2013, Feinstein will introduce new legislation that would ban assault rifles similar to the bill she championed in California.

“I’m going to introduce in the Senate, and the same bill will be introduced in the House – a bill to ban assault weapons,” Feinstein said on NBC’s Meet the Press.

“It will ban the sale, the transfer, the importation and the possession, not retroactively, but prospectively.”

“The purpose of this bill is to get… weapons of war off the streets.”

…

“Who needs these military-style assault weapons? Who needs an ammunition feeding device capable of holding 100 rounds?” Feinstein wrote on her campaign website.

These weapons are not for hunting deer – they’re for hunting people.”

Read more

Gun Violence in America

0

Stephen Lendman, rinf.com |

US civilian gun ownership is the highest worldwide. Yemen ranks second. America doubles the Yemeni level.

Gun related violence follows. In America it’s endemic. In Chicago alone, gun-related deaths exceed one a day. More Chicagoans are shot and killed than US forces in Afghanistan by any means.

Gun ownership makes it simple as ready, aim, fire. It lowers the threshold between anger and homicide. Proliferation in society leaves everyone vulnerable.

On Friday, 28 Sandy Hook Elementary School Newtown, CT children and teachers were murdered. A heavily armed 20-year old man used semiautomatic pistols and a semiautomatic rifle.
It was the third deadliest gun-related massacre in US history.

The second worst occurred on Blacksburg, VA Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University’s campus. On April 16, 2007, 33 students and teachers were shot and killed. Others were wounded.

In January 1923, shootings and other violence killed 150 Rosewood, FL Blacks. No convictions followed.

Governor lawton Chiles (1991 – 1998) later called what happened a “blind act of bigotry.” In 2004, Florida declared Rosewood a state Heritage Landmark. Survivors of dead victims are unforgiving.

Numerous other gun-related lesser scale massacres pockmark US history. The right to own, conceal, and use assault and other deadly weapons is an ugly America tradition. It’s long past time it ended.

On November 18, 2012, the Law Center to Prevent Gun Violence said “epidemic levels of gun violence (claim) over 30,000 lives annually.” US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) data document it.

Every gun-related death leaves two others wounded. Every year, about 100,000 Americans are gun violence victims. Countless others are irreparably harmed. Nothing whatever is done to curb or prevent what’s shocking and intolerable.

The 1968 Gun Control Act fell woefully short. Federal regulation enacted was weak and ineffective. Gun manufacturers supported the measure.

It prohibits interstate firearms transfers except among licensed manufacturers, dealers and importers. It did nothing to curb gun proliferation across America.

In 1982, a Senate Judiciary Committee report claimed “the second amendment to our Constitution was intended as an individual right of the American citizen to keep and carry arms in a peaceful manner, for the protection of himself, his family, and his freedoms.”

Ignored was that so called individual rights violate those of most others. Death or injury by gun violence in American exceeds vulnerability anywhere else and then some.

US communities are unsafe. Police on routine street or traffic patrol wear bulletproof vests for protection. At one time, it was unheard of. Today it’s standard practice.

Gun violence touches every segment of society. It happens on streets, in homes, at work, in schools, numerous other places, and by self-inflicted shootings.

Major incidents like Virginia Tech and Norwalk, CT make headlines. Thousands of other shootings go unnoticed.

CDC calls firearm deaths “an important public health concern.” Congress dismisses it. Vulnerability to domestic gun-related death or injury exceeds some US war theaters.

Instead of shocking politicians to act, they support the virtual unrestricted right to bear arms. Automatic ones are prohibited. They’re easily obtained, nonetheless. Powerful semi-automatic assault ones are freely bought and sold.

Eastcoastfirearms.com lists numerous ones for sale. They include AK-47 (Kalashnikov) assault rifles, AR-15/M16 type rifles, Uzi assault weapons, LWRC M6A2s (called the most modern carbine rifle in the world), and various others with considerable firepower.

Progressive jurists and others take issue with modern-day Second Amendment interpretation. It states:

“A well regulated militia, being necessary to the security of a free state, the right of the people to keep and bear arms, shall not be infringed.”

Journalist/historian Garry Wills calls supportive Second Amendment views muddled and tendentious. Their arguments replicate insurrectionist ones.

“Only madmen, one would think, can suppose that militias have a constitutional right to levy war against the United States, which is treason by constitutional definition.”

“Yet the body of writers who proclaim themselves at the scholarly center of the Second Amendment’s interpretation say that a well-regulated body authorized by the government is intended to train itself for action against the government.”

He added that “Perhaps it is the quality of their arguments that makes them hard to take seriously.”

In 2008, a District of Columbia v. Heller Supreme Court amicus curiae submitted by 15 prominent academics and writers concluded as follows:

“Historians are often asked what the Founders would think about various aspects of contemporary life. Such questions can be tricky to answer.”

“But as historians of the Revolutionary era we are confident at least of this: that the authors of the Second Amendment would be flabbergasted to learn that in endorsing the republican principle of a well-regulated militia, they were also precluding restrictions on such potentially dangerous property as firearms, which governments had always regulated when there was ‘real danger of public injury from individuals.’ ”

Law Professor David C. Williams says Second Amendment interpretation reflects myths about America. The framers believed in unity, he said.

Modern interpreters endorse distrust and disunity, he believes. The Second Amendment guarantees individuals the right to bear arms only as part of a united and consensual people, he stresses.

Obtaining guns today is almost as easy as buying toothpaste. America’s framers had no such intention in mind. Constitutional reinventionists decided they knew best.

Modern US culture is violent. Gun ownership bears much responsibility. Violent films are some of the most popular. So are similar video games and music. Lyrics glorify guns, rape and murder.

US society is called a “rape culture” for good reason. Sometime during their lives, one-fourth of adult women are victimized by forcible rape. Often it’s by someone they know. Family members share guilt.

One in four women report being sexually molested in childhood. Repeat violations over extended periods are commonplace. Three-fourth of US women experience some form of extreme violence in their lifetimes.

Domestic violence is the leading cause of injury. It’s the second leading cause of death. Guns play a leading role. Children, like adults, are harmed.

What kind of country facilitates endemic violence instead of acting responsibly to curb it? What kind of government endorses easy access to dangerous assault and other deadly weapons instead of prohibiting it?

Against this backdrop, no wonder massacres like Norwalk, CT, Virginia Tech, Columbine High School, Atlanta, GA stock trader killings, six by a lone Fort Worth gunman, 10 Washington, DC sniper shootings, a Carnation, WA Christmas eve massacre, Northern IL University killings, 13 more at Ft. Hood, the Tuscon, AR incident killing six and leaving Congresswoman Gabrielle Giffords seriously wounded, as well as dozens more incidents too numerous to mention.

No wonder domestic violence is out-of-control. Lone gunmen incidents reflect ingrained values. So does America’s history. It’s notably harsh against dissidents, labor, minorities, street protesters, ethnic and religious groups, as well as others targeted.

Most one-on-one incidents pass without notice. US history is sanitized to forget what’s too monstrous to remember. Native Americans were nearly slaughtered to extinction.

Black slaves endured whippings, other beatings, rapes, mutilations, forced family separations, and even amputations as punishment for runaways.

Jim Crow America endorsed white supremacy. Forced segregation still exists. Latinos, Muslims, and other disadvantaged people face state-sponsored repression.

America is the only industrialized country negligent for having failed to address gun violence responsibly.

On average, eight times more fatalities result than in other developed countries. For children under 15, it’s 12 times higher.

Few federal gun laws exist. Ones enacted are pockmarked with loopholes. Some states make guns as simple to buy as blueberry pie. Many others aren’t far behind.

Anyone get obtain dangerous semi-automatic weapons able to claim multiple victims in seconds. Some US communities are near-war zones.

Economic duress makes violent crime more likely. Many people fear going out at night. Some do in daylight.

In the 1990s, murders happened every 22 minutes, rapes every five minutes, robberies every 49 seconds, and burglaries every 10 seconds. Given today’s hard times, it’s likely these numbers are much higher.

In 2010, the FBI reported 1,246,248 violent crimes and another 9,082,887 nonviolent ones. In 2011, violent crime jumped 18%.

Numbers vary year by year, but grand totals compared to other industrialized nations explain best. Violence in America is endemic.

Death or injury from guns is out-of-control. Government officials able to act responsibly abstain. In September 2008, Obama said “I’m not going to take away your guns.”

Last July, White House spokesman Jay Carney said:

“The president believes we need to take common sense measures that protect the Second Amendment rights of Americans while ensuring that those who should not have guns under existing laws do not get them.”

He kept his promise on ownership. He spurned gun control advocates. He signed measures permitting guns in national parks and on Amtrak.

He did nothing to ban assault weapons. He allows gun show loopholes. Convicted violent felons can easily buy weapons there with no ID. So can anyone able to afford them.

Political Washington facilitates gun ownership. Neither party supports curbing gun-related homicides and injuries. They prefer gun lobby cash to safe streets and communities.

Don’t expect either party to change gun policy. They support wrong over right across the board. They do it with impunity. No wonder America threatens humanity at home and abroad. Rogue leaders made planet earth unsafe to live on.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

How Water Is Being Used to Enslave People

0
Dave Hodges, Activist Post | 
Much has been written about the past wars that have been fought over oil (e.g. Gulf War 1), the wars that are presently being fought over oil (e.g. Arab Spring) and the wars which will be fought over oil (e.g. Syria and Iran). What is missing from most conversations is that the wars of the future will be fought over water, leaving oil as a secondary consideration.
According to the United Nations research and scientific studies, nearly two-thirds of the entire population inhabiting the planet will face severe, life-threatening water shortages by the year 2025. The reasons most often cited for the water shortages are waste and poor planning which will result in uneven distribution.

Presently this problem is primarily a third world problem. However, the UN report and other ancillary reports mentions that England faces serious water shortages and the United States is not far behind England. Even the Defense Intelligence Agencyhas clearly echoed the dire warnings of the United Nations report by stating that unstable water supplies will greatly impact all and water will subsequently be used as weapon.

Paralyzed woman controls robotic arm with thoughts alone

0

Doctors in Pittsburgh stunned at ability of patient who has reached levels of performance never seen before

A woman who is paralysed from the neck down has stunned doctors with her extraordinary skill at using a robotic arm that is controlled by her thoughts alone.

The 52-year-old patient, called Jan, lost the use of her limbs more than 10 years ago to a degenerative disease that damaged her spinal cord. The disruption to her nervous system was the equivalent to having a broken neck.

But in training sessions at Pittsburgh University, doctors found she quickly learned to make fluid movements with the brain-controlled robotic arm, reaching levels of performance never seen before.

Doctors recruited the woman to test a robotic arm that is controlled by a new kind of computer program that translates the natural brain activity used to move our limbs into commands to move the robotic arm.

The design is intended to make the robotic arm more intuitive for patients to use. Instead of having to think where to move the arm, a patient can simply focus on the goal, such as “pick up the ball”.

Several groups around the world are developing so-called brain-machine interfaces to control robotic arms and other devices, such as computers, but none has achieved such impressive results.

Writing in the Lancet, researchers said Jan was able to move the robotic arm back, forward, right, left, and up and down only two days into her training. Within weeks she could reach out, and change the position of the hand to pick up objects on a table, including cones, blocks and small balls, and put them down at another location.

“We were blown away by how fast she was able to acquire her skill, that was completely unexpected,” said Andrew Schwartz, professor of neurobiology at Pittsburgh University. “At the end of a good day, when she was making these beautiful movements, she was ecstatic.”

To wire the woman up to the arm, doctors performed a four-hour operation to implant two tiny grids of electrodes, measuring 4mm on each side, into Jan’s brain. Each grid has 96 little electrodes that stick out 1.5mm. The electrodes were pushed just beneath the surface of the brain, near neurons that control hand and arm movement in the motor cortex.

Once the surgeons had implanted the electrodes, they replaced the part of the skull they had removed to expose the brain. Wires from the electrodes ran to connectors on the patient’s head, which doctors could then use to plug the patient into the computer system and robotic arm.

Before Jan could use the arm, doctors had to record her brain activity imagining various arm movements. To do this, they asked her to watch the robotic arm as it performed various moves, and got her to imagine moving her own arm in the same way.

While she was thinking, the computer recorded the electrical activity from individual neurons in her brain.

Neurons that control movement tend to have a preferred direction, and fire their electrical pulses more frequently to perform a movement in that direction. “Once we understand which direction each neuron likes to fire in, we can look at a larger group of neurons and figure out what direction the patient is trying to move the arm in,” Schwartz said.

To begin with, the robotic arm was programmed to help Jan’s movements, by ignoring small mistakes in movements. But she quickly progressed to controlling the arm without help. After three months of training, she completed tasks with the robotic arm 91.6% of the time, and 30 seconds faster than when the trial began.

In an accompanying article, Grégoire Courtine, at the Swiss Federal Institute of Technology in Lausanne, said: “This bioinspired brain-machine interface is a remarkable technological and biomedical achievement.”

There are hurdles ahead for mind-controlled robot limbs. Though Jan’s performance continued to improve after the Lancet study was written, she has plateaued recently, because scar tissue that forms around the tips of the electrodes degrades the brain signals the computer receives.

Schwartz said that using thinner electrodes, around five thousandths of a millimetre thick, should solve this problem, as they will be too small to trigger the scarring process in the body.

The researchers now hope to build senses into the robotic arm, so the patient can feel the texture and temperature of the objects they are handling. To do this, sensors on the fingers of the robotic hand could send information back to the sensory regions of the brain.

Another major focus of future work is to develop a wireless system, so the patient does not have to be physically plugged into the computer that controls the robotic arm.

Source

The two chilling deaths of Russian nationals in Britain

0

Marina Litvinenko is used to people comparing her life to a plot from a John le Carré novel.

Nevertheless, the widow of ex-KGB officer Alexander can’t help but feel shocked at the furore of the past week.

‘Perhaps it was naive,’ she says, sitting in a South Kensington cafe, the day after a pre-inquest hearing revealed that Alexander — or Sasha as she always called him — worked for MI6.

‘But I really didn’t realise it would be so big. Everywhere on TV, in the newspapers, they were saying “double agent”, “triple agent” but Sasha was not any of these things.

‘Yes, he worked for MI6 but he was not some kind of James Bond spy.

‘I understand why people are interested but for me it is very upsetting because the really important thing about the hearing was it was the first time that the Russian authorities have been cited in official documents as being responsible for Sasha’s murder. That is the really big thing.’

As the world now knows, Litvinenko, who also worked for the Russian Federal Security Service, was murdered in 2006 after the radioactive substance, Polonium-210, was allegedly put in his tea during a meeting with two ex-KGB contacts, Andrei Lugovoy and Dmitry Kovtun.

At last week’s legal review, Hugh Davies, counsel to the inquest, said assessments of confidential Government material ‘established a prima facie case as to the culpability of the Russian state in the death of Alexander Litvinenko’.

For Marina, 50, this is something of a personal victory. Reserved and gracious, she does not particularly like ‘to make a noise’, but has fought with tigress-like determination to bring her husband’s killers to justice.

She does not just mean Lugovoy and Kovtun but Vladimir Putin too — or as she puts it: ‘The murderers and their mentor.’

‘Thanks to Russia, we will never have our day in court so the inquest is our only chance to find out what happened,’ she says. 

‘For the last six years it has been very difficult for me and our son Anatoly to have a normal life — the life that Sasha wanted for us.

‘I can’t just close my eyes to this — that would not be fair to Sasha or to us. I still find it unbelievable that he was killed in this way, that he had to die that slow, horrible death, and be in that pain for days.

‘But this is not just for Anatoly and me. I genuinely believe that it is important for all of us. The year Sasha was killed we had been given British citizenship.

‘We thought we were safe here but we weren’t. Sasha was poisoned with a radio-active substance on British soil. What next? It’s true that it is still shocking but now no one is surprised when a Russian is attacked in this country and that is wrong.’

Last month Alexander Perepilichny, a Russian whistleblower helping prosecutors to uncover a multi- million-pound money-laundering scam, died near his Surrey home in mysterious circumstances.

And last March, Russian banker German Gorbuntsov narrowly avoided death when he was shot by a hitman outside his home in London’s Isle of Dogs.

Marina says: ‘We cannot allow ourselves to think this is normal. It is not. But as long as Putin thinks he can do whatever he wants, this behaviour will continue. 

‘People have said that by naming Russia at the inquest, we risk breaking off diplomatic relations but we have to follow this through to the end. Sasha’s murder is already like a stone between Britain and Russia. There is no communication between the two security services unless it is to do with global terrorism because of this case.’

After years of stonewalling, the Russian state has said it would like to become an ‘interested party’ in the inquest, which would give it the right to make submissions to the coroner and appoint lawyers to cross-examine witnesses.

Read more

CIA found guilty of torture by European Court

0

For the first time, the European Court of Human Rights has found the US Central Intelligence Agency guilty of torturing and sodomizing an innocent man.

German national Khalid El-Masry (of Lebanese ancestry) was kidnapped (“rendered”) from Macedonia and taken to Afghanistan and placed in the “salt pit.” He was beaten, sodomized and tortured until 2004, when the CIA realized he was a case of mistaken identity and released him. The verdict sheds light on among the darkest routine practices of US intelligence in the past decade.

RT interviews journalist and historian Doug Valentine on the verdict:

Note that no such cases have been brought in US courts, much less verdicts obtained, and that there was a relative blackout on this news in the US mass media.

Originally published on Informed Comment

Complex Chavez Recovery

0

Stephen Lendman. rinf.com |

Major surgery for any reason is daunting. Imagine four times in 18 months for the same illness. On December 11, Chavez underwent it to remove cancerous tissue.

Malignancy reappeared weeks after examination revealed he was cancer free. Post-surgical chemotherapy, radiation, and other treatment now follow.

Hopefully it’ll prove effective. He’s too important to lose. He’s Latin America’s most charismatic leader since Fidel Castro. They inspire others to emulate their example.

Castro recovered from his own major gastrointestinal surgery. At the time, false reports pronounced him dead or dying. They were little more than wishful thinking.

Dark forces wanted him eliminated for decades. Even in semi-retirement they want him gone. He recovered well. It took time. It generally does for people in their 80s.

In August, he turned 86. Hopefully he has many productive years ahead. His intellect remains acute. His perceptiveness is keen.

His knowledge of vital issues is impressive. His honesty and integrity are impeccable. His forthrightness is noteworthy. He and Chavez mean so much to so many.

At 58, Chavez is younger. Hopefully his age and inner strength will bring full recovery.

On December 12, Vice President Nicolas Maduro said it began after undergoing six hours of successful surgery. He called the operation “complex.”

He said “special treatments” are needed. The post-operative process will be “complicated and difficult,” he added.

Chavez is getting the finest care at Havana’s Medical Surgical Research Center (CIMEQ). He’s in good hands. It’s Cuba’s best equipped hospital. It provides world-class treatment.

Addressing Venezuelans on national television and radio, Maduro said, “We are talking until dawn about the details of President Chavez’s operation.

On December 12, Vice President Rafael Ramirez and National Assembly President Diosdado Cabello returned home from Cuba.

Minister of Science and Technology Jorge Arreaza and Attorney General Cilia Flores remained in Havana. Together with Fidel and Raul Castro, they’re monitoring Chavez’s condition.

Maduro said surgery “was complicated, difficult and delicate, which tells us that the post-operative process is going to be complicated and difficult.”

“We shall be in regular contact with the medical teams, always with the objectivity which must guide the management of this situation.”

He added that before leaving for Cuba, Chavez called on Venezuelans “to be serenely prepared to confront these hard, complicated and difficult days which it has befallen us to experience, and they can only be confronted with the unity of the people, the political and social forces of the revolution, and men and women in the street.”

He urged opposition elements to halt their speculation, lies and vitriol. Referring to Sunday’s gubernatorial and legislative elections, Maduro said Venezuelans “are more united than ever spiritually and politically in loyalty to Chavez and our people.”

During surgery, internal bleeding occurred. It was corrected. Mayo Clinic cancer expert, Dr. Julian Molina, said it’s not unusual when surgery to remove malignant tissue occurs multiple times in the same place.

On Thursday, Chavez improved. Maduro said his condition changed from “stable to favorable.”

“That allows us to continue saying that there is growing recovery in (his) situation,” he added. Prayer vigils continue for his recovery. Uncertainty prevails. Venezuelans hope for the best.

Proper care, love, inner strength, and time are nature’s best healers. Hopefully in combination they’ll restore Chavez to full health.

Venezuelan television aired video opening with him saying “I am no longer myself. I am the people.” Venezuelans of all ages followed, adding “I am Chavez.”

Other programming showed him singing folk songs with supporters and reciting poetry. Venezuelans express justifiable concerns. They pray. They hope for the best. In the fullness of time they’ll know.

Chavista politician/academic Aristobulo Isturiz said “as we pray, we should be ready to turn our sadness and pain into a force that can mobilize the people.”

It’s unclear if Chavez can return for his January 10 inauguration. Constitutional law requires new elections if he’s not back within 30 days.

Information Minister Ernesto Villegas said Venezuelans “should be prepared to understand” whatever happens. “It would be irresponsible to hide the delicacy of the present moment and the days to come.”

It’s unconscionable not to pray for his full recovery. He’s too important to lose. More than Venezuela is at stake.

On December 12, the Havana Times headlined “Chavez’s Future Means Unknowns for Cuba,” saying:

The future of the Bolivarian Alliance for the Peoples of Our America (ALBA) without Chavez hangs in the balance. Founded in 2004, it grew to eight countries.

They include Venezuela, Cuba, Bolivia, Nicaragua, Dominica, Antigua & Barbuda, Ecuador, and St. Vincent & the Grenadines.

It’s a cooperative system of goods and services trade outside the exploitive WTO-international banking one.

Its goal is ambitious. It aims for integrating and developing social societies throughout the region.

It’s based on complementarity, not competition; solidarity, not domination; cooperation, not exploitation; and respect for national sovereignty free from predatory countries and corporate giants.

What will happen without Chavez? How will Cuba be affected? It depends on Venezuelan cooperation. It gets 100,000 daily barrels of oil on “highly concessional terms.”

In return, Havana provides medical and educational services. Cuba expert Arturo Lopez Levy calls the arrangement “the backbone of ALBA.”

Before leaving for Cuba, Chavez acknowledged his risks. In case anything happens, he named Vice President Nicolas Maduro his preferred successor. He urged Venezuelans to choose him if new elections are necessary.

Some observers believe National Assembly President Diosdado Cabello may challenge him. He’s a longtime close Chavez ally.

It’s thought his influence within Venezuela’s military exceeds Maduro’s support. Whether or not a power struggle emerges remains to be seen.

Hopefully Chavez will recover enough to return for his inauguration. Doing so would end speculation provided he regains full health.

Challenging weeks lie ahead. He’s a warrior. He’s indomitable. He achieved what few thought possible. Don’t count him out.

At the same time, another president is possible. Cuba relies on ALBA trade relations. Losing it would replicate the post-Soviet “Special Period.” Crisis conditions followed. Havana hopes that won’t repeat.

Levy believes “With or without Chavez, Cuba will have to deepen its transition to a mixed economy and open itself up to foreign capital.”

With it come huge risks. In his book titled “Rulers and Ruled in the US Empire,” James Petras exposed six myths of direct foreign investment (FI).

(1) It doesn’t create new enterprises and market opportunities. It buys privatized and other enterprises. It crowds out local capital and public initiative.

(2) It doesn’t enhance export effectiveness. It buys minerals and other resources for export. It doesn’t create jobs or stimulate national economies.

(3) It doesn’t provide tax revenue and hard currency. It creates more indebtedness and net loss than gain.

(4) Indebtedness to foreign lenders is economically destructive.

(5) It doesn’t provide developing countries with needed capital. FI exploits. It doesn’t benefit recipient countries.

(6) It doesn’t attract further amounts. Capital flows where returns are highest. It’s anchored nowhere. It has no national allegiance.

Developing countries benefit most by relying on national ownership and internal investment. FI is predatory. Internally generated growth works best.

FI favors capital over labor. Political, economic and social inequalities result. From 1980 – 2000, Latin American FI proved socially disastrous.

Living standards plunged. Unemployment and poverty soared. Cuba knows what happened. Why adopt policies sure to fail.

Hopefully Raul Castro and other ruling officials will choose ways beneficial for all Cubans. Doing so without ALBA won’t be easy. Hopefully it won’t come to that, with or without Chavez.

ALBA is mutually beneficial. As long as Venezuela is progressively governed, it won’t sacrifice what worked effectively for years. Losing it is likely only if dark forces regain power.

Nothing suggests it’s possible any time soon. Hopefully they’re banished forever.

Cuba faces other economic challenges. It suffered Gulf of Mexico oil exploration setbacks. US sanctions create hardships.

Nicaragua also voiced concerns about Chavez’s illness. Since 2007, it got billions of dollars of aid.

Former Sandinista Renovation Movement (MRS) foreign minister and current National Assembly deputy Victor Hugo Tinoco said:

“The permanent absence of Chavez would pose different scenarios, which would all be adverse for (President Daniel) Ortega since he’d no longer have an unconditional ally in Venezuela.”

Saying so, of course, is premature. At the same time, Nicaragua relies heavily on Venezuelan cooperation. Tinoco said $500 million in annual aid is provided.

He’s also concerned about CELAC’s future (the Community of Latin American and Caribbean States). It’s comprised of 33 countries. Potentially it’s an OAS (Organization of American States) alternative.

Fulfillment remains a distant aspiration. Maduro hopes it’ll achieve regional energy independence, social development in areas of food, health and education, beneficial environmental development, independence from predatory international lending agencies, and other benefits.

On February 23, 2010, it was established. It has miles to go to transform hope to fulfillment. The jury remains very much out.

Other regional countries also depend on Chavez. Bolivia is an important political and economic ally. So is Ecuador.

Rafael Correa’s presence in Havana to welcome Chavez on arrival signaled the importance of their relationship.

He and others wonder if Chavismo will be the same without him. Hopefully they won’t have to find out.

A Final Comment

Hope springs eternal. Reality can’t be ducked. Family members, physicians, and government officials close to Chavez revealed little about his cancer.

It goes without saying that multiple surgeries for the same one in the same area give pause to worry. It’s not a good sign.

At the same time, Chavez’s age, indomitable spirit, and superb care offer hope for a full recovery. The will to live is a powerful positive force. It’s pitted against an aggressive illness.

Dr. Salvador Navarrete claimed once to have been Chavez’s personal physician. Venezuelan doctors said not so. More on their comments about him below.

On October 21, 2011, Medical News Today published his assessment of Chavez’s health. The Mexican newspaper Milenio Semanal published them. He claimed the following:

“President Chavez has a tumor in the pelvis, called sarcoma. These are retroperitoneal tumors, at the base of the pelvis.”

“From an embryological point of view (how it started, its origin), it could be mesodermal, ectodermal or endodermal.”

“Information I have received from the family is that it is a sarcoma, an aggressive tumor with a very bad prognosis – and I am nearly completely certain this is true.”

“That is why he is undergoing such aggressive chemotherapy. If it were some kind of prostate cancer, he would be undergoing hormonal therapy which would hardly be noticeable.”

He added that it’s not prostate cancer. It’s “very close to the prostate. (It) probably invade(d) the bladder (or) originate(d) in the bladder and is invading the pelvis.”

“It is most likely a tumor on the lliopsoas muscle. (It) runs from the lumbar portion of the vertebral column to the femur….The cancer either started in the muscle or has settled there.”

On October 22, 2011, Venezuela Analysis debunked Navarrete’s diagnosis and prognosis. Venezuelan doctors headed by Fidel Ramirez accused him of “scientific negligence.”

Ramirez’s practice includes general medicine and gastroenterology. He, opthamologist Earle Siso Garcia, and trauma surgeon Rafael Vargas accused Navarrete of “daring to make diagnoses and prognoses without the necessary medical information, which we reiterate is completely unknown to him.”

Ramirez said he “does not have, nor has he had any scientific information in order to be able to talk about the health of president Chavez, not even about the type of cancer he endured.”

He may have had informal contact with him, but “it was never a physician-patient relationship. There is no truth to (his) comment.”

A joint press conference statement on live television added that Navarrete “has not been President Chavez’s physician, nor the family doctor of any of the President’s relatives.”

His comments were uncalled for. They violated medical ethics. They lack “scientific grounding.” They’re based on “an alleged medical examination in which Navarrete never took part.”

Fourteen months later, Chavez underwent his fourth cancer surgery in 18 months for the same illness. Recovery chances at best are daunting.

Hopefully they’ll prove good. The fullness of time will have final say.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

Geoengineering: Assessing the Implications of Large-Scale Climate Intervention

0

A 2009 US House of Representatives hearing mentions how there would be no more blue skies if geoengineering programs were to persist.

Shepard Ambellas, theintelhub.com |

In November of 2009 a geoengineering hearing took place in the US House of Representatives.

During the hearing, the committee addressed the need for Solar Radiation Management (SRM) and how productive it is as an investment.

Lee Lane a “Resident Fellow” and Head of the AEI Geoengineering Project wanted the US government to study (SRM) in detail saying, “it is the first and third most productive kinds of investment that can be made in dealing with climate change” 

Lane says, “we need to balance and manage the risks of SRM studies”.

For the most part the committee concluded that global warming is a problem and that geoengineering is only a temporary solution.

In the discussion they also mention who decides the temperature of the planet, Russia, China, or the US? It was also brought up that it would be nearly impossible to get the geoengineering particulates into the stratosphere and very costly.

All the while the byproduct would be grey skies.

Watch the video here

The Coming Water Wars

The powers of financial capitalism had (a) far-reaching aim, nothing less than to create a world system of financial control in private hands able to dominate the political system of each country and the economy of the world as a whole. This system was to be controlled in a feudalist fashion by the central banks of the world acting in concert, by secret agreements arrived at in frequent meetings and conferences… – Professor Carroll Quigley, Mentor to President Bill Clinton

Dave Hodges, Activist Post |

Very soon, America will be forced into water wars in order to secure the precious asset of water for our people. This will force our people into more wars of occupation in a search for water. Meanwhile, every nation that America conquers, is one less country that the bankers have to worry about taking over. At the end of the day, if America wants water, someday, Americans will have to go to war to obtain water.

As any aware person knows, Agenda 21 is being used as a front for the purpose of increasing the bottom of line of select global corporations. Bolivia is being exploited to this end and is serving as the canary in the mine with regard to what lies ahead for the United States and the coming water wars.

The United States sits upon a fiscal cliff. Economic devastation is in the cards for the United States. Many wonder what will happen when the country defaults and cannot pay its bills. The answer is simple, our country will enter receivership. Once receivership is thrust upon our country, the bankers will begin to take control of our assets. Among the prize assets coveted by the globalist bankers will be our water supply. Soon, very soon, our water supplies will become the most expensive in the world. Obtaining water for many Americans will soon be a life and death struggle.

Read more here

Medical Marijuana Activists Demand A Clear Policy From Obama

0

AP |

SAN FRANCISCO — President Barack Obama says he won’t go after pot users in Colorado and Washington, two states that just legalized the drug for recreational use. But advocates argue the president said the same thing about medical marijuana — and yet U.S. attorneys continue to force the closure of dispensaries across the U.S.

Welcome to the confusing and often conflicting policy on pot in the U.S., where medical marijuana is legal in many states, but it is increasingly difficult to grow, distribute or sell it. And at the federal level, at least officially, it is still an illegal drug everywhere.

Obama’s statement Friday provided little clarity in a world where marijuana is inching ever so carefully toward legitimacy.

That conflict is perhaps the greatest in California, where the state’s four U.S. Attorneys criminally prosecuted large growers and launched a coordinated crackdown on the state’s medical marijuana industry last year by threatening landlords with property forfeiture actions. Hundreds of pot shops went out of business.

Steve DeAngelo, executive director of an Oakland, Calif., dispensary that claims to be the nation’s largest, called for a federal policy that treats recreational and medical uses of the drug equally.

“If we’re going to recognize the rights of recreational users, then we should certainly protect the rights of medical cannabis patients who legally access the medicine their doctors have recommended,” he said.

The government is planning to soon release policies for dealing with marijuana in Colorado and Washington, where federal law still prohibits pot, as elsewhere in the country.

“It would be nice to get something concrete to follow,” said William Osterhoudt, a San Francisco criminal defense attorney representing government officials in Mendocino County who recently received a demand from federal investigators for detailed information about a local system for licensing growers of medical marijuana.

Assemblyman Tom Ammiano said he was frustrated by Obama’s comments because the federal government continues to shutter dispensaries in states with medical marijuana laws, including California.

“A good step here would be to stop raiding those legal dispensaries who are doing what they are allowed to do by law,” said the San Francisco Democrat. “There’s a feeling that the federal government has gone rogue on hundreds of legal, transparent medical marijuana dispensaries, so there’s this feeling of them being in limbo. And it puts the patients, the businesses and the advocates in a very untenable place.”

Obama, in an interview with ABC’s Barbara Walters, said Friday that federal authorities have “bigger fish to fry” when it comes to targeting recreational pot smokers in Colorado and Washington.

Some advocates said the statement showed the president’s willingness to allow residents of states with marijuana laws to use the drug without fear of federal prosecution.

“It’s a tremendous step forward,” said Joe Elford, general counsel for Americans for Safe Access. “It suggests the feds are taking seriously enough the idea that there should be a carve-out for states with marijuana laws.”

Obama’s statements on recreational use mirror the federal policy toward states that allow marijuana use for medical purposes.

“We are not focusing on backyard grows with small amounts of marijuana for use by seriously ill people,” said Lauren Horwood, a spokeswoman for U.S. Attorney Benjamin Wagner in Sacramento. “We are targeting money-making commercial growers and distributors who use the trappings of state law as cover, but they are actually abusing state law.”

Alison Holcomb, who led the legalization drive in Washington state, said she doesn’t expect Obama’s comment to prompt the federal government to treat recreational marijuana and medical marijuana differently.

“At this point, what the president is looking at is a response to marijuana in general. The federal government has never recognized the difference between medical and non-medical marijuana,” she said. “I don’t think this is the time he’d carve out separate policies. I think he’s looking for a more comprehensive response.”

Washington voters approved a medical marijuana law in 1998, and dispensaries have proliferated across the state in recent years.

Last year, Gov. Chris Gregoire vetoed legislation that would have created a state system for licensing medical dispensaries over concern that it would require state workers to violate the federal Controlled Substances Act.

For the most part, dispensaries in western Washington have been left alone. But federal authorities did conduct raids earlier this year on dispensaries they said were acting outside the state law, such as selling marijuana to non-patients. Warning letters have been sent to dispensaries that operate too close to schools.

“What we’ve seen is enforcement of civil laws and warnings, with a handful of arrests of people who were operating outside state law,” Holcomb said.

Eastern Washington has seen more raids because the U.S. attorney there is more active, Holcomb added.

Colorado’s marijuana measure requires lawmakers to allow commercial pot sales, and a state task force that will begin writing those regulations meets Monday.

State officials have reached out to the Justice Department seeking help on regulating a new legal marijuana industry but haven’t heard back.

DeAngelo said Friday that the Justice Department should freeze all pending enforcement actions against legal medical cannabis providers and review its policies to make sure they’re consistent with the president’s position. He estimated federal officials have shuttered 600 dispensaries in the state and 1,000 nationwide.

DeAngelo’s Harborside Health Center is facing eviction after the U.S. attorney in San Francisco pressured his landlord to stop harboring what the government considers an illegal business.

“While it’s nice to hear these sorts of positive words from the president, we are facing efforts by the Justice Department to shut us down, so it’s hard for me to take them seriously,” DeAngelo said.

The dispensary has a hearing Thursday in federal court on the matter.

__

Associated Press writers Terry Collins in San Francisco and Manuel Valdes in Seattle contributed to this report.

University students to face fingerprint scanners to prove they are attending lectures

0

University students may have to scan their fingerprints in future to prove they are going to their lectures.

Newcastle University plans to introduce biometric scanners to bring the institution in line with the UK Border Agency (UKBA) and clamp down on illegal immigrants.

Students and staff at the North-East university will be monitored through the Student Attendance system from the start of next academic year.

Exactly how it will work is still in question but one option being discussed is to introduce finger scanners at lectures and classes.

These readers would recognise students’ fingerprints and collect data on which sessions they have attended.

Newcastle University claims the move is a necessary step to meet their obligation to UKBA and ensure international students don’t use student visas as a way to sneak into the country and work illegally.

But the university also believes the new system will keep on top of attendance and help identify home students who are in need of support. But some students and staff claim the move is ‘unnecessary and intrusive’.

A student group at Newcastle University claims biometric scanning is over the top and infringes their privacy. 

Newcastle Free Education Network has organised protests against the plans, claiming the scanners would ‘turn universities into border checkpoints’ and ‘reduce university to the attendance of lectures alone’.

In a referendum at the Students’ Union, 1,200 students voted against the scheme, with just 320 voting in favour.

Dr Kyle Grayson, a senior lecturer in international politics at the university, spoke at a student meeting.

He said finger scanning risked ruining the university’s reputation overseas. Dr Grayson said: ‘I have had international students say that they don’t pay thousands of pounds a year to be treated like they are on probation.

‘Part of the problem is that the Government has created the issue about student visas being an easy way to get into the country and work illegally, but it has been blown out of proportion.

‘The majority of students, especially at a university like Newcastle, are genuine.

‘They are creating this whole surveillance operation to deal with something which isn’t a big problem.

‘If you asked a student in the USA whether they wanted to go to Newcastle and be biometrically scanned three or four times a week, or to St Andrews, or Northumbria, or elsewhere where they don’t have to do that, it is an easy choice.’

Dr Grayson said home students had also raised concerns about how the data could be used, or what would happen if it was breached.

Jeannette Strachan, academic registrar for student and academic services at the university, said various options are being considered.

She said: ‘As part of UKBA licence agreements, every university is obliged to carry out attendance monitoring to be able to certify at any time, to any visit by the UKBA, that an international student is present on campus and engaged in their studies.

‘If either a student or a university does not comply with UKBA requirements then that student and university is at risk of severe sanctions.’

Source

Watchdog says Google Maps for iPhone violates data protection

0

The issue is that the option to share location data is on by default, says the Independent Centre for Privacy Protection Schleswig-Holstein

When users install Google Maps on their iPhone, the option to share location data with Google is switched on by default. By doing this, Google violates European data protection law, according to a German data protection watchdog.

Google Maps for iPhone appeared in the App Store on Wednesday and was welcomed by many after Apple stumbled with its own maps application. Google Maps quickly became the most popular free app in the App Store.

When the app is downloaded, Google prompts users to accept its terms of service and privacy policy in the startup screen. On the same screen, the Maps app warns users that they are about to share their location data with Google. “Help us improve Google, including traffic and other services. Anonymous location data will be collected by Google’s location service and sent to Google, and may be stored on your device,” Google tells users.

However, the option box next to the text is switched on by default, which isn’t allowed by European data protection law, said Marit Hansen, deputy privacy and information commissioner at the Independent Centre for Privacy Protection Schleswig-Holstein, Germany, in an email.

She said Google’s definition of “anonymous” doesn’t guarantee users complete anonymity. “All available information points to having linkable identifiers per user,” which would allow Google to track several location entries, she said.
“This is clearly not anonymous,” she said, adding that she had to assume that Google’s “anonymous location data” is still “personal data” under European data protection law.

When a company wants to process personal data, users have to give informed consent instead of opting out, she said. “So I conclude that the current implementation is not compliant with current European data protection law, even if Google now offers an opt-out possibility,” Hansen said.

In January, the Dutch Data Protection Authority (CBP) ruled that navigation service TomTom could only gather and process anonymous geolocation data it uses to map traffic after prior consent is given by the user, “because geolocation data are sensitive personal data.”

According to the CBP, TomTom could use the location data to deduce where someone supposedly lives.

“Such data are therefore to be regarded as personal data. When Google collects such data about routes traveled, it collects personal data for which consent must be obtained,” Mark Jansen, a lawyer who specializes on IT issues, told IDG News Service partner Webwereld.

“The only basis for this processing seems to be consent. That means at a minimum that a pre-ticked box is not sufficient,” he said.

This kind of data processing is also being discussed on a European level by the Article 29 Working Party, which is made up of data protection commissioners from each European Union member states, Hansen said. Her organization is part of the group, which she expects will discuss the issue further. She hopes that non-European users will also “question the behavior of companies that do not inform users properly and prefer opt-out over opt-in.”

A Google spokesman could not immediately comment on Hansen’s findings, but referred to a page where the company states that “Google does not know who you are when you use the My Location (beta) feature in Google Maps for mobile.”

“The collection of location information is done only with the consent of users,” the Google spokesman told Webwereld regarding the Dutch findings, adding that users can choose to switch this off at any time.

Loek is Amsterdam Correspondent and covers online privacy, intellectual property, open-source and online payment issues for the IDG News Service. Follow him on Twitter at @loekessers or email tips and comments to loek_essers@idg.com

Source

RINF Video: Big Brother Google’s Privacy Policy – What They Didn’t Tell You

0

RINF News reports the truth behind Google’s controversial changes to its privacy policy, a move which outraged privacy advocates and left many wondering what the companies true motives were. Here we reveal how the corporate media ignored the truth about how Google is using it’s power to track and monitor Internet users.

Newtown school shooting story already being changed by the media

0

NaturalNews |

The national media is ablaze today with coverage of the tragic elementary school shooting in Newtown, CT, where 27 people have reportedly been killed, including 18 children.

As always, when violent shootings take place, honest journalists are forced to ask the question: “Does this fit the pattern of other staged shootings?”

One of the most important red flags of a staged shooting is a second gunman, indicating the shooting was coordinated and planned. There are often mind control elements at work in many of these shootings. The Aurora “Batman” shooter James Holmes, for example, was a graduate student actually working on mind control technologies funded by the U.S. government. There were also chemical mind control elements linked to Jared Lee Loughner, the shooter of Congresswomen Giffords in Arizona in 2011.

According to multiple eyewitness reports from Aurora, Colorado, including at least one caught on camera by mainstream media news reports in Colorado, James Holmes did not operate alone. There was a second shooter involved. But the media quickly eliminated any mention of a second shooter from its coverage, resorting to the typical cover story of a “lone gunman.”

Today, the exact same thing is happening with the Newton, CT school shooting.

Eyewitness reports of a second shooter now being “scrubbed” from the news

As the story of this shooting was first breaking, the news was reporting a second gunman.

FoxNews reported that this second gunman was “led out of the woods by officers” and then questioned. The original source of this report was the Connecticut Post.

A local CBS affiliate was also reporting the existence of a second gunman and said “Police believe there may be a second gunman and are looking for a red or maroon van with its back window blown out…”

ABC News also originally reported, “A second gunman is apparently at large. Car-to-car searches are underway.”

A local CT CBS affiliate was also reporting, “CBS News reports that a potential second shooter is in custody and that SWAT is now investigating the home of the suspect. A witness tells WFSB-TV that a second man was taken out of the woods in handcuffs wearing a black jacket and camouflage pants and telling parents on the scene, ‘I did not do it.'”

But the more recent stories being put out by the media are scrubbing any mention of a second gunman and going with the “lone gunman” explanation, which holds about as much water as the “lone gunman” explanation of the JFK assassination.

“A lone gunman killed 27 people at an elementary school here, including 18 children, in a terrifying early Friday morning shooting spree,” reports USA Today. It makes no mention whatsoever of a second gunman.

NBC News is also now chiming in with the “lone gunman” version of the story, eliminating any mention of a second gunman from its coverage of the tragic event.

Another story authored by NBC News carries the title, “26 dead after lone gunman assaults Connecticut elementary school.” Once again, no mention of a second gunman as reported by eyewitnesses.

When key elements of the story keeps changing, something is fishy

Journalists are trained to ask questions, and one of the questions I have right now is: Why was the second gunman suddenly dropped from media coverage after the first few hours of this story developing?

And why is there always a second gunman in these recent mass shootings that seem to be engineered to maximize emotional shock value due to the sheer horror of all the innocent deaths?

This story is continuing to develop, and we’ll keep asking questions here on Natural News. Our hearts and prayers go out to the children and families impacted by this violent tragedy. Given the terrible loss of life that has taken place here, shouldn’t we all seek to get to the bottom of WHY these shootings all seem to fit a common pattern of multiple mind-controlled shooters followed by an almost immediate media cover-up of the facts?

For the sake of those children who were killed today, I want to get to the bottom of this and expose the REAL story, for the purpose of stopping this violence from targeting yet more innocents in the future.

Syria Propaganda Just Like Iraq Propaganda

0

How can you tell when a country is about to get invaded? Listen to the sellout traitor talking heads on television tell you the country has “weapons of mass destruction” or “chemical weapons” and is “about to use them on their own people”.

Lawsuits for Information on Drones

0

Stephen Lendman, rinf.com |

Drones are increasingly becoming America’s weapon of choice. They’re used to kill and spy. Domestic warrantless surveillance is illegal.

It’s done extrajudicially on a regular basis. By around 2020, eyes in the sky spying will cover America. Fourth Amendment freedoms are null and void. It states:

“The right of the people to be secure in their persons, houses, papers, and effects, against unreasonable searches and seizures, shall not be violated, and no warrants shall issue, but upon probable cause, supported by oath or affirmation, and particularly describing the place to be searched, and the persons or things to be seized.”

Privacy no longer exists. Drones are now instruments of state terror. No one anywhere is safe. A previous article discussed ACLU lawsuits.

At issue is obtaining legal justification for conducting predator drone killings abroad. The ACLU sued the Defense, State, and Justice Departments. They stonewalled information requests. So did the CIA at a time Obama prioritizes killing by drones.

The ACLU wants information on “when, where and against whom drone strikes can be authorized, and how the US ensures compliance with international laws relating to extrajudicial killings.” It faces stiff headwinds getting it.

The Electronic Frontier Foundation (EFF) also filed suit for information. On October 31, it headlined “EFF Demands Answers About Predator Drone Flights in the US: Government Shares Drones with Law Enforcement Agencies Across the Country.”

On October 30, EFF sued the Department of Homeland Security (DHS). It functions like a national Gestapo. It doesn’t secure. It terrorizes ordinary Americans extrajudicially.

Muslims, immigrants, people of color, and dissidents are most at risk. EFF wants answers about how and why Predator drones are increasingly used for law enforcement.

Customs and Border Protection (CBP – a DHS division) uses UAVs to patrol borders. Video cameras, infrared ones, heat sensors and radar are used for constant spying.

Super high resolution “gigapixel” cameras enable tracking above 20,000 feet. They can monitor up to 65 enemies simultaneously. They can see targets up to 25 miles away.

Electronic transmissions can also be monitored. Cell phones, Wi-Fi networks, and text messages can be intercepted covertly.

Drone use is expanding. Greater surveillance is planned. Federal, state and local law enforcement agencies are involved. “EFF filed a Freedom of Information Act (FOIA) request asking for more information about these drone flights.”

EFF stressed immediacy. It wants CBP records and logs on spying done with other agencies. DHS stonewalled. EFF Staff Attorney Jennifer Lynch said:

“We’ve seen bits and pieces of information on CBP’s Predator drones, but Americans deserve the full story.”

“Drones are a powerful surveillance tool that can be used to gather extensive data about you and your activities.”

“The public needs to know more about how and why these Predator drones are being used to watch U.S. citizens.”

On October 30, EFF also sued the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). It wants “the latest data on certifications and authorizations the agency has issued for public drone flights in the U.S.”

Earlier it filed suit in January. FAA agreed to provide information requested. So far EFF got far less than requested. US secrecy exceeds acceptable standards. It replicates police state levels.

Millions of documents are classified without justification. At issue is concealing what free societies make public. Lynch added:

“FAA’s foot-dragging means we can’t get a real-time picture of drone activity in the U.S. If officials could release their records in a timely fashion — or publish it as a matter of routine on the FAA website — we could stop filing these FOIA requests and lawsuits.”

Predator drones are used to kill abroad. Unarmed UAVs are used domestically. They can be weaponized with tasers, bean bag guns, and other devices able to harm or perhaps kill.

In 2007, the Department of Homeland Security (DHS) authorized spying through the National Applications Office (NOA). It was described as “the executive agent to facilitate the use of intelligence community technological assets for civil, homeland security and law enforcement purposes within the United States.”

With or without congressional authorization or oversight, the executive branch may authorize state-of-the-art technology. It includes military satellite imagery and other ways to spy on Americans covertly.

Plans are to monitor virtually everyone everywhere once full implementation is achieved. By 2020, up to 30,000 UAVs may spy domestically. They’ll be virtually everywhere across America round the clock.

Privacy rights are gravely impaired. Major constitutional issues are stake. Courts willingly compromise them. Congress did so years ago. It wants domestic drone use fast-tracked. So does Obama.

In February, the FAA Modernization and Reform Act (MRA) of 2012 was enacted. It provides $63.4 billion in FAA funding over four years.

An MRA provision authorizes exponentially expanded domestic drone use. Provisions to ease and quicken law enforcement licensing was approved.

By 2015, commercial operations may apply for drone use authorization. In response to EFF’s January lawsuit, information gotten determined that “60 public entities and 12 private drone manufacturers sought permission to fly” drones domestically.

EFF sought but didn’t obtain information on how and for what purposes these drones will be used. Federal, state and local authorities will use them extrajudicially for warrantless searches.

Privacy and transparency are on the chopping block for elimination. Big Brother wants everyone watched all the time. There’s no place to hide.

The ACLU, Center for Constitutional Rights, EFF, and similar organizations want government agencies held accountable. It’s no simple task at a time repressive laws threaten everyone.

Freedom in America is fast disappearing. It’s no exaggeration saying police state justice replaced it.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

Syria: Tightening the Noose

0

Stephen Lendman, rinf.com |

Since conflict erupted last year, Washington, other NATO states, and regional allies recruited, armed, funded, trained and directed Syrian insurgents.

Public admissions emerge slowly. Language conceals what’s been ongoing all the time. On November 29, CNN said Washington is “weighing whether or not to provide arms to the Syrian opposition.”

US Syrian ambassador, Robert Ford, said Obama “never (took) the provision of arms off the table.” They’ve been supplied regularly under it covertly.

On December 9, Los Angeles Times columnist Doyle McManus headlined “A call to arms for Syria’s rebels.”

Within days, Washington is expected to recognize the illegitimate opposition coalition as the “legitimate representative of the Syrian people.” In November, Britain and France announced support.

The EU moved closer to official recognition. Member state foreign ministers extended their endorsement. At the same time, Germany expelled four Syrian embassy staff members.

Assad’s ambassador was forced out in May. Britain, France, Italy and Spain took similar actions.

German Foreign Minister Guido Westerwelle said:

“Shortly ahead of” the December 12 Friends of Syria meeting in Morocco, “the EU has given another clear signal of the upgrade and support of the coalition.”

He added that doing so “promote(s) the erosion of the Assad regime.”

EU members previously accepted Syrian National Council (SNC) 2.0 members (National Coalition of Syrian Revolutionary and Opposition Forces) as representatives of Syrian “aspirations.”

They did so despite strong internal Assad support. Majority “aspirations” don’t matter. Washington diktats overrule them. That’s how imperialism works.

Increased funding and other aid will be provided. US officials argue “that the new national coalition won’t succeed in winning support on the ground unless it amasses more of the currency of power in any insurrection: military supplies.”

Until September, Frederic C. Hof helped direct State Department policy on Syria. “We need to exercise some leadership and a management role in the arms business,” he said.

“We need to try to dominate the logistics and the decision making on who gets what and who doesn’t. We need to do it working hand in glove with others; you don’t want it to be seen as an exclusively American effort.”

He added that public posturing about not wanting to “further militarize the situation….no longer (is) relevant.” Of course, it never was. The mask slowly comes off. Reasons why conflict erupted and continues are suppressed.

On December 9, the London Sunday Times said Washington decided to supply Syrian insurgents with heavy weapons. They include rocket-propelled grenades, anti-tank missiles, and anti-aircraft heat-seeking SA-7 missiles.

State Department officials maintain daily contact with insurgent commanders. Obama authorized covert CIA and special forces help months earlier. It’s been ongoing for months. Increased aid is planned.

On December 10, the London Guardian headlined “Army’s plans to support Syrian rebels,” saying:

UK military chiefs drew up “contingency plans to provide Syrian rebels with maritime, and possibly air, power in response to a request from (Prime Minister) David Cameron, senior defense sources said on Monday night.”

They added that Britain won’t intervene unless America does. At the same time, concerns about doing so were raised.

One unnamed source said, “We are a long way from doing anything. The US is leading the way. We are not there yet.”

In November, UK defense chief General David Richards met with senior military officials from America, France, Turkey, Jordan, Qatar, and other Gulf states. Strategy was discussed at length.

Other UK officials have been meeting with Western and regional counterparts. At issue is destroying Syria entirely.

Most high-level UK military officials say intervening is far more complex than against Libya last year.

On December 11, the London Independent headlined “Exclusive: UK military in talks to help Syria rebels,” saying:

An “independent coalition including Britain” plans to support Syrian insurgents “with air and naval power….”

Washington, key NATO partners, and Gulf allies believe conflict “reached a tipping point and it has become imperative” to help insurgents “make a final push against” Assad.

Western boots on the ground aren’t planned. Libya 2.0 appears likely. Doing so will circumvent Security Council authorization.

Installing offensive Patriot missiles in Turkey “camouflage(s) intervention.” Claims about doing so for defensive purposes don’t wash.

US, British, French, and other NATO officials say intervention “is now inevitable.” It’s just a matter of when.

On December 9, Mossad-connected DEBKAfile (DF) asked, “What comes first – a Syrian chemical attack or a US-led military showdown?”

Fabricated claims about Assad using chemical weapons continue. DF says US, Israeli, Jordanian and Turkish special forces are operating in Syria.

They’re armed with special protective gear. They’re positioned near alleged “convoys carrying canisters, shells or bombs loaded with poison gas….”

Concerns about non-conventional weapons belie the fact that disquiet about them wasn’t raised before nor was anything done about them. Whether destroying them ahead of full-scale Western intervention remains to be seen.

On December 8, Der Spiegel interviewed Iranian Foreign Minister Ali Akbar Salehi. He was asked about looming full-scale war on Syria.

He said Abbas poses “no threat to the region or world peace.”

“Military forces infiltrating Syria” want the conflict “internationalize(d). If the region goes up in flames, then they have achieved their objective.”

Without “a sense of proportionality,” Western and regional states “will fall into the trap of the extremists.”

He knows Washington backs them. US hardliners want pro-Western Islamofacist regimes throughout the region. They want Assad and Iran’s government ousted. They’ll stop at nothing to achieve their aims. They risk potentially catastrophic conflict.

On December 10, Voice of Russia (VoR) interviewed Damascus Research Center director Bassam Abu Abdullah. He called so-called Friends of Syria its enemies. Washington largely controls them.

“Their goal is to destroy the country by force and use its strategic geographical location for their own purposes.”

He called supplying humanitarian aid to Syria “one big lie.” So are claims about insurgent successes. Media scoundrel misinformation reports them. It’s done to enlist public support and raise opposition forces’ morale. Seizing one tank means nothing.

“They suffer hundreds of times more losses, but al Jazeera and al Arabiya are keeping silent about this.”

“And as soon as one regular army soldier is killed, they boost, as if they have won a victory over a whole military unit.”

“The only problem of the Syrian army is their infinite number of suicide bombers.”

He repeated what other Syrian officials said many times. Damascus has no intention of using chemical weapons. At the same time, he fears insurgents may use them “to accuse the Syrian regime of doing this.”

Damascus agrees with Russian proposals for peaceful conflict resolution and fair elections. “(T)his is the kind of democracy” that Washington and other Western states forgot, he added.

They deplore it at home and abroad. Washington and key NATO allies want one independent country after another attacked and destroyed. They’re willing to ravage the entire region to control it.

Body counts and human misery don’t matter. Imperial rogues want dominance at any cost. They used death squads against Libyans. They murdered thousands of Syrians.

Civilians suffer most of all. Assad loyalists are most vulnerable. Dozens or hundreds die daily. At the same time, Syrian forces inflict heavy losses on terrorists. Scoundrel media misinformation suppresses what readers and viewers most need to know.

Washington planned war on Syria years ago. Other countries are enlisted, pressured or bullied to go along. Last year it was Libya. Earlier it was Iraq and Afghanistan.

Proxy wars rage against Yemen, Somalia, and drone-targeted Pakistan areas. Occupied Palestine is attacked multiple times daily. America’s dirty hands are involved. US special forces operate covertly in over 120 countries. CIA elements are everywhere.

Longstanding US policy bears full responsibility for regional carnage and beyond. One war begets others. Obama has lots of governments he wants ousted.

He’s got another four years to destroy them one at a time. Perhaps he plans two or more simultaneously. He’s America’s most belligerent president in history.

He outdid George Bush. He’s a war criminal multiple times over. He has years of blood on his hands to answer for. His second term may eclipse his the worst of his first.

At the same time, he’s ravaging social America to feed Washington’s war machine, enrich corporate favorites, and enforce police state harshness on resisters.

Where this ends who knows. It bears repeating. America never was beautiful. It’s no fit place to live in. It’s unsafe for anyone opposing government for the privileged few alone. The worst of times approaches. It won’t be pretty when it arrives.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “Banker Occupation: Waging Financial War on Humanity.”

http://www.claritypress.com/LendmanII.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

Detected via Facebook: FBI arrests International cyber-crime gang

0

RT |

The FBI has managed to bust an international criminal ring with the help of Facebook. The ten suspects allegedly infected 11 million computers around the world with software that defrauded victims of more than $850 million.

Facebook’s security team assisted the US authorities in revealing the alleged source of the attacks, as well as identifying which users may have been hit. As a result, arrests were made globally, including from the UK, the US and New Zealand. Other suspects were detained in Bosnia and Herzegovina, Croatia, Macedonia and Peru.

The accused hackers employed the ‘Butterfly Botnet’ (robot + network), a system which steams credit card, bank account and other personal info via a “zombie army” of computers set up to forward transmissions (including spam or viruses) to other computers on the Internet. The users, like all the other victims, have no idea that their computers have been hijacked for criminal purposes.

Some 11 million computers designated as “zombie” bots were compromised when their computers were infected with malicious software (malware) that allowed the hackers — bonnet operators — to use their victims’ computers remotely.

Facebook users were targeted with the so-called ‘Yahos’ malware over a two year period — between 2010 and October 2012 — the FBI said.

The FBI has suggested all users to update their operating systems regularly, use anti-virus software and more importantly, disconnect their computers from the Internet periodically in order not to fall victim to such cyber attacks.

It is not the first time when social media, and particularly Facebook monitoring has been shown to be successful in uncovering criminal activity.

In September, the NYPD brought charges against 49 gang members from the feuding “Rockstarz” and “Very Crispy Gangsters” in Brooklyn. The charges ended a turf war that had lasted three years, included ten shootings, and taken three lives. The feud was fueled in large part by public Facebook posts of gang members bragging about their exploits and taking photos of themselves on ‘enemy’ turf.

With the number of cyber-attacks growing and hackers becoming increasingly sophisticated, New York City police commissioner Ray Kelly launched an anti-gang initiative called Operation Crew Cut in October. Kelly’s plan aims at cutting the emerging gangs down by turning crew members’ rising use of social media against them. The department had previously intended to double the size of its Gang Division from approximately 150 detectives to 300.

Fake ads seeking MI6 assassins and mafia couriers posted on Government site

0

A new multi-million-pound job search website launched by the Government has been inundated with bogus adverts recruiting for everything from mafia ‘couriers’ to ‘porn chat’ hosts.

Since going live last month, the site has even carried adverts for MI6 assassins.

A number of jobs have had to be taken down from the Universal Jobmatch website and scores of employee accounts blocked since it was launched.

Questionable listings spotted on the site include an advert seeking three ‘international couriers’ for CosaNostra Holdings, and a ‘target elimination specialist’ for MI6.

The ad for CosaNostra – the name of the Sicilian Mafia – said applicants should have ‘their own transport’ and be able to travel to a ‘production hub in Amsterdam to collect high value packages and bring them back to the UK’. It was later removed.

Another listing claimed to be seeking a James Bond-style ‘target elimination specialist’ for the British intelligence service MI6 – which also appeared on on the Department for Work and Pensions’ Jobcentre website – which Universal Jobmatch has replaced.

The spoof recruitment ad appeared on the DirectGov site and stated that the successful applicant should be trained in using sniper rifles, be able to leave foreign countries by non-conventional means and assume new identities.

It added that candidates for the MI6 post should be willing to ‘remove people’ on behalf of the Government and would be equipped with special watches, jet packs and mini-submarines.

It stated the salary was between £50,000 and £60,000 a year – though there would be performance bonuses ‘on completion of missions.’

Prank: The Government's new job search website has been targeted by false advertisersPrank: The Government’s new job search website has been targeted by false advertisers

Other adverts on Universal Jobmatch listed pornographic websites, according to a report in the Guardian newspaper.

It said a job advert had appeared for a female presenter to host ‘internet babe chat’. The ad, which indicated a prospective salary that was a little over the minimum wage, was later taken down.

The website, launched on November 19, has so far cost £17million.

There are also fears jobseekers could fall victim to identity theft, after a group of hackers deliberately highlighted potential security risks on the site.

They told a Channel Four news report they had been able to obtain scores of jobseekers’ passport and national insurance details.

Department of Work and Pensions minister Iain Duncan Smith said 6,000 adverts had been blocked from appearing on the website since its launch.

An MI6 spokesman said at the time of the first fake advert: ‘It is disappointing that somebody would want to post a fake advert when people are looking for real jobs. It has now been removed.’

Source

Police left with £400k bill after G4S failures

0

Greater Manchester Police were left with a bill of more than £400,000 after they were forced to work at 2012 Olympics events this summer following the failure of private security firm G4S.

Manchester MP John Leech has written to home secretary Theresa May asking for assurances that the force will get its money back after the cost of stepping in to police football matches at Old Trafford was revealed as £440,553.

Officers and members of the military were called on to help police events across the country after G4S failed to recruit enough guards to fulfil their contract with the government to provide security at the Games.

A House of Commons question on the cost of taking over those duties to police forces showed that GMP had incurred one of the biggest expenditures, after West Midlands, South Wales and Strathclyde police.

The bulk of the cost is overtime payments to officers who had to be drafted in at the last minute. G4S have committed to reimbursing the government for policing costs after their boss was pulled before a House of Commons committee in the wake of the fiasco.

GMP confirmed they were expecting to receive the money from the Home Office.

In his letter to Ms May, Mr Leech, Liberal Democrat MP for Withington and the party’s spokesman for culture, media and sport, said: “The process of reimbursement is said to be ongoing.

However, I believe that there should not have arisen a situation where GMP were forced to expend financial resources and disrupt the work schedules of their employees to cover the failings of a private security firm.

“What assurances can you provide, firstly in ensuring that GMP is fully reimbursed for their material costs and great inconvenience, and secondly in ensuring that such a situation will not happen in the future?”

GMP is already facing huge budget pressures following government cuts to policing. The force is losing thousands of civilian and officer posts after seeing their budget slashed by 20 per cent. A force spokesman said: “Greater Manchester Police are being reimbursed by the Home Office.”

Source

‘Snoopers charter’ data bill to get rewrite

0

Ministers yesterday signalled they will rewrite a Bill which gives police and security services new powers to monitor communications, after an influential parliamentary committee branded it “overkill” and Deputy Prime Minister Nick Clegg said it needed a “fundamental rethink”.

Home Secretary Theresa May said she was determined to press ahead without delay with the Communications Bill, which has been dubbed a “snooper’s charter” by critics.

But she accepted the “substance” of a highly-critical report by the committee set up to scrutinise the draft version of the Bill, which would allow a range of official bodies to monitor emails, web phone calls and activity on social networking sites.

Under the draft Bill, details of these activities — but not their content — could be kept for a year, but there would be no real-time monitoring of communications.

Police, the security services the new National Crime Agency and HM Revenue and Customs (HMRC) would be able to access the data, but the draft Bill also gives the Home Secretary the power to extend access to others, such as the UK Borders Agency.

The committee of MPs and peers said the legislation would give the Home Secretary “sweeping powers to issue secret notices” ordering communications companies to disclose “potentially limitless categories of data”.

And they accused the Government of using “fanciful and misleading” figures to support its case for the legislation.

Mr Clegg said he was ready to block the Bill in its current form, and called on the Home Office to go “back to the drawing board”.

“I believe the coalition Government needs to have a fundamental rethink about this legislation,” said the Deputy Prime Minister.

“We cannot proceed with this Bill and we have to go back to the drawing board. We need to reflect properly on the criticisms that the committee have made, while also consulting much more widely with business and other interested groups.”

Urging Ministers to take the committee’s concerns on board, Mr Clegg said the creation of any new powers must be done “in a proportionate way that gets the balance between security and liberty right”.

Conservative Security Minister James Brokenshire yesterday accepted that the legislation would
have to be changed before being tabled in Parliament.

“We know that there is work that needs to be done and I absolutely accept that,” he told the BBC Radio 4 Today programme.

“What we want to do is work through on these points, recognising that the Deputy Prime Minister has set out his concerns and making sure that the substance of the recommendations from the joint committee are addressed.”

Mrs May used an article in the Sun to stress that legislation was needed to help security agencies keep pace with technological advances, which she said were being exploited by terrorists and paedophiles.

Source

Covert surveillance powers used in trading standards cases

0

CONTROVERSIAL covert surveillance and data interception legislation has been used by Essex council officers almost 40 times, figures reveal.

According to a report by Essex County Council (ECC), 37 requests to obtain communications records from communication companies and one authorisation for direct surveillance were approved from April 1 to November 26 this year.

The authorisations were granted under the Regulation of Investigatory Powers Act 2000 (Ripa), designed to counter terrorism and organised crime.

But it also allows certain public bodies, including councils, to use covert methods to gather information about suspected trading standards offences.

Details of the report were heard by members of ECC’s Audit Committee at a meeting on Monday. They were also informed about new restrictions under the Protection of Freedoms Act 2012 which now requires councils to apply to a magistrate before they can launch surveillance operations or intercept communications.

The news comes on the back of Government plans to introduce new legislation to allow police and security services to monitor internet activity.

But the Prime Minister said he would re-write the draft Communications Bill after critics described it as a “snooper’s charter.”

The Bill would, however, place further restrictions on Local Authorities on the kinds of data they access.

Nick Pickles, director of Big Brother Watch, a campaign group set up to challenge policies that threaten privacy and civil liberties said: “The Government is rightly restricting powers and is currently proposing to remove councils’ access to communications.

“Our primary concern with councils having these powers is often the failure to secure convictions or meaningful punishments and on many occasions less intrusive action could be taken.

“However, we also accept that it should not be as difficult to spy on someone in their home compared to doing a test purchase for under age alcohol sales which highlights the entire area of law needs to be overhauled.

“The important thing is that where crimes are being committed it should be the police who are in charge of investigating and not some over zealous council officials.

“These powers should only be used when absolutely necessary. All too often we are told there are being used for very serious crimes only for written warnings and cautions to be issued so the punishments don’t seem to fit the justification for having the surveillance or accessing the communications.”

A spokeswoman from ECC said a number of requests may be made under one application – targeting several telephone numbers for one case, for example.

In Essex, six applications for communications data were approved which amounted to 37 requests. One application, which included two requests, was refused.

The spokeswoman said: “Applications for either communications data and/or surveillance authorisations are carefully considered.

“Essex County Council Trading Standards will sometimes consider making applications under the RIPA legislation to gather evidence if normal investigation techniques and sources used to gather evidence are exhausted and prove unsuccessful. We consider this route to be an effective investigatory strategy.”

Source

Chomsky on Obama’s Human Rights Record

0

ERIC BAILEY |

Professor Noam Chomsky is an Institute Professor and Professor (Emeritus) in the Department of Linguistics & Philosophy at Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT). He was educated at the University of Philadelphia and at Harvard University as a Harvard Junior Fellow. He earned his PhD in Linguistics from the University of Philadelphia in 1955. He has spent the 57 years since then teaching at MIT. In addition to his academic work in linguistics, Professor Chomsky has been a noted political activist and philosopher, gaining national recognition in 1967 over his opposition to the Vietnam War and since then has regularly spoken out against US foreign and domestic policies and mainstream American mass media. Between his academic career and his work as a political activist and dissident, he has published over 100 books. On the eve of the 2012 US presidential election, he discussed with Eric Bailey of Torture Magazine America’s human rights record under the administration of President Obama and the military intervention policies that have seen increased use during the Arab Spring.

EB: The US presidential elections are almost upon us and the last four years have seen significant changes in American Federal policy in regards to human rights. One of the few examples of cooperation between the Democratic and Republican Parties over the last four years has been the passing of the National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA) of 2012. This bill has given the United States military the power to arrest American citizens, indefinitely, without charge, trial, or any other form of due process of law and the Obama Administration has and continues to fight a legal battle in Federal Court to prevent that law from being declared unconstitutional. Obama authorized the assassination of three American citizens, including Anwar al-Awlaki and his 16 year old son, admittedly all members of Al Qaeda, — all without judicial review. Additionally, the Guantanamo Bay prison remains open, the Patriot Act has been extended, and the TSA has expanded at breakneck speeds. What is your take on America’s human rights record over the past four years and can you contrast Obama’s policies with those of his predecessor, George W. Bush?

NC: Obama’s policies have been approximately the same as Bush’s, though there have been some slight differences, but that’s not a great surprise. The Democrats supported Bush’s policies. There were some objections on mostly partisan grounds, but for the most part, they supported his policies and it’s not surprising that they have continued to do so. In some respects Obama has gone even beyond Bush. The NDAA, which you mentioned, was not initiated by Obama, (when it passed Congress, he said he didn’t approve of it and wouldn’t implement it) but he nevertheless did sign it into law and did not veto it. It was pushed through by hawks, including Joe Lieberman and others. In fact, there hasn’t been that much of a change. The worst part of the NDAA is that it codified — or put into law — what had already been a regular practice. The practices hadn’t been significantly different. The one part that received public attention is what you mentioned, the part that permits the indefinite detention of American citizens, but why permit the indefinite detention of anybody? It’s a gross violation of fundamental human rights and civil law, going all the way back to the Magna Carta in the 13th Century, so it’s a very severe attack on elementary civil rights, both under Bush and under Obama. It’s bipartisan!

As for the killings, Obama has sharply increased the global assassination campaign. While it was initiated by Bush, it has expanded under Obama and it has included American citizens, again with bipartisan support and very little criticism other than some minor criticism because it was an American. But then again, why should you have the right to assassinate anybody? For example, suppose Iran was assassinating members of Congress who were calling for an attack on Iran. Would we think that’s fine? That would be much more justified, but of course we’d see that as an act of war. The real question is, why assassinate anyone? The government has made it very clear that the assassinations are personally approved by Obama and the criteria for assassination are very weak. If a group of men are seen somewhere by a drone who are, say, loading something into a truck, and there is some suspicion that maybe they are militants, then it’s fine to kill them and they are regarded as guilty unless, subsequently, they are shown to be innocent. That’s the wording that the United States used and it is such a gross violation of fundamental human rights that you can hardly talk about it.

The question of due process actually did arise, since the US does have a constitution and it says that no person shall be deprived of their rights without due process of law — again, this goes back to 13th Century England — so the question arose, “What about due process?” The Obama Justice Department’s Attorney General, Eric Holder, explained that there was due process in these cases because they are discussed first at the Executive Branch. That’s not even a bad joke! The British kings from the 13th Century would have applauded. “Sure, if we talk about it, that’s due process.” And that, again, passed without controversy.

In fact, we might ask the same question about the murder of Osama Bin Laden. Notice I use the term “murder”. When heavily armed elite troops capture a suspect, unarmed and defenseless, accompanied by his wives, and then shoot him, kill him, and dump his body into the ocean without an autopsy, that’s shear assassination. Also notice that I said “suspect”. The reason is because of another principle of law, that also goes back to the 13th Century — that a man is presumed innocent until proven guilty. Before that, he’s a suspect. In the case of Osama Bin Laden, the United States had never formally charged him with 9/11 and part of the reason was that they didn’t know that he was responsible. In fact, eight months after 9/11 and after the most intensive inquiry in history, the FBI explained that it suspected that the 9/11 plot was hatched in Afghanistan, (didn’t mention Bin Laden) and was implemented in the United Arab Emirates, Germany, and of course the United States. That’s eight months after the attack and there’s nothing substantive that they’ve learned since then that does more than increase the suspicion. My own assumption is that the suspicion is almost certainly correct, but there’s a big difference between having a very confident belief and showing someone to be guilty. And even if he’s guilty, he was supposed to be apprehended and brought before a court. That’s British and American law going back eight centuries. He’s not supposed to be murdered and have his body dumped without an autopsy, but support for this is very nearly universal. Actually, I wrote one of the few critical articles on it and my article was bitterly condemned by commentators across the spectrum, including the Left, because the assassination was so obviously just, since we suspected him of committing a crime against us. And that tells you something about the significant, I would say, “moral degeneration” running throughout the whole intellectual class. And yes, Obama has continued this and in some respects extended it, but it hardly comes as a surprise.

The rot is much deeper than that.

EB: It has been just over 10 years since the publication of the Bush Administration’s “Torture Memos”. These memos provided a legal justification for the torture of detainees held by the CIA in connection with the “War on Terror.” The contents of the memos are chilling and have created new debate on torture internationally. Despite all of the promises given by President Obama to close those illegal detention centers, it seems that “black site” activities still occur. What are your views on these detention centers and CIA torture? Also, what do you think about Obama’s promise of CIA reforms in 2008 and how has the reality of his presidency stacked up to those promises?

NC: There have been some presidential orders expressing disapproval of the most extreme forms of torture, but Bagram remains open and uninspected. That’s probably the worst in Afghanistan. Guantanamo is still open, but it’s unlikely that serious torture is going on at Guantanamo. There is just too much inspection. There are military lawyers present and evidence regularly coming out so I suspect that that’s not a torture chamber any more, but it still is an illegal detention chamber, and Bagram and who knows how many others are still functioning. Rendition doesn’t seem to be continuing at the level that it did, but it has been until very recently.

Rendition is just sending people abroad to be tortured. Actually, that’s barred as well by the Magna Carta — the foundation of Anglo-American law. It’s explicitly barred to send somebody across the seas to be punished and tortured. It’s not just done by the United States, either. It’s done all over Western Europe. Britain has participated in it. Sweden has participated. It’s one of the reasons for a lot of the concerns about extraditing Julian Assange to Sweden. Canada has been implicated as was Ireland, but to Ireland’s credit it was one of the few places where there was mass popular protests against allowing the Shannon Airport to be used for CIA rendition. In most countries there has been very little protest or not a word. I don’t know of any recent cases so maybe that policy is no longer being implemented, but it wouldn’t surprise me if it was still in effect.

EB: Moving beyond the US, the Middle East has always been rife with human rights abuses, but the turmoil of the Arab Spring has intensified such abuses in many countries. While the dictatorships in Tunisia and Egypt were toppled without resorting to civil war, countries like Libya, Syria, and Yemen have seen heavy fighting. For America and NATO’s part, there has been yet another military intervention with the Libyan Civil War and only the stubbornness of Russia and China have prevented a similar ntervention in Syria. In both cases, rebel forces have asked, even begged, for American and European help in their war efforts, but have proven to be absolutely uninterested in negotiated settlements with their dictatorial adversaries, even when outside help is not forthcoming. What is your take on military interventions, both the intervention that did occur in Libya and the one that is being called for in Syria? Is it morally justifiable to send Texans and Louisianans into harm’s way to fight in the internal conflicts of Libyans and Syrians? Conversely, can refusing to intervene be justified when entire cities, such as Misrata, Benghazi, Aleppo, and Homs were or are being threatened with utter destruction and tens of thousands of civilians are being killed?

NC: Well, let’s start with Syria. The one thing I disagree with in what you said is that I doubt very much that Russia and China had anything to do with the lack of US or Western military intervention in Syria. In fact my strong suspicion is that the United States, Britain, and France welcomed the Russian veto because that gave them a pretext not to do anything. Now they can say, “How can we do anything? The Russians and the Chinese have vetoed it!” In fact, if they wanted to intervene, they wouldn’t have cared one way or the other about a Russian or Chinese veto. That’s perfectly obvious from history, but they didn’t want to intervene and they don’t want to intervene now. The military and intelligence strategic command centers are just strongly opposed to it. Some oppose it for technical, military, reasons and others because they don’t see anyone they can support in their interests. They don’t particularly like Assad, although he was more or less conformed to US and Israeli interests, but they don’t like the opposition either, especially their Islamist elements, so they just prefer to stay on the side lines. It’s kind of interesting that Israel doesn’t do anything. They wouldn’t have to do much. Israel could easily obilize forces in the Golan Heights (Syrian territory that Israel illegally annexed). They could mobilize forces there, which are only about 40 miles from Damascus, which would compel Assad to send military forces to the border, drawing them away from areas where the rebels are operating. So that would be direct support for the rebels, but without firing a shot and without moving across the border.

But there is no talk of it and I think what that indicates is that Israel, the United States, and their allies just don’t want to take moves that will undermine the regime, just out of self-interest. There is no humanitarian interest involved.

As far as Libya is concerned, we have to be a little cautious, because there were two interventions in Libya. The first one was under the auspices of the United Nations. That’s UN Resolution 1973. That resolution called for a no-fly zone, a ceasefire, and the start of negotiations and diplomacy.

EB: That was the intervention for which the justification was claimed to be the prevention of the destruction of Benghazi?

NC: Well, we don’t know if Benghazi was going to be destroyed, but it was called to prevent a possible attack on Benghazi. You can debate how likely the attack was, but personally, I felt that was legitimate — to try to stop a possible atrocity. However, that intervention lasted about five minutes. Almost immediately, the NATO powers (France and Britain in the lead and the United States following) violated the resolution, radically, and became the air force of the rebels. Nothing in the resolution justified that. It did call for “all necessary steps” to protect civilians, but there’s a big difference between protecting civilians and being the air force for the rebels.

Maybe we should have been in favor of the rebelling forces. That’s a separate question, but this was pretty clearly in violation of the resolution. It certainly wasn’t done for a lack of alternative options. Gaddafi offered a ceasefire. Whether he meant it or not, nobody knows, because it was at once rejected.

Incidentally, this pact was strongly opposed by most of the world. There was virtually no support for it. The African Union (Libya is, after all, an African country) strongly opposed it, right away, called for a ceasefire, and even suggested the introduction of African Union forces to try and reduce the conflict.

The BRICS countries, the most important of the developing countries, (Brazil, Russia, India, China, and South Africa) happened to be having a conference at the time and they strongly opposed the NATO intervention and called for moves towards diplomacy, negotiations, and a ceasefire. Egypt, next door, didn’t participate. Within NATO, Germany refused to participate. Italy refused too, in the beginning, though later they joined the intervention. Turkey held back. Later on they joined, but initially they opposed intervention. Generally speaking, it was almost unilateral. It was the traditional imperial powers (France, Britain, and the United States) which intervened.

In fact it did lead to a humanitarian catastrophe. Maybe it would have happened anyway, but it certainly led to that, especially in the end with the attacks on BaniWalid and Sirte, the last pro-Gadaffi holdouts. They are the main center of Libya’s largest tribe, the Warfalla tribe. Libya is a highly divided tribal society, they are a major tribe, and this was their home center. Many of them were pretty bitter about that. Could it have been resolved through diplomacy and negotiations the way the African Union and BRICS countries suggested? We don’t know.

It’s also worthy of note that the International Crisis Group, which is the main, non-state element that deals with continuing conflicts and crises throughout the world, and is very highly respected, opposed intervention too. They strongly supported negotiations and diplomacy. However, the African Union and others’ positions were barely reported on in the West. Who cares what they say? In fact, if they were reported on at all, they were disparaged on the grounds that these countries had had close relations with Gaddafi. In fact, they did, but so did Britain and the United States, right to the end.

In any event, the intervention did take place and now one hopes for the best, but it’s not a very pretty picture. You can read an account of it in the current issue of the London Review of Books by Hugh Roberts, who was, at the time, the North African Director of the International Crisis Group and a specialist on the region. He opposed the intervention and described the outcome as pretty hopeless chaos that is undercutting the hopes for an eventual rise of a sort of sensible, democratic, nationalism.

So that wasn’t very pretty, but what about the other countries? Well, the countries that are most significant to the United States and the West, generally, are the oil dictatorships and they remain very stable. There were efforts to try and join the Arab Spring, but they were crushed, very harshly, with not a word from the Western powers. Sometimes it was quite violent, as in eastern Saudi Arabia and in Bahrain, which were Shiite areas, mostly, but it resulted in at most a tap on the wrist by the Western Powers. They clearly wanted the oil dictatorships to remain. That’s the center of their power.

In Tunisia, which had mostly French influence, the French supported the dictatorship until the very end. In fact, they were still supporting it after demonstrations were sweeping the country. Finally, at the last second, they conceded that their favorite dictator had to go. In Egypt, where the United States and Britain were the main influences, it was the same. Obama supported the dictator Mubarak until virtually the last minute — until the army turned against him. It became impossible to support him anymore so they urged him to leave and make a transition to a similar system.

All of that is quite routine. That’s the standard operating procedure for dealing with a situation where your favorite dictator is getting into trouble. There is case after case like that. What you do in that case is support the dictator to the very end, regardless of how vicious and bloody the he is. Then when it becomes impossible, say because the army or the business classes have turned against him, then ease him out somewhere, (sometimes with half the government’s treasury in his pocket) declare your love for democracy, and try to restore the old system. That’s pretty much what’s happening in Egypt.

Eric Bailey writes for Torture: Asian and Global Perspectives, a print and online magazine published by the Asian Human Rights Commission based in Hong Kong and the Danish Institute Against Torture (DIGNITY) in Denmark. Torture: Asian and Global Perspectives is a new initiative which focuses on torture and its related issues globally. Writers interested in having their research on this subject published, may submit their articles to: torturemag@ahrc.asia 

Published on Counterpunch

Why We Torture

0

Gareth Peirce |

The last several years have found us in the midst of more catastrophes than we could ever, in our worst nightmares, have dreamed of. We could never have envisaged that the history of the new century would encompass the destruction and distortion of fundamental Anglo-American legal and political constitutional principles in place since the 17th century.

Habeas corpus has been abandoned for the outcasts of the new order in both the US and the UK, secret courts have been created to hear secret evidence, guilt has been inferred by association, torture and rendition nakedly justified (in the UK our government’s lawyers continue to argue positively for the right to use the product of both) and vital international conventions consolidated in the aftermath of the Second World War – the Geneva Convention, the Refugee Convention, the Torture Convention – have been deliberately avoided or ignored.

It is the bitterest of ironies that John Lilburne, the most important organizer of the rights we in this country and the United States claim and on which our respective constitutions, written and unwritten, were built, achieved this in large part as a consequence of his having been himself subjected to torture, to accusations based on secret evidence and heard by a secret court, to being shackled and held in extremes of isolation which exposed him nevertheless to public humiliation and condemnation.

The worst excesses of the last ten years, which destroyed the certainties of those hard-won rights, should have sounded loud alarms, not least because of that precise historical parallel; one key in attempting to hang on to legal and moral concepts under attack is to remember their origin.

Lilburne, an intractable young Puritan, with a strong sense of his rights as a freeborn Englishman and a smattering of law, in 1637 was summoned before the Court of Star Chamber – a court comprising nothing more than a small committee of the Privy Council, without a jury, empowered to investigate. Lilburne had recently been in Holland and was charged, o n the basis of information from an informant, with sending loosely defined “fatuous and scandalous” religious books to England. His defence was straightforward: “I am clear I have sent none.” Thereafter he refused to answer questions based on allegations kept secret from him as to his association with others suspected of involvement in the sending of the books: “I think by the law of the land that I may stand upon my just defence, and that my accusers ought to be brought face to face to justify what they accuse me of.” For his refusal, he was fined 500 pounds, a fortune for an apprentice, and was lashed to a cart and whipped thought the streets of London from Fleet to Westminster.

Lilburne was locked in a pillory in an unbearable posture (in today’s terminology a “stress position”), but yet exhorted all who would listen to resist the tyranny of the bishops, repeating biblical texts to the crowd applicable to the wrongs done to him and their rights. On being required to incriminate himself: “No man should be compelled to be his own executioner.” He survived two and a half years in Fleet prison, gagged and kept in solitary confinement, shackled and starving. The first act of the Long Parliament in November 1642 was to set him free, to abolish the Court of Star Chamber and to adopt a resolution that its sentence was “illegal and against the liberty of the subject, and also bloody, cruel, wicked, barbarous and tyrannical.”

Lilburne’s principled and public stance and the extraordinary political movement of which he was part, the Levellers, produced far more than a brief reaction of abhorrence to the use of torture and arbitrary imprisonment. By the end of the 17th century, there had crystallized the foundation of the concepts upon which we draw now (and which we constantly choose to forget or ignore) — most importantly the concept of inalienable rights that pertain to the individual and not to the state. The Levellers insisted that the inalienable rights were possessed by the people and were conferred on them not by Parliament, but by God; no justification by the state could therefore ever justify their violation. For the preservation of these and the limitation of parliamentary power, the Levellers formulated a written constitution; never adopted in England, in the new world it became a political reality. In both countries, due process — the legal concept that gives effect to the idea of fairness — was born from these ideas.

Once evidence of any country’s willingness to resort to torture is exposed, reactions of decency and humanity can be invoked without the necessity of legal explanation. Less likely is any instinctive reaction to evidence in the destruction of concepts of procedural fairness. Yet, in the imprecision and breadth of accusations, leading in turn to the banning of books and the criminalization of ideas and religious thought, and in the wrong committed by secret courts hearing secret evidence, the lessons of John Lilburne and Star Chamber have been in the last ten years deliberately abandoned and sustained battles have still to be fought to reclaim the majority.

The shocking, reckless and ruthless disregard of all of these concepts seen in recent years is neither new nor unique to this country or to the US. The history of regions other than our own shows how fragile are the laws and their applications that we assume protect us when faced with a government determined to follow a contrary path. Repeatedly, historically, even nations which have recently emerged from the fires of hell remember the experience as it relates to themselves, but yet consign others to the same fate.

Fewer than ten years after then end of WWII, and only eight years from the UN Declaration of Human Rights, the first reports of the use of torture by the French against the Algerians fighting their war of independence began to emerge, with justifications that today appear very familiar. The first official reports in 1955 admitted some violence had been done to prisoners suspected of being connected to the FLN, but that this was “not quite torture”; “The water and the electricity methods, provided they are properly used, are said to produce a shock which is more psychological than physical and therefore do not constitute excessive cruelty.”

Sartre articulated the shock of realizing that torture had reappeared and was being justified so soon after it had been categorized as an aberration found only among psychotic and degenerate governments willing to violate all universally understood and recognized principles of justice: “In 1943 in the Rue Lauriston, Frenchmen were screaming in agony and pain; all France could hear them. In those days the outcome of the war was uncertain and we did not want to think about the future. Only one thing seemed impossible in any circumstances: that one day men should be made to scream by those acting in our name.”

The illustration on the cover my book, Dispatches From the Dark Side, is of Shafiq Rasul, a young Englishman from Tipton in the West Midlands, who within hours of returning from unlawful captivity in Guantanamo Bay understood the need to put on record the reality of imprisonment there. For the next month, with Asif Iqbal and Ruhal Ahmed, he struggled to prepare a report, illustrated by sketches in the absence of any photographs, of what had been done to them. Soon thereafter, the legal challenge his family had initiated when he was first reported to be in Guantanamo (Rasul v. Bush) was decided by the US Supreme Court in favor of Shafiq Rasul. What argument was won? That the prisoners in Guantanamo Bay should have access to legal remedies and to lawyers who could, most importantly of all, for the first time go in and, bit by bit, bring out reports, not just of the physical and mental horrors inflicted by or on behalf of Americans, but of the complicity of this country (at every level) in their unlawful captivity.

We were never meant to know any of this. The still-unanswered question of burning relevance, however, remains: once we know, what do we then do?

© 2012 Adbusters Media Foundation

US Recognizes Unelected Terrorists as Syrian ‘Representatives’

Tony Cartalucci, Activist Post | 

As expected, after a long pause of feigned “consideration,” the US has recognized the militants it has been arming, funding, aiding logistically and supporting diplomatically since as early as 2007, as the “legitimate representatives of the Syrian people,” with the added caveat, “in opposition to the Assad regime.” The Wall Street Journal would report that US President Barack Obama’s announcement actually read:

The Syrian National Coalition for Revolutionary and Opposition Forces is reflective and representative enough of the Syrian population that we consider them the legitimate representative of the Syrian people in opposition to the Assad regime.

The bizarre, uncertain wording sends a message of both uncertainty and resounding illegitimacy, indicating that the US itself recognizes the true nature of the so-called “Syrian” opposition is apparent to an increasing number of people both in public office and across the public, and that a certain degree of rhetorical distance must be kept.

Liberty groups slam DNA research database

0

Civil liberties groups have reacted very poorly to a proposed new NHS genetic profiling scheme. NHS plans for a £100m DNA “data infrastructure” of certain NHS patients to aid medical research have drawn sharp protests from critics, concerned about the privacy implications of such a system.

Despite specifically stating the database would only contain anonymised data – though this exception can be broken “when it is used for an individual′s own care” – and that “the privacy and confidentiality of NHS patients will be paramount” in its use, the news still generated headlines about security perils.

Exploiting highly sensitive patient data

One organisation, for example, GeneWatch UK, was extensively quoted to the effect the plan “amounts to building a DNA database in the NHS by stealth,” while others accused the government of planning to exploit highly sensitive patient data by selling it to pharmaceutical researchers for commercial exploitation.

The idea, in any case, is to pluck out details of 100,000 or so patients so as to build an information structure to allow probes into their genetic details to get a better handle on key problems like cancer formation. The data will consist of the DNA of NHS patients from England, sequenced over three to five years and then analysed in an attempt (to quote the Prime Minister, David Cameron) to “unlock the power of DNA data”.

“This new plan will mean we are the first country in the world to use DNA codes in the mainstream of the health service,” he predicted.

The use of genetics in patients

“We′re now getting to the point where the use of genetics in patients can actually help us deliver medicines and understand cancer much better, and to understand a range of diseases in a much more precise way,” Sir John Bell, professor of medical sciences at Oxford University and the government′s adviser on genetics, went on to tell the BBC.

Clearly, as genomic sequencing offers so many potential benefits to research, the idea could have great potential. But it also has the potential to cause yet more strains between the Tories and their current political partners, the Liberal Democrats.

When the Coalition was formed 2010, one of the first things the Lib Dems insisted on was the dismantling of various (as they saw them) ‘Big Brother′ databases, such as the National Identity register and the ContactPoint database, as well as the scrapping of the ID card scheme. Could security concerns over this new form of DNA register also become as contentious a proposition inside the Cabinet?

Source

It’s Back!!!

0



Red-baiting lives!
Actually it never waned. Like most evils, it lurks in the shadows and under rocks until it is called on again to serve the rich and powerful. Like racism, red-baiting is a tool of division and distraction. It is designed to separate those who are weak or wavering from those determined to change a malignant political and social system. Red-baiting harnesses fear to tarnish those seeking social justice. Red-baiters sow cynicism, dampen ardor, nurture doubts and dissolve unity.
A renewed and virulent strain of anti-Communism has surfaced in the US, stretching from the imbecilic film Red Dawn to the rabid media bashing of Oliver Stone’s ten-part television series, The Untold History of the United States.
Red Dawn, currently showing in hundreds of theaters, has grossed over $31 million in revenue through December 2. Based on a moronic plot of an invasion of the Pacific Northwest by troops of the Peoples’ Democratic Republic of Korea, the movie postures young patriots as forging a resistance movement against their Asian aggressors. Only in Hollywood could writers craft a plot that features a relatively poor country of twenty-five million people mounting a naked, distant aggression against the most economically powerful country in history with well over ten times the population. What next, an invasion of the Southwest from Nicaragua?
Oh, sorry, that movie was made in 1984! Actually, the current Red Dawn, found its dubious inspiration in the Reagan-era movie with the same title and an equally virulent commitment to red-baiting. We have John Milius, and his equally demented Hollywood colleagues, to thank for the fear-mongering of Red Dawn I.  Screenwriter/Director Milius bears responsibility for such stupid –though less politically dishonest — movies like Magnum Force and Conan, the Barbarian. But where those movies only enshrined ugly politics and employed right-wing icons, Red Dawn Iadvanced the political agenda of US imperialism and crudely served to prod domestic reaction. At a time when the struggle for international peace and détente was at a critical juncture, the film was heartily welcomed by opponents of rapprochement.
Today, Red Dawn II emerges not as a counterforce to the left, but as a pre-emption of a feared rising of the left. Even with most of the US left’s leaders chained to the Democratic Party or mired in opportunism, the rich, the powerful, and their minions recognize that the profoundly wounded economy and the dysfunctional political system provide both the seeds and fertile soil for a powerful peoples’ movement. And they hope to pollute it with red-baiting before any sprouts arise. Even with its crude, wildly implausible plot, Red Dawn II is meant to discredit any “red” or even “pink” movement before it matures.
Likewise, Oliver Stone’s new TV series on Showtime has been met with furious bashing on the part of the professional anti-Communist toadies of the mainstream media. Setting out to correct the “official” high school civics class histories of the Cold War period, Stone and his historian collaborator, Peter Kuznick, produced a ten-part serial that challenges knee-jerk anti-Communism and seeks to balance the slanders of Cold Warriors. The Untold History of the United States proposes a counter history, an account built around a number of “what ifs…” that chart a different historical trajectory absent a rapacious and predatory military-industrial complex and a destructive CIA.
Of course this does not set well with the rabid guardians of the anti-red canon. As Peter Kuznick chronicles in a recent appeal to Historians Against the War, the red-baiters are out in force.
Ronald Radosh — famous for crafting a career from equating Reds or “fellow travelers” with NKVD or MVD agents–makes an astonishing leap to connect Stone and Kuznick to the long-departed Soviet security agencies. He claims to detect similarities just short of plagiarism (leaving his claim just short of libelous) between The Untold History and a book by the late Carl Marzani, We Can Be Friends. To square his circle, Radosh proffers that Marzani “…told this very story in We Can Be Friends. A secret member of the American Communist party who had worked during the war in the OSS, Marzani later was proved by evidence from Soviet archives and Venona decryptions to have been a KGB (then the NKVD) operative. His book was published privately by his own Soviet-subsidized firm. It was the first example of what came to be called “Cold War revisionism.”
Thus, by association–a favorite tactic of red-baiters–Stone/Kuznick becomes linked to the KGB through the alleged operative, Carl Marzani. Others have shown how fast and loose Radosh has toyed with the charges of “operative” or “agent” based on the thin evidence of “association.” But Marzani’s “secret” or open identification with Communism in 1952 is of no relevance to the truth conveyed by We Can Be Friends or The Untold History. Marzani argues for the following:
The next step to peace is to sit down around a conference table and negotiate. Negotiations, it should be emphasized, do not require friendship. Negotiators can sit down unsmiling and bargain grimly, yet both sides are aware that a settlement must be reached.(p.369)
If Marzani’s simple, but sane formula for improving US/Soviet relations was inspired by the NKVD, then credit to the NKVD!
We Can Be Friends was published by Topical Book Publishers. For those Reds with something to say in 1952, self-publication was often the only route. In the teeth of McCarthyite repression, leftists could not get mainstream publishers to even consider their manuscripts. Outside of the exceptional renegade publishers like Cameron and Associates, left-wing authors were forced to turn to funding a few hundred copies, as did Howard Fast with his now celebrated historical novel, Spartacus. The dark ages of the 1950s were certainly made brighter, if it was necessary for the NKVD to subsidize these fine books!
The quality of Radosh’s scholarship can be judged by his emphatic claim that We Can Be Friends “…was the first example of what came to be called ‘Cold War revisionism.’” A casual glance at my tattered old copy reveals a bibliography that cites earlier writers like Frederick L. Schuman and I. F. Stone who decisively rejected the Cold War canon well before Marzani’s book arrived on the scene.
Following Radosh’s lead, other rabid anti-Communists like Michael Moynihan joined the fray in attacking Stone and Kuznick. And to its shame, The New York Times unleashed its slime merchant hireling, Andrew Goldman, to mount a bizarre ad hominem against Oliver Stone. Goldman had just served his four-week suspension for publicly inquiring of two female interlocutors whether they had slept their way to the top of their professions. Sadly, this attack well represented the level of integrity shown by most of these ruling class courtiers.
To these professional red-baiters must be added the host of professors who peddle lurid books on the “Evil Empire.” Most active is Anne Applebaum, journalist turned academic, who authors books portraying the Soviet and socialist Eastern European experience as wholly oppressive and thoroughly unpopular. Her current book, Iron Curtain, enjoys wide circulation and copious publicity from the corporate media. Applebaum’s ideological bias (her husband is Minister of Foreign Affairs in the ultra-nationalist Polish government) and selective scholarship are seldom challenged by her colleagues.
Applebaum’s work indirectly suggests that Soviet “evil” is on a par with Nazi evil or, as she and her ilk crudely put it, “Stalin’s crimes were the same or worse than Hitler’s crimes.” Yale professor, Timothy Snyder, shares no such hesitation. His popular book, Badlands, boldly embraces the equation of Hitler and Stalin. Indeed, his current career seems based upon his widely speculative, broadly calculated, and poorly evidenced victim calculation. For Snyder, there would seem to be no natural deaths in the Soviet Union or socialist Eastern Europe. In his energetic counting, victims of the Warsaw insurrection in 1944, urged by the Polish government-in-exile to rise, arguably belong on the Soviet side of the ledger since the Red Army didn’t rescue them. Of course the victims of natural famines are also laid at the Soviet doorstep. Snyder pursues his head counting with an almost perverse determination and a theological certainty.
The revival of open and widespread red-baiting is ignored by liberals at their own peril. Like the inquisitions of old, the immediate object may be the dissidents, the ideological deviants, but the real design is to terrorize the majority into submission and conformity. In the US, anti-Communism and its counterpart, racism, directly target ideological and ethnic minorities, but prove to be of even greater use in fracturing, distracting, and deluding the majority. Rampant racism and rabid anti-Communism serve the rich and powerful well by closing avenues to unity and social justice. Surely the red-baiting charges of “socialism” leveled at right-centrist Obama underline this point and send a clear message to liberals of the dangers lurking in accommodating the alarm of “Reds!” 
Zoltan Zigedy
zoltanzigedy@gmail.com

Man arrested in Jimmy Savile probe

0

A man in his 60s is arrested in London by detectives as part of Operation Yewtree, which is looking into sexual abuse in the wake of the Jimmy Savile scandal.

The man was arrested at 6.45am on Monday on suspicion of sexual offences, and was taken to a south London police station.

Police investigating historic sexual abuse allegations under Operation Yewtree have divided those arrested into three categories – “Savile”, referring to the disgraced DJ Jimmy Savile, “Savile and others”, and “others”.

Monday’s arrest is under the category “others”, meaning it is an arrest unconnected to Savile.

Previous arrests

It is the sixth arrest as a part of Yewtree. Other arrests under the “others” category include radio DJ Dave Lee Travis and, most recently, publicist Max Clifford.

Mr Clifford last week protested his innocence, saying: “Anyone who really knew me all those years ago and those who have known me since will have no doubt that I would never act in the way that I have today been accused.”

Other names arrested include comedian Freddie Starr and disgraced former pop star Gary Glitter. There are currently 3 0officers working on Operation Yewtree, and the investigation is understood to have cost £2m.

Source

FDA Expands Irradiation of Food Supply; Harmonizing with Codex Alimentarius

0

Brandon Turbeville, Activist Post | 

Demonstrating the lack of concern held by regulatory agencies for public safety or public opinion as well as the increasing attempts to become compliant with Codex Alimentarius regulations, the FDA has recently expanded the amount of ionized radiation that can be used to treat unrefrigerated raw meat.

As reported by Food Safety News, the two new policies decided upon by the FDA were issued in response to two petitions filed in 1999 by the Food Safety and Inspection Service of the U.S. Department of Agriculture.

While the previous policy was that only refrigerated or frozen meats could be irradiated, the new rule allows for the irradiation of unrefrigerated raw meat. The second rule change allows for increasing the dose of ionizing radiation in poultry from 3.0 kGY to 4.5 kGy.

Although a period for public comment is always set aside for regulatory agency decisions regarding potential changes to policy, the FDA promptly ignored the many comments it received from individuals all over the country as well as consumer advocacy groups which requested the denial of the two FSIS petitions.

25 more celebrities face probe by Jimmy Savile police

0

THE police probe into sex abuse by Jimmy Savile could also be investigating claims against 25 other celebrities, it emerged last night.

The potential suspects, mostly made up of retired TV and radio stars, have been given to detectives in a list of tipoffs, according to a report.

Officers are said to believe there is enough evidence to arrest at least a dozen of those named.

The celebrities arrested and questioned so far have included singer Gary Glitter, 68, and 69-year-old comedian Freddie Starr.

Celebrity PR guru Max Clifford, 69, was last week questioned on suspicion of sexual assault in the part of the
Savile inquiry looking at separate claims described as “others”.

He was bailed until later this month. All strongly deny allegations against them.

Another half dozen stars are set to be arrested later this month and in the new year, according to the report.

A source close to Operation Yewtree, the police inquiry set up in response to the claims against Savile, told a Sunday newspaper: “We are halfway through.

“They all tend to be white men of the Savile generation.”

In some cases, victims are said to have offered the names of their alleged abusers while refusing to give witness
statements to police.

But in at least a dozen cases, detectives are reported to believe there is enough evidence for the celebrities to
be detained.

Max Clifford was the fifth suspect to be arrested — and sixth person to be quizzed — last week.

His arrest followed the questioning of a man in his 80s from Berkshire, who was interviewed under caution on suspicion of sexual offences.

DJ Dave Lee Travis, 67, was the fourth man to be held and was subsequently bailed in November.

Former BBC producer Wilfred De’ath, 75, remains on bail following his arrest.

Both Lee Travis and Mr De’ath deny wrongdoing. A spokesman for the Metropolitan Police said the force was “not giving a running commentary on this investigation”.

Last month Scotland Yard said it was dealing with about 450 potential victims, the vast majority of whom
claimed they had fallen prey to Savile.

Officers are looking at three strands within their inquiry — allegations against Savile, those where suspects are said to have committed crimes with Savile, and separate claims against other stars.

Voter registration: Data checks ‘accurate as ID cards’

0

Officials are being allowed to trawl databases including the Royal Mail and the Student Loans Company to track down missing voters in a new trial.

Data matching could be used to fill in gaps in the electoral register ahead of the launch of individual voter registration in 2014.

Ministers say the technique is as accurate as ID cards – but it has raised privacy concerns.

Labour peers said it would have been easier if ID cards had been introduced.

The ID card scheme was scrapped by the coalition government on privacy, cost and civil liberties grounds – but electoral registration officers are now faced with the problem of verifying the identity of millions of voters without a central register.

‘Astonishingly cheaper’

Labour peer Baroness Hayter said the government “is no doubt ruing the day” it decided to scrap ID cards.

“All these hurdles they are now trying to go through to get a more accurate electoral register would not have been there if we had kept ID cards,” she told BBC News.

Labour peer Lord Maxton has called in the House of Lords for “smart card technology with a central database”.

But Lib Dem minister Lord Wallace of Saltaire said it was possible to verify people’s identities using information held on existing government databases.

He told peers “we do not rue the day when ID cards were dropped” because new techniques for comparing databases allowed “identity assurance and a simpler relationship between the citizen and the state, which would not only be more efficient but astonishingly cheaper than the original ID scheme”.

Under the government’s voter registration plan, each member of a household would have to register individually.

At the moment, one householder supplies details of other people living at the address.

The aim is to cut down on electoral fraud – but it depends on being able to track down individuals who have never been on the electoral register or who have moved house and dropped off the system.

An Electoral Commission investigation in Northern Ireland, where voter registration has been in use since 2004, found there had been a “serious decline” in the accuracy of the electoral register because officials have been unable to keep pace with people changing addresses.

Student accommodation

The watchdog says a canvas of households should be carried out urgently, rather than just relying on voters to amend their own details.

The Electoral Registration and Administration Bill, which is due to resume its passage into law shortly, includes an annual canvas for the UK when the scheme is first launched – but the Electoral Commission is urging the government to make it a permanent feature.

The hardest to reach group is young people who are coming up to 18 or who may be living in temporary student accommodation.

Once they have been identified and contacted, in some cases by a visit from an official, they will be invited to join the electoral register – they can refuse but face fines if they do not respond at all.

Under the data matching trial, 22 local authorities in England and Wales will be allowed to share data from the Higher Education Funding Council, the Royal Mail, the Student Loans Company, the Department for Work and Pensions, the Education Department and the Welsh government.

“Identity assurance is something you can now do by matching information in different databases without sharing the contents of that data,” Lord Wallace told BBC News.

‘Data overlap’

Checking names and addresses against the DWP’s National Insurance database and other databases held by government agencies could “knock fraudulent entries out of the system”.

For example, university halls of residence currently submit lists of residents to the electoral register, meaning many foreign students, who are not entitled to vote in the UK, are on it – something that would not be the case with individual registration, he said.

But he admitted there are concerns over privacy – particularly if the trial is extended to privately-owned databases such as those belonging to credit reference agencies like Experian or tenancy deposit schemes, as some people want.

“How you manage the overlap between public and private data” was a “delicate area,” he told BBC News.

“National sovereignty goes completely out of the window,” said the peer, because “it is quite possible your data is being kept in a server in Seattle”.

Nick Pickles, of Big Brother Watch, warned against sharing data held by government agencies with private companies, saying it could be used to target direct mail or for other commercial purposes without the individual’s consent.

Source

UK watchdog probes legality of multi-platform ad tracking software

Britain’s Information Commissioner is examining whether a US company whose technology lets advertisers track users from one device to another should be allowed to operate in the country. Californian-based Drawbridge already claims to have a database of 200 million users whose profiles come from analysing ‘cookies’, following trails of clicks and indicating the likelihood of whether they emanate from a single person.The data, it’s claimed, can then be used to follow users irrespective of if they switch from, say, a laptop to a smartphone, thus allowing advertisers to target them with products and services relevant to their interests.

Though the data contains no login names or location information and instead relies on ‘bridging algorithms’, Drawbridge says that users’ web habits alone are sufficient to target them precisely and follow them across different web browsing platforms.

“We are triangulating the user’s behaviour. As we observe them, we are able to hone in,” Drawbridge CEO Kamakshi Sivaramakrishnan told the MIT Technology Review.

Even so Britain’s Information Commissioner, responsible for overseeing data privacy matters, has already said that before Drawbridge could launch in the UK it would need to prove its data was genuinely anonymous and that it couldn’t be used by others to unravel a person’s identity.

Said a spokesman, “In addition, any advertiser using its service would also have to do a good job of telling people why they keep seeing particular adverts.”

Source

NSA warrantless surveillance debate looms

A measure granting the government expansive power to intercept electronic communications in the United States without a warrant is set to expire this month, setting up a sharp debate in the Senate over how to balance privacy against national security.

The government uses the measure, contained in a law known as the FISA Amendments Act, to intercept e-mails and telephone calls of foreigners located overseas under a blanket approval issued once a year by a special court. But communications of U.S. citizens talking with the foreigners also are being scooped up.

The intelligence community argues that the measure is essential to protect against foreign threats and has made renewing the law its top legislative priority. The House approved a five-year extension in September by a vote of 301 to 118. The Senate must vote by the end of the year or the authority expires.

Opposition has surfaced among a small, bipartisan group of senators worried that Americans engaged in harmless communications with foreigners could be monitored without a warrant or other privacy protections.

Under the law, a special court whose proceedings are secret issues a yearly certification that permits the government to monitor the e-mails and phone calls of foreigners if the government can satisfy the court that its procedures will target people located overseas and ensure the privacy of U.S. citizens caught in the monitoring. Targeting the communications of a U.S. citizen or anyone inside the United States requires a warrant.

One of the complaints of the senators and civil liberties advocates is that the government refuses to disclose the number of U.S. citizens and residents whose communications have been collected or reviewed under the law.

“You have this potentially large pile of communications and nobody knows how many Americans are in that pile,” Sen. Ron Wyden, D-Ore., a member of the Senate Intelligence Committee, said in an interview.

Wyden has threatened to block a vote on reauthorization unless Senate leaders agree to a debate on changes that would add safeguards for U.S. persons.

Twelve other senators, including conservative Sen. Mike Lee, R-Utah, have joined Wyden in pushing to require the government to provide an estimate of how many communications involving U.S. citizens have been collected under Section 702 of the statute. The senators also want the government to obtain a court-approved warrant before deliberately searching electronic data for individual Americans.

“The government ought not be able to search through that database for information about a U.S. citizen without a court order because that becomes akin to a warrantless wiretap,” Lee said in an interview.

The law was passed in 2008 as an update to the 1978 Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act. It expanded the government’s power to conduct electronic surveillance on U.S. soil for foreign targets overseas without individual warrants.

The Obama administration, like the George W. Bush administration, has defended the program as vital to gathering quickly information about the plans and identities of terrorists and other threats.

“There is no question that we’ve gotten valuable information that has led to intelligence and national security successes,” said Robert Litt, general counsel for the Office of the Director of National Intelligence, in a press call this year. “This would really create a risk for our security if we lost this capability.” He cited “specific incidents both involving terrorist attacks and other kinds of threats where we have been able to thwart them or gain insight into them as a result of this collection activity,” but he declined to elaborate.

Litt said estimating the number of communications by U.S. citizens collected “incidentally” under FISA cannot be done with any degree of accuracy. But he said the law is not “a tool for spying on Americans.”

Jameel Jaffer, American Civil Liberties Union deputy legal director, countered that the law provides the government with too much leeway. “It’s a law that gives the government almost unchecked power to monitor Americans’ communications,” he said in an interview. “It’s indefensible that anyone’s even thinking about reauthorizing it without asking questions about the law’s use.”

The ACLU sued the government over the law’s constitutionality. A federal judge threw out the suit, saying the plaintiffs lacked standing, but the U.S. Court of Appeals for the 2nd Circuit reinstated it. The case was argued in October before the Supreme Court, which is considering only whether the plaintiffs have standing to proceed with their challenge.

The procedures involved in monitoring foreign communications remain largely hidden. Officials in the communications industry said the government gives companies the e-mail addresses, phone numbers, user names and other identifiers of foreign targets to tap.

The lists could run to dozens or hundreds of identities, said the officials, who spoke on the condition of anonymity to discuss sensitive details. The companies divert electronic copies of the communications in real time to a special FBI facility in Northern Virginia. In the case of e-mail, the government may receive virtual replicas of people’s entire in-boxes, the officials said.

The National Security Agency stores the data for translation and analysis. Automated tools help analysts find links in the communications among, say, the e-mails of five members of a suspected terrorist cell.

“Some sniffer is looking for similarities among their contacts,” said a former federal official, who spoke on the condition of anonymity because of the topic’s sensitivity. “If all five are talking to a sixth, that sixth is going to be a person of interest.”

The law allows collection of communications across a broad spectrum of “foreign intelligence” topics and threats, which include nuclear proliferation, foreign diplomats and extremist groups. Critics say the wide range increases the chances that Americans who are not targets of surveillance will have their communications picked up.

Intelligence officials say a warrant requirement would be burdensome and unnecessary, given that the information has been lawfully collected. They note that they have regularly briefed Congress on the program’s operations.

Their reports to Congress have identified no cases of intentional or systematic misuse, according to a Senate Judiciary Committee review. But Wyden said the special court has already found that the government’s efforts to protect the privacy of U.S. citizens failed on at least one occasion.

Source

Councils banned from DVLA database

0

More than 150 town halls have been blocked from accessing the DVLA database after breaking rules protecting motorists’ privacy.

In dozens of cases, councils were caught making unauthorised access to the database – which contains personal details of every licensed driver in the UK.

In others, officials were barred because they hadn’t kept proper records of who was accessing the database, how often and for what reason.

The councils are among nearly 300 Government bodies or agencies who have been stripped of their DVLA access in the past three years.

Councils use the database lawfully to track drivers for parking fines, bus lane tickets and other infringements, but also to prosecute so-called ‘environmental crimes’ such as littering and dog fouling.

Privacy campaigners said the figures showed it was impossible to protect the public’s private data from unauthorised State snooping.

The figures were published by Big Brother Watch only days before a major report is expected to blow a major hole in Government plans for a database of internet activity branded a ‘snoopers’ charter’.

A committee of MPs is expected to say that the Home Office’s argument for keeping details of every internet click – including all web activity, Facebook, emails and even online video-games is flawed.

Nick Pickles, director of Big Brother Watch, said: ‘Concerns about the DVLA database have been voiced for several years, but it is remarkable that in just three years nearly half the country’s councils have been suspended from looking at motorists’ information.

‘The same concerns exist about a range of other databases and the public are right to be worried that their privacy is at risk across a range of Government services.

‘The question is whether these suspensions hinder staff trying to do their job, while the staff doing the unauthorised searches escape proper punishment.‘

A total of 294 councils and other public bodies had their access to the DVLA databases suspended or terminated in the past three years.

Among them were major agencies such as Transport for London which collects the Congestion Charge.

Another was Sussex Police, which had its access suspended for a month earlier this year because of ‘audit issues’. Some 38 councils had their access permanently closed down.

Some suspensions followed access by staff who were not authorised to make enquiries. Others were the result of poor record keeping, or a failure to respond to DVLA requests for audit information.

Once approved to view the DVLA database, councils are given direct access with a username and password – giving them largely unrestricted access.

It allows them to get at a range of information on drivers and vehicles, including convictions and penalty points, medical information and drivers’ home addresses.

On Monday a joint committee of MPs and Peers is expected to criticise the draft Communications Data Bill.

The controversial law will require internet companies to store details of emails, website visits and social media messages for 12 months.

The Home Office argue it is necessary to track terrorists and tackle organised crime gangs and online paedophiles.

But the report is expected to say the case has not been made – and urge ministers to go back to the drawing board.

The report is expected to spur Lib Dem leader Nick Clegg into staunchly opposing the Bill, which Lib Dem MPs are implacably opposed to.

Mr Pickles added: ‘If the current system cannot even protect basic information about motorists and vehicles, how can the public have faith that a host of information about who they email and what websites they look at will be kept secure and only accessed by those who are supposed to be doing so?’

‘The public do not have confidence that their data is being kept securely and their privacy is not being violated on a routine basis.’

A DVLA spokesman said: ‘DVLA takes its duties with regard to the use of its data very seriously.

‘The Agency operates a stringent system with regard to electronic access to its data by Local Authorities, including regular audits.

‘Where the Agency becomes aware of any issues relating to the use of its data, it will investigate and take swift action where appropriate.’

Source

Cameron and Obama’s Hired Thugs Now Butchering Their Way Through Syria

0
David Cameron

Barak Obama and David Cameron, flanked by their ‘diplomats’ Hillary Clinton and William Hague, are all doing their bit to increase the bloodshed in Syria by backing the FSA rebel, al Qaida jihadist terrorists, who are presently working their way through the once stable country like termites eating through a once healthy home.

Blood comes cheap, and with budgets tight at home, western leaders are happy with the current arrangement. Rebel terrorist fighters are being paid between $500 and $2000 per month, and arms are free of charge through various NATO proxies and Gulf States. Their job assignment is a blunt one — to intimidate loyal pro-Syrian citizens, and to butcher thousands of innocent civilians — all in all, inflicting a reign of terror much like that one engineered by Washington in Nicaragua during the 1980′s. This is who Washington, London and Paris are backing in their quest to finally bring Syria under their globalist umbrella.

We have never have witnessed this level of open international criminality and hypocrisy by our puppet leaders in the West.

At least with Iraq, Bush and Blair tried to be creative with their lying by making up unbelievable stories of ”mobile anthrax labs”.

Nine years on, our well-paid elite political prostitutes don’t even bother with fish stories, they just put the weapons in the hands of terrorists, and pay these professional murderers to kill indiscriminately.

All this will eventually bring shame to the citizens of western nations in the long run, much the same way that the Nazis brought shame to the German people (but no shame to the corporations, bankers and elites though — because you can only feel shame if you have a conscious to begin with).

They will keep using the same tried and tested methods, unless they can be stopped by their own electorate.

Here is a video promoting Obama and Cameron’s favoured operatives in Syria…

US Congress bans word ‘lunatic’ in federal legislation

The sharply divided US Congress has been able to agree on one thing at least – that the word “lunatic” should be banned.

The House of Representatives voted 398-1 on Wednesday to strike the term from all federal legislation, after the Senate did the same in May.

The measure is designed to remove language that has become outdated or demeaning from the US code.

The bill will now go to President Barack Obama for his signature.

Senator Kent Conrad, one of the sponsors of the measure, said: “Federal law should reflect the 21st Century understanding of mental illness and disease, and that the continued use of this pejorative term has no place in the US code.”

The word still appears in some parts of federal law – a section of financial regulation, for example, addresses the power of a bank to act as a “committee of estates of lunatics”.

The only “no” vote came from Texas congressman Louie Gohmert, who said it was madness for lawmakers to waste time on such a measure when more high-profile issues loomed, such as the federal debt.

“Not only should we not eliminate the word ‘lunatic’ from federal law when the most pressing issue of the day is saving our country from bankruptcy,” said Rep Gohmert in a statement.

“We should use the word to describe the people who want to continue with business as usual in Washington.”

Originally published on the BBC

In Egypt the revolution continues

0

Mariam grew up in Heliopolis near Egypt‘s presidential palace and remembers how the road running by the main gate used to be littered with checkpoints. As a student in the final days of the Mubarak era she couldn’t pass down it without producing her ID card and being glared at by men in gun turrets.

Every government institution in the world boasts high levels of security, but here the sensation of being an unwelcome trespasser in the vicinity of power struck a chord with something deeper.

The vast majority of Egyptians have been told throughout history that they are little more than interlopers in the closed rooms where decisions over their lives, community and environment are made; this is a nation where the political elite has always viewed the wider population as so many static pieces, devoid of agency and in need of being controlled and pacified through a fluid web of top-down munificence and brutal repression.

That authoritarian conception of the state remained entrenched regardless of the differing ideologies and motivations of those who ruled, from colonial officials to the post-1952 military dictatorship, from Hosni Mubarak’s kleptocrats to the army junta that managed the so-called “transition” to democracy.

And it remains today, under the rule of a Muslim Brotherhood whose critique of Egypt’s problems is moral rather than structural, whose vision of power is exclusionary instead of pluralistic.

All these regimes have variously claimed the mantle of revolutionary legitimacy and attempted to seize a narrative of progressive change. All have deployed crude symbolism — nationalistic and religious — to turn Egyptian against Egyptian in an effort to solidify their power and maintain the status quo. And all have resorted to raw violence when faced with opposition.

It is that authoritarian state that the Egyptian revolution has been ranged against since January 2011. Some well-intentioned commentators have bemoaned how the utopia of the original “18 days” in Tahrir Square has given way to bloodshed, how the unity of so many Egyptians in rejecting Mubarak has sadly dissipated into internecine strife.

But they forget that this has never been and never could be a pacifist revolt: more than 100 police stations were burned to the ground on 28 January 2011 as revolutionaries met state violence with resistance of their own and sought to beat the regime’s security apparatus off the streets. And although the “Islamists v secularists” faultline is not irrelevant, it is also not the primary lens through which to understand the latest scenes.

There never was a golden struggle that came to a glorious conclusion when Mubarak relinquished power, only for civil warfare to subsequently blot the copybook of “New Egypt”. There is one ongoing struggle, against a state that seeks to deny Egyptians any genuine empowerment and a voice in their own futures, and its latest iteration is playing out on the streets of Heliopolis this week.

Unlike his predecessors, Mohamed Morsi was elected democratically at the ballot box, but like his predecessors his notion of government is narrow, conservative and anything but democratic. Despite his rhetoric about the revolutionary martyrs, the security apparatus that killed them remains virtually intact under Brotherhood rule.

In Morsi’s first 100 days as president, rights organisations recorded 88 cases of police torture, resulting in 34 deaths. Opposition, be it official or on the street, is viewed as a conspiratorial enemy to be blitzed, not a legitimate element of political life.

For evidence just look at the draft constitution, not the content (though that is alarming enough) but the process. Written almost exclusively by old, Islamist men, the document is now being rammed through via the ousting of dissenting voices and Morsi’s unilateral constitutional decree that puts a metaphorical gun to the heads of the electorate: vote yes to my constitution, or reaffirm my extra-judicial dictatorship.

Democracy is about more than just a single ballot paper every four years, and Egypt’s revolution is about more than just formal, institutional democracy. Since early 2011, ordinary Egyptians have messily, heroically and relentlessly muscled their way into the arena of political power. Never mind Tahrir — from Nile Delta villages to Bedouin tribal lands and urban slums, communities are tearing down the outdated suffocating contours delineating who gets to have a say, who gets to make a dynamic choice about the world around them.

The old elite game of making decisions at the top and allowing access to state resources only through an extensive patronage network, the flipside of which is violent repression, no longer works; the only problem is that those wedded to a moribund vision of the authoritarian state, including the Brotherhood, don’t seem to have noticed yet.

An Egyptian acquaintance of mine recently compared the Brotherhood’s ascension to political dominance to a man who has fought his way, bloodied and bruised, to the bridge of the Titanic and triumphantly lays his hand on the wheel — just as the whole edifice is beginning to sink.

The ship is no longer fit to navigate a fast-changing ocean, and the Brotherhood’s refusal to acknowledge that the old political toolkit is broken is what has brought us to where we are today.

This political elite lacks both the capability and willingness to genuinely pursue revolutionary justice and open up the country’s mechanisms of power, from the local to the national, to ordinary people. And that means that for many — including millions who voted Morsi for president, and don’t share the current leadership’s rigid authoritarianism and neoliberal orthodoxy — expectations have not been met and the grassroots revolution continues.

 

Any social upheaval always consists of one no and many yesses, and it is partly that panoply of yesses that has prevented a coherent, formalised pro-revolution and anti-Morsi opposition current from establishing a presence on the national stage.

Many revolutionaries on the ground are rightly suspicious of elder opposition grandees — some of whom are tainted by association with the politics of the Mubarak era — and argue that such figures from the past can only ever jockey for position inside the existing structures, rather than engage in the radical re-imagination of Egypt that some are striving for.

 

But, however limited, the arrival this month of something resembling a unified platform of formal dissent, now led by Mohamed ElBaradei — the conditions for which have only been made possible by the courage of those fighting for their lives on the street — could be a significant step forward.

It makes it more difficult for Morsi’s regime to credibly dismiss street protests as wild, isolated acts of treason, especially when combined with growing evidence of unrest within the ranks of officialdom (presidential advisers resigning, foreign ambassadors refusing to preside over constitutional referendum voting in their embassies).

The convergence of mass demonstrations and establishment disquiet, feeding off each other and gaining momentum with each passing day, is a powerful game-changer, reminiscent of how things felt during those hallowed 18 days. For Morsi, the option of doing nothing and sitting it out now appears increasingly untenable.

On Tuesday I walked with Mariam, the woman who grew up in Heliopolis, as she moved freely along the wall of the presidential palace, right down the same street which she remembers from her youth as a place of state intimidation. An hour or so earlier protesters had broken through police lines. Now Mariam posed for photos by the main door of the palace, underneath a huge emblem of an eagle — the nation’s coat of arms — on to which someone had scrawled “Fuck Morsi” and “ACAB” (All cops are bastards).

Many Egyptians would be horrified at such sentiments, but their very presence on the palace wall indicates why this revolution is not disappearing any time soon. Times have changed and, both figuratively and literally, the country’s population is at the gates of power. No elite that ignores this fact can expect to survive for long.

Originally published on The Guardian

Expanding Our Experience of Psi — Biophysical and Clinical Approaches to Parapsychology

0

Via Disinfo |

While much of the current debate around the existence of psi exists in the field of psychology and cultural studies, the history of psychical research is actually based as much, if not more, in the physical sciences and clinical medicine. In a recent piece for Reality Sandwich researcher Paul Devereux discusses the biophysical experiments of Dr. Michael Persinger and Blake Dotta at Laurentian University, Ontario, and how the evidence from experiments like these is bringing our attention back to the physical characteristics of the phenomena:

“Parapsychology generally provides its evidence in the form of statistics, and so is all too readily subject to the charge of “lies, damned lies and statistics” — how reliable is monitoring lots of subjective responses to laboratory tests, and why isn’t psi robustly repeatable in experimental conditions? When it comes to actual, real-life psi experiences — telepathic or precognitive events, apparitions and so forth — critics tend to level accusations of misperception or dishonesty against the claimants, and point out that in any case such reports are merely anecdotal, and not acceptable as scientific evidence. Mainstream scientists demand “hard” evidence (whether or not their idea of that is applicable to the mercurial nature of psi phenomena). But now, research by the redoubtable Michael Persinger, with Blake Dotta and their team at Laurentian University, Ontario, makes it look as if the hard-nosed sceptics can at last be confronted on their own ground. To do so, the Laurentian researchers have taken a different track to standard parapsychology — and it is all to do with light.

Persinger is famous (or infamous) for his so-called “God helmet”, a helmet that holds electrodes in place on the wearer’s temples that generate programmed patterns of weak magnetic fields which massage the temporal cortex producing sensations of unseen “presences” and other strange perceptions. (In fact, Persinger had developed this procedure to explore the neurological use of magnetism in therapy in place of pharmaceutical products.) But on the heels of this device, he and his co-workers developed a further instrument, nicknamed “the octopus” on account of all the wires involved. More properly known as a circumcerebral magnetic stimulation (CMS) device, this basically is comprised of solenoids (coils) set at intervals on a headband fitted around a person’s cranium. The solenoids are controlled by a computer program that enables them to rotate precisely configured weak magnetic pulses around the head. This magnetic stimulation can affect the brain in certain ways, including partially disrupting the 40 Hz so-called “binding factor” of the brain which normally seems to help pull all our sensory inputs together into a smooth, seamless perception of the world. Put in non-technical language, this disruption allows normally curtailed or masked information from “Mind-at-Large” to reach awareness. Some of this information can seemingly possess psi properties, whatever they turn out to be.”

Devereux mentions that he has tried an earlier version of the CMS device, with provocative results, and he feels that more research in this area is important. Persinger’s work builds on similar work being carried out at institutions like the Rhine Research Center, in Durham, North Carolina.  The Rhine Bio-Energy Lab has been conducting research for the past 30 years on bio-photon emission from subjects initiating altered states of consciousness. This kind of research provides a much more direct approach to experimenting with the problem of mind/matter interaction.

Another interesting area of research which returns to the roots of psychical investigation is clinical parapsychology, which Annalisa Ventola, Executive Director of the Parapsychological Association, briefly details in a recent post at Public Parapsychology. Ventola explains that clinical parapsychology is a branch of research that helps “psychotherapists, psychologists, psychiatrists, social workers, and family doctors who find themselves confronted with clients who report apparently “paranormal” emotional experiences, but do not exhibit the traditional signs of psychopathology.” Despite skeptical media accounts of the phenomena, Ventola mentions that “there are a small number of professionally-staffed outpatient clinics in Europe and South America that serve people experiencing paranormal emergencies. However, resources for those suffering in North America and other parts of the world are limited.”  As she points out, “whether or not a variety paranormal experiences can be seen as scientifically proven phenomena is still a matter of debate. But reports of distress resulting from paranormal experiences in otherwise psychologically healthy people are widespread.”

This kind of research is central to the work of Rhine Research Center associates Dr. Christine Simmonds-Moore, University of West Georgia, who specializes in  the overlaps between parapsychology, clinical psychology and mental health, and Dr. Jim Carpenter, whose therapeutic work with experiencers informs his recent publication, First Sight: ESP and Parapsychology in Everyday Life. Unexpected, or spontaneous psi events can be traumatic, and in cases where there is no history or sign of mental illness, sound guidelines for counseling are an important function of research into these liminal areas of human potential.

To read more about these expanded approaches to researching the outer limits of human experience head over to Reality Sandwich for Paul Devereux’s take on “Taking the Psychology Out of Parapsychology,” and visit the Public Parapsychology site for Annalisa Ventola’s review of Perspectives of Clinical Parapsychology — An Introductory Reader.

Marijuana Possession Now Legal in Washington State

0

On Thursday Washington State became the first state in America where it is legal to possess marijuana for adult recreational use, and hundreds of people celebrated shortly after midnight by lighting up and smoking joints together under Seattle’s iconic Space Needle.

“I feel like a kid in a candy store!” shouted Darby Hageman, according to The Associated Press.

In November voters in the states of Washington and Colorado approved legalizing small amounts of marijuana for recreational use by people over the age of 21.

The new law went into effect in Washington on Thursday and goes into effect in Colorado on January 5.

Some of the legal details are still murky: Washington residents still aren’t legally allowed to grow or sell marijuana, and they’re not allowed to smoke it in public.

It’s not clear how police are supposed to enforce the specifics of the law.

The Seattle Police Department told its police department in an email Wednesday night that until further notice, “officers shall not take any enforcement action — other than to issue a verbal warning.”

“Does this mean you should flagrantly roll up a mega-spliff and light up in the middle of the street? No,” wrote police spokesman Jonah Spangenthal-Lee on the police department website.

“If you’re smoking pot in public, officers will be giving helpful reminders to folks about the rules and regulations.”

But technically, marijuana is still against federal US law — which means people can still be arrested by federal agents, though whether that will actually happen remains to be seen.

“The Department of Justice is reviewing the legalization initiatives recently passed in Colorado and Washington State. The Department’s responsibility to enforce the Controlled Substances Act remains unchanged,” said Seattle US Attorney Jenny Durkan in a statement Wednesday.

“Regardless of any changes in state law… growing, selling or possessing any amount of marijuana remains illegal under federal law,” she added.

That warning did not stop the midnight celebrations in Seattle. There were no arrests reported.

Was Depleted Uranium used during Gaza offensive?

0

Richard Silverstein |

I’m beginning to read reports from Gaza that indicate that the IDF may’ve used depleted uranium munitions during its recent assault. A local journalist writes in Electronic Intifada about the grotesque forms of some of the victims’ wounds. He (incorrectly, I believe) associates them with chemical weapons like white phosphorus:

Among those receiving treatment in Nasser hospital in Khan Younis is a man who was hit by an Israeli drone that struck a farm owned by his family in southern Gaza. A friend of his was killed in the attack. “I was hit directly in my abdomen and two legs,” said the man, who is in his thirties and asked not to be named.

Baker al-Derdy, the head nurse in Nasser hospital, said that when this man was first admitted, there was “a strange smell, almost chemical” from him. Al-Derdy pointed to other indications that Israel may have used chemical weapons during its offensive.

“Some of the symptoms we have seen are abnormal,” al-Derdy added. “The type of burns that appear on the bodies suggest that the weapons employed were not conventional. The burns go deep into the skin and the skin itself turns blue. And I can tell you that the burns hit even the third layer of the skin.”

…Ashraf al-Qedra, a spokesperson for the health ministry in Gaza…acknowledged that some of the burns witnessed were deeper than those associated with conventional weapons.

“We in Gaza and health bodies in the West Bank do not have laboratories where we could properly examine what types of weapons have been used in Israeli attacks,” al-Qedra said. “But according to what we have seen so far, it appears that Israel used some explosive weapons or ammunition that caused burns and deep wounds. In most cases of those killed, we have seen that bodies were either torn apart or completely burnt out. Also, many of those injured have had their lower or upper limbs amputated.”

Making clear that I’m neither a doctor nor a weapons specialist, the general description of these savage wounds reminds me much more of the DIME munition developed by the U.S. and used by the IDF in Gaza in 2006. I posted several times about this horrific weapon. The Gaza Interior Ministry, in the midst of the fighting, released a statement claiming it had recorded high rates of radioactivity at bombing sites, claiming that unconventional weapons were used against a civilian population:

Major Hazem Abu Murad, assistant director of explosives engineering and member of the Committee to document war crimes, revealed that the occupation used radioactive materials in the explosives with which it had bombed the Gaza Strip.

Abu Murad told the Interior Ministry that the weapons with which Israel targeted Gaza contain heavy elements, including the Uranium, tungsten, aluminum and nickel”, and pointed out that these materials raise the temperature in the center of the explosion to 7 thousand degrees Celsius, and boost the destructive ability of the shell.

He also pointed to the types of weapons used by the occupation during the recent aggression on the Gaza Strip, noting that among those weapons there are three types of ammunition which have been used for the first time.

If true, and I have no way of knowing whether Hamas’ claim was based on scientific testing, tungsten would be indicative of the use of DIME. The presence of uranium might lead in a different direction, as the IDF has weapons that contain depleted uranium. Here are some of its characteristics:

Depleted uranium is very dense…Thus a given mass of it has a smaller diameter than an equivalent lead projectile, with less aerodynamic drag and deeper penetration due to a higher pressure at point of impact. DU projectile ordnance is often incendiary because of its pyrophoric property.

…Depleted uranium is favored…because it is self-sharpening and pyrophoric. On impact with a hard target…the nose of the rod fractures in such a way that it remains sharp. The impact and subsequent release of heat energy causes it to disintegrate to dust and burn when it reaches air…When a DU penetrator reaches the interior of an armored vehicle, it catches fire, often igniting ammunition and fuel.

Further support for the thesis of its use by the IDF is a report to me from an Israeli source confirming the IDF used depleted uranium in Gaza. My source cannot confirm whether DIME was used or not.

The UN Human Rights Commission has asked member states to curb the use of such weapons and a paper prepared for the body argued that they may contravene numerous international treaties. The European Parliament called for a ban on DU munitions.

Here are some of their health effects:

Normal functioning of the kidney, brain, liver, heart, and numerous other systems can be affected by uranium exposure, because in addition to being weakly radioactive, uranium is a toxic metal.  DU is less toxic than other heavy metals such as arsenic and mercury.[65] It is weakly radioactive but remains radioactive because of its long half-life.

…British Army doctors warned the British…Ministry of Defence that exposure to depleted uranium increased the risk of developing lung, lymph and brain cancer, and recommended a series of safety precautions.

This seems perfectly in synch with the typical practice of the IDF to exploit whatever weapons appear convenient and effective, no matter how controversial or even illegal their use might be, especially against a largely civilian population. This holds true for cluster bombs, white phosphorus and DIME, all of which Israel has employed during attacks on civilian areas of Lebanon and Gaza.

By the way, I’ve read several mainstream journalists claim that less than half those killed in Gaza were civilians. This is not true. Gaza human rights groups have counted 183 fatalities of whom 103 were civilian.

The Fiscal Hoax – Don’t believe the cliff hype

0

Peter Hart |

The biggest story in Washington is about something that doesn’t really exist: the so-called ”fiscal cliff.” This manufactured panic is all about politicians and corporate interests getting things they want – things that don’t have much to do with the ”crisis” anyway. But instead of challenging this spin, big media outlets are playing along.

So what’s the not-really-a-cliff anyway? It’s a number of things that are set to happen all at once starting in January. On the one hand, there are budget cuts, more or less equally divided between military and domestic spending. The threat of those cuts was supposed to force Congress to reach a deal last year. It didn’t.

Add in the expiration of the Bush-era tax cuts and a temporary cut in the Social Security payroll tax and it starts to really add up. That’s what’s causing these breathless TV reports telling you that if Congress and the White House don’t act in the next few weeks, the average family’s tax bill will go up an astonishing $3,500.

Astonishing, sure. And if it all happened, the country would very likely be thrown into another recession. But will it happen? That’s extremely unlikely. And is it really a cliff? Absolutely not.

A cliff, literally speaking, isn’t something you can fall off only a little bit. But this tax and spending problem could go right into January without much disruption for taxpayers or the economy. And there are plenty of ways to make sure that most Americans won’t see a massive tax increase. Those scary numbers you’re hearing rest on the assumption that no deal is reached for the entire year.

So why call it a cliff then? To make it seem like an immediate response is essential. There are powerful interests looking to use a ”crisis” to push for policy changes that have nothing to do with the current problem. So you might turn on the TV and hear the millionaire CEO of a major corporation say the cliff is really about the ”need” to cut the earned-benefit programs Social Security and Medicare.

Oh, they don’t call them ”cuts” – they prefer to talk about ”reforming” our ”entitlement programs.” But they’re talking about cuts that aren’t a required part of what it will take to get the country’s fiscal house in order. Social Security and Medicare spending isn’t, in fact, what’s causing the fiscal problems we’re told must be solved.

And the fact that some of these CEOs are the same Wall Street wizards who played a key role in creating the housing crisis and the Great Recession, which actually did cause fiscal woes by depressing tax revenue at the local, state and federal levels, doesn’t come up. We’re supposed to see them as responsible stewards of the economy.

Cutting Medicare is the part of the plan these austerity-loving chief executives are happy to talk about on TV. ”The big nut is going to have to be Medicare/Medicaid,” Honeywell CEO David Cote said in a CBS-broadcast interview. ”At the end of the day, you can’t avoid the topic.”

But that’s not all they have in mind. Wouldn’t you know it, their prescription for the country’s debt problem calls for an array of tax breaks for corporations. In other words, these CEOs are aiming for tax breaks for themselves, at the expense of Social Security and Medicare. They’re putting two of the country’s most effective and popular social programs arbitrarily at risk, under the guise of shrinking the federal budget deficit.

If journalism is to do us any good at all, the major media must expose this selfish agenda.

While a few skeptical reports have begun to appear in The Washington Post, New York Magazine, and on CNN, just about everywhere you turn you find stories about the dreaded but dubious fiscal cliff. Don’t believe the hype.

This work is licensed under a Creative Commons License
Peter Hart is the activism director at FAIR (Fairness & Accuracy In Reporting). He writes for FAIR’s magazine Extra, and is also a co-host and producer of FAIR’s syndicated radio show CounterSpin. He is the author of The Oh Really? Factor: Unspinning Fox News Channel’s Bill O’Reilly” (Seven Stories Press, 2003).

Dostoyevsky: Why American dream was never a bargain

0

Nicolas Bonnal |

The American dream…We have been told for two centuries that America was the awesome land of dreams and achievement, and that the rest of the world was a mere failure; that in Europe everyone was starving while in America everything was lush and green. What if it was all a lie? If the conquest of the west was a nightmare for those who lived there, and if the life for the poor had been very hard, and not only during the interminable and unsolved crisis of 1929? As a libertarian French economist wrote recently, 90% of the American people would be considered poor in the so despised Europe, if only we included criteria like the cost of private health or education in the calculation of American way of life.

I don’t mean to be provocative. Many superior minds were already provocative in respect of this humble reality: American dream never was a bargain.

Let’s start from the seventeenth century and the founding fathers. Never forget that the American climate is one of the wildest in the world, that one could hardly survive, and that the American growth is mainly due to the second industrial revolution and the demographic explosion in Europe during the last third of nineteenth century! Otherwise, the living conditions were abominable and many times colons died during wintertime. So, how could one be so “eyes wide shut” to get there? The great sociologist Daniel Boorstyn, in his wonderful rhetoric of democracy, gives us the key:

There was never a more outrageous or unscrupulous or more ill-informed advertising campaign than that by which the promoters for American colonies brought settlers here.

Advertisement is the language of America. Advertisement is an arguing technique producing addiction and consumerism, including in religious matters (Protestantism and Puritanism). The development of printing means the development of lies and British extremist politics during cromwellian times (which are allegedly the model of Orwell’s Oceania!). And thus, to populate America, this far, cold and deserted land, you had to lie a little bit:

Hopeful overstatements, half-truths, and downright lies… gold and silver, fountains of youth, plenty of fish, venison without limit, all of course were promised…

Despite this art of lying, and considering the impossible conditions of living in a pre-technical world, we understand why there were only three millions Americans at the beginning of the nineteenth century, this golden age of their civilization and literature. The awkward difficulties of the American reality were thus appreciated by our favourite witness, Alexis de Tocqueville. At the time of Tocqueville, there is no European mass immigration. Yet there is an American immigration to the west, whose harshness shocks French traveller and writer:

Many of these adventurers, who rush so boldly onwards in pursuit of wealth, were already in the enjoyment of a competency in their own part of the country. They take their wives along with them, and make them share the countless perils and privations which always attend the commencement of these expeditions. I have often met, even on the verge of the wilderness, with young women, who after having been brought up amidst all the comforts of the large towns of New England, had passed, almost without any intermediate stage, from the wealthy abode of their parents to a comfortless hovel in a forest.

The conditions are thus equal to those lived by John Ford’s heroes and pioneers:

Fever, solitude, and a tedious life had not broken the springs of their courage. Their features were impaired and faded, but their looks were firm: they appeared to be at once sad and resolute.

What motivated these sacrifices? I should say idealism, in a word. America is an idealistic, somewhat fanatical country, run by a wishful thinking and a fascination for the bible, and the people there enjoy blinding they eyes: in Utopia the dream is still to come!

I’m not kidding, I’m just referring to the greatest genius of literature, Dostoyevsky, who describes an amazing episode of his possessed’ life. They come to America, then:

“We hired ourselves out as workmen to an exploiter; there were six of us Russians working for him students, even landowners coming from their estates, some officers, too, and all with the same grand object. Well, so we worked, sweated, wore ourselves out; Kirillov and I were exhausted at last; fell ill went away we couldn’t stand it. Our employer cheated us when he paid us off; instead of thirty dollars, as he had agreed, he paid me eight and Kirillov fifteen; he beat us, too, more than once. So then we were left without work, Kirillov and I, and we spent four months lying on the floor in that little town. He thought of one thing and I thought of another.”

Dostoyevsky just explains that any bad condition of living in America is well received for the country is the land of light and freedom and highly motivated people. Everything is thus deified by the possessed; it is good just because it is American (it’s like Vietnamese and Iraqi bombings…) and because the other men are simply children.

On the contrary, Kirillov and I made up our minds from the first that we Russians were like little children beside the Americans, and that one must be born in America, or at least live for many years with Americans to be on a level with them. And do you know: if we were asked a dollar for a thing worth a farthing, we used to pay it with pleasure, in fact with enthusiasm. We approved of everything: spiritualism, lynch-law, revolvers and tramps.

The slaves-adventurers are thus labelled “Men made of paper” by Shatov. With his habitual and implacable shrewdness, Dostoyevsky understands that any American trait will be celebrated by the adorers of Uncle Sam. He seizes that in the future America will fascinate the minds of many, even if this country will attain its status and wealth thanks to European wars and communism, communism that will delay the development of Russia (next world power in 1914) and China. In this meaning yes America was a lucky place.

Let us conclude: we are used to assert that a man fascinated by the presently fraying America is a liberal. And what is a liberal for Dostoyevsky?

“Our Russian liberal is a flunkey before everything, and is only looking for some one whose boots he can clean.”

In France and in Europe today, we have a lot of flunkeys, and, would say the great Will, an American dream still strutting and fretting his hour upon a stage…

477 dead, many homeless in Philippines typhoon

0

NEW BATAAN, Philippines: A quarter million people were homeless and 477 confirmed dead after the Philippines’ worst typhoon this year, officials said Thursday, as the government appealed for international help.

Typhoon Bopha ploughed across Mindanao island on Tuesday, flattening whole towns in its path as hurricane-force winds brought torrential rain that triggered a deadly combination of floods and landslides.

Erinea Cantilla and her family of six walked barefoot for two days in a vain search of food and shelter through a muddy wasteland near the mountainous town of New Bataan after the deluge destroyed their house and banana and cocoa farm.

“Everything we had is gone. The only ones left are dead people,” Cantilla told AFP as her husband, three children and a granddaughter reached the outskirts of the town, which itself had been nearly totally obliterated.

Rescuers said they were looking for at least 380 missing people while seeking help for more than 250,000 others who sheltered in schools, gyms and other buildings after losing everything.

Officials said many victims were poor migrants who flocked to landslide-prone sites like New Bataan and the nearby town of Monkayo to farm the lower slopes of mountains or work at unregulated mines in the gold rush area.

Of the dead, 258 were found on the east coast of Mindanao while 191 were recovered in and around New Bataan and Monkayo, said Major-General Ariel Bernardo, head of an army division involved in the search.

The civil defence office in Manila said 19 people were killed elsewhere in Mindanao along with nine in the central Visayan islands.

Bernardo said his troops had rescued 36 survivors in two days, but that the prospects were looking dimmer for the hundreds still missing.

“I do not think it (is) likely,” he told AFP when asked if he thought most of the missing were still alive.

Shell-shocked survivors scrabbled through the rubble of their homes to find anything that could be recovered, as relatives searched for missing family members among mud-caked bodies laid out in rows on tarpaulins.

Civil defence chief Benito Ramos refused to give up hope for the missing.

“There is no time limit — as long as it takes,” he told reporters when asked how long the search and rescue effort would take.

One man was rescued after being trapped for two days under rocks and debris after flash floods swept away his entire family.

Covered in mud and teary-eyed, Carlos Agang recounted how a small community of banana and coconut farmers was devastated as Bopha unleashed a wall of water.

“It’s a miracle that I survived, but I might as well be dead,” he said.

President Benigno Aquino has sent food and other supplies by ship to 150,000 people on Mindanao’s east coast where three towns remain cut off by landslides and wrecked bridges, Interior Secretary Mar Roxas said.

Social Welfare Secretary Corazon Soliman said the government had sought help from the Swiss-based International Organisation for Migration to build temporary shelters to ease the pressure on evacuation camps.

“The priority is to build bunkhouses so that there will be shelter for them,” she said on ABS-CBN television.

The United States and Japan said they had offered emergency assistance.

Geologist Mahar Lagmay, head of a government project to map out all flood-prone areas of the country, said that while most people in the affected communities were aware of the danger, they did not know where to go for safety.

“Year after year, whenever there is heavy rain that comes to that place, there are landslides and many people die in those mountainous areas,” he said.

Workers were struggling to reach villages due to destroyed roads and wrecked bridges, but finding corpses was not a problem due to the overpowering stench everywhere, said Francisco Macalipay, a soldier involved in the rescue.

“Just let your nose lead you to them,” he told AFP.

“In a week’s time I’m sure the smell of death would force the survivors to flee the town.”

– AFP/ck/lp

Patriot Act allows US to spy worldwide, Europeans outraged

0

Information that Europeans keep stored online could be accessed by US law enforcement agencies. That’s according to a report issued by one university in Amsterdam, which revealed the anti-terrorism Patriot Act gives Washington legal grounds to bypass Europe’s privacy laws. For more RT talks to one of the authors of the report Axel Arnbak.

Obama prepared to go over ‘fiscal cliff’

0

The US Treasury Secretary has said the Obama administration is “absolutely” ready for the US economy to go over the “fiscal cliff” rather than accept a budget deal that does not include higher tax rates for top earners.

Timothy Geithner said on Wednesday that the administration believes budget deficits are so large that they cannot be closed without boosting tax rates on the highest-earning two per cent of Americans. Most Republicans oppose higher rates for any taxpayers.


“There’s no prospect in an agreement that doesn’t involve those rates going up on the top two per cent of the wealthiest Americans,” Geithner said in an interview on CNBC.

Geithner’s comments immediately drew fire from a top Republican senator.

“This is one of the most stunning and irresponsible statements I’ve heard in some time,” Senator Orrin Hatch said.

“Going over the fiscal cliff will put our economy, jobs, people’s paychecks and retirement at risk, but that is what the White House wants, according to Secretary Geithner, if they don’t get their way.”

Republicans in Congress and Obama consumed much of Wednesday talking up their positions on the “fiscal cliff” and though Obama and Republican House Speaker John Boehner spoke by phone, neither side offered any new compromises in public.

Nor was the phone call, a rarity, followed by any immediate announcement of a face-to-face meeting that has been widely anticipated all week and was explicitly requested early in the day by House of Representatives Republican leader Eric Cantor.

‘Conceptual breakthrough’

Obama has said there could be a quick deal if Republican leaders dropped their opposition to raising tax rates for those making more than $250,000 a year in exchange for spending cuts and entitlement reforms.

“If we can get the leadership on the Republican side to take that framework, to acknowledge that reality, then the numbers actually aren’t that far apart,” Obama told The Business Roundtable in Washington.

“Another way of putting this is we can probably solve this in about a week. It’s not that tough, but we need that
conceptual breakthrough,” he said.

The fiscal cliff refers to the tax increases and deep spending cuts that will take effect in January unless Congress and the White House reach a budget deal first.

In the interview, Geithner also said the administration would reject a budget plan that did not include an increase in the federal borrowing limit. The current limit is expected to be reached either late this month or early next year.

“We are not prepared to have the American economy held hostage to periodic threats that Republicans will force the country to default on our obligations,” Geithner said.

“That would be a terrible thing for the financial security of the average American, for businesses, for confidence around the world and the United States.”

Geithner said he still thinks progress is being made in the budget negotiations and that the outlines of an agreement are becoming clearer.

“They look inevitable,” he said.

Originally published on Aljazeera

Protesters clash with police in Dublin

0

Clashes have broken out between anti-austerity protesters and police forces in Dublin as Ireland’s finance minister announces the 2013 budget cuts.

Around 1,500 protesters condemned the government’s proposed tax hikes and spending cuts outside the Irish parliament building on Wednesday night.

The protests come after Dublin unveiled a 3.5-billion-euro austerity budget that mainly targets the elderly and the sick.

High property taxes included in the austerity measures will put homeowners, already struggling to pay their mortgages, under increased pressure.

Tanaiste Eamon Gilmore, the acting deputy head of government, has defended the austerity measures.

He said the latest measures, which also include cuts to child benefits, are necessary to move Ireland a step closer to recovery.

“We know it’s tough, we know it’s difficult, we know how it’s impacting on people,” Gilmore said.

Ireland, one of eurozone’s debt-stricken countries, has endured severe austerity measures since 2008.

The worsening debt crisis has forced some European Union governments to adopt harsh austerity measures and tough economic reforms, which have triggered incidents of social unrest and massive protests in many European countries.

Originally published on Press TV

Kenya’s Recent Ban on All GMOs Draws Cheers and Jeers

0

Heather Callaghan, Activist Post | 

“The Minister of Public Health and Sanitation has noted with great great concern the ongoing debate over the safety of GMO foods…”

 In a gutsy move, Kenya’s government has banned all imported GMO goods – effective immediately. They are also suspending all sales of genetically modified produce and foods with GM ingredients until health safety is confirmed. The ban is not permanent, however – it depends on what evidence the ministry concludes. Biotechnology research can continue.
On November 8th, Health Minister Beth Mugo made the announcement with Kenyan president Mwai Kibaki present and also said:

My ministry wishes to clarify the decision was based on genuine concerns that adequate research had not been done on GMOs and scientific evidence provided to prove the safety of these foods.

Taking a better-safe-than-sorry approach, she added, “Where there is apprehension and uncertainty regarding the safety of food products, precaution to protect the health of the people must be undertaken.”

This new health fear is most likely a result of the now famous French GMO study in September, complete with pictures of grotesquely tumored rats. Or maybe even rising suspicions and admissions of biotech scientist knowledge of an infertility gene – and a coordinating rise of infertility and miscarriages in humans but definitely, undeniably those issues and death in cattle eating GMO feed.

One biotech scientist wrote to Natural Society, telling them it would be “awesome” if “this **** causes infertility” because he’s among those who fiercely believe the world is overpopulated, and goes on to say that GMO is saving the planet.

The news is flying fast with cheers through anti-GMO consumers on Facebook using the Internet meme picture of a happy African boy with a fist in the air saying “Aww Yeah!!!” and “Kenya just banned GMOs!”

Despite hints of ultimate depopulation efforts and major safety concerns, it is not surprising that many biotech researchers, universities, farmers, students, and consumers are unhappy about the decision. They’ve got investments riding on genetic modification in fear of a growing (deliberate) food crisis and hopes of economic uptick.They are also perplexed because, until now, GMO efforts enjoyed friendly laws. Dr Silas Obukosia, Director Regulatory Affairs at Africa Harvest thought the ban was misinformed and hindered Kenya’s ability to increase food production:

Mugo’s ban on the importation and trade of GMOs due lack of evidence regarding their safety is puzzling. This is because major investments such as the approval of the National Biotechnology Development Policy by the Cabinet in 2006, and the enactment of the Biosafety Act in 2009, and gazettment of three different biosafety regulations in 2011 have been made to address the issue of safety. A lot of money has been pumped in by universities in creating masters and PhD programmes in biotechnology which need to be supported by friendly laws. Source

But take a good look at the names of those institutions – bias much? It is reminiscent of our FDA and USDA allowing Monsanto to conduct its own safety studies.

The pressure is on with headlines like “Kenya risks losing billions over GMO ban.” Those are hypothetical billions of course – it was spoken at a big Ag Biotechnology forum and focused on Africa being a transit point for GM food with other countries. Arguments against the ban focus on food security, the economy, and wasted money – not sincere public health.

While those will cry unfair – what we don’t want to see in Africa is what’s happening in India, wheretens of thousands of farmers have committed suicide, some by dousing themselves with Roundup-ready pesticides and setting fire, making one last statement about their betrayers. They risked Monsanto crops and went destitute when “the crops to end world hunger” failed to yield. They, their families and their communities lost more than just their initial investments.
Ms. Mugo and the cabinet have more true public safety in mind than many will ever realize for some time to come. Let’s hope the ban holds during their safety confirmations – if the ban is lifted do you think it will make the news? They’ve already taken a big step with the ban and nipping disease and corporate takeover in the genetic bud.

This news follows the recent GMO suspension in Russia (following the French study) and Peru’slegislative 10-year-ban finally coming into effect.

Other Sources:
http://www.farming.co.uk/news/article/7570

Read other articles by Heather Callaghan Here

FBI and State Police Conduct Massive Manhunt

0

Alex Thomas and JG Vibes, theintelhub.com |

Due to its close proximity to Washington DC, in recent years Maryland has become one of the worst police states in the country.

Last month, we reported on a botched FBI raid in Maryland, where unarmed teenagers were shot at simply for being in the wrong place at the wrong time.

Then, just the other day in Baltimore, an activist and blogger had his house surrounded by police over a trumped-up charge that was over 3 years old.

Now, in a more rural area of Maryland, a man named Terry Porter became the target of a massive manhunt involving FBI and state police after being reported to be a“survivalist” with a “collection of guns” who outlined his anger over the presidential reelection to an undercover officer.

This situation apparently stemmed from an anonymous tip from someone who reported Terry to the police because he owned guns and invested in a bomb shelter.

Where this “anonymous” tip actually came from is still a mystery due to the fact that many of the neighbors in the area who were questioned by reporters have expressed support for Terry and have said that they are extremely offended by the tax dollars and police resources that were used to hunt down a nonviolent person.

It seems from all accounts that Mr. Porter is a nonviolent person who has come under federal suspicion simply for preparing himself and his family for any trouble that may occur in the future.

Sadly, AFTER the police begun to investigate the man, they found out that he had a 1992 felony drug conviction on his record which enabled them to be able to then attack his house with 150 armed officers.

This is not some doomsday maniac as the mainstream media would suggest, disasters happen all the time, and more often than not, people are unprepared just as we are seeing in the aftermath of Hurricane Sandy.

According to the initial local news report:

A Sharpsburg area man who was the subject of a massive search by police Thursday afternoon turned himself in to Maryland State Police on Friday and was charged with 14 firearms violations, according to the Washington County State’s Attorney’s Office and Sheriff Douglas W. Mullendore.

Terry Allen Porter, 46, of 4433 Mills Road, was being held on $75,000 bond Friday night at the Washington County Detention Center, according to a jail spokesperson.

State police issued a press release after 6 p.m. Friday that said Porter turned himself in at the Hagerstown Barrack at 9:30 a.m., and that he and his attorney met with investigators.

Police went to Porter’s home Friday and seized a rifle and a shotgun, the release said. That was in addition to two rifles and three shotguns recovered Thursday night, the release said.

The confirmation that Porter was at the detention center was the first acknowledgment that he was the subject of Thursday’s manhunt.

Earlier Friday, a day after FBI agents, Maryland State Police, Washington County Sheriff’s Office deputies, two special response units and others descended on an area south of Sharpsburg for a massive manhunt, authorities had little to say about what they were doing, why they were doing it and for whom they were searching.

After receiving complaints from the anonymous tipper, police sent in an undercover officer posing as a customer for the mans business.

A Sharpsburg man charged last week with illegal possession of firearms is a“doomsday prepper” who told an undercover Maryland State Police trooper about an underground bunker and surveillance cameras on his property, according to a charging document filed in Washington County District Court.

[…..]

A state police corporal went to Porter’s home Nov. 16, posing as a customer for the business Porter runs from his home, the charging document said. Porter got “very irritated” during a discussion of the recent presidential election and “openly admitted to being a prepper,” the document said.

From all accounts, Porter had been a law-abiding sentence for the last 20 years. Anarticle by a local Maryland blogger confirmed this fact.

It is true that Porter had a 20-year-old drug conviction on his record (confirmed here by the Hagerstown Herald Mail) but apparently had no subsequent run-ins with the law. 

He is legally not allowed to own a gun so he does have a legal problem, but that doesn’t justify the cost and scope of this massive operation.

Heather Hamilton, 35, who lives at 18809 Burnside Bridge Road, around the corner from Porter’s house, said Friday that a Maryland State Police trooper went to her home the day before to talk to her about what was going on and mentioned that it was regarding a man she had known since childhood.

“You had helicopters flying over, SWAT crews down here, excavation equipment was brought in, and armored vehicles,” she said.

“It was ridiculous for (the man), who would not hurt another person for anything. Unless you would attack him, he’s not going to go after anyone.”

She said she viewed the operation as “a big waste of taxpayer money.”

Another neighbor, Doug Bigelow, also outlined his support for Porter. “Surprised at what was going on, Bigelow said he always found his friend to live his life on the “straight and narrow.

Bigelow said he would feel safe leaving his kids with the man.”

Basically, a man worried about the tyrannical Obama regime as well as a possible collapse of society was raided by at least 150 agents acting on initial information that the man was a survivalist.

The fact that 20 years before he had a drug conviction enabled the FBI to carry out a raid they would have never even considered if it wasnt for the fact that they knew that the man was preparing and was distrustful of the government. To say the raid was simply for illegal possession of firearms is to ignore all the facts of this horrific story.

Terry Porter was doing nothing illegal by preparing and basically made the mistake of being too public with his preparedness and dislike for Obama which apparently is now cause for a FBI investigation which could in turn lead to a raid in what has now become the modern American police state.

MoD chief’s £275,000 package breaks pay rules

0

The Ministry of Defence has broken Whitehall rules over the £275,000 pay package awarded to the official in charge of military equipment, auditors have said.

The National Audit Office has refused to sign off the MoD’s accounts, partly because of the pay deal for Bernard Gray, the Chief of Defence Materiel.

The row over the MoD’s use of public money comes amid continued pressure on ministers have defence cuts that have seen thousands of soldiers, sailors and airmen sacked to save money.

Mr Gray, a former Labour adviser, is in charge of the bringing the MoD’s chaotic equipment budget under control.

Mr Gray was appointed last year on a salary of at least £240,000, making him one of the best-paid staff in the public sector. The MoD accounts show that he also received “benefits in kind” worth £36,000.

That is more than anyone else in the MoD, including Sir David Richards, the Chief of the Defence Staff, and Jon Thompson, the most senior civil servant in the department.

Under Whitehall rules introduced by the Coalition, any Whitehall appointment on a salary of more than £142,500 must be formally approved by the Treasury.

Amyas Morse, the head of the NAO, found that the MoD has still not obtained that approval. As a result, he refused to certify that payments to Mr Gray are in order.

The auditor also raised concerns about the MoD’s ability to account properly for military equipment the department values at £10 billion.

The NAO criticism of the MoD’s accounts comes after the Treasury’s Autumn Statement reduced total spending on defence and military operations by £1.3 billion.

Ministers say that those cuts will not affect the Armed Forces, but Labour said there are now growing doubts about the true state of the defence budget.

Kevan Jones, the Labour shadow defence minister, said the NAO report was “disconcerting” and cast doubts on claims by Philip Hammond, the Defence Secretary, to have balanced the defence budget.

Originally published on The Telegraph

Former Galloway secretary and Met police officer arrested

0

George Galloway’s former secretary has been arrested, along with a Metropolitan police officer, on suspicion of data protection offences.

Afiz Khan, an officer with the Met’s SO15 anti-terrorism branch, was arrested on Wednesday, along with Aisha Ali-Khan, who until recently worked as a PA for the Respect MP for Bradford West.

Ali-Khan, a mother-of-one from Bradford, was dramatically suspended by Galloway in October when he publicly accused her of being a Met police “agent” running an undercover operation from his constituency office in West Yorkshire. He demanded an investigation by the home secretary, Theresa May, into what he called a “dirty tricks” campaign orchestrated by Khan.

The arrests are unrelated to these allegations, which are the subject of an ongoing investigation.

Police are also still trying to ascertain how Galloway got hold of private emails between Ali-Khan and Khan, which he then showed to journalists as “incontrovertible evidence” that there was a plot against him. Ali-Khan insists her Hotmail address was hacked and accuses Galloway of sanctioning the hacking: a charge Galloway has always denied.

Ali-Khan told the Guardian in October that Khan was her husband, producing the Muslim “nikah” marriage certificate to prove the two wed in 2009. She has always claimed the emails merely showed a husband counselling his wife in how to deal with bullying and misogyny in Respect’s Bradford office.

Both Khan and Ali-Khan have been bailed to return pending further inquiries to a date in early March 2013.

He is suspected of misusing Met police databases and abusing his position as a police officer. He has been on “restricted duties” since Galloway made his original allegations in October. His status is being reconsidered in light of the arrest.

A Metropolitan police spokesman said Thursday: “A detective inspector from Specialist Operations was arrested this morning at his home address in Watford. He has been arrested on suspicion of misconduct in a public office and data protection offences.

“A woman has been arrested (not an Metropolitan police service employee) in connection with the DPS [Directorate of Professional Standards] investigation at her home address in Bradford. She has been arrested on suspicion of data protection offences.

“The arrests come as a result of an investigation by the DPS into a complaint from a member of the public, with regard to the actions of an officer based within specialist operations. At this time the arrests are not related to allegations made by the complainant but as a result of information that has been identified as part of the ongoing investigation.

“A further referral will be made to the IPCC [Independent Police Complaints Commission] in relation to the matter for which the arrests have been made.”

Galloway said: “I understand inquiries are still ongoing so for that reason I cannot comment.”

Ali-Khan faces a disciplinary hearing next Monday about the reasons for her suspension.

Originally published on The Guardian

A Pretext for Deeper US Intervention In Syria

0

Ben Schreiner, ICH |

With dubious reports that Syria is preparing its stockpile of chemical weapons for use now dominating US media coverage, the familiar menace of WMDs in the Middle East has been resurrected once again to haunt the American public and gin up support for military intervention.

First appearing in a report Sunday in the New York Times, the latest Syrian WMD scare surfaced with an assertion from an unnamed US official that the Syrian military had begun “some potential chemical weapon preparation.” The official went on to state that the US is “worried about what the [Syrian] military is doing.”

One day later, yet another unnamed American official, again citing classified intelligence, told Wired magazine’s Danger Room blog that, “Engineers working for the Assad regime in Syria have begun combining the two chemical precursors needed to weaponize sarin gas.”

“International observers,” the Danger Room report continued, “are now more worried than they’ve ever been that the Damascus government could use its nerve agent stockpile to slaughter its own people.”

Similar reports on Syria’s purported preparation of chemical weapons have subsequently proliferated throughout the US media. Yet, as McClatchy reported, despite the widely published claims of anonymous US officials, “no public evidence” has been offered by the administration to justify its amplified concerns. Nor, it might be added, has any explanation been offered as to why the Syrian regime would knowingly seek to provoke a foreign military intervention by actually using its chemical weapons.

Of course, the propagandizing on behalf of the US government by the loyal legion of stenographers in the elite American media has allowed the Obama administration to renew its threat of military intervention.

Speaking Monday at the National Defense University in Washington, President Obama warned that the use of chemical weapons by Syrian forces would result in “consequences” and that Syrian President Bashar al-Assad would be personally “held accountable” for their use. President Obama’s press secretary, Jay Carney, later went on to allude to a possible military intervention.

“We think it is important to prepare for all scenarios,” Carney said. “Contingency planning is the responsible thing to do.”

(US officials have previously stated that any effort to safeguard chemical weapons in Syria would require 75,000 troops.)

Breaking Free From Electoral Shackles

This stepped up US posturing towards Syria comes amid reports that the Obama administration, now free of any electoral restrains, is seriously contemplating greater intervention into the Syrian crisis.

As the New York Times reported late last month (11/28), the Obama administration is now “considering deeper intervention to help push President Bashar al-Assad from power.”

According to the paper, “the combination of President Obama’s re-election, which has made the White House more willing to take risks, and a series of recent tactical successes by rebel forces, one senior administration official said, ‘has given this debate a new urgency, and a new focus.’”

The precise nature of the administration’s “deeper intervention” into Syria became clearer Tuesday, as the US-dominated NATO military alliance approved the deployment of the American-made Patriot anti-missile system along the Turkey-Syria border. According to a military source quoted by AFP, “up to six Patriot batteries and some 300-400 foreign troops to operate them” are to be deployed along the already tense border.

In explaining the need for deploying the Patriot batteries, NATO Secretary-General Anders Fogh Rasmussen directly cited the revived Syrian “chemical threat.” As Reuters reported, Rasmussen asserted that the specter of Syrian chemical weapons “made it urgent for the alliance to send Patriot anti-missile missiles to Turkey.”

The NATO alliance, of course, maintains that the missile deployment is simply defensive in nature. (A suspect claim repeatedly made regarding missile defense systems.) In fact, Rasmussen even went so far as to claim that the “weapons could help deescalate tensions” along the Syria-Turkey boarder. How exactly the deployment of yet more advanced weapons could function to deescalate tensions, Rasmussen left unclear. Instead, as Russian President Vladimir Putin countered Monday while in Istanbul, “increasing (military) potential will not settle the situation but create the opposite effect.”

Indeed, for in actuality, the NATO missile deployment will likely function to effectively carve out a “no-fly zone” in northern Syria. This, then, will pave the way for creating–á la Libya–a NATO-enforced safe haven for rebels fighting to topple the Assad regime. The Patriot missile batteries, in other words, will function to embolden and legitimate those in both rebel and government ranks pushing a military solution to the crisis, while further sidelining those seeking the necessary political dialogue needed to ultimately resolve the crisis.

Dressing Up Intervention

The provocative deployment of the Patriot batteries, coupled with the orchestrated media furor over Syria’s WMDs, thus makes it quite clear that the process of preparing the American public for the very real possibility of yet another US-led military intervention in the Middle East has begun in earnest. And once again, we see the veil of a humanitarian intervention and the “responsibility to protect” hastily donned to cloak nefarious motives.

The deafening silence of the US during just the latest round of Israeli aggression in the Gaza Strip mere weeks ago, however, ought to give pause to any still suspended in the illusion that humanitarian interests guide US foreign policy in the least. US foreign policy is instead dictated by imperial ambitions and imperatives. And these ambitions, it should to be noted, are not confined to Damascus, but stretch all the way to Tehran.

‘Everyone in US Under Virtual Surveillance’ — NSA Whistleblower

0

RT |

The FBI records the emails of nearly all US citizens, including members of congress, according to NSA whistleblower William Binney. In an interview with RT, he warned that the government can use this information against anyone.

Binney, one of the best mathematicians and code breakers in the history of the National Security Agency, resigned in 2001. He claimed he no longer wanted to be associated with alleged violations of the Constitution, such as how the FBI engages in widespread and pervasive surveillance through powerful devices called ‘Naris.’

This year, Binney received the Callaway award, an annual prize that recognizes those who champion constitutional rights and American values at great risk to their personal or professional lives.

RT: In light of the Petraeus/Allen scandal while the public is so focused on the details of their family drama, one may argue that the real scandal in this whole story is the power, the reach of the surveillance state. I mean if we take General Allen — thousands of his personal e-mails have been sifted through private correspondence. It’s not like any of those men was planning an attack on America. Does the scandal prove the notion that there is no such thing as privacy in a surveillance state?

William Binney: Yes, that’s what I’ve been basically saying for quite some time, is that the FBI has access to the data collected, which is basically the emails of virtually everybody in the country. And the FBI has access to it. All the congressional members are on the surveillance too, no one is excluded. They are all included. So, yes, this can happen to anyone. If they become a target for whatever reason — they are targeted by the government, the government can go in, or the FBI, or other agencies of the government, they can go into their database, pull all that data collected on them over the years, and we analyze it all. So, we have to actively analyze everything they’ve done for the last 10 years at least.

RT: And it’s not just about those, who could be planning, who could be a threat to national security, but also those, who could be just…

WB: It’s everybody. The Naris device, if it takes in the entire line, so it takes in all the data. In fact they advertised they can process the lines at session rates, which means 10-gigabit lines. I forgot the name of the device (it’s not the Naris) — the other one does it at 10 gigabits. That’s why they’re building Bluffdale [database facility], because they have to have more storage, because they can’t figure out what’s important, so they are just storing everything there. So, emails are going to be stored there in the future, but right now stored in different places around the country. But it is being collected — and the FBI has access to it.

RT: You mean it’s being collected in bulk without even requesting providers?

WB: Yes.

RT: Then what about Google, you know, releasing this biannual transparency report and saying that the government’s demands for personal data is at an all-time high and for all of those requesting the US, Google says they complied with the government’s demands 90 percent of the time. But they are still saying that they are making the request, it’s not like it’s all being funneled into that storage. What do you say to that?

WB: I would assume that it’s just simply another source for the same data they are already collecting. My line is in declarations in a court about the 18-T facility in San Francisco, that documented the NSA room inside that AST&T facility, where they had Naris devices to collect data off the fiber optic lines inside the United States. So, that’s kind of a powerful device, that would collect everything it was being sent. It could collect on the order over of 100 billion 1,000-character emails a day. One device.

RT: You say they sift through billions of e-mails. I wonder how do they prioritize? How do they filter it? 

WB: I don’t think they are filtering it. They are just storing it. I think it’s just a matter of selecting when they want it. So, if they want to target you, they would take your attributes, go into that database and pull out all your data.

RT: Were you on the target list?

WB: Oh, sure! I believe I’ve been on it for quite a few years. So I keep telling them everything I think of them in my email. So that when they want to read it they’ll understand what I think of them.

RT: Do you think we all should leave messages for the NSA mail box?

WB: Sure!

RT: You blew the whistle on the agency when George W. Bush was the president. With President Obama in office, in your opinion, has anything changed at the agency, in the surveillance program? In what direction is this administration moving?

WB: The change is it’s getting worse. They are doing more. He is supporting the building of the Bluffdale facility, which is over two billion dollars they are spending on storage room for data. That means that they are collecting a lot more now and need more storage for it. That facility by my calculations that I submitted to the court for the Electronic Frontiers Foundation against NSA would hold on the order of 5 zettabytes of data. Just that current storage capacity is being advertised on the web that you can buy. And that’s not talking about what they have in the near future.

RT: What are they going to do with all of that? Ok, they are storing something. Why should anybody be concerned?

WB: If you ever get on the enemies list, like Petraeus did or… for whatever reason, than you can be drained into that surveillance.

RT: Do you think they would… General Petraeus, who was idolized by the same administration? Or General Allen?

WB: There are certainly some questions, that have to be asked, like why would they target it to begin with? What law were they breaking?

RT: In case of General Petraeus one would argue that there could have been security breaches. Something like that. But with General Allen  — I don’t quite understand, because when they were looking into his private emails to this woman.

WB: That’s the whole point. I am not sure what the internal politics is… That’s part of the program. This government doesn’t want things in the public. It’s not a transparent government. Whatever the reason or the motivation was, I don’t really know, but I certainly think that there was something going on in the background that made them target those fellows. Otherwise why would they be doing it? There is no crime there.

RT: It seems that the public is divided between those, who think that the government surveillance program violates their civil liberties, and those who say, ‘I’ve nothing to hide. So, why should I care?’ What do you say to those who think that it shouldnt concern them. 

WB: The problem is if they think they are not doing anything that’s wrong, they don’t get to define that. The central government does, the central government defines what is right and wrong and whether or not they target you. So, it’s not up to the individuals. Even if they think they aren’t doing something wrong, if their position on something is against what the administration has, then they could easily become a target.

RT: Tell me about the most outrageous thing that you came across during your work at the NSA.

WB: The violations of the constitution and any number of laws that existed at the time. That was the part that I could not be associated with. That’s why I left. They were building social networks on who is communicating and with whom inside this country. So that the entire social network of everybody, of every US citizen was being compiled overtime. So, they are taking from one company alone roughly 320 million records a day. That’s probably accumulated probably close to 20 trillion over the years.

The original program that we put together to handle this to be able to identify terrorists anywhere in the world and alert anyone that they were in jeopardy. We would have been able to do that by encrypting everybody’s communications except those who were targets. So, in essence you would protect their identities and the information about them until you could develop probable cause, and once you showed your probable cause, then you could do a decrypt and target them. And we could do that and isolate those people all alone. It wasn’t a problem at all. There was no difficulty in that.

RT: It sounds very difficult and very complicated. Easier to take everything in and…

WB: No. It’s easier to use the graphing techniques, if you will, for the relationships for the world to filter out data, so that you don’t have to handle all that data. And it doesn’t burden you with a lot more information to look at, than you really need to solve the problem.

RT: Do you think that the agency doesn’t have the filters now?

WB: No.

RT: You have received the Callaway award for civic courage. Congratulations! On the website and in the press release it says: “It is awarded to those, who stand out for constitutional rights and American values at great risk to their personal or professional lives.” Under the code of spy ethics — I don’t know if there is such a thing — your former colleagues, they probably look upon you as a traitor. How do you look back at them?

WB: That’s pretty easy. They are violating the foundation of this entire country. Why this entire government was formed? It’s founded with the Constitution and the rights were given to the people in the country under that Constitution. They are in violation of that. And under executive order 13526, section 1.7 — you can not classify information to just cover up a crime, which this is, and that was signed by President Obama. Also President Bush signed it earlier as an executive order, a very similar one. If any of this comes into Supreme Court and they rule it unconstitutional, then the entire house of cards of the government falls.

RT: What are the chances of that? What are the odds?

WB: The government is doing the best they can to try to keep it out of court. And, of course, we are trying to do the best we can to get into court. So, we decided it deserves a ruling from the Supreme Court. Ultimately the court is supposed to protect the Constitution. All these people in the government take an oath to defend the Constitution. And they are not living up to the oath of office.

 

RINF Video: The Leveson Smokescreen – illusion of choice

RINF News reports on the illusion of choice by either accepting or rejecting the proposals by Lord Leveson to regulate the British press.

Max Clifford arrested over sex claims

0

AFP |

LONDON – Police arrested top publicist Max Clifford on suspicion of sexual offences Thursday, his lawyer said, adding that the man best known for helping scandal-hit celebrities would cooperate with detectives.

Clifford was arrested as part of a wider investigation in Britain into sex offences sparked by allegations that late BBC presenter Jimmy Savile was a serial paedophile, although police would not specify what Clifford is accused of.

“Max Clifford is being interviewed by police. Mr Clifford will assist the police as best he can with their enquiries,” his lawyer Charlotte Harris said in a statement.

“When we are in a position to provide further information, we will.”

Clifford, 69, is one of the most influential publicity agents in Britain who has represented everyone from OJ Simpson to Mohamed Al Fayed, working closely with the press to manage, break and stop stories about his clients.

He left school with no qualifications but after a brief stint as a press officer for EMI records in the 1960s, built up his company, Max Clifford Associates, to become one of the most powerful forces in British media.

Clifford becomes the latest in a string of celebrities to be arrested under a Scotland Yard investigation codenamed Operation Yewtree, after former glam rocker and convicted paedophile Gary Glitter, comedian Freddie Starr and radio presenter Dave Lee Travis.

All three have protested their innocence and Travis made clear that the allegations against him, unlike those against Savile, did not concern children.

Police gave no details of the specific allegations against Clifford, saying only that he had been arrested under the strand of their investigation into suspects who had no involvement with Savile.

“Officers working on Operation Yewtree have this morning, Thursday 6 December, arrested a man in his 60s in connection with the investigation,” Scotland Yard said in a statement.

“The man from Surrey (near London) was arrested at 07:40 hrs on suspicion of sexual offences and has been taken into a central London police station.”

Police launched Operation Yewtree in October after a television documentary alleged that Savile, who died in 2011, was a predatory paedophile.

Savile is now believed to have preyed on as many as 300 young victims.

Clifford has a client list that is the envy of publicists around the world and has the power to make or break stars — and the journalists who cover them.

He was behind kiss-and-tell stories by Rebecca Loos, who claimed to have had an affair with footballer David Beckham, although he has always denied it, and Daisy Wright, Jude Law’s nanny who had an affair with the actor.

The story behind one of the most famous headlines ever to appear in Rupert Murdoch’s daily tabloid The Sun — “Freddie Starr ate my hamster” — was typical of how Clifford promoted his stars.

Clifford told an inquiry into press ethics earlier this year that the tabloid proposed the story but, despite realising that it was rubbish, he said they could go ahead because it would help publicise Starr’s upcoming tour.

The publicist gave evidence in part because he was a victim of phone-hacking by the News of the World, the weekly tabloid shut down by Murdoch last year.

Clifford told the inquiry that he agreed a settlement with Murdoch’s News International worth £660,000 ($1.06 million, 800,000 euros) plus legal costs, and in return agreed to continue working with the News of the World on stories.

Another BBC presenter arrested: Stuart Hall

0

BBC broadcaster Stuart Hall has been charged with three counts of indecent assault.

Complaints about the 82-year-old Radio 5 Live football presenter have been made to Lancashire police about alleged incidents in the 1970s and 1980s.

Hall has worked for more than a half century in British broadcasting and was awarded an OBE in this year’s New Years Honours. He also presented the It’s A Knockout show in the 1970s.

John Dilworth, of the Crown Prosecution Service, said the charges are that between September 1, 1974, and December 31, 1974, he indecently assaulted a woman who was then aged 16 or 17 years.

Between January 1, 1983, and December 31, 1983, he is accused of indecently assaulting a girl then aged eight or nine years and between July 1, 1984, and September 27, 1984, he allegedly indecently assaulted a girl then aged 13 years.

Mr Dilworth added: “He has been bailed to appear at Preston Magistrates’ Court on January 7, 2013.

“This decision is made in accordance with the Code for Crown Prosecutors and I have concluded that there is sufficient evidence for a realistic prospect of conviction and that it is in the public interest to prosecute this case.”

Hall was arrested at his home in Wilmslow, Cheshire, on Wednesday morning.

The BBC has said that he will not be working for them while police continue with their inquiries.

Originally published on Sky News

Bradley Manning: A Window Into The American Soul

0

Paul Craig Roberts, rinf.com |

Liberty consists of government being ruled by law and citizens having control over law. This was the way our founding fathers set up the US Constitution. It is the Constitution that defines the United States. Every member of the government and the armed forces swears allegiance to the Constitution—not to the government or to the president or to a political party or to an ideology—to defend the Constitution against enemies foreign and domestic.

Today the emphasis needs to be on the Constitution’s domestic enemies in “our own” government. America’s foreign enemies are miniscule. But the domestic enemies are legion. America’s enemies consist, with whistleblower exceptions, of the entire US government, both executive branch, legislative branch (with possibly a dozen exceptions), and judicial branch (with few exceptions).

The three branches of our government have united to destroy US civil liberties in the name of a hoax, “the war on terror.” Even if the US were overrun with terrorists, how could they harm us more than our government has harmed us by destroying the US Constitution?

If you don’t believe that the US Constitution has been destroyed by Republicans and Democrats alike, read my book coauthored with Lawrence M. Stratton, The Tyranny Of Good Intentions, and the five articles whose URLs are provided below.

Bradley Manning, a member of the US military, complied with his oath of office, with the US Military Code, with the Nuremberg standards set by the US government, with the strictures expressed by the chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff during the George W, Bush administration, and with his own conscience. Manning, allegedly (we will never know), released to WikiLeaks the video of the US military murdering two journalists and a dozen innocent people walking down a street. http://www.truthdig.com/avbooth/item/video_shows_murder_of_journalists_and_iraqi_civilians_20100405/

After the murder of these people by the US military playing video games with live people, a father with two young children stopped his van to help the survivors crawling in the street. The US military, due to either blood-lust, incompetence, or total evil, killed the father and sent high caliber bullets into the bodies of the two small children.

The murderers then blame the father for bringing children into the combat zone created by the incompetence or evil of the US troops, who obviously get their jollies from murdering people. TV cameras are claimed to be weapons and justifications for murdering 15 people.

Subsequently, a few people, whom the video shows to be unarmed, walk into a building.

The US troops claim the unarmed people have weapons and RPGs and send three hellfire missiles into the building. The US troops then report that all the “targets” are dead.

Any real patriotic American who saw this video would be compelled to release it. If Manning released it to Wikeleaks, then Manning is the most morally responsible American alive. What has Manning’s moral conscience cost him?

It has cost Manning 900 days held incommunicado illegally by the US government. President John F. Kennedy’s presidency lasted 1,000 days. Manning was held and tortured for almost the entire length of Camelot.

And the US government has got away with it.

Americans don’t care. It is not them. They are too stupid to understand that once law is gone, they can be next.

In their desire to punish Manning, US military and civilian authorities failed to realize that the lesson for soldiers is that crimes against humanity will not be punished, but those who reveal the crimes will be punished.

On November 29 Bradley Manning testified in federal court about his illegal confinement and torture by the US government. Manning’s testimony was not covered by the US media. The New York Times, in Chris Floyd’s words, “contented itself with a brief bit of wire copy from AP, tucked away on page 3.”

In contrast, the British Guardian covered Manning’s testimony in detail in two stories 68 paragraphs long. The British people are informed of the US government’s crimes against humanity in violation of international law and US law, but not the American people.

A formal United Nations investigations into the illegal, brutal and inhuman treatment of Bradley Manning denounced his treatment as “cruel and inhuman.” The US State Department spokesman, Col. P.J. Crowley, resigned after publicly protesting Manning’s illegal and inhuman treatment by the US government.

The presstitute media was silent.

Glenn Greenwald, the constitutional attorney, concludes that “the US establishment journalists have enabled the government every step of the way.” The presstitutes hold “themselves out as adversarial watchdogs, but nothing provokes their animosity more than someone who effectively challenges government actions.”

Greenwald praises Bradley Manning who “has bestowed the world with multiple vital benefits. But as his court martial finally reaches its conclusion, one likely to result in the imposition of a long prison term, it appears his greatest gift is this window into America’s political soul.”

The window into America’s political soul reveals total evil. The US government constitutes Satan’s Chosen People. Nothing else can be said for those who rule and oppress us.

http://www.informationclearinghouse.info/article33193.htm
http://www.informationclearinghouse.info/article33192.htm
http://www.informationclearinghouse.info/article33200.htm
http://www.informationclearinghouse.info/article33203.htm
http://www.democracynow.org/2012/11/29/exclusive_julian_assange_on_wikileaks_bradley

University Uses Tesla Technology to Wirelessly Charge Electric Bus

0

Activist Post | 

Utah State University presented a first-of-its-kind electric bus that is charged through wireless charging technology in a demonstration Nov. 15.

The Aggie Bus rolled onto the streets carrying passengers today; just 16 months after USU demonstrated the first high-power, high-efficiency wireless power transfer system capable of transferring enough energy to quickly charge an electric vehicle. In July 2011, the USU Research Foundation demonstrated 90 percent electrical transfer efficiency of five kilowatts over an air gap of 10 inches. The demonstration validated that electric vehicles can efficiently be charged with wireless technology.

USU’s Wireless Power Transfer team, in cooperation with the Utah Science Technology and Research initiative’s Advanced Transportation Institute at USU, has designed a more efficient way to meet the nation’s transportation needs. By carefully applying a mix of modern advances in engineering and Nikola Tesla’s principles of induction, USU engineer Hunter Wu and his team have solved one of today’s vexing problems in WPT.

Read more and watch the video here…

 

Measuring corruption as a means to fight it

0

The 2012 Corruption Perceptions Index is a useful reminder that no country is immune to the effects of corruption.

As Huguette Labelle, Chair of Transparency International notes in the video message below, “Looking at this year’s Corruption Perceptions Index, few would fail to recognise corruption as a central major threat facing humanity, one that destroys lives and communities and undermines countries and institutions.” She adds, “People are more aware of the cost of corruption, generating anger that threatens to further destabilise societies and exacerbate violent conflicts.”

The Corruption Perceptions Index scores countries on a scale from 0 (highly corrupt) to 100 (very clean). While no country has a perfect score, the majority of countries score below 50, indicating a serious corruption problem. This translates into human suffering, with poor families being extorted for bribes to see doctors or to get access to clean drinking water.

Watch videos here…

Leveson and data protection — a hidden threat

0

When thinking of a topic for our next instalment of legal commentary, it was obvious that I had to talk about Leveson.

But what is there to say? The debate over a new self-regulatory body, possibly underpinned by statute, is in full flow, and anything I write will have already been said, or be out of date by the time you read this.

Having looked at the executive summary of the report, it becomes apparent that there is another less publicised demon lurking in the recommendations — the proposed changes to data protection law.

The Data Protection Act 1998 is a complicated beast; most people don’t understand it, they just want to know how to comply with it.

The introduction to the Act outlines that its purpose is to regulate the“processing of information relating to individuals, including the obtaining, holding, use or disclosure of such information”. As such, the Act is of great significance to journalists when it comes to holding information in relation to people featured in their articles.

Section 32 of the Act is crucial to journalists and gives you a special exemption from some of the data protection principles and various sections of the Act. Essentially, if the information is held with a view to publication; the holder of the data reasonably believes it is in the public interest to hold the data, bearing in mind the importance of freedom of expression; and compliance with the provisions is compatible with the special purposes of journalism, then a number of obligations imposed by the Act do not apply.

Journalists rely on this section on a daily basis.

However, Leveson proposes that the scope of section 32 is narrowed so that the personal data held by journalists needs to be “necessary” for publication, rather than held with a view to publication. Leveson recommends that wording be introduced to provide for a balancing exercise between freedom of expression and privacy, rather than the current emphasis on freedom of expression. An objective public interest in the publication of the data will need to outweigh the intrusion into privacy in order to be protected by the modified section 32.

Further to that, the proposal is that section 32 should no longer allow the data to be automatically exempt from many of the data protection principles, and the right of subject access.

In practice, if the data is no longer automatically exempted from the right of subject access by virtue of a narrower section 32, journalists will find themselves having to provide subjects with the data that is held about them if they request it — an unwanted and time consuming change that could also prove damaging to the articles journalists produce, let alone the principle of protecting confidential sources.

A ‘beefing’ up of the Information Commissioners Office (ICO) is proposed, giving it added prosecution powers and increased contact with the CPS.

The idea of the ICO being replaced by a Board of Commissioners drawn from different relevant industries, including a Commissioner from the media sector, rounds off the data protection proposals.

The significance of these proposed changes, especially in relation to Section 32, should not be underestimated; they represent another challenge to freedom of expression and the freedom of the press.

It’s crucial that whilst the limelight is on the issue of a new regulatory body, these changes don’t slip through without proper scrutiny.

Originally published on Hold The Front Page

Student group to sue Facebook over privacy policies

0

The group filed 22 complaints against Facebook Ireland before the Irish Data Protection Commissioner

A student group in Austria, calling itself “europe-v-facebook.org”, is planning to challenge Facebook’s privacy policies in an Irish court where the company has its international headquarters.

The campaign group claimed that the social networking company has failed to comply with European data protection law despite repeated requests and formal complaints by the group members.

Last month, several privacy watchdogs, including the Office of the Irish Data Protection Commissioner (DPC), questioned the social network’s planned changes to user privacy.

On behalf of the group, Max Schrems filed 22 complaints against Facebook Ireland before the DPC.

Schrems said: “The audit, which was triggered by our complaints, has led to many achievements, Facebook had to disclose more data it holds on each user, it had to turn off facial recognition in the EU and it had to limit retention periods for certain data.

“Even the worldwide privacy policy needed to be changed. The work by the Irish authority has led to many important steps in the right direction, which we very much honor.” Schrems said.

Facebook said: “The way Facebook Ireland handles European personal data has been subject to thorough review by the Irish Data Protection Commissioner over the past year.”

“The two detailed reports produced by the DPC demonstrate that Facebook Ireland complies with European data protection principles and Irish law,” the social network said.

Recently, the social network amended the planned changes to end user voting on privacy policy issues after receiving criticism from its users and consumer groups.

Last month, two internet privacy advocacy watchdogs, Electronic Privacy Information Center and the Center for Digital Democracy, have urged Facebook to withdraw its proposed changes.

Originally published on CBR

California Eyeing Drone Surveillance

Plans by the first California local government to deploy a surveillance drone were postponed Tuesday amid protests by rights groups who complained that Alameda County authorities were rushing the plan without public input.

“There has to be robust public engagement whether to deploy something like this,” said Will Matthews, a spokesman for the American Civil Liberties Union.

Alameda County is moving to become one of dozens of local law enforcement agencies nationwide to deploy the unmanned crafts. Some of the agencies include the Seattle Police Department, Miami-Dade Police Department and the Texas Department of Public Safety.

The move comes three months after the Government Accountability Office warned Congress that its push for drones to become commonplace in U.S. airspace fails to take into account privacy, security and even GPS jamming and spoofing. The GAO, Congress’ research arm, was responding to the FAA Modernization and Reform Act of 2012, signed by President Barack Obama in February, which among other things requires the Federal Aviation Administration to accelerate drone flights in U.S. airspace.

Alameda County, in the Bay Area, is home to Oakland, the scene of violent Occupy protests last year.

Whether Alameda County Sheriff Greg Ahern has been completely upfront with his proposal to accept drone funding from the Department of Homeland Security is up for debate. Funding for a drone of 3 or 4 pounds was included in a Board of Supervisors agenda item listing more than $1 million in grants in all for a variety of other policing programs, from bomb detection to general training.

In a letter to the board, the sheriff is requesting that it accept $31,000 in grant money that would partly fund an unmanned aircraft, which the county has received bids ranging from $50,000 to $107,500.

“This system will provide real-time situational analysis for first responders to include search and rescue missions, tactical operations, disaster response, recovery and damage assessment, explosive ordnance response, wild land and structure fire response and response to Hazmat incidents,” (.pdf) he wrote.

But documents before the California Emergency Management Agency, which is distributing the federal drone funding, show that the sheriff’s “objectives” for the drone is “intelligence and information sharing and dissemination, planning.” (.pdf)

The records were obtained by the ACLU and the Electronic Frontier Foundation via open-records laws, and provided to Wired.

Weeks ago, the sheriff told a local NBC affiliate that it was a “no-brainer” when it came to deploying a drone.

No model of drone has been chosen. But the records show that the agency has received several bids.

Among them, they include:

The Alameda County Board of Supervisors sent the Sheriff’s funding request to its Public Protection Committee, which is tentatively slated to have a public hearing on the matter as early as next month.

Originally published on Wired

Israeli Settlement Construction Fallout

0

Stephen Lendman, rinf.com |

Netanyahu’s E1 Ma’aleh Adumin settlement construction announcement drew considerable flack. What it means remains to be seen. Palestinian rights have been spurned for decades. Expect little change now.

At issue is separating the West Bank from Jerusalem, Judaizing the entire city, surrounding Palestinian urban areas with encroaching Israeli settlements, and allegedly preventing a two-state solution no longer possible with or without E1 development.

Netanyahu and previous Israeli prime ministers promised none. Plans were drawn long ago. Now they’re announced. Washington and major Western partners knew about them all along. They said nothing earlier.

If completed, Ma’ale Adumin settlement will be connected to Jerusalem. Doing so divides the West Bank into separate north/south areas.

Washington expressed weak opposition. National Security spokesman Tommy Vietor called the move “counterproductive.” UN Secretary-General Ban Ki-moon was no better.

Through his spokesman he expressed “disappointment.” UN Human Rights Council High Commissioner Navi Pillay said nothing. She fell from grace long ago. Like Ban, she’s a reliable imperial partner. Both spurn what they claim to support.

On December 3, Haaretz headlined “UK, France may recall ambassadors to protest Israel’s settlement construction,” saying:

So far it’s not announced. Haaretz quoted an unnamed “senior European diplomat” saying:

“This time it won’t just be a condemnation. There will be real action taken against Israel. London is furious about the E1 decision.”

Something may be announced this week. Recalling ambassadors would be a first. British and French bluster may stop short of doing it.

Instead, they “could invoke it (as a possibility) in case of further” Israeli escalation against Palestine. Something will be announced soon.

What follows may be moderate. Possibilities include “suspending strategic dialogue meetings,” labeling Israeli settlement products, and/or perhaps imposing slap-on-the-wrist sanctions against them.

German and Dutch officials also warned about less Israeli diplomatic support.

“Europe (is) putting heavy diplomatic pressure on Israel to reverse its decision,” said Haaretz.

“Five senior (EU) ambassadors communicated strong words of protest to” Israel’s Foreign Ministry.

EU ambassador Andrew Standley asked Netanyahu’s office for “clarifications.”

His office said more punitive PA steps are planned. An unnamed Israeli source said:

“The Palestinians will soon come to understand that they made a mistake when they took unilateral action and breached their treaties with Israel.”

Israel considers public posturing about abstaining from E1 building “no longer relevant.”

On Sunday, Netanyahu said “Palestinians want to use the peace process to bring about an end of the State of Israel.”

He has his own way of turning truth on its head. Every comment he makes proves it. He gives new meaning to rogue governance.

Former State Department official Robert Danin called E1 construction “a red line” for Washington.

Former US Israeli ambassador Israel Kurtzer said Israel’s move “should spur the administration into action.” How he didn’t say.

Haaretz cited UK Sky News quoting Foreign Office sources saying, “All options are on the table.” There’s an “appetite for action.”

Britain may consider “revisiting” or perhaps suspending EU/Israeli trade agreements. Don’t bet on it or anything else harsh.

A French Foreign Ministry official said, “There are other ways in which we can express our disapproval.”

In other words, talk tough. Do little or nothing. Free Israel to do what it wants. It’s taken full advantage for decades. Expect no change now.

On Sunday, Netanyahu’s cabinet voted unanimously to call Occupied Palestine “disputed territory (over which) the Jewish people have a natural right and territorial claim.”

Around 600,000 Israeli settlers occupy over half the West Bank and parts of East Jerusalem. Doing so violates international law. Fourth Geneva leaves no ambiguity. Article 49 states:

“Individual or mass forcible transfers, as well as deportations of protected persons from occupied territory to the territory of the Occupying Power or to that of any other country, occupied or not, are prohibited, regardless of their motive.”

Israel spurns all international law with impunity. After the 1967 Six Day War, the Allon Plan proposed:

– “maximum land with minimum Arabs;”

– annexing the choicest 40% of the West Bank and Gaza, including the Jordan Valley and Dead Sea’s western shore;

– expropriating a substantial area around Greater Jerusalem, including the Latrun salient; other portions would be seized later to secure full control of a united city, never again to be divided;

– dispossessing Palestinians from areas Israel wants solely for Jews;

– building permanent settlements and army bases; and

– making remaining parts of the West Bank an autonomous region economically linked to Israel.

Allon and subsequent plans made peace and Palestine for Palestinians impossible. Israeli policy reflects separation, discrimination, and permanent occupation harshness.

Israel manipulates conditions on the ground. It’s done to create the appearance of settlement legitimacy. Military order diktats enforce it. Israel tramples on inviolable international agreements.

It makes its own rules. It does what it pleases. It’s contemptuous of fundamental human rights. It ignores its responsibilities as an occupying power.

It won’t end what long ago became lawless. Palestine belongs to Palestinians, not Israelis. Redrawing the Territories has no legitimacy. E1 construction is Israel’s latest outrage. Western rhetoric stops short of ending what no one should tolerate.

In 1999, Israel approved an E1 master plan. It covers about 12,000 dunams. Israel declared them “state land.” Doing so was illegal.

In 1979, Israel’s High Court Elon Moreh case decision prohibited requisitioning private Palestinian land for settlement construction. Israel ignored the ruling. Straightaway it declared 900,000 dunams state land. It steals Palestinian land with impunity.

Ma’ale Adumim settlement claims jurisdiction over 48,000 dunams. E1 construction involves stealing private Palestinian land.

Israel wants it for residential housing, commerce, tourism, regional services, and other Jews-only development. Detailed plans were approved.

E1 and other settlement construction require land theft, home demolitions, forced dispossessions, and denying Palestinian self-determination.

In 1967, settlement construction began. Washington and other Western states expressed rhetorical opposition only. Policies with teeth never followed.

It’s hard imagining what never before happened is planned now. America will apply heavy pressure to prevent it.

So far, opposition to E1 construction is just bluster. Little more than that may follow. Reuters said “Netanyahu brush(ed) off world condemnation,” saying:

“We will carry on building in Jerusalem and in all the places that are on the map of Israel’s strategic interests.”

Israeli Housing Minister, Ariel Attias, said invitation bids for 1,000 East Jerusalem homes and over 1,000 West Bank ones would be announced in weeks.

In late November, Carter administration National Security Advisor Zbigniew Brzezinski said:

“I don’t think there is an implicit obligation for the United States to follow like a stupid mule whatever the Israelis do.”

“If they decide to start a war, simply on the assumption that we’ll automatically be drawn into it, I think it is the obligation of friendship to say, ‘you’re not going to be making national decisions for us.’ ”

“I think that the United States has the right to have its own national security policy.”

Perhaps he feels the same way about lawless Israeli settlements. If so, what better time to say so than now.

A Final Comment

On December 3, the International Middle East Media Center (IMEMC) headlined “Israeli Security Services Oppose Government Decision to Build More Settlement,” saying:

Officials called Netanyahu’s announcement a hasty “angry move.” Punishment shouldn’t follow unless Palestine sues Israel at the ICC or ICJ.

At the same time, occupation harshness continues. On December 3, Israeli soldiers murdered a Palestinian civilian near Nablus. Hatem Shadid was a 35-year old construction worker father of five.

Overnight, a Fatah official and 10 other Palestinians were kidnapped. Settlers burned a Palestinian car. They also spray-painted hate slogans in Hebron. Israeli security forces did nothing to stop them.

On December 4, Palestinian political prisoners will again hunger strike in solidarity against lawless detentions and gulag harshness.

In 2009, Israel began stamping visitor passports to the West Bank “Palestinian Authority only.” Doing so restricted them to West Bank areas.

Israel changed tactics. It’s now stamping passports “Judea & Samaria only.” Doing so amounts to stealth West Bank annexation. Israel annexed East Jerusalem earlier.

Western outrage didn’t follow. Nothing is said now about West Bank annexation.

E1 construction is bad enough. Decades of lawless settlement construction is worse. Annexing the entire West Bank reveals Israel’s dirty game. Don’t expect Western condemnation to follow.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “How Wall Street Fleeces America: Privatized Banking, Government Collusion and Class War”

http://www.claritypress.com/Lendman.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

Legal Foundations for War Crimes, Debt Collection and Colonization

0

James Petras |

By now we are familiar with imperial states using their military power to attack, destroy and occupy independent countries. Boatloads of important studies have documented how imperial countries have seized and pillaged the resources of mineral-rich and agriculturally productive countries, in consort with multi-national corporations. Financial critics have provided abundant data on the ways in which imperial creditors have extracted onerous rents, royalties and debt payments from indebted countries and their taxpayers, workers, employees and productive sectors.

What has not been examined fully is the over-arching legal architecture which informs, justifies and facilitates imperial wars, pillage and debt collection.

The Centrality of Imperial Law

While force and violence, especially through overt and covert military intervention, have always been an essential part of empire-building, it does not operate in a legal vacuum: Judicial institutions, rulings and legal precedents precede, accompany and follow the process of empire building. The legality of imperial activity is based largely on the imperial state’s judicial system and its own legal experts. Their legal theories and opinions are always presented as over-ruling international law as well as the laws of the countries targeted for imperial intervention. Imperial law supersedes international law simply because imperial law is backed by brute force; it possesses imperial/colonial air, ground and naval armed forces to ensure the supremacy of imperial law. In contrast, international law lacks an effective enforcement mechanism. Moreover, international law, to the extent that it is effective, is applied only to the weaker powers and to regimes designated by the imperial powers as ‘violators’. The very judicial processes, including the appointment of judges and prosecutors who interpret international law, investigate international crime and arrest, sentence and punish ‘guilty’ parties are under to the influence of the reigning imperial powers. In other words, the application and jurisdiction of international law is selective and subject to constraints imposed by the configurations of imperial and national power. International law, at best, can provide a ‘moral’ judgment, a not insignificant basis for strengthening the political claims of countries, regimes and people seeking redress from imperial war crimes and economic pillage. To counter the claims and judgments pertaining to international law, especially in the area of the Geneva protocols such as war crimes and crimes against humanity, imperial legal experts, scholars and judges have elaborated a legal framework to justify or exempt imperial-state activity.

The Uses of Imperial Law

Empire-building throughout history is the result of conquest — the use or threat of superior military force. The US global empire is no exception. Where compliant rulers ‘invite’ or ‘submit’ to imperial domination, such acts of treason on the part of ‘puppet’ or ‘client’ rulers usually precipitate popular rebellions, which are then suppressed by joint imperial and collaborator armies. They cite imperial legal doctrine to justify their intervention to repress a subject people in revolt. While empires arose through the direct or indirect use of unbridled force, the maintenance and consolidation of empires requires a legal framework. Legal doctrines precede, accompany and follow the expansion and consolidation of empire for several reasons.

Legality is really an extension of imperial conquest by other means. A state of constant warfare raises the cost of imperial maintenance. Force, especially in imperial democracies undermines the sense of civic virtue, which the rulers and citizens claim to uphold. Maintaining ‘law and order’ in the conquered nations requires a legal system and doctrine to uphold imperial rule, giving the facade of legitimacy to the outside world, attracting collaborator classes and individuals and providing the basis for the recruitment of local military, judicial and police officials.

Imperial legal pronouncements, whether issued directly by executive, judicial, military or administrative bodies, are deemed the ‘supreme law of the universe’, superior to international law and protocols fashioned by non-imperial authorities and legal experts. This does not imply that imperial rulers totally discard international law: they just apply it selectively to their adversaries, especially against independent nations and rulers, in order to justify imperial intervention and aggression — Hence the ‘legal bases’ for dismantling Yugoslavia or invading Iraq and assassinating its rulers.

Legal rulings are issued by the imperial judiciary to force states to comply with the economic demands of multi-national corporations, banks, creditors and speculators, even after the local or national courts have ruled such claims unlawful. Imperial law protects and provides sanctuary and financial protection to convicted former collaborator-rulers charged with human rights crimes, pillage of public treasury and destruction of democratic institutions. Imperial judicial and administrative agencies selectively investigate, prosecute and levy severe fines and even jail sentences on banks, individuals and financial institutions of their competitor imperial countries, thereby strengthening the economic position of their own ‘national’ imperial firms.

Judicial officials are not only ‘instruments’ of closely related imperial political and economic powers; they also instrumentalize and, in some cases, override officials from other branches of their own imperial government and economic sectors. Judges, with ties to particular financial sectors, may rule in favor of one group of creditors thereby prejudicing others. In a recent ruling, a New York judge ruled in favor of the demands by minority creditors that the Argentine government make ‘full payment’ on long-standing national debt in, prejudicing already agreed upon payments to the majority of creditors who had negotiated an earlier debt-restructuring arrangement.

Imperial legal doctrine has played a central role in justifying and providing a basis for the exercise of international terrorism. Executives, such as US Presidents Bush and Obama, have been provided with the legal power to undertake cross-national ‘targeted’ assassinations of opponents using predator drones and ordering military intervention, in clear violation of international law and national sovereignty. Imperial law, above all else, ‘legalizes’ aggression and economic pillage and undermines the laws of targeted countries, creating lawlessness and chaos among its victims.

Imperial law and judicial rulings form the basis for imperial subjugation on the assumption that the world legal systems are multi-tiered: Imperial-centered legal systems supersede those of less powerful states. Within each ‘tier’ there are further refinements: Competing imperial legal systems adjudicate in favor of their partisan political and economic elites. Imperial clients who obey their imperial overlords are favored by imperial laws while imperial laws are applied against their adversaries.

Conclusion

Clearly in a world imperial system there can be no independent judicial bodies who abide by universally accepted legal codes. Each set of judicial authorities reflect and actively promote policies favoring and extending their imperial prerogatives. There are rare exceptions where a judge will rule against a particular imperial policy but over the long run imperial law guides judicial opinions

Imperial legal doctrines and judicial decisions set the groundwork for imperial wars and economic pillage. The empire’s legal experts redefine assassinations, coercion, torture and arbitrary arrests as compatible with the ‘constitutional order’ by claiming imminent and constant threats to the security of the imperial state.

Law is not simply part of the superstructure “reflecting” the power of economic or political institutions: it also guides and directs political and economic institutions committing material resources to implement imperial doctrines.

In this sense, imperial rulers are not ‘lawless’ as some liberal critics would argue; they function in accordance with ‘imperial jurisprudence’ and are faithful to the legal doctrines of empire building. It is pointless to argue that most imperial leaders trample on constitutional guarantees and international laws. If an imperial ruler pursued a “constitutional agenda” eroding imperial prerogatives or, even worse, applied international law to prosecute those carrying out brutal imperial policy, he would be quickly condemned for dereliction of duty and/or immoral behavior and impeached or overthrown.

James Petras, a former Professor of Sociology at Binghamton University, New York, owns a 50-year membership in the class struggle, is an adviser to the landless and jobless in Brazil and Argentina, and is co-author of Globalization Unmasked (Zed Books). Petras’ most recent book is The Arab Revolt and the Imperialist Counterattack. He can be reached at: jpetras@binghamton.edu. Read other articles by James, or visit James’s website.

Originally published on Dissident Voice

 

10 Ways to Prepare Your Community for Economic Collapse

0

Activist Post | 

As economic collapse approaches, the only question is whether it will remain in slow motion or take a dramatic turn for the worse. If we’re lucky it will remain in slow motion to give people and communities enough time to prepare as much as possible.

We only need to look at the chaos that occurred during the aftermath of Hurricane Sandy where hardly anyone was prepared for weeks without power, and they even had some forewarning. Unfortunately most people are still blind to the coming economic storm. They’re frogs in slowly simmering water getting ready to boil.

It’s one thing to prep for yourself, but if the economic collapse is sustained for a long period of time, it will take a tribe to survive as comfortably as possible. The bigger your extended survival group the easier it will be, and if you can encourage your greater community to move more toward self-reliance the better off you all will be.

If you’re a prepper who understands the severity of the coming events, now is the time to get your community involved. You don’t have to convince everyone the sky is falling, only the importance of more self-sufficiency just in case there is an unforeseen emergency.

Here are ten ways to help your community prepare:

Meet Your Tribe: This starts with forming your core group of local prepper friends. These people will share your understanding, have great ideas, and can share the burden of prepping. Then, at the very least, meet all of your immediate neighbors and size them up as to their mindset and ability. Organize fun and educational block parties to demonstrate and encourage the solutions outlined on this list. Finally, take some of your ideas to town hall meetings to seek broader cooperation and more volunteers.

Alternative Water Sources: Water is the most important element for survival. If the grid goes down, public water will be sure to follow. Locate private wells that can be switched to hand pumps or generators, or streams, rivers and ponds that can be piped and stored near your community. Create a map of these resources for everyone in your group of volunteers to keep safe if crisis strikes. Educate your neighbors with flyers or demonstrations at block parties about having back-up water supplies, rainwater and greywater use, and water purification methods. Encourage your neighbors to keep at least 3 days of drinking water stored in their homes.

Garden Projects:  Encourage and help neighbors with their individual gardens and they’ll help you with yours. Hold neighborhood workshops with experts on composting, permaculture, aquaponics, small livestock, seed preservation, and canning. Stress the importance to the greater community of gardens in public spaces that are being wasted on grass that must be mowed at the taxpayer’s expense. With more of the local landscape turned into an edible landscape, the easier the community will be able to absorb the impact of economic collapse, particularly rapid inflation of food prices.

Local Food Co-Ops: Another very important element to local food self-sufficiency is becoming involved with your local food cooperatives. These typically include many of your local artisan farmers and organic gardeners. You may be surprised by how big the local food movement already is in your area, but it needs to be much bigger when severe economic crisis hits. Support them with your business and whatever skills you can bring to the table. Encourage your neighbors to join and participate as well. Not only will this help expand local commerce and food production, it also helps build a healthier community. A great resource to find local farmers in your area is LocalHarvest.org.

Barter Systems: If the dollar collapses (which most people predict will be the trigger of economic collapse), having a local system of trade will soften the impact tremendously. Even if you just begin with trading services with your neighbors, get the idea barter to spread. You may already have a local grassroots currency or barter exchange in your area. Many food co-ops already have them as well. If they don’t, there are plenty of resources that teach you how to start one yourself. The importance of laying the groundwork for such an exchange cannot be understated, and if the collapse miraculously evaporates, the barter system will still encourage local trade so the community flourishes. This is also a great way to identify team players with vital skills needed during collapse situations.

Alternative Energy:  This is perhaps the most challenging issue facing any individual prepper as well as a small community as a whole. Virtually all areas are beholden to large interconnected electric grids and multinational oil companies for their energy. But as we saw recently with Hurricane Sandy, people without fuel or power go crazy after just a few short days. Imagine weeks and months without power or fuel. For personal preparation, it’s wise to at least have a generator, and perhaps some solar panels for refrigeration and electronics. Encouraging your neighbors to do the same may be the best you can hope for community involvement, but present ideas like generators for all essential services to prevent a breakdown of law and order. Work on implementing a community or co-op biodiesel refinery for used cooking oil, or a windmill or solar station for the back-up water supply, etc

Neighborhood Watch: All communities are unique and will require different levels of security in times of crisis. As we saw with Katrina and Sandy, the National Guard and the local police were no match for keeping the looters at bay. And, again, these were just temporary setbacks. A sustained economic crisis could bring many desperate people or worse – organized gangs – to your neighborhood. The cops will likely be preoccupied with much bigger concerns than your community assuming the locality can still afford their salaries. Start with a simple neighborhood watch to create a basic plan for deterring invaders. Make note of neighbors who are former military or hunters to recruit should things get dicey enough to require some firepower.

Food Bank:  Everyone should have their own personal supply of survival foods. But you may also consider grouping with your tribe of preppers or a few neighbors to create a food bank where you can combine funds for bulk food storage. This food bank should consist of the most basic of foods like wheat, rice, and beans.  This can serve as an “open only in case of an emergency” cache. Beyond that, helping out with your community food bank or other food programs for the less fortunate is also a way to help keep your community stable during the crisis.

Communications: Don’t underestimate the importance of maintaining open communication with your community.  If the power goes off, it may not be long before phones and Internet are gone too. Emergency radios are great to monitor the “official” activity outside the community, but being able to speak to each other is vital to survival.  Back up systems can be as small as your core group using walkie talkies, or as large as creating an alternative Internet connection. You can have one person get satellite Internet and they can beam it with a simple line-of-sight microwave panels to other hubs, perhaps a school.  This sounds complex, but it’s not that difficult or expensive. Additionally, you could set up a community intranet that can at least communicate with each other if not the outside world. When meeting neighbors, don’t discount their skills if they’re a tech geek or working for the phone company, as they will be needed in a collapse situation. Again, having individual solar chargers for laptops and this system would have to be considered as well.

Medical: Big hospitals will likely be overtaxed during a crisis and they’ll certainly be a target of drug addicts who have nowhere else to get their fix. It may be unrealistic to form a small clinic in your community prior to a collapse situation, however, identifying the doctors, nurses, EMTs, veterinarians, and holistic healers in your neighborhood will go a long way in preparing. Additionally, encouraging all households in your neighborhood to keep a month or more of essential medications stored in their homes will be crucial to get through difficult times. If you’re lucky enough to find a few doctors who share your prepper mindset, creating a bank of strategic medicine (insulin and antibiotics) would be ideal as well. And don’t write off the hippie who knows how to grow quality cannabis….

These are all realistic preparations that you can do in your communities. They shouldn’t be motivated by fear of some potential apocalypse. Rather, it should be fun and joyful to get to know your neighbors and encourage the strengthening of your community.

Please tell us your ideas for surviving the economic collapse in the comment section below.

Read other articles by Activist Post Here

Waging War on Palestine

0

Stephen Lendman, rinf.com |

Palestinians know what they’re up against. UN success changed nothing on the ground. Daily Israeli state terror continues. World leaders do nothing to help.

Rhetorical Palestinian support rings hollow. Americans like to say: Put your money where your mouth is. World leaders able to change things put theirs on Israel. They’re complicit with US/Israeli imperial crimes.

They spurn Palestinian rights. Their suffering continues daily. On December 1, Israeli soldiers shot two more Gazans.

They accosted, arrested and detained another 13 Palestinian fishermen. Their “crime” was fishing in their own waters.

On November 21, Israel accepted memorandum of understanding terms. Both sides agreed to end conflict.

It continues unabated. Israel bears full responsibility. It bears repeating. Its word isn’t worth the paper it’s written on.

Rogue states operate that way. Israel is one of the worst. It matches the worst of regional tyranny. It’s unsafe to live in. Even Jews for justice are targeted. Israel tolerates no opposition.

Shock troops attacked peaceful West Bank protesters. They arrested dozens lawlessly. They terrorize Palestinian communities. Occupation harshness continues. Life for Palestinians is hell.

A new Palestinian Detainee Research Center (PDRC) report said Israel “kidnapped” 650 Palestinians in November. Included were 85 children, seven women, and six legislators.

Fourteen PLC members are imprisoned for belonging to the wrong political parties.

After gaining power in 1933, Hitler eliminated political opposition the same way. Social democrats, communists, union officials, and others were arrested, imprisoned, or murdered.

PDRC said Israel throughout November conducted over 300 incursions into Palestinian communities – over 10 per day on average.

Peace, equity, justice, and liberation remain distant dreams. Israeli state terror prevents them. A December 1 International Solidarity Movement (ISM) headline expressed today’s reality:

“New state, same occupation: violence in Qaryut as villagers attempt to remove illegal roadblock.”

ISM meant new status. Palestinian statehood was achieved over 24 years ago. The UN vote had nothing to do with reaffirming what already exists.

ISM said Israeli soldiers attacked peaceful protesters. On November 30, they fired rubber bullets and tear gas canisters into a crowd at close range.

Palestinians wanted an illegal road block on their own land removed. Israel terrorized them. Injuries resulted. Several hurt required hospitalization. Attacks like this are frequent.

Israeli Shilo and Eli settlements are destroying Qaryut village. Palestinian land is stolen to expand them. Israel criminalizes peaceful protesters. “Is this what the new (Palestine) will continue to look like,” asked ISM?

On June 14, 2009, Netanyahu spoke at Bar-Ilan University. For the first time, he (rhetorically) accepted “a demilitarized Palestinian state side by side with the Jewish state.”

Palestinian weapons pale compared to Israel’s destructive arsenal. Demilitarization would work if Israel renounced war for peace and disarmed.

Netanyahu’s words rang hollow. He opposes all Palestinian rights. Observers knew he didn’t mean what he said.

His Likud Party platform says the following about Palestinian self-determination:

Unilaterally establishing a Palestinian state “will constitute a fundamental and substantive violation of the agreements with the State of Israel and the scuttling of the Oslo and Wye accords.”

“The government will adopt immediate stringent measures in the event of such a declaration.”

Platform language says the following about settlements:

“The Jewish communities in Judea, Samaria and Gaza (all Occupied Palestine) are the realization of Zionist values. Settlement of the land is a clear expression of the unassailable right of the Jewish people to the Land of Israel and constitutes an important asset in the defense of the vital interests of the State of Israel.”

“The Likud will continue to strengthen and develop these communities and will prevent their uprooting.”

Likud also rejects Israeli/Palestinian Green Line separation. It prioritizes stealing Palestinian land. It also declares all Jerusalem sovereign Israeli territory.

In the process, international law is spurned. Israeli lawlessness continues because world leaders able to stop it do nothing.

On Sunday, Israel said it’s withholding $100 million in monthly tax revenue it collects for the PA. Doing so is grand theft. It’s delivering on promised retribution. Expect much more ahead.

On December 2, a Haaretz editorial headlined “Israel’s punishment,” saying:

UN Member States spoke “loud and clear: Yes to a two-state solution. But Israel’s government responded with a step that, first and foremost, punishes Israel.”

Previous articles explained that two states once were possible. No longer. Israel controls too much Palestinian land. It won’t relinquish any. Partition won’t work.

The only viable solution is one state for all its people at peace with equal rights. Netanyahu’s decision to build another 3,000 housing units separating East Jerusalem from the West Bank drove a final nail in the two-state corpse.

It wasn’t possible before. For sure, it’s not now. Netanyahu’s announcement came while UN Member States voted. He punished Palestinians and “the world,” said Haaretz.

It didn’t go unnoticed. Israel was also “punished.” It’s “entrenching itself even further in its own rejectionism, and deepening its isolation and the disconnect between itself and the international reality.”

Perhaps so, but Palestinians so far aren’t benefitting. Haaretz called settlement construction on extremely sensitive land “a particularly grave and dangerous decision.”

Instead of showing restraint, “the government is dragging Israel into additional diplomatic disasters. And instead of embarking on sincere, genuine negotiations with the new observer state, Israel is turning its back on it, and on the world.”

Netanyahu’s policies belie his Bar-Ilan bluster. His posturing was willful deception. He also broke his pledge not to build new E1 Ma’aleh Adumin settlement housing units.

He regularly shows what he stands for and where he’s heading. Haaretz envisions “diplomatic isolation, denunciation and ostracism by the world.”

Believing it is way over the top. Perhaps some day. Not now. This, too, shall pass. Israel proved time and again it can commit the most egregious crimes and get away with them.

It won’t continue forever. Israel’s day of reckoning awaits. It’s also true for its Washington paymaster/partner. Policies causing so much harm to so many will end. When, who knows.

Palestinian suffering continues. Regional war threatens. No end of conflict appears near. Humanity is at risk.

Perhaps mushroom shaped cloud resolution awaits. It’s disturbingly possible. Things could indeed end with a bang. It can’t be ruled out.

A Final Comment

On November 29, the world spoke. The dust so far hasn’t settled. Rogue states won’t let it. Nor will media scoundrels.

Rupert Murdoch is perhaps the worst. His worldview reflects demagoguery, peudo-journalism, political power, villainy, neoliberal harshness, warmongering, and disdain for what matters most to most people.

Opinions expressed throughout his media empire affirm his own. Others aren’t tolerated.

He’s a malignant force against the majority’s general welfare. He’s hard-right, pro-business, pro-war, anti-populist, and a virtual voice for rightwing extremism.

He’s a force for evil, not good. He’s also a longtime pro-Israeli stalwart. He received numerous awards from Jewish organizations for supporting decades of Israeli lawlessness.

His Wall Street Journal reaches opinion-makers. On December 1, it ran a disgraceful anti-Palestinian editorial. It headlined “The Palestinian Mirage,” saying:

“It was no accident that (Abbas) chose November 29 to seek” upgraded UN status. “November 29 is the 65th anniversary” of the 1947 UN Partition Plan.

It granted 56% of historic Palestine to Jews. At the time, they had one-third of the population. Palestinians got 42%.

Jerusalem was designated an international city (a corpus separatum – separate body) under a UN Trusteeship Council.

Jews accepted Resolution 181, said the Journal. Palestinians rejected it for good reason. Journal editors didn’t explain. They omit what’s most important. They support wrong over right. Murdoch tolerates nothing less.

Israel got more than just 56%. It got Palestine’s most fertile land. It also got nearly all urban and most valued rural areas. Palestinians were disgracefully cheated. They had no right of appeal.

Had they accepted a bad deal, their own “state would be as old as Israel is today.” It would have more than 22% of original Palestine, claimed Journal editors.

They omitted explaining Israel’s genocidal war of independence.
They said nothing about June 1967. Israel wanted 100% of historic Palestine and got it.

Palestinians erred, claimed the Journal. They and other “Arabs sought to murder Israel in its crib by invading it.”

Israel’s 1947-48 war was a walkover. Ilan Pappe’s “Ethnic Cleansing of Palestine” discussed what happened. Murdoch revisionism can’t change it.

Israel’s genocidal slaughter and displacement was well planned. Ben-Gurion and key Zionists had final say. They were merciless. They lay siege to Palestinian villages and population centers. They bombarded them.

They burnt homes and other property. They reigned terror on defenseless people. They committed appalling atrocities. They raped helpless women. Nazis were hanged for similar crimes.

Hagana and commando Palmach units numbered about 80,000. They included naval, air, and ground units. They had tanks, artillery, and other heavy armor.

Palestinian forces numbered about 7,000. They were hopelessly outnumbered and outgunned. Fighting began in late 1947. Arab intervention was late, weak, and indifferent.

Superior Jewish forces overwhelmed them. They might as well have stayed home for all the good they did. Israel’s war was hopelessly one-sided. UN nations did nothing for Palestinians.

They relegated them to their current fate. They ignore them now. They’re indifferent to their suffering. Journal editors blamed them for Israeli crimes.

They piled on more for responding defensively to eight Israeli terror bombing days. They ignored premeditated Israeli slaughter and destruction.

They focused on potential harm to Israelis. They were practically unscathed compared to hundreds of Palestinians killed and injured.

They said nothing about Israel targeting civilians, schools, mosques, residential neighborhoods, and other nonmilitary targets.

Murdoch spurns truth and full disclosure. His worldview is malevolent, distorted and one-sided. His editors claimed upgraded UN status violated Oslo.

They called the Accords “the legal basis for Mr. Abbas’ Palestinian Authority and require negotiations with Israel to create a state.”

Palestine, of course, is a state. Oslo was a Palestinian Versailles. It was unilateral surrender. It affirmed vaguely defined negotiating terms.

No fixed timeline or outcome were specified. Israeli officials obstructed and delayed. Concessions weren’t made. Land theft continued. Settlements expanded exponentially.

Colonization is policy. So is ethnic cleansing. Palestinians got nothing for renouncing armed struggle, recognizing Israel’s right to exist, and agreeing to leave major unresolved issues for later final status talks. They’re still waiting.

Major issues include an independent sovereign Palestine free from occupation, the right of return, settlements, borders, water rights, and East Jerusalem as Palestinian territory and future capital.

A new Palestinian Authority (PA) was established. Arafat agreed to enforce Israeli authority. Occupation hell continued. It still does. UN upgrade changes nothing.

Peace and nonviolence aren’t possible because Israel won’t tolerate them. Nor does America.

“It will be interesting to see if the Palestinians now use their new UN status to harass Israelis in venues such as the International Criminal Court. Such tactics are aimed at making everyday life increasingly unbearable for Israelis….”

It’s shocking at what ends up in print. Journal editors want Jews alone afforded rights. They want Palestinians to obey their Israeli master.

They want them to accept occupation harshness. They want decades of Israeli terror to continue unimpeded. Anything less is Palestine’s “make-believe world,” they say.

It’s hard believing this stuff gets published. It’s hard imagining editors would allow it. It’s harder imagining they’d sell their souls for a buck. They do it every day they show up for work. Media scoundrels operate this way.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “How Wall Street Fleeces America: Privatized Banking, Government Collusion and Class War”

http://www.claritypress.com/Lendman.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

Our Collapsing Economy and Currency

0

Paul Craig Roberts, rinf.com |

Is the “fiscal cliff” real or just another hoax? The answer is that the fiscal cliff is real, but it is a result, not a cause. The hoax is the way the fiscal cliff is being used.

The fiscal cliff is the result of the inability to close the federal budget deficit. The budget deficit cannot be closed because large numbers of US middle class jobs and the GDP and tax base associated with them have been moved offshore, thus reducing federal revenues. The fiscal cliff cannot be closed because of the unfunded liabilities of eleven years of US-initiated wars against a half dozen Muslin countries—wars that have benefitted only the profits of the military/security complex and the territorial ambitions of Israel. The budget deficit cannot be closed, because economic policy is focused only on saving banks that wrongful financial deregulation allowed to speculate, to merge, and to become too big to fail, thus requiring public subsidies that vastly dwarf the totality of US welfare spending.

The hoax is the propaganda that the fiscal cliff can be avoided by reneging on promised Social Security and Medicare benefits that people have paid for with the payroll tax and by cutting back all aspects of the social safety net from food stamps to unemployment benefits to Medicaid, to housing subsidies. The right-wing has been trying to get rid of the social safety net ever since Franklin D. Roosevelt constructed it, out of fear or compassion or both, during the Great Depression.

Washington’s response to the fiscal cliff is austerity: spending cuts and tax increases. The Republicans say they will vote for the Democrats’ tax increases if the Democrats vote for the Republican’s assault on the social safety net. What bipartisan compromise means is a double-barreled dose of austerity.

Ever since John Maynard Keynes, economists have understood that tax increases and spending cuts suppress, not stimulate, economic activity. This is especially the case in an economy such as the American one, which is driven by consumer spending. When spending declines, so does the economy. When the economy declines, the budget deficit rises.

This is especially the case when an economy is weak and already in decline. A declining economy means less sales, less employment, less tax revenues. This works against the effort to close the federal budget deficit with austerity measures. Instead of strengthening the economy, the austerity measures weaken it further. To cut unemployment benefits and food stamps when unemployment is high or rising would be to provoke social and political instability.

Some economists, such as Robert Barro at Harvard University, claim that stimulative measures, the opposite of austerity, don’t work, because consumers anticipate the higher taxes that will be needed to cover the budget deficit and, therefore, reduce their spending and increase their saving in order to be able to pay the anticipated higher taxes.

In other words, the Keynesian effort to stimulate spending causes consumers to reduce their spending. I don’t know of any empirical evidence for this claim.

Regardless, the situation on the ground at the present time is that for the majority of people, incomes are stretched to the limit and beyond. Many cannot pay their bills, their mortgages, their car payments, their student loans. They are drowning in debt, and there is nothing that they can cut back in order to save money with which to pay higher taxes.

Many commentators are complaining that Congress will refuse to face the difficult issues and kick the can down the road, leaving the fiscal cliff looming. This would probably be the best outcome. As the fiscal cliff is a result, not a cause, to focus on the fiscal cliff is to focus on the symptoms rather than the disease.

The US economy has two serious diseases, and neither one is too much welfare spending.

One disease is the offshoring of US middle class jobs, both manufacturing jobs and professional service jobs such as engineering, research, design, and information technology, jobs that formerly were filled by US university graduates, but which today are sent abroad or are filled by foreigners brought in on H-1B work visas at two-thirds of
the salary.

The other disease is the deregulation, especially the financial deregulation, that caused the ongoing financial crisis and created banks too big to fail, which has prevented capitalism from working and closing down insolvent corporations.

The Federal Reserve’s policy is focused on saving the banks, not on saving the economy. The Federal Reserve is purchasing not only new Treasury bonds issued to finance the more than one trillion dollar annual federal deficit but also the banks’ underwater financial instruments, taking them off the banks’ books and putting them on the Federal Reserve’s books.

Normally, debt monetization of this amount results in rising inflation, but the money that the Federal Reserve is creating in its attempt to manage the public debt and the banks’ private debt is hung up in the banking system as excess reserves and is not finding its way into the economy. The banks are too busted to lend, and consumers are too indebted to borrow.

However, the debt monetization poses a second threat that is capable of biting the US economy and consumer living standards very hard. Foreign central banks, foreign investors in US stocks and financial instruments, and Americans themselves observing the Federal Reserve’s continuous monetization of US debt cannot avoid concern about the dollar’s value as the supply of ever more dollars continues to pour out of the Federal Reserve.

Already there is evidence of central banks and individuals moving out of dollars into gold and silver bullion and into other currencies of countries that are not hemorrhaging debt and money. According to John Williams of Shadowstats.com, the US dollar as a percentage of global holdings of reserve assets has declined from 36.6% in 2006 to 28.7% in 2012. Gold has increased from 10.5% to 12.8% and other foreign currencies except the euro increased from 38.4% to 44.4%.

Russia, China, Brazil, India, and South Africa intend to conduct trade among themselves in their own currencies without use of the dollar as reserve currency. The EU countries conduct their trade with one another in euros, and although not reported in the US media, Asian countries are discussing a new common currency for trade among themselves.

The world is abandoning the use of the dollar to settle international accounts, and the demand for dollars is falling as the Federal Reserve increases the supply of dollars.

This means that the price of the dollar is threatened.

Concern over the dollar means concern over dollar-denominated financial instruments such as stocks and bonds. The Chinese hold some $2 trillion in US financial instruments. The Japanese hold about $1 trillion in US Treasuries. The Saudis and the oil emirates also hold large quantities of US dollar financial instruments. At some point the move away from the dollar also means a move away from US financial instruments. The dumping of US stocks and bonds would destabilize US financial markets and wipe out the remainder of US wealth.

As I have previously written, the Federal Reserve can create new money with which to purchase the dumped financial instruments, thus maintaining their prices. But the Federal Reserve cannot print gold or foreign currencies with which to buy up the dollars that foreigners are paid for their US stocks and bonds. When the dollars in turn are dumped, the exchange value of the dollar will collapse, and US inflation will explode.

The onset of hyperinflation can be as sudden as the collapse of a currency’s exchange value.

The real crisis facing the US is the impending collapse of the US dollar’s foreign exchange value. The US dollar’s value in relation to silver and gold has already collapsed. In the past ten years, gold’s price in US dollars has increased from $250 per ounce to $1,750 per ounce, an increase of $1,500. Silver’s price as risen from $4 per ounce to $34 per ounce. These price rises are not due to a sudden scarcity of gold and silver, but to a flight from the dollar into the two forms of historical money that cannot be created with the printing press.

The price of oil has risen from $20 a barrel ten years ago to as high as $120 per barrel earlier this year and currently $90 a barrel. This price rise has come about despite a weak world economy and without any supply restrictions other than those caused by the attempted US occupation of Iraq, the Western assault on Libya, and the self-harming Western sanctions on Iran, impacts most likely offset by the Saudis, still Washington’s faithful puppet, a country that pumps out its precious life fluid in order to save the West from its own mistakes. The moronic neoconservatives wish to overthrow the Saudi Arabian government, but what more faithful servant has Washington ever had than the Saudi royal house?

What can be done? For a number of years I have pointed out that the problem is the loss of US employment, consumer income, GDP, and tax base to offshoring. The solution is to reverse the outward flow of jobs and to bring them back to the US. This can be done, as Ralph Gomory has made clear, by taxing corporations according to where they add value to their product. If the value is added abroad, corporations would have a high tax rate. If they add value domestically with US labor, they would face a low tax rate. The difference in tax rates can be calculated to offset the benefit of the lower cost of foreign labor.

As all offshored production that is brought to the US to be marketed to Americans counts as imports, relocating the production in the US would decrease the trade deficit, thus strengthening belief in the dollar. The increase in US consumer incomes would raise tax revenues, thus lowering the budget deficit. It is a win-win solution.

The second part to the solution is to end the expensive unfunded wars that have ruined the federal budget for the past 11 years as well as future budgets due to the cost of veterans’ hospital care and benefits. According to ABC World News, “In the decade since the Sept. 11, 2001 terrorist attacks on the World Trade Center, 2,333,972 American military personnel have been deployed to Iraq, Afghanistan or both, as of Aug. 30, 2011 [more than a year ago].” These 2.3 million veterans have rights to various unfunded benefits including life-long health care. Already, according to ABC, 711,986 have used Veterans Administration health care between fiscal year 2002 and the third-quarter of fiscal year 2011. http://abcnews.go.com/Politics/us-veterans-numbers/story?id=14928136#1

The Republicans are determined to continue the gratuitous wars and to make the 99 percent pay for the neoconservatives’ Wars of Hegemony while protecting the 1 percent from tax increases.

The Democrats are little different.

No one in the White House and no more than one dozen members of the 535 member US Congress represents the American people. This is the reason that despite obvious remedies nothing can be done. America is going to crash big time.

And the rest of the world will be thankful. America along with Israel is the world’s most hated country. Don’t expect any foreign bailouts of the failed “superpower.”

UN Vote on Palestine

0

Stephen Lendman, rinf.com |

Haaretz said Israel suffered a humiliating defeat in New York. So did truth about what actually happened, what it means, and what’s likely going forward. More on that below.

Thursday’s vote expressed overwhelming support. UN Member States number 193. Five didn’t vote. Of those that did, 138 said yes, nine voted no, and 41 abstained.

Countries voting no included America, Israel, Canada, the Czech Republic, Panama, and four small Pacific island states: Marshall Islands, Micronesia, Nauru and Palau. They’re in lockstep with all US/Israeli policies. They spurn Palestinian rights.

Countries abstaining included Britain (after expressing support) Germany, Australia, Colombia, South Korea, Haiti (under US-installed puppet Michel Martelly), Singapore, Rwanda (under US puppet Paul Kagame), the Netherlands, Paraguay (under coup d’ etat puppet Federico Franco), Poland, Hungry, and 29 others.

Netanyahu was typically arrogant. Palestine “must be prepared to end the conflict with Israel once and for all….No decision by the UN (changes) the rights of the Jewish people in this land.”

Blaming the victim continues. Palestine for Jews alone reflects official Israeli policy.

Obama strongly opposed upgrading Palestine’s status. He affords Israel one-sided support. No rights for Palestinians is official US policy.

Hillary Clinton reflects bullying, bluster and imperial arrogance. She blasted the UN vote. “Unfortunate and counterproductive,” she called it. In other words, any support for Palestine can’t be tolerated.

UN ambassador Susan Rice gives diplomacy a bad name. She’s an embarrassment to legitimate governance. She’s one of America’s worst ever envoys.

She mirrors Clinton. Her style is belligerent, arrogant, and offensive. She has major unexplained conflicts of interest.

Her 2011 financial disclosures show she “and her husband own at least $1.25 million worth of stock in four of Canada’s eight leading oil producers.”

She has up to $600,000 equity in TransCanada Corp. It’s building the environmentally destructive Keystone XL pipeline.

Her holdings also include up to $11.25 million in Royal Bank of Canada, as well as lesser equity in other Canadian financial institutions funding XL.

She’s perhaps frontrunner to replace Hillary Clinton next year as Secretary of State. She has lots of explaining to do.

“Today’s vote” she said, “should not be misconstrued by any as constituting eligibility for UN membership. It does not. This resolution does not establish that Palestine is a state.”

Palestine was eligible for full de jure UN membership many years ago. Palestine already is a state. The UN vote upgraded its status. It didn’t go far enough.

Headlines misreported what happened. Analysts who know better got it wrong. Many incorrectly called the vote support for Palestinian statehood.

It was about upgrading Palestine to nonmember observer status. More on rights afforded with it below.

Previous articles explained Palestinian statehood. Key facts bear repeating.

The State of Palestine exists. It was proclaimed in Algiers on November 15, 1988. At the time, the PLO adopted the Palestinian Declaration of Independence.

PLO legal advisor Francis Boyle drafted it. He called it “determinative, definitive, and irreversible.” It recognized the General Assembly’s 1947 Partition Plan in good faith. It also declared:

its commitment to the UN Charter’s purpose and principles;

the Universal Declaration of Human Rights (UDHR), policy, and principles of nonalignment;

its natural right to defend the Palestinian state, while rejecting “the threat or use of force, violence and intimidation against its territorial integrity and political independence or those of any other state;”

its willingness to accept UN supervision on an interim basis to terminate Israel’s occupation;

its call for a Middle East International Peace Conference based on UN Resolutions 242 and 338;

its asking for Israel’s withdrawal from occupied Palestinian lands – since 1967, including East Jerusalem;

its willingness to accept a voluntary confederation between Jordan and Palestine;

its “rejection of terrorism in all forms, including state terrorism…;” and

its acceptance of UN Charter Article 51, the four 1949 Geneva Conventions, and the 1907 Hague Regulations on Land Warfare.

Boyle included safeguards to assure all sovereign state rights. His document left no wiggle room loopholes. He also made sure UN membership won’t comprise them.

Palestine satisfies all essential criteria for sovereign independence and full de jure UN membership.

All UN Charter states (including America and Israel) provisionally recognized Palestinian independence in accordance with UN Charter article 80(1) and League Covenant article 22(4).

As the League’s successor, the General Assembly has exclusive legal authority to designate the PLO Palestine’s legitimate representative.

The Palestine National Council (PNC) is the PLO’s legislative body. It’s empowered to proclaim the existence of Palestine. According to the binding 1925 Palestine Citizenship Order in Council, Palestinians, their children and grandchildren automatically become citizens.

So do diaspora Palestinians. Those living in Israel and Jordan have dual nationalities. Occupied Territory residents remain “protected persons” (under Fourth Geneva) until a final peace settlement is reached.

Boyle’s “CREATE THE STATE OF PALESTINE” Memorandum of Law described characteristics needed for world community recognition. They include:

A determinable (not necessarily fixed) territory. Its borders are negotiable. The new state is comprised of Gaza, the West Bank and East Jerusalem. Palestinians have lived there for millennia. They rightfully deserve universally recognized sovereignty.

They have a fixed population. They’re a legitimate state with a functioning government. It’s peace loving. It accepts UN Charter provisions and can administer them. It’s willing to do so.

In 1988, Arafat declared the PLO Palestine’s Provisional Government. It has the capacity to enter into relations with other states.

Palestine fully qualifies on all counts. It did so many years ago. It long ago should have become a full de jure UN member. PA leaders must explain why not. Why not now? Why partial, not full status?

Palestine’s Proclamation of Independence created the Government of Palestine (GOP). UN approval requires qualifying based on five conditions.

Applicants must be a state, peace loving, accept UN Charter’s provisions, be able to administer them, and be willing to do so.

The Security Council only recommends new Member States. Petitioning the 1950 Uniting for Peace Resolution 377 for an up or down two-thirds vote overrides potential SC rejection.

The General Assembly has sole admission authority. Thursday’s vote required a majority of voting Member States. Full de jure membership requires a two-thirds vote.

It’s easily gotten. It’s long overdue. Legitimate states are entitled to full de jure UN membership. Palestinians are denied it.

Thursday represented a small victory. If used, it affords Palestine significant rights. Someone other than Abbas will have to invoke them. He’s a longtime Israeli collaborator.

He’s Israel’s enforcer. For many years, he betrayed his people. He’s nearing retirement. He’ll do nothing to mess things up.

Boyle explains rights Palestinians now have. If used, they’re considerable.

“Palestine can join the Rome Statute for the International Criminal Court (ICC).”

Israeli officials can be sued for crimes of war, against humanity and genocide. Illegal settlements, outposts, Gaza’s siege, the Separation Wall, and other lawless practices can be challenged.

“Palestine can join the Statute for the International Court of Justice (ICJ).” The State of Israel can be sued on the above charges and others.

“Palestine can join the Law of the Sea Convention.” Doing so establishes sovereignty over its territorial waters. They contain significant gas reserves.

Estimates range up to a trillion cubic feet or more. Where there’s gas, there’s oil. Offshore resources belong to Palestine, not Israel.

“Palestine can become a High Contracting Party to the Four Geneva Conventions.” They deal with laws of war and accountability.

“Palestine can join the International Civil Aviation Organization.” Doing so affords control of its own airspace.

“Palestine can join the International Telecommunications Union.” With it comes sovereign control over its airwaves, phone lines, and bandwidth.

Sovereign states have many rights. Palestine’s new status affords all of the above. They don’t matter if not invoked.

Expect little from Abbas going forward. Long denied Palestinians deserve much better. Liberation remains an unfulfilled dream.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “How Wall Street Fleeces America: Privatized Banking, Government Collusion and Class War”

http://www.claritypress.com/Lendman.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

A Different Outlook: Japan Unveils New Maglev Prototype

0

It is only a year since J.R. Tokai was given the go ahead to begin building work on its maglev railway, and already it has unveiled a prototype which will put the Bullet Train to shame.

The new L0 maglev train unveilled today

Unveiled today, the new train will travel at up to 311mph, which will cut the travel time for the 160 mile trip from Tokyo to Nagoya from the already speedy 90 minutes, to just 40. The train is designed to include to 16 carriages, holding 1000 passengers.

The new train will be transferred to Tokai’s test line at Tsuru next year, once and extension to the test line is completed.

The train is expected to go into service by 2027, with an extension of the line to Osaka opening in 2045.

Also announced today was the new E6 series Bullet Train, which will be known as the Super Komachi. Built by the East Japan Railway Company, the E6 will service the Tokyo-Akita route, with a top speed of over 180mph.

Japan’s Bullet Train

In the meantime, with millions of people staring at a future of unemployment or coffee serving, Britain’s infrastructure continues to collapse with hospitals, power stations and roads falling into ever more serious states of disrepair or obsolescence.

As for our railways, they are increasingly incapable of coping with the whims of nature; the latest example being the Plymouth to Bristol line, still closed over a week after the recent floods.

While Japan joins China in the development of maglev, Britain runs at full speed towards an ever more pessimistic future. The irony is, that the mess we are in right now offers us the greatest opportunity for optimism that we have seen since the end of WWII.

A massive infrastructure building and refurbishment programme, financed by national credit, driving an industry base not seen for decades, could, if we have the guts to demand it, provide all the high quality, long term jobs we could wish for.

Sons of MK-Ultra Victim to Sue CIA for Murder

0

AP |

The sons of a Cold War scientist who plunged to his death in 1953 several days after “unwittingly taking LSD” in a CIA mind-control experiment are suing the agency. They claim the CIA murdered their father, Frank Olson, by pushing him from a 13th-story window of a hotel – not, as the CIA says, that he jumped to his death.

Sons Eric and Nils Olson filed the lawsuit Wednesday in federal court in Washington. They are seeking compensatory damages to be determined at trial.

Olson was a bioweapons expert at Fort Detrick, the Army’s biological weapons research center in Frederick, Md.

Their lawsuit claims the CIA feared Olson had developed misgivings after witnessing extreme interrogations in which they allege the CIA committed murder using biological agents Olson had developed.

Rolf Harris Questioned in Connection to Savile Case

1

Last updated: 21:01 GMT
This story is breaking and is being updated as we receive more information 

Another BBC star has allegedly been interviewed under caution by police.

Twitter is buzzing with news that 82 year old BBC children’s TV presenter, Rolf Harris, is the latest to be interviewed by police in an ongoing investigation into a high level pedophile network at the very top of the British establishment.

According to Mark Williams Thomas, a driving force behind an investigation into allegations that TV icon Jimmy Savile had sexually abused vulnerable teenage girls, is now reporting that Rolf Harris has been interviewed under caution at police station as part of  the ‘Savile other’ case.

If the tweet by Mr Thomas is accurate, it is unclear why Harris has been questioned, however Sky News have reported that it is on suspicion of sexual offences after officers searched an address in Berkshire on Saturday.

It is possible that Harris was interviewed as a witness to a criminal act, to help police with their enquiry – he was released without charge.

So far, four people have been arrested so far in relation to alleged sexual offences by Savile and others.

Singer Gary Glitter, comedian Freddie Starr, DJ Dave Lee Travis and another unidentified man in his 70s have been bailed as part of the inquiry.

The news, if true, that Rolf Harris has been questioned by police, has sent shockwaves through social media networks.

Harris is a well respected and much loved celebrity with strong ties to the British Monarchy. He was commissioned to paint a portrait of HM Queen Elizabeth II for her 80th birthday, which was unveiled on 19 December 2005.

During the Diamond Jubilee Concert this year, Rolf Harris described Queen as a ‘living testimony to the power of kindness, dedication, tolerance and loyalty’ and stated “I had the privilege of meeting Her Majesty several times.”

Harris received a CBE from the Princess Royal in 2006, and was also appointed an MBE in 1968 and an OBE in 1977.

The Metropolitan police have over 400 lines of enquiry after two weeks of gathering information from both the public and a number of organisations, with over 450 potential victims having been identified.

Operation Yewtree, the enquiry into alleged child sexual exploitation by the late Jimmy Savile and others, has moved from an assessment to a formal criminal investigation.

UPDATE: A report by The BBC does not name Harris, but states:

A man in his 80s has been released after being interviewed by detectives investigating allegations which arose following revelations about TV presenter Jimmy Savile.

The man, from Berkshire, attended a London police station by appointment and was interviewed under caution.

Officers from the Metropolitan Police’s Operation Yewtree searched an address in Berkshire on Saturday.

The police said it was part of the inquiry not directly related to Savile.

The man arrived at 12:00 GMT, said the Met, and has now “left police premises”. He has not been charged.

Will Congress end indefinite detention of Americans?

0

Will Congress prevent American citizens from being subject to indefinite military detention? A bipartisan group of senators have crafted an amendment to the latest defense bill that they believe will do exactly that.

“The federal government experimented with indefinite detention of United States citizens during World War II, a mistake we now recognize as a betrayal of our core values,” said Senator Dianne Feinstein (D-Calif) Wednesday while introducing the amendment. “Let’s not repeat it.” Feinstein, who co-authored the amendment with Senator Mike Lee (R-Utah) has support not only from Senate Democrats Chris Coons (D-Del) Kirsten Gillibrand (D-NY) and Frank Lautenberg (D-NJ) but also Republican Senators Rand Paul, (R-Ky) Susan Collins (R-Maine) and Mark Kirk (R-Ill). “Granting the United States government the power to deprive its own citizens of life, liberty, or property without full due process of law goes against the very nature of our nation’s great constitutional values,” Lee said. The amendment could be voted on as early as Thursday, but it’ll still have to survive the House, where the GOP majority has scuttled similar efforts to prevent indefinite detention of Americans.

About a year ago, President Barack Obama signed the 2012 National Defense Authorization Act promising not to use Congress’ authorization of war against Al Qaeda to deny American citizens suspected of terrorism a fair trial by placing them in indefinite military detention. Senators, deadlocked over whether or not the Constitution allows such detention, agreed to adopt an amendment that left unaswered the question of whether Americans could be detained without trial. This year, Feinstein and Lee think their amendment blocking such detention for American citizens and legal permanent residents can pass.

Not all civil liberties groups however, are supporting the effort. That’s because they think anyone on American soil should be given a trial if accused of a crime, given that the Constitution protects “persons,” rather than “citizens.” The Feinstein-Lee amendment is “inconsistent with the constitutional principle that basic due process applies to everyone in the US,” says ACLU legislative counsel Chris Anders. Not only that, but Anders worries that the amendment could be construed to actually imply that the government has the constitutional authority for such detention.

The way the amendment reads now, a foreign visitor like Umar Abdulmutallab –the Nigerian who tried to explode a bomb in his underpants on a flight to Detroit several years ago–could still be subject to indefinite military detention.

So why does Feinstein and Lee’s amendment only apply to US citizens and legal residents? Becuase that’s what could pass, Feinstein said Wednesday. While she could support extending the protection to any person apprehended on US soil, “the question is whether there is enough support in this body,” Feinstein said. “I do not believe there is.”

Originally published on Mother Jones

Leveson: Met links with News of the World damaged phone hacking investigation

0

THE former assistant commissioner of the Metropolitan Police should not have led the investigation into phone hacking because of his close links with the News of the World.

Lord Justice Leveson said a ‘series of poor decisions, poorly executed’ had given the impression that closeness between the police and News International had left some officers reluctant to fully investigate phone hacking claims. Lord Justice Leveson added that he had no reason to doubt the integrity of the officers involved.

Clive Goodman, the News of the World’s former royal reporter and Glenn Mulcaire, a private investigator were jailed in 2007 for phone hacking under the original Operation Caryatid, but police came under fire for failing to widen the scope of the investigation despite evidence suggesting further victims.

Mr Yates was said to have made up his mind in a matter of hours that there was no new evidence that could lead to convictions.

Lord Justice Leveson said today that Mr Yates’ – whose was friends with Neil Wallis, then deputy editor of the newspaper – should have ensured he played no part in the investigation.

Leveson said: “Because of its importance to the reputation of the Metropolitan Police each step of the way in which Operation Caryatid was executed and later reviewed has been analysed in great detail.

“In reality, I am satisfied that I have seen no basis for challenging at any stage the integrity of the police, or that of the senior police officers concerned.

“What is, however, equally clear is that a series of poor decisions, poorly executed, all came together to contribute to the perception that I have recognised.”

The Leveson report acknowledged that the decision to restrict the initial investigation was down to the pressures of counter-terrorism activities at the time.

But it added that Mr Yates, a ‘very experienced police officer’ did not ‘reflect on whether he should be involved in an investigation into the newspaper at which he had friends.’

“He would have been better advised to arrange for a different officer to conduct it.

“That is even more so when he decided, within hours and before the case papers had been recovered and could be properly reviewed, that there were no grounds for reviewing the decision: errors of recollection were inevitable and they were made.

“Furthermore, publicly to announce that conclusion, on camera, on the same day meant that there was no turning back.

“A defensive mindset was then established which affected all that followed.”

Originally published on The Scotsman

Facebook in new battle with privacy groups

Facebook is facing a fresh backlash from users over planned changes to its privacy rules.

The website wants to share information with photo application Instagram — which it recently bought — loosen email restrictions and get rid of a user voting system.

Privacy campaign groups said it could leave users more open to spam and did not give them a choice about what information they shared.

‘Facebook will know even more about you and will use whatever they can get out of Instagram — location data, key word tagging, for example,’ said Jim Killock, executive director of Open Rights Group.

‘It will use that information for commercial purposes. The point is, did Facebook ask “do you mind if we combine this data?” The fact is nobody did.’

The Electronic Privacy Information Center and the Center for Digital Democracy have also asked Facebook to withdraw the changes.

The social networking site is also proposing to scrap users’ ability to vote on changes to its data privacy policy.

Since 2009, it has held votes on any changes to its privacy rules that attract at least 7,000 comments on its official announcements online.

Originally published on Metro

Abbas Submits Weak UN Status Bid

0

Stephen Lendman, rinf.com |

Palestine deserves full UN membership. It’s entitled to all rights and privileges afforded other Member States. Getting them is simple. It should have happened years ago.

Palestine satisfies all essential criteria. On November 15, 1988, it achieved statehood.

Previous articles explained. Security Council vetoes can’t prevent UN admission. General Assembly Member States have sole authority.

A two-thirds majority admits full de jure members. A simple majority admits observer ones. Palestine has more than enough support for either.

Why Arafat didn’t seek UN admission he can’t explain. In 2004, Israel murdered him. It’s indisputable. Clear evidence proves it.

Abbas has lots of explaining to do. He’s a longtime Israeli collaborator. He’s a traitor. Israel made him president for that reason.

Palestinians have good reason to expect a watered-down, meaningless UN bid. That’s all they’ll get. The fix is in. It shouldn’t be that way.

Abbas seeks nonmember observer status. With it come significant rights. Getting them requires not requesting they be excluded or omitting them from draft text language.

Full rights permit joining specialized UN agencies. They include the International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO), Law of the Sea Treaty (LST), NPT, International Court of Justice (ICJ), and International Criminal Court (ICC).

Membership gives Palestine control of its territorial waters and air space. Other rights are afforded.

Suing Israel (at the ICJ) and Israeli officials (at the ICC) for genocide, as well as crimes of war and against humanity is permitted. By or after 2017, Israel can also be sued for criminal aggression.

November 29 is D-Day (decision day). UN Member States will vote. Palestine will easily gain upgraded nonmember observer status. At issue is what comes with it. It depends on what’s excluded.

Abbas submitted a 316-word draft. It calls for resuming peace talks with Israel. Doing so is meaningless and insulting. Abbas knows it. Going through the motions is a charade.

Peace isn’t possible without a legitimate partner. Palestine never had one. It doesn’t now.

Talks were stillborn from inception. One observer called them “the most spectacular deception in modern diplomatic history.”

Israel doesn’t negotiate. It demands. Nothing short of unconditional surrender is acceptable. Decades of on and off talks were futile. Dealing with Netanyahu assures no resolution.

Israel spurns peace. Netanyahu calls pursuing it “a waste of time.” The so-called “peace process” is more slogan than reality. It’s a duplicitous charade.

Abbas’ draft language said nothing about halting settlement construction. It doesn’t request membership in UN agencies and treaties. That’s key.

Without it, upgraded status is meaningless. Vital rights are denied. Abbas seems headed in that direction. It shouldn’t surprise.

He sold out Palestinians at Oslo. He became Israel’s enforcer. He supports occupation harshness.

Israel made him president. He lives a privileged lifestyle. His own people suffer. He’s near retirement. He doesn’t want to spoil things now.

On November 26, the London Guardian headlined “Britain ready to back Palestinian statehood at UN.”

Statehood is not at issue. Britain’s “generosity” comes with strings. It wants Palestine denied all rights. It wants no anti-Israeli recriminations.

It wants Palestinians to behave like good little boys and girls and do whatever Israel wishes.

It wants occupation harshness continued. It wants no change in Gaza’s siege.

It wants Israel allowed to steal all parts of Judea and Sumaria it wishes.

It wants settlement construction to continue unimpeded.

It wants peace process hypocrisy to resume without preconditions.

It wants Palestine’s observer status to be impotent and meaningless.

Expect Abbas to accede to all demands. He cares only about his own status and welfare. He’s a duplicitous traitor. He’s also a pathetic spent force. Hamas emerged from Pillar of Cloud resolute and resilient.

Throughout eight days of terror bombing and shelling, Abbas was largely sidelined and silent. His support was rhetorical, not real. He wants Hamas destroyed.

He said so before Cast Lead began. He knew about it in advance. He endorsed it. He likely had advance Pillar of Cloud knowledge. He did nothing to help his own people. He spurns them. He’s their enemy, not ally.

Expect pathetically little from his UN bid. Why else would Israel, Washington, and other Western states permit it.

On November 27, Haaretz headlined “Israel, US hold secret talks on softening Palestinian Authority’s UN bid,” saying:

Israel and Washington conspire like they always do. At issue is neutralizing Palestine’s bid. “Softening” means neutering or castrating.

On Sunday, Netanyahu’s representative, Isaac Molho, left for Washington. He’s meeting with senior administration and State Department officials.

Earlier, Israel and Washington went all-out to subvert Palestine’s bid. It’s proceeding as planned. Tactics changed. Focus now is on making it meaningless.

Obama officials say they “will try to soften the wording, in an attempt at damage limitation.” It’s more than that. They want full Israeli authority unimpeded.

They want no ICJ or ICC lawsuits. They want everything Britain demands and then some. They want Palestinians denied all rights. Obama and Netanyahu agree.

Language is being drafted. Washington and Israel want it inserted in Abbas’ draft before Thursday’s vote.

Earlier, Congress threatened to suspend, cut, or cease UN funding if Palestine gets nonmember observer status. Freezing or cutting off US funding supplied Palestine was also mentioned.

Israel promised tough retaliatory measures. Threats included revoking privileges afforded PA officials, canceling work permits for Palestinians in Israel, halting tax transfers, and greatly expanding settlement construction.

Avigdor Lieberman wants the PA destroyed. Softer language changes things. Haaretz said after the UN vote, “Israel will introduce sanctions against the Palestinians” but they won’t be as harsh as originally planned.

“Only if the Palestinians use the UN decision to advance moves at the (ICC) will Israel consider more drastic steps.”

An unnamed senior Israeli official said:

“We have to be clever, not just right. There will be measures in reaction, but they will be relatively moderate.”

He has temporarily freezing tax revenues in mind. Doing so is easily “reversible.” Israel wants Palestinian enforcers paid. They’re needed. They’re complicit in assuring occupation harshness.

Settlement construction will continue unimpeded. So will land theft and dispossessions. Palestinians will be forced off their own property. Their homes will be demolished. Jewish development will replace them.

Hundreds of new housing units will be announced. Illegal outposts will be authorized. Palestine will be shrunk in size to near extinction. UN status Palestine gets will be impotent to stop it.

Washington and Israel plan it that way. Expect Abbas to acquiesce. He always does. The fix is in. Palestinians always end up on the short end. Some day things will change. When, who knows.

A Final Comment

On November 27, at around 2PM regional time, Haaretz headlined “Israel-US efforts to soften wording of Palestinian UN bid has failed, official says.”

Abbas submitted his draft days earlier. PA negotiator Saeb Erekat said language won’t change. Perhaps it doesn’t matter. What’s proposed is weak. The text left much to be desired.

Haaretz said Palestinians refused new language to “prevent them from filing (ICC) criminal charges….”

Having authority is toothless without using it. Abbas and other key PA officials spurned Palestinian rights for years. Expect no change now.

Haaretz said “Palestinians made clear to the US and several prominent European Union that they (will only) provide an oral guarantee” not to file ICC charges for about six months.

Before submitting his draft last week, Abbas inserted language some EU countries requested. It included:

peace talks would resume with no preconditions; and

a statement to the effect that Member States affirm the inalienable rights of the Palestinian people, peace, and a two-state solution based on pre-1967 borders.

Haven’t we heard all that before? It’s repeated ad nauseam. It’s gone on for decades. Policy doesn’t follow rhetoric. Occupation harshness continues.

Peace talks are meaningless without a legitimate partner. Palestine never had one. It doesn’t now.

For over 45 years, UN pledges and resolutions afforded Palestinians no rights. Nothing changed now. Measures without teeth are worthless.

Rhetoric falls woefully short. Nations able to help, don’t. UN nonmember observer status changes nothing.

Palestinians remain isolated on their own. Occupation harshness won’t change. Palestinian suffering continues. What matters is ending it. Nothing else.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “How Wall Street Fleeces America: Privatized Banking, Government Collusion and Class War”

http://www.claritypress.com/Lendman.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

Video: Accountable Democracy Conference

0

Cynthia Mckinney
Cynthia Mckinney on the US after Obama’s re-election

John Bailey
John Bailey of the UK’s campaign for Press and Broadcasting Freedom on a media run by the one percent

Annie Machon
Annie Machon ex-MI5 whistleblower on the disastrous War on Drugs

Michael Ratner
Michael Ratner of the US Centre for Constitutional Rights on human rights outrages in Obama’s America

Paul Rea
Paul Rea interviewed, author of Mounting Evidence: Why We Need a New Investigation into 9/11

Tony Gosling
Tony Gosling, Bristol broadcasting legend, on the Crimes of the One Percent

Richard Cottrell
Richard Cottrell, journalist and ex-MEP on Operation Gladio, NATO’s documented thirty year war of false flag terrorism in Europe

Video: Critical Mass Radio Conference 2012

0

The Critical Mass Radio conference held on the 24th of November 2012.

The aim of this conference was to bring together people who are looking for solutions to the tyranny we live under. This day was not about head nodding, it was about answers.

The first speaker of the day was rob of clan lennox. rob outlines how we’ve been enslaved and points out our real history – not the re-wriiten lies of the NWO. rob also introduces FACE21 a way for us to begin the fightback.

Please spread this video far and wide. It’s time to take Action!

Lawsuit seeks injunction against EPA “gas chamber” experiments

0

Janet Phelan, Activist Post | 

 A lawsuit filed in federal court in Alexandria, Virginia seeks injunctive relief from human experimentation being conducted by the Environmental Protection Agency. The experiments involve gassing human subjects with PM2.5.
The New York Health Department defines PM2.5 as follows: “Fine particulate matter (PM2.5) is an air pollutant that is a concern for people’s health when levels in air are high.”
In one of these experiments, individuals were given a breathing apparatus through which they inhaled diesel fuel piped in from a truck parked outside.
The lawsuit cites the EPA’s own determination on the dangers posed by PM2.5:“ In the Agency’s most recent scientific assessment of PM2.5., the EPA concluded that PM2.5can kill people shortly after exposure.” The suit goes on to state that “EPA’s 2004 and 2009 scientific assessment expressly found that there is no safe level of PM2.5.”
The lawsuit, filed by American Tradition Institute Environmental Law Center, states that these experiments have been conducted at the University of North Carolina and have been ongoing since 2004. The suit names both the EPA and its Administrator Lisa Jackson as plaintiffs.
In its answer to the suit, the EPA admits that PM2.5 may pose a health risk but states that the overall public benefit outweighs the risk to individual subjects. In addition, the EPA’s response to the request for the restraining order states:

While small risks to individuals may evidence themselves as much larger overall public health risks when large populations are exposed to ambient levels of PM2.5 , this does not change the fact that the risk for individuals that do not exhibit these health conditions will be small.

The suit alleges that the subjects were not informed of the dangers of inhaling PM2.5 , a contention which the EPA denies.
The EPA’s response to the suit also states that the court lacks jurisdiction to hear this case.
In a recent interview, the counsel for plaintiffs, Dr. David Schnare announced “The EPA has lost its way.” Schnare, who worked for three decades for the EPA, first as a scientist and policy analyst and later as an attorney, denounced the experiments “illegal,” and stated: “They imposed risks without telling people.”Read other articles by Janet Phelan Here

Janet Phelan is an investigative journalist whose articles have appeared in the Los Angeles Times, The San Bernardino County Sentinel, The Santa Monica Daily Press, The Long Beach Press Telegram, Oui Magazine and other regional and national publications. Janet specializes in issues pertaining to legal corruption and addresses the heated subject of adult conservatorship, revealing shocking information about the relationships between courts and shady financial consultants. She also covers issues relating to international bioweapons treaties. Her poetry has been published in Gambit, Libera, Applezaba Review, Nausea One and other magazines. Her first book, The Hitler Poems, was published in 2005. She currently resides abroad. You may browse through her articles (and poetry) at janetphelan.com

Police target WiFi moochers

0

Via Disinfo |

Just in case you think you can hide your identity by using someone else’s WiFi to access the Internet, take note of this report in the Wall Street Journal:

Internet-service subscribers can’t hide from police behind their IP addresses, the numbers assigned to devices connecting online.

Now a federal court in Pittsburgh has ruled that people who piggyback on their neighbors’ Wi-Fi networks forfeit privacy too.

The ruling, issued this month, was the first to address the Fourth Amendment rights of such people and the latest to shed light on technologies used by police to locate criminal suspects.

The amendment protects against unreasonable searches by the government, requiring that police get search warrants when suspects have reasonable expectations of privacy. The case also raises questions about people who connect to the Internet through public wireless-access points.

In a 2011 poll conducted by Wakefield Research and the trade association Wi-Fi Alliance, 32% of respondents said they had tried to get on a wireless network that wasn’t theirs. The Wi-Fi Alliance estimates that more than 200 million households use Wi-Fi networks.

Police have to use special software to identify Wi-Fi interlopers because they squat on the same IP addresses as paying subscribers. The central question in the Pittsburgh case, which is headed to a federal appeals court, is whether police can use such software without obtaining a search warrant…

Cannabidiol Relieves Psychosis in Schizophrenia, Why is it Illegal?

0

Medical Cannabis for Mental Health |

A molecule in cannabis (CBD) has shown to relieve anxiety and symptoms of psychosis in people diagnosed with schizophrenia, though many patients are denied or discouraged from this medicine with fewer side effects than pharmaceutical products because the DEA has deemed the cannabis plant to be “illegal”. The U.S. government needs to answer “why?” this medicine warrents time in prison when nobody is being harmed.

Several studies show benefits for mental health treatment with cannabis, with CBD as the active ingredient;

Study: Administration Of Non-Psychotropic Cannabinoid Mitigates Psychotic Symptoms In Schizophrenics

The administration of the non-psychotropic plant constituent cannabidiol (CBD) is associated with a significant reduction in psychotic symptoms in patients with schizophrenia, according to clinical trial data published in the journal Translational Psychiatry.

An international team of researchers from Germany and the United States performed a four week, double-blind, randomized clinical trial assessing the clinical relevance of cannabidiol versus amisulpride, a potent antipsychotic agent, in patients with acute schizophrenia.

Researchers reported that the administration of either substance was associated with significant clinical improvement, but they acknowledged, “[C]annabidiol displayed a markedly superior side-effect profile.”

Amisulpride is categorized as “one of the most effective drugs currently in use for the treatment of schizophrenia.”

Investigators concluded, “Our results provide evidence that the non-cannabimimetic constituent of marijuana, cannabidiol, exerts clinically relevant antipsychotic effects that are associated with marked tolerability and safety, when compared with current medications. … The results … potentially represent a completely new mechanism in the treatment of schizophrenia.”

A review of CBD’s safety profile in humans, published online in 2011 in the scientific journal Current Drug Safety, concluded that the cannabinoid is non-toxic, safe, and well tolerated in humans, even in high doses.

Separate investigations of CBD have documented the cannabinoid to possess a variety of therapeutic properties, including anti-inflammatory, anti-diabetic, anti-epileptic, anti-cancer, and bone-stimulating properties.

For more information, please contact Paul Armentano, NORML Deputy Director, at: paul [at] norml.org. Full text of the study, “Cannabidiol enhances anandamide signaling and alleviates psychotic symptoms of schizophrenia,” is available online here:http://www.nature.com/tp/journal/v2/n3/full/tp201215a.html.

Article From NORML and republished with permission

http://www.theweedblog.com/study-shows-cannabidiol-mitigates-psychotic-symptoms-in-schizophrenics/

Is There Anything CBD Can’t Do? Then Why Is It Illegal?
-by Paul Armentano, NORML Deputy DirectorOctober 9, 2008

While the prohibition of cannabis is absurd, the ban on the plant’s non-psychoactive components is even more mind-boggling – particularly when it’s apparent that these compounds possess amazing therapeutic properties. Case in point: cannabidiol (CBD).

A just published scientific review by Sao Paulo University (Brazil) researcher Antonio Zuardi reports that there’s been an “explosive increase” of interest in CBD over the past five years. It’s apparent why.

“Studies have suggested a wide range of possible therapeutic effects of cannabidiol on several conditions, including Parkinson’s disease, Alzheimer’s disease, cerebral ischemia, diabetes, rheumatoid arthritis, other inflammatory diseases, nausea and cancer,” Zuardi writes. Let’s look at a few of these in detail, shall we?

1. Antiepileptic action
“In 1973, a Brazilian group reported that CBD was active in … blocking convulsions produced in experimental animals.”

2. Sedative action
“In humans with insomnia, high doses of CBD increased sleep duration compared to placebo.”

3. Anxiolytic action
“CBD induce[s] a clear anxiolytic effect and a pattern of cerebral activity compatible with an anxiolytic activity.”

4. Antipsychcotic action
“[C]linical studies suggest that CBD is an effective, safe and well-tolerated alternative treatment for schizophrenic patients.”

5. Antidystonic action
“CBD … had antidystonic effects in humans when administered along with standard medication to five patients with dystonia, in an open study.”

6. Antioxidative action
“[I]t was demonstrated that CBD can reduce hydroperoxide-induced oxidative damage as well as or better than other antioxidants. CBD was more protective against glutamate neurotoxicity than either ascorbate or a-tocopherol, indicating that this drug is a potent antioxidant.”

7. Neuroprotective action
“A marked reduction in the cell survival was observed following exposure of cultured rat pheochromocytoma PC12 cells to beta-A peptide. Treatment of the cells with CBD prior to beta-A exposure significantly elevated the cell survival.”

8. Antiinflammatory action
“CBD, administered i.p. or orally, has blocked the progression of arthritis.”

9. Cardioprotective action
“CBD induces a substantial cardioprotective effect.”

10. Action on diabetes
“CBD treatment of NOD (non-obese diabetic) mice before the development of the disease reduced its incidence from 86% in the non-treated control mice to 30% in CBD-treated mice. … It was also observed that administration of CBD to 11-14 week old female NOD mice, which were either in a latent diabetes stage or had initial symptoms of diabetes, ameliorated the manifestations of the disease.”

11. Antiemetic action
“The expression of this conditioned retching reaction was completely suppressed by CBD and delta9-THC, but not by ondansetron, [an] antagonist that interferes with acute vomiting.”

12. Anticancer action
“A study of the effect of different cannabinoids on eight tumor cell lines, in vitro, has clearly indicated that, of the five natural compounds tested, CBD was the most potent inhibitor of cancer cell growth.”

In sum, the past 45 years of scientific study on CBD has revealed the compound to be non-toxic, non-psychoactive, and to possess a multitude of therapeutic properties. Yet, to this day it remains illegal to possess or use (and nearly impossible to study in US clinical trials) simply because it is associated with marijuana.

What possible advancements in medical treatment may have been achieved over the past decades had US government officials chosen to advance – rather than inhibit – clinical research into CBD (which, under federal law, remains a Schedule I drug defined as having “no currently accepted medical use”)? Perhaps it’s time someone asks John Walters or the DEA?

http://blog.norml.org/2008/10/09/is-there-anything-cbd-cant-do-then-why-is-it-illegal/

additional info on CBD;

http://www.advancedholistichealth.org/PDF_Files/cannbiniods%20therapeutic%20chart%20article.pdf

BTW – Not all people with schizophrenia who use cannabis will be symptom free, though many are considerably less violent than if they had no medicine, or like zombies (see “Thorazine shuffle”) on the pharmacuetical products.

Paranoia from the THC molecule in cannabis is no doubt aggravated by the U.S. government policy of cannabis prohibition. Schizophrenics using medical cannabis and cops or feds looking for a quick bust in the non-medical states are not a good combination!!

How’s that class action lawsuit against the DEA going??

Politicians Pushed Banks to Block WikiLeaks

0

(WIKILEAKS PRESS RELEASE) — Hard-right U.S. politicians were directly behind the extrajudicial banking blockade against WikiLeaks, according to documents released by the anti-secrecy organization.

In the heavily redacted documents leaked from the European Commission, MasterCard Europe admits that Senator Joseph Lieberman and Congressman Peter T. King both “had conversations” with MasterCard in the United States over cooperating on the blockade.

Lieberman, the chair of the Senate Committee on Homeland Security and Government Affairs, is revealed boasting of instigating Amazon’s cutting of service to WikiLeaks.

Senator Lieberman tried to introduce the SHIELD Act into the Senate and advocated for prosecuting the New York Times for espionage in connection with WikiLeaks’ releases.

Rep. Peter King, current chair of the House Committee on Homeland Security, tried to formally designate WikiLeaks as a foreign terrorist organization, have its staff listed as ‘enemy combatants’, and have WikiLeaks put on a U.S. Treasury blacklist. On 13 January 2011 the U.S. Treasury announced it would not do so because there was no evidence that WikiLeaks should be on such a list.

While Lieberman and King were unsuccessful in these methods of legally cutting WikiLeaks from its popular donor base, they were successful in doing so extra-legally via VISA and MasterCard, which together hold a monopoly of 97 per cent of the market of EU card payments.

VISA Europe is registered in London and is owned by a consortium of European banks. MasterCard Europe is registered in Belgium and has similar ownership, but the Commission papers show that European control of VISA Europe and MasterCard Europe is a fiction. The papers reveal that the instructions to blockade WikiLeaks’ operations in Europe came directly from VISA and MasterCard in the United States. Ownership would normally imply control, but VISA and MasterCard Europe are essentially controlled by confidential contracts with their U.S. counterparts, a hidden organizational structure that the Commission calls an “association of undertakings.”

Julian Assange said: “There is no sovereignty without economic sovereignty. It is concerning that hard-right elements in the United States have been able to pressure VISA and MasterCard, who together hold monopoly over the European market, into introducing a blockade that the U.S. Treasury has rightly rejected. These unaccountable elements are directly interfering in the political and economic freedoms of EU consumers and are setting a precedent for political censorship of the world’s media.”

Assault on the privacy of your own mind

0

NaturalNews  |

Where do these insane professors come from? Maybe they’re hatched from eggs in a lab. The neuroscientists, in particular, are prime candidates for the funny farm.

One wants the human brain to be recast as a hologram and planted in a robot. Another wants the robot to be made out of pure energy.

But Professor Michael Persinger, of Laurentian University in Canada, is promoting a utopia in which everyone’s thoughts are made public.

Of course, Persinger hopes humanity will embrace the notion voluntarily. I think.

In his lecture, “Just Suppose You Could Know What Others Are Thinking: No More Secrets,” Persinger tells us that utopia is just one step from creation. All we have to do is allow all our thoughts to be made public.

Brain-mapping, electronic translation of thoughts into digital form? A master library where we can tap in and find out everything David Rockefeller or a janitor at Yankee Stadium is thinking and has thought? Or maybe Persinger thinks we’ll do this telepathically. If so, it sounds strenuous.

Of course, thoughts don’t equal action. But in this age of thought-crime, does it matter? If it’s discovered that a housewife in Little Rock was thinking, for three seconds, about killing the president of Egypt at 3:57 on a rainy Tuesday, between thinking about the frosting for a cake and getting the brakes fixed on the SUV, why she’s an open book. She’s a potential killer, right?

Then, at her next dinner party or picnic, her friends can ask her whether she’s planning to carry out the hit with a Glock or a drone.

And if the president of the United States, after a meeting with the Joint Chiefs, thinks he wants to bomb England, that’s the top headline in the Washington Post. Of course, he thought about the attack for a tenth of a second, and his next thought was about having sex with Angelina Jolie, and this was followed by a thought about pizza.

But who cares?

It’s all in the master library, and we can all tap in, and that’s utopia.

Then there is this: suppose someone hacks into the library and inserts thoughts for you you never had? For example: it’s falsely claimed you thought about declaring war against all gay men on the planet. Might that cause a ripple?

The purely technical aspects of translating all the thoughts of ten billion people into a readable library are, I must say, absurd. How many thought-impulses does one person generate in a 24-hour span? Even the dullest among us must rack up at least a million.

Eventually, somebody would come up with an algorithm and a computer model to highlight “certain thoughts that are more important than others.” And after a decade or so, it would be discovered that these models were wrong, useless, and politically motivated.

But not to worry. The whole point of Professor Persinger’s program is the elimination of secrets and privacy. The very existence of the program would force people to admit “we’re all liars,” because we don’t say everything we think. And this would be good, because then we would become suitably humble, passive, and non-threatening. We would become meek, submissive, and universally tolerant.

And the people controlling the whole system (who can have their own thoughts fabricated or blocked) would have a very simple time controlling us. Yes, it’s perfect.

If you want complete fascism.

Thanks, professor. We’ll take up your proposal at the next meeting of the Looney Tunes Society.

And by the way, who says thoughts are stored in the brain? Who says brain is the same thing as mind?

Professor Persinger has published widely during his long career. He’s written papers on telepathy, remote viewing, and the induction of spiritual experiences through electromagnetic stimulation.

This last area of research is particularly significant. It reveals the neuroscience bias toward assuming all “non-scientific” experience comes from physiological causes. In other words, everything we do, think, feel, or say is completely grounded in the physical.

This version of materialism is the justification for managing and manipulating human life. If we’re only biological machines, as these researchers assert, what difference does it make how we’re re-engineered?

If all our thoughts can be made public and universally available, why not do it? Why not wipe out all privacy and create the ultimate capstone on the Surveillance State?

Of course, “it’s for our own good.” It always is.

Naturally, we believe proposals like Persinger’s are ridiculous and would never be implemented. But back in the day when the FBI was obtaining an occasional warrant to wiretap a suspect, who imagined we would come to a time when our every electronic communication would be collected, sorted, and scanned by government agencies?

Sources:

http://subversivethinking.blogspot.com

http://www.messagetoeagle.com/thoughtsrecording.php

Jon Rappoport
The author of an explosive collection, THE MATRIX REVEALED, Jon was a candidate for a US Congressional seat in the 29th District of California. Nominated for a Pulitzer Prize, he has worked as an investigative reporter for 30 years, writing articles on politics, medicine, and health for CBS Healthwatch, LA Weekly, Spin Magazine, Stern, and other newspapers and magazines in the US and Europe. Jon has delivered lectures and seminars on global politics, health, logic, and creative power to audiences around the world. You can sign up for his free emails at www.nomorefakenews.com

About the author:
The author of an explosive new collection, THE MATRIX REVEALED, Jon
was a candidate for a US Congressional seat in the 29th District of
California. Nominated for a Pulitzer Prize, he has worked as an
investigative reporter for 30 years, writing articles on politics,
medicine, and health for CBS Healthwatch, LA Weekly, Spin Magazine,
Stern, and other newspapers and magazines in the US and Europe. Jon
has delivered lectures and seminars on global politics, health, logic,
and creative power to audiences around the world.
www.nomorefakenews.com

Reprintedwith permission of Natural News

Black Friday Mirage Hides U.S. Retail Depression

0

Jeff Nielson |

Every year it’s the same “song and dance” from the U.S. propaganda machine. Right after the “Black Friday” post-Thanksgiving shopping-orgy in the U.S.; the numbers will be twisted to supposedly show that the U.S. retail sector is strong-and-healthy. That’s immediately followed by a rousing chorus of “happy days are here again.”

Then, once the dust settles after the holiday shopping season (and few of the Sheep are paying attention), it will quietly announce another disastrous year for U.S. retailers. What is so pathetic about this sham is that not only does this song-and-dance never change, but it’s all based upon the same transparent lie.

That lie concerns inflation. All “inflation” is produced by the money-printing of bankers. Indeed the term itself originated as short-hand for “inflating the money supply”; which is precisely what all money-printing does. However, that topic has been covered previously for interested readers.

Where inflation closely relates to retail sales is that any/all retail sales statistics are only relevant if inflation is totally stripped-out of any calculation. Reporting that consumers paid higher prices for goods tells us absolutely nothing about the health of U.S. retailers — which is the raison d’etre for this statistic.

Instead, the propaganda machine does precisely the opposite. Not only does it refuse to subtract inflation out of its “retail sales” calculation; but it refuses to even acknowledge its perversion of this statistic when it reports its data.

Here it’s important to note to readers that when I use the term “inflation” that I’m referring to actual inflation in the real world, and not the hyper-absurd U.S. “consumer price index.” One could write an entire book about how the U.S. government has systematically severed all ties between this statistic and the real world, however a single anecdote will suffice.

In the same month (this summer) that the World Bank was reporting global food prices soaring at an annualized rate of 120%, and Asian governments were meeting to discuss “the global food-price crisis”; the U.S. government proclaimed that inflation in the U.S. was (literally) 0%.

Zero percent inflation in the U.S.; 120% inflation in “the world.” You do the math.

Here another important point must be made. More than ever food-price inflation is “inflation.” Obviously for the billions of people around the world living in poverty and near-poverty, that reality has always been totally apparent. However, for the first time since the Great Depression that Truth has migrated to the West.

One in six Americans must now subsist on government “food stamps” in order to feed themselves properly(?). Tens of millions of other Americans struggle barely above that threshold. This is the inevitable result of the more-than-50% decline in wages for the Average American over the past 40 years, or (in other words) a greater-than-50% decline in their standard of living. Food-inflation is inflation.

By any conservative measurement, inflation across the West now rages somewhere between 10 — 20%. Here even the eminent John Williams of Shadowstats.com is guilty of failing to fully factor-in this reality in his own calculation of the (real) U.S. inflation rate. Mr. Williams only assigns food prices an ordinary weighting in his own inflation calculation, when (as I just explained) food-inflation must now be over-weighted in any inflation calculation.

 

The inflation-rate on a new Mercedes means nothing to the average person. The inflation-rate on a loaf of bread means everything. With readers now hopefully having a reasonable understanding of how inflation is currently impacting our lives, this brings us to the serial lies of the propaganda machine regarding U.S. retail sales.

Since retail sales figures include this 10 — 20% inflation (rather than stripping it out, as would be done by any reputable statistician), the arithmetic is simple. If retail sales were to be officially “flat” (i.e. a 0% increase), then this would translate into retailers selling 10 — 20% less goods — but simply at higher prices.

As of this moment, the propaganda machine is reporting that “total spending” over the “four-day Black Friday weekend” rose 13% over last year. This number is highly suspicious, given that just 48 hours earlier the same media were reporting that sales on “Black Friday” itself had fallen by 1.8% from last year — at physical retail stores. Note that the surge in online sales this year doesn’t come close to offsetting the fall in sales from “foot traffic”, given that online sales still account for less than 5% of total U.S. retail sales.

Even though U.S. shoppers were lethargic on Black Friday itself (when supposedly the best of the bargains are available); we’re led to believe they went on a “spending” rampage after Black Friday. But here we see the propaganda machine moving the goal-posts. “Total spending” is not the same thing as “retail sales.”

Going to a movie, or a bar, or a restaurant over the course of a long week-end is not “retail sales.” Clearly the propaganda machine is now pumping “total spending over the Black Friday weekend” to hide another Black Friday Massacre for U.S. retailers. As noted earlier, with actual retail sales flat (at best), this means that U.S. retailers sold between 10% and 20% less goods than one year ago. But that’s only the latest in a series of horrendous numbers.

In October, U.S. retail sales fell 0.3% that month alone — and without accounting for inflation. Translate that into an annualized figure, and adjust for inflation; and in the month prior to Black Friday U.S. retail sales were plummeting lower at an annualized rate somewhere between 13.6% and 23.6%.

Go a little further back and the numbers are even worse. Official retail sales fell for three consecutive months from April through June, again without adjusting for inflation. That’s an entire quarter of actual U.S. retail sales plummeting downward at a double-digit (annual) rate.

Meanwhile, in the surreal world of U.S. economic statistics; the propaganda machine itself regularly informs us that consumption is directly/indirectly responsible for 80% of U.S. GDP. With retail sales (the largest component of consumption) plummeting downward at a double-digit rate; it’s a mathematical impossibility for the U.S. economy to be generating positive GDP growth.

Of course since official U.S. GDP calculations are deflated with the same fantasy-numbers the U.S. government uses in its CPI calculation; U.S. GDP statistics are equally as accurate as U.S. inflation numbers — which is to say that they have no connection to the real world.

It must be noted that the collapse in the quantity of goods being sold by U.S. retailers is only one component of this U.S. retail depression. With wholesale costs soaring, and with U.S. consumers never having so little disposable income; profit margins for most retailers are being steadily squeezed.

Selling less and less goods each month is a terrible problem for U.S. retailers. Selling less and less goods for less and less profit is a certain road to bankruptcy.

With fewer Americans working each month, with those who are working making less than half the wages that workers earned 40 years earlier, and with consumers already loaded up to their eyeballs in personal debt; it’s no wonder that actual U.S. retail sales are plummeting downward at a depressionary rate. What is amazing is that anyone still believes the doctored numbers and absurd spin from the mainstream media.

Source

Millions of Yahoo Mail accounts vulnerable to email hijacking

0

An internet hacker has offered to sell code that will allow a person to hijack Yahoo email accounts.

The hacker, said to be an Egyptian who goes by the username TheHell, has offered an exploit for the price of $700 on an underground cyber crime community called Darkode.

It works when AN unsuspecting email user clicks on a malicious hyperlink, sent in an email. By clicking on the link they unwittingly allow a cyber attacker access to their Yahoo Mail account.

‘After the victim clicks the link, he will be redirected to the email page again,’ a YouTube video advertising the hack said.

Online security blogger Brian Krebs noticed the publicity from the suspected hacker last week.

The exploit ‘targets a “cross-site scripting” (XSS) weakness in yahoo.com that lets attackers steal cookies from Yahoo! Webmail users,’ he explained in a blog posting on his website Krebs on Security.

‘Such a flaw would let attackers send or read email from the victim’s account. In a typical XSS attack, an attacker sends a malicious link to an unsuspecting user; if the user clicks the link, the script is executed, and can access cookies, session tokens or other sensitive information retained by the browser and used with that site. These scripts can even rewrite the content of the HTML page,’ he added.

Krebs informed Yahoo about the intended attack and the internet company said their security team is responding by fixing any potential vulnerabilities.

‘Fixing it is easy,’ Ramses Martinez, Yahoo director of security told Krebs.

‘Once we figure out the offending URL, we can have new code deployed in a few hours.’

But the hacker seemed to anticipate the company would evolve their code once the malicious link began to circulate.

The mastermind of the attack said the exploit would only be sold to a small group of ‘trusted people’ to prevent it from being patched or modified to fix the bug.

Krebs noted that TheHell does not seem to be focused on reaping a profit from the endeavor since web search engines like Yahoo and Google offer more to hackers to report the bugs.

Google pays as much as $1,337 for vulnerabilities that are reported, according to Krebs.

Source

Insane cop delivers flying knee to back of 17-year-old’s head then threatens to kill him

0

Madison Ruppert, Activist Post | 

There is no shortage of disturbing videos and stories dealing with disturbing episodes of police brutality and yet I still manage to be appalled by the actions of some out of control police officers.

Even with brutal assaults on 66-year-olds for no reason, highly suspicious deaths related to police violence, and even outright homicide(with no consequences, of course), this particular video is especially troubling.

In the below video at the bottom of this post, captured by Jordan Rojas, a friend of 17-year-old Andrew Rodriguez, we see an officer identified as “Officer Arnold” by the Dallas Observer (later identified by police as Officer Disraeli Arnold, a four and a half year veteran of the Hurst Police Department) sprinting towards Rodriguez and then slamming him in the back of the head with a flying knee.

After the brutal strike, Arnold screams, “Move, move, move and die! Move and fuckin’ die!”

“You wanna die here? Fuckin’ move again! Fuckin’ move again!” Arnold screamed.

Arnold then turns to the young man filming the incident and says, “Get up, get over here!”

Then, nonsensically, Arnold screams, “Stay down and shut the fuck up. Sit down and shut the fuck up! Don’t say nothing else!”

Moments later he screams at Rodrigquez, “Yeah faggot!”

The video has gone viral since it was posted on Nov. 23 with one posting receiving over 28,000 views and another on World Star Hip Hop receiving over 431,000 views and it was even picked up by local Dallas/Fort Worth news outlet WFAA.

While Rodriguez is clearly resisting to some degree at the beginning of the video, by the time Arnold sprints in with his brutal kick, Rodriguez seemed to have been subdued by the first officer.

Rodriguez was charged with resisting arrest and spent three days in jail after the incident which left his mother, Kelly Pope, quite unhappy.

“I was mad, I was hurt,” said Pope, according to WFAA. “This is supposed to be somebody to protect the city and our children.”

The City of Hurst and the Hurst Police Department released the following initial response to the video on their Hurt Police Department’s official Facebook page:

REGARDING THE VIDEO — Obviously, this is not behavior that the City of Hurst and the Hurst Police Department promotes or condones in any way. We strive to build a stronger, safer community through our work around the city and will continue to do so through appropriate action. The incident is being investigated internally.

A more complete picture of the incident was later published by another local news outlet, KTVT.

According to KTVT, Rodriguez was with two friends at Bellaire Park when they were questioned by police because they “looked suspicious.”

“Rojas said Rodriguez was told he was going to jail for an outstanding warrant, when Rodriguez began to call his mother,” KTVT reports.

According Pope, the ticket was some four years old and was issued for trespassing on school property after hours.

“The officer asked him to get off the phone and he continued to call his mom because he was already on it and then that’s when the officer tackled him,” Rojas said, according to KTVT. “That’s when I started recording.”

“I saw him dive on him and land his knee on the back of his neck and on the video you see Andrew’s head bop against the floor,” Rojas said. “It kind of shocked me.”

Police Chief Steve Moore claimed that Rodriguez began to walk away and ignore the officer, at which time the officer attempted to take Rodriguez into custody.

As the account from KTVT shows, it seems that the situation was mostly diffused by the time Arnold attacked Rodriguez.

The Hurst Police Department has now announced that they have suspended Arnold pending an investigation by internal affairs:

UPDATE REGARDING THE VIDEO OF OFFICER DISRAELI ARNOLD — As we stated previously, this is not behavior that the City of Hurst and the Hurst Police Department promotes or condones. Officer Arnold has been placed on administrative leave pending an ongoing internal affairs investigation.

At this point we cannot comment on the status of the investigation from either a civil or criminal standpoint due to legal, civil service, and internal procedural regulations. We are cooperating with the media within the scope of those regulations and any information we can release will be made public through those outlets. We appreciate everyone’s thoughts and continued civil discourse as the investigation is conducted.

Watch the video below:

Please support our work and help us start to pay contributors by doing your shopping through our Amazon link or check out some must-have products at our store.

This article first appeared at End the Lie.

Madison Ruppert is the Editor and Owner-Operator of the alternative news and analysis databaseEnd The Lie and has no affiliation with any NGO, political party, economic school, or other organization/cause. He is available for podcast and radio interviews. Madison also now has his own radio show on UCYTV http://UCY.TV Monday nights 7 PM – 9 PM PT/10 PM – 12 AM ET.  Show page link here:  http://UCY.TV/EndtheLie. If you have questions, comments, or corrections feel free to contact him at admin@EndtheLie.com

High earners to see tax bills fall by £100,000 a year

0

Britain’s biggest earners will see their tax bills fall by £100,000 a year under George Osborne’s budget changes, Ed Miliband said today.

The Labour leader will say that thousands of people earning more than £1 million stand to benefit by more than previously thought because of the cut in income tax from 50p to 45p.

The party said it would be publishing new figures showing 8,000 top earners would each stand to gain £107,500 a year from April next year as a result of the changes.

Labour previously said it thought people earning £1 million year would see their tax bills fall by £40,000 a year.

Speaking in Stevenage, Hertfordshire, Mr Miliband is expected to go on the attack today over the Coalition’s efforts to help “the wrong people”.

“David Cameron and George Osborne believe the only way to persuade millionaires to make work harder is to give them more money. But they also seem to believe that the only way to make you work harder is to take money away,” he is expected to say.

“Cut your tax credits, squeeze your living standards, get rid of some of the services on which you rely, and put up VAT. That’s where the money is coming from for the millionaires’ tax cut.”

The Chancellor cut the top rate of tax in the budget over fears amid claims the 50p rate was not raising enough for the Treasury, because many rich people had moved their money out of Britain.

There were fears that taxing the wealthy so heavily would eventually lead to an exodus of businessmen and entrepreneurs.

Speaking at the time, Mr Osborne said it “damages our economy and raises next to nothing”.

He scrapped the 50p rate in March, but said the 45p rate is here to stay for anyone earning more than £150,000 per year.

Under Labour, the rate was 40p in the pound, until Gordon Brown raised it to 50p to help raise money for the Treasury following the recession.

Originally published on The Telegraph

Goldmans global domination is now complete

0

Zero Hedge |

Back on July 3, we made an explicit and very simple prediction: “now that the natural succession path at the BOE has been terminally derailed, it brings up those two other gentlemen already brought up previously as potential future heads of the BOE, both of whom just happened to work, or still do, at… Goldman Sachs:  Canada’s Mark Carney or Goldman’s Jim O’Neil. Granted both have denied press speculation they will replace Mervyn King, but it’s not like it would be the first time a banker lied to anyone now, would it (and makes one wonder if this whole affair was not merely orchestrated by the Squid from the get go… but no, that would be a ‘conspiracy theory’.)”

A few weeks later, in “On The Path To Global Goldmanation: Former Goldmanite Mark Carney To Head The BOE After All?” we added:

Granted both have denied press speculation they will replace Mervyn King, but it’s not like it would be the first time a banker lied to anyone now, would it (and makes one wonder if this whole affair was not merely orchestrated by the Squid from the get go… but no, that would be a ‘conspiracy theory’.)” We wonder if this speculation can be upgraded from conspiracy theory to conspiracy fact, now that Bloomberg itself has written a major article discussing just this suddenly very likely outcome.

 

From Bloomberg:

 

Carney Leading Bank of England Seen as Scandal Remedy

 

 

London is losing so much trust as the global financial center that Prime Minister David Cameron may need to consider an unprecedented choice for Bank of England governor: Mark Carney, the Canadian who polices the world’s financial system and has no ties to the bailouts or rigged markets tainting Labour and Conservative governments alike.

 

The 47-year-old Carney, who received his masters and PhD degrees from Oxford University, is no stranger to the City of London after working there with Goldman Sachs Group Inc. Now serving as governor of the Bank of Canada and the head of the Financial Stability Board, he is unscathed by the fallout from the 2008 financial crisis.

 

“Mark Carney is one of the brightest, most capable people I’ve ever met in global finance and central banking,” said Tim Adams, a former U.S. Treasury undersecretary who worked with Carney at Group of Seven meetings. “I’ve been around these circles a long time and he’s smart, politically savvy, a good manager and has an outstanding track record. It’s tough to find all those elements in a single person.”

 

Domestic candidates for the job include Gus O’Donnell, former head of the U.K. civil service, Financial Services Authority Chairman Adair Turner and Bank of England Deputy Governor Paul Tucker, a three-decade veteran at the bank.

There is one problem regarding the domestic candidates: none of them have Goldman on their resume, something which sets not only Mark Carney, but also Bill Dudley and Mario Draghi apart.

As for the punchline:

 

“Why not get a head that’s global? Bankers aren’t very popular, and a Canadian sounds like a good choice,” said Kent Matthews, a professor at Cardiff University and former Bank of England researcher. “It may well be that to restore credibility they have to look outside.”

 

So that’s the strategy: play Carney off as a Canadian, instead of as Goldman. We wonder how many minutes the general public will be fooled by that particular strawman.

* * *

We are, once again, 100% correct, and have beaten all the bookie odds which had Tucker as a favorite and Mark Carney as a long odds outsider. Pity: all one needs to realize and remember how the events in the world play out is to remember one simple thing: GOLDMAN SACHS RUNS IT. Everything else is secondary.

As we expected months ago, it has just been confirmed.

  • MARK CARNEY NAMED AS NEXT BANK OF ENGLAND GOVERNOR
  • OSBORNE: CARNEY WILL BRING FRESH PERSPECTIVE
  • OSBORNE: CARNEY WON’T COMMENT ON U.K. POLICY BEFORE TAKING POST
  • BANK OF CANADA GOVERNOR CARNEY SAYS HONORED TO ACCEPT BOE ROLE
  • OSBORNE SAYS U.K. NEEDS `THE VERY BEST’ AT THIS TIME
  • OSBORNE SAYS CARNEY IS BEST, MOST EXPERIENCED CANDIDATE

And as we showed back on July 26…

Europe before:

and After:

Finally, our conclusion from that article, which today merely encapsulated:

  • Because with money printing squids like these, who needs sovereign states?

Q.E.D.

Corporate Scientists Own Patents On GMOs

0

 |

The lead researcher behind the monumental study that linked Monsanto’s GMOs and best-selling herbicide Roundup to tumor development and early death is now blowing the whistle on many corporate scientists who are not just close to Monsanto and profit-harvesting GMO crops – many of them actually have or are seeking their own GMO patents. These patents, of course, enable them to make bountiful amounts of cash. Other corporate scientists are on (or ‘were’ at one point) Monsanto’s pay roll, including former Monsanto executive turned Deputy Commissioner for Foods at the FDA Michael R. Taylor.

Dr. Gilles-Eric Séralini, a French scientists who has been under assault from Monsanto and pro-GMO scientists, was responsible for perhaps the largest awakening over the dangers of Monsanto’s GMO foods that we have ever seen. Not only did the public begin to further recognize the existence and threat of GMOs thanks to his research, but numerous countries like Russia and others actually enacted a suspension on the import of genetically modified maize due to public health concerns.

This, of course, upset the Monsanto-funded corporate scientists who proverbially ‘unleashed the dogs’ on Dr. Séralini. Even Monsanto released a comment, stating that the lifelong rat study wasn’t sufficient to substantiate any real health concerns. The company itself, amazingly, only conducted a 90 day trial period for its GMOs before unleashing them on the public.

Previous Peer-Reviewed Evidence Highlighting GMO Danger Ignored by ‘Scientists’

It’s important to remember that Séralini’s work may be the most popular within the media, but it’s not the only research linking GMOs and Roundup to serious health effects. Monsanto and fellow goons failed to mention this truth, especially the fact that Monsanto’s Roundup has been associated with over 29 negative health conditions according to peer-reviewed studies available on PubMed. And these conditions are nothing minor. Health effects linked to Roundup include:

  • Cancer
  • Parkinson’s
  • DNA damage
  • Low testosterone
  • Liver damage
  • Infertility
  • Endocrine disease

These are serious disorders that result from the very Roundup that is used on crops by farmers worldwide before hitting your dinner table. In fact an increased amount of usage is now needed thanks to ineffective GMO crops that are now being eaten by mutated superbugs that have developed a resistance to Monsanto’s built-in GMO pesticides.Roundup covered crops that eventually land on dinner tables worldwide.

But perhaps very few scientists around the globe actually dare speak about these dangers due to the overwhelming political influence Monsanto and other biotech companies have over nations around the globe. We know thanks to 2007 WikiLeaks cables that not only are most if not all U.S. ambassadors on Monsanto payroll, but that prominent U.S. political figures have threatened nations who oppose Monsanto with ‘military-style trade wars’. A threat that has managed to strike fear into many nations who would not risk massive retaliation from the United States.

Now, however, the awareness has grown stronger than ever before and consumers worldwide are taking a stand. A stand that countries around the globe can no longer ignore, nor can corrupt corporate scientists dissipate through phony bought-and-paid-for garbage science.

Originally published on Natural Society

Pat Buchanan: Dismantle The American Empire

0

Islamic wars have brought questionable benefit to the US over the last 20 years, former US presidential advisor Pat Buchanan, author of Suicide of a Superpower, shared with RT.

A new war in the Middle East will be a disaster for the US and for the world economy, he says. “I opposed the Desert Storm operation in 1991 cleaning Saddam Hussein out of Kuwait because, I said, ‘This would only be the first Arab-American war.'” Looking at the number of conflicts in the Islam world that America is taking part in now, one cannot but admit that Buchanan was right 20 years ago. “You cannot replicate the Middle West in the Middle East,” Pat Buchanan concluded.

From the time of the Cold War the US has military bases all over the world. Today, running a budget deficit of 10 per cent of its GDP, America simply cannot afford to continue “to carry this enormous burden, defending 40 or 50 countries around the world,” Buchanan says, “We have to bring troops home.” Getting rid of these bases essentially means dismantling the American Empire to help the US survive beyond 2025. America’s crusade under the banner of ending tyranny in the world is “utterly utopian”.

Protesting EU Farmers Spray Cops With … Milk?

0

Kevin Spak |

Thousands of enraged dairy farmers converged on the European Parliament in Brussels yesterday, and sprayed the building, and the cops who showed up to contain them, with their stock in trade: milk. The protesters arrived on tractors, blocked traffic along many of the city’s main streets, then pulled out hoses and let thousands of liters of the white stuff fly, Reuters reports. They also set fire to a trailer full of hay, and hung a nondescript body in effigy.

The farmers are demanding a 25% bump in milk prices, which they say have become untenably low, the BBC reports; In Belgium, for instance, a liter sells for about $0.34 wholesale, but costs about $0.52 to produce. Part of the problem: the EU sets an annual quota of about 143 tons of milk, more than Europe can consume. “It’s very simple: you can’t live off milk anymore,” one French farmer said. “If I go on, it’s thanks to European aid.”

Originally published on Newser

Private Prison Company Used in Drug Raids at Public High School

0

Corrections Corporation of America used in drug sweeps of public school students in Arizona

Beau Hodai |

In Arizona an unsettling trend appears to be underway: the use of private prison employees in law enforcement operations.

The state has graced national headlines in recent years as the result of its cozy relationship with the for-profit prison industry. Such controversies have included the role of private prison corporations in SB 1070 and similar anti-immigrant legislation disseminated in other states; a 2010 private prison escape that resulted in two murders and a nationwide manhunt; and a failed bid to privatize nearly the entire Arizona prison system.

And now, recent events in the central Arizona town of Casa Grande show the hand of private corrections corporations reaching into the classroom, assisting local law enforcement agencies in drug raids at public schools.

Trick or Treat

At 9 a.m. on the morning of October 31, 2012, students at Vista Grande High School in Casa Grande were settling in to their daily routine when something unusual occurred.

Vista Grande High School Principal Tim Hamilton ordered the school — with a student population of 1,776 — on “lock down,” kicking off the first “drug sweep” in the school’s four-year history. According to Hamilton, “lock down” is a state in which, “everybody is locked in the room they are in, and nobody leaves — nobody leaves the school, nobody comes into the school.”

“Everybody is locked in, and then they bring the dogs in, and they are teamed with an administrator and go in and out of classrooms. They go to a classroom and they have the kids come out and line up against a wall. The dog goes in and they close the door behind, and then the dog does its thing, and if it gets a hit, it sits on a bag and won’t move.”

While such “drug sweeps” have become a routine matter in many of the nation’s schools, along with the use of metal detectors and zero-tolerance policies, one feature of this raid was unusual. According to Casa Grande Police Department (CGPD) Public Information Officer Thomas Anderson, four “law enforcement agencies” took part in the operation: CGPD (which served as the lead agency and operation coordinator), the Arizona Department of Public Safety, the Gila River Indian Community Police Department, and Corrections Corporation of America (CCA).

It is the involvement of CCA — the nation’s largest private, for-profit prison corporation — that causes this high school “drug sweep” to stand out as unusual; CCA is not, despite CGPD’s evident opinion to the contrary, a law enforcement agency.

“To invite for-profit prison guards to conduct law enforcement actions in a high school is perhaps the most direct expression of the ‘schools-to-prison pipeline’ I’ve ever seen,” said Caroline Isaacs, program director of the Tucson office of the American Friends Service Committee (AFSC), a Quaker social justice organization that advocates for criminal justice reform.

“All the research shows that CCA doesn’t properly train its staff to do the jobs they actually have. They most certainly do not have anywhere near the training and experience–to say nothing of the legal authority–to conduct a drug raid on a high school,” Isaacs added. “It is chilling to think that any school official would be willing to put vulnerable students at risk this way.”

Welcome to Prison Town, U.S.A.

CCA, the nation’s largest for-profit prison/immigrant detention center operator, with more than 92,000 prison and immigrant detention “beds” in 20 states and the District of Columbia, reported $1.7 billion in gross revenue last year. This revenue is derived almost exclusively from tax payer-funded government (county, state, federal) contracts through which the corporation is paid per-diem, per-prisoner rates for the warehousing of prisoners and immigrant detainees.

And, CCA has a substantial presence in Casa Grande and throughout Arizona’s Pinal County (Casa Grande is the largest town in Pinal County). The corporation owns and operates a total of six correctional/detention facilities in the county, distributed through the towns of Florence and Eloy.

These facilities hold a mixture of prisoners from the U.S. Immigration and Customs Enforcement, the U.S. Marshals Service, the Hawaii Department of Public Safety Division of Corrections, TransCor (a detainee/prisoner transportation subsidiary of CCA), the Pascua Yaqi Tribe, the U.S. Air Force, the Vermont Department of Corrections, and the California Department of Corrections and Rehabilitation. In September of this year, CCA was awarded a contract with the Arizona Department of Corrections (ADC) to house 1,000 medium security prisoners at the corporation’s Red Rock Correctional Center in Eloy.

In 2009, the Central Arizona Regional Economic Development Foundation listed CCA as the largest non-governmental employer in Pinal County. To boot, CCA is a “Board Level” member of the Arizona Chamber of Commerce and Industry, a powerful trade/lobby organization, and is active in the Eloy, Florence, and Casa Grande chambers of commerce. (For more on CCA’s political influence in Arizona, see “Brownskins and Greenbacks,” DBA Press, June 2010.)

This CCA presence, coupled with the location of two correctional facilities operated by GEO Group (the nation’s second largest for-profit prison/immigrant detention center contractor) in the county, as well as two ADC-run prison complexes, makes Pinal County — which once cited mining and agriculture as its economic bedrock — a de facto prison industry community.

Despite the obvious differences between CCA and actual law enforcement agencies, those involved in the Vista Grande High School drug sweep seem unable to differentiate between CCA employees and law enforcement officers.
“CCA is like a skip and a hop away from us– as far as the one in Florence,” said Anderson. “We work pretty closely with all surrounding agencies, whatever kind of law enforcement they are– be they police, or immigration and naturalization, or the prison systems. So, yeah, this seems pretty regular to me.”

For his part, Hamilton seems equally unable to differentiate between law enforcement officers and employees of a for-profit prison corporation.

”To be honest with you, I couldn’t tell if they were Casa Grande Police, Pinal County police, Gila River, the sheriff’s department– they all look the same,” said Hamilton.

Questions of Legality

But they are not the same.

Aside from the fact that CCA is a private corporation that derives its profits from the incarceration of human beings– such as minimum and medium security drug offenders — Arizona Administrative Code provides that, in order for any individual to engage in the duties of a “peace officer,” that individual must obtain certification from the Arizona Peace Officer Standards and Training (POST) Board. Arizona Revised Statutes defines “peace officer” to include such law enforcement personnel as: municipal police officers, constables, marshals, Department of Public Safety personnel, and community college/university police.

The POST Board is comprised of the Arizona Attorney General, the director of the Arizona Department of Corrections, the director of the Arizona Department of Public Safety, municipal police department chiefs, county sheriffs, state university personnel, and other public safety/law enforcement personnel. POST’s essential purpose, as defined by Arizona law is to “prescribe reasonable minimum qualifications for officers to be appointed to enforce the laws of this state and the political subdivisions of this state and certify officers in compliance with these qualifications.”

And, Arizona Administrative Code is very clear on this point: “a person who is not certified by the Board or whose certified status is inactive shall not function as a peace officer or be assigned the duties of a peace officer by an agency . . . ”

According to POST Executive Director Lyle Mann, POST provides two types of certification: standards and training certification for “peace officers,” and standards and training certification for correctional officers. Arizona Administrative Code mandates that ADC officers be POST certified. However, according to Mann, employees of private prison contractors are exempt from this standards and training requirements. As such, said Mann, no CCA employee is POST certified — as either a “peace officer” or a correctional officer.

It is important to note that Arizona Administrative Code explicitly states that non-regular “peace officers” — secondary parties engaging in certain limited aspects of law enforcement under the command/supervision of regular peace officers — must also be POST certified.

According to Arizona Administrative Code, a “limited-authority peace officer” is defined as “a peace officer who is certified to perform the duties of a peace officer only in the presence and under the supervision of a full-authority peace officer.” The Code goes on to state that duties which may be performed by a “limited-authority peace officer” in the presence of a “full-authority peace officer” include: “investigative activities performed to detect, prevent, or suppress crime, or to enforce criminal or traffic laws of the state, county, or municipality.”

This definition seems to fit the description — with the exception that CCA employees aiding CGPD “peace officers” are not POST certified — of what occurred at Vista Grande High School on the morning of October 31, 2012.

According to Officer Anderson and Principal Hamilton, the raid was organized and conducted at Hamilton’s request.

“We need to keep drugs off our campus,” said Hamilton when asked why he requested the raid. “We wanted to make sure our campus . . . we wanted to send a message to kids that we don’t want that stuff on our campus.”
Hamilton stated that, outside from this desire to send a “message to kids,” he had no knowledge of any particular drug use problem on his school’s campus.

CGPD then issued a request for assistance to what it considered to be other local law enforcement agencies — including CCA.

According to Anderson, CCA provided two canine units (handlers and dogs) to aid in the high school “drug sweep.” These CCA canine units worked under the command of the lead CGPD canine unit.

According to Anderson, there is no contract or formal agreement for such services extant between CGPD and CCA. Rather, said Anderson, CCA simply agreed to participate in the raid when approached by CGPD “K-9” officers. Anderson stated that he does not know whether CGPD ever contacted POST-certified correctional canine units at either of the two nearby ADC-operated prisons.

As to the general role canine units play in such school “drug sweeps,” Anderson stated that the dogs and their handlers are typically utilized to detect the presence of illicit materials in classrooms and school parking lots.

This activity, as was conducted by CCA employees, would seem to fall squarely under the Arizona Administrative Code description of duties performed by “limited-authority peace officers” — officers who may perform “investigative activities” for the purpose of detecting, preventing, or suppressing criminal activity, and who are only authorized to do so while in the presence of “full-authority peace officers,” such as CGPD. Such “limited-authority peace officers” are required to be POST certified.

Regardless, according to both Anderson and Hamilton, this type of activity has been going on for years in Pinal County.

According to Anderson, a similar “drug sweep” — utilizing CCA canine units — was conducted at Casa Grande’s Union High School in 2011. Anderson has been unable to provide further details relating to this event.

According to Anderson, the Vista Grande High School raid is unlikely to be the last instance of CCA partnership with local law enforcement, as he assumed CGPD would use the corporation’s canine teams again, if needed.

And, according to Hamilton, he requested and had executed “drug sweeps” utilizing CCA canine units “two or three times a year,” while serving as principal at Coolidge High School in Coolidge, Arizona — also located in Pinal County, roughly ten miles from the private prison mecca of Florence. Hamilton was principal at Coolidge High School from 2003 through 2007.

CCA did not respond to multiple requests for comment regarding their involvement in law enforcement operations at public schools in Pinal County.

Conflict of Interest: From the Cradle to the Cell

According to Anderson, three students were arrested as a result of the October 31 Vista Grande raid: two female students, ages 15 and 17, as well as one 15-year-old male. According to Anderson, the 15-year-old female was found in possession of .10 grams of marijuana; the 15-year-old male student was found in possession of .50 grams of marijuana; and the 17-year-old female was found in possession of 10 ounces of marijuana. According to Anderson, this last quantity was “individually packaged.”

According to Anderson, the students were referred to the juvenile division of Pinal County Superior Court. All students were then released to their parents/legal guardians. 

According to Hamilton, the school will commence expulsion hearings against all students arrested.

It is worth noting that, while (as of November 12, 2012) charges have yet to be filed against students arrested in the October 31 Vista Grande drug raid, it is possible, under Arizona law, for the 17-year-old female allegedly found to be in possession of 10 ounces of “individually packaged” marijuana to be sentenced as an adult if charged with possession with intent to distribute — a felony which would could carry a prison sentence.

In addition, it is important to note that, under Arizona law, individuals arrested for illicit activity/possession of illicit substances on or near school grounds may face “drug-free school zone” sentencing enhancements. Those convicted of drug (including marijuana) offenses in Arizona courts, and sentenced through the stringent criteria of “drug-free school zone” sentencing enhancements, lose the possibility of sentence suspension, parole, or probation (which would rule out the possibility of a deferral or diversion). This sentencing enhancement also adds a mandatory year to any prison sentence handed down by the court.

While the recently-awarded 1,000 CCA Arizona prison beds have yet to come into operation, it is exactly this kind of low risk, minimum to medium security prisoner that corporations such as CCA derive much of their profit from.

Furthermore, according to Anderson, the Vista Grande High School marijuana arrests have sparked a broader, ongoing investigation.

Given the fact that such high school raids may serve as the foundation for larger narcotics investigations which may net additional adult offenders — and given the tremendous pressure for information a prosecutor may exert on a student through discretionary use of “drug-free school zone” sentencing enhancements — concerned citizens say that CCA’s involvement in such raids constitutes a clear conflict of interest.

“They’re [CCA] not the criminal justice system. They are benefactors of the criminal justice system,” said correctional specialist and prison reform advocate, Carl Toersbijns.

Toersbijns, now retired (he retired in 2010), served as a deputy warden of operations at ADC-operated Arizona State Prison (ASP) Eyeman, as a deputy warden of operations at ASP Safford, as a deputy warden of operations at New Mexico Department of Corrections-operated Western New Mexico Correctional Facility (Grants, New Mexico), and as an associate warden at the Central New Mexico Correctional Facility (at Los Lunas, New Mexico). Collectively, Toersbijns’ career in corrections has spanned over 25 years in both Arizona and New Mexico. Such work, said Toersbijns, has entailed everything from details with prison canine units, to prison gang units.

“They [CCA] use the criminal justice system as a means of making income — for profit,” added Toersbijns. “So, their interest in the criminal justice system is totally opposite of the police officer. The police officer is public safety. The primary interest for CCA and associated entities is profit. So, there most definitely is a conflict of interest.”

Profit-Driven Roadmap to the Present: “Tough-on-Crime” Mania and the Introduction of the “War on Drugs” to the Classroom.

As some opponents of prison privatization attest, CCA embodies the worst pitfalls of public-private partnerships, in that the corporation has worked in the past to advance criminal justice legislation that has contributed to both a swell in U.S. prison/detention center populations and, consequently, CCA’s bottom line.

For example, CCA was active (both as a co-chair and member) in the American Legislative Exchange Council’s (ALEC) Public Safety and Elections Task Force (formerly the ALEC Criminal Justice Task Force) through the 1990s, to the end of 2010.

ALEC bills itself as “the nation’s largest, non-partisan, individual public-private membership association of state legislators,” working toward the advancement of the “Jeffersonian ideals” of limited federal government. In reality, ALEC is almost entirely funded by corporations and sources other than legislative dues, and it is overwhelmingly comprised of Republican state lawmakers and an untold number of large corporations and influential law/lobby firms (although at least 41 companies have announced they have stopped funding ALEC in the wake of public exposure of its activities). ALEC’s primary objective is to adopt and disseminate “model legislation,” much of which is drafted entirely by its private sector members. ALEC boasts that nearly 20 percent of this “model legislation” introduced in state legislatures nationwide is passed into law annually.

In the wake of reporting outlining CCA’s involvement with ALEC and the spread of immigration law based on SB 1070, CCA told the Arizona Republic, in September 2011, that the corporation left ALEC at an undisclosed time in 2010.

Records obtained by DBA Press show the direct sponsorship of both CCA and of Management and Training Corporation (“MTC,” currently the nation’s third largest for-profit prison/immigrant detention center operator) of the August 2010 ALEC Annual Meeting, as well as the likely involvement of lobbyists employed by both CCA, MTC and GEO Group in the December, 2010 ALEC “States and Nation Policy Summit”.

Arizona lobby reports also show clear GEO Group involvement with ALEC during the December, 2009 ALEC States and Nation Policy Summit — the meeting at which then-Arizona State Senator Russell Pearce introduced legislation (that would later be introduced in the Arizona legislature as SB 1070) for adoption as a piece of ALEC Public Safety and Elections Task Force “model legislation.” Subsequently, copycat legislation similar to this ALEC model bill — the “No More Sanctuary Cities for Illegal Immigrants Act” — began appearing in state legislatures throughout the nation.

Furthermore, the ALEC Public Safety and Elections Task Force was instrumental, during the years of CCA’s membership and leadership, in proliferating such ‘tough-on-crime’ legislation as: “three strikes,” “truth in sentencing” and “mandatory minimum” sentencing guidelines.

And ALEC also advanced the model “Private Correctional Facilities Act,” which allowed private corporations to operate state prisons.

These guidelines and pieces of “model legislation” (including the “Private Correctional Facilities Act”) were advanced by ALEC in partnership with CrimeStrike, a division of the National Rifle Association (“NRA,” a longtime ALEC private sector member), throughout the first half of the 1990s. Critics of this effort saw CrimeStrike largely as a response to the Clinton administration’s desire to strengthen firearms violence prevention laws. As such, the CrimeStrike campaign spawned the saying, “guns don’t kill people, people kill people”– and posited that the solution to crime would be found through the use of greater criminal penalties. This strategy took advantage of, and perpetuated, the “tough-on-crime” sentiments of the day.

Largely as a result of model laws/sentencing guidelines advanced by the ALEC/NRA CrimeStrike partnership, the United States experienced a boom in the number of incarcerated individuals (in state and federal prisons, as well as in jails)– from just over 1.1 million incarcerated in 1990, to nearly 2.3 million in 2010.

During the years of CCA’s Criminal Justice/Public Safety and Elections Task Force involvement, ALEC also advanced and advocated “model legislation” that not only resulted in greater drug law enforcement presence on public school campuses, but that also mandated tough sentencing enhancements for drug offenses committed in “drug-free school zones.”

The ALEC “Drug-Free Schools Act” called for the use of federal funds provided through the Drug Free Schools and Communities Act of 1986 for “enhanced apprehension, prevention and education efforts” in joint cooperation between law enforcement agencies and local school districts.

Multiple ALEC publications (including the ALEC “Sourcebook for American State Legislation 1993-94,” which lists CCA among the organization’s private sector members and advisors), along with the ALEC “Use of a Minor in Drug Operations Act” reference the “model Drug-Free School Zone Act,” although it is unclear whether this “model” bill originated with ALEC.

It is clear, however, that the model “Drug-Free School Zone Act,” which establishes “drug-free school zones” and carries sentencing enhancements similar to the enhancements codified in Arizona law, was promoted by a broad coalition of public interests groups during the ‘tough-on-crime’ fervor of the early-to-mid 1990s. The model bill enjoyed such support that the 1992 National Office of Drug Control Policy (NODCP) established federal assistance in establishing “drug-free school zones,” as well as mandatory sentencing enhancements nationwide.

Interestingly enough, this NODCP initiative, which was set forth in a report discussing the agency’s “national priorities” for 1992, advocated state adoption of several other known pieces of ALEC model legislation, such as the “Use of a Minor in a Drug Operations Act,” as well as other ALEC “models” calling for the suspension or revocation of occupational licenses for professionals convicted of drug crimes, the eviction of drug offenders from public housing, and the use of “mandatory minimum” sentencing guidelines.

Not surprisingly, ALEC, along with several other public policy groups, was credited by the NODCP as having been “especially helpful in the formulation of this strategy.”

In April of 2012, following widespread criticism and loss of corporate sponsorship due to such pieces of “model legislation” disseminated by the Public Safety and Elections Task Force as the “Stand Your Ground Act,” the “Voter ID Act” and the “No More Sanctuary Cities for Illegal Immigrants Act,” ALEC announced that it would disband the task force (an announcement that PRWatch has critiqued as a “PR” maneuver).

Unfortunately, as the October 31 Vista Grande High School drug raid illustrates, the purported discontinuation of this task force comes only after the damage of two decades of private prison industry influence in the legislative process has taken its toll.

Is Any of this Right?

Vast differences between law enforcement agencies and private, for-profit corrections corporations aside, former ADC deputy warden and corrections specialist Carl Toersbijns said he sees a greater underlying problem in the practice of using any prison — public or private — personnel in school drug raids.

The simple fact is this: correctional officers — people who work on a continual basis around adult criminal offenders– have a much different mentality than a teacher, principal, or police officer. This mentality, he believes, may not be the most suitable mentality to subject school children to.

“Children are different — they don’t act like adults, and I don’t think you ought to use corrections officers around children,” said Toersbijns. “It’s a different culture, it’s a different setting, it’s a different approach. It’s inappropriate.” 

For example, the term “lockdown,” said Toersbijns, may mean an entirely different thing to a corrections officer than it means to school personnel, students, or police.

“They use that terminology, ‘lock down,’ in the police department too. When they’ve got something going on in the neighborhood — a robbery suspect in the neighborhood — they lock the schools down [. . .] If you have a group there, that you’ve called in to do a job, and some of them are correctional officers, and they hear the words ‘lock down,’ it has a different meaning — it has a total different meaning [. . .] You don’t tell a correctional officer ‘this school’s on lock down,’ because the mentality is: ‘oh, I can go anywhere I want and tear up anything I want and grab anything that I want. That’s the mentality we use in prison. Prisoners don’t have rights — you and I both know that — when it comes to search and seizure, they don’t have no rights. Children have rights.”

Thanks to Alex Friedmann, associate editor of Prison Legal News (www.prisonlegalnews.org) for his contribution to this article. CMD staffers Rebekah Wilce and Alex Oberley also contributed to this article.

© 2012 Center for Media & Democracy

RINF Video: New Jersey ramps up covert surveillance program

0

RINF News reports on how New Jersey is ramping up its level of covert surveillance as law enforcement officers are being equipped with high tech cameras, infrared technology and automatic licence plate readers, that will track and monitor citizens.

Pinkwashing Hell: Breast Removal as a Form of “Prevention”

0

Sayer Ji, Activist Post | 

Following closely on the heels of the year’s most intensive annual cause-marketing campaign, October’s Breast Cancer Awareness Month, two chilling events of grave concern to women and their health were widely (but mostly superficially) reported on in the mainstream media.

First, Allyn Rose, Miss America contestant, announced in early November that she would be undergoing a double mastectomy to “prevent” breast cancer. Rose, a healthy 24-year old Maryland native who lost her mother to breast cancer when she was 16, has been lauded by certain media outlets as an “awareness raising” role model for having the courage to take this “precautionary step” and for spreading her mastectomy-inspired “message of preventive health care” to the masses. Many of the reports discussed how her decision was spurned by her awareness of having a genetic predisposition for breast cancer.

Second, on Nov. 22nd, the New England Journal of Medicine published a review of the past 30 years of mammography finding that not only has the widespread promotion and adoption of breast screenings by millions of women not reduced their mortality (on the contrary, screenings have increased their relative risk of mortality), but that 1.3 million of these women were overdiagnosed and wrongly treated for abnormal findings that were not even cancer, i.e. were screening detected breast abnormalities that if left untreated would have caused no harm to women.

Not surprisingly, this paradigm-challenging finding, in the tradition of embargoed science, was exactly timed to be released to the public on the eve of a major holiday.

Subsequently, while folks unplugged from electronic media for a rare family day centered around Thanksgiving dinner, the already watered-down headlines received only lackluster attention considering the true gravity of the study’s findings. How many who did happen scan headlines released on that day, such as “Study Faults Breast Exams,” truly grasped that 70,000 women a year have their breasts either removed or disfigured, irradiated and then are treated with chemotherapy and/or hormone suppressive therapies for cancers that aren’t there?

Rose, of course, is not aware of the disturbing implications within the New England Journal of Medicine study, namely, that the women in her family that she believes all died from “inherited” breast cancer, may actually have died not from breast cancer, or breast cancer associated gene mutations, but from the breast cancer treatments themselves; that is to say, as a result of overdiagnosis and subsequent psychological trauma and physical mistreatment by a completely out-of-touch medical system relying on intrinsically carcinogenic diagnostic and treatment technologies to cut, burn and poison our lesions that would never have progressed to cancer, andmay have simply regressed, had they been left undetected and undisturbed.

Nor is she aware that the so-called breast cancer genes, BRCA1/BRCA2, are relevant because they interfere with DNA repair mechanisms related to radiation and chemical exposure, implying that avoiding unnecessary radiation exposure, such as x-ray mammography, and chemicals such as have been found in many pinkwashed consumer products, e.g. KFC chicken (acrylamides) and Yoplait yogurt (rBGH), is of utmost important in reducing her risk of breast cancer.

Truth be told, even the widely attributed increased breast cancer mortality associated with BRCA1/2 (there are actually several thousands variations in these genes within the human population)1 may be a myth. A 2005 BMC Cancer article found that although BRCA positive patients have more frequently negative prognostic factors, their prognosis (actual risk for breast cancer associated mortality) appears to be equal to or better than in patients with BRCA-WT [the typical “non mutated” form found in the majority of the population. Other studies have emerged demonstrating that BRCA’s supposed reaper-like hold on women’s health is a myth. This is not an academic issue, since mastectomy rates have actually been increasing since 2004, no doubt due to the heightened anxiety over, and vast oversimplification of, BRCA-related risks.

In Rose’s mind, however, as in the minds of millions of women who participate in the annual ‘breast cancer awareness‘ pinkwashing campaigns, there is no known cause to cancer outside your own genes (i.e. the hundreds of thousands of novel carcinogens modern man has created don’t exist), because this has been the quarter of a century long focus of Breast Cancer Awareness Month. And since there is no known cure either, raising money for future research, promoting mammography at each and every step, and now, removing healthy breasts before a problem occurs, is all you can do.

But Rose’s story took an even stranger twist when her genetic tests revealed that she was, in fact,negative for the breast cancer susceptibility genes, BRCA1/BRCA2. The would-be genetic inevitability of cancer implied by her positive family history of the disease, and her disturbing choice to have her breasts removed in order to prevent disease within them, was therefore strictly theoretical, unsubstantiated by empirical evidence. And yet, despite these negative findings, she stated that she still plans to have them removed sometime after the upcoming Miss America contest.

It turns out that Rose’s risk for breast disease may indeed have been inherited through her family in the form of irrational fears passed down by her father. As reported by the Washington Post:

Allyn Rose’s father first suggested the mastectomy when she was a freshman in college. It was a couple years after her mother had succumbed to breast cancer; genetic testing and a long, sad family history of early deaths indicated that Rose, too, was at a high risk.

But she resisted.

‘I thought, I just got my breasts! I’m young, I’m beautiful. I didn’t want to do this.’ the southern Maryland native, 24, told us Monday. ‘My dad looked me in the face and said ‘You’re going to end up dead just like your mother.’

The process of grieving can feel like drowning. In our desperate flailing to be saved from the pain of loss, we can unwittingly pull our still remaining loved ones under with us.

Rose’s father does not know better. He has not been told the truth about breast cancer, or cancer in general. Cancer does not just “happen to us” because we have inherited “bad genes,” or simply the byproduct of a series of chaotic mutational events within our DNA; rather, cancer is something the body does to survive an increasingly toxic environment, diet and lifestyle. Prevention is not equivalent to cutting out the organ or organs that ‘could’ be afflicted. Nor is it equivalent to compressing and irradiating the breasts with highly carcinogenic x-rays to “detect cancer early.”

Also, abnormal breast findings, such as ductal carcinoma in situ(DCIS), and which is the primary form of “cancer” detected through mammography, do not imply an irrepressible trajectory towards death. To the contrary, the latest NEJM finding indicates that the vast majority of such ‘abnormalities’ would never progress to cause harm in women. To the contrary, by “treating” such findings as if they are cancer, the treatment itself drives those tissues into greater malignancy, and through the profound psychological and physiological abuse overtreatment produces, creates the ideal conditions for cancers to proliferate or recur.

Of course, Rose’s decision is being upheld by many within the mainstream media as a perfectly sane, if not also courageous act — one, perhaps, to be emulated by countless other young women in the future who will never be told the truth about the preventable causes of breast cancer, or all that can be done naturally to prevent and treat it.

Resources

1 Cheryl Lin, Tina Sasaki, Aaron Strumwasser, Alden Harken. The case against BRCA 1 and 2 testing.Surgery. 2011 Jun ;149(6):731-4. PMID: 21621683

This article first appeared at GreenMedInfo. Please visit to access their vast database of articles and the latest information in natural health.

ACLU Challenges Warrantless Wiretapping

0

Stephen Lendman, rinf.com |

Throughout its history, America always governed extrajudicially. Post-9/11, it became more repressive than ever. Modern technology makes it easy.

Big Brother has lots of ways to spy. It can be done from space, eyes in the sky on drones, secret agents, neighborhood snoops, or electronic monitoring of phones, emails, and other personal communications.

There’s no way to hide. Privacy no longer exists. Constitutional rights are null and void. Practically anything government wants to know about us can be found out secretly without our knowledge or consent.

What better definition of a police state. Challenging what free societies don’t tolerate isn’t easy. The ACLU is trying. The 2008 FISA Amendments Act (FISAAA) authorizes government to spy globally for alleged national security reasons.

The 1978 Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act (FISA) authorized surveillance relating to “foreign intelligence information” between “foreign powers” and “agents of foreign powers.”

It restricts spying on US citizens and residents to those engaged in espionage in America and territory under US control. No longer. Today anything goes.

NSA uses this authority abusively. In the 1960s, Senator Frank Church warned that its “capability at any time could be turned around on the American people, and no American would have any privacy left, such is the capability to monitor everything: telephone conversations, telegrams, it doesn’t matter.”

“There would be no place to hide.” Presidents could “impose total tyranny, and there would be no way to fight back.” He warned us, but we didn’t listen.

America today is a total surveillance society. Obama officials claim no court or judge can challenge them. What they say goes. Governing this way is called tyranny.

Bush administration officials went all out to keep information on their program secret. At first they succeeded. Later what they authorized was revealed.

FISAA established a massive warrantless wiretapping program. It violates constitutional and statute laws with impunity. Congressional investigations and lawsuits haven’t stopped it.

The FISA Amendments Act (FISAAA) granted telecom companies retroactive immunity. They spy freely on US citizens. NSA intercepts millions of online, phone, and other communications. Everyone is vulnerable globally.

Everything NSA does is classified and secret. It menaces freedom. It’s unaccountable. It’s shielded from prosecution.

Given today’s technological capabilities, it’s more dangerous than anyone could have imagined decades earlier. Big Brother expanded exponentially. Fourth Amendment protections were gutted. Freedom hangs by a thread.

The ACLU fought back. It faces stiff headwinds. It’s challenging FISAAA’s constitutionality. It’s doing it on behalf of a group of lawyers, journalists, labor advocates, and human rights groups.

They fear their unjustifiable foreign and domestic monitoring of privileged communications. Witnesses and sources used deserve confidentiality. Lawyers and journalists are obligated to provide it.

In 2009, a district court dismissed the case on the grounds that ACLU clients couldn’t prove they were being monitored. In 2011, the Second Circuit Court of Appeals ruled their case has merit.

It rejected Washington’s Catch-22 argument about not needing to identify individuals it’s monitoring. Claiming only persons aware they’re being watched may challenge the legitimacy of doing it doesn’t wash.

Last May, the Supreme Court took the case. On October 29, justices heard arguments in Amnesty et al v. Clapper: FISA Amendments Act Challenge

ACLU lawyers challenged government authority. At issue they said is a “narrow one: whether our clients have legal ‘standing’ to challenge the law. But it is also about the ability of the executive and legislative branches to insulate a policy from meaningful review.”

ACLU deputy legal director, Jameel Jaffer, argued the case. “We were pleased with today’s argument,” she said. “The court seemed appropriately skeptical of the government’s attempts to shield this sweeping surveillance law from meaningful judicial review.”

“The justices seemed appropriately sympathetic to lawyers, journalists and human rights researchers who are forced to take burdensome precautionary measures because of the law.”

On October 29, ACLU National Security Project Legal Fellow Mitra Ebadolahi headlined “Today at the Supreme Court: The Right to Challenge Warrantless Wiretapping,” saying:

At issue are fundamental constitutional rights. Justices heard Jaffer’s powerful argument. “For example, David Nevin has served as defense lawyer for accused terrorists.”

He needs secure telephone and online communications with “experts, witnesses, family members, and his clients abroad.”

It’s essential to building an effective defense. Lawyers are also obligated to assure confidentiality for cooperating witnesses and other sources. Their profession ethically binds them. The same holds for journalists.

Government lawyers argued that ACLU clients don’t know for sure they’re being surveilled. Moreover, identities of people spied on is secret. National security requires they not be identified or disclosed. As a result, plaintiff’s suit has no merit.

Several justice “appeared rightfully troubled by this Kafkaesque position, expressing concern that, under the government’s interpretation, no one would be able to challenge the law–ever.”

Justice Breyer said risk and certainty are just matters of degree. “It might not be a storm tomorrow. I mean, you know, nothing is certain,” he explained

Justice Antonin Scalia disagreed. He claimed the case lacks “standing.” In other words, plaintiffs can’t prove they’re monitored or harmed. According to the ACLU:

“The government theory of standing would render real injuries nonjusticiable and insulate the government’s surveillance activities from meaningful judicial review.”

Scalia and like-minded ideologues argue for “unitary executive” authority. Chalmers Johnson called it a “ball-faced assertion of presidential supremacy dressed up in legal mumbo jumbo.”

All despots claim power they’re unjustified to have. Judicial ideologues support them. Scalia is one of the worst. Obama needs four more like him to prevail.

Fundamental constitutional rights are at stake. At issue also is a “proper balance of power within our constitutional democracy–specifically, the crucial duty our judiciary can, and must, fulfill in safeguarding and enforcing those rights.”

In a CNN.com op-ed, Jaffer and Alex Abdo said:

“The government’s argument is really about the role of the judiciary in patrolling the boundaries between the lawful measures that the executive should take in the defense of national security, and the unconstitutional and effectively unbridled discretion the government now has to acquire Americans’ international communications.”

“Whatever one’s views of the legality of the FISA Amendments Act, the government’s efforts to shield the law from any meaningful judicial review should be profoundly disturbing to all Americans.”

Fundamental law alone protects us. Obama wants unchallenged dictatorial powers. How many supporters know what they voted for? How many realize their mistake?

Equity and justice depend on rejecting duopoly power. Choosing one of its two candidates perpetuates what no one should accept. They got it for four more years. Don’t bet they’ll be wiser next election.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “How Wall Street Fleeces America: Privatized Banking, Government Collusion and Class War”

http://www.claritypress.com/Lendman.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

Israel Signals Hardline Policy Intentions

0

Stephen Lendman, rinf.com |

Observers thinking Palestinians gained from Pillar of Cloud might think again.

Nothing changed. Hardline Netanyahu policies continue. Expect worse ahead. Palestinian peace, reconciliation and unity advocates are murdered or arrested.

Qassem brigades leader Ahmed Jabari negotiated a truce agreement draft. Ways for establishing ceasefires in case of future flare-ups were included.

Jabari was working with Egypt to establish permanent peace. Israel murdered him to prevent it. Peace, stability, and Palestinian unity defeat its agenda. Conflict and violence are prioritized.

Rogue states need enemies to justify policies. Israel’s include crimes of war and against humanity. They rage against soft targets. Tougher ones require US intervention. Israel prefers riding shotgun.

When enemies don’t exist, they’re invented. Hamas is a convenient one. So are Iran, Syria, and Hezbollah.

Achieving regional hegemony depends on inventing enemies, destroying major ones, and eliminating rivals various ways. Balkanizing some into weak statelets substitutes for full-scale war.

Israel’s longstanding strategy calls for dividing the entire region along ethnic and sectarian lines. It wants easily controlled satellites.

In 1982, Israeli Ministry of Foreign Affairs senior advisor Oded Yinon published “A Strategy for Israel in the 1980s.”

Longtime Israeli academic, activist, analyst, and outspoken critic Israel Shahak (1933 – 2001) translated, edited, and retitled it “The Zionist Plan for the Middle East.”

Israel modeled it after the Ottoman Empire’s Millet (or nation) system. It functioned by letting local authorities govern confessional communities with separate ethnic identities.

Israel wants the region ruled this way. Peace and stability defeat its agenda. Great pains are made to prevent them. Jabari was murdered for that reason. Palestinian divisions and besieging Gaza serve the same purpose.

On November 21, Israel arrested at least 55 Palestinians. Dozens of others followed. Many were Hamas, Islamic Jihad, and Popular Front for the Liberation of Palestine members. Victims committed no crimes.

At issue is preventing peace and stability from erupting. Dr. Mahmoud Ramahi was targeted. It wasn’t the first time. He’s both anesthesiologist and politician.

He serves as Palestinian Legislative Council (PLC) Secretary-General. He belongs to the wrong party. His Change and Reform Bloc works cooperatively with Hamas.

On November 10, 2010, he was arrested at home pre-dawn. Administrative detention uncharged followed. He was targeted for brokering PA/Hamas reconciliation. He also belonged to the wrong party.

On May 10, 2011, his detention was renewed for six months. On November 10, it was renewed for another six months. He was imprisoned until July 4, 2012.

On December 16, 1992, he was first arrested, detained, brutally interrogated for four months, tortured, and imprisoned for 28 months. He was targeted for being affiliated with Hamas. On May 14, 1995, he was released.

On August 20, 2006, he was arrested again. Earlier, his home was raided and ransacked multiple times. Computers, cell phones, and other personal possessions were confiscated. His children’s ID documents were taken.

He was targeted for belonging to the Change and Reform Bloc (CRB). In February 2007, Israel declared it illegal for being affiliated with Hamas.

Other Hamas and CRB officials were also arrested. Their crime was belonging to the wrong party. Extra harshness was imposed for winning PLC seats.

Ramahi was imprisoned for another 28 months. On March 31, 2009, he was released.

On November 25, Haaretz contributor Amira Hass discussed him. Her article headlined “Guilty of the crime of pushing for Palestinian unity.”

Last week Ramahi and other Hamas-affiliated PLC members were arrested. Days earlier, he said all Hamas anti-war West Bank protesters knew they risked arrest.

Ramahi had another cross to bear. He actively pursued Hamas/Fatah reconciliation. Israel arrested him and others involved to prevent it. Doing so warned activists not to try.

Hass spoke to Ramahi earlier. He said:

“Israel and the United States are preventing the PA from reaching reconciliation with Hamas. It’s in Israel’s interest not to prevent this reconciliation.”

“Israelis don’t listen to us. They come to talk to us once we are in prison. They send us people from the Ministry of Foreign Affairs.”

“Last time I refused. I said that I don’t negotiate when I’m under detention. When I get out we’ll talk, you and I.”

He believes unity benefits Israel. Perhaps he doesn’t understand longstanding Israeli plans explained above.

“We will rehabilitate Gaza and the West Bank and the society that is divided due to the political rift,” he said.

“We know that these changes are possible because change is taking place in the world. We think that some day Israel will accept the two-state solution. Otherwise it won’t continue to exist.”

“If there’s a national unity government, we’ll support (Abbas) in his policy of obtaining the rights of that state. Strengthened, (he’ll) negotiate with Israel about implementing the UN resolutions.”

“That’s preferable to what exists now. Hamas hasn’t said that it wants a two-state solution, but it didn’t object.”

“When (Hamas founder) Sheikh Yassin said in 1999 that a Palestinian state would be established within the 1967 borders, he in effect said that there’s a second state within the 1948 borders.”

“(It’s often asked) whether there are ties between the two states. We won’t discuss ties now. When the state is established, it will discuss whether there will be ties with Israel and Jordan.”

Settlements will also be discussed, he added. Future “generations will decide what’s next.”

Israel decided for them. Peace, stability, unity, and reconciliation are verboten.

Ramahi is held administratively uncharged. Attorney Fadi Qawasmi represents him. He said he’ll appeal. Other Hamas MPs condemned his arrest and detention.

Israel wants Palestinian resistance and unity subverted, they said. They urged international support and pressure to stop Israel from “killing Palestinian legitimacy.” They also want other detained PLC members released.

Palestinian arrests and detentions uncharged violate Fourth Geneva’s Article 33. It states:

“No protected person may be punished for an offense he or she has not personally committed. Collective penalties and likewise all measures of intimidation or of terrorism are prohibited.”

Other political arrests included:

PLC Hamas-connected members Basem al-Za’areer, Imad Nofal, Ryad Radad, Fathi Kar’awi, and Yasser Mansour.

Former al-Sammou village mayor Jamal Abul-Jadayel was arrested. So were Islamic Jihad members Ja’far Izz-Eddin, Mohammad Shibany, Tariq Hussain (Qa’dan), and Tamer Saba’na.

Other Palestinians thought to be Hamas members, affiliated with it, or members of other resistance groups were also apprehended.

Arrests occurred after memorandum of understanding terms were agreed. Doing so constitutes punitive reprisals. They help subvert Palestinian unity. They also signal harsher measures coming.

On November 26, former Israeli politician/diplomat/US ambassador Moshe Arens headlined his Haaretz op-ed “Operation Pillar of Defense: mission not accomplished,” saying:

Unfinished business remains. Southern Israeli residents remain vulnerable. Gaza rockets and missiles can target half of Israel. Many remain despite eight days of bombing and shelling.

Reduced supplies will be substantially replenished. Before long, “it will be difficult to observe a (significant) change in the security situation compared to what existed before the operation.”

Air attacks fell short, said Arens. Ground operations are needed. He’s not alone. Many Israeli hardliners want more done to complete what air attacks couldn’t accomplish.

They urge greater slaughter and mass destruction than already caused. American/Israeli Professor/Foundation for Constitutional Democracy president Paul Eidelberg discussed 10 reasons why ceasefire won’t work.

Only one is central. His list omitted it. Israel won’t tolerate it. It spurns peace and nonviolence. It’s just a matter of time before conflict again erupts. Palestinian victims will be blamed like always.

Other hardline Israeli supporters and citizens share Eidelberg’s mindset. It’s inflexible, incorrigible, and racist.

“Arab-Islamic culture is strictly authoritarian,” he claims. Saying so is like calling all Israelis and Americans warmongers. Views of ordinary people in all societies often differ vastly from ruling authorities. Perhaps Eidelberg forgot.

Other reasons he cited are hopelessly misguided. Israel is democratic, he claims. It pursues peace. Arab-Islamic cultures are violent. They oppose it.

Jeffersonian democracy defines Israel. “Islam is based on absolutism.”

“(G)enuine and abiding peace between Israel and its Arab-Islamic neighbors is not possible. Those who think otherwise live in denial, or in Alice-in Wonderland.”

“Israel’s ruling elites need a crash course on statecraft, with emphasis on Machiavelli, The Prince.”

“Unlike Muslim leaders, Israeli prime ministers are not warriors; they abhor bloodshed.”

Imagine what Eidelberg teaches students. Imagine what they learn in his classes. Try imagining why anyone would choose them. Truth is turned on its head.

Eidelberg needs a crash course in Islamic tenets. Christianity, Judaism and Islam share common roots and beliefs.

The Koran teaches love, not hate; peace, not violence; charity, not selfishness; and tolerance, not terrorism.

Its five pillars include profession of faith, prayer five times daily, fasting during Ramadan, charity, and performing the Hajj pilgrimage to Mecca at least once in a lifetime for those able to afford it.

He also needs tutoring on Zionism. Either its violent ideology escapes him, or he suppresses what he knows.

It claims Jewish supremacy, specialness and uniqueness as God’s chosen people. It’s contemptuous of moral values, ethical principles, and inviolable rules of law.

It advocates strength through militarism, intimidation, and naked aggression. It disdains peaceful coexistence. It calls diplomacy and nonviolence four-letter words.

It’s a monster consuming humanity. Israel is its most belligerent exponent. Like America, it lives by the sword. One day, it may hasten their demise.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “How Wall Street Fleeces America: Privatized Banking, Government Collusion and Class War”

http://www.claritypress.com/Lendman.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

Anonymised data doesn’t guarantee your privacy

0

Data anonymisation does not have to provide a 100 per cent guarantee to individuals’ privacy in order for it to be lawful for organisations to disclose the information, the UK’s data protection watchdog has said.

The view of the Information Commissioner’s Office (ICO), detailed in a new code of practice (108-page/2.15MB PDF) on anonymisation it has published, is that organisations that anonymise personal data can disclose that information even if there is a “remote” chance that the data can be matched with other information and lead to individuals being identified.

The ICO said that organisations that take action to mitigate the risk of anonymised data being used to identify individuals will be considered to have complied with the Data Protection Act (DPA) even if that action cannot eradicate the threat of the data being used to identify someone. The Act “does not require anonymisation to be completely risk free,” it added.

The data protection authority in Hamburg, known for its strong stance on privacy issues, told Out-Law.com that it too acknowledged that the “re-identification” of individuals, achieved from matching anonymised data with other information in the public domain or held by others, was impossible to prevent in all cases.

“Our general stance towards anonymisation is not far off of that of our British colleagues,” a spokesman for the Hamburg authority said. “German privacy law defines ‘rendering anonymous’ as ‘the alteration of personal data so that information concerning personal or material circumstances cannot be attributed to an identified or identifiable natural person or that such attribution would require a disproportionate amount of time, expense and effort’. It is therefore acknowledged that the absolute impossibility for re-identification in practice cannot always be achieved. Obviously this is addressed by the ICO in terms of a ‘remote risk’ remaining.”

Data protection law specialist Marc Dautlich of Pinsent Masons said that “The code is a very important one and has been published at a time when the Government is increasingly seeking to liberalise public sector-held datasets for research purposes, and when the private sector is increasingly exploiting data mining techniques for commercial purposes.”

In a statement the watchdog announced that a new “consortium” involving the University of Manchester, the University of Southampton, the Office for National Statistics and the government’s new Open Data Institute (ODI), would set up a new UK Anonymisation Network (UKAN). The Network will “enable sharing of good practice related to anonymisation, across the public and private sector” with information provided on a website, in case studies, clinics and seminars.

“What practical impact the new UK Anonymisation Network will have remains to be seen, but it could be a potentially valuable resource for organisations seeking guidance on their own anonymisation schemes,” Dautlich added.

Under its code, the ICO said that it was not always possible for personal data to be anonymised. It said that it was therefore “paramount” that data which could not be anonymised was kept secure. It said, though, that it is generally “easier” to disclose anonymised data than it is to disclose personal data because “fewer legal restrictions will apply”.

“There is clear legal authority for the view that where an organisation converts personal data into an anonymised form and discloses it, this will not amount to a disclosure of personal data,” the ICO said. “This is the case even though the organisation disclosing the data still holds the other data that would allow re-identification to take place.”

The ICO said that it can be difficult for organisations to know whether data they have anonymised can still be classed as ‘personal data’. It said, though, that a High Court ruling had made clear that “the risk of identification must be greater than remote and reasonably likely for information to be classed as personal data under the DPA”.

In “borderline” cases, organisations will have to assess the individual “circumstances of the case” to determine whether there is too great a risk that disclosing anonymised data would lead to individuals being identified, the ICO said.

“In borderline cases where the consequences of re-identification could be significant eg, because they would leave an individual open to damage, distress or financial loss, organisations should: seek data subject consent for the disclosure of the data, explaining its possible consequences; adopt a more rigorous form of risk analysis and anonymisation,” the ICO said. “In some scenarios, data should only be disclosed within a properly constituted closed community and with specific safeguards in place. In some particularly high-risk situations, it may not even be possible to share within a closed community.”

In cases where the risk of data matching is high, organisations can reduce that risk by only disclosing “parts of databases” in order to make “direct linkage more difficult”.

Under freedom of information (FOI) laws, organisations asked to disclose anonymised data will have to consider whether a “particular member of the public” has additional information that “could allow data to be combined to produce information that relates to and identifies a particular individual — and that is therefore personal data,” the watchdog added.

The ICO said that organisations will generally not require the consent of individuals to disclose anonymised data, but warned that it may not always be appropriate to disclose such information if there is a risk that an “educated guess” can be made as to the identity of the person whose data is anonymised where that “leads to the misidentification of an individual”.

The watchdog laid out a number of different safeguards that organisations should put in place in order to limit the access of people to anonymised datasets. It added that organisations anonymising personal information “need an effective and comprehensive governance structure” and that they should carry out “re-identification testing … to detect and deal with re-identification vulnerabilities”.

The ICO said that organisations that adhere to its recommendations should have a “reasonable degree of confidence” that their “publication of anonymised data will not lead to an inappropriate disclosure of personal data — through ‘re-identification’”.

Technology law specialist Luke Scanlon of Pinsent Masons, the law firm behind Out-Law.com, said that the watchdogs’ stance on anonymisation was “practical” but questioned whether it was consistent with wording in the EU’s Data Protection Directive.

A recital of the EU’s Data Protection Directive states that the “principles of protection must apply to any information concerning an identified or identifiable person” and that to “determine whether a person is identifiable, account should be taken of all the means likely reasonably to be used either by the controller or by any other person to identify the said person”.

However, the recital also states that “the principles of protection shall not apply to data rendered anonymous in such a way that the data subject is no longer identifiable”. It further adds that “codes of conduct … may be a useful instrument for providing guidance as to the ways in which data may be rendered anonymous and retained in a form in which identification of the data subject is no longer possible”.

“The recital appears to place the non-identifiability of the individual in absolute terms,” Scanlon said. “There is no indication in the recital which indicates that the principles of protection would not apply if an individual is only no longer ‘reasonably’ identifiable or in circumstances where there is a remote risk of identifiability.”

“Organisations therefore should remain cautious when using anonymised data, particularly if the use of such data would be in European jurisdictions other than the UK, wherever a conclusion can be drawn that there is a remote risk of identifiability,” he said.

The privacy watchdog for the German region of Schleswig-Holstein — the Independent Centre for Privacy Protection (ICPP) — which has been vocal on a number of data protection issues, told Out-Law.com that it was its view that both present and future risks must be taken into account when assessing the decision to disclose anonymised data.

“The [German] legal commentary argues that in some cases (similar to the ICO) 100 per cent anonymity is not possible to achieve, but that the risk has to be minimal,” Marit Hansen, deputy Privacy & Information Commissioner in Schleswig-Holstein said.

“Further, the legal commentary demands that the available knowledge (whether lawfully available or not) has to be taken into account for assessing the possible risks of re-identification. It also stresses that the assessment result may change over time, eg, if new methods become available to link information,” she said.

“This may influence the way how to treat anonymised data: If you publish data on the internet that have been anonymised and are sufficiently protected against re-identification at one point in time, a later assessment may reveal that the protection may not be regarded adequate anymore. But then harm may already be done, and it would not be sufficient to delete the data (copies may be available, the re-identification may have been conducted already). This means that in our point of view anonymisation does not only mean to assess the risk once, but also to think of future risks, act accordingly (eg, to refrain from publishing these data on the internet) and assess the risk again if the conditions may have changed,” Hansen said.

Copyright © 2012, Out-Law.com

Privacy groups respond to Facebook policy changes

0

Peter Gothard |

Two internet privacy groups have responded to Facebook’s published intentions to share its data with recently-acquired Instagram, as well as eliminate a user voting system and loosen restrictions on who can email users with unsolicited material.

The Electronic Privacy Information Center (EPIC) and the Center for Digital Democracy (CDD) have penned a letter addressed directly to Facebook’s founder, Mark Zuckerberg.

The letter reminds Zuckerberg that, in 2009, Facebook agreed to introduce a user voting system that meant if 7,000 users voted against a certain proposed motion in the site’s governance, the motion would not be able to go ahead.

An announcement by Facebook on 21 November states that Facebook “found that the voting mechanism, which is triggered by a specific number of comments, actually resulted in a system that incentivised the quantity of comments over their quality”.

“Therefore,” continues the post, “we’re proposing to end the voting component of the process in favor of a system that leads to more meaningful feedback and engagement.”

The letter to Zuckerberg argues that, “although Facebook’s existing voting mechanism set an unreasonably high participation threshold, scrapping the mechanism altogether raises questions about Facebook’s willingness to take seriously the participation of Facebook users.”

The letter also raises concerns at Facebook’s intentions to shift privacy boundaries between it and its acquisitions with the proposed “Affiliates” section of the site, which Facebook more specifically states will mean the company “may share information we receive with businesses that are legally part of the same group of companies that Facebook is part of, or that become part of that group.”

“Facebook’s proposed changes implicate the terms of a recent settlement with the Federal Trade Commission,” reads the letter, referring to the FTC’s August decision to allow Facebook to buy up the photo sharing app, when Facebook had made clear an intention to let Facebook and Instagram continue as separate concerns.

“The settlement prohibits Facebook from misrepresenting the extent to which it maintains the privacy or security of covered information,” says the letter.

Finally, the advocacy groups’ letter questions Facebook’s mention of “replacing the ‘Who can send you Facebook messages’ setting with new filters for managing incoming messages”.

“As it exists now, the Data Use Policy grants users the right to ‘control who can start a message thread’ with users, with the provision that ‘if they include others on that message, the others can reply too,'” reads the letter.

However, EPIC and CCD suggest that the proposed revision would “eliminate” this control, introducing a likelihood “to increase the amount of spam that users receive”.

“Facilitating spam violates users’ privacy and security, as many Facebook scams are accomplished through the messaging feature,” the groups argue.

Since its IPO in May, Facebook has faced the ongoing problem of monetising its business plan in an online world that is both turning increasingly to mobile, making it harder to advertise to, while at the same time becoming ever more aware of how personal data silos such as social networking sites can represent security risks.

While it is understandable that Facebook will want to share information with acquired companies such as Instagram — for which it paid $1bn shortly before its IPO — such decisions carry increasing weight.

With Google in a constant battle with bodies such as the EU over its privacy policies, Facebook — no matter how public and apparently clear its intentions — cannot afford to change the rules too often as the spotlight on personal information harvesting becomes ever brighter.

Bruce Schneier explains why the TSA is a $1 trillion failure

0

Those of us who’ve been writing about the TSA for a few years are well familiar with security expert Bruce Schneier. He and others like him, people who actually study actual security, using data, risk assessment, statistical analysis, and empirical evidence, are a balm to our weary psyches, frayed and exhausted as they are from trying to correct the steady flow of misinformation, disinformation, and specious arguments put forth by the TSA and its apologists.

Ah, but the lizard part of the brain isn’t content. It responds easily to fear; in fact, it revels in it.

So when presented with, for example, an argument based on logic, that primitive part of the brain doesn’t want to hear it. It takes over the rational parts of the brain and shuts out reason and logic.

Other research has found this as well.

That’s why it’s so difficult — indeed often impossible — to sway people who are convinced that the TSA’s security theater (a term Schneier coined, by the way) is Keeping Us Safe.

In an article for Vanity Fair, reporter Charles Mann goes on an airport walkabout with Schneier, who points out, as he has done so many times before, all the pointless procedures that the TSA has put in place, to the tune of billions of dollars, no less.

Will he convince anyone not already up on this stuff? Doubtful, but here are some excerpts anyway:

The terrorist’s goal isn’t to attack an airplane specifically; it’s to sow terror generally. “You spend billions of dollars on the airports and force the terrorists to spend an extra $30 on gas to drive to a hotel or casino and attack it,” Schneier says. “Congratulations!”

Sowing terror is relatively easy. Say “9/11” and watch how quickly people scramble. How eager they are to give up their rights, no matter the psychic or financial cost.

In fact, this “death by a thousand cuts” was explicitly stated by al-Qaeda as its goal. Not to kill thousands or millions of people, but to force the United States to spend more and more and more money in a futile attempt to achieve 100% security.

What the government should be doing is focusing on the terrorists when they are planning their plots. “That’s how the British caught the liquid bombers,” Schneier says. “They never got anywhere near the plane. That’s what you want–not catching them at the last minute as they try to board the flight.”

Indeed, at the airport gate is too late. American intelligence agencies, if they are being intelligent, use the same techniques that have always been used to prevent crime: responsible police work, responsible intelligence gathering. Not shaking down passengers for raspberry jam and snow globes.

To walk through an airport with Bruce Schneier is to see how much change a trillion dollars can wreak. So much inconvenience for so little benefit at such a staggering cost. And directed against a threat that, by any objective standard, is quite modest. Since 9/11, Islamic terrorists have killed just 17 people on American soil, all but four of them victims of an army major turned fanatic who shot fellow soldiers in a rampage at Fort Hood. (The other four were killed by lone-wolf assassins.) During that same period, 200 times as many Americans drowned in their bathtubs. Still more were killed by driving their cars into deer.

Forget deer. There are 35,000 traffic fatalities every year in this country. How many people who defend the TSA do you think have stopped driving? Or taking baths?

“It’s infuriating,” he said, waving my fraudulent boarding pass to indicate the mass of waiting passengers, the humming X-ray machines, the piles of unloaded computers and cell phones on the conveyor belts, the uniformed T.S.A. officers instructing people to remove their shoes and take loose change from their pockets. “We’re spending billions upon billions of dollars doing this–and it is almost entirely pointless. Not only is it not done right, but even if it was done right it would be the wrong thing to do.”

Sing it, Bruce.

Those of us who live in the evidence-based world are content to sing along, for our own satisfaction if nothing else. For we know that millions of people don’t live here.

Instead, they inhabit the Land of Denial. Judging by its popularity, it must be a very happy place.

This is a reprint of a post that was originally published at TSA News

Occupy Long Beach Strikes at Walmart on Black Friday, November 23, 2012

0

Natasha Petrosova |

On Friday, November 23, Occupy Long Beach protests in front of the Walmart store located in Down Town Long Beach in support of Walmart employees. The activists demand higher wages, health care benefits, better hours for Walmart employees.

The demonstration began with peaceful meditation and sign making. None of the Walmart employees joined the strike and couple workers reported that they were threatened to be fired on the spot if they joined the strike or engaged in a conversation with any members of the Occupy group.

The demonstration was peaceful until the police saw nineteen year old Honor O’Kane drawing on the ground. O’Kane was taking aside while the members of Occupy group were trying to persuade the police that drawing on the ground with a chalk was not illegal and can not be confused with a graffiti created by spray paint.

As a result, Vivian Price, a professor of labor studies at CSUDH was arrested and charged with resisting arrest and obstruction of justice. Price was handcuffed and taken to the Long Beach Police Department.

see pictures

The New World Order Prototype Citizen

0

As I already showed in these columns, Alexis de Tocqueville is the best commentator of the modern agenda of alienation, giving aristocratic critics to the American matrix which starts its nuisances at the beginning of the nineteenth century. Tocqueville foresees a bleak American future for Europe and the whole world. His analyses are as implacable as those of Edgar Poe, a violent opponent to the so-called democratic order, as writers like Hawthorne or Melville.

In his famous book about democracy, Tocqueville describes and explains the destruction of the two victim races of these times, the blacks and the Indians. We shall start by the black slaves:

The Negro of the United States has lost all remembrance of his country; the language which his forefathers spoke is never heard around him; he abjured their religion and forgot their customs when he ceased to belong to Africa, without acquiring any claim to European privileges.

The black slave is thus the prototype of the global citizen desired by the magazine the Economist and the New World Order agenda. He has no past, no family, and no nation:

The Negro has no family; woman is merely the temporary companion of his pleasures, and his children are upon equality with himself from the moment of their birth.

Half the babies born in France have no father nowadays! Today’s parents are their children’s pals! And who knows his babushka in America? Why do you think so many people stroll around in the shopping centres nowadays?

Like the masses of today obsessed by sex, money and fame, driven by pleasures, captivated by the rich and famous storytelling, the American slave adores his masters:

The slave scarcely feels his own calamitous situation… he admires his tyrants more than he hates them, and finds his joy and his pride in the servile imitation of those who oppress him: his understanding is degraded to the level of his soul.

This modern slave or modern man, adds Tocqueville, doesn’t love freedom, for independence is often felt by him to be a heavier burden than slavery. He is just manipulated by his desires, fabricated fantasies and material needs. As if he has inspired the Prisoner of McGoohan, Tocqueville writes:

A thousand new desires beset him, and he is destitute of the knowledge and energy necessary to resist them: these are masters whom it is necessary to contend with, and he has learnt only to submit and obey. In short, he sinks to such a depth of wretchedness, that while servitude brutalizes, liberty destroys him.

The destruction of the Indians has different meanings. The Blackman symbolised the weak or the poor, the submitted proletarian, the Indian the feudal lord, the warrior, doomed to disappear during the industrial revolution, like the religious man. Marx made the same analysis in his famous manifesto. This man of elite is such sentenced to disappear by the civilization of money-lenders and businessmen:

When the North American Indians had lost the sentiment of attachment to their country; when their families were dispersed, their traditions obscured, and the chain of their recollections broken; when all their habits were changed, and their wants increased beyond measure, European tyranny rendered them more disorderly and less civilized than they were before.

A simple animal, or a mere sinner, the man is easily mind-programmed by consumption; and the brave and frugal Indians inevitably fell in front of the new needs and strange goods:

The Europeans introduced amongst the savages of North America fire-arms, ardent spirits, and iron…. Having acquired new tastes, without the arts by which they could be gratified, the Indians were obliged to have recourse to the workmanship of the whites; but in return for their productions the savage had nothing to offer except the rich furs which still abounded in his woods.

Tocqueville in every page of this marvellous and unread book sees the perils of the so-called American civilization. One of these perils is of course pollution and… noise. The noise produced by isolated colons could thus exasperate the Indians, hastening a cruel stroke. Let’s understand the causes of these reactions:

Thousands of savages, wandering in the forests and destitute of any fixed dwelling, did not disturb the beasts of chase; but as soon as the continuous sounds of European labour are heard in their neighbourhood, they begin to flee away, and retire to the West…

The retirement of the game meant for the Indians discombobulated anguish, exhausting migrations and a progressive starving. The race was thus exterminated passively, the invaders needing no such massacres and slaughters as one could believe. This is the same mean Hitler, this great admirer of Anglo-Saxon America, wanted to use in Russia (I say wanted, for the people there resisted more, and so had to be slaughtered by the colonial conqueror until the defeat of the last).

Last but no least: if we contemplate the disastrous cultural balance of this civilization, couldn’t we admit that she is one of the worst ever occurred? Tocqueville admits that the Spaniard conquest of the south continent was horrible; yet the Indians survived, mixed and intertwined with their masters, thus creating the beautiful Hispano-American civilization. You have tens of architectural masterworks and ancient colonial cities in southern America, and how many in the US?

Anyway, and this remark must be underlined at the hour of philanthropic and humanitarian wars anywhere (Palestine, Syria, Libya, Afghanistan… not to mention the past ones), Tocqueville thinks that the American modern way of life (or death) is more destructive than any other. And he had not in mind the McDonald’s, the highways, the desperate suburbs, the shopping malls and the amusement parks!

The Spaniards were unable to exterminate the Indian race by those unparalleled atrocities which brand them with indelible shame, nor did they even succeed in wholly depriving it of its rights; but the Americans of the United States have accomplished this twofold purpose with singular felicity; tranquilly, legally, philanthropically, without shedding blood, and without violating a single great principle of morality in the eyes of the world. It is impossible to destroy men with more respect for the laws of humanity.

Tolkien writes somewhere that a monster (he refers to giant spider Ungoliant) finishes up the job devouring his own flesh. This is what happens to American civilization today. Philanthropically, she is destroying herself. But unhappily humanity who has chosen this way of death, in the East like in the South, is doomed too, since the American matrix has overcome any resistance.

Yet childish technology, money obsession, humanitarian wars and amusement parks will take us nowhere. We need to replace the American way to design a new world.

Nicolas Bonnal

Anonymous hacks school board in retaliation for spying on students

0

RT |

Hackers say they are responsible for taking down the website of a Texas school district in retaliation for a mandatory surveillance program students are being told to comply with.

The website for San Antonio’s Northside Independent School District was unavailable at times throughout the weekend and into Monday after hacktivists claiming to be involved with the Anonymous movement waged an attack to draw attention to a controversial new program that requires students to be monitored with tiny Radio Frequency Identification (“RFID”) chips.

Through the Twitter account @RemainSilentz, one self-described participant in Anonymous confirmed that NISD.net was taken offline late Friday.

“DOWN AND OUT — Boom, track my ass like you track children you pervs,” the user wrote.

Two schools in NISD – John Jay High School and Anson Jones Middle School – began asking students earlier this year to carry RFID-equipped identification cards so that educators can monitor their location on school grounds. The school district says tracking students allows for more accurate attendance figures, and therefore better funding. It hasn’t been welcomed with open arms by students, however, and last week a judge had to intervene and issue a temporary restraining order to prevent the principle from Jay High from expelling sophomore Andrea Hernandez for refusing to wear a badge after the school said participation was mandatory.

“We are conditioning kids to live in a surveillance state,” John W. Whitehead, president of The Rutherford Institute, toldRT on Friday.

Whitehead has been instrumental in helping Hernandez fight to be free from being monitored, and celebrated the issuing of a restraining order. And as more people become aware of cases like hers, he says he hopes there is a chance at holding onto our right to privacy.

“There are going to be people who are going to want to opt out, and we want to protect those people who don’t want to be part of a system that they feel violates their human dignity and their constitutional rights,” he says.

A hearing is scheduled in the coming days to consider a preliminary injunction that will prohibit NISD from making the tracking program mandatory any further, but meanwhile Anonymous has taken matters into their own hands.

“I sincerely hope you have noticed that I have took down your website for a reason, and that reason is stripping away the privacy of students in your school. What was going through your mind when you had this idea?” an Anon using the alias tr1xxyAnon wrote in a statement circulated over the weekend.

After a judge agreed to file an order blocking the expulsion of Hernandez last week, Whitehead wrote, “The court’s willingness to grant a temporary restraining order is a good first step, but there is still a long way to go–not just in this case, but dealing with the mindset, in general, that everyone needs to be monitored and controlled.”

Although only two schools in Texas ask students to use “SmartID” cards at the moment, the success of the program at John Jay and Anson Jones will determine of other facilities in NSID will soon make the badges mandatory.

Court Blocks Suspension of Anti-RFID Student

0

Readers may want to break out the civil liberties pitchforks in response to a new court case against a Texas high school that suspended a student for refusing to wear an ID badge implanted with a location tracking microchip. A court has temporarily blocked The Northside Independent School District from suspending high school sophomore, Andrea Hernandez, for her noncompliance with a neck badge that monitors student movement throughout the campus via a Radio-Frequency Identification (RFID) chip.

According to the Rutherford Institute, the student’s legal civil liberties defense organization, tracking students is about raking in sweet, sweet government cash, since school funding is closely tied to attendance. “School administrators are hoping that if the school district is able to increase attendance by tracking the students’ whereabouts, they will be rewarded with up to $1.7 million from the state government,” the institute said in a statement, referring to the amount of money lost due to unaccounted attendance rates.

Hernandez has objected to the monitoring tag on religious grounds, arguing that the technology is eerily close to the satanic ‘mark of the beast’ alluded to in revelations Revelations 13: 16-18. On Wednesday, a judge granted the student a temporary reprieve from the suspension. “There is something fundamentally disturbing about this school district’s insistence on steamrolling students into complying with programs that have nothing whatsoever to do with academic priorities and everything to do with fattening school coffers,” said Rutherford president, John Whitehead.

The school argues that in addition to location monitoring, the ID card is also necessary for essential services, such as the cafeteria, the library, and getting tickets to extracurricular activities. Apparently, the alluring draw of soggy french fries, homework, and winter formals wasn’t enough for Hernandez to forgo her religious convictions.

Just in case you thought this issue couldn’t get any more interesting, the district did agree to allow Hernandez to remove the chip, in exchange for her father’s public silence.

In essence, the school district thought the family would be cool trading in the First and Fourth Amendments, for the right to education. Given the family’s continued vocal opposition, they were mistaken.

Originally published on TechChrunch

Supporters of Israel Seek to Ban Hamas from Social Media

0

Activist Post | 

Social networks have become an influential part of the information battlefield, especially during uprisings and armed conflicts. In the recent conflict between Israel and Hamas on the Gaza strip, many suggest it was the first war started on Twitter and some even dubbed it the “World’s First Social Media War.”

Much to Israel’s dismay, overwhelming military force cannot win a social media war. The sympathy for Palestinians in Gaza far outnumbered the support for Israel on Twitter and elsewhere.

WATCH THE VIDEO HERE

Seeking a solution to this disproportionate cyber support, Israel sympathizers are lobbying to censor and ban their opposition from using social media weapons. They blockade Palestinians from having most physical goods, why not block them from Twitter as well?

The Hill reports:

Seven House Republicans asked the FBI in September to demand that Twitter take down the accounts of U.S.-designated terrorist groups, such as Hamas, Hezbollah and Somalia’s al Shabaab. The letter to FBI Director Robert Mueller was spearheaded by Rep. Ted Poe (R-Texas), who said Wednesday that the recent events vindicated the request.

‘Allowing foreign terrorist organizations like Hamas to operate on Twitter is enabling the enemy,’ Poe said in an e-mailed statement to The Hill. ‘Failure to block access arms them with the ability to freely spread their violent propaganda and mobilize in their War on Israel.

Anti-American foreign terrorist groups around the world are doing the same thing every day. The FBI and Twitter must recognize sooner rather than later that social media is a tool for the terrorists.’

In addition to these elected officials, a group called Christians United for Israel has encouraged their followers to engage in a letter-writing campaign to demand that Twitter censor Hamas.

“The fact that a terrorist organization like Hamas, with so much Israeli and American blood on its hands, can use a service like Twitter is outrageous,” the group wrote in a campaign titled Ban Hamas From Twitter.

The complaint reads uses similar language as the letter by lawmakers to the FBI:

The United States government has designated Hamas as a Foreign Terrorist Organization. Under 18 U.S.C. 2339A, it is illegal for any U.S. Company to provide ‘material support’ to a terrorist organization. This prohibited material support specifically includes ‘services’ and ‘communications equipment.’ By allowing Hamas to have a Twitter account, you are providing it with an important ‘service’ and extremely effective ‘communications equipment’ which are central to its primary mission of terrorizing the Israeli people and using civilian deaths to score political points.

This is not the first time lawmakers have lobbied private companies to censor opposition groups from the Internet. Google recently reported that in general take-down requests and requests for personal data from governments have risen dramatically, with the US making the most demands.

Senator Joe Lieberman has repeatedly lobbied Google to ban anti-government and violent rhetoric from their platforms, but only from stated enemies of the West. Of course, Lieberman still wants to be able to advertise bombing Iran through these platforms.

As for the Gaza situation, apparently the Tweets that sparked outrage were those that glorified rocket attacks on Israeli civilians and promulgated pictures of dead children alleged to have been killed by Israeli strikes, Tweets like “#Israel’s military kills #Palestinian children in cold blood in #Gaza.”

To date, there have been no calls for Israel to be banned for the IDF’s incendiary tweets such as “we recommend that no Hamas operatives, whether low level or senior leaders, show their faces aboveground in the days ahead.”

Published by permission of Activist Post

5 Greatest Dangers to a Free Society

0

Ron Paul |

This is an excerpt from Ron’s Farewell to Congress address which was given on November 15, 2012.

What are the greatest dangers that the American people face today and impede the goal of a free society? There are five.

1. The continuous attack on our civil liberties which threatens the rule of law and our ability to resist the onrush of tyranny.

2. Violent anti-Americanism that has engulfed the world. Because the phenomenon of “blow-back” is not understood or denied, our foreign policy is destined to keep us involved in many wars that we have no business being in. National bankruptcy and a greater threat to our national security will result.

3. The ease in which we go to war, without a declaration by Congress, but accepting international authority from the UN or NATO even for preemptive wars, otherwise known as aggression.

4. A financial political crisis as a consequence of excessive debt, unfunded liabilities, spending, bailouts, and gross discrepancy in wealth distribution going from the middle class to the rich. The danger of central economic planning, by the Federal Reserve must be understood.

5. World government taking over local and US sovereignty by getting involved in the issues of war, welfare, trade, banking, a world currency, taxes, property ownership, and private ownership of guns.

Happily, there is an answer for these very dangerous trends.

What a wonderful world it would be if everyone accepted the simple moral premise of rejecting all acts of aggression. The retort to such a suggestion is always: it’s too simplistic, too idealistic, impractical, naïve, utopian, dangerous, and unrealistic to strive for such an ideal.

The answer to that is that for thousands of years the acceptance of government force, to rule over the people, at the sacrifice of liberty, was considered moral and the only available option for achieving peace and prosperity.

What could be more utopian than that myth — considering the results especially looking at the state sponsored killing, by nearly every government during the 20th Century, estimated to be in the hundreds of millions. It’s time to reconsider this grant of authority to the state.

No good has ever come from granting monopoly power to the state to use aggression against the people to arbitrarily mold human behavior. Such power, when left unchecked, becomes the seed of an ugly tyranny. This method of governance has been adequately tested, and the results are in: reality dictates we try liberty.

The idealism of non-aggression and rejecting all offensive use of force should be tried. The idealism of government sanctioned violence has been abused throughout history and is the primary source of poverty and war. The theory of a society being based on individual freedom has been around for a long time. It’s time to take a bold step and actually permit it by advancing this cause, rather than taking a step backwards as some would like us to do.

Today the principle of habeas corpus, established when King John signed the Magna Carta in 1215, is under attack. There’s every reason to believe that a renewed effort with the use of the internet that we can instead advance the cause of liberty by spreading an uncensored message that will serve to rein in government authority and challenge the obsession with war and welfare.

What I’m talking about is a system of government guided by the moral principles of peace and tolerance.

The Founders were convinced that a free society could not exist without a moral people. Just writing rules won’t work if the people choose to ignore them. Today the rule of law written in the Constitution has little meaning for most Americans, especially those who work in Washington DC.

Benjamin Franklin claimed “only a virtuous people are capable of freedom.” John Adams concurred: “Our Constitution was made for a moral and religious people. It is wholly inadequate to the government of any other.”

A moral people must reject all violence in an effort to mold people’s beliefs or habits.

A society that boos or ridicules the Golden Rule is not a moral society. All great religions endorse the Golden Rule. The same moral standards that individuals are required to follow should apply to all government officials. They cannot be exempt.

The ultimate solution is not in the hands of the government.

The solution falls on each and every individual, with guidance from family, friends and community.

The #1 responsibility for each of us is to change ourselves with hope that others will follow. This is of greater importance than working on changing the government; that is secondary to promoting a virtuous society. If we can achieve this, then the government will change.

It doesn’t mean that political action or holding office has no value. At times it does nudge policy in the right direction. But what is true is that when seeking office is done for personal aggrandizement, money or power, it becomes useless if not harmful. When political action is taken for the right reasons it’s easy to understand why compromise should be avoided. It also becomes clear why progress is best achieved by working with coalitions, which bring people together, without anyone sacrificing his principles.

Political action, to be truly beneficial, must be directed toward changing the hearts and minds of the people, recognizing that it’s the virtue and morality of the people that allow liberty to flourish.

The Constitution or more laws per se, have no value if the people’s attitudes aren’t changed.

To achieve liberty and peace, two powerful human emotions have to be overcome. Number one is “envy” which leads to hate and class warfare. Number two is “intolerance” which leads to bigoted and judgemental policies. These emotions must be replaced with a much better understanding of love, compassion, tolerance and free market economics. Freedom, when understood, brings people together. When tried, freedom is popular.

The problem we have faced over the years has been that economic interventionists are swayed by envy, whereas social interventionists are swayed by intolerance of habits and lifestyles. The misunderstanding that tolerance is an endorsement of certain activities, motivates many to legislate moral standards which should only be set by individuals making their own choices. Both sides use force to deal with these misplaced emotions. Both are authoritarians. Neither endorses voluntarism. Both views ought to be rejected.

I have come to one firm conviction after these many years of trying to figure out “the plain truth of things.” The best chance for achieving peace and prosperity, for the maximum number of people world-wide, is to pursue the cause of LIBERTY.

If you find this to be a worthwhile message, spread it throughout the land.

Published with permission from Lew Rockwell

The Osama bin Laden Myth

0

Paul Craig Roberts, rinf.com |

The interview below with Osama bin Laden was conducted by the Karachi, Pakistan, daily newspaper, Ummat and published on September 28, 2001, 17 days after the alleged, but unsubstantiated, al Qaeda attack of September 11, 2001, on the World Trade Center twin towers and Pentagon. The interview was sensational. The alleged “mastermind” of 9/11 said that he and al Qaeda had nothing to do with the 9/11 attack. The British Broadcasting Corporation’s World Monitoring Service had the interview translated into English and made public on September 29, 2001.

Osama bin Laden’s sensational denial was not reported by the US print and TV media. It was not investigated by the executive branch. No one in the US Congress called attention to bin Laden’s refusal of responsibility for the greatest humiliation ever inflicted on a superpower.

To check my memory of the lack of coverage, I googled “Osama bin Laden’s interview denying responsibility for 9/11.” Some Internet sites reproduced the interview, but the only mainstream news source that I found was a 1 minute YouTube video from CNN in which the anchor, after quoting an al Jazeera report of bin Laden’s denial, concludes that “we can all weigh that in the scale of credibility and come to our own conclusions.” In other words, bin Laden had already been demonized, and his denial was not credible.

The sensational news was unfit for US citizens and was withheld from them by the american “free press,” a press free to lie for the government but not to tell the truth.

Obviously, if bin Laden had outwitted not only the National Security Agency, the CIA, the Defense Intelligence Agency, and the FBI, but also all 16 US intelligence agencies, all intelligence agencies of Washington’s NATO puppet states, Israel’s Mossad, and in addition the National Security Council, NORAD, US air traffic control, and airport security four times on the same morning, it would be the greatest feat in world history, a movement building feat that would have made al Qaeda the most successful anti-imperialist organization in human history, an extraordinary victory over “the great satan” that would have brought millions of new recruits into al Qaeda’s ranks. Yet the alleged “mastermind” denied all responsibility.

I remember decades ago when a terrorist attack occurred in Europe, whether real or an Operation Gladio http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Operation_Gladio false flag attack, innumerable organizations would claim credit. Perhaps this was the CIA’s way of diverting attention from itself, but it illustrates that every intelligence service understands the value to an organization of claiming credit for a successful attack.Although bin Laden denied responsibility, in 2011 some al Qaeda leaders, realizing the prestige value of the 9/11 attack, claimed credit for the attack and criticized Iranian President Ahmadinejad for questioning the official US story.

Although only a few Americans are aware of the September 28, 2001 interview in which bin Laden states his non-involvement with the 9/11 attacks, many Americans have seen post-2001 videos in which a person alleged to be bin Laden takes credit for the attacks. There are two problems with these videos. Experts have examined them and found them to be fakes, and all of the videos appeared after bin Laden was reported by the Pakistan Observer, the Egyptian press, and Fox News to have died in mid-December, 2001, from lung disease.http://www.foxnews.com/story/0,2933,41576,00.html See also http://www.legitgov.org/News-Bin-Ladens-Death-and-Funeral-December-2001

Bin Laden also suffered from kidney disease. According to a CBS news report on January 28, 2002, Osama bin Laden was hospitalized for dialysis treatment in the Pakistani military hospital in Rawalpindi on September 10, 2001, the day before 9/11. http://www.globalresearch.ca/where-was-osama-on-september-11-2001/3194

Obviously, a man suffering from terminal lung and kidney disease did not survive for another decade to be murdered by a US Navy SEAL team in Abbottabad. A Pakistani TV interview with the neighbor of the alleged “bin Laden compound” exposed the assassination hoax. This sensational interview also went unreported by america’s “free press.” I had the interview translated, and it is available here:
http://www.globalresearch.ca/pakistan-tv-report-contradicts-us-claim-of-bin-laden-s-death/25915See also http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/world-south-asia-13329078

Shortly after the alleged assassination 30 members of the SEAL unit died in a mysterious helicopter crash in Afghanistan, and now we learn that not a single one of the thousands of sailors on the aircraft carrier, the USS Carl Vinson, witnessed bin Laden’s alleged burial at sea from that ship. The press reports with a straight face that for unexplained reasons it was kept secret from the ship’s sailors. This is supposed to be the explanation of the sailors’ emails reporting to family and friends that they witnessed no burial at sea. Some speculate that the SEALs were bumped off before their questions to one another, “Were you on that raid?,” reached outside the unit. Apparently, it doesn’t strike the media or the public as strange that the US government captured and killed the terror mastermind without interrogating him and without keeping any evidence or presenting any witnesses to support the assassination claim.

Adolf Hitler claimed that communists burned down the Reichstag and that Polish troops had crossed the frontier and attacked Germany. With 9/11 americans experienced Washington’s version of these grand lies. An omniscient bin Laden dying from terminal illnesses in distant Afghanistan defeated the American National Security State and drove his attack through the walls of the Pentagon itself, requiring for our defense a “war on terror” that destroyed US civil liberties and financially ruined the country in order to prevent the triumph of a man who died of natural causes in December 2001.

On May 9, 2011, Professor Michel Chossudovsky republished the September 28, 2001, Osama bin Laden interview in Global Research.

Interview with Osama bin Laden. Osama Denies his Involvement in 9/11
By Global Research
Global Research, May 09, 2011
Url of this article:
http://www.globalresearch.ca/interview-with-osama-bin-laden-denies-his-involvement-in-9-11/24697

Global Research Editor’s Note
We bring to the attention of our readers the following text of Osama bin Laden’s interview with Ummat, a Pakistani daily, published in Karachi on September 28, 2001. It was translated into English by the BBC World Monitoring Service and made public on September 29, 2001.

The authenticity of this interview, which is available in recognized electronic news archives, is confirmed.
Osama bin Laden categorically denies his involvement in the 9/11 attacks.

Bin Laden’s statements in this interview are markedly different from those made in the alleged Osama video tapes.

In this interview, Osama bin Laden exhibits an understanding of US foreign policy. He expresses his views regarding the loss of life on 9/11. He also makes statements as to who, in his opinion, might be the likely perpetrator of the September 11 attacks.

This is an important text which has not been brought to the attention of Western public opinion.

We have highlighted key sections of this interview. It is our hope that the text of this interview, published barely a week before the onset of the war on Afghanistan, will contribute to a better understanding of the history of Al Qaeda, the role of Osama bin Laden and the tragic events of September 11, 2001.

Michel Chossudovsky, May 9, 2011

Full text of September 2001 Pakistani paper’s “exclusive” interview with Usamah Bin-Ladin

Ummat (in Urdu), Karachi, 28 September 2001, pp. 1 and 7.http://ummatpublication.com/2012/11/25/

Ummat’s introduction

Kabul: Prominent Arab mojahed holy warrior Usamah Bin-Ladin has said that he or his al-Qa’idah group has nothing to do with the 11 September suicidal attacks in Washington and New York. He said the US government should find the attackers within the country. In an exclusive interview with daily “Ummat”, he said these attacks could be the act of those who are part of the American system and are rebelling against it and working for some other system. Or, Usamah said, this could be the act of those who want to make the current century a century of conflict between Islam and Christianity. Or, the American Jews, who are opposed to President Bush ever since the Florida elections, might be the masterminds of this act. There is also a great possibility of the involvement of US intelligence agencies, which need billions of dollars worth of funds every year. He said there is a government within the government in the United States.

The secret agencies, he said, should be asked as to who are behind the attacks. Usamah said support for attack on Afghanistan was a matter of need for some Muslim countries and compulsion for others. However, he said, he was thankful to the courageous people of Pakistan who erected a bulwark before the wrong forces. He added that the Islamic world was attaching great expectations with Pakistan and, in time of need, “we will protect this bulwark by sacrificing of lives”.

Following is the interview in full detail:

Ummat: You have been accused of involvement in the attacks in New York and Washington. What do you want to say about this? If you are not involved, who might be?

Usamah [Osama bin Laden]: In the name of Allah, the most beneficent, the most merciful. Praise be to Allah, Who is the creator of the whole universe and Who made the earth as an abode for peace, for the whole mankind. Allah is the Sustainer, who sent Prophet Muhammad for our guidance. I am thankful to the Ummat Group of Publications, which gave me the opportunity to convey my viewpoint to the people, particularly the valiant and Momin true Muslim people of Pakistan who refused to believe in lie of the demon.

I have already said that I am not involved in the 11 September attacks in the United States. As a Muslim, I try my best to avoid telling a lie. I had no knowledge of these attacks, nor do I consider the killing of innocent women, children, and other humans as an appreciable act. Islam strictly forbids causing harm to innocent women, children, and other people.

Such a practice is forbidden ever in the course of a battle. It is the United States, which is perpetrating every maltreatment on women, children, and common people of other faiths, particularly the followers of Islam. All that is going on in Palestine for the last 11 months is sufficient to call the wrath of God upon the United States and Israel.

There is also a warning for those Muslim countries, which witnessed all these as a silent spectator. What had earlier been done to the innocent people of Iraq, Chechnya, and Bosnia?

Only one conclusion could be derived from the indifference of the United States and the West to these acts of terror and the patronage of the tyrants by these powers that America is an anti-Islamic power and it is patronizing the anti-Islamic forces. Its friendship with the Muslim countries is just a show, rather deceit. By enticing or intimidating these countries, the United States is forcing them to play a role of its choice. Put a glance all around and you will see that the slaves of the United States are either rulers or enemies of Muslims.

The US has no friends, nor does it want to keep any because the prerequisite of friendship is to come to the level of the friend or consider him at par with you. America does not want to see anyone equal to it. It expects slavery from others. Therefore, other countries are either its slaves or subordinates.

However, our case is different. We have pledged slavery to God Almighty alone and after this pledge there is no possibility to become the slave of someone else. If we do that, it will be disregardful to both our Sustainer and his fellow beings. Most of the world nations upholding their freedom are the religious ones, which are the enemies of United States, or the latter itself considers them as its enemies. Or the countries, which do not agree to become its slaves, such as China, Iran, Libya, Cuba, Syria, and the former Russia as received.

Whoever committed the act of 11 September are not the friends of the American people. I have already said that we are against the American system, not against its people, whereas in these attacks, the common American people have been killed.

According to my information, the death toll is much higher than what the US government has stated. But the Bush administration does not want the panic to spread. The United States should try to trace the perpetrators of these attacks within itself; the people who are a part of the US system, but are dissenting against it. Or those who are working for some other system; persons who want to make the present century as a century of conflict between Islam and Christianity so that their own civilization, nation, country, or ideology could survive. They can be any one, from Russia to Israel and from India to Serbia. In the US itself, there are dozens of well-organized and well-equipped groups, which are capable of causing a large-scale destruction. Then you cannot forget the American Jews, who are annoyed with President Bush ever since the elections in Florida and want to avenge him.

Then there are intelligence agencies in the US, which require billions of dollars worth of funds from the Congress and the government every year. This funding issue was not a big problem till the existence of the former Soviet Union but after that the budget of these agencies has been in danger.

They needed an enemy. So, they first started propaganda against Usamah and Taleban and then this incident happened. You see, the Bush administration approved a budget of 40bn dollars. Where will this huge amount go? It will be provided to the same agencies, which need huge funds and want to exert their importance.

Now they will spend the money for their expansion and for increasing their importance. I will give you an example. Drug smugglers from all over the world are in contact with the US secret agencies. These agencies do not want to eradicate narcotics cultivation and trafficking because their importance will be diminished. The people in the US Drug Enforcement Department are encouraging drug trade so that they could show performance and get millions of dollars worth of budget. General Noriega was made a drug baron by the CIA and, in need, he was made a scapegoat. In the same way, whether it is President Bush or any other US president, they cannot bring Israel to justice for its human rights abuses or to hold it accountable for such crimes. What is this? Is it not that there exists a government within the government in the United Sates? That secret government must be asked as to who made the attacks.

Ummat: A number of world countries have joined the call of the United States for launching an attack on Afghanistan. These also include a number of Muslim countries. Will Al-Qa’idah declare a jihad against these countries as well?

Usamah: I must say that my duty is just to awaken the Muslims; to tell them as to what is good for them and what is not. What does Islam says and what the enemies of Islam want?

Al-Qa’idah was set up to wage a jihad against infidelity, particularly to encounter the onslaught of the infidel countries against the Islamic states. Jihad is the sixth undeclared element of Islam. The first five being the basic holy words of Islam, prayers, fast, pilgrimage to Mecca, and giving alms Every anti-Islamic person is afraid of it. Al-Qa’idah wants to keep this element alive and active and make it part of the daily life of the Muslims. It wants to give it the status of worship. We are not against any Islamic country nor we consider a war against an Islamic country as jihad.

We are in favour of armed jihad only against those infidel countries, which are killing innocent Muslim men, women, and children just because they are Muslims. Supporting the US act is the need of some Muslim countries and the compulsion of others. However, they should think as to what will remain of their religious and moral position if they support the attack of the Christians and the Jews on a Muslim country like Afghanistan. The orders of Islamic shari’ah jurisprudence for such individuals, organizations, and countries are clear and all the scholars of the Muslim brotherhood are unanimous on them. We will do the same, which is being ordered by the Amir ol-Momenin the commander of the faithful Mola Omar and the Islamic scholars. The hearts of the people of Muslim countries are beating with the call of jihad. We are grateful to them.

Ummat: The losses caused in the attacks in New York and Washington have proved that giving an economic blow to the US is not too difficult. US experts admit that a few more such attacks can bring down the American economy. Why is al-Qa’idah not targeting their economic pillars?

Usamah: I have already said that we are not hostile to the United States. We are against the system, which makes other nations slaves of the United States, or forces them to mortgage their political and economic freedom. This system is totally in control of the American Jews, whose first priority is Israel, not the United States. It is simply that the American people are themselves the slaves of the Jews and are forced to live according to the principles and laws laid by them. So, the punishment should reach Israel. In fact, it is Israel, which is giving a blood bath to innocent Muslims and the US is not uttering a single word.

Ummat: Why is harm not caused to the enemies of Islam through other means, apart from the armed struggle? For instance, inciting the Muslims to boycott Western products, banks, shipping lines, and TV channels.

Usamah: The first thing is that Western products could only be boycotted when the Muslim fraternity is fully awakened and organized. Secondly, the Muslim companies should become self-sufficient in producing goods equal to the products of Western companies. Economic boycott of the West is not possible unless economic self-sufficiency is attained and substitute products are brought out. You see that wealth is scattered all across the Muslim world but not a single TV channel has been acquired which can preach Islamic injunctions according to modern requirements and attain an international influence. Muslim traders and philanthropists should make it a point that if the weapon of public opinion is to be used, it is to be kept in the hand. Today’s world is of public opinion and the fates of nations are determined through its pressure. Once the tools for building public opinion are obtained, everything that you asked for can be done.

Ummat: The entire propaganda about your struggle has so far been made by the Western media. But no information is being received from your sources about the network of Al-Qa’idah and its jihadi successes. Would you comment?

Usamah: In fact, the Western media is left with nothing else. It has no other theme to survive for a long time. Then we have many other things to do. The struggle for jihad and the successes are for the sake of Allah and not to annoy His bondsmen. Our silence is our real propaganda. Rejections, explanations, or corrigendum only waste your time and through them, the enemy wants you to engage in things which are not of use to you. These things are pulling you away from your cause.

The Western media is unleashing such a baseless propaganda, which make us surprise but it reflects on what is in their hearts and gradually they themselves become captive of this propaganda. They become afraid of it and begin to cause harm to themselves. Terror is the most dreaded weapon in modern age and the Western media is mercilessly using it against its own people.
 It can add fear and helplessness in the psyche of the people of Europe and the United States. It means that what the enemies of the United States cannot do, its media is doing that. You can understand as to what will be the performance of the nation in a war, which suffers from fear and helplessness.

Ummat: What will the impact of the freeze of al-Qa’idah accounts by the US?

Usamah: God opens up ways for those who work for Him. Freezing of accounts will not make any difference for Al-Qa’idah or other jihad groups. With the grace of Allah, al-Qa’idah has more than three such alternative financial systems, which are all separate and totally independent from each other. This system is operating under the patronage of those who love jihad. What to say of the United States, even the combined world cannot budge these people from their path.

These people are not in hundreds but in thousands and millions. Al-Qa’idah comprises of such modern educated youths who are aware of the cracks inside the Western financial system as they are aware of the lines in their hands. These are the very flaws of the Western fiscal system, which are becoming a noose for it and this system could not recuperate in spite of the passage of so many days.

Ummat: Are there other safe areas other than Afghanistan, where you can continue jihad?

Usamah: There are areas in all parts of the world where strong jihadi forces are present, from Indonesia to Algeria, from Kabul to Chechnya, from Bosnia to Sudan, and from Burma to Kashmir. Then it is not the problem of my person. I am helpless fellowman of God, constantly in the fear of my accountability before God. It is not the question of Usamah but of Islam and, in Islam too, of jihad. Thanks to God, those waging a jihad can walk today with their heads raised. Jihad was still present when there was no Usamah and it will remain as such even when Usamah is no longer there. Allah opens up ways and creates loves in the hearts of people for those who walk on the path of Allah with their lives, property, and children. Believe it, through jihad, a man gets everything he desires. And the biggest desire of a Muslim is the after life. Martyrdom is the shortest way of attaining an eternal life.

Ummat: What do you say about the Pakistan government policy on Afghanistan attack?

Usamah: We are thankful to the Momin and valiant people of Pakistan who erected a blockade in front of the wrong forces and stood in the first file of battle. Pakistan is a great hope for the Islamic brotherhood. Its people are awakened, organized, and rich in the spirit of faith. They backed Afghanistan in its war against the Soviet Union and extended every help to the mojahedin and the Afghan people. Then these are very Pakistanis who are standing shoulder by shoulder with the Taleban. If such people emerge in just two countries, the domination of the West will diminish in a matter of days. Our hearts beat with Pakistan and, God forbid, if a difficult time comes we will protect it with our blood. Pakistan is sacred for us like a place of worship. We are the people of jihad and fighting for the defence of Pakistan is the best of all jihads to us. It does not matter for us as to who rules Pakistan. The important thing is that the spirit of jihad is alive and stronger in the hearts of the Pakistani people.

Copyright Ummat in Urdu, BBC translation in English, 2001

Read about Osama Bin Laden in Michel Chossudovsky’s international best-seller

According to Chossudovsky, the “war on terrorism” is a complete fabrication based on the illusion that one man, Osama bin Laden, outwitted the $40 billion-a-year American intelligence apparatus. The “war on terrorism” is a war of conquest. Globalisation is the final march to the “New World Order”, dominated by Wall Street and the U.S. military-industrial complex.
Order Directly from Global Research

America’s “War on Terrorism”
by Michel
Chossudovsky

Copyright © 2012 Global Research

RINF Video: Obama’s “Leaked” Plan to Legalize Killer Drones is “Self Serving” Propaganda

RINF News reports that a supposed “leak” to the New York Times from the Obama administration claims a new rulebook to legalize the use of killer drones in Muslin countries has been fast-tracked, is as an act of ‘self serving’ propaganda.

The secret plan to blow up the moon

0

It may sound like a plot straight out of a science fiction novel, but a U.S. mission to blow up the moon with a nuke was very real in the 1950s.

At the height of the space race, the U.S. considered detonating an atom bomb on the moon as a display of America’s Cold War muscle.

The secret project, innocuously titled ‘A Study of Lunar Research Flights’ and nicknamed ‘Project A119,’ was never carried out.

However, its planning included calculations by astronomer Carl Sagan, then a young graduate student, of the behavior of dust and gas generated by the blast.

Viewing the nuclear flash from Earth might have intimidated the Soviet Union and boosted U.S. confidence after the launch of Sputnik, physicist Leonard Reiffel told the AP in a 2000 interview.

Reiffel, now 85, directed the inquiry at the former Armour Research Foundation, now part of the Illinois Institute of Technology. He later served as a deputy director at NASA.

Sagan, who later became renowned for popularizing science on television, died in 1996.

The author of one of Sagan’s biographies suggested that he may have committed a security breach in 1959 after revealing the classified project in an academic fellowship application. Reiffel concurred.

Under the scenario, a missile carrying a small nuclear device was to be launched from an undisclosed location and travel 238,000 miles to the moon, where it would be detonated upon impact.

The planners decided it would have to be an atom bomb because a hydrogen bomb would have been too heavy for the missile.

Reiffel said the nation’s young space program probably could have carried out the mission by 1959, when the Air Force deployed inter-continental ballistic missiles.

Military officials apparently abandoned the idea because of the danger to people on Earth in case the mission failed.

The scientists also registered concerns about contaminating the moon with radioactive material, Reiffel said. 

When contacted by the AP, the U.S. Air Force declined to comment on the project.

Originally published on the Daily Mail

When Propaganda Masquerades as News

0

Prof. James F. Tracy |

November 25, 2012 “Information Clearing House” – The week-long Israeli onslaught against largely defenseless Palestinians in Gaza that began on November 14 provides a basis for assessing how Western corporate media whitewash the war crimes of Americas foremost ally in the Middle East. There are three often intertwined techniques consciously applied to such news coveragehistorical context, sourcing, and objectification of the enemy to be targeted. Such practices can readily transform journalism into propaganda that acts to abet such crimes while at the same time allowing journalistic institutions to still claim the mantle of objectivity.

Such methods are on full display in the reportage of Israels most recent operation in Gaza. The use of such propaganda fits within a broader campaign of media disinformation that subdues potential outrageparticularly in the USover Israels overwhelming use of force against an oppressed and vulnerable people, most of whom are civilians.

Meaningful historical context for understanding Israels aggression is almost entirely absent from most Western news coverage of the event. If present, such context would illuminate Israeli government officials true motivations for a military venture that involved 750 airstrikes in four days alone. Operation Pillar of Defense, Nile Bowie observes,

launched just months away from Israels elections, is a calculated component of the Netanyahu governments strategy to topple Hamas and continue absorbing Palestinian territory. Decades of occupation and apartheid have shaped the current scenario; Israel has dehumanized an entire people by seizing their land and forcing them into prison-like ghettoes. Adherents to political Zionism have shown contempt for a genuine political solution to the Palestinian conflict, and the Netanyahu administration is poised to crush all opposition to the Jewish state.[1]

Major Western media focused instead on the Israeli Defense Forces (IDF) November 14 assassination of Hamas leader and Palestinian hero Ahmed al-Jabari, while blatantly omitting the fact that he was also a major figure in negotiations for a long-term truce between Hamas and Israel freshly brokered by Egypt. Hours before Hamas strongman Ahmed Jabari was assassinated, Israels Haaretz newspaper reported the day following the assassination, he received the draft of a permanent truce agreement with Israel, which included mechanisms for maintaining the cease-fire in the case of a flare-up between Israel and the factions in the Gaza Strip.[2]

Apart from Western alternative media such critical details were quickly dispatched to the memory hole. Major news outlets almost systematically relied on Israeli government, military, and intelligence sources to shape its coverage, where Jabari was reviled as the commander of the military wing of Hamas. Reuters, for example, proceeded to source an IDF spokeswoman who proceeded to lay out the dominant frame for the coverage. This is an operation against terror targets of different organizations in Gaza, she declared. Jaabari [sic] had a lot of blood on his hands. Other militant groups including Islamic Jihad were on the target list.[3]

A similar report in the UK Telegraph taking the tack of Israeli official pronouncements beings with the lead, Ahmed Jabari probably didnt event hear the missile that killed him, launched from a drone in the skies over Gaza City as he drove an ordinary saloon car through a quiet residential street.[4] Emphasis on Jabaris military status and alleged criminal and terrorist activities invariably legitimates Israels flagrant barbarism. Further, by holding Jabari up as a dangerous renegade supposedly representative of the Palestinian people the stage is set for attacks on civilians that are much more readily rationalized in the public mind.

Honest contextualization of the crisis leading readerships to greater understanding would involve consulting and publicizing both Israeli and Palestinian perspectivesan undertaking Western journalists are now adept at through their routine discussions with Syrian activists reporting on the alleged atrocities committed by the Syrian Army against Syrian citizens and the gallant Free Syrian Army rebels in that close by theatre.

In the case of Gaza, however, such media are apparently unable to locate well-heeled Palestinian human rights activists exiled in London who receive routine reports from like-minded activists on the ground in Gaza. If such activists are functioning their reports are not seeing the light of day.

Press coverage further underlines what clearly does not exist in Gaza: a parity of deadly force between the IDF and Palestinians and, moreover, Israels victimization at the hands of militant Palestinians. Terms such as clash, conflict, and violence misleadingly suggest exactly these conditions and anticipate permissible actions in a field of battle provided for under the Geneva Conventions. Such terms contrast greatly with aerial attacks using state-of-the-art weaponry on unarmed women and children.

Nevertheless, CBS News presented a timeline of events in Gaza that fit well alongside Israels public relations maneuvers seeking to downplay the IDFs overt aggression. Israel launches Operation Pillar of Defense in response to days of rocket fire outside of Hamas-ruled Gaza. The offensive, which included 20 airstrikes, resulted in the assassination of Ahmed Jabari, the military commander of Hamas.[5]

Another failure to provide adequate context and sourcing involves Israels relentless drive to build more settlements on Palestinian lands under Benjamin Netanyahu and Ehud Barak while firmly refusing Palestinians a right of return. This is one of the most essential and yet misunderstood pieces of the puzzle for understanding Israeli-Palestinian relations. Yet such important historical factors are largely devoid from the prevailing Western media frame through which the Gaza tragedy is viewed.

A LexisNexis Academic search in newspaper and magazine articles and broadcast transcripts for November 13 to November 21 using the terms Israel, Gaza, and Hamas yields 2,203 citations. Of these, less than ten percent (205) mention settlements, while barely two percent reference human rights.

Given the relevant history and facts most observers would conclude that at the end of the day the leading concepts land rights, human dignity, justice and respect must be understood and reconciled before there can be peace in Palestine. The fact that much of the American public especially is misinformed or unaware of the profuse atrocities and injustices committed with its tax dollars and tacitly in its name attests to the continued centrality of propaganda, made all the more effective in its thoroughgoing attempt to masquerade as news.

An Associate Professor of Media Studies at Florida Atlantic University, James Tracy’s work on media history, politics and culture has appeared in a wide variety of academic journals, edited volumes, and alternative news and opinion outlets. Tracy is editor of Union for Democratic Communication’s journal Democratic Communiqué and a contributor to Project Censored’s forthcoming publication Censored 2013: The Top Censored Stories and Media Analysis of 2011-2012. Additional writings and information are accessible at memoryholeblog.com .

Notes

1. Nile Bowie, Gaza and the Politics of Greater Israel, Global Research, November 17, 2012 http://www.globalresearch.ca/gaza-the-politics-of-greater-israel/5312107

2. Nir Hasson, Israeli Peace Activist: Hamas Leader Jabari Killed Amid Talks on Long Term Truce, Haaretz, November 15, 2012 http://www.haaretz.com/news/diplomacy-defense/israeli-peace-activist-hamas-leader-jabari-killed-amid-talks-on-long-term-truce.premium-1.478085

3. Ibrahim Barzak/Reuters, Ahmed Jabari Dead: Hamas Militant Chief Killed in Israeli Airstrike, Huffington Post, November 15, 2012 http://www.huffingtonpost.com/2012/11/14/ahmed-jabari-dead-hamas-militant-chief-israel-airstrike_n_2129308.html

4. Nick Meo, How Israel Killed Ahmed Jabari, Its Toughest Enemy in Gaza, Telegraph, November 17, 2012 http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/middleeast/israel/9685598/How-Israel-killed-Ahmed-Jabari-its-toughest-enemy-in-Gaza.html

5. CBS/Associated Press, Timeline of Recent Israel-Gaza Violence, CBSNews.com, November 20, 2012 http://www.cbsnews.com/8301-202_162-57552203/timeline-of-recent-israel-gaza-violence/

This article was originally posted at Global Research

Copyright © Prof. James F. Tracy, Global Research, 2012

Netanyahu Plans More War

0

Stephen Lendman, rinf.com |

He admitted it. He’s not finished. He has lots more killing and destruction to do. He “will not hesitate to do what is necessary to defend our people,” he said.

In other words, he’ll ignore memorandum of understanding ceasefire terms, maintain Gaza’s siege, manufacture pretexts to eliminate Israeli enemies, and kill Palestinian civilians he calls threats.

On November 25, Mossad-connected DEBKAfile (DF) headlined “Middle East in high suspense for Gaza operation sequels.”

America’s beefing up its regional presence. Washington also approved Patriot missiles for Turkey’s Syrian border. US military crews will man them.

Russian Institute for Oriental Studies expert, Vladimir Kudelev, said deploying them means “no-fly zone” protection. Imposing it circumvents Security Council authority. Doing so is an act of war.

Washington-led NATO incrementally inches closer to full-scale involvement. Russian Foreign Minister Sergei Lavrov fears militarizing the Turkish/Syrian border may spin things out of control.

Libya 2.0 looms. Oriental studies expert Azhdar Kurtov said:

“The Syrian-Turkish border has a sophisticated mountain relief. Under such conditions, combat aviation is a very effective method of fighting against the rebels.”

“Thus, if Turkey deploys the Patriot Missile Air-Defence Systems on its territory, it will be able to block Syria using its own aviation in the border regions on its own territory, which may change the turn of military developments in the region.”

“When the overthrowing of the Gaddafi regime was under way, a no-fly zone was established over Libya. Something like that may be created near the Turkish-Syrian border.”

What affects Syria affects Israel, the region and beyond. Washington, NATO partners and Israel have more belligerence in mind. In other words, more war besides others now raging along with Gaza remaining under Netanyahu’s boot.

In contrast, Gaza cleric Suleiman al-Daya ruled it a sin to violate ceasefire terms, saying:

“Honoring the truce, which was sponsored by our Egyptian brethren, is the duty of each and every one of us. Violating it shall constitute a sin.”

Moussa Abu Marzouk is Hamas Political Bureau Deputy Chairman. He said arming will continue. Self-defense is legal and essential. All governments must protect their people. They’re obligated to do so.

“There is no way to relinquish weapons. (They) protected us, and there is no way to stop obtaining and manufacturing them, said Marzouk.”

He added that Hamas doesn’t oppose Abbas’ November 29 UN nonmember status bid. At the same time, he said “Occupation needs resistance, not negotiations.”

Forty-five years under militarized control proves it. Israel only respects might. Liberation requires long-term struggle.

Hamas also urges healing. It wants reconciliation and national unity with Fatah prioritized. Israel, of course, won’t tolerate undoing divisions it instituted after Hamas’ 2006 electoral victory. Hamas is too valued an enemy to lose.

In a show of good faith, it granted amnesty to Fatah prisoners and suspects. A committee will be established to implement it.

Previous reconciliation attempts failed. Implementation never followed. Fatah subverted efforts. It did so collaboratively with Israel. Expect little more now than earlier. Washington and Israel won’t allow it.

Anti-Hamas accusations began. It didn’t take long. Haaretz headlined the following:

“Report: Israeli spy satellites spot Iranian ship being loaded with rockets for Gaza.” Rupert Murdoch’s The Sunday Times was cited.

Satellites can identify much on the ground. While still in port, they don’t know cargo ship destinations. They may not determine contents accurately. Haaretz’s headline is irresponsible. Consider the source.

Murdoch is a longtime pro-Israeli stalwart. Jewish organizations gave him numerous awards. He got them for decades of supporting Israel’s worst crimes.

Haaretz quoted an unnamed Israeli source, saying:

“With a lot of effort, Iran has skillfully built a strategic arm pointing at Israel from the south.”

It’s hard imagining any respectable broadsheet publishing what it knows doesn’t wash. Doing so inverts truth.

Hamas threatens no one. Israel represents Palestine’s overwhelming existential threat. Decades of occupation harshness, Gaza’s siege, and unrelenting persecution show it.

An unnamed Israeli defense source said:

“Regardless of the ceasefire agreement, we will attack and destroy any shipment of arms to Gaza once we have spotted it.”

Israel attacks Gaza fishermen, farmers in their fields, children for target practice, and other civilians it calls national security threats.

During Pillar of Cloud, West Bank residents were terrorized. During the week ending November 22, Israeli security forces conducted 77 civilian community incursions (on average 11 per day).

Nearly all are conducted pre-dawn. Homes are stormed and ransacked. Husbands and sons are beaten. Children are traumatized.

From November 14 – 22, hundreds of Palestinians were arrested. Included were many children and released prisoner Tha’er Halahla. He was held administratively uncharged. He hunger stuck for 78 days to win release.

Hours after Pillar of Cloud ended, dozens of West Bank residents were arrested. They included other former prisoners, human rights activists, and a Najah University professor. They also targeted Hamas and other resistance group members.

Many were attacked, tear gassed, shot at, and beaten during anti-Pillar of Cloud protests. Two were killed. Dozens were injured. An unconscious man was arrested and detained.

Young women protesting near the illegal Beit El settlement were arrested, painfully shackled, blindfolded, and subjected to dehumanizing harassment. Soldiers called them “dogs,” “bitches,” and other insults.

Young children were arrested and terrorized. Incidents like these happen regularly. Israel wages war on Palestine numerous ways. It does so with impunity. It plans much more ahead.

It calls brutalizing civilians, at times killing them, traumatizing children, and waging aggressive war self-defense.

With world community and scoundrel media support, it gets away with murder. Expect little or no change now.

Voice of America reports US propaganda. Israel National News cited VOA saying Islamic Jihad, Salafists, and other Hamas rivals may violate truce terms.

Expect Israel to do it. Netanyahu will decide how, when, where, and for what invented reason.

With rare exceptions, Israeli media provided one-sided Pillar of Cloud accounts. They haven’t stopped. A November 20 Jerusalem Post editorial headlined “Lasting Truce,” saying:

It’s “too much to expect that (Hamas) will redirect its efforts from terrorizing Israelis to bettering the lives of” Gazans. Israel wants bloodshed and destruction stopped, claimed JP editors.

Hamas wants blockade ended, its airspace respected, and its population free from Israeli terror.

“Obviously, Israel cannot agree to such demands as long as Gaza is ruled by a terrorist organization,” claimed JP editors.

Another JP editorial claimed no blockade exists. “Trucks laden with foodstuffs and supplies” get in freely. Ignored is a multi-year humanitarian crisis. Everything is in short supply. Important essentials are prohibited or severely restricted.

JP editors know but won’t say. At the same time, they said Gazans “need to understand that there is a price for (their) complicity in the attacks on” Israel.

They want 1.7 million people disconnected from Israel’s “power grid, telephone and communication services.” Perhaps they’d also like them starved to death and deprived of vital medical care.

This type rhetoric and opinion circulate widely. Western media scoundrels do the same thing. Readers and viewers are lied to. Truth doesn’t have a chance.

Israel is an occupying power. It’s obligated to protect Palestinians throughout the Territories. Instead it torments, brutalizes, arrests, and murders them.

On November 23, the Palestine News Network discussed urgent Gaza needs. Enormous human suffering and vast infrastructure destruction caused so many. PNN named five:

(1) Emergency shelter and monetary compensation for people whose homes were destroyed or badly damaged.

(2) Lesser monetary compensation amounts for others whose homes were partly damaged.

(3) Hospitals and other medical facilities provided with vital drugs, disposables and other supplies.

(4) Compensating injured Gazans monetarily.

(5) Enlisting doctors and surgeons for volunteer services.

Of course, nothing can compensate families for lost loved ones. How they’ll manage who knows. Few ask. Israel never does or cares. It prioritizes more death and destruction. It’s been that way for over 64 years.

A Final Comment

Richard Falk is UN Special Rapporteur for human rights in Palestine. He’s more optimistic than this writer. Hopefully, he’s right.

He calls memorandum of understand terms potentially significant. He sees a possible “turning point in the long struggle between Israel and Palestine.”

At the same time, it’s too early to know, said Falk. Israel already confronted Palestinians too close to its border violently. Falk omitted hundreds of West Bank arrests, two killed, many injured, and perhaps much more to come.

Nonetheless, he’s hopeful. He mentioned Morsi’s involvement and other Arab government foreign ministers meeting with Hamas in Gaza. Doing so perhaps helps subvert Israel total isolation priority.

Ceasefire terms also “acknowledged Hamas as (Gaza’s) governing authority….” Doing so enhances its political status. At the same time, of course, Washington, other Western nations and Israel vilify it as a terrorist organization. Don’t expect that to change.

At least for now, Abbas was “sidelined, overshadowed, and made to appear irrelevant….” He’s a spent force. He’s got himself to blame. He’s a longtime Israeli collaborator. The fullness of time will tell what Israel and Washington have in mind for him.

Perhaps replacement looms. It could be worse. Israel could isolate and kill him like Arafat. It shouldn’t surprise if it happens. More likely he’ll retire. If and when, he’ll have to say.

Falk hailed ceasefire terms Israel accepted. Oslo represented head fake good faith. Implementation didn’t follow. Promised final status talks never occurred. Settlements grew exponentially. So did harsh repression. Why expect now to be different? It never was before.

Falk discussed other reasons to be hopeful. History shows impossible achievements sometimes happen. Peace one day will come.

Decades of liberating struggle will end. Palestine will again be free. One day. When, who knows.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “How Wall Street Fleeces America: Privatized Banking, Government Collusion and Class War”

http://www.claritypress.com/Lendman.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

Abbas: Collaborating with the Enemy

0

Stephen Lendman, rinf.com |

Previous articles explained Abbas’ longtime collaboration with Israel. He sold out long ago for whatever benefits he derives.

He’s Israel’s enforcer. He ill serves and insults Palestinians. His presidency is illegitimate. Israel rigged his 2005 election. In January 2009, his term expired.

He’s still in office. At least for now, Washington and Israel want him there. He’s more stooge than statesman. He’s a duplicitous puppet.

He replicates fascist Quisling Norway, Vichy France, and other Nazi-controlled collaborationist regimes. Instead of serving his people, he betrayed them.

He subverts Palestine’s liberating struggle. Collaborating with the enemy is treason. Abbas and likeminded Fatah officials are guilty on multiple counts.

What did he know and when about Pillar of Cloud?

He knew about Cast Lead in advance. On November 30, 2010, Reuters headlined “Israel says Abbas, Egypt warned on Gaza war – leaks,” saying:

Ahead of Cast Lead, Israel “conferred with the Western-backed Palestinian leadership and with Egypt….”

Leaked US diplomatic cables quoted a senior Israeli official confirming it. Haaretz reported the same thing. Mubarak and Abbas were briefed in advance.

Haaretz said “Israel tried to coordinate the Gaza war with the Palestinian authority.” WikiLeaks released US diplomatic cables confirming it.

In June 2009, months before Cast Lead, Israeli Defense Minister Barak met with US congressional members.

He also “consulted with Egypt and Fatah prior to Operation Cast Lead, asking if they were willing to assume control of Gaza once Israel defeated Hamas.”

He “received negative answers from both.” Previous leaked information reported the same thing. WikiLeaks provided “the first documented proof.”

Abbas denied getting advance word. He lied. Mubarak said nothing either way.

Reuters said Abbas “urged Israel to crush Hamas during the war.”

Avigdor Lieberman held ministerial positions under Sharon and Ehud Olmert. In April 2009, he became Netanyahu’s Foreign Minister.

He explained Abbas’ involvement, saying:

“Over the past year, I witnessed (Abbas) at his best. In Operation Cast Lead, (he) called us personally, applied pressure, and demanded that we topple Hamas and remove it from power.”

Though out of government during Cast Lead, a senior Olmert official called his comments “essentially accurate.”

Hamas spokesman Sami Abu Zuhri said this information “reaffirms the fact that Mahmoud Abbas is no longer fit to represent our people, who conspired against his people during a war.”

Abbas was never fit to serve. That’s why Israel and Washington chose him.

WikiLeaks also disclosed that Hamas spokesman Salah Al-Bardaweel said:

“We have not ruled out that Fatah and the Palestinian Authority could have contributed in one way or another in the war against Gaza for political reasons such as bringing down the Hamas movement and regaining control.”

More from WikiLeaks suggested it. Washington’s Tel Aviv embassy said Fatah officials asked Israel to attack Hamas.

According to a June 2007 dispatch, Shin Bet head Yuval Diskin said “demoralized” Fatah officials wanted help to destroy Hamas.

“They are approaching a zero-sum situation,” said Diskin, “and yet they ask us to attack Hamas. They are desperate. This is a new development. We have never seen this before.”

He added that “Fatah is in a very bad shape in Gaza. We have received requests to train their forces in Egypt and Yemen. We would like them to get the training they need, and to be more powerful, but they do not have anyone to lead them.”

He also praised Shin Bet’s “very good working relationship” with Abbas at the time. His internal security service collaborates with Israel. He understands that “Israel’s security is central to (his) survival in the struggle with Hamas….”

At the time, Fatah collaborated with Washington to oust Hamas. An abortive coup failed. More information surfaced.

WikiLeaks published a June 12, 2007 cable. It said Israeli military intelligence head Amos Yadlin told US embassy officials that Hamas retaining power in Gaza was advantageous.

“Although not necessarily representing a GOI (government of Israel) consensus view,” said Yadlin, “Israel would be ‘happy’ if Hamas took over Gaza because the IDF could then deal with Hamas as a hostile state.”

Israel’s imperial agenda needs manufactured enemies. Having them facilitates violence and instability. They also help justify small and larger-scale wars.

Like Pillar of Cloud, Cast Lead was planned months in advance. Its aim was to advance Israel’s imperium.

It involves controlling all valued parts of Judea and Samaria, depopulating much of Palestine, and confining remaining population elements to canonized worthless scrubland.

Both conflicts are more about weakening Hamas than destroying it. They also involve waging war on civilian men, women, children, infants and the elderly.

Doing so is official Israeli policy in all conflicts. Israel considers all Palestinians combatants or potential future ones.

Perhaps Abbas and other Fatah officials knew about Pillar of Cloud in advance. Maybe they approved or urged it.

During eight terror bombing days, Abbas’ comments were delayed, weak, meaningless and insulting.

He did nothing to help beleaguered Gazans. Nor during Cast Lead. Both times he went along with Israeli slaughter and mass destruction.

Issam Younis serves as Al-Mezan Center for Human Rights general director. On November 20, Maan News published his “Letter to Abbas: Visit us in Gaza.” In part it said:

“This is a historic moment, that must be taken up. We’ve waited for you in Gaza for six days. We’re still waiting; your people who are being attacked and slaughtered in Gaza.”

“It is not acceptable anymore – no matter what those surrounding you make it look like to you – that you do not come. I do not invite you to show solidarity with Gaza, but to be in Gaza and with Gaza.”

“The advocates of divide can stay back in Ramallah. This scandalous schism must end now and here; the schism that made your people bleed.”

“We are waiting to know that you have ordered PLO diplomats in Geneva, New York, Vienna, and Paris, and in all UN offices, to immediately act to convene the UN General Assembly, Human Rights Council, UNESCO and others to condemn the crimes perpetrated against our people in Gaza, and do all they can to secure that these crimes be investigated and punished.”

“It is regrettable we have not so far seen any meaningful diplomatic effort that matches the size of blood and suffering in Gaza.”

“We are waiting for the orders to our veteran diplomats to be set on fire and approach the European Union and other powers to mobilize the much-needed pressure on the occupying state.”

On November 4, Younis also challenged Hamas. Maan News published his open letter, saying:

He remains “an advocate of the right of Hamas to govern, and I absolutely reject the double standards employed by the international community towards the movement.”

“The financial and political sanctions on Gaza are simply unjust and scandalous. Hamas won a free and fair election in 2006. The world was well aware that Hamas would win in the elections.”

“At the same time, he challenged Hamas to act more like a government than a ‘movement.’ ”

“The issue here is not about calling into question the intentions or desires of the people in power. It is more about the actual process of governance in such a unique situation like Gaza.”

“What is needed is for the government to interact openly with society, with all of its social and political structures. Society also has a duty to reciprocate and to be open to interacting with the government.”

On November 23, Haaretz contributor Amira Hass headlined “War highlights Abbas’ mutual alienation with Gaza.”

She discussed both Younis letters. Abbas was abroad when Israeli terror bombing began. He returned. He had to. Yet he waited two days before speaking publicly.

His comments were weak, unacceptable and duplicitous. He showed which side he’s on.

He also convened Palestinian PLO leaders. “(H)e didn’t even invite the Hamas representative in the West Bank.” He failed to show solidarity with Gaza.

“It is not clear whether the Hamas government would (let him come) as part of an overall conciliation agreement” or for any purpose.

During Cast Lead, his security forces prevented Palestinian protests. This time he didn’t “dare (stop) people from marching toward Israeli Defense Forces checkpoints in the West Bank (to) demonstrate against the attacks on Gaza.”

Doing so fell far short of what’s needed. Palestinians need leaders serving them, not Israel. Abbas is a collaborative traitor. He’s also a pathetic spent force.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “How Wall Street Fleeces America: Privatized Banking, Government Collusion and Class War”

http://www.claritypress.com/Lendman.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

Buying into Big Brother

0

One of my buddies as of 2007 could not get over his disbelief that people shopped online. He was not technologically unsophisticated; indeed, he knews more about the various flavors of PGP and how to send private messages without using encryption than I care to inquire about (no doubt as a result of doing more than a bit of contested business in Russia). He thought it was crazy to give up that much personal information to anyone unless absolutely unavoidable, and certainly not a mere retailer. Cheaper online prices weren’t enough of an inducement for him to make that trade. (I have no idea whether he has changed his mind as of 2012; being a spooky sort, he’s done a disappearing act).

Like it or not, you in the not too distant future are going to have to submit to personal surveillance to get many types of insurance and financial products. And that future is closer than you probably realize.

Matt Stoller wrote in the spring about how the info tech industry is pushing the idea hard and finding a receptive audience:

Profit-driven surveillance does not starts and stop with young adults. It is, in fact, becoming pervasive. The main theme of a recent IBM consulting document on the future of the insurance industry is how much more money an insurance company can make if it tracks and tags its customers. This is particularly true for auto insurance companies, some of whom like Allstate and Progressive are experimenting on new technologies. For instance, IBM suggests that “A “pay-as-you-live” product would trade some location and time-of-day privacy data for lower insurance bills overall.”

IBM is recommending these companies stick a sensor in your car, measure where you go and when, your speed, acceleration and deceleration, etc. The progression over time could be to withdraw traditional insurance products, so that you won’t be able to get an insurance product without sensors attached. As this presentation offers, “The aforementioned rising tide of technology also empowers insurance underwriters to bring their products closer to realtime interaction via sensor networks and enlightened privacy regulations.”…

It’s not just sensors in your car — insurance companies are modeling tighter and tighter risk chunks. IBM goes on, saying that new products “will facilitate “just-in-time insurance” as a person moves through a set of “spaces.” Each step of the journey represents a different risk such as car-to-train-station, train-to-city-station, station-to- office, and so on. Each leg of the trip truly represents a varying amount of risk.” Tracking these movements could require nothing more than downloading an app on a smart phone, or some other device. But it is literally the application of financial engineering to your very liberty, or the toll-boothing of your life.

That future is arriving sooner than you might think. The New York Times cheerfully ignores the privacy implications of having a monitoring device installed in presenting surveillance as a benefit: yes, you can PROVE you are a good driver by letting your insurer snoop and he’ll reward you with a better rate. And this idea will probably get tons of takers, since 93% of all drivers thinks they are above average. Here is how the Times makes this plan sound non-threatening. Headline: “So You’re a Good Driver? Let’s Go to the Monitor”

LAST week, under my car’s dashboard, I installed a small wireless gadget that would monitor my driving. I wanted to see how it felt to have my driving behavior captured, sent to an insurance company and analyzed. More drivers, seeking discounts on auto insurance, are voluntarily doing just that….

Driving data is collected with a device that policyholders must be persuaded to install; it connects to the car’s computer system via a diagnostic port found in all cars since 1996. Such “user-based insurance,” the name for individualized pricing based on data collected from a vehicle, is spreading. Drivewise from Allstate is in 10 states; Drive Safe and Save, from State Farm, is in 16, with 11 more to be added next month; and Snapshot, from Progressive, is in 43….

The Snapshot device records the time of day and distance traveled, along with the vehicle’s speed, second by second. But Progressive deliberately left GPS out of the device so the car’s exact location is not known; otherwise, more drivers might be nervous about using it….

The day after I installed it, I could log on to the Drivewise site and see graphs showing miles driven, the number of incidents of “hard braking” and “extreme braking” sensed by an accelerometer, how many miles were driven at more than 80 miles an hour, and the number of miles driven at what times of day or night. That is all. The device is semiblind by design. It does not know what road I’m traveling or whether I’m stopping for a red light. It also remains oblivious to whether I’m going 70 miles per hour in a 30 m.p.h. zone.

Allstate says the lowest-risk time for accidents is 5 a.m. to 11 p.m. on weekends, with the highest risk from 11 p.m. to 4 a.m. on weekdays and 11 p.m. to 5 a.m. on weekends. So I couldn’t earn the maximum discount if I worked at a job that put me on the road in the highest-risk times.

“There is a very strong correlation between the driving behaviors we’re monitoring and accidents,” Mr. Birchfield says. Allstate says the discount for its participants also averages 10 percent.

I had thought I’d be uncomfortable knowing that the Drivewise gadget was accompanying me everywhere, But that wasn’t the case – perhaps because my driving behavior was translated into charts with innocuous titles like “miles driven” and “braking events.” The data can be used in post-accident investigations and litigation, however, so I wonder how innocuous it would all look in court in the hands of a plaintiff who has sued me.

Now this doesn’t sound that bad, right? Not that much data is collected. But a buddy who runs a small insurer is vehemently opposed to the idea precisely because he has heard both from other insurers and tech vendors where this is going.

The entire strategy is to go at this incrementally. This is now a cost savings pitch to drivers who think they are good and don’t mind what looks like a little bit of monitoring to get a price break. But let’s say you are like my privacy conscious buddy, you don’t care, there isn’t a price break big enough to get you to agree to surveillance. Well, guess what? Now the monitoring is to prove you are a good driver. It will then be offered to various higher risk groups, again for price breaks, to carve out the better drivers (say the notorious men under 25, or people who’ve been in accidents). The remaining unsurveyed driver will be in a pool of largely higher risk drivers, so their rates will be higher than they’d have been earlier, encouraging even drivers who aren’t confident in their abilities to get scored. By the time all that segmentation is done, the remaining pool will be small and largely high risk. The insurers can then require them to get monitored as a condition of getting insurance.

And once the surveillance is accepted in this and other areas, rinse and repeat on pushing the margins out: say maybe if you are speeding near certain designated high risk areas (query what those might be) entailing limited use of the GPS. And once that has started, it won’t be long before full tracking is required to get auto insurance. Stoller suggested where this is going, based on the plans of vendors who developed these technologies to track prisoners to find profitable opportunities to use them on the general population:

In fact, whether you are tracked because you get a discount on your auto insurance or whether you have broken some arbitrary rule or fit in a non-mainstream class of person, innovation in technology and autocratic organizational forms means that there will be a whole new category of constraints on freedom.

It is very much like the plain vanilla loan, which could be held by banks, being disaggregated into its component parts and sold to investors with varying degrees of risk. This then led to investors demanding more exotic loan products whose risk attributes they wanted to own. This can happen with human freedom. Based on what you are willing to pay, how much power you have, and your desires, our culture will begin offering extremely granular freedom zones.

Many people think that the current Supreme Court and political arrangement means that America is heading back to a 19th century political economy, with 21st century technological possibilities. Thinking about for profit prison and parole companies combined with GPS is a way to imagine what this might look like. When you layer on the clear trend of insurance companies that seek to track you with sensors, and school districts who want to track kids for accounting purposes, it’s becoming increasingly clear that the systems we’ve set up to run our society are increasingly, well, running our society.

The financial engineering of component parts of freedom, and the removal from the state of the monopoly rights to track and/or restrict movement, represents a novel form of social organization. It could be nothing less than a new form of authoritarianism, a soft version in which there are political choices and a measure of openness, but a jello-like network of corporate cartels holding power. In this society, you’ll get whatever zone of freedom you can pay for, and if you can’t afford any freedom, you won’t get any.

Originally published on Naked Capitalism 

Thai Protesters Confront US-backed Regime

0

Tony Cartalucci, Activist Post |

No sooner did the long-announced protest start (full background here), then police acting under orders of the Yingluck Shinawatra “Peua Thai Party” (PTP) led government began firing tear gas at protesters challenging police lines.

The catch is, of course, that several pro-government “red shirt” rallies had already taken place earlier in the year, allowed to paralyze the center of the city without any government restrictions or serious police presence. These same pro-government protesters had in 2009 and 2010 committed wide-scale violence, killing by-standers, troops, police, even fellow protesters, while committing arson, vandalism, and city-wide looting. Many of their leaders who had openly called for violence, arson, and looting on stage, are now sitting MPs within the current Shinawatra regime.

Now in contrast, anti-government protesters have faced preemptive moves by the US-backed ruling regime, to chill free speech, intimidate and restrict the number of protesters planning to attend the November 24th protests, and attempts by the police to restrict the protesters’ movements to prevent the same sort of disruption their own pro-government protesters are regularly allowed to cause, or exceed.

The Western media, as predicted, is already siding with the government. While outfits like Reuters gladly grant anti-government movements from Venezuela to Egypt, Syria, and even 2009-2010’s Thailand absolute impunity to cause violence while portraying them as “peaceful” and “pro-democratic,” Reuters has already labeled the current protests in Thailand as “royalist,” portraying them as anti-democratic, and armed with “weapons, including knives and bullets” while cherry picking the crowd for the most unflattering protest signs possible. (The West’s grievances with Thailand’s constitutional monarchy are best encapsulated here.)

Why are Protesters in Thailand Angry with the Shinawatra Regime? 

The current Thai government is led by Yingluck Shinawatra in name only. The 2011 PTP campaign slogan was literally, “Thaksin thinks, Peua Thai does,” referring to Yingluck’s brother, Thaksin Shinawatra, the deposed Wall Street-backed billionaire ousted from power in 2006 after a collimation of mass-murder, treason, and corruption.

Before coming to power in 2001, Thaksin was appointed by the Carlyle Group as an adviser while holding public office, and attempted to use his connections to boost his political image. Thanong Khanthong of Thailand’s English newspaper “the Nation,” wrote in 2001:

In April 1998, while Thailand was still mired in a deep economic morass, Thaksin tried to use his American connections to boost his political image just as he was forming his Thai Rak Thai Party. He invited Bush senior to visit Bangkok and his home, saying his own mission was to act as a “national matchmaker” between the US equity fund and Thai businesses. In March, he also played host to James Baker III, the US secretary of state in the senior Bush administration, on his sojourn in Thailand.

Upon becoming prime minister in 2001, Thaksin would begin paying back the support he received from his Western sponsors. In 2003, he would commit Thai troops to the US invasion of Iraq, despite widespread protests from both the Thai military and the public. Thaksin would also allow the CIA to use Thailand for its abhorrent rendition program.

Also in 2003, starting in February and over the course of 3 months, some 2,800 people (approximately 30 a day) would be extra-judicially murdered in the cities and countrysides of Thailand as part of Thaksin’s “War on Drugs.”

Accused of being “drug dealers,” victims were systematically exterminated based on “hit lists” compiled by police given carte blanche by Thaksin. It would later be determined by official investigations that over half of those killed had nothing to do with the drug trade in any way. Human Rights Watch (HRW) would confirm this in their 2008 report titled, “Thailand’s ‘war on drugs’,” a follow up to the much more extensive 2004 report, “Not Enough Graves.”

In 2004, Thaksin attempted to ramrod through a US-Thailand Free-Trade Agreement (FTA) without parliamentary approval, backed by the US-ASEAN Business Council who just before last year’s 2011elections that saw Thaksin’s sister Yingluck Shinawatra brought into power, hosted the leaders of Thaksin’s “red shirt” “United Front for Democracy against Dictatorship” (UDD).

The council in 2004 included 3M, war profiteering Bechtel, Boeing, Cargill, Citigroup, General Electric, IBM, the notorious Monsanto, and currently also includes banking houses Goldman Sachs and JP Morgan, Lockheed Martin, Raytheon, Chevron, Exxon, BP, Glaxo Smith Kline, Merck, Northrop Grumman, Monsanto’s GMO doppelganger Syngenta, as well as Phillip Morris.

Thaksin would remain in office until September of 2006. On the eve of the military coup that ousted him from power, Thaksin was literally standing before the Fortune 500-funded Council on Foreign Relations giving a progress report in New York City.

Since the 2006 coup that toppled his regime, Thaksin has been represented by US corporate-financier elites via their lobbying firms including, Kenneth Adelman of the Edelman PR firm(Freedom House, International Crisis Group, PNAC), James Baker of Baker Botts (CFR), Robert Blackwill of Barbour Griffith & Rogers (CFR), Kobre & Kim, and currently Robert Amsterdam ofAmsterdam & Peroff (Chatham House).

Robert Amsterdam of Amsterdam & Peroff, would also simultaneously represent Thaksin’s “red shirt” UDD movement, and was present for the inaugural meeting of the so-called “academic” Nitirat group, attended mostly by pro-Thaksin red shirts (who literally wore their red shirts to the meeting). Additional support for Thaksin and his UDD street-front is provided by the US State Department via National Endowment for Democracy-funded “NGO” Prachatai.

Clearly, just as in Egypt, Thaksin Shinawatra, and his sister, installed as his nepotist proxy, do not truly represent the Thai people, nor the best interests of Thailand itself. Their support base is a minority – simply the loudest, better organized and funded political machine in Thailand, putting the current government into power with a mere 32% of eligible voters actually casting a vote for PTP.

One need not be a “royalist” to understand the threat Thaksin and his proxy government pose to Thailand and its future. And while Egypt’s current dictator, Mohammed Morsi is more difficult to defend, the West is preying on the ignorance of the general public to sell the current US-backed regime in Thailand as “democratically elected,” “legitimate,” and “justified” in their crackdown on anti-government protesters.

Tony Cartalucci’s articles have appeared on many alternative media websites, including his own at Land Destroyer Report.   Read other contributed articles by Tony Cartalucci here.

Republished with permission from Activist Post

In Praise of Price Gouging

0

Ron Paul |

As the northeastern United States continues to recover from Hurricane Sandy, we hear the usual outcry against individuals and companies who dare to charge market prices for goods such as gasoline. The normal market response of rising prices in the wake of a natural disaster and resulting supply disruptions is redefined as “price gouging.” The government claims that price gouging is the charging of ruinous or exploitative prices for goods in short supply in the wake of a disaster and is a heinous crime. But does this reflect economic reality, or merely political posturing to capitalize on raw emotions?

In the wake of Hurricane Sandy, the supply of gasoline was greatly disrupted. Many gas stations were unable to pump gas due to a lack of electricity, thus greatly reducing the supply. At the same time demand for gasoline spiked due to the widespread use of generators. Because gas stations were forbidden from raising their prices to meet the increased demand, miles-long lines developed and stations were forced to start limiting the amount of gasoline that individuals could purchase. New Jersey gas stations began to look like Soviet grocery stores.

Had gas stations been allowed to raise their prices to reflect the increased demand for gasoline, only those most in need of gasoline would have purchased gas, while everyone would have economized on their existing supply. But because prices remained lower than they should have been, no one sought to conserve gas. Low prices signaled that gas was in abundant supply, while reality was exactly the opposite, and only those fortunate enough to be at the front of gas lines were able to purchase gas before it sold out. Not surprisingly, a thriving black market developed, with gas offered for up to $20 per gallon.

With price controls in effect, supply shortages were exacerbated. If prices had been allowed to increase to market levels, the profit opportunity would have brought in new supplies from outside the region. As supplies increased, prices gradually would have decreased as supply and demand returned to equilibrium. But with price controls in effect, what company would want to deal with the hassle of shipping gas to a disaster-stricken area with downed power lines and flooded highways when the same profit could be made elsewhere? So instead of gas shipments flooding into the disaster zones, what little gas supply is left is rapidly sold and consumed.

Governments fail to understand that prices are not just random numbers. Prices perform an important role in providing information, coordinating supply and demand, and enabling economic calculation. When government interferes with the price mechanism, economic calamity ensues. Price controls on gasoline led to the infamous gas lines of the 1970s, yet politicians today repeat those same failed mistakes. Instituting price caps at a below-market price will always lead to shortages. No act of any legislature can reverse the laws of supply and demand.

History shows us that the quickest path to economic recovery is to abolish all price controls. If governments really want to aid recovery, they would abolish their “price-gouging” legislation and allow the free market to function.

Republished with permission from Lew Rockwell

Iran accuses US Navy of ‘illegal acts’ in Gulf

0

RT |

Iran has blamed the US Navy for “illegal and provocative acts” near its coastline, including violations of country’s airspace. Formal accusations of these charges were filed with both the UN chief and the UN Security Council.

The two identical letters to Secretary-General Ban Ki-moon and the UNSC were delivered on Friday by Iran’s envoy to the United Nations, Ambassador Mohammad Khazaee.

He cited several incidents of reported unauthorized flights over the coastal regions around Bushehr in October, where a Russian-built nuclear power plant is located. Khazaee also said that a US drone crossed into Iranian airspace on November 1, despite radio warnings.

Tehran urged Ban to warn the US against “the continuation of acts in violation of international law and of the adverse consequences of any provocative and dangerous acts for which the United States government would be held responsible.”

The White House did not immediately comment on the allegations.

The November 1 incident, the latest mentioned in the complaint, involved two Iranian fighter jets shooting at an American Predator drone. The unmanned aircraft was performing a reconnaissance mission over the Gulf, and returned safely to base after the encounter.

The Pentagon insisted that their aircraft was in international airspace when the Iranian jets engaged it, and that the drone remained over the international waters while in flight. Tehran contested that account, claiming the drone violated its airspace.

Last year, Iran captured an American Sentinel spy drone inside Iranian territory. The capture was touted as a major victory by Tehran, while Western commentators voiced concerns that Iran would be able to study and replicate the drone’s secret stealth technology.

The US maintains a keen interest in Iranian secrets due to the long-running rivalry for influence in the region between the two nations. Washington , along with its enduring ally Israel, claim that Tehran is trying to secretly build a nuclear weapon under the guise of a civilian nuclear program. Iran has steadfastly denied the accusations.

In a bid to stop enrichment of uranium by the Islamic Republic, the US and its allies have levied crippling economic sanctions against the country over the last year, damaging Iran’s energy exports. There were also speculations of a possible military attack on Iranian nuclear facilities by Israel.

Tehran threatened to use its navy to block the Strait of Hormuz, a crucial naval shipping route for oil, in response to such an attack. The US has already further built up its already considerable military strength in the region, saying it is prepared to counteract any Iranian blockade of the strait.

Israel lobby attempts to smear journalist for reporting war crimes

0

Abby Martin of Russia Today’s Brainwash Update pointed out that Israel’s targeting of Gaza media centers, which killed journalists and endangered employees of many news organizations, was a war crime. (She was hardly alone in this). She was the victim of a smear attempt by the Israel lobby, which accused her of support for terrorism (because she dared call illegal Israeli actions illegal). If more journalists stood up to such smear campaigns with her feistiness, the world would be a better place. Watch her let her detractors have it:

Originally published on Informed Comment

Israel’s War on Palestine

0

Stephen Lendman, rinf.com |

Operation Pillar of Cloud reflects the latest chapter in Israel’s decades-long, slow-motion, genocidal war on Palestine.

So-called memorandum of understanding terms changed nothing. They’re nonbinding, meaningless, and insulting.

Israel disregarded all past agreements. It’ll violate this one with impunity and already did. More on that below.

With full US support, it flagrantly ignored dozens of Security Council and General Assembly resolutions. They condemned or censured Israel for its crimes, deplored it for committing them, and/or demanded they end.

Israel does what it pleases with impunity. Palestine’s Nakba never ended. It continues now. It’s embedded in Palestinian consciousness. It reflects an ongoing journey of pain, suffering, loss, and injustice.

Daily life replicates Palestine’s tortured past. Occupation harshness threatens Palestinian culture, heritage, and existence. Draconian military orders alone create oppressive conditions. They include:

No. 92 giving Israel control of all West Bank and Gaza water;

No. 158 stipulating that Palestinians can’t construct water installations without (nearly impossible to get) permit permission, and those built will be confiscated or demolished;

No. 1015 requiring Palestinians get permission to plant trees on their own land;

No. 128 authorizing the IDF to take over any Palestinian business not open during regular business hours;

No. 107 prohibiting Arabic grammar, Crusades history, and Arab nationalist publications;

No. 101 banning gatherings of more than 10 people without advance notice with names of participants;

Nos. 811 and 847 letting Jews buy land from Palestinian owners with or without their consent;

No. 998 requiring Palestinians get permission to withdraw funds from their bank accounts;

No. 818 authorizing how Palestinians can plant decorative flowers;

No. 329 preventing the right of return; and

Nos. 1649 and 1650 turning all West Bank residents (including native born ones) potentially into “infiltrators;” doing so makes them vulnerable to deportation, fines or imprisonment without IDF-issued permits.

Imagine daily life under these conditions and much more. Brutalizing repression terrorizes Palestinians ruthlessly. Israeli provocations instigate conflicts and full-scale wars.

Fingers point the wrong way every time. Palestinians are blamed for Israeli crimes. Peace, stability, and freedom remain elusive. Operation Pillar of Cloud resolved nothing.

Israel got away with murder and mass destruction. Conflict didn’t end. It continues. Washington and Israel assure it. They’re partners in crime.

On Thursday, a day after both sides agreed on memorandum of understanding terms, Israeli soldiers shot and wounded four Palestinian youths.

They approached Israel’s security fence. They threatened no one. They displayed Palestinian flags. In response, soldiers opened fire.

An IDF spokesman said they “began rioting.” He lied.

Friday morning, Israeli soldiers murdered another Palestinian youth in cold blood. Live fire wounded another 19. They gathered near Israel’s border peacefully to pray.

Incidents like this and greater provocations happen often. Netanyahu pledged to stop them. He lied. He’s been caught red-handed lying many times.

After pledging to pursue peace, he called doing so “a waste of time.” He admitted wanting to destroy Palestinian authority and existence.

He knows he’ll get Western support for claiming self-defense. Washington collaborates with and endorses all Israeli criminality.

The Israeli Lobby boasts about having US administrations and Congress in its pocket. Israel gets away with murder with impunity. It happens every time.

Israeli policy reflects the worst of criminality and duplicity. Palestinians know what they’re up against. Conflict will resume whenever Israel plans it. Under Netanyahu, it’s certain.

A scurrilous Haaretz editorial lauded him. “In praise of Netanyahu,” it headlined.

It admitted that diplomacy could have avoided conflict. “But once (Netanyahu) decided on a military operation, (he) demonstrated relative restraint.”

Imagine calling hundreds of Palestinians murdered or injured “restraint.” Imagine how many families lost loved ones. Imagine mass destruction impossible to rebuild easily under siege conditions.

Imagine shocking crimes of war and against humanity. Imagine Israel again getting away with murder. Imagine editors who know better praising what they should condemn.

“Restraint” showed “strength,” they said. In other words, they killed, injured, and maimed fewer Palestinians than during Cast Lead.

“It’s clear that the Goldstone Report….penetrated deeply into the consciousness of Israeli decision-makers….”

It did no such thing, of course. Internal whitewash followed. So did Ban Ki-moon’s handpicked commission. It absolved Israeli crimes. Goldstone himself fell from grace.

Despite irrefutable evidence, he softened his initial criticism. Dark forces got to him. He capitulated. In the process, he sold his soul, honor, character, dignity, and high-mindedness. He failed dismally trying to explain.

Israel remains free to kill and destroy again. It takes full advantage.

Haaretz claims conditions now “could well herald the onset of a new era…” It hopes ceasefire terms will improve living conditions in Gaza.

It ignored blockade lawlessness. Palestinians haven’t had a “new era” in over 64 years. Nothing changed now. Instead of condemning Netanyahu and likeminded hardliners, Haaretz editors “expressed (their) appreciation of this government and its leader for the relative restraint they displayed.”

It’s hard imagining editors who know better would claim what’s categorically false. An unnamed Gazan woman put a human face on Palestinian suffering.

On November 20, her letter from Gaza was published. In part it said the following:

“The situation here is really terrible and it’s getting worse day after day….”

“This morning, the Israeli F16 military jets hit our area twice. The first time, they hit the building of the council of ministers with 5 huge missiles just a few homes away from our home.”

“Our home was shaking like an earthquake, and our windows broke and shattered everywhere, and I felt the missiles inside our home. It was very scary. Of course serious damages happened to all surrounding buildings in the area.”

“The first time, the Israeli F16 military jets hit Palestine stadium, which is located in the neighborhood next to my neighborhood, with 4 huge missiles, and caused some damages to my home as well.”

“I heard the huge explosions and saw the flames and it was very terrifying. We see and feel death very close with each bombing. Israel is bombing everywhere in Gaza all the time by air, sea and land.”

“Nowhere to hide….Nowhere is safe….We don’t have shelters. We just stay at home so all of us can die at once if a missile would strike our home.”

“We are still recovering from the trauma of (Cast Lead). How will we recover from this?”

“This is insane….How much is too much?….I hope this madness will stop as quickly as possible.”

On June 14, 1956, Jack Kennedy gave Harvard’s commencement address. Politicians don’t speak that way today. His entire talk included scholarly references and quotes. It was an impressive example for young graduates.

He reminded the audience that political leaders once “traded in the free commerce of ideas.” They achieved important results at home and abroad.

The link between US scholars and politicians lasted over a century, he added.

Where freedom is endangered, he said, politicians and intellectuals “should be natural allies, working more closely together for the common cause against the common enemy.”

They must decide whether to be “an anvil or a hammer.” He concluded saying “if more politicians knew poetry and more poets knew politics, I am convinced the world would be a little better place in which to live on this commencement day of 1956.”

He was assassinated perhaps for believing war isn’t the answer. He’d deplore what’s going on now. He was chastened by the failed Bay of Pigs invasion. He fired CIA director Allen Dulles and his assistant General Charles Cabell.

He once said he wanted to “to splinter the CIA in a thousand pieces and scatter it to the winds.” That alone was reason to kill him.

He opposed America’s growing Southeast Asian involvement. After initially sending troops and advisors, he changed course. He refused to send more and wanted ones there gradually withdrawn.

He called Pentagon generals “crazy” for wanting to nuke Soviet Russia. He said he “never had the slightest intention of” attacking or invading Cuba during the 1962 missile crisis.

He swung to peace, away from war, wanted nuclear weapons abolished, and the Cold War ended. He favored “general and complete disarmament.”

He signed the Limited Test Ban Treaty with the Soviets. In October 1963 (weeks before his assassination), he signed National Security Action Memorandum 263. It called for removing 1,000 US troops from Vietnam by year’s end and the remainder by December 1965.

As president, he underwent a spiritual transformation. He changed from cold warrior to peacemaker. He opposed Israeli nuclearization. He wrote Gen-Gurion and told him. He also supported Palestinian liberation.

On June 4, 1963, he challenged Wall Street. He signed Executive Order (EO) 11110. It constitutionally empowered the federal government to create and “issue silver certificates against any silver bullion, silver, or standard silver dollars in the Treasury.”

It’s believed he ordered the Treasury Secretary to issue nearly $4.3 billion worth of United States notes. Perhaps he had in mind replacing Wall Street controlled Federal Reserve Notes.

Whether or not he wanted the Fed abolished or nationalized isn’t clear. Had he lived and served a second term, imagine the possibilities.

Peace instead of war? Government closer to serving everyone? Perhaps more mindful of people needs?

Michael Harrington’s “The Other America” expose of US poverty affected him enough to want something done about it. Who can know what might have followed.

America has no Jack Kennedy today. For sure, neither does Israel.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “How Wall Street Fleeces America: Privatized Banking, Government Collusion and Class War”

http://www.claritypress.com/Lendman.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

Killing of Journalists by US Forces a Growing Problem

0

During the Vietnam War, which US forces fought from 1960 through 1974, and which cost the lives of several million Southeast Asians and 58,000 Americans, eight American journalists died. Not one of them was killed by American fire.

Dave Lindorff | 

In the Iraq War, 136 journalists were killed. At least 15 of them — about 11% of the total — were killed by US forces, sometimes apparently with deliberate intent.

In Afghanistan, nine journalists have been killed, at least one by US forces, and in that case, the killing was deliberate, though it is unclear whether the victim was known to be a journalist.

One thing is clear: it is dangerous in the extreme to be a journalist covering America’s wars, at least beginning with Vietnam.

Why this might be the case is hard to say, but it seems that an antipathy towards journalists within the military may have something to do with it.

Back in 1983, the US, in one of the more ludicrous military actions in its long history of war, invaded the tiny Caribbean island of Grenada, on the pretext that it feared Cubans were building a military airbase there (actually Cuba had sent construction workers to the impoverished isle to help the country build a better commercial airport so as to improve its tourism business). During that invasion, which was conducted with a total media blackout despite almost no opposition (the main “enemy” putting up any resistance was a group of Cuban construction workers!), a group of seven journalists, including a reporter from the New York Times, attempted to reach the island on a small boat. They were blocked by a US destroyer, which warned them over a loudspeaker to turn around or be “blown out of the water.” The journalists gave up and retreated.

That little “war,” which was conducted from beginning to end with no reporters allowed in the battle zone, marked the beginning of a new relationship between the Pentagon and the press — one where the military maintains complete control over access and information, both what is provided to the media, and what the public gets to learn.

When the US launched its invasion of Iraq and Iraqi-occupied Kuwait in 1991, it required all journalists covering the attack to be “embedded” with US forces. Prior to that time (with the exception of the Grenada War mentioned above), journalists, for example in Vietnam, were free to go anywhere in the war zone and to report what they saw. They were not tied to, or restricted to, specific military units. They faced risks, but the risks, as evidenced by the deaths of war correspondents, were caused by either land mines they encountered, or by enemy fire, not by fire from US forces.

That all changed with the Iraq War in 2003. At that time, the Pentagon continued with the same methods developed in the Gulf War, requiring journalists to be “embedded” with specific invading, or later, occupying units. Those journalists who chose not to be embedded were warned that they were putting themselves at much greater risk of being targets.

We know, from documents that were obtained and released by Wikileaks, that the Bush-Cheney administration considered, but fortunately eventually decided against, bombing the main studio and office building of Al-Jazeera Television in Qatar in the early days of the 2003 invasion of Iraq. President Bush and Vice President Cheney were known to be furious at what they considered to be the biased reporting on that war by the Arab-language TV news organization. This aborted plan to blow up the whole station, which would have resulted in huge casualties, casts in a very suspicious light the rocket and machine gun attack on the Al-Jazeera bureau in Baghdad on April 8, 2002, during the US assault on Iraq’s capital city just a few weeks into the invasion. In that attack, Tareq Ayyaub, an Al-Jazeera cameraman, was killed and another journalist was injured. The US claimed it had inadvertently struck the Al-Jazeera building because of “shots fired from nearby,” but an investigation disclosed that Al-Jazeera had given the coordinates of its facility to US forces so it was known to be a press site, not a military target.

Furthermore, there was another attack that same day, this time by a US tank, which fired a 120 mm round at a balcony of the Palestine Hotel, where US forces knew that virtually the entire foreign press corps were holed up during the invasion. Killed on the balcony were Reuters cameraman Taras Protsyuk and the Spaniard Jose Couso of Telecinco TV.

The ruthlessness of the slaying of journalists was exposed for all to see when the whistle-blower outfit Wikileaks released the now famous video it obtained from the gunsight camera of a US helicopter, whose crew opened up with machine gun fire on a group of men and two children in a Baghdad square. Two of those killed were cameramen working for Reuters. One of the two was literally hunted down and machine gunned after, already gravely wounded, he tried to crawl away, unarmed, to safety. The crew could be heard laughing as they killed him.

Several journalists were shot and killed at checkpoints by trigger-happy US forces, some, like Ali Abdul-Azia and Ali al-Khatib, two reporters with the Arab TV station Al-Arabiya, as they were driving away from the checkpoint on March 18, 2004, or Asaad Kadhim, a journalist with the Iraqi TV station Al-Iraqiya, shot as he was filming at a checkpoint near Samara in Iraq.

Reporter Ahmed Wael Bakri of Al-Sharqiya TV, a local station partly funded by the US, was killed by US troops because he “failed to pull over” for a US military convoy — a fate suffered by many an ordinary Iraqi civilian.

In Afghanistan, BBC journalist Omaid Khpalwak was killed by one US soldier after he had already been shot and wounded by another, despite the fact that he spoke English and had been trying to retrieve some ID from his jacket pocket. Khpalwak had been hiding for safety during a firefight he had been covering when he was initially shot by a US soldier. The second soldier had gone over to “check him out.”

Certainly in the fog of war, being a war correspondent is a dangerous profession. Fighters on either side of a conflict, who are being fired at themselves, are not in a position or a state of mind to spend a lot of time analyzing whether someone is an enemy fighter or a journalist, or even perhaps in poor visibility conditions, whether a what someone is carrying is a camera tripod or an RPG launcher. Furthermore, plenty of journalists have been killed, often deliberately, by Iraqi resistance fighters and by Taliban forces in Afghanistan.

That said, the incidence of journalists being killed by US forces in recent US conflicts has been much, much greater than it ever was in earlier wars, such as the one in Vietnam, or in Korea or World War II, which inevitably begs the question of whether some of the journalist killing has been deliberate, perhaps with the intent of keeping journalists in line.

Certainly the White House discussion about whether to bomb Al-Jazeera’s main offices shows that there is a willingness, all the way up to the top of the US government, to view journalists as the enemy, and even to contemplate killing some of them to affect the coverage of a war. The bombing of the Al-Jazeera bureau in Baghdad in the early days of the US invasion appears to have been a brazen attempt to do just that.

In case after case, the evidence is too sketchy to say for sure that other killings of journalists by US troops were deliberate efforts to make sure other journalists stayed firmly — and safely — embedded with US soldiers, but the sheer number of those killed should at least raise the question.

Meanwhile, there is far less question of motive in the case of Israel, a close ally of the US, and a country whose military is closely linked to the Pentagon. During this latest Israeli assault and bombardment of the prison-territory of Gaza, the Israeli Defense Force fired several missiles directly at a building housing not only the Gaza Al-Aksa TV station, but a number of offices of foreign journalists. Two Al-Aksa cameramen were killed in the strike. Several other buildings housing foreign journalists have also been struck, and the Foreign Press Association for Israel and Palestinian Territories has stated that it believes the IDF is well aware of the locations of offices of foreign reporters in the territory. Israel has admitted to targeting the two Al-Aksa victims, claiming that working for the Hamas-owned station means they are Hamas “terrorists.” But as to whether the strikes on buildings occupied by foreign reporters is meant to be a message, or to keep them from covering the IDF attack on Gaza, that remains, like the US attacks on and killing of journalists, an open question.

Source

Protesters arrested outside Wal-Mart

0
Christine Mai-Duc, L.A. Times |

Authorities arrested nine protesters, including a man wearing a priest’s collar, outside a Wal-Mart in Paramount, Calif., for sitting down in the middle of a street and refusing to budge.

Around noon Friday, Los Angeles sheriff’s deputies peacefully handcuffed the four women and five men, arresting them on suspicion of illegally assembling. The nine were participating in a rally that drew about 400 Wal-Mart employees, union members and others agitating for better working conditions at the world’s largest retailer.

Dozens of other organized rallies also occurred Friday outside Wal-Mart stores around the country, including one in Duarte and one in Los Angeles’ Baldwin Hills/Crenshaw neighborhood.

As sheriff’s helicopters buzzed overhead, the protesters were peacefully handcuffed and led away by deputies while the crowd applauded and chanted, “We support the workers. We support them!”

Protesters earlier were also singing, “We shall overcome … Wal-Mart land!”

Several of those arrested were wearing white flowers in their hair and blue bands around their arms. One man was sporting a black shirt emblazoned with “IWW,” for International Workers of the World. Another was in a priest’s collar.

“I think we handled it very well,” said Lt. Minh Dinh of the Los Angeles County Sheriff’s Department. “We protected the people’s abilities to express their constitutional right to speech, and we also protected property from being damaged. The individuals who wanted to be arrested made us aware of that.”

After the arrests, the crowd started dispersing. Some people headed to the parking lot while others streamed onto three yellow school buses that had carried many of the protesters to the store.

“We’re trying to hold [Wal-Mart] accountable,” said Allison Mannos of the Los Angeles Alliance for a New Economy, a labor advocacy organization. “You could feel the excitement and the tension of these protesters getting arrested. This was too big to ignore.”

Wal-Mart spokesman Steve Restivo said the number of protests around the country was “grossly exaggerated” by the United Food and Commercial Workers union, which backed Our Walmart, an advocacy group that was partly responsible for organizing the rallies.

“We are aware of a few dozen protests at our stores,” Restivosaid. “The number of associates that have missed their scheduled shift today is more than 60% less than Black Friday last year.”

The protesters slowed down some shoppers trying to snag Black Friday bargains.

“We have no what this even is. All of a sudden there are cops and signs everywhere,” said Michelle Lewis, 24, of Fullerton, whose white pickup truck was standing still amid the thick stream of chanting people.

“We are probably just going to go to a different Wal-Mart,” Lewis said. “This is annoying.”

Is Money Just Another Drug?

0

Anna Hunt, Activist Post | 

Marriam-Webster’s definition of addiction is: “compulsive need for and use of a habit-forming substance (as heroin, nicotine, or alcohol) characterized by tolerance and by well-defined physiological symptoms upon withdrawal; broadly: persistent compulsive use of a substance known by the user to be harmful.”

Just as drugs, cigarettes and alcohol, money, sex, shopping or any other activity can be habit-forming and lead to addiction. Dr. Leon F. Seltzer, a clinical psychologist and author of Paradoxical Strategies in Psychotherapy, elaborates in a recent blog in Psychology Today:

As addicts progress (or rather, regress) into their addiction, to derive sufficient gratification they must constantly seek more and more of their drug of choice. For ‘more’ is the keyword of addiction. It doesn’t matter whether they’re addicted to a substance, relationship, or activity–the ‘ante’ for getting enough of the object of their craving must continually be raised.

As drug addicts seeks their next fix, a millionaire is likely to continuously seek the next million.

Drug addicts can be destructive, manipulative and, at times, dangerous. Can we say the same about individuals addicted to money? Dr. Seltzer thinks so:

But of all the things one might be addicted to, nothing tops the greed-laden pursuit of wealth in its audacity, manipulativeness, and gross insensitivity to the needs and feelings of others. Not to mention its extreme, short-sighted, irresponsible covetousness. Ask a multi-millionaire or billionaire so afflicted (if you can find one willing to talk to you!), and you’ll discover that their ‘mega-fortune quest’ really has no end point. They won’t be able to name the definitive ‘millionth’ or ‘billionth’ that, finally, will do it for them. They can’t because the means by which they reap their riches has itself become the end.

As a drug addict constantly seeks a “high”, money addicts seek their next deal or payout in order to satisfy the ego and get a boost of dopamine that, to them, comes with making a “killing.” Dr. Seltzer shares his insight about the reason behind this:

In general, their ‘money high’ has to do not just with feelings of fiscal elation but with a kind of self-inoculation. What perpetual wealth production inoculates them against are underlying, and barely recognized, feelings of distress–such as depression, anxiety, guilt or shame–which stem from a belief that deep, deep down they may not be good enough at all. So greater and greater financial success is required to help them sustain their cherished illusion that they really are superior–in economic terms, vastly superior–to others: a most convenient narcissistic ‘fix’ for whatever subterranean doubts they may yet harbor about themselves.

In our world, there are likely as many money addicts as there are drug addicts, although it is not yet illegal to crave more money. Quite the opposite. People that focus on growing their monetary fortune are often described as motivated, productive and successful. Yet, just as communities, friends and families suffer due to drug addictions, the world suffers at the hand of greed.

On an ethical level, the worst thing about their pursuits is that their mercenary, ego-driven achievements frequently do considerable damage to others and their prospects. Not always but typically those who might be called ‘greed addicts’ aren’t in the professions or creative Arts, but in business: entrepreneurs, investors, speculators, lenders, CEOs. And most often their successes contribute little or nothing to society.

Rather, their undertakings are cunningly contrived to transfer money out of the pockets of others and into their own. Exceedingly competitive and aggressive, they’ll take ruthless advantage of every opportunity to turn a profit–and not shy away from turning against others in the process.

Today, we are surrounded by greed that’s masked in industry, technology, banking, politics … the list goes on. That’s not to say that all wealthy people — or bankers, politicians and industry tycoons — are money addicts, but there are many that continually seek wealth with little regard to the planetor humanity. At what point do we say enough, and start treating money addicts like drug addicts … or better yet criminals?

View Dr. Leon F. Seltzer’s full article on Psychology Today: Greed: The Ultimate Addiction

Anna Hunt is a writer and entrepreneur with over a decade of experience in research and editorial writing. She and her husband run a preparedness e-store outlet at www.offgridoutpost.com, offering GMO-free storable food and emergency kits. Anna is also a certified Hatha yoga instructor. She enjoys raising her children and being a voice for optimal human health and wellness. Read more of her excellent articles here.

Published with permission from Activist Post

Cops taser man for trying to save his burning home

0

Ethan A. Huff, Natural News |

Daniel Jensen of Pinellas Park, Florida, was simply trying to protect his house from burning down when he instinctively grabbed the garden hose and began dousing the corner of his roof and backyard fence with water to prevent nearby flames from catching hold. But this was apparently unacceptable behavior in the eyes of the local police department, whose corrupt officers decided it was somehow appropriate to aggressively taser Jensen in the back for trying to protect his family and property from the approaching flames.

According to WTSP 10 News in Tampa Bay, police officers who arrived at the scene of the fire before firefighters showed up actually demanding that Jensen leave his house alone and allow it to burn, claiming “that’s what insurance is for.” Not wanting to see his beloved home needlessly catch fire, potentially taking with it all of his family’s personal possessions and irreplaceable mementos, Jensen made the sovereign decision to reject the officers’ poor advice and grab the garden hose again after flames suddenly jumped from his neighbor’s house to his own.

Upon doing so, the Pinellas Park Police Department sergeant who was on the scene began shouting at another officer to “hit him” and “take him down” with a taser, statements which Jensen says he had no idea at that time were in reference to himself. Almost immediately after these statements were shouted; however, Jensen recalls being struck in his back with the dual taser barbs, which brought him to his knees and ultimately face down on the ground as if he was some kind of criminal.

“It was horrible. I was laying in a puddle of water being electrocuted here by the people that are supposed to protect us,” recalled a teary-eyed Jensen to WTSP 10 News about the paralyzing incident. “I’m trying to protect my family, my neighbor, and they bring harm to me. I don’t understand. All I remember is laying in water, being electrocuted for saving my home.”

Protecting your house, property from fire is not a crime

Since no firefighters were present on the scene to address the fire themselves, Jensen’s actions to protect both his and his neighbor’s homes were fully warranted. Additionally, the cops who assaulted Jensen had no legal right to either trespass his property, or to taser him for trying to protect it. The entire incident just reeks of flagrant police state abuse, and embodies the precise reason why more Americans than ever are purchasing firearms in order to protect themselves and their families against this type of encroaching tyranny.

“They should have more tolerance with the public, to exhaust all options before firing electricity into somebody,” added Jensen about the cruel and brutal behavior of his local police department.

You can watch a video report of Jensen’s harrowing experience here: http://pinellaspark.wtsp.com

Is Middle East Peace a Mirage?

0

Patrick J. Buchanan | 

With the truce in the week-long Gaza war, Barack Obama is being prompted by right and left to re-engage and renew U.S. efforts to solve the core question of Middle East peace.

Before he gets reinvolved in peacemaking, our once-burned president should ask himself some hard questions.

Is real peace between Palestinians and Israelis even possible?

Is there any treaty that could be agreed to, or imposed, that would be acceptable to Israel and the Palestinian Authority on the West Bank, let alone to Hamas, which has emerged from its defiance of one of the most intensive bombardments of modern time with new prestige?

What are the obvious impediments to such a treaty?

First, Bibi Netanyahu, who has presided over the expansion of Israel settlements and joined Avigdor Lieberman, a supporter of ethnic cleansing of Israeli Arabs, in a coalition of the Israeli hard right.

Would Bibi agree to a treaty that required removal of scores of thousands of Israeli settlers from Judea and Samaria, when he opposed Ariel Sharon’s withdrawal of a few thousand settlers from Gaza?

Would Bibi agree to Jerusalem becoming the capital of Palestine as well as Israel, a non-negotiable demand of Arab nations?

Could a Palestinian Authority that gives up all rights to Jerusalem survive?

A second roadblock is the correlation of forces in Washington.

Should Obama begin to pressure Israel to remove settlers from the West Bank and accept a Palestinian capital in Jerusalem, he would ignite a firestorm among evangelical Christians, the Israeli Lobby, the neocons and a Congress that, not long ago, gave Bibi 29 standing ovations after he dressed-down Barack Obama right in the Oval Office.

Obama has acquired much political capital with his election victory, but not that much.

In a Bibi-Barack face-off over settlements and Jerusalem, with whom would ex-Secretary of State Hillary Clinton and other Democrats looking to 2016 stand? As for the Republicans, we already know. Their policy on Israel: “No daylight between us,” and, “We’ve got your back.”

A third impediment is the altered environment between Israel and a newly radicalized Middle East.

Israel now looks north to a Lebanon where Hezbollah possesses more and better rockets than the metal-shop jobs Hamas fired off. Beyond lies a powerful Turkey whose prime minister just declared Israel a “terrorist” state.

To the northeast lies Syria, where the 40-year truce on the Golan is unlikely to last after Bashar al-Assad falls and is replaced by a Sunni regime rooted in the Muslim Brotherhood, or becomes a failed state saturated with jihadists and loose chemical weapons.

To the east lies Jordan, wracked by riots, a monarchy that looks to be a candidate for an Arab Spring uprising.

To the south and west are Hamas, a Sinai that is a no man’s land, and an Egypt dominated by the Brotherhood, millions of whose people would like to see the Israeli peace treaty trashed.

Israel is as isolated as she has been in a region that is more hostile to her presence than perhaps at any time since the war of ’48.

The time of Yitzhak Rabin, when Israel had treaties with Egypt and Jordan and had entered into the Oslo Accords with Yasser Arafat’s PLO, seems ancient history. Looking back, with the Rabin assassination and Netanyahu accession, the window that appeared to be open may have closed for good.

Israelis appear now to have entrusted their future to a U.S.-guaranteed military superiority — F-16s, smart bombs and an Iron Dome missile defense — rather than peace talks and parchment.

Which is their call. But what of us? What do we have to show for decades of involvement in the Middle East?

Despite our “liberation” of Kuwait, Afghanistan, Iraq and Libya at a cost of thousands of lives and trillions of dollars, despite plunging hundreds of billions into foreign aid, America’s influence has never been lower.

Hillary Clinton, who cut off her Asian tour to fly to Israel and Egypt, was a bystander in brokering the truce. She is not even allowed to talk to Hamas. For we have designated Hamas a terrorist organization.

Astonishing. What was Joe Stalin when Harry Truman talked with him at Potsdam? What was Nikita Khrushchev when Ike invited the “Butcher of Budapest” to Camp David? What was Chairman Mao when Richard Nixon toasted him in Beijing in 1972?

We tie our own hands and wonder why we cannot succeed.

Today, as Obama is being pushed toward another futile round of peacemaking in the Mideast, prodded to intervene in the ethnic-civil-sectarian war in Syria and goaded to draw a “red line” for war on Iran, he should ask himself:

How would America’s vital interests be imperiled by staying out of this particular quarrel, conflict or war? Why are all of these crises somehow ours to resolve? What are the odds that we can resolve them?

We are out of Iraq, and leaving Afghanistan by 2014. Should we go back in, or as Obama pledged, do our “nation-building” here at home?

Patrick J. Buchanan [send him mail] is co-founder and editor of The American Conservative. He is also the author of seven books, including Where the Right Went Wrong, and Churchill, Hitler, and the Unnecessary War. His latest book is Suicide of a Superpower: Will America Survive to 2025? See his website.

Copyright © 2012 Creators Syndicate

Republished with permission from Lew Rockwell

British resistance cranks up a gear on 1st Dec

0

Schnews |

British resistance to fracking is cranking it up a gear. Community groups across the country are organising for a day of action on Saturday 1st December, to make it clear that they do not want to be fracked. Rumours are afoot of actions spanning from fire-eaters to naked flash mobs. Alternatively, there’s always the yearly climate march in London on the same day, which will have a fracking theme. The day has been titled “The Big Rig Revolt” and at present the default option for those wanting to fit in with the crowd seems to be to build a mock drilling rig and place it somewhere thoughtful, controversial or confrontational, depending on your preference. More inventive ideas will doubtless emerge nearer the time.

And it’s not all about doing it just for the frack of it – this upsurge in resistance is not focused on only one particular technology, as indeed the industry isn’t: the crackpot energy schemes come in many flavours. As easy-to-extract fossil fuels are depleted, prices are rising and the system is desperately scrabbling around to find alternatives, which are necessarily more extreme, dangerous and destructive. Up until now this has mainly been energy sources like tar sands and deep water drilling which are remote to most people. Now, however, with the screws really tightening and the global economy tottering, these sort of extreme energy methods are coming to a field near you. At the same time it is becoming increasingly clear that effects of burning fossil fuels on the climate are not limited to some far future but are already effecting many people. The rash of extreme weather events in the past year have devastated lives and are pushing up food prices threatening to starve many in the third world. Any widespread exploitation of unconventional fossil fuels could be completely catastrophic.

In Scotland, an Australian company called Dark Energy (er, sorry no, Dart Energy) has applied to build Britain’s first unconventional gas development, with 14 sites, 22 wells, over 20 km of pipelines, a processing plant and a waste outfall into the Firth of Fourth. Another 600 Coal Bed Methane (CBM) wells could follow, in this one small area between Falkirk and Stirling. In Lancashire, Cuadrilla Resources are in the process of drilling their fourth shale gas test well and are preparing to frack the well they drilled last year. The amounts of gas Cuadrilla are bragging they can extract from Lancashire would require them to drill over 6000 wells in the area. In Somerset, UK Methane have applied for the for permission for the first CBM test well in Keynsham near Bristol. Again this is but the tip of a much larger iceberg with in excess of 2000 wells needed to extract the gas that UK Methane hope is there. And in Cheshire, IGas have also been have been drilling for CBM around Warrington and Ellesmere Port and would need around 2000 wells to extract the gas they claim is there.

Outside these frontline areas there is little reason to feel complacent though. Other regions have well sites approved or licenses already sold and could be next in line to be fracked. The government originally planned a new licensing round to sell off more areas of the country this year but that has been put back to 2013. When it does happen though it is possible that rights to huge swathes of the country could be sold off for exploitation by private extraction companies. The dash for unconventional gas could result in tens of thousands of wells being drilled, plus associated pipelines, access roads and compressor stations, coating the landscape in industrial crap – even before you get to the issues with water contamination, air pollution and er, earthquakes.

Meanwhile Swansea, Newcastle or Edinburgh are in the firing line to be the first place where Underground Coal Gasification (setting fire to underground coal seams) is trialled. The government has already sold 18 licences for UCG around the coast, just offshore. While it is difficult to envisage what UCG would be like, since it has never been done on a large scale anywhere in the world, the best comparison is probably with the tar sands in Alberta, where huge industrial plants produce vast quantities of toxic waste.

The Big Rig Revolt is a chance for communities, groups and individuals across the country to make their voices heard in opposition to this threat. Actions are already planned in Lancashire, Swansea, Somerset, Brighton and London. See frack-off.org.uk/the-big-rig-revolt for more details and let them know if you are doing an action you want publicised.

Armed Drones to Patrol Highways by 2025

0

Paul Joseph Watson, Prison Planet.com |

Autonomous vehicles and flying drones that would disable a suspect’s car remotely with an electromagnetic pulse are set to patrol highways by 2025 according to a number of concept vehciles designed by major manufacturers such as Honda, BMW and General Motors.

The 2012 LA Design Challenge asked companies to come up with a concept for “Highway Patrol Vehicle 2025,” with the winner set to be announced next week.

Most of the entrants for the competition have responded with designs that overwhelmingly suggest “patrol cars and motorcycles would be replaced by computerized drones,” within the next 10-15 years ,reports the New York Times.

Honda’s entry, the Honda CHP Drone Squad, includes both a four wheeled drone vehicle and a two-wheeled motorcycle-style drone, both of which would hunt down suspects without the need to be manned.

General Motors’ concept, named the Vault Squad, includes three futuristic vehicles designed to “observe, pursue or engage.” The NY Times noted that the term “engage” was “left menacingly undefined.”

BMW’s DesignworksUSA studio came up the E-Patrol (Human-Drone Pursuit Vehicle), which would allow the operator to deploy an airborne armed surveillance drone which would have the capability to disable a suspect’s vehicle using an electromagnetic pulse.

“The main structure can deploy three drones. The top drone sits above the main structure and is a flying drone, while the other two are one wheel vehicles attached to the rear,” according to BMW. “In the case of a pursuit during heavy traffic areas, the patrol officer sitting in the two passenger main structure can deploy either the flying drone or one of the single wheel drones to chase the suspect and report back data to the main structure. When all drones are deployed, the main structure can continue to function. All drones have added protection benefits in that they can send an impulse to another vehicle and disable it.”

One of the concept drawings for the BMW design shows a license plate scanner within the vehicle which automatically brings up a photograph of every driver on the road, whether they are a suspect or not.

“By coincidence or destiny, designers at several companies came up with concepts for robotic, autonomously driven vehicles on ground, water and air. These future police cruisers – usually presented as story boards rather than actual vehicles – recall today’s Predator and Global Hawk drones, stars of the anti-insurgency efforts. They may give new meaning to those signs that read “Speed limit enforced by aircraft,” writes the Times’ Phil Patton.

As we have previously highlighted, the whole direction of drones and automated robot technology being developed by the likes of DARPA is all geared towards having machines take the role of police officers in pursuing and engaging “insurgents” on American soil.

Technology experts have warned that removing the human element from law enforcement could lead to people being summarily executed.

Although Boston Dynamics and DARPA claim the robots are ostensibly being designed to help conduct humanitarian and relief missions, Noel Sharkey, professor of artificial intelligence and robotics at the University of Sheffield, recently warned that the true purpose of the machines is less benign.

Speaking about the Cheetah, a robot currently being perfected by Boston Dynamics, Sharkey said the device represented, “an incredible technical achievement, but it’s unfortunate that it’s going to be used to kill people.”

“It’s going to be used for chasing people across the desert, I would imagine. I can’t think of many civilian applications — maybe for hunting, or farming, for rounding up sheep.” Sharkey added.

“But of course if it’s used for combat, it would be killing civilians as well as it’s not going to be able to discriminate between civilians and soldiers.”

You can see images of all the LA Design Challenge concepts at this link.

Dismissal of Gaza Ignores the Key Role of the US Government

0

Glenn Greenwald |

Everything about the Israeli/Palestinian conflict follows the same pattern over and over, including the reaction of Americans. In the first couple of days after a new round of violence breaks out, there is intense interest and passion, which is quickly replaced by weariness, irritation, and even anger that one has to be bothered by this never-ending, always-ugly and seemingly irresolvable conflict. These sentiments then morph into an attempt to separate oneself from the entire matter by declaring both sides to be equally horrendous and thus washing one’s hands from any responsibility for thinking further about it (“I’m sick of both sides”), followed by recriminations against anyone who actually has an opinion that is more supportive of one side than the other.

Esquire’s Charles Pierce, one of the nation’s best political writers, provided a classic case of this mindset yesterday in his post entitled “There Is No Side Worth Taking In Gaza“. The crux: “I would like to have an opinion on this continual bloodletting that didn’t sound banal but, goddammit, I’m out of them. I am thoroughly sick of both sides here.” One encounters a version of this mentality with increasing frequency each day that the violence escalates.

This temptation is genuinely understandable. Few things are more depressing than paying attention to the Israeli/Palestinian conflict. The carnage and mutual hatred seem infinite. The arguments are so repetitive and fruitless. As is true in all wars, including those depicted in pleasing good-vs-evil terms, atrocities end up being committed by all sides, leading one to want to disassociate oneself from all parties involved. It is just as untenable to defend the indiscriminate launching by Hamas of projectiles into Israeli neighborhoods as it is to defend the massive air bombing by Israel of what they have turned into an open-air prison that is designed to collectively punish hundreds of thousands of human beings.

Virtually everyone wishes the entire conflict would just go away. With the exception of extremists on both sides who benefit in various ways, nobody relishes having to become involved in any of this. It is exhausting, draining, soul-crushing, and miserable. Embracing “screw-both-sides” nihilism and doing nothing else is so tempting because it appears to provide relief from the burden of paying any further attention to the horrific violence or bearing responsibility for any of it.

But for two independent reasons, this reasoning, understandable though it may be, depends upon patent fictions, and is thus invalid. The first reason, which I will mention only briefly, is that there is not equality between the two sides.

As my Guardian colleague Seumas Milne superbly detailed in his column Tuesday night, the overarching fact of this conflict is that the Palestinians, for decades now, have been brutally occupied, blockaded, humiliated, deprived of the most basic human rights of statehood and autonomy though the continuous application of brute, lawless force (for that reason, those who like to righteously condemn Hamas’ rockets (Pierce, defending Obama; “he happened to be correct the other day. No country can tolerate the bombing of its citizens”) have the obligation to state what form of legitimate resistance Palestinians have to all of this). Moreover, as these clear numbers from the Economist demonstrate, the violence and carnage so disproportionately harm the Palestinians that to suggest some form of equivalence between the two sides borders on the obscene.

But the second reason, to me, is even clearer. The government which Americans fund and elect, and for which they thus bear at least some responsibility, is anything but neutral in this conflict. That government – certainly including the Democratic Party – is categorically, uncritically, and unfailingly on the side of Israel in every respect when it comes to violence and oppression against the Palestinians.

For years now, US financial, military and diplomatic support of Israel has been the central enabling force driving this endless conflict. The bombs Israel drops on Gazans, and the planes they use to drop them, and the weapons they use to occupy the West Bank and protect settlements are paid for, in substantial part, by the US taxpayer, and those actions are shielded from recrimination by the UN veto power aggressively wielded in Israel’s favor by the US government. As the excellent Israeli writer Noam Sheizaf put it on Chris Hayes’ MSNBC program this weekend:

“Ultimately, the status quo is the solution from the perspective of [the Netanyahu] government. . . . . There’s no incentive for the current [Israeli] political leadership to move from it, especially with the free hand it gets from the world and from the United States.”

Just consider the actions of the US over the last week as violence in Gaza escalated. On Tuesday, the US vetoed a UN Security Council cease-fire resolution on the ground, in essence, that it was too balanced. The US State Department publicly attacked its Nato ally, Turkey, for condemning Israeli aggression. As always, the US Congress and the US Executive Branch are virtually unanimous in their full-throated, completely one-sided support for Israeli actions.

Last night, a producer for Rachel Maddow’s MSNBC program, the long-time liberal blogger Steve Benen, gloated that the GOP’s election-year attacks on Obama over Israel have been proven false because, as Benen noted [emphasis added]: “An Israeli official close to Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu said the Obama administration’s response to the conflict ‘has been everything we could ever hope for.'” Though it should produce serious dismay rather than gloating, Benen is absolutely right in his factual claim: Obama specifically and Democrats generally have long been, and still are, every bit as loyal to and supportive of all Israeli actions as the American Right believes the US should be.

So this “both-sides-are-hideous” mentality is not what drives the actions of the US government. Quite the contrary: the US government is as partisan and loyal a supporter of one side of this conflict as one can possibly be. So if people want to rail against anyone who has convictions about one side or the other – Pierce: “The only people who make me more ill than the two active sides in this endless slaughter are the people far from the killing grounds who are so very goddamn sure they know what to do . . . I hate the cheering squads over here today” – then the place to begin is with the US government, the Obama administration, whose unstinting, multi-faceted support for and enabling of Israel is central to all of this.

Pierce does say that “I wish American arms and American dollars weren’t being used to demolish entire impoverished neighborhoods,” but in the next breath asks: “People are waiting for the president to do something, but what is to be done?” But he answered his own question: the US need not be, and should not be, such an active, one-sided participant in this aggression. That one should vehemently condemn rocket attacks on civilians and bombs on Tel Aviv buses outside of an Israeli military facility does not mean sanctioning the years-long fueling of the Israeli side of this conflict by the US government.

If one wants to try to wash one’s hands of this entire matter by declaring both sides equally culpable, that’s fine. But doing so requires an acknowledgment that the US government is doing nothing of the sort. It is fueling, funding and feeding the Israeli war machine, and, with its own militaristic conduct, is legitimizing the premises of Israeli aggression.

This is exactly what I was referencing when I wrote on Saturday that one must stop pretending that the US is some sort of helpless, uninvolved party in this war between two distant, foreign entities. That is complete fiction. If an American citizen really wants to advocate for neutrality on the ground that both sides are equally horrible and they’re sick of the whole conflict and wish it would all just go away, then the place to begin with that advocacy is US government policy which, as unpleasant as it might be to face, has long been, and remains more than ever, a key force that drives the bloodshed.

Glenn Greenwald is a columnist on civil liberties and US national security issues for the Guardian. A former constitutional lawyer, he was until 2012 a contributing writer at Salon. His most recent book is, With Liberty and Justice for Some: How the Law Is Used to Destroy Equality and Protect the Powerful. His other books include: Great American Hypocrites: Toppling the Big Myths of Republican Politics,  A Tragic Legacy: How a Good vs. Evil Mentality Destroyed the Bush Presidency, and How Would a Patriot Act? Defending American Values from a President Run Amok. He is the recipient of the first annual I.F. Stone Award for Independent Journalism.

Originally published on Common Dreams

UK told to quit EU Human Rights Court

Britain should quit the European Court of Human Rights to pave the way for Parliament to block prisoners’ right to vote, says former justice minister Nick Herbert.

“We shouldn’t defy the European Court of Human Rights – we should resign from it altogether”, said the Tory MP.

Herbert’s comments come as the UK government is preparing to block prisoners’ legal action if Parliament votes to forbid them from having the right to vote, which is in defiance of European laws.

The Tory MP argued that withdrawing was the only way and said it was “doubtful” any of the options presented to Parliament would be acceptable to the European Court of Human rights.

The British government would face a rush of legal action from prisoners demanding millions of pounds in compensation if Parliament decides to defy the European Court.

Herbert warned that ignoring the court would simply lead to high compensation claims, which many Britons would find “doubly-offensive”.

The UK has the option to leave the European Court, under the condition that it gives six months notice.

Meanwhile, Prime Minister David Cameron is to face a difficult situation of being unable to support the prisoner’s voting ban in Parliament as ministers cannot vote for something that the European law recognizes as illegal.

BGH/MOL/HE

Kazakhstan sues Google, Twitter and Facebook

0

RT |

Google, Facebook, Twitter, and LiveJournal are among the defendants in a lawsuit filed by Kazakh prosecutors seeking to shutdown some opposition media outlets in the republic.

The prosecutors are demanding the websites stop publishing material from Kazakh opposition sources.

“The company Google is a defendant. I don’t know if they know it or not, but they are on trial and they need to present their comment on this lawsuit,” Sergey Utkin, a lawyer for information portal Respublika (Republic) told journalists on Friday.

He also presented a copy of the lawsuit, which names popular social networking services Facebook, Twitter, LiveJournal, and the Respublika information portal as co-defendants, reports Interfax agency.

On Thursday, a court in Almaty banned the opposition newspaper Golos Respubliki (Voice of Republic).

The ruling came a day after state prosecutors filed applications to ban eight local newspapers and 23 internet-sources — all united under the Respublika brand — and several international news portals. The officials claim the media outlets undermine security in the former Soviet Republic.

They also demanded that unregistered opposition political movements Alga and Khalyk Maidany are recognized as extremist and outlawed.

The move comes shortly after a court sentenced several Kazakh opposition leaders who were found guilty of inflaming social hatred and calling for the violent overthrow of the government. The activists were arrested following violent riots the oil city Zhanaozen in western Kazakhstan in December last year. Dozens were injured and 16 people killed as the result of the unrest.

RINF Video: A New Breed of Internet Surveillance Emerges

0

RINF News reports on a new development in Internet surveillance. ‘Legal intercept’ technology provides governments with an easy way to monitor VoIP communication. This report also looks at how Microsoft are planning to use cameras to monitor – and potentially restrict activity in the home.

Walmart Strikes Back

0

With its own workers standing up against poverty wages and exploitation, Walmart is siccing the cops on past and present employees, allegedly on false pretenses.

As Black Friday approached, the honchos at Walmart, the largest employer in the United States, found themselves at a loss to respond to a nationwide rebellion within the ranks of their near-captive workers — people who work for an average wage of $8.81 per hour, according toThe National Memo, often in areas where Walmart is the only game in town for a job if you don’t have a college degree (or even if you do). And so it seems they started making stuff up, and pulling strings — in at least two locations — to get local police to do their bidding.

Across the country this Friday, Walmart workers and their supporters are conducting rallies and protests at or near Walmart stores, as shoppers line up in the pre-dawn hours for a crack at the super-bargains that are the retailer’s Black Friday hallmark.

For more than six months, two groups linked to the United Food & Commercial Workers union have been working on behalf of Walmart employees, demanding a living wage, a humane level of benefits, reasonable hours and an end to the company’s legendary retaliation against workers who seek to unionize and put an end to its abusive labor practices, including wage theft. Walmart employees number 1.4 million, and, as Catherine Ruetschlin of Demos reports, it is the country’s largest single employer of African Americans.

The groups, OUR Walmart and Making Change at Walmart, are relying largely on social media campaigns to organize what are expected to be thousands of Walmart workers walking off the job today. Aiding in the organizing are former Walmart employees, such as Alex Rivera, who claims he was fired by Walmart in Orlando this September for joining the OUR Walmart campaign, according to a report by The Nation‘s Josh Eidelson.

On Wednesday, Rivera was handcuffed by Orlando police — in front of his former colleagues — when he entered the store in which he was formerly employed, because, Eidelson writes, Walmart managers appear to have falsely told police that the store had a “no tresspassing” order against the former Walmart “associate,” as the mega-retailer calls its employees.

From Eidelson’s article:

According to Rivera and an OUR Walmart organizer who accompanied him to the store, Rivera was leaning over to drink from a water fountain when a police officer grabbed his arm without warning, put him in handcuffs and led him to an office. Rivera said that the officer told him that Walmart management had informed the police that Rivera had previously signed a written trespassing warning obligating him not to return to the premises. Walmart “lied to the police officer.…” said Rivera. “That’s why they handcuffed me.”

Rivera says that he was released when the store managers were unable to provide police with a copy of the warning, and police realized they no such document in their own records.

Meanwhile, in St. Cloud, Fla., Vanessa Ferreira walked off the job in another Walmart store after she was disciplined for the first time in her eight-year tenure as a cake decorator in the store’s bakery department, an action she’s convinced Walmart managers took against her because she is a known member of OUR Walmart.

After she walked off the job, reports the Huffington Post’s Dave Jamieson, Walmart managers had police evict Ferreira and several family members from the store, allegedly for “trespassing,” telling her she was not welcome back on the premises until after Black Friday. After Ferreira filed a complaint with the National Labor Relations Board claiming that the retailer was infringing on her right to organize, Jamieson writes, a Walmart spokesperson said the trespassing warning had been issued to Ferreira in error.

Ferreira told Jamieson that she took the action because, unlike most of her fellow “associates,” she could afford to, on account of her husband’s income.

From Jamieson’s report:

As much as she loves her job, there’s plenty Ferreira doesn’t like about her employer. According to Ferreira, Walmart’s wages are too low for workers to survive on, and the company keeps too many of its employees on part-time status, leaving them to rely on government assistance to get by.

“They pay low wages, then the taxpayers pick up the tab for food stamps and Medicaid,” Ferreira said. “They need to take care of their people. They need to be responsible to their workers.”

According to a study by Good Jobs First, a labor-supported group, Walmart, in state after state, either tops the list, or ranks among the top five companies whose employees receive their health care from government-financed programs for the poor such as Medicaid, and just as high among those whose workers are enrolled in a food stamp program.

In Confessions of a Wal-Mart Hit Man, a bonus scene from Robert Greenwald’s groundbreaking film, Wal-Mart: The High Cost of Low Price, a former Walmart manager talks of how he stopped taking his meal in the store staff lunchroom because of the discomfort of eating in front of workers who took their lunch break with no food, presumably because they could not afford a mid-day meal. (See video at the end of this piece.)

A recent study from Demos demonstrates how a living wage paid to Walmart workers would help the overall economy, with only a negligible impact on prices.

The Black Friday actions — a day of protests and rallies outside or near Walmart stores — follow a two-week strike in September at a California Walmart warehouse, where workers alleged retaliation from managers for organizing with an affiliate of the Change to Win Coalition, and an October walkout at a Chicago Walmart facility, to which police in riot gear were dispatched to quell a peaceful protest.

Two weeks ago, Walmart filed its own NLRB complaint against the United Food & Commercial Workers, seeking an injunction against the planned Black Friday actions. The complaint failed. A week later, UFCW-affiliated OUR Walmart group filed a complaint with the labor board against Walmart, alleging retaliation against workers involved in the OUR Walmart campaign.

Even if you’ve never set foot near a Walmart store in your life, today’s actions offer a host of ways to get involved in the fight for fair pay and benefits. The AFL-CIO blog, among other Web sites, offers a list of ways to get involved.

The video below, Confessions of a Wal-Mart Hit Man, features a former general manager for the company speaking of the ways managers cheated workers out of wages they had earned, rigged a vote against a union in the company’s Annapolis, Md., store, and how hard it was to eat in the staff lunchroom, where workers took their breaks with no food, because they couldn’t afford to buy lunch. The video is a bonus scene from Robert Greenwald’s documentary: Wal-Mart: The High Cost of Low Price.

Originally published on Alternet

Palestinians: Dying to Live Free

0

Stephen Lendman, rinf.com |

Occupied Palestine is the longest unresolved conflict of our time. After 64 years, Palestinians remain largely isolated on their own.

Their suffering continues. Their rights don’t matter. Western nations scorn them. Rhetorical support only is provided. It’s insulting, demeaning and meaningless.

Ending Operation Pillar of Cloud changed nothing. Israel will provoke confrontations any time it wishes. Pretexts will be invented. Hamas and other resistance groups will be blamed.

The same disturbing scenario repeats. This time won’t be different. It never is. Gaza remains the world’s largest open-air prison.

A UN report said the Strip will be “unlivable” by 2020. It already is and has been since Israel’s mid-2007 siege. Palestinians live under humanitarian crisis conditions most people can’t imagine.

Israel persecutes them ruthlessly. Attacks will resume. Conflict cessation changed nothing. Living in a war zone assures it. It’s that and much more throughout Occupied Palestine.

Overnight Wednesday, Israel terrorized West Bank residents. At least 55 Palestinians were arrested. Military sources said it was to “restore calm, maintain order, and prevent the infiltration of terrorists into Israeli communities.”

They lied like they always do. Arrests reflected state terror.

Israel targeted Hamas, Islamic Jihad, and Popular Front for the Liberation of Palestine members. Some were mid-level figures. Israel called them “senior operatives.”

They committed no crimes. Detention uncharged or longer-term imprisonment will follow. Abed al-Qaher Srour was arrested. He heads Hamas’ Aziz Dweik’s office.

Dweik is former Palestinian parliamentary speaker. On August 6, 2006, he was arrested and imprisoned uncharged for belonging to Hamas. In mid-June 2009, he was released. He’s vulnerable to rearrest any time. So are many others.

Over 40% of Palestinian males have been imprisoned at some time. Many face rearrest and detention. Virtually all incarcerated Palestinians are political prisoners.

They’re guilty only of wanting to live free on their own land in their own country. Occupation harshness denies them. It’s been that way for over 45 years.

During Operation Pillar of Cloud, nonviolent West Bank protests erupted. Israeli forces attacked them viciously. Arrests were made. Two protesters were killed in cold blood. Soldiers shot them at point blank range. They threatened no one.

Dozens more protesters were injured. Israel uses rubber bullets, tear gas, stun grenades, other weapons, and at times live fire. Throughout the Territories, Israel wages war on freedom.

Palestine reflects occupation hell. West Bank communities are terrorized. Pre-dawn raids target residents. They happen multiple times daily. Beatings and arrests follow. Families are traumatized. No one’s sure who’s next. Perhaps some sleep with eyes wide open.

John Pilger calls Palestine the issue. Israel remains a longstanding problem. It’s a rogue terror state. Everyone not Jewish is considered inferior.

Muslims are treated like subhumans. All rights are denied.
Resistance is called terrorism. Freedom isn’t tolerated. It never was in Occupied Palestine and isn’t now.

Israel’s gulag is filled with thousands of non-believers. Their crime is wanting occupation harshness ended. It’s their long denied right.

Life in Occupied Palestine is daily hell. Institutionalized repression terrorizes Palestinians. They live in constant fear. They’re economically strangled and collectively punished.

Gaza remains under siege. Everything’s in short supply or not available. Essential goods and services are restricted or prohibited. Denied construction materials prevent vital rebuilding.

Small amounts allowed international organizations require pre-approval. Getting it is burdensome and expensive. Farm products and other goods can’t reach West Bank or foreign markets.

Except for tiny amounts, Israel prohibits exports. Rafah Crossing when open for goods is woefully inadequate.

Gazans depend heavily on its tunnel economy. Nearly half the civilian goods available enter that way. They’re mostly construction materials.

Israeli restrictions ban most goods. Some essentials are affected. Gaza’s siege is imposed punitively. It has nothing to do with security.

Hamas demanded it be lifted. It settled for uncertain easing. Expect Israel to renege on minimal concessions made. It’s practically guaranteed. It happened many times before.

Other than for “exceptional (mostly medical) humanitarian cases,” travel between Gaza and the West Bank is prohibited. It still is and much more. Besieged Gazans remain isolated.

West Bank/East Jerusalem Palestinians are denied free movement. They’re impeded by enclosed population centers, closed borders, roadblocks, checkpoints, electric fences, other barricades, curfews, Separation Wall enclosure, and expanding settlements.

Fundamental human and civil rights are denied throughout the Territories. Collective punishment is imposed. Israeli soldiers enforce occupation harshness. So do Fatah shock troops.

Neighborhood incursions terrorize and harass. Normal life is denied. Land theft occurs regularly. Bulldozed homes, dispossessed owners, and village displacements reflect institutionalized ethnic cleansing.

Palestinians are replaced by expanding settlements, closed military areas, no-go zones, nature reserves, commercial areas, tourist sites, by-pass roads, and other exclusionary restrictions.

Well over half the West Bank is off-limits. Israel plans stealing all parts of Judea and Sumaria it wants, including Jerusalem as its exclusive capital. At most, Palestinians will be left with isolated cantons on worthless scrubland.

Ceasefire terms will curtail for a time but won’t stop neighborhood incursions, land, sea and air attacks, institutionalized violence, slow-motion genocide, targeted killings, mass arrests, torture, gulag imprisonment, and denial of vitally all rights.

Equity, justice, and fundamental fairness aren’t in Israel’s vocabulary. Expect crimes of war and against humanity to resume without redress. Wanting to live free in sovereign Palestine is called terrorism.

Police state repression is policy. Intolerable conditions are imposed. How many independent post-conflict assessments are necessary to stop Israeli terrorism?

When will Washington do the right thing? Obama expressed full support for Israel’s right to bomb, shell and murder with impunity. So did the entire Congress.

HR 813 and SR 599 expressed “vigorous support and unwavering commitment to the welfare, security, and survival of the State of Israel as a Jewish and democratic state with secure borders, and recognizing and strongly supporting its right to act in its own self-defense.”

Carte blanche slaughter and mass destruction with impunity passed unanimously. Not a single profile in courage supported right over wrong. Not Senators Bernie Sanders, Al Franken or Jim Webb who didn’t stand for reelection.

Not House representatives Ron Paul, Dennis Kucinich, Barbara Lee, or its only Muslim member, Keith Ellison. He merely called for both sides to “show restraint.”

No one expressed outrage over Israel’s planned assault. No one cared that relentless terror bombing and shelling killed or injured hundreds of innocent Palestinian men, women, children, infants and the elderly.

No one expressed angst about lost lives. Wives lost husbands. Husbands lost wives. Parents lost children. They lost siblings. Friends lost neighbors. Communities were turned upside down. Some may never recover. Others will take years.

No one asked why they were deliberately targeted. No one thought about whether gravely injured ones will survive. No one wondered how maimed for life victims will get by.

No one condemned cold-blooded Israeli slaughter and mass destruction. No one asked how Palestinians survive under siege. No one cares if they live or die.

Only Israeli rights matter. Palestinians are contemptuously scorned. Muslims are demonized for not being Jews. They’re human beings, not “terrorists,” “crazed Arabs,” or “jihadists.”

Edward Said deplored “special status” rights afforded Jews “at the expense of the other.” He denounced “Sharonian evil.” He’d say the same thing about Netanyahu.

They and others like them represent destructive wickedness. Crimes against humanity reflect official policy. Daily violence targets Palestinians for slow-motion annihilation.

Every imaginable affront and assault on human dignity vilify Palestinians for their faith, ethnicity and presence. Their redoubtable spirit alone sustains them.

Occupation obscenity continues. Congress sanctifies it. Generous support aids Israel’s killing machine. Where this ends, who knows.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “How Wall Street Fleeces America: Privatized Banking, Government Collusion and Class War”

http://www.claritypress.com/Lendman.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

Detroit to go bankrupt in less than a month?

0

RT |

The city of Detroit, facing a serious cash crisis, is set to go bankrupt by the end of this year and would put city workers on furlough unless it strikes a deal with the city council that would bring in $30 million before Dec. 14.

Detroit has been in financial turmoil for years, losing a quarter of its population in the past decade and facing a shrinking auto industry that has reduced tax revenues. The Detroit City Council gave the mayor the option to hire a financial advisor and in return receive $30 million by the end of the year.

But the Council on Tuesday voted 8-1 to delay the decision on the deal, which would pay the Miller Canfield Law Firm $300,000 to advise Mayor Dave Bing. The deal would have released $10 million in bond money on Tuesday and another $20 million in December.

The Council decided not to authorize the contract due to suspicions that Miller Canfield has conflicts of interests, since the firm handles other city business. The Council was also concerned that the firm’s contract may not be legal, since it was not prepared or approved of by the city’s chief on-staff lawyer. Council members were also upset that Bing only presented them with one law firm, denying them options to choose from.

“The Council’s rejection of the Miller Canfield contract means the city will not receive the first $10 million scheduled for release today,” Bing said in a statement. “As a result, it will be more difficult for the city to maintain its liquidity until the receipt of property tax revenues beginning in January. Today’s vote is one more example of how City Council has stalled our efforts to bring financial stability to the city of Detroit.”

Some blame the mayor for the denied funds, claiming that his limited options gave the Council no choice but to reject the proposal.

“Why is Mayor Bing putting gthe city’s finances at risk by marrying himself to one law firm?” City Council President Charles Pugh told reporters.

If a deal cannot be struck within the upcoming weeks, then those who will suffer most are Detroit’s government employees. Bing plans to put city workers on furlough on Jan. 1 to save cash if fails to receive the much-needed money from the law contract. With a $30 million cash shortfall, the city would temporarily lay off thousands of workers to avoid bankruptcy. The only city workers who would be able to keep working are police officers, firefighters, EMS workers, or employees of departments that raise revenue for the city.

The City Council also rejected a proposed contract to overhaul the Detroit Water and Sewerage Department, proposing to cut 81 percent of its workforce in an attempt to save cash.

“If we don’t stop this, there will be nothing left of the city of Detroit,” Michael Mulholland, secretary treasurer of the American Federation of State, Council and Municipal Employees Local 207, told the Detroit Free Press. With a city that has already lost much of its population due to declining jobs, cutting the workforce with furloughs and layoffs is only worsening the crisis.

At the current rate, Detroit is set to hit a weekly cash flow of $4.1 million in mid-December and drop to negative $4.8 million at the end of the year.

United Air cleared of 9/11 security lapse

0
A US federal judge has ruled that United Airlines is not responsible for a lapse in airport security during attacks on the World Trade Center on September 11, 2001.

US District Judge Alvin Hellerstein has approved a request on Wednesday to dismiss negligence claims brought by Larry Silverstein, the leaseholder of World Trade Center 7, against United Airlines and its affiliates.

Silverstein argued that United Airlines mismanaged a security checkpoint at an airport in the US state of Maine, which allowed an American Airlines plane to takeoff from its runway and crash into one of the World Trade Center buildings.

He said United was legally responsible for the screening of all passengers and accused it of negligence in failing to prevent the hijacking of the plane.

However, there are still many unanswered questions regarding the attacks, and many believe that the whole incident was an inside job, designed to justify subsequent US-led wars in Iraq and Afghanistan.

Experts lay claim to the fact that the collapse of the World Trade Center appears similar to a controlled demolition, with many architects and scientists maintaining that jet fuel cannot produce enough heat to melt the steel frame of the two buildings.

Four attacks happened in the United States on September 11, 2001. About 3,000 people died in the attacks.

In the worst attack, two planes, an American Airlines Flight 11 and a United Airlines Flight 175, crashed into the North and South towers of the World Trade Center complex in New York City. Both towers collapsed within two hours.

Food Banks Trying to Cope with Thanksgiving Rush

0

Joe Wright, ActivistPost.com | 

It is a tangible sign of just how bad the American economy is when food banks report that they are falling short of supplying the demand in ways they’ve never seen before.

One food pantry distributing turkeys at a café in Framingham, Massachusetts, simply cannot meet the demand this holiday season.

United Way Tri-County who runs the pantry is seeing a 400% increase in requests, plus many new faces:

That includes Danielle, who arrived at the pantry with her seven month old son hoping for a turkey. ‘I’ve never been through something like this, going through food pantries. I’ve been able to take care of myself but right now it’s hard,’ she said. (1)

A similar report is coming from a food bank in Eau Claire, Wisconsin, where “Sherry Hebert of the Trinity Lutheran Church pantry tells WEAU-TV that its clients used to be unemployed for the most part. But they’ve since been joined by lots of part-time workers who don’t make enough in wages to make ends meet.”

It is a disturbing trend that appears to be leading to a tipping point where the ranks of the unemployed and those in desperate need are swelling far faster than those who are able to donate.

The days leading up to Thanksgiving traditionally have been the busiest time for food banks. Current economic conditions are seeing a surge in families who have entered poverty; however, there is also a rise in those who could be considered the working poor, falling into what previously could even have been considered middle class. An executive of a food bank in Boston explains how things have changed:

‘The face of hunger is changing, and Greater Boston Food Bank is serving more and more middle class families,’ Catherine D’Amato, the food bank’s president and chief executive, said in a statement. ‘Nearly half of the people we serve do not qualify for government assistance. These are working adults who simply can’t make ends meet. This is the meal gap.’ (2)

Despite the claims of corporate media and corporate politicians about indicators of an economic turnaround, the numbers show an increase across the spectrum for food assistance requests. The call for food assistance could be seen as the true benchmark for the economic health of a nation, as it is normally the final place one goes to seek relief when all other options are exhausted.

About 14 percent of Massachusetts residents were in poverty last year, according to the latest revised numbers released by the Census Bureau Wednesday. A 2010 study by The Greater Boston Food Bank, which serves 550 agencies in Eastern Massachusetts, showed the demand for food assistance increased by 23 percent between 2005 and 2009, said spokeswoman Erin Caron. The agency, which distributed 41 million pounds of food last year, expects the upward trend to continue, she said. (3)

The revised numbers are not likely to be pleasant.

Another food bank which services over 100 smaller agencies from Massachusetts to New Hampshire reports an additional 30,000 people calling for assistance this season, a 43% increase.

In New York, Hurricane Sandy has added to the economic hardship already firmly in place, and a familiar refrain is stated by relief workers there:

‘Even places that were previously bedrock middle-class boroughs have significant amounts of people who are hungry or food secure because there just aren’t enough jobs and the jobs that do exist don’t pay a living wage,’ said Joel Berg, the director of the New York City Coalition Against Hunger. (4)

A recent report by the group shows that 1.4 million of New York’s 8.2 million population are not able to be self-sufficient. (5)

These are just a few snapshots about how horrible this Thanksgiving will be for an increasing number of people.

While nearly half the population has decided to use Black Friday to avail themselves of the latest electronics gadget, perceiving that they are actually saving money, the statistics show that America desperately needs to look out for one another. Especially as government assistance is stretched beyond its limits. Now we see that even traditional methods of community aid are beginning to fail.

Instead of purchasing something of very little true value — from corporations that only suck value from local communities — look around your immediate neighborhood for those who might need your assistance if you are able to provide it. The person you help today might very well be the person who helps you tomorrow.

And as we head through the rest of the holiday season and into the new year, most likely with less than we had last year, we need to commit ourselves to New Year’s resolutions that are less focused on the short-term riddance of personal vices, and instead turn our attention outward to community building, self-reliance, and a commitment to remain strong, independent and prepared so that we can contribute at the highest levels.

With a slight shift toward a long-term perspective, long-term solutions are guaranteed to follow.

Additional sources for this article:
(1) http://boston.cbslocal.com/2012/11/19/demand-grows-at-framingham-food-pantry/
(2), (3) http://www.bostonglobe.com/metro/2012/11/16/more-massachusetts-families-turn-food-banks-for-help-with-thanksgiving-dinner/KcjMfgl96CnO6mVvwegamN/story.html
(4) http://www.ny1.com/content/top_stories/172662/numbers-at-soup-kitchens–food-pantries-rise-before-thanksgiving
(5) https://www.nyccah.org/node/1536

Originally published on Activist Post

When Law and Order Break Down

0

Mac Slavo, SHTFplan.com |

Cities from coast-to-coast are facing unprecedented budget deficits that have left government officials with no choice but to strip police forces to a bare minimum. We now regularly hear about new ‘records’ being broken in the resulting crime waves that follow.

Law enforcement officials in Chicago, for example, have said that their city has deteriorated into a domestic war zone with gang violence leaving scores of people dead on a regular basis. Murder, rape, robbery and assault have skyrocketed in bankrupt Stockton, California, suggesting that local governments are quickly losing control.

In New Jersey, the city of Camden may soon be granted the dubious distinction of being the poorest and most violent city in America.

On a walkway 20 feet away, a middle-aged man lies dead, shot in the throat and head, sprawled on his back beside a battered 10-speed bicycle. His face is masked in blood that gleams bright red in the crime scene photographer’s flash.

Johnson watches tight-lipped as investigators comb the grass for shell casings. “Kids play out here. Average people live here,” he says. “I’m shaking. It’s getting too close.”

Gunfire rings out often in the neighborhood, he says, a regular reminder of the crime wave that has this city of 77,000 on pace to double its homicides in just three years, and has already shattered a nearly 20-year record for killings.

With 59 homicides so far this year, the murder rate is on par with levels seen in Haiti in the chaotic aftermath of the 2010 earthquake.

“A bullet has no name. If somebody shoots and I’m walking, I could be hit,” Johnson says. “People are afraid right now. You can see it in their faces.”

The crime surge coincides with new census data identifying Camden, long battered by vanishing industry, as the most impoverished city in the U.S., with 42 percent of residents under the poverty line, and an average family income of $21,191. If trends persist, Camden may soon hold the grim title of both the country’s poorest and most dangerous city.

Source: Huff Post

As local, state and federal officials in the United States realize the reality of our fiscal and economic situations, they will be forced to make serious cuts in areas that have become essential to the American way of life.

Personal safety, food security, health care and critical public services will inevitably be sacrificed as across-the-board austerity measures become the norm, not the exception.

Impoverishment will lead to desperation and anger, which in turn leads to “nothing left to lose” attitudes and a rise in violence and criminal activity.

The system is broke. The mathematics are simple. There is not enough money to go around. What we are seeing in Chicago, Detroit, Stockton and Camden is going to spread.

Gaza: Victimized by Israeli Terror Bombing

0

Stephen Lendman, rinf.com |

Tuesday night, Israel and Hamas agreed to halt hostilities. Midnight local time was chosen. Hamas didn’t want conflict in the first place.

Israel is a rogue state. It’s a serial provocateur. Multiple attacks were launched. Hamas responded defensively. It’s their right and responsibility under international law. It had no other choice.

It was wrongly accused of terrorism. Israel planned Operation Pillar of Cloud months ago.

Choosing target sites, overall tactics, and strategic aims require extensive planning. Killing Qassam Brigades leader Ahmed Jabari enraged Gazans justifiably. Israel did it to subvert a peace agreement he helped negotiate. Hamas responded.

Conflict rages into day 8. Israel has lots of killing and destruction left to do. It bears full responsibility for hostilities. It’s guilty of grievous crimes of war and against humanity.

Who knows when conflict will subside. Truce or not truce, it won’t end. Israel won’t let it. Israeli ceasefires and other agreements aren’t worth the paper they’re written on.

Duplicity, state terror, institutionalized racism, and belligerence as a way of life define Israel. It menaces the region and humanity. It’s worse than ever under Netanyahu. He can’t wait to kill again. Children and other civilians are his favorite targets.

A previous article expressed doubts about an announced truce. Netanyahu gave it away saying Israel “will not hesitate to do what is necessary to defend our people.”

In other words, Israel will enforce occupation harshness, continue targeted assassinations after agreeing not to, bomb and shell at will, accost fishermen at sea, kill farmers in their fields, shoot children for target practice, and maintain Gaza’s siege.

Mossad-connected DEBKAfile (DF) explained. It headlined “For Israel, a truce is the worst of all worlds: Tied hands, Hamas unbowed,” saying:

Ending current hostilities prevents Israel from winning Operation Pillar of Cloud decisively. Cast Lead was inconclusive. Invasion remains possible. Air operations aren’t enough.

Defeating Hamas requires full-scale war. In other words, Israel has lots of killing left to do. Terror bombing is a favorite tactic. It’s done against civilians to break their morale, cause panic, weaken an enemy’s will to fight, and inflict mass casualties and punishment.

Geneva and other international laws forbid targeting civilians. The Laws of War: Laws and Customs of War on Land (1907 Hague IV Convention) states:

Article 25: “The attack or bombardment, by whatever means, of towns, villages, dwellings, or buildings which are undefended is prohibited.”

Article 26: “The officer in command of an attacking force must, before commencing a bombardment, except in cases of assault, do all in his power to warn the authorities.”

Article 27: “In sieges and bombardments, all necessary steps must be taken to spare, as far as possible, buildings dedicated to religion, art, science, or charitable purposes, historic monuments, hospitals, and places where the sick and wounded are collected, provided they are not being used at the time for military purposes.”

Fourth Geneva protects civilians in time of war. It prohibits violence of any type against them. It also requires treatment for sick and wounded victims.

In September 1938, a League of Nations unanimous resolution prohibited the:

“bombardment of cities, towns, villages, dwellings or buildings not in the immediate neighborhood of the operations of land forces.”

“In cases where (legitimate targets) are so situated, (aircraft) must abstain from bombardment” if this action indiscriminately affects civilians.

The 1945 Nuremberg Principles prohibit “crimes against peace, war crimes and crimes against humanity.”

These include “inhumane acts committed against any civilian populations, before or during the war.”

Indiscriminate killing and “wanton destruction of cities, towns, or villages, or devastation not justified by military necessity” are absolutely prohibited.

The 1968 General Assembly Resolution on Human Rights prohibits launching attacks against civilian populations. Israel and America do it repeatedly by land, sea and terror bombings.

Guernica, Spain (1937) reflects Cast Lead and Operation Pillar of Cloud.

On April 26, 1937, German and Italian aircraft fire-bombed the small Basque town. It was done for their fascist ally, General Francisco Franco.

Guernica was destroyed. An estimated 1,650 people were killed. Many hundreds more were injured. Hitler was practicing for bigger fish to fry. Air force head Goring called the attack an “opportunity to test under fire whether (munitions) had been adequately developed.”

Joachim von Richthofen’s later revealed secret document described a planned operation, saying:

“First came the incendiary bombs which set a number of roofs on fire.” They were “followed the 250-kilogram heavy explosives” in order to “destroy water pipes thus hindering the extinguishing of the fires.”

He complained that direct hits weren’t high enough. Improved precision was needed. Numerous bridges and factories weren’t struck.

An eyewitness said:

“The only things left standing were a church, a sacred tree, the symbol of the Basque people.”

“There hadn’t been a single anti-aircraft gun in the town. It (was) mainly a fire raid.”

“A sight that haunted me for weeks was the charred bodies of several women and children huddled together in what had been the cellar of a house.”

Civilian sites were fair game. Guernica had no military significance. Terror-bombing leveled the town. It was in flames. It wasn’t the first civilian air attack.

Germans did it in WW I. So did Britain against Iraq in the 1920s. Poison gas was used. Then Secretary for Air and War Winston Churchill’s secret memo recommended it.

In a May 12, 1919, he wrote: “I do not understand the squeamishness about the use of gas….I am strongly in favour of using poisoned gas against uncivilised tribes.”

In 1937, Hitler used explosives, fragmentation bombs and incendiaries. Basque Autonomous Republic president Jose Antonio de Aguirre called the attack more brutal than ever before seen. Fascism revealed its ugly face.

“They scorched the city and fired machine guns at the women and children who fled in panic, resulting in numerous deaths,” he said.

Bombing began at the busiest time of day, around 4:30PM. It was Monday, market day.

One account said “streets were jammed with townspeople and peasants from the countryside. Never before in modern warfare had noncombatants been slaughtered in such numbers, and by such means.”

Another account said,”Villagers who were not immediately killed fled to the fields to take refuge, only to be ravaged by plunging machine gun fighters.”

British author/journalist George L. Steer wrote for The Times:

Up to that time, attacking Guernica was “unparalleled in military history.” Heavy bombing panicked people. Machine gun strafing drove them underground. Incendiary bombs destroyed their hiding places. Everything going on was horrifying.

“When I entered Guernica after midnight, houses were crashing on either side, and it was utterly impossible even for firemen to enter the center of the town.”

“The hospitals of Josefinas and Convento de Santa Clara were glowing heaps of embers. All the churches except that of Santa Maria were destroyed, and the few houses which still stood were doomed.”

“When I revisited Guernica this afternoon most of the town was still burning, and new fires had broken out. About 30 dead were laid out in a ruined hospital.”

Guernica was history’s first city destroyed by terror bombing. Civilian men, women, and children were deliberately targeted. Military expert Wolfgang Schmidt told Der Spiegel:

“For the German air force, Guernica was a trial run on how one can spread horror and distress through attacks on cities and towns.”

“Of course,” bombing the city “was a blatant violation of human rights and had a terrorist character. It was accepted that civilians would be harmed.”

It was worse than that. They were deliberately targeted to inflict mass casualties.

A third or more of the population of 5,000 was either killed or wounded. Almost three-fourths of Guernica’s buildings were destroyed or heavily damaged. Fires engulfed the city. They burned for three days. Area farms were bombed.

A survivor said:

“The air was alive with the cries of the wounded. I saw a man crawling down the street, dragging his broken legs.”

“Pieces of people and animals were lying everywhere.”

“In the wreckage there was a young woman. I could not take my eyes off her. Bones stuck through her dress. Her head twisted right around her neck. She lay, mouth open, her tongue hanging out. I vomited and lost consciousness.”

Guernica had no strategic significance. Hitler’s bombed it for target practice. It was dress rehearsal for WW II. Wehrmacht generals flexed their muscles. They signaled what lay ahead.

On the attack’s 70th anniversary, Der Spiegel called Guernica’s destruction “practicing blitzkrieg in Basque country.” For Hitler’s Condor Legion, “it was little more than a training run.”

Commander Wolfram von Richthofen said Guernica was “literally razed to the ground. Bomb craters (were) seen in the streets. Simply wonderful.” He ignored how many people were slaughtered.

Pablo Picasso’s famous painting portrayed what happened. In stark black, white and gray, he depicted terror-bombing civilian men, women and children.

Twisted, writhing forms showed images of a screaming mother holding a dead child, a corpse with wide-open eyes, and a gored horse. Art historian Herbert Read called the work “a cry of outrage and horror amplified by a great genius.”

Guernica signaled what lay ahead. Both sides used terror bombing in WW II. It’s been used ever since. Intensity, kill count, and destructiveness increased.

The London blitz, fire-bombing Dresden and Tokyo, Hiroshima and Nagasaki, and numerous other examples show its savagery. Palestinians know its ferocity.

Cast Lead inflicted 23 days of slaughter and mass destruction. Terror weapons were used. Illegal ones. Gaza was blanketed with cluster bombs. They’re illegal. On impact, submunition bomblets are released over a wide area. They kill, maim, destroy or disable targeted sites.

Flechette metal darts penetrate human bones. They cause horrific injuries. Artillery shells contain thousands of them. Explosions release them at high speed over a range of about 300 meters.

Depleted uranium munitions spread toxic radiation. Chemical and biological agents were used. White phosphorous bombs and shells burned flesh to the bone. Water can’t extinguish it. Victim muscles and cells were completely destroyed.

Thermobaric bomb blasts sucked oxygen from spaces and human lungs. Norwegian Dr. Mads Gilbert traveled to Gaza in January 2009. He performed humanitarian surgeries.

His book “Eyes in Gaza” explained the horror. He treated children with legs blown off, abdomens sliced open, and various injuries never seen before. Terror weapons caused them.

Gaza during Cast Lead was the “most horrific experience” of his life. He spent two weeks at Al Shifa Hospital. He said Gaza today remains in ruins. Siege causes disease, deaths and human misery.

Israeli attacks terrify people. Gaza’s tunnel economy provides minimal help. Israel and Egypt target it for destruction. People struggle on best they can.

Operation Pillar of Cloud picked up where Cast Lead left off. Conflict rages. Agreed truce so far is a mirage. Israel has unfinished business. On day 8, slaughter and destruction continue.

On November 20 and 21, the Kuala Lumpur Foundation to Criminalise War (KLFCW) held hearings on Israeli crimes of war and against humanity.

A November 20 press release said in part:

“Palestine witnesses relate(d) acts of ‘genocide.’ ” Salah Al Sammouni testified. On January 5, 2009, Israel murdered 21 family members. He lost his father, mother, and infant daughter.

Dozens of other family members were injured. Salah’s home was bombed three times. Doing so had no military significance. It was done to terrorize civilians.

He recounted “screaming, shouting and crying. Blood was everywhere. I lifted my daughter and she had wounds on her neck and stomach.”

“She was dead. Then I heard my wife calling my name. I went to her. There were a lot of dead bodies on top of her. Then, I slowly pulled her out. She was injured and she was covered in blood. Three of my sons were badly injured and the other one had difficulties in breathing even now.”

Mahmoud Al Sammouni was aged 12 during Cast Lead. He saw Israeli soldiers shoot his father in cold blood. F-16s were terror bombing. Israeli soldiers shot everyone in sight.

His four-year old brother was shot “twice in the chest and once in the head.” Four of his older brothers were shot “in their legs and behind the ear.”

He “walked barefooted” to Al Shifa Hospital for help.

“We went to the main road. Along the way we saw a lot of blood on the street, spent bullet shells, shoes. Iron and metal pieces were all across the street so that no one could pass.”

“The soldiers were shooting randomly and people were scared. As we walked along the road, we saw a tank at the side of the road. It was facing the other way.”

“When the soldiers saw us, the tank was turned in our direction and they shot right above our heads.”

Other testimonies were riveting. Israel again is terrorizing Gaza. So far it’s short of invasion. Eight days of terror bombing struck over 1,500 sites. Death and injury tolls keep mounting. Mass destruction was caused.

Israel bears full responsibility. Gaza again is its terror bombing victim. Who knows when this will end. Palestinians know what ebbs will again flow whenever Israel wishes. That’s how rogue states operate. Israel is one of the worst.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “How Wall Street Fleeces America: Privatized Banking, Government Collusion and Class War”

http://www.claritypress.com/Lendman.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

Homeland Security Wants to Double Predator Drone Fleet

0

EFF |

Despite renewed criticism from both parties in Congress that domestic drones pose a privacy danger to US citizens–and a report from its own Inspector General recommending to stop buying them–the Department of Homeland Security (DHS) has indicated it wants to more than double its fleet of Predator drones used to fly surveillance missions inside the United States.

Yesterday, California Watch reported that DHS signed a contract that could be worth as much as $443 million with General Atomics for the purchase up to fourteen additional Predator drones to fly near the border of Mexico and Canada. Congress would still need to appropriate the funds, but if they did, DHS’ drone fleet woud increase to twenty-four.

While many people may think the US only flies Predator drones overseas, DHS has already spent $250 million over the last six years on ten surveillance Predators of its own. Customs and Border Protection (CBP)–a division of DHS–uses the unmanned drones inside the U.S. to patrol the borders with surveillance equipment like video cameras, infrared cameras, heat sensors, and radar.

They say the drones are vital in the fight to stop illegal immigrants, but as EFF reported in June, the DHS Inspector General issued a report faulting DHS for wasting time, money, and resources using drones that were ineffective and lacked oversight. The Inspector General chastised the agency for buying two drones last year despite knowing these problems and recommended they cease buying them until the problems could be fixed.

Perhaps worse, DHS is also flying Predator drone missions on behalf of a diverse group of local, state, and federal law enforcement agencies for missions beyond immigration issues. We know they have lent the drones out to the county sheriff’s department in North Dakota and the Texas Rangers, among others, but unfortunately, we don’t know the full extent DHS lending program. DHS, as is their custom, is keeping that information secret.

In response, last month EFF sued DHS under the Freedom of Information Act demanding answers about how and why it loans out its Predator drones to other law enforcement agencies across the country. EFF’s lawsuit asks for the records and logs of CBP drone flights conducted in conjunction with other agencies.

These drones pose a multitude of privacy concerns to all Americans, as the Congressional Research Service (Congress’ non-partisan research arm) detailed in this comprehensive report on domestic drones and the Fourth Amendment. The report explains drones can be equipped with, among other capabilities, facial recognition technology, fake cell phone towers to intercept phone calls, texts and GPS locations, and in a few years, will even be able to see through walls.

Despite these concerns, DHS has not publicly issued any privacy rules to make sure drones do not spy on US residents in border states going about their daily lives. In fact, at a Congressional hearing on the subject, DHS refused to send anyone to testify, leading both parties to criticize their absence.

This is even more troubling given DHS is also leading the push to get local police agencies to purchase their own drones by handing out $4 million to agencies to “facilitate and accelerate” their use. The FAA estimates as many as 30,000 drones could be flying over US territory by the end of the decade.

The booming drone industry, which has announced a PR campaign in an attempt tamp down the public’s privacy concerns, is quick to point out that these police drones–which cost anywhere from under $100,000 to $1 million–are smaller than Predators and do not have the same flight time, so police would not be able to surveil Americans for hours or days at a time like Predator drones could. Yet as the technology advances rapidly and becomes cheaper every year, smaller drones will soon be able to fly for an extended time period as well.

For example, Lockhead Martin has developed a drone that weighs only 13.2 pounds, well within the FAA’s domestic weight limits, and can be recharged by a laser on the ground, allowing it remain in the air indefinitely.

Several members of Congress have commendably introduced bills that would protect the privacy of Americans and increase transparency surrounding their use. These members, who voted for increased drone use in February but have recently expressed second thoughts, should call DHS representatives before Congress to explain their position. The American people deserve answers about to whom Homeland Security is loaning its drones, how DHS plans on protecting Americans’ privacy, and why they even need any more, given they are misusing the drones they already have.

Rights activists march through Belfast

0

Ben Chacko, Morning Star |

Women’s rights activists marched through Belfast last night in support of “legal and safe” abortion on an international day of action called in response to the death of Savita Halappanavar.

She died on October 28 from complications arising from a miscarriage.

Doctors reportedly refused an abortion because Ireland was “a Catholic country,” delaying treatment by three days and allowing the infections which killed her to spread.

Abortion is illegal both in the Republic of Ireland and in the north and pro-choice campaigners say that without a change in the law more women will die.

The Belfast rally was called by the Alliance for Choice Belfast and the Belfast Feminist Network and was backed by the Northern Ireland Committee of the Irish Congress of Trade Unions (NIC-ICTU).

Alliance for Choice’s Emma Campbell said that after Ms Halappanavar’s death the group “believed more strongly than ever” that Northern Ireland needed parity with Britain’s 1967 Abortion Act.

“Legalising abortion is the only way to get a health system that protects women,” she said.

Communist Party of Ireland chairwoman Lynda Walker said the Republic needed to change the law as well.

“This tragedy has brought the issue to the public’s attention,” she said. “The Communist Party and women’s organisations welcome the fact that NIC-ICTU is now calling for legal abortion and supporting this action in Belfast.”

Schoolgirl expelled for refusing to wear RFID tag

0

Iain Thomson, The Register | A plan by a San Antonio school district to continuously monitor its students using RFID has run into legal problems after one of them took a stand against being forced to use the tracking technology.

Northside Independent School District (NISD) in San Antonio, Texas has spent over $500,000 on its “Student Locator Project,” a lanyard worn around the neck that has both a bar code and RFID tag built in. Students need the lanyard to use the library or cafeteria, vote in school elections, and in some cases for toilet breaks, and it allows the school to track their every movement throughout the day.

Andrea Hernandez, a sophomore student at the John Jay High School’s Science and Engineering Academy in San Antonio, has been effectively expelled from school for refusing to wear the tags, citing religious, privacy, and freedom of expression reasons.

The school offered to give her a special lanyard with the RFID tag removed, but she refused to wear this, either, as it would be taken as her supporting the system. The school also stopped her from passing out leaflets to other students regarding the locator project.

“I feel it’s an invasion of my religious beliefs,” she told InfoWars. “I feel it’s the implementation of the Mark of the Beast*. It’s also an invasion of my privacy and my other rights.”

After a series of talks between the school, Hernandez, and her parents, her position at the science academy was “withdrawn” and she has been reassigned to another school. The family are now taking action against the school with the help of the Rutherford Institute, a civil liberties group.

The lawsuit will put a spanner in the works for the RFID tagging scheme, since the NISD already has plans to roll out the tracking scheme to over 100,000 students under its remit. The school district is hoping the system will increase school attendance, and thus win it a grant of nearly $2m from the state government.

“This is about money, plain and simple,” John Whitehead, president of The Rutherford Institute, toldThe Register. “School violence is falling and, as Bill Clinton pointed out, a public school is a very safe place for a child to be. It’s all about getting funding from the RFID system.”

The school has already installed over 200 CCTV cameras in an attempt to curb truancy, some of which have a live link directly to the local police department, Whitehead said. All of this, along with the RFID scheme, is paid for out of the education budget.

“What’s happening now is going to spread across the country,” Whitehead said. “If you can start early in life getting people accustomed to living in surveillance society then in future it’ll be a lot easier to roll these things out to the larger populace.”

The school district was unavailable for comment. ®

Bootnote

* For those not of a religious bent, the Mark of the Beast is a reference to the Book of Revelation, which the author John claimed was God’s description to him of how the world will end and Jesus will return to earth.

Revelation 13:16-18 says that followers of the Beast “receive a mark in their right hand, or in their foreheads,” which allows them to buy and sell goods. Certain biblical sects have taken this to mean RFID chips or identity cards.

Other non-believers think John was a bit too fond of funny mushrooms and shouldn’t be taken too seriously.

The infinite economic enslavement of America

0

Mike Adams, NaturalNews |

Those pesky debt ceilings are just never high enough. Not $10 trillion, nor $14 trillion or even $18 trillion. The problem with debt ceilings is that, in a nation of runaway, criminally insane debt multiplication, debt ceilings keep getting in the way of what the globalist banksters really want: INFINITE debt!

Those are the words of U.S. Treasury Secretary Timothy Geithner who said on Bloomberg TV, “We ought to just eliminate the debt ceiling.”

Infinite debt equals infinite spending.

Infinite debt also equals infinite enslavement, and that’s the point of it all. Every dollar created by the Fed and loaned to the U.S. Treasury is another dollar for which American taxpayers are placed in hock to the global banksters.

Infinite government growth

Infinite spending is also infinite power over the economy. A government that has no limits on spending has no limits on its growth. It also has no moral restraint over the scope of the domain it claims to control. Need another 200,000 TSA agents to run crotch-o-rama checkpoints on the streets of America? No problem: There’s no debt limit, so just invent the money out of thin air and spend away!

Need to give out more free goodies to dumbed-down voters who only elect whichever candidate promises the most handouts? That’s easy, too: Just create more money out of thin air, rack up a few trillion dollars in additional debt, and use the money to hand out Obama phones, food stamps, welfare checks or whatever it takes. When debt no longer has any meaning, the sky’s the limit on spending, and political office can easily be bought by promising more handouts.

What happens when all the new debt comes due? That’s easy, too: Borrow more money from the Fed to make the interest payments on the existing debt! They’re just numbers, after all, right? It doesn’t actually matter if there are 15 zeroes after the leading digit or 24 zeroes, does it?

In a nation where the vast majority of voters are no longer capable of grasping simple mathematical concepts (like compounding debt), whether the debt is 16 trillion, or quadrillion, or quintillion seems to be of no consequence whatsoever.

That is, until the day of financial reckoning arrives.

The Day of Reckoning

I’m going to throw a party of the Day of Reckoning, to celebrate humanity reaching the apex of fiscal insanity. It was a journey much more expensive than sending a man to the moon, and yet we have nothing to show for it. Not even moon rocks.

The Day of Reckoning will arrive when the mass delusion of debt without consequence can no longer be sustained. Almost certainly, a war will have already been started in order to provide cover for the economic collapse. Because if there’s one thing far worse than killing civilians in war, it’s having voters find out Big Government cheated them out of their pensions, incomes and savings. Dropping a few bombs on some unlucky civilian population in a little-known nation somewhere is a surefire way to change the subject and blame somebody else for the problems created by runaway government spending.

As the consequences of infinite debt start to congeal, rest assured the government will try to save itself by confiscating nearly all wealth from the population. You can expect to see all the following taking place:

– Government confiscation of private pension funds and IRAs.
– Government confiscation of all precious metals (gold and silver).
– Huge increases in corporate and personal income taxes.
– Harsh new death taxes that effectively confiscate farms and ranches.
– Accelerated currency debasement that effectively “steals” the value of the dollars you’ve already earned.

This is the new era of not just “big government” but “MONSTER government!” It will now grow to the point where it suffocates freedom and liberty, enslaves the population and destroys everything of value in society: Wealth, morals, education, liberty and even rugged individualism.

The Hypocrisy of US Foreign Policy

0

Chycho | To emphasize the hypocrisy of US foreign policy in the following reply from President Obama, the word “missiles” has been replaced by “drones”, the word “landing”replaced by “striking”, and the word“Israel(i)” replaced by “the country’s”. Obama’s actual video reply follows the modified quote.

“Let’s understand what the precipitating event here was that’s causing the current crisis, and that was an ever-escalating number of drones that were striking, not just in the country’s territory, but in areas that are populated, and there’s no country on Earth that would tolerate drones raining down on its citizens from outside its borders.

“So we are fully supportive of the country’s right to defend itself from drones striking people’s homes and workplaces and potentially killing civilians, and we will continue to support the country’s right to defend itself.”

As for a non-hypocritical perspective on the Israeli offensive in Gaza, please see the following interview on Democracy Now! with Phyllis Bennis of the Institute for Policy Studies based in Washington, D.C.

Interview: Gaza Ceasefire to Be Decided in Cairo, But Will Washington Rein In Israeli Occupation, Blockade?

NSA refuses to declassify Obama’s cybersecurity directive

0

RT |

The National Security Agency has shot down a Freedom of Information Act request for details about an elusive presidential order that may allow the government to deploy the military within the United States for the supposed sake of cybersecurity.

The Electronic Privacy Information Center (EPIC) reports on Tuesday that their recent FOIA request for information about a top-secret memo signed last month by US President Barack Obama has been rejected [PDF]. Now attorneys for EPIC say they plan to file an appeal to get to the bottom of Presidential Policy Directive 20.

Although the executive order has been on the books for a month now, only last week did details emerge about the order after the Washington Post reported that Pres. Obama’s signature to the top-secret directive could allow the White House to send in recruits from the Pentagon to protect America’s cyber-infrastructure.

Because Presidential Policy Directive 20 is classified, the exact wording of the elusive document has been a secret kept only by those with first-hand knowledge of the memo. For their November 14 article, the Post spoke with sources that saw the document to report that the directive “effectively enables the military to act more aggressively to thwart cyberattacks on the nation’s web of government and private computer networks.”

In response to the Post’s report, EPIC filed a FOIA request to find out if the policy directive could mean military deployment within the United States, especially since the sources who have seen the memo say it allows the Pentagon to pursue actions against adversaries within a vaguely described terrain known only as “cyberspace.”

“What it does, really for the first time, is it explicitly talks about how we will use cyber-operations,” a senior administration official told the Post. “Network defense is what you’re doing inside your own networks. . . . Cyber-operations is stuff outside that space, and recognizing that you could be doing that for what might be called defensive purposes.”

“We’d like to see what the language says and see what power is given,” EPIC attorney Amie Stepanovich told RT this week – a matter that will now have to be appealed before any details can be determined.

News of the directive comes just as lawmakers in Congress failed once again to approve a cybersecurity legislation that would provide new connections between the federal government and the private sector in order to supposedly ramp up the United States’ protection from foreign hackers. With the defeat of that bill, though, members of both the House and Senate now say they expect Pres. Obama to sign a separate executive order that will lay down the groundwork for a more thorough cybersecurity plan to be established.

Meanwhile, the commander-in-chief has already signed a secret order – Presidential Policy Directive 20 – that might remain classified unless EPIC can win in court.

“We believe that the public hasn’t been able to involve themselves in the cybersecurity debate, and the reason they can’t involve themselves is because they don’t have the right amount of information,” Stepanovich tells RT.

Responding to the FOIA request, the NSA says releasing information on the directive cannot occur because“disclosure could reasonably be expected to cause exceptionally grave damage to the national security.”

“Because the document is currently and properly classified, it is exempt from disclosure,” the NSA writes.

Cameron accused of ‘compounding cover up’ over sex abuse

0

David Cameron and senior ministers have been accused of “compounding the cover up” over sex abuse allegations about Sir Cyril Smith, the late Liberal Democrat MP, by failing to produce a police dossier allegedly seized by MI5.

Telegraph.co.uk |

Last week Tony Robinson, a special branch officer with Lancashire Police in the 1970s, told The Daily Telegraph he had seen a dossier “thick” with allegations from boys claiming they had been abused by Sir Cyril.

He said that after taking the file out of the safe at special branch headquarters in Hutton, Preston, he was contacted by an officer from MI5 who told him it needed to be sent to London.

Simon Danczuk, the Labour MP for Rochdale, today asked the Prime Minister to publish any “police files relating to Smith”.

The Prime Minister declined to answer directly, and instead pointed to an investigation which has been opened by Greater Manchester Police which will examine allegations dating back to 1974.

David Cameron, the Prime Minister, said: “I understand that Greater Manchester Police have today confirmed that they will now investigate any allegations of sexual abuse that happened from 1974.

“I would say to these gentlemen take them [any allegations] to the police, that’s the way we investigate things in this country.”

The new investigation comes after Sir Cyril was described in the Commons last week as a “29-stone bully” who “imposed himself” on boys in care.

Simon Danczuk, the Labour MP for Sir Cyril’s former constituency in Rochdale, said that a single, over-arching investigation was needed to look at all the claims.

He said: “The whole thing is an absolute mess, it is not a joined up approach. A single police unit needs to look at all the allegations. Mr Cameron and the Home Office also need to look for this dossier which is allegedly held by MI5.”

Mr Robinson said that before the dossier was seized by MI5, it was sent to the Director of Public Prosecutions who decided that pursuing the allegations was “not in the public interest”.

Both Lancashire Police and the Crown Prosecution Service say they have been unable to find the dossier.

Steve Heywood, the GMP Assistant Chief Constable, said today: “It has been agreed that Greater Manchester Police will now investigate any allegations of sexual abuse involving the late Sir Cyril Smith that happened from 1974 onwards.

“We have taken this step to clear up any confusion that may have existed within the communities of Rochdale, and among the wider public, as to which Force is looking into the allegations.”

Mr Heywood said there had been much “speculation” about whether his force had investigated allegations of sexual abuse involving Sir Cyril Smith in the 1980s and 1990s.

He added that detectives were “examining our records to see what involvement Greater Manchester Police may have had”.

Mr Heywood said Rochdale was previously within the jurisdiction of Lancashire Police but after geographical boundaries being redrawn in 1974 became part of his force.

He added: “Therefore, to make it explicitly clear, Greater Manchester Police will now investigate any reports of abuse that happened after 1974, and any abuse that happened before that date will be investigated by Lancashire Police.”

Lancashire Police said: “We take matters such as this extremely seriously and anyone who does come forward should do so with confidence that they will be treated appropriately and with sensitivity.

“While we believe there was an investigation into allegations against Mr Smith in the late 1960s, no records are now held and it cannot be ascertained whether a file was passed to the Director of Public Prosecutions.”

29 Signs That The Elite Are Transforming Society Into A Total Domination Control Grid

0

Michael Snyder, Activist Post | 

The elite want to tightly control almost everything that we do, say and think. When most people think of “tyranny”, they think of thugs with guns and little dictators running around barking orders at everyone. But that is not how the elite are accomplishing their goals these days. They want us to actually believe that we have freedom and that we are choosing our own leaders, but in the background they are exerting “soft power” in a way that is absolutely ruthless.

They fund the political campaigns of our politicians, they own nearly all of the large corporations and financial institutions, they exert very tight control over the media and their agenda is being promoted through the education systems of virtually every nation on the planet. What the elite are doing is not illegal. In fact, they use the government and they use the law to accomplish their purposes. That is one reason why the elite love big government. For them, it is an instrument of control. The larger the government is, the easier it is to watch, track, monitor and control the rest of us.

As you read this, a “total domination control grid” is being constructed all around us that is far beyond anything that George Orwell ever dreamed of. This system is advancing on hundreds of different fronts, and it is getting tighter and more restrictive with each passing day. We may think that we still have a certain degree of liberty, but if you start doing things that the system does not like, the system has a way of getting you back in line very quickly. In the end, it is all about control.

There are many among the elite that actually believe that a tightly controlled society that is dominated by government institutions that they control is what is best for humanity. Many of them honestly believe that society would descend into chaos without a strong hand guiding it. Many of them truly are convinced that those that are “enlightened” are doing a noble thing by guiding humanity into the “bright future” that the elite are designing for them.

But of course the freedoms and the liberties of the common people must be greatly limited in order to get us to that “bright future”. We are like cattle that need to be penned in for our own good. This is how the elite actually think. I spent many years being educated by them and rubbing shoulders with them. They should not be trusted. Once our liberties and freedoms are gone, they will be nearly impossible to get back. And once the elite have total control, we will be faced with a tyranny unlike anything humanity has ever seen before.

The following are 29 signs that the elite are transforming society into a total domination control grid…

1. A new bill in the U.S. Senate would allow more than 20 different government agencies to read your email without a search warrant.

2. Next generation facial recognition cameras that can identify a person in less than a second and “send authorities all known intelligence about anyone who enters a camera’s field of vision” are being put up in southern California.

3. A highly sophisticated surveillance grid known as “Trapwire” is being installed in major cities and at “high value targets” all over the United States. Unfortunately, most Americans do not even realize that it exists.

4. Police departments all over America are beginning to deploy unmanned surveillance drones in the skies over their cities. But don’t think that a drone is not watching you just because you don’t live in a major city. The truth is that the federal government has been using unmanned surveillance drones to spy on farmers in Iowa and Nebraska. There could be a drone over your house right now and you might not ever know it.

5. Individual politicians know more about you than they ever have before. The amount of information that the Obama campaign has compiled on potential voters is absolutely frightening…

If you voted this election season, President Obama almost certainly has a file on you. His vast campaign database includes information on voters’ magazine subscriptions, car registrations, housing values and hunting licenses, along with scores estimating how likely they were to cast ballots for his reelection.

6. The UK is often five or ten years ahead of much of the rest of the world in implementing “Big Brother” police state measures. Over there it is now against the law to insult someone with your speech. If you say something that is “likely” to insult a Muslim or a homosexual you could end up being dragged in front of a judge. It is only a matter of time before we see these kinds of laws all over the planet.

7. Could you imagine the government telling you what the temperature inside your own home can be? A new law in France would do exactly that…

Heating a French home could soon require an income tax consultation or even a visit to the doctor under legislation to force conservation in the nation’s $46 billion household energy market.

A bill adopted by the lower house this month would set prices that homes pay based on wages, age and climate. Utilities Electricite de France and GDF Suez will use the data to reward consumers who cut power and natural gas usage and penalize those whom regulators decide are wasteful.

8. Control freak bureaucrats love to tell others how to run their lives. For example, one man down in Orlando, Florida was recently ordered to rip out the vegetable garden that he was growing in his front yard. Will we eventually get to the point where even the smallest details of our lives are micromanaged by the government?

9. Most Americans don’t realize this, but the DNA of almost every newborn baby in America is collected and stored by the government. What plans do they have for all of this DNA?

10. All over America, schools are beginning to require students to carry IDs with RFID microchips in them wherever they go. Fortunately, some students are fighting back…

The San Antonio sophomore who opposed microchipping student IDs that would track their every movement has inspired a groundswell of 300 students in her huge district who now refuse to wear the identification chips over religious, personal privacy, safety and civil liberties concerns. In addition, some 700 other people have signed petitions opposing the microchipping program.

11. There is more crossover between our education system and our law enforcement system than ever before. An increasing number of schools in the United States have police officers roaming their hallways, and today there are more than 70,000 children behind bars in America.

12. When you rely on FEMA to take care of you, it can literally feel like you are in prison. The following is a description of what life is like in one FEMA camp that was set up in New Jersey in the aftermath of Hurricane Sandy…

‘Sitting there last night you could see your breath,’ displaced resident Brian Sotelo told the Asbury Park Press. ‘At (Pine Belt) the Red Cross made an announcement that they were sending us to permanent structures up here that had just been redone, that had washing machines and hot showers and steady electric, and they sent us to tent city. We got (expletived).’

Sotelo said Blackhawk helicopters patrol the skies ‘all day and night’ and a black car with tinted windows surveys the camp while the government moves heavy equipment past the tents at night. According to the story, reporters aren’t even allowed in the fenced complex, where lines of displaced residents form outside portable toilets. Security guards are posted at every door, and residents can’t even use the toilet or shower without first presenting I.D.

‘They treat us like we’re prisoners,’ Ashley Sabol told Reuters. ‘It’s bad to say, but we honestly feel like we’re in a concentration camp.’

13. Your cell phone collects information about you wherever you go, and law enforcement authorities in the United States requested that cell phone data be turned over to them more than a million times in 2011 alone.

14. The federal government has created an iPhone app that is designed to encourage all of us to take photos of “suspicious activity” and report our neighbors to the authorities.

15. The U.S. government is increasingly using spyware to monitor the behavior of their employees while they are at work.

16. According to three NSA whistleblowers, the agency “has the capability to do individualized searches, similar to Google, for particular electronic communications in real time through such criteria as target addresses, locations, countries and phone numbers, as well as watch-listed names, keywords, and phrases in email.”

17. Private corporations are gathering every shred of information about you that they possible can. One of the largest companies involved in “mining our data” is known as Acxiom. It turns out that Acxiom has compiled information on more than 190 million people in the United States alone…

The company fits into a category called database marketing. It started in 1969 as an outfit called Demographics Inc., using phone books and other notably low-tech tools, as well as one computer, to amass information on voters and consumers for direct marketing. Almost 40 years later, Acxiom has detailed entries for more than 190 million people and 126 million households in the U.S., and about 500 million active consumers worldwide. More than 23,000 servers in Conway, just north of Little Rock, collect and analyze more than 50 trillion data ‘transactions’ a year.

18. We are being trained to give up our privacy and our dignity in the name of “security”. For example, what the TSA did recently to one woman who was dying of leukemia was absoutely shameful…

A dying woman says a a security pat-down at Sea-Tac Airport left her embarrassed in front of crowds of people.

Michelle Dunaj says screeners checked under bandages from recent surgeries and refused to give her a private search when she requested one.

19. According to one recent survey, nearly one-third of all Americans would be willing to submit to a “TSA body cavity search” in order to fly.

20. Law enforcement authorities all over the United States will soon be driving around in unmarked vehicles looking inside your cars and even under your clothes using the same backscatter technology currently being used by the TSA at U.S. airports…

American cops are set to join the US military in deploying American Science & Engineering’s Z Backscatter Vans, or mobile backscatter radiation x-rays. These are what TSA officials call ‘the amazing radioactive genital viewer,’ now seen in airports around America, ionizing the private parts of children, the elderly, and you (yes you).

These pornoscannerwagons will look like regular anonymous vans, and will cruise America’s streets, indiscriminately peering through the cars (and clothes) of anyone in range of its mighty isotope-cannon. But don’t worry, it’s not a violation of privacy. As AS&E’s vice president of marketing Joe Reiss sez, ‘From a privacy standpoint, I’m hard-pressed to see what the concern or objection could be.’

21. A company known as BRS Labs has developed “pre-crime surveillance cameras” that supposedly can identify criminal activity before it happens. These cameras are being installed at major transportation hubs all over San Francisco.

22. According to Gizmodo, the Department of Homeland Security will soon be using laser-based scanners that can scan your body, your clothes and your luggage from 164 feet away…

Within the next year or two, the U.S. Department of Homeland Security will instantly know everything about your body, clothes, and luggage with a new laser-based molecular scanner fired from 164 feet (50 meters) away. From traces of drugs or gun powder on your clothes to what you had for breakfast to the adrenaline level in your body–agents will be able to get any information they want without even touching you.
And without you knowing it.

The technology is so incredibly effective that, in November 2011, its inventors weresubcontracted by In-Q-Tel to work with the US Department of Homeland Security.

In-Q-Tel is a company founded “in February 1999 by a group of private citizens at the request of the Director of the CIA and with the support of the U.S. Congress.” According to In-Q-Tel, they are the bridge between the Agency and new technology companies.

Their plan is to install this molecular-level scanning in airports and border crossings all across the United States.

23. A complex network of automated license plate readers carefully track the movements of millions of vehicles as they move in and out of Washington D.C. and the surrounding suburbs. Most people do not even know that they are there.

24. The FBI is spending a billion dollars to develop a biometric identification system that will reportedly be far more sophisticated than anything that law enforcement in the United States has ever had before….

The US Federal Bureau of Investigation has begun rolling out its new $1 billion biometric Next Generation Identification (NGI) system. In essence, NGI is a nationwide database of mugshots, iris scans, DNA records, voice samples, and other biometrics, that will help the FBI identify and catch criminals – but it is how this biometric data is captured, through a nationwide network of cameras and photo databases, that is raising the eyebrows of privacy advocates.

Until now, the FBI relied on IAFIS, a national fingerprint database that has long been due an overhaul. Over the last few months, the FBI has been pilot testing a facial recognition system – and soon, detectives will also be able to search the system for other biometrics such as DNA records and iris scans.

25. If the government decides that you are a “bad guy”, they can put you on a “no fly list” that will ban you from flying indefinitely. This can be done to you at any time, without any notice, and you won’t be told that it has happened. In fact, as one prepper discovered recently, you might only find out that you are on the list when you try to board a flight.

26. Those that revere individual liberty are now being labeled as “potential terrorists” in official U.S. government documents.

27. A National Guard whistleblower recently revealed that members of his unit were told that “doomsday preppers” will be treated as “terrorists” when civil unrest breaks out.

28. One family in Idaho recently had their home raided by a SWAT team because a computer identified them as “constitutionalists” after someone had phoned in and complained about a domestic disturbance at their address.

29. Today, the mainstream media in the United States is totally dominated by just six giant corporations. Those corporations own television networks, cable channels, movie studios, newspapers, magazines, publishing houses, music labels and large numbers of popular websites. The way that almost every American looks at the world is being constantly influenced by these media corporations every single day.

Please share this list with as many people as you can. We desperately need to wake people up while there is still time.

This article first appeared here at The Truth.  Michael Snyder is a writer, speaker and activist who writes and edits his own blogs The American Dream and Economic Collapse Blog. Follow him on Twitter here.

 

Private security companies to be self-regulated

0

Guardian.co.uk |

The statutory licensing of more than 330,000 individual private security workers is to be scrapped under a shakeup of the regulation of the industry proposed by Home Office ministers.

They are instead proposing that private security companies regulate their own staff, with the industry’s watchdog, the Security Industry Authority, moved into the private sector.

Ministers say the phased move to a “business regulation regime” reflects the “maturity of the private security industry” and supports its willingness to take on further responsibility and be more accountable for its actions.

The new regime will shift responsibility for the standards and behaviour of security staff from the SIA to an estimated 4,200 businesses operating in Britain.

This will leave the regulator with the task of targeting companies or employees that fail to meet the required standards with a range of penalties from banning a company from the industry to criminal prosecution. Companies rather than the regulator will in future be responsible for carrying out checks on individual security staff.

The move will involve the repeal of 2001 legislation, which was introduced following concern about widespread criminality among nightclub bouncers and contract security guards. When licensing was first introduced it covered 130,000 individuals. This has now mushroomed to 330,000 private security staff in a wide range of roles, from escorting failed asylum seekers abroad to running police stations.

The minister for criminal information, Lord Taylor of Holbeach, said reform of the industry would improve transparency and accountability. “Our plans will raise standards and free up the SIA to concentrate on stamping out poor business practices and criminality.

“It is also important that legitimate businesses are not overburdened by government regulation and red tape. By lowering the cost of regulation on the industry, savings can be passed on to customers.”

Ministers said that many of the proposed changes can be done without primary legislation but they hope to have the rest of the powers on the statute book by next October. An official consultation will run over the next eight weeks.

Lady Henig, the chairman of the SIA, is due to step down in January, after six years in the role.

Senate bill to allow warrantless government access to your online services

0

Jared Newman, PC Adisor |

In a dumbfounding display of politics at work, a U.S. Senate bill that, at one point, would have protected e-mail privacy has gone the opposite way, and would allow government surveillance of online services without a warrant if passed into law.

Previously, the bill protected users’ privacy by requiring a warrant that established probable cause. CNET reports that U.S. Sen. Patrick Leahy, a Democrat from Vermont who heads the Senate Judiciary committee, has rewritten the bill so that, in some cases, government agencies would need only a subpoena to access electronic communications, such as email, Facebook, and Google Docs.

In many cases, searches would still require a warrant. Still, if law enforcement claims that the situation is an emergency, the agency could gain access without a warrant or a subsequent court review.

CNet reports that the bill, HR 2471, could see a vote next week. Leahy was also behind the Protect IP Act (or PIPA), which collapsed in response to backlash from citizens, tech companies, and advocacy groups. Perhaps he’s hoping the holiday weekend will prevent outrage from boiling over on this new–and equally terrifying–bill.

Details of the bill

Overall, 22 federal agencies would have access to electronic communications under these circumstances, including the Securities and Exchange Commission and the Federal Communications Commission.

Also, the rewritten bill states that online service providers, such as Google, would have to notify law enforcement in advance if the company planned to inform users about the account access. Notification would also be delayed from 3 days to 10 business days, and could be postponed up to nearly a year.

Apparently, Leahy changed course on the bill under pressure from the U.S. Justice Department, which felt that its criminal investigations would be hampered by the need to secure search warrants.

Bill origins

The bill’s original purpose was to allow Netflix to publish users’ viewing history on services like Facebook, revising an old law that prevented movie rental histories from being disclosed. The part about law enforcement access to electronic communications is unrelated, and had been tacked on by Leahy with the goal of protecting user privacy. Now, the bill could achieve the opposite result.

The proposed bill comes at a time when government surveillance is on the rise. As Google noted last week, law enforcement made more requests for user information than ever during the first six months of 2012, the most recent reporting period for such requests.

RINF Video: The Destruction of Freedom of Speech

0

RINF News reports on the destruction of freedom of speech within the UK. This report cites examples including the arrest and imprisonment of teenagers for posting offensive comments on social media and explores how Section 5 has been misused to censor protest and activism.

We’re All Gazans Now

0

Stephen Lendman, rinf.com |

The whole world’s watching. Growing millions know. Israel’s a rogue terror state. It’s amoral, brutish, and ruthless. Arabs are murdered for not being Jews.

Gazans suffer most of all. Israel’s been terror-bombing them daily. Civilians are maliciously targeted.

Growing numbers are killed. Official totals way understate the toll. Many others are injured. Children are traumatized. Parents are frantic. How much more of this can people take?

Gazans dig through rubble for survivors. Others bury their dead. Media scoundrels assault truth. They run cover for Israel’s worst crimes. Imagine supporting mass murder. Doing so makes them complicit.

A scurrilous New York Times editorial headlined “Hamas’s Illegitimacy,” saying:

“Hamas, which took control of Gaza in 2007 and is backed by Iran, is so consumed with hatred for Israel that it has repeatedly resorted to violence, no matter the cost to its own people.”

Fact check

Vicious lies like this demand condemnation. Setting the record straight is vital. Hamas is Palestine’s legitimate government.

In January 2006, Palestinians elected their officials overwhelmingly. Israel and Washington imposed a West Bank coup d’etat regime. It’s illegitimate. It’s also pro-Israeli.

Conflict followed. Hamas was wrongly blamed. Abbas serves illegitimately as president. Israel rigged his election. His term expired in January 2009.

He won’t step down or hold new elections. He’s a longtime Israeli collaborator. He sold out at Oslo. He spurns his own people. He replicates Quisling harshness. He’s an embarrassment to legitimate governance.

Hamas supports all Palestinians. It spurns violence. It responds defensively when attacked. It’s their right and obligation under international law. All governments bear full responsibility to protect their people.

So-called Gaza “militants” are freedom fighters. They heroically resist Israeli terror. Their souls aren’t for sale.

Times editors suppress truth and full disclosure. They support wealth, power and privilege. They defend wrong over right. They cheerlead imperial war.

They shame themselves in the process. They also betray their readers. Other media scoundrels do the same thing.

Israeli crimes of war and against humanity are called self-defense.

Legitimate self-defense is called terrorism.

Israel planned Operation Pillar of Cloud months ago. All major military campaigns require detailed planning. Multiple provocations initiated conflict.

Israel deplores peace and stability. It lives by the sword. It’s a modern-day Sparta. It threatens the region and humanity. It’s leaders are war criminals.

They bear full responsibility for ongoing violence. All Gazans are victims. They’re not terrorists. Don’t expect Times editors to explain.

Zionist ideology is root cause for decades of conflict and violence. Palestine’s Nakba never ended. State terror is official Israeli policy.

Daily Palestinian life includes persecution, home demolitions, dispossessions, land theft, targeted assassinations, mass arrests, incarceration, torture, denial of virtually all rights, living in fear for what’s next, and suffering more when Israel wages war.

The Israeli/Palestinian conflict is the longest unresolved one of our time. Nothing approaches it. It festers because of US/EU complicity. Western nations support Israel’s worst crimes. Palestinians struggle to survive against long odds.

Zionist ideology bears full responsibility. It’s corrosive, destructive, racist, extremist, undemocratic and hateful.

It claims Jewish supremacy, specialness and uniqueness as God’s “chosen people.”

It espouses violence. It deplores peaceful coexistence. It chooses confrontation over diplomacy. It believes in strength through militarism, intimidation, and naked aggression.

It’s repugnant, indefensible, destructive and malignant. It harms Jews and non-Jews alike. It’s the root cause of anti-Semitism. It’s a monster. It’s consuming its host and humanity.

Besieged Gazans are suffocated and murdered. Historian Ilan Pappe accused Israel of slow-motion genocide. So did Law Professor Francis Boyle, saying:

“What we’re seeing in Gaza now, is pretty much slow-motion genocide against the (1.7) million Palestinians who live in Gaza.”

“If you read the 1948 Genocide Convention, it clearly says that one instance of genocide is the deliberate infliction of conditions of life calculated to bring about the physical destruction of a people in whole or in part.”

“And that’s exactly what has been done to Gaza, since the imposition of the blockade by Israel; then the massacre of 1,400 Palestinians, two-thirds of whom were civilians, in Operation Cast Lead.”

“And that also raises the element in the Genocide Convention.”

In 1923, revisionist Zionist leader Ze’ve Jabotinsky said Jews had no choice. Arabs must make way for them. Tolerating and/or partnering with them is out of the question.

Eretz Israel belongs solely to Jews. Dispossess and disperse Palestinians. Remove them entirely. Reinvent them as nomadic savages.

Erect “an iron wall of (superior) Jewish military force.” Use it to dictate future events. Discourage Arab hope of prevailing.

Other likeminded Zionists advocated ethnic cleansing or extermination. Not one Arab village should remain. Remove their people by terror, assassination, intimidation, land confiscation, dispossession, and mass murder.

Former IDF Chief of Staff Raphael Eitan (1978 – 1983) said:

“We declare openly that the Arabs have no right to settle on even one centimeter of Eretz Israel.”

“Force is all they do or ever will understand. We shall use the ultimate force until the Palestinians come crawling to us on all fours.”

In 1937, future Israeli prime minister David Ben-Gurion said:

“We must expel the Arabs and take their place and if we have to use force, to guarantee our own right to settle in those places – then we have force at our disposal.”

Zionist founder Theodore Herzl said Palestine is “our unforgettable historic homeland.” He called for establishing it by dispossessing indigenous Palestinians and replacing them with Jews.

In his book “Overcoming Zionism,” Joel Kovel wrote:

Zionism seeks “the restoration of tribalism in the guise of a modern, highly militarized and aggressive state.”

“(It) cut Jews off from (their) history and led to a fateful identity of interests with antisemitism (becoming) the only thing that united them.”

“(It) fell into the ways of imperialist expansion and militarism, and showed signs of the fascist malignancy.”

If you accept “the idea of a Jewish state,” you mix its twin notions of “particularism (and) exceptionalism.”

They’re “the actual bane of Judaism.” They give “racism an objective, enduring, institutionalized and obdurate character.”

Zionism turned Israel “into a machine for the manufacture of human rights abuses.”

Israel was born in blood. Mass extermination and ethnic cleansing established the Jewish state. At issue always was replacing Palestinians with Jews.

Hard-line militancy used violence to displace Arabs, gain power, keep it, and rule by strength, confrontation, intimidation, and violence.

Longstanding policies continue. State terror, naked aggression, and institutionalized violence are called self-defense. Civilians are legitimate targets. Freedom fighters are called terrorists. Rule of law principles don’t apply. Democratic values are mocked.

Israel claims the right to reign terror with impunity. It gets away with murder because world leaders condone and support it. Weapons and other aid are provided. So is diplomatic cover.

Peace process hypocrisy was stillborn from inception. Judaization through land confiscation, displacement, and settlements reflect official policy.

Arabs must be displaced and forcibly driven from all parts of Judea and Sumaria Israel wants. Jerusalem is claimed as Israel’s exclusive capital.

Palestinians are seen as existential threats. Israeli Arabs are called fifth-column ones. Conflict is a way of life. Institutionalized violence, racism, and repression define official policies.

Final solution plans call for dispossession and slow-motion genocide. Judaization and de-Arabization are policies. Moshe Dayan once said treat them like “dogs” so they’ll leave.

Ben-Gurion favored “terror, assassination, intimidation, land confiscation,” and violence. Netanyahu prefers all that and more. A previous article called him more mad dog than leader. His contempt for non-Jews might make some despots blush.

He bears full responsibility for daily slaughter in Gaza. It shows no signs of ending. How much death and destruction does he crave before calling off his dogs?

How much Palestinian suffering is enough? How many dead children and infants will satisfy him? When will he say enough’s enough?

When will world leaders have backbone enough to confront him? When will Palestinian rights be recognized? When will treating them like human beings become policy? Maybe next time. Not now.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “How Wall Street Fleeces America: Privatized Banking, Government Collusion and Class War”

http://www.claritypress.com/Lendman.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

Conspiracy of Silence Protects Dirty Cops

0

Phil Rogers, NBC Chicago |

Three weeks after two police officers sued the Chicago Police Department, claiming they were outed by superiors even as they conducted an investigation of police corruption, a veteran investigator from the department’s internal affairs division came forward Tuesday, backing their story.

That investigator, a former IAD commander who asked that NBC Chicago withhold his identity, said he had direct knowledge of the investigation by officers Shannon Spalding and Daniel Echeverria, which led to the arrest of fellow officers Ronald Watts and Kalatt Mohammed.

Watts and Mohammed were accused of shaking down drug dealers, but Spalding and Echeverria said the investigation was compromised before its conclusion, as their identities were revealed and they were virtually blackballed within the department.

Asked if he believed the investigation would have led to evidence of wrongdoing by more officers, the former IAD official left no doubt.

“Absolutely. I’ve seen the pictures,” he said.

He said Spalding and Echeverria came to him early with their suspicions, and that he had directed them to immediately take the matter to their superiors.

“They had to,” he said. “They did everything they were supposed to.”

But what followed, they insisted, was far from a secret investigation. The two officers said their identities were revealed to command personnel throughout the department, they were quickly labeled as “rats,” and faced retaliation.

“We were basically called liars,” Spalding said.

While Watts and Mohammed faced federal charges, the former IAD official says he is convinced the investigation would have ensnared more personnel if it had been allowed to run its course.

“Not just patrolmen, but detectives and supervisors,” he said. “I believe that once they got Watts and Mohammed, they didn’t want to go any further but there were numerous other targets.”

He alleges the department, still reeling from incidents like the Anthony Abbate beating scandal, wanted to minimize potential damage from another case of blatant corruption.

“The last thing they want to do is have another big scandal hit again,” he said. “It would cause an even bigger scandal, involving coverups with commanders and deputy chiefs.”

“They make determinations based on politics. They make determinations based on who the person is, and what his connections are.”

Citing the ongoing litigation, police officials declined comment. But a source noted the Watts investigation had been conducted jointly with the FBI, and suggested federal prosecutors would not have hesitated to file further charges if they found evidence of substantial wrongdoing.

Pat Walsh, an attorney for the two officers who are suing the police department, said his clients have been hung up to dry for simply doing their jobs.

“They did the right thing,” he said. Why else would the Department treat them that way but to send a message to other officers? Don’t do this. Look what happened to these two. It will happen to you!”

Source: http://www.nbcchicago.com/news/local/chicago-police-corruption–180281661.html#ixzz2CqijnjcI

Court rules journalists have right to publish leaked emails

0

, The Telegraph |

Mr Justice Tugendhat yesterday dismissed a privacy claim against a Telegraph journalist as “extortion” and an “abuse of process”.

Peter Abbey, a former business associate of Lord Coe, falsely claimed that the journalist hacked into his email account. The claims were dismissed by a judge.

Sarah Webb, a media lawyer at Payne Hicks Beach, said the case acted as a “warning” to people attempting to “exploit” the phone hacking scandal.

She said: “He tried to exploit what he perceived as the vulnerability of the press over the phone hacking scandal. He thought judges would be more prepared to believe him, but he was wrong.”

Mr Abbey launched the privacy claim against Andrew Gilligan, a Telegraph journalist who was at the time working for The Evening Standard, and Associated Newspapers.

Mr Abbey was a director at a company which controlled Lord Coe’s image rights. In September 2007, The Evening Standard published extracts of emails in which Mr Abbey admitted the company had “pissed away” £400,000 of Lord Coe’s money.

At the time, Mr Abbey declined to comment on the article and did not complain.

In August 2011, however, as the scale of the phone hacking scandal at the News of The World newspaper emerged, Mr Abbey launched his breach of confidence claim and falsely alleged Mr Gilligan had hacked into his emails.

In fact, the emails were handed to Mr Gilligan by a freelance journalist working on a programme for Channel 4’s dispatches, who had been given them by an undisclosed source.

Mr Justice Tugendhat said: “The fact that he never did report the matter to police supports the inference I draw that he made the threats for the purpose of obtaining a settlement which he did not expect to achieve.

“I find that this was an attempt at extortion, and that it was an abuse of process of the court to attempt to obtain settlement of this claim by that means.”

Mr Gilligan said: “In the end, even though it cost us a lot of money, it might almost be worth it… to have a judgement affirming journalist’s right to print leaked material which is not personal, which has not been obtained illegally… whose publication is strongly in the public interest.”

Shops use dummies fitted with airport security to profile customers

0

 

  • Mannequins have cameras instead of eyes to monitor people as they shop
  • Campaigners denounce ‘creepy’ move and claim it is profit over privacy
  • EyeSee dummies, made in Italy, and are in use in Europe and the U.S.
  • Makers want to update technology to EAVESDROP on what customers say

 

Daily Mail |

Mannequins in fashion boutiques are now being fitted with secret cameras to ‘spy’ on shoppers’ buying habits.

Benetton is among the High Street fashion chains to have deployed the dummies equipped with technology adapted from security systems used to identify criminals at airports.

From the outside, the $3,200 (£2,009) EyeSee dummy looks like any other mannequin, but behind its blank gaze it hides a camera feeding images into facial recognition software that logs the age, gender and race of shoppers.

This information is fed into a computer and is ‘aggregated’ to offer retailers using the system statistical and contextual information they can use to develop their marketing strategies.

Its makers boast: ‘From now on you can know how many people enter the store, record what time there is a greater influx of customers (and which type) and see if some areas risk to be overcrowded.

However, privacy campaigners have denounced the system as ‘creepy’ and said that such surveillance is an instance of profit trumping privacy.

The device is marketed by Italian mannequin maker Almax and has already spurred shops into adjusting window displays, floor layours and promotions, Bloomberg reported.

With growth slowing in the luxury goods industry, the technology taps into retailers’ desperation to personalise their offers to reach increasingly picky customers.

Although video profiling of customers is not new, Almax claims its offering is better at providing data because it stands at eye level with customers, who are more likely to look directly at the mannequins.

The video surveillance mannequins have been on sale for almost a year, and are already being used in three European countries and in the U.S.

Almax claims information from the devices led one outlet to adjust window displays after they found that men shopping in the first two days of a sale spent more than women, while another introduced a children’s line after the dummy showed youngsters made up more than half its afternoon traffic.

A third retailer placed Chinese-speaking staff by a particular entrance after it found a third of visitors using that door after 4pm were Asian.

Almax chief executive Max Catanese refused to name which retailers were using the new technology, telling Bloomberg that confidentiality agreements meant he could not disclose the names of clients.

But he did reveal that five companies – among them leading fashion brands – are using ‘a few dozen’ of the mannequins, with orders for at least that many more.

Almax is now hoping to update the technology to allow the mannequins – and by extension the retailers who operate them – to listen in on what customers are saying about the clothes on display.

Mr Catanese told Bloomberg the company also plans to add screens next to the dummies to prompt passers-by about products that fit their profile, similar to the way online retailers use cookies to personalise web browsing.

Almax insists that its system does not invade the privacy of shoppers since the camera inside the mannequin is ‘blind’, meaning that it does not record the images of passers-by, instead merely collecting data about them.

In an emailed statement, Mr Catanese told MailOnline: ‘Let’s say I pass in front of the mannequin. Nobody will know that “Max Catanese” passed in front of it.

‘The retailer will have the information that a male adult Caucasian passed in front of the mannequin at 6:25pm and spent 3 minutes in front of it. No sensible/private data, nor image is collected.

‘Different is the case if a place (shop, department store, etc.) is already covered by security cameras (by the way, basically almost every retailer in the world today).

‘In those cases we could even provide the regular camera as the data and customers images are already collected in the store which are authorised to do so.

‘In any case, just to avoid questions, so far we only offer the version with blind camera.’

Nevertheless, privacy groups are concerned about the roll-out of the technology. Emma Carr, deputy director of civil liberties campaign group Big Brother Watch, said: ‘Keeping cameras hidden in a mannequin is nothing short of creepy.

‘The use of covert surveillance technology by shops, in order to provide a personalised service, seems totally disproportionate.

‘The fact that the cameras are hidden suggests that shops are fully aware that many customers would object to this kind of monitoring.

‘It is not only essential that customers are fully informed that they are being watched, but that they also have real choice of service and on what terms it is offered.

‘Without this transparency, shops cannot be completely sure that their customers even want this level of personalised service.

‘This is another example of how the public are increasingly being monitored by retailers without ever being asked for their permission. Profit trumps privacy yet again.’

Bolton calls for use of torture on Benghazi suspects

0

David Edwards, RAW Story |

Neoconservative former U.S. Ambassador to the United Nation John Bolton is suggesting that the U.S. should restart its practices of using “rendition” and torture to investigate the September attacks in Benghazi, Libya.

During an interview on Tuesday, Fox News host Martha MacCallum told Bolton that she was frustrated that “we’re two months out, and it seems to me, nowhere” in the investigation.

Bolton, who served as an adviser to former Republican presidential nominee Mitt Romney, replied by blasting President Barack Obama’s administration for treating the attack “like it’s a bigger bank robbery” and allowing the FBI to investigate.

“I think it’s through the counterterrorism efforts internationally of the CIA and other elements of the intelligence community that we’re most likely to find out who did it, track them down and do that terrible thing that the Obama administration doesn’t like to do, use rendition to get these people to Guantanamo Bay and try a little gentle persuasion to see what might have happened,” he opined.

On Jan. 22, 2009, Obama signed an executive order ending former President George W. Bush’s practice of enhanced interrogations, which included techniques that many human rights advocates described as torture. The order also halted “extreme renditions” or the transfer of prisoners to countries that use torture.

During his 2008 campaign, then-Sen. Obama had also promised to close the Guantanamo Bay detention camp but the center remains open due to push back from Congress.

Watch this video from Fox News’ America Live, broadcast Nov. 20, 2012.

 

Colorado Reps Introduce Bill to Respect States’ Rights For Marijuana Use

0

ActivistPost.com |

When the people of Colorado voted to legalize recreational marijuana on Election Day, there was immediate speculation as to how the federal government would deal with how it conflicted with federal laws. So far there has not been an official response from the White House or the Department of Justice, and the waters remain as murky as prosecution of medical marijuana has been.

In an attempt to preempt any violation of states’ rights by the feds, a group of Colorado Congressmen formally introduced the Respect States’ and Citizens’ Rights Act this past Friday. The bill would amend the Controlled Substances Act to exempt states where lawmakers or voters have legalized marijuana.

The bill, which was authored by Democrat Congresswoman, Diana DeGette, has bipartisan support.

In a press release Rep. DeGette said “In Colorado we’ve witnessed the aggressive policies of the federal government in their treatment of legal medicinal marijuana providers. My constituents have spoken and I don’t want the federal government denying money to Colorado or taking other punitive steps that would undermine the will of our citizens.”

The bill is also supported by Mike Coffman and other Republicans, even though some of them were opposed to marijuana legalization.

“I voted against Amendment 64 and I strongly oppose the legalization of marijuana, but I also have an obligation to respect the will of the voters given the passage of this initiative, and so I feel obligated to support this legislation,” Coffman said in the statement.

This legislation is just part of the chorus of letters to Obama’s justice department demanding that the feds leave the states alone when it comes to marijuana laws.

Reps Barney Frank and Ron Paul sent a letter to Obama encouraging him to respect state laws and to not use federal resources to prosecute pot smokers.

“Respect for the principles of democracy; respect for the states to make decisions on matters that primarily affect the residents of those states; the chance to conserve scarce federal financial resources – these we believe are many strong reasons for you to defer to the state decisions,” Paul and Frank wrote.

Another bipartisan Congressional group wrote a similar letter to Eric Holder at the Department of Justice stating,

The voters of these states chose, by a substantial margin, to forge a new and effective policy with respect to marijuana. The tide of public opinion is changing both at the ballot box and in state legislatures across the country. We believe that the collective judgment of voters and state lawmakers must be respected.

California Governor Jerry Brown, who opposes marijuana legalization, also said the federal government should respect states’ rights to decide how to regulate marijuana use on CNN’s State of the Union shortly after the election.

“It’s time for the Justice Department to recognize the sovereignty of the states. We are capable of self-government,” he said. “We don’t need some federal gendarme to come and tell us what to do. I believe in comity toward the states, that’s a decent respect”

Although this bill specifically refers to state exemptions where marijuana is concerned, it comes at a time when more states and citizens are attempting to flex their muscles against federal dictates.With White House petitions for secession of all 50 states gaining steam, a clear message is being sent for the feds to back off.

Originally posted on Activist Post

Occupy Walmart? Workers Plan Black Friday Protests

0

Allison Kilkenny |

Walmart workers are planning to mark Black Friday, the day after Thanksgiving and one of the biggest shopping days of the year, with pickets outside of stores and warehouses across the country.

Former and current employees of the giant corporation describe systemic abuse and harassment by management at Walmart stores and warehouses. When asked about their demands, many workers talk about the desire for management to respect and listen to the workers. Our Walmart, a protest group seeking justice and accountability from Walmart, also wants to see the minimum wage raised to $13/hour and for full-time jobs to made available to Associates who want them. Other demands include a dependable, predictable work schedule, affordable healthcare, no discrimination, and wages that ensure no Associate has to rely on government assistance to survive.

Walmart is one of the biggest recipients of government subsidies, receiving tax breaks, free land, cash grants and other forms of public assistance, in addition to paying some of its workers so little that they too turn to the federal government for programs like the Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program (SNAP).

However, even Walmart employees who make better wages complain about abuse on the job. An employee at a Walmart distribution center in Gas City, Indiana initially decided to work at the big box chain because his job pays almost $20 an hour, and he couldn’t find another job that paid that well in his area. The worker, who asked to remain anonymous because he’s afraid of being fired for going public with his complaints, says that Walmart has the attitude that because they pay workers well the employees are “required to be their slaves.”

His job is to load heavy boxes, sometimes up to seventy pounds, onto pallets stacked six feet tall in a freezer that has a temperature of -20 degrees. He is also given very short time limits for each pallet to be completed, so he normally ends up running down aisles with heavy boxes to make his rate.

One day, he cut a fairly large gash in his leg by scraping one of the wooden pallets and his leg started bleeding. When he asked his manager for a bandage, he was told that if his manager gave him one, they’d have to write him up for not being careful enough on the job. Instead, he worked all day with an open wound because he was afraid that one more write up could get him fired.

This is part of a system of harassment and intimidation. The worker goes on to explain that Walmart is notorious for telling employees they will be fired upon their first utterance of the word “union,” and they are encouraged to not report on-the-job injuries. If the equipment breaks while they’re using it, regardless of the cause, the employees will be written up. There are four categories of write ups, and once they get written up four times, they are automatically fired with no questions asked.

Dan Hindman has worked at a Walmart near Los Angeles for four years. The former employee of the month, who makes $9.80 an hour, told CBS News that even though he is scheduled to work on Black Friday, he doesn’t plan to show up.

“Walmart needs to learn that it’s not fair how they treat us,” Hindman says.

“We don’t want to walk out on Black Friday. We don’t want to do this. It’s just something we have to do, because it’s the right thing to do,” Hindman says.

He says his schedule was cut to 15 hours per week when he joined a group of Walmart employees who favor unionizing. He lost custody of his four-year-old son when he could no longer support him.

“So I lost my son and I’m kind of regretting working for Walmart, but I have to provide, you know?” says an emotional Hindman. “It’s the biggest retailer in the world, and you can’t help me provide for my son? It kills me, dude. It really tears me apart, big time.”

In order to show solidarity with Walmart workers, the Occupy movement has organized a series of grassroots events across the country. A coalition, including Occupy Wall Street, 99 Pickets, ALIGN, Rev. Billy and the Church of Stop Shopping, Retail Action Project, and other allies will occupy a Walmart store in North Jersey in solidarity with the workers.

But the event is in no way limited to the New York-New Jersey region, and other Occupy chapters are also planning actions. Nick Espinosa from Occupy Minnesota says protesters in Minneapolis are working with Centro de Trabajadores Unidos en Lucha (CTLU), in addition to other community organizations and labor groups, to support local Walmart workers who are going out on strike.

“Occupy is serving as a hub to connect people to where workers are standing up and speaking out in ways that they can support them,” says Espinosa.

“Occupy serves as a hub for people from all walks of life to start a dialogue, and as we started a conversation with people, we found many people are obviously having similar problems at work, from layoffs to low wages, and in Walmart’s case, you don’t have to go far to make the connection between Walmart and Wall Street. They’re the world’s largest employer and they’re the quintessential one percent corporation,” Espinosa continues, citing Walmart’s penchant for subcontracting as a way to “absolve themselves for the abuses of their workers that goes on all along the supply chain, from the stores to their factories where the products are being packed. It goes from here to China.”

Upon visiting a Walmart store in Mexico, Espinosa says he saw youth who were bagging groceries there for no wages – only tips.

“They’re outsourcing abuse of workers all over the world and doing everything they can to create a smokescreen between their brand and the actual abuses that are allowing them to skim profits from working people to pad the CEO’s profits.”

While Espinosa doesn’t claim Occupy inspired the recent string of Walmart strikes and walkouts, he does credit the movement for raising awareness about the issues of class and labor abuses.

“Occupy was a shot across the bow to the one percent and corporate rule. When it comes to workers’ rights, I think it’s been a wakeup call to workers and some of the larger unions that if we don’t start fighting, we really have no hope for a better future. Right now, even with President Obama post-election, we’re looking at nothing but cuts and austerity, so I think people are taking a cue from Occupy and from movements all over the world. People are seeing what’s happening in Spain, in Greece, right now with the general strikes and seeing that as the real way forward to protecting workers’ rights and creating real opportunities that don’t involve balancing the budgets on the backs of working families and the most vulnerable in our society.”

In response, Walmart has filed a National Labor Relations Board charge alleging that the pickets are illegal and asking for a judge to shut them down, while simultaneously claiming the strike involves only a “handful of associates, at a handful of stores scattered across the country that are participating in these…made for-TV events.”

Janna Pea, a spokeswoman for one of the workers’ groups, says she expect some 1,000 of the roughly 4,000 chain stores to be hit with walkouts.

I’ll be live-tweeting from some of the Black Friday protests. Follow me at @allisonkilkenny.

© 2012 The Nation

Former Sun Journalist Charged

0

A former chief reporter for The Sun newspaper has been charged with conspiring to commit misconduct in public office.

John Kay, a 69-year-old journalist, of Asmuns Hill, Golders Green, answered bail at a north London police station this morning.

He was charged with conspiring with Ministry of Defence official Bettina Jordan-Barber and former News International chief executive Rebekah Brooks, along with others, to commit misconduct in public office between January 1, 2004 and January 31, 2012.

He has been bailed to appear at Westminster Magistrates Court on Thursday, November 29.

Originally published on Times Series

Elites Will Make Gazans of Us All

0

Chris Hedges |

Gaza is a window on our coming dystopia. The growing divide between the world’s elite and its miserable masses of humanity is maintained through spiraling violence. Many impoverished regions of the world, which have fallen off the economic cliff, are beginning to resemble Gaza, where 1.6 million Palestinians live in the planet’s largest internment camp. These sacrifice zones, filled with seas of pitifully poor people trapped in squalid slums or mud-walled villages, are increasingly hemmed in by electronic fences, monitored by surveillance cameras and drones and surrounded by border guards or military units that shoot to kill. These nightmarish dystopias extend from sub-Saharan Africa to Pakistan to China. They are places where targeted assassinations are carried out, where brutal military assaults are pressed against peoples left defenseless, without an army, navy or air force. All attempts at resistance, however ineffective, are met with the indiscriminate slaughter that characterizes modern industrial warfare.

In the new global landscape, as in Israel’s occupied territories and the United States’ own imperial projects in Iraq, Pakistan, Somalia, Yemen and Afghanistan, massacres of thousands of defenseless innocents are labeled wars. Resistance is called a provocation, terrorism or a crime against humanity. The rule of law, as well as respect for the most basic civil liberties and the right of self-determination, is a public relations fiction used to placate the consciences of those who live in the zones of privilege. Prisoners are routinely tortured and “disappeared.” The severance of food and medical supplies is an accepted tactic of control. Lies permeate the airwaves. Religious, racial and ethnic groups are demonized. Missiles rain down on concrete hovels, mechanized units fire on unarmed villagers, gunboats pound refugee camps with heavy shells, and the dead, including children, line the corridors of hospitals that lack electricity and medicine.

The impending collapse of the international economy, the assaults on the climate, the resulting droughts, flooding, precipitous decline in crop yields and rising food prices are creating a universe where power is divided between the narrow elites, who hold in their hands sophisticated instruments of death, and the enraged masses. The crises are fostering a class war that will dwarf anything imagined by Karl Marx. They are establishing a world where most will be hungry and live in fear, while a few will gorge themselves on delicacies in protected compounds. And more and more people will have to be sacrificed to keep this imbalance in place.

Because it has the power to do so, Israel–as does the United States–flouts international law to keep a subject population in misery. The continued presence of Israeli occupation forces defies nearly a hundred U.N. Security Council resolutions calling for them to withdraw. The Israeli blockade of Gaza, established in June 2007, is a brutal form of collective punishment that violates Article 33 of the Fourth 1949 Geneva Convention, which set up rules for the “Protection of Civilian Persons in Time of War.” The blockade has turned Gaza into a sliver of hell, an Israeli-administered ghetto where thousands have died, including the 1,400 civilians killed in the Israeli incursion of 2008. With 95 percent of factories shut down, Palestinian industry has virtually ceased functioning.

The remaining 5 percent operate at 25 to 50 percent capacity. Even the fishing industry is moribund. Israel refuses to let fishermen travel more than three miles from the coastline, and within the fishing zone boats frequently come under Israeli fire. The Israeli border patrols have seized 35 percent of the agricultural land in Gaza for a buffer zone. The collapsing infrastructure and Israeli seizure of aquifers mean that in many refugee camps, such as Khan Yunis, there is no running water. UNRWA (the United Nations Relief and Works Agency for Palestine Refugees in the Near East) estimates that 80 percent of all Gazans now rely on food aid. And the claim of Israeli self-defense belies the fact that it is Israel that maintains an illegal occupation and violates international law by carrying out collective punishment of Palestinians. It is Israel that chose to escalate the violence when during an incursion into Gaza earlier this month its forces fatally shot a 13-year-old boy. As the world breaks down, this becomes the new paradigm–modern warlords awash in terrifying technologies and weapons murdering whole peoples. We do the same in Afghanistan, Iraq, Pakistan, Yemen and Somalia.

Market forces and the military mechanisms that protect these forces are the sole ideology that governs industrial states and humans’ relationship to the natural world. It is an ideology that results in millions of dead and millions more displaced from their homes in the developing world. And the awful algebra of this ideology means that these forces will eventually be unleashed on us, too. Those who cannot be of use to market forces are considered expendable. They have no rights and legitimacy. Their existence, whether in Gaza or blighted postindustrial cities such as Camden, N.J., is considered a drain on efficiency and progress. They are viewed as refuse. And as refuse they not only have no voice and no freedom; they can be and are extinguished or imprisoned at will. This is a world where only corporate power and profit are sacred. It is a world of barbarism.

Chris Hedges’ latest book is “Empire of Illusion: The End of Literacy and the Triumph of Spectacle.” His weekly column appears Mondays on Truthdig.

Chris Hedges is a frequent contributor to Global Research.  Global Research Articles by Chris Hedges

© Copyright Chris Hedges, Global Research, 2012

Israeli Aggression: Dress Rehearsal for Iran?

0

Stephen Lendman, rinf.com |

Longstanding US and Israeli policies call for regime change in Iran. Replacing its independent government with a pro-Western puppet one is planned.

War is the bottom line option if other methods fail. Both countries have longstanding plans. War could erupt any time. Doing so is madness. It’s also lawless, unconscionable, and self-destructive. Attacking Iran assures all combatants lose.

Gaza may be prelude to what’s planned. Perhaps strategy and tactics are being tested. In all Israeli wars, so are new weapons. Israel uses illegal ones freely. Victims sustain horrific injuries. Many are killed outright or don’t survive.

Hostilities against Gaza continue aggressively. Overnight Sunday into early Monday, over 80 targets were struck. Since November 15, about 1,400 were attacked.

The official death toll passed 100. Perhaps double that number died. Many are buried under rubble. Over 700 were injured. For many, it’s serious. Others are maimed for life. Some are so badly hurt they won’t survive.

Civilians are willfully targeted. Over half of Al Shifa Hospital casualties are children and infants. Medical staff are hard-pressed. They can’t properly handle the growing case load.

Vital medications and other supplies are being exhausted. What’s enough for a week or longer is consumed in a few hours. If conflict persists, treating seriously injured patients won’t be possible.

Hamas wants peace, equity and justice for all Palestinians. Its leaders expressed willingness many times to recognize Israel in return for internationally recognized self-determination inside pre-1967 borders. It represents 22% of historic Palestine.

Despite numerous prior Israeli attacks, they agreed unilaterally to observe ceasefire. They never held because Israel provokes conflict. Current negotiations are worthless without internationally enforced conflict resolution terms.

Israel wants things its way. It doesn’t negotiate. It pressures, bullies and demands. Washington provides full support. Expect no change now.

UN Special Rapporteur for Palestinian human rights Richard Falk noted the grotesque power imbalance between Israel and Hamas. Around 1.7 million Gazans are affected.

Grievances aside, he said, Israel is “militarily omnipotent.” Hamas and other resistance groups pose no threat whatever. Israel claims otherwise. At issue is stoking fear and perpetuating conflict.

Western support lets Israel get away with murder. It’s “given a free path to do whatever it wishes.”

“Such a circumstance is morally unendurable, and should be politically unacceptable. It needs to be actively opposed globally by every person, government, and institution of good will.”

It’s also true for every country Israel and Washington target. Western-generated conflict terrorizes Syrians. Full-scale war may erupt. The road to Tehran runs through Damascus. Gaza may be target practice for what’s planned.

Nobel Peace laureate Mairead Maguire calls Israel’s Operation Pillar of Cloud lip service for murdering defenseless civilians. Gaza is being lawlessly attacked again, she said.

When will it end, she asked? Israel’s “right to defense” is code language for aggressive slaughter. Western leaders and media scoundrels ignore systematic state terror.

Military solutions aren’t possible. Endless violence continues. Israelis, Palestinians and others for peace “can lead the way, by their own nonviolent movements, including the boycott, divestment and sanctions campaigns, to bring about real political change, and give peace a chance. We can all do something

For peace in the Middle East.”

From Cairo, Hamas political head Khaled Meshal told reporters:

Israel must make the first move. It must halt bombing and shelling. “Whoever started the war must end it.”

“This is a difficult, but magnificent moment in the history of the Palestinian problem, in our brave journey of resistance and combat, nobility, so deeply rooted in the Palestinian land.”

“Whoever attacks Palestine will be buried by it. Anyone who invades our Arab nations will be defeated for generations.”

“Netanyahu wanted to achieve several targets but has not succeeded. He succeeded in killing commander Ahmed Jabari but also wanted to damage the military wing’s infrastructure, especially the long-range missiles.”

“This enemy is trying its weapons and its Iron Dome in anticipation of other wars, and yet the limited weapons in Gaza embarrassed it and its army. How will it succeed in other wars? It has an army, true, but no patience or legitimacy.”

Early Monday evening, a senior Egyptian official told Haaretz:

“We are very close to a cease-fire. What is needed is more flexibility on the Israeli side. Tomorrow will be a critical day in the talks.”

Terms discussed weren’t disclosed. Talks continue. Hamas knows the stakes. Now’s the time to hold firm for equity and justice. Nothing less is morally right. Nothing less will work.

Hamas and other Palestinian resistance groups have Israel’s rogue government to deal with. They also have large numbers of Israelis representing its lunatic fringe.

Ariel Sharon’s son, Gilad, is one. On November 18, he headlined a Jerusalem Post commentary “A decisive conclusion is necessary.”

Don’t end Operation Pillar of Cloud like Cast Lead, he urged. Finish off Palestinians “decisively….To accomplish this, you need to achieve what the other side can’t bear, can’t live with, and our initial bombing campaign isn’t it.”

Gaza isn’t besieged, he claims. “(F)latten entire neighborhoods in Gaza. Flatten all of Gaza.” America followed Hiroshima with Nagasaki, he added.

“There should be no electricity in Gaza, no gasoline or moving vehicles, nothing. Then they’d really call for a ceasefire.”

If that doesn’t work, reoccupying the entire Strip.

Gaza very much is occupied, oppressed, half-starved, denied fundamental rights, bombed and shelled intermittently, and treated like subhumans.

Not enough, says Sharon. He wants more. There’s “no middle path,” he says. “This needs to end quickly – with a bang, not a whimper.”

He urges genocide and mass destruction. Imagine a publication printing what it should condemn and ignore. It happens often in Israel. It’s common in America.

A previous article said America’s favorite pastime isn’t baseball. In Israel it isn’t soccer. It’s permanent wars. One begets others. Soft targets are chosen. One nation after another is ravaged, destroyed, and plundered.

In 1948, Israel stole 78% of historic Palestine. In 1967, it took the rest. Tel Aviv seeks regional dominance. America wants it unchallenged globally.

Life is being squeezed out of Syria. Iran is next. Peace and stability are spurned. War is prioritized. Debate continues about whether to attack Iran and when. Post-election makes it more likely.

In January, Israel has its own. Netanyahu is favored to win. Doing so frees him for war. He believes attacking Iran assures regional calm. He and Obama are on the wrong side of reality.

Iran threatens no one. Its nuclear program is peaceful. Its neighbors know it. So do American, European, and Israeli leaders. Admitting it would undermine their regional agenda.

Who knows for sure if war is likely. Odds favor it. Perhaps bombing and shelling Gaza is warm-up for what’s planned. In the fullness of time we’ll know.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “How Wall Street Fleeces America: Privatized Banking, Government Collusion and Class War”

http://www.claritypress.com/Lendman.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

Human Rights Groups: ‘Ban Killer Robots’

0

The use of autonomous drones — “killer robots” that could fire weapons with no human control — must be prohibited by international treaty, human rights campaigners and lawyers have said.

Weapons being developed that could choose and attack targets without human intervention should be pre-emptively banned because of the danger they would pose to civilians in armed conflict, they said.

Losing Humanity: the Case Against Killer Robots, a 50-page report by Human Rights Watch (HRW), warns that fully autonomous weapons would lack human qualities that provide legal and non-legal checks on the killing of civilians.

“Giving machines the power to decide who lives and dies on the battlefield would take technology too far,” said Steve Goose, the HRW arms division director. “Human control of robotic warfare is essential to minimising civilian deaths and injuries.”

The New York-based campaign group said its report was based on extensive research into the law, technology, and ethics of the proposed weapons. It was published jointly with Harvard Law School international human rights clinic.

They called for an international treaty, backed by national legislation, which would prohibit absolutely the development, production, and use of fully autonomous weapons.

Such weapons do not yet exist, and major powers, including the US, have not decided to deploy them. But precursors are already being developed. The US, China, Germany, Israel, South Korea, Russia and Britain are engaged in researching and developing such weapons. Many experts predict that full autonomy for weapons could be achieved in 20-30 years or sooner, according to the report.

“It is essential to stop the development of killer robots before they show up in national arsenals,” Goose said. “As countries become more invested in this technology, it will become harder to persuade them to give it up.”

Fully autonomous weapons would be unable to distinguish adequately between soldiers and civilians on the battlefield or apply the human judgment necessary to evaluate the proportionality of an attack — whether civilian harm outweighs military advantage.

The robots would also undermine non-legal checks on the killing of civilians, the report warns. Fully autonomous weapons could not show human compassion for their victims, and autocrats could abuse them by directing them against their own people.

While replacing human troops with machines could save military lives, it could also make going to war easier, which would shift the burden of armed conflict on to civilians, says the report, echoing concerns already expressed by officials in Britain’s Ministry of Defence.

The use of fully autonomous weapons also raised questions of accountability, which would erode another established tool for civilian protection, HRW said. Given that such a robot could identify a target and launch an attack using its own power, it would be unclear who should be held responsible for any unlawful actions it commits.

“Action is needed now, before killer robots cross the line from science fiction to feasibility,” Goose said.

Originally published on MoD Oracle

MP Calls for Tighter Taser Controls

0

Raymond Brown |

Cambridge MP Julian Huppert has called for stricter controls on Tasers after Cambridgeshire police shot 34 suspects in the chest with the 50,000-volt guns.

Figures obtained by the News using a freedom of information request reveal the extent of stun gun use as the constabulary plans to roll out more of the weapons.

The force defended their use after it was revealed that since January 2009 there had been 34 occasions where one or both barbs of the guns made contact with a supect’s chest area.

The Taser trigger has been pulled 54 times in the same period and there are fears that number could increase as weapons are rolled out to non-firearms officers in the force.

Mr Huppert said: “I am very concerned routine arming of officers with Tasers is becoming more common. These weapons discharge a high voltage. I am very concerned by these figures showing how many times they have been discharged in the chest.

“This clearly has the potential to be harmful and is not a risk we should be prepared to take. I would like to see much stricter controls on their use.”

The constabulary has trained 165 officers to use the weapon in the last three years and is training up to 120 more to use the Tasers.

The weapons, of which the force holds 153, temporarily incapacitate a person using an electrical current which interferes with the neuromuscular system. Firearms officers are given 18 hours initial training with annual qualification tests.

Chief Inspector Nick Church, the force’s lead officer on Tasers, said: “Officers issued with Tasers are trained to a national standard using nationally prepared guidance.

“Taser is one of a number of tactical options officers can use when there is a threat to a member of public or an officer. It should be discharged on the front or back of the person and, if possible, on the back. However, depending on the situation this is not always possible.

“There is no scientific evidence to suggest that Tasers should not be discharged in the chest.”

Sir Graham Bright, Cambridgeshire’s newly elected police and crime commissioner who has the power to hire and fire the chief constable, as well as holding the purse strings for policing, said: “Tasers are an operational matter and I cannot interfere in operational matters.

“I can talk to the chief constable about it but he feels they are useful then it is a decision for him.”

Originally published on Cambridge News

Human Rights or Imperial Partnership?

0



Amnesty International has a bee under its bonnet.
A human rights advocate, educator, and labor attorney, Dan Kovalik, mustered the audacity to challenge the world’s most prominent and highly regarded rights-based advocacy group. Claiming over three million members since its birth in 1961, AI is the poster child for modern “non-governmental organizations” or NGOs, the hundreds of thousands of hazy entities that play an ever-growing, influential role in international affairs.
Despite AI’s sterling reputation among middle class liberals in the English-speaking world, Kovalik was troubled by AI’s stance on the war in Libya and its role in cheer leading US and NATO involvement. After his October 23 Counterpuncharticle “Libya and the West’s Human Rights Hypocrisy” appeared, AI launched a counter attack authored by AI official, Sunjeev Bery. Bery’s response circulated widely among the AI-friendly internet community as an example of “getting it wrong” on AI’s principles and goals.
Kovalik demonstrates that he is more than capable of answering Bery in a November 8 Counterpunch response. He shows with even greater clarity how AI helped crack open the door for outside intervention in Libya and, knowingly or unknowingly (it’s hard to imagine how anyone could notknow), offered dubious but influential justification for that intervention.
AI and other advocates for a similarly narrow and myopic interpretation of human rights have a long and discreditable history of service to those on the wrong side of the struggle for justice. By ignoring material inequities, power imbalances, and class and ethnic oppressions, they dilute the question of justice to matters of individual conscience and a conservative set of negative rights. That is not to say that these concerns are wrong, but that they touch on only a corner of the concerns of the vast majority of the world’s people. In fact, they loom largest for those least touched by the ravages of predatory capitalism and its military enforcers–those in the most developed countries and those most privileged within its middle and upper strata.
When AI was founded in 1961, much of the world was engaged in an intense struggle for independence from imperialism and neo-colonialism. From Algeria to Vietnam, from the Republic of the Congo to Cuba, from the segregated deep south of the US to South Africa and the Portuguese African colonies, millions of people were committed to resolute battles for self-determination. Under the yoke of the rich and powerful, the peoples of Asia, Africa, the Middle East, and the ghettos and barrios of the First World were rising against their oppressors. The UN recognized this powerful movement, certified its authenticity, and attested to its legitimacy with the 1960 Declaration on the Granting of Independence to Colonial Countries and Peoples that declared the following:  

1. The subjection of peoples to alien subjugation, domination and exploitation constitutes a denial of fundamental human rights, is contrary to the Charter of the United Nations and is an impediment to the promotion of world peace and co-operation.

2. All peoples have the right to self-determination; by virtue of that right they freely determine their political status and freely pursue their economic, social and cultural development.

3. Inadequacy of political, economic, social or educational preparedness should never serve as a pretext for delaying independence.
 4. All armed action or repressive measures of all kinds directed against dependent peoples shall cease in order to enable them to exercise peacefully and freely their right to complete independence, and the integrity of their national territory shall be respected.

Perhaps it was a coincidence, but just as these struggles took center stage, AI chose to take human rights questions in a different direction, away from the rights of subjugated people to the rights of individuals, vetted and dubbed “prisoners of conscience” by the AI establishment. By the mid-sixties, internationally recognized leaders of anti-colonial independence movements like imprisoned Nelson Mandela were ruled out as “prisoners of conscience” because they advocated armed resistance against their oppressors. At the same time, artists, writers, and other dissident intellectuals in the socialist and less developed countries seemed to be the most common candidates for AI’s attention, especially by its US and Western European affiliates.
Whether by collaboration or happenstance, the wrongs targeted by the AI leadership were readily embraced by the major capitalist media and fully congruent with the foreign policy positions of the US and its European Cold War allies. The few reports on alleged Western human rights violations gained no traction, while claims against governments in the East or South played a greater and greater role in Western diplomacy and intervention. Even AI’s founder, Peter Benenson, expressed concerns in the mid-sixties that the organization was unduly influenced by British intelligence.
In the Cold War battle of ideas, AI proved to be a great asset to the US and its allies, crafting issues that became pillars of policy and levers of negotiation. The narrow interpretation of the Final Act of the Helsinki Conference of 1975–an interpretation that elevated Article Seven over the other nine Articles and all other provisions–marked the most important collaborative victory of Western human rights organizations and Western governments in the Cold War. Most rights and social justice activists in Amnesty International’s areas of influence would be hard pressed to identify any other provision beyond the endorsement of an indistinct freedom of conscience.
Especially Article Six, the principle of non-intervention in the affairs of other governments, was neither acknowledged nor respected by Western rights groups or governments. Constructing their efforts around Article Seven, capitalist governments mounted a massive human rights offensive against socialist and anti-imperialist countries, overshadowing the national liberation, anti-nuclear, and anti-war movements of gravest concern to most of the less affluent world at that moment. Much of the credit for shaping this agenda can be laid at the doorstep of the human rights organizations. Their narrow, facile approach to social justice baited them into a calculated campaign against the tide of socialism so apparent in the mid-seventies.
Of course the positive rights of equality, education, leisure, shelter, peace, etc. were swept aside as well before the celebration of individuality and self-expression–what Marx called “…the rights of egoistic man, of man separated from other men and from the community.”
After the Cold War
With the demise of the European socialist community and the establishment of a new balance of power favorable to Western capitalist powers, imperialism further co-opted the human rights cause, contorting it into a justification for wars of aggression. With no one to advocate or enforce the rights of nations to self-determination, the US and its NATO allies cynically crafted a predatory foreign policy around protecting or promoting human rights and democracy, a policy used to justify overt armed intervention in the Balkans and the Middle East and covertly in dozens of other countries. And the Western human rights community said nothing.
Emboldened by the efficacy of the human rights cover, the US and its allies sponsored hundreds of “human rights” and “democracy” NGOs claiming to promote higher values while subverting governments hostile to US and NATO goals. Funded by USAID and other government agencies and carrying innocuous names like “Republican” and “Democratic” Institutes, they meddle in elections, foment coups, and manipulate oppositions in countries like Ukraine, Lebanon, Venezuela, and many others. Slipping into the human rights tent, these organizations exploited the Western regard for individual human rights against the rights guaranteed by the 1960 UN Declaration and other Declarations affirming the right of self-determination. And the Western human rights community said nothing.
If the leading lights in human rights circles–organizations like AI and Human Rights Watch– are to claim any moral legitimacy, they must resolutely dissociate their campaigns from those seeking to use them for predation and aggression. But they have not.
Kovalik and other critics of “humanitarian intervention” and the duplicity of human rights organizations are correct in perceiving an odor of hypocrisy. As Kovalik points out, the “even handedness” espoused by AI in regard to belligerent forces completely obscures ever-present power inequities.
Within the insular bubble of rights-based moral calculation, asymmetries of power, wealth, or development count for nothing. The rural guerrilla in sandals and armed with a rifle must respect the same etiquette of war as the foreign interloper astride a 70-ton tank. In the strange universe of the human rights industry, it doesn’t matter whether a regime’s opponents are paid by the CIA or patriotically motivated; their rights to dissent have equal legitimacy.
And the same respect for human rights is expected of a popular regime (for example, Cuba or Venezuela) under overt and covert threat from powerful foes as is expected of a country (like the US) devoid of any serious external or internal peril. One would think that a serious “human rights” organization would hail the direction of civil rights in countries like Cuba and Venezuela that have improved the health and well being of the disadvantaged in order to fully enjoy rights while condemning a country like the US that has moved dramatically toward a police state. But that is not the case. 
Nor does history extenuate the force of human rights standards as held by Western human rights organizations. Countries emerging from the civil distortions of colonial occupation, suffering the legacy of feudal social and economic relations, or holding to non-Western traditions are held to the same human rights standards by AI as the Euro-American countries that forged those standards over two centuries ago. This lack of understanding and tolerance too often reveals gross cultural and ethnic chauvinism. 
With the US and its NATO allies hijacking its principles, human rights organizations like Amnesty International and Human Rights Watch have to answer for a lot. While millions of their members honestly want to help those deserving solace, they can no longer ignore the harm that comes from the coalescence of the institutional human rights agenda and the malignant foreign policy of the US and its allies. And the naïve notion that the sins of the victim are no less grave than the sins of the bully is untenable and morally cynical.   
Zoltan Zigedy
zoltanzigedy@gmail.com

UK Queen in hideout over Savile; why?

0
Britain’s Queen Elizabeth II who recently raised public outcry for stepping out of her constitutional limits and intervening in a high-profile extradition case, is now keeping a low profile in a scandal in which she has been directly involved.

Back in September, it emerged that the Queen privately lobbied a British Home Secretary in the former Labour administrations to arrest British Muslim cleric Abu Hamza.

At the time the BBC’s security correspondent Frank Gardner revealed the Queen confided to him that she had asked Labour ministers to deal with Abu Hamza, in effect breaking the constitutional principle of leaving the governing to the government.

“Actually, I can tell you that the Queen was pretty upset that there was no way to arrest him. She couldn’t understand – surely there had been some law that he had broken? In the end, sure enough, there was. He was eventually convicted and sentenced for seven years for soliciting murder and racial hatred,” Gardner told the BBC’s Today program.

The intervention raised outrage among the public and in the media as the Queen is considered by the British constitution to be no more than a representational figurehead who should act only on her ministers’ advice.

“However strongly she may feel about the matter, it is her constitutional duty to keep her mouth shut,” commented Alex Stevenson who is deputy editor of political news outlet Politics Home.

This comes as the Queen has kept silent about the recent child abuse scandal around former BBC star Jimmy Savile that is described as the worst crisis to hit the corporation in 50 years.

She has refused to comment on the subject despite the fact that the scandal is a moral issue of public interest and that she is directly involved in the matter: the BBC is run by 12 trustees appointed by the Queen in person while she granted Savile knighthood in 1990.

Indeed, Savile was knighted when his abuse was well underway and the Queen should have distanced herself and the royal family from the pedophile immediately after allegations of his pervert activities to ward off unwanted speculation.

However, there has been no comment by the Queen herself, her office or the royal family as if she knew of the Savile’s scandalous behaviour and decided to decorate him regardless.

As for the BBC, it runs under a Royal Charter, the present one having come into force in 2007 and running until the end of 2016.

The corporation is also ruled and supervised by the BBC Trust, which is a board of 21 trustees directly appointed by the Queen to set “the strategic objectives of the BBC” and chooses the broadcaster’s director general who heads its Executive Board in charge of its services and output.

The magnitude of the Savile scandal and the unfolding drama including comments by Tom Watson MP who openly suggested in parliament that there may be a pedophile ring going right to the British Prime Minister’s office at No 10 Downing Street raise more questions.

Is the Queen aware of the true scale of the scandal that is currently unknown to much of the public and even investigators and wants to keep herself out of any inquiries?

Or probably she is keeping a low profile to evade responsibility for knighting a former employee of an organization where its sovereign body members she directly appointed.

What is clear is that her silence remains problematic and begs more questions still less answers.

Republished from Press TV

Anonymity To Become Illegal In Canada

0

Ed Patrick |

Canada’s House of Commons has approved a proposed law that would make it a crime subject to a lengthy prison term to wear a mask or to otherwise disguise one’s identity while participating in “a riot or an unlawful assembly”.

Under C-309, anyone caught wearing a mask in an “unlawful assembly” would be liable to five years in prison and those deemed to have done so during a riot could be jailed for up to 10 years.

The private member’s bill was introduced by Blake Richards, a Conservative Member of Parliament and former police chief, and adopted with the full support of the ruling Conservative government. It is rare for private members’ bills to become law. But given the support the draconian “anti-mask” bill has received from Prime Minster Stephen Harper and his Conservatives and the Conservative control of the Senate, the upper house of Canada’s parliament, Bill C-309 is all but certain to become law.

As C-309 itself acknowledges, it is already illegal to conceal one’s identity while committing an indictable offence. The real intent of the proposed law change is to facilitate preventive arrests and threaten protesters with severe criminal penalties. Police forces would be able to arrest and seek to incarcerate for years persons who had committed no crime other than to wear a mask at a gathering proclaimed by the police to be an unlawful assembly or riot.

In arguing for this major increase in the arbitrary powers of the police, MP Richards declared, “We know that one key tool is missing from [the police’s] toolkit; a tool that would help police prevent, de-escalate and control riots”.

In fact, as many thousands of Canadian young people and workers have already discovered, the designation of this or that assembly as peaceful and lawful is entirely up to police and city officials, groups that are thoroughly contemptuous of the democratic rights and aspirations of the working class.

Under Canada’s Criminal Code an assembly of merely three persons can be considered unlawful if authorities deem them to be causing “fear”. Moreover, and this was certainly the case during this year’s militant half-year-long student strike in Quebec, police frequently provoke violent confrontations with demonstrators by harassing and abusing them or through the use of agents provocateurs, then use the ensuing melee to justify their declaring the gathering “illegal.”

Bill C-309 would give the police even greater latitude in rounding up individuals attending protests deemed unacceptable by the authorities.

While the bill allows exceptions from the blanket ban on masks for religious or medical reasons, its supporters did not suggest there would be any exceptions for those covering their faces to avoid the harmful effects of pepper spray and tear gas, a major reason that protestors don masks.

The opposition Liberal and New Democratic Parties (NDP) voted against the new law, citing fairly benign concerns about C-309’s redundancy or its likelihood to tie up the courts with cases that would be difficult politically and possibly constitutionally to win.

Since the trade union-backed NDP is currently mounting an all-out effort to demonstrate to the ruling class that it can be trusted to form a pro-big business austerity government, all of its MPs’ complaints were marked by a tone of obsequious supplication before the police.

NDP justice critic Françoise Boivin complained, “There’s people who would be let go who would probably sue the cities and the policeman for wrongful arrest. It’s just going to create more cases in front of the courts.”

Revealing his own abiding support for the repressive powers of the state, NDP leader Thomas Mulcair called the bill unnecessary for the reason that “The police already have all the tools that they need.” In a pointed reference to the student strike, he then added, “We saw that in Quebec.” The NDP, it should be noted, failed to condemn the police violence meted out against students and their supporters during the strike. Nor did it condemn the Charest Liberal government’s Bill 78 (Law 12), legislation that effectively criminalized the strike and placed sweeping restrictions on the right to demonstrate in Quebec over any issue.

Bill C-309 has been promoted by various business organizations as well as the chiefs of police in cities such as Toronto, Vancouver and Montreal. All of those cities have in recent years witnessed violent police brutality towards citizens engaged in peaceful protest, most notably during the 2010 G20 protests in Toronto and the Quebec student strike. Many cities have also seen an increase in street demonstrations, such as during the nationwide Occupy protests in fall 2011, which erupted in opposition to the growth of social inequality and poverty.

These same forces of reaction anticipate even greater mass opposition, especially from the working class. Already provincial and federal governments have increased their use of legislation to illegalize strikes, squelch collective bargaining rights, and impose wage and pension cuts through government fiat. And over the past decade there has been a vast increase in the size and powers of the repressive apparatus of the state, justified, as in the US, in the name of “the war on terror”

In online blogs, workers and youth opposed to Bill C-309 noted that while the government is restricting the ability of protesters to conceal their identity, the police routinely hide their badge numbers and mask their own faces with riot gear. It took more than two years and a sustained public outcry for the hundreds of officers who covered their badge numbers and removed nametags during the G20 protests to be disciplined. Most received no more than the loss of a single day’s pay for this flagrant violation of the police’s own rules of conduct.

Republished from WSWS

New facial recognition cams to spy on everyone at once

0

RT |

In a single second, law enforcement agents can match a suspect against millions upon millions of profiles in vast detailed databases stored on the cloud. It’s all done using facial recognition, and in Southern California it’s already occurring.

Imagine the police taking a picture: any picture of a person, anywhere, and matching it on the spot in less than a second to a personalized profile, scanning millions upon millions of entries from within vast, intricate databases stored on the cloud.

It’s done with state of the art facial recognition technology, and in Southern California it’s already happening.

At least one law enforcement agency in San Diego is currently using software developed by FaceFirst, a division of nearby Camarillo, California’s Airborne Biometrics Group. It can positively identify anyone, as long as physical data about a person’s facial features is stored somewhere the police can access. Though that pool of potential matches could include millions, the company says that by using the “best available facial recognition algorithms” they can scour that data set in a fraction of a second in order to send authorities all known intelligence about anyone who enters a camera’s field of vision.

“Live high definition video enables FaceFirst to track and isolate the face of every person on every camera simultaneously,” the company claims on their website.

“Up to 4 million comparisons per second, per clustered server” – that’s how many matches a single computer wired to the FaceFirst system can consider in a single breath as images captured by cameras, cell phones and surveillance devices from as far as 100 feet away are fed into algorithms designed to pick out terrorists and persons of interest. In a single setting, an unlimited amount of cameras can record the movements of a crowd at 30-frames-per-second, pick out each and every face and then feed it into an equation that, ideally, finds the bad guys.

“I realized that with the right technology, we could have saved lives,” Joseph Rosenkrantz, president and CEO of FaceFirst, tells the Los Angeles Times. He says he dreamed up the project after the attacks of September 11, 2001 and has since invested years into perfecting it. Not yet mastered, however, is how to make sure innocent bystanders and anyone who wishes to stay anonymous is left alone as he expands an Orwellian infrastructure that allows anyone with the right credentials to comb through a crowd and learn facts and figures of any individual within the scope of a surveillance cam.

Speaking to reporters with Find Biometrics in August, Rosenkrantz said that the system is already in place in Panama, where computers there process nearly 20 million comparisons per second “using a FaceFirst matching cluster with a large number of live surveillance cameras on a scale beyond any other system ever implemented.”

“Within just a couple of seconds whoever needs to know receives an email containing all the evidence and stats about the person identified along with the video clip of them passing the camera so they may be approached then and there,” he says.

Earlier this year, RT broke the story of TrapWire, a surveillance system marketed by global intelligence firm Stratfor to law enforcement agencies across the world. Through investigation of TrapWire and its parent companies, it became apparent that surveillance devices linked to the system could be monitored from remote fusion centers with access to an endless array of cameras and databases. According to FaceFirst’s developers, their technology doesn’t need a second person to scour video feeds to find suspected terrorists. Complex algorithms instead make finding a match the job of a computer and positive IDs can be returned in under a second.

“It doesn’t do me any good if I’m able to look at a face with a camera and five minutes later, there’s a match,” says Paul Benne, a security consultant who tells the Los Angeles Times that he recommended his clients use FaceFirst in high-security areas. “By then, the person’s gone.”

Rosenkrantz admits in his interview to the use of the technology at Panama’s Tocumen airport, as well as other border crossings along the perimeter of the country. The deployment of FaceFirst in the United States still begs questions concerning the relationship between security and privacy, though, and is likely to remain an issue of contention until agencies in San Diego and elsewhere explain what exactly they’re up to.

According to a report in Southern California’s News 10 published this week, an unnamed law enforcement agency in San Diego County has been testing a handheld version of FacecFirst for about five months now. On the record, though, no agency in the US has been forthcoming with why it’s using those specific facial scanners or even confirming it’s in their arsenal of ever expanding surveillance tools.

“If they spot someone who doesn’t have identification, they can take their picture with their phone and immediately get a result,” Joseph Saad, business development director for FaceFirst, tells News 10.

Saad says his company predicts that “facial recognition will be in every day society” soon, perhaps before many Americans want to admit. According to filings available online, Airborne Biometrics was already cleared by the Government Services Administration (GSA) last year to have FaceFirst sold to any federal agency in the country.

“The ability to apply our technology for the advancement of our country has always been my number one goal,”Rosenkrantz said in April 2011 when Airborne was awarded an IT 70 Schedule contract for FaceFirst by the GSA. Because that contact has since been signed with Uncle Sam, Rosenfratz and company can see that goal through, at least until its up for renewal in 2017, through a deal that lets them sell FaceFirst to “all federal agencies and other specified activities and agencies.”

In a demonstration video on the FaceFirst website, the company touts their product as being a great addition to any acquisition device, specifically suggesting that clients consider integrating the software with tactical robots, mobile phones and surveillance drones. Coincidently, just last month the sheriff of Alameda County, California asked the US Homeland Security department for as much as $100,000 in order to have an unmanned aerial vehicles – a drone – in his agency’s arsenal for the sake of protecting the security of his citizens.

Weeks earlier, Homeland Security Secretary Janet Napolitano told congressional lawmakers that she endorses the idea of sending drones to California to aid with law enforcement efforts. Pleads like the one out of Alameda have been occurring across the country in a rate considered alarming by privacy advocates, but rarely has that opposition brought into the spotlight the scary surveillance capabilities that any police agency may soon have in their hands. While the issues of Fourth Amendment erosions and privacy violations have indeed emerged, the actual abilities of surveillance devices – snagging faces from large crowds in milliseconds and sending info to the authorities – have not.

“Facial characteristics become biometric templates compared against multiple watch lists created from customer photos or massive criminal databases,” the promo explains. Those lists can be custom created by law enforcement agencies to track a ‘most-wanted’ roster of suspected criminals but can pull from databases where any biometric information is already available or can be inputted on the fly.

Discovery of San Diego’s use of FaceFirst comes just two months after the FBI announced it had already rolled out a program to upgrade its current Integrated Automated Fingerprint Identification System (IAFIS) that keeps track of citizens with criminal records across the country with one that relies on face recognition. The FBI expects the Next Generation Identification (NGI) program will include as many as 14 million photographs by the time the project is in full swing in just two years, relying on digital images already stored on federal databases, such as the ones managed by state motor vehicle departments. In the state of New Jersey, the DMV has recently told drivers that they are not allowed to smile for driver’s license photos because it could cause complications in terms of logging biometric data in their own facial recognition system.

The FBI said that, by rolling out NGI, they “will be able to provide services to enhance interoperability between stakeholders at all levels of government, including local, state, federal and international partners.” The unnamed San Diego law enforcement agency already with the ability to match millions of faces in a single moment may be relying right now on that connectedness to keep track of anyone they wish.

According to an article in the Los Angeles Times last week, 70 percent of biometrics spending comes from law enforcement, the military and the government. The private sector is scooping up that scanning power too, though, with FaceFirst having already cut deals with Samsung to provide them with technology for use in closed-circuit surveillance cameras marketed to businesses. But while the Federal Trade Commission has informed companies and corporations that they need to be more transparent about how personally identifiable information is stored on their servers, the Times notes that no guidelines like that exist for law enforcement agencies, who may very well sit on mounds of intelligence without good reason.

“You don’t need a warrant to use this technology on someone,” Sen. Al Franken (D-Minnesota) said last year during a congressional hearing about the use of expanding surveillance technology. “You might not even need to have a reasonable suspicion that they’re involved in a crime.”

Aside from FaceFirst, law enforcement is using that excuse to pull data on persons – of interest and otherwise – even when their faces are protected. As RT reported recently, an ever-growing number of police departments are investing in license plate scanners that let officers identify as many as 10,000 vehicles and their registered owners in a single shift. Much like how FaceFirst can pick out dozens of suspects from a single photograph and send data to custom servers, those license plate readers can pick up the precise location of persons never suspected of a crime, making rampant invasion of privacy just collateral damage as the surveillance monster state grows larger

“The cameras will catch things you didn’t see, cars you wouldn’t have run, and the beauty of it is that it runs everything,”Lieutenant Christopher Morgon of the Long Beach, California Police Department says in promotional material for an automated license plate recognition device manufactured by PIPS Technology.

The Federal Trade Commission has offered the security industry best practice suggestions about how long to hold onto data picked up by surveillance cameras, but safeguards for law enforcement agencies are largely absent. In the case of the scanners used to find license plates on the streets of Southern California, Jon Campbell of LA Weekly writes, “The location and photo information is uploaded to a central database, then retained for years – in case it’s needed for a subsequent investigation.”

Rosenkrantz says FaceFirst is experiencing triple digit growth in 2012 and expects sustainable expansion to continue throughout the next five years. By 2020, the Federal Aviation Administration expects that as many as 30,000 drones will be operating in US airspace.

Puppet State America ~ Paul Craig Roberts

0

Paul Craig Roberts, rinf.com |

The United States government and its subject peoples think of the US as “the world’s only superpower.” But how is a country a superpower when its entire government and a majority of the subjects, especially those members of evangelical churches, grovel at the feet of the Israeli Prime Minister? How is a country a superpower when it lacks the power to determine its own foreign policy in the Middle East? Such a country is not a superpower. It is a puppet state.

In the past few days we have witnessed, yet again, the “American superpower” groveling at Netanyahu’s feet. When Netanyahu decided to again murder the Palestinian women and children of Gaza, to further destroy what remains of the social infrastructure of the Gaza Ghetto, and to declare Israeli war crimes and Israeli crimes against humanity to be merely the exercise of “self-defense,” the US Senate, the US House of Representatives, the White House, and the US media all promptly declared their support for Netanyahu’s crimes.

On November 16 the Congress of the “superpower,” both House and Senate, passed overwhelmingly the resolutions written for them by AIPAC, the Israel Lobby known as the American Israel Public Affairs Committee, the only foreign agent that is not required to register as a foreign agent. The Global News Service of the Jewish People reported their power over Washington with pride. Both Democrats and Republicans shared the dishonor of serving Israel and evil instead of America and justice for the Palestinians.

The White House quickly obeyed the summons from the Israel Lobby. President Obama announced that he is “fully supportive” of Israel’s assault on Gaza. Ben Rhodes, White House deputy national security adviser, told the media on November 17 that the White House “wants the same thing as the Israelis want.” This is an overstatement as many Israelis oppose the crimes of the Israeli government, which is not the government of Israel but the government of the “settlers,” that is, the crazed land-hungry immigrants who are illegally, with Netanyahu’s support, stealing the lands of the Palestinians.

Netanyahu’s Israel is the equivalent of the Lincoln Republicans 150 years ago. Then there was no international law to protect Southern states, who left the voluntary union, a right under the Constitution, in order to avoid being exploited by Northern business interests. Subsequently, the Union army, after devastating the South, turned on the American Indians, and there was no international law to protect American Indians from being murdered and dispossessed by Washington’s armies.

Washington claimed that its invasion forces were threatened by the Indian’s bows and arrows. Today there is international law to protect the Palestinian residents of the West Bank and Gaza. However, every time that the world tries to hold the Israeli government accountable for its crimes, Israel’s Washington puppet vetoes the UN decision.

The notion that Israel is threatened by Palestinians is as absurd as the notion that the US is threatened by Afghanistan, Iraq, Libya, Yemen, Syria, Somalia, Pakistan, and Iran. No government of any of these countries has ever made a threatening statement against the US. Even had such a statement been made, it would be meaningless. If a Superpower can be threatened by such impotent and distant counties, then it is not a superpower.

Demonizing a victim is a way of hiding state crimes. The American print and TV media is useless as a check on state crimes. The only crimes reported by the media are assigned to “terrorists,” that is, those who resist US hegemony, and to Americans, such as Bradley Manning and Sibel Edmonds, who liberate truth from official secrecy. Julian Assange of WikiLeaks remains in danger despite the asylum granted to him by the President of Ecuador, as Washington has little regard for international law.

In the US the exercise of the First Amendment is coming to be regarded as a crime against the state. The purpose of the media is no longer to find the truth, but to protect official lies. Speaking the truth has essentially disappeared as it is too costly to journalist who dare to do so. To keep one’s job, one serves Washington and the private interest groups that Washington serves.

In his November 19 defense of Israel’s latest war crimes, President Obama said: “no country on earth would tolerate missiles raining down from outside its borders.” But, of course, numerous countries do tolerate missiles raining down from the US. The war criminal Obama is raining down missiles in Afghanistan, Pakistan, and Yemen, and has rained missiles on Libya, Somalia, Iraq and Syria as well. Iran might be next.

The German assault on the Warsaw Ghetto is one of the horror stories of Jewish history. Such an event is happening again, only this time Jews are perpetrators instead of victims. No hand has been raised to stay Israel from the goal of the operation declared by Israeli Interior Minister Eli Yishai to be “to send Gaza back to the Middle Ages.”

The Sun Accused of Bribing US military

0

The Independent |

Wearing a pair of white Y-fronts, Saddam Hussein was splashed across The Sun and the New York Post in 2005, a global scoop by Rupert Murdoch’s voracious news empire.

At the time the US President, George W Bush, announced an inquiry into how the papers had acquired the image of the “Beast of Baghdad” while he was in the custody of US troops in Iraq.

Now the picture is again a matter of controversy, following a claim that Mr Murdoch’s holding company, News Corporation, obtained it by bribing a member of the US military. The American news website The Daily Beast asked: “Did News Corp illegally purchase Saddam Hussein picture from US officials?” It reported: “Sources close to the story have told The Daily Beast that the payment was significantly greater [than £500] and was made to a US official on American soil.”

So far, 54 people in the UK — including 11 senior journalists on The Sun — have been arrested by a Metropolitan Police investigation into alleged payments to police and other public officials.

Detectives on that inquiry, Operation Elveden, are not thought to be investigating the Saddam Hussein picture.

The US Department of Justice, the FBI, and the US Securities and Exchange Commission are already investigating whether the firm broke the Foreign Corrupt Practices Act by bribing police and public officials in the UK.

News Corp last night declined to say whether it had used bribery to acquire the photograph of the former Iraqi President, which appeared simultaneously on the front pages of The Sun (“The Tyrant’s in His Pants”) and New York Post (“Butcher of Sagdad”) on 20 May 2005.

The US military estimated it had been taken at a US prison complex near Baghdad, called Camp Cropper, between January and April 2004 when Hussein was awaiting trial for crimes against humanity.

The Sun’s then managing editor, Graham Dudman, said at the time that the paper had obtained the picture of Hussein and other high-profile jailed Iraqis “by professional journalistic methods”. Mr Dudman later said that the newspaper paid “a small sum” of more than £500 for the photos.

News International declined to comment on The Daily Beast’s story. A News Corporation spokeswoman said: “This is just a lame attempt to regurgitate old news. All of this was widely reported on in 2005. We didn’t believe then, and certainly don’t believe now, that it was wrong to acquire and publish newsworthy photographs of a notorious war criminal.”

She declined twice to say whether or not the image had been obtained by bribery, saying: “The company believes it wasn’t wrong to acquire and publish the photos of Mr Hussein.”

Hemp Can Save America and the World!

0

The good news is we’ve found a plant that can save the world. The bad news is…it’s illegal!

Neenah Payne, Activist Post |

What if a plant could save the economy, end the oil wars, restore the environment, improve everyone’s heath, provide nutritious foods as well as safer cars, healthier homes, better clothes, and more paper of higher-quality while protecting our forests? Would you agree it’s a super plant that America desperately needs?

Hemp is that plant. While the federal government bans the growth of industrial and medical hemp, marijuana reform is sweeping the states with over 80% of the country having reduced penalties for cannabis. The recent New York Times article “The Fight Over Medical Marijuana” documented the tragedies caused by this conflict. A medical hemp grower in Montana who was in compliance with state laws was arrested by federal agents and faces life in jail.

“As Feds Crack Down on Medical Pot, Groundbreaking Lawsuit Fights Back” shows the many legal aspects of this states’ rights battle. The film Code of the West addresses this issue by asking “Who gets to write the codes we live by?” California Gov. Jerry Brown reminded Obama recently, “It’s time for the Justice Department to recognize the sovereignty of the states . . . We are capable of self government.”

“R.I.P: Marijuana Prohibition” points out that the game just changed: “The citizens of Colorado, Washington and Massachusetts delivered game changing victories for the nearly fifty year-old cannabis law reform Movement . . . the die for major cannabis law reforms is now cast.”

In 2008, Obama promised to respect state hemp laws. Now’s the time to make good on that promise. In addition, Obama’s support for legalization of industrial and medical hemp would bring immediate Hope and Change — and would reward Americans for still believing in him enough to give him 4 more years.

End the War on Drugs

Our Founding Fathers required farmers to grow hemp because it is so beneficial. Henry Ford created a hemp car powered by hemp ethanol. Canada’s hemp car, the “Kestrel”, will debut in 2013. Because of misguided policies, the US banned hemp in 1937. It’s time now for America to recognize industrial and medical hemp as national treasures.

“New Poll: 81 Percent Of Americans Support Legalizing Medical Marijuana” shows strong support for hemp as calls to end the War on Drugs escalate. Former President Jimmy Carter’s NY Times OpEd said: “Call Off the Global Drug War”. Richard Branson of Virgin Atlantic and former UN Secretary General Kofi Annan made similar appeals. Ralph Nader pleaded, “Let Our Farmers Grow Hemp”.

Law Enforcement Against Prohibition (LEAP), an international organization comprised of criminal justice professionals, called for an end to the War on Drugs. The Executive VP of LEAP describes the War on Drugs as “Public Enemy #1”.

America has dropped out of the top 10 most prosperous countries — now in 12th place, down from 6th in 2008. The US is the only industrialized country with no hemp industry. We cannot afford to ignore hemp, the trillion-dollar crop! In his opposition to legalization of industrial and medical hemp, Obama is out of line with our best interests, American history, and the will of the American people.

Author and futurist Barbara Marx Hubbard said, “Without vision, the people perish…with vision we flourish”. The secession petitions filed in November by all 50 states show that the country is falling apart for lack of a positive vision. It is urgent for Obama to announce an initiative that can inspire and save America! Legalization of industrial and medical hemp would unite the nation in a venture as visionary as the Peace Corps and would allow America to thrive!

Industrial Hemp: Trillion-Dollar Crop

Jack Herer, co-author of the ground-breaking book The Emperor Wears No Clothes: The Authoritative Historical Record of Cannabis and the Conspiracy Against Marijuana said, “I don’t know if hemp’s gonna save the world, but I’ll tell you this… it’s the only thing that can”.

“Hemp – Could Save America” echoes that view. Legalization of industrial and medical hemp could be the Tipping Point that allows us to avoid the escalating financial, environmental, healthcare, and food crises, as well as the bankrupting wars. It could shift the country to a sustainable paradigm.

Some of the benefits of industrial hemp (Cannabis sativa) are:

  • Cars — 10 times stronger and 3 times lighter than steel, biodegradable!
  • Biofuel — replaces oil, saves environment, ends oil wars
  • End Fracking of Our Water — hemp fuel would make coal unnecessary
  • Plastics — replaces 6,000 products made from petroleum, saves land fills
  • Homes — more energy-efficient, negative footprint, longer-lasting
  • Clothes — more comfortable, warmer in winter, cooler in summer, durable
  • Paper — 4x as much pulp as from trees, better quality paper, protects forests
  • Foods/Drinks — mega-nutrition, superfood
  • Free of Toxins — does not need herbicides, fungicides, or pesticides
  • Radiation Repair — reverses nuclear contamination of soil

Medical Hemp: Panacea 

Medical hemp (Cannabis indica, aka “marijuana”) has been used in the treatment of over 100 diseases and ailments. However, the most revolutionary news is the discovery by Canadian Rick Simpson that the oil from the buds of the hemp plant is a cure all! He used the oil to treat 5,000 people — curing many “terminal” illnesses.

Simpson’s story is documented in the film Run From the Curewhich can be found on his website at:http://www.phoenixtears.ca/. His new book PhoenixTears: The Rick Simpson Story covers the phenomenal rise of one of the most important movements in human history. In the amazing July 2012 interview “Max Igan Talks To Rick Simpson — Hemp As A Cancer Cure”, Simpson discusses the urgent need for countries to legalize medical hemp.

World Hemp Congress 2012 

Max Igan’s speech at the World Hemp Congress 2012 provides an overview of the importance of hemp, the reasons it was banned, and why it should be legalized. He says change must be mandated by the people:

If we fail to act, we are through our own negligence risking life itself. [Hemp] provides mankind with one of the greatest opportunities for effective change we’ve have ever been presented with.

Hemp Bills in Congress 

The following bills are pending in Congress. If not passed, similar bills will need to be introduced in early 2013:

  • H.R. 1831: Industrial Hemp Farming Act” to legalize industrial hemp.
  • HR 2306: Ending Federal Marijuana Prohibition Act of 2011”.
  • S. 3501: Industrial Hemp Farming Act of 2012”, a companion to H.R. 1831.
  • An amendment to the “Agriculture Reform, Food and Jobs Act of 2012” to legalize production of industrial hemp.

Video: Hemp Revolution 2012! 

For more information on the wonders of industrial and medical hemp, please check my video Hemp Revolution 2012_New Hope! or search NaturalNews.tv for “Hemp Revolution 2012” where the video is periodically updated. If readers of this article take the video viral now, it can help ensure that industrial and medical hemp are legalized on a national level in America in 2013!

WATCH IT HERE

RINF VIDEO: Israel – The Worlds Most Militarized Nation

0

RINF News reports the latest figures from the Bonn International Centre for Conversion, placing Israel at the top of the world’s most militarized nation.

The report also looks at Israels attempts to bully other nations including Iran and Palestine.

The Bonn International Centre for Conversion findings (PDF).

Judge accepts £14 million Google settlement, but is it enough?

0

James Niccolai, IDG News Service |

A US judge has indicated she will accept the terms of a settlement deal between Google and the US Federal Trade Commission, in which Google will pay a £14 million ($22.5 million) fine for circumventing privacy protections in Apple’s Safari browser.

The judge’s decision is a setback for Consumer Watchdog, which had been pushing for tougher sanctions, including a higher fine, but the consumer rights group said it had achieved its goal of drawing attention to what it sees as the ineffectiveness of such settlements.

“Privacy is important and no one seems to be protecting our privacy – at least, the FTC isn’t,” Gary Reback, an attorney working for Consumer Watchdog, told reporters outside the courtroom after the hearing Friday morning.

The fine against Google proposed by the FTC seems adequate and the settlement should not require Google to admit any liability for its actions, said Judge Susan Illston at the hearing, which was at the US District Court for the Northern District of California in San Francisco.

“My preliminary view is to grant the request to approve the [terms of the settlement],” she said.

The judge indicated that she had some concerns about what will become of the tracking data Google collected. The settlement with the FTC does not require Google to destroy the data and the best hope for Consumer Watchdog is that the judge may add a condition to the settlement deal requiring it to do so.

 Google in trouble with the FTC yet again

Although she indicated that she will largely sign off on the settlement deal, Illston did not rule from the bench and must still write up her decision to make it official. That’s expected within the next week.

The case dates back to a settlement – known as a consent decree – between Google and the FTC in 2011, after the FTC complained that Google violated user’s privacy when it used their Gmail addresses to sign them up for Google Buzz, its first attempt at a social networking service.

Under that agreement, Google was barred from misrepresenting its privacy practices in future and required to implement a program to ensure it stuck to its promises. It was not required to admit to any wrongdoing.

Just over a year later, the FTC sued Google again, this time for circumventing privacy protections in Apple’s Safari browser to place tracking cookies on user’s computers. It did this despite ensuring users that they did not need to take any actions to block its cookies in Safari.

Google and the FTC reached a new consent decree – the one that was being challenged in court Friday. Under the new agreement, Google was ordered to pay the $22.5 million fine – the largest fine the FTC has leveled against a company – and to start deleting the cookies it had placed on users’ browsers.

Consumer Watchdog challenged the agreement, saying the fine was a drop in the ocean compared to Google’s annual revenues, which at the time were about $40 billion. And it said the agreement did not prevent it from doing the same thing again.

“Google should feel real pain for its wanton violation,” Consumer Watchdog said at the time.

It was supported in its efforts by Reback, a noted attorney who is credited with being the driving force behind the US government’s antitrust suit against Microsoft in the 1990s.

IP addresses not important, says Google

Whether Consumer Watchdog will have grounds to appeal Illston’s decision will depend on what she writes in her final ruling. The judge did not seem to be very “invested” in the case, Reback told reporters outside the courtroom.

It’s difficult to get courts to overturn such settlements, he said. But he said Consumer Watchdog achieved its goal of drawing attention to the use of consent decrees to settle disputes.

The FTC is reportedly preparing to bring an antitrust case against Google, and Reback said another consent decree would be an inadequate outcome of that investigation.

In court Friday, Reback said Google has suggested that IP addresses are not important. They are indeed important, he said – as evidenced by the scandal that led to the resignation of former CIA Director David Patraeus. That incident came to light after the FBI used IP addresses to track allegedly harassing emails, he noted.

A lawyer for Google argued in court that deleting the tracking data it collected was unnecessary. Google anonymizes the IP addresses associated with the data after nine months, he said. That means the data can no longer be associated with individual users and is of little value, he said.

Google declined to discuss the case and sent a short statement via email: “We’re confident that there is no basis for this challenge,” the company said.

In its pretrial filings, it argued that the fine is appropriate and that parties are rarely required to admit liability in such settlements. It also says litigating the matter further would be complex and expensive.

Voting Fraud Ignored by the Corporate Media

Michael Snyder, The Truth | 

Why is the mainstream media saying nothing about election fraud even though there are eyewitness reports from all over the country of voting machines turning Romney votes into Obama votes?

Why do the Republican Party and the Romney campaign seem completely uninterested in widespread reports of voter fraud in important swing states? The integrity of our votes is of the utmost importance. If our voting machines are not “working correctly” or if rampant voter fraud is being committed, what are we supposed to do about it? According to the Election Protection Coalition, American voters reported more than 70,000 voting problems by 5 PM Eastern time on election day. But it seems as though nobody even follows up on these complaints.

With each election cycle the reports of election fraud just continue to get worse, but once each election is over we never hear about anyone getting into any trouble. What you are about to read will likely make you very angry. There are eyewitness accounts of voting machines all over the nation turning Romney votes into Obama votes. So will anything be done about this? Of course not. We are being told to sit down, shut up and blindly have faith in the results that the voting machines are giving us even though there is solid proof that there were very serious problems with the voting machines.

These problems first emerged in a number of swing states during early voting. In many of the most important swing states it was being reported that Romney voters were claiming that when they tried to cast votes for Romney that the voting machines changed their votes to Obama instead. The following is one example of this from Ohio…

“I don’t know if it happened to anybody else or not, but this is the first time in all the years that we voted that this has ever happened to me,” said Marion, Ohio, voter Joan Stevens. 

Stevens said that when she voted, it took her three tries before the machine accepted her choice to vote for Romney.

“I went to vote and I got right in the middle of Romney’s name,” Stevens told Fox News, saying that she was certain to put her finger directly on her choice for the White House.

She said that the first time she pushed “Romney,” the machine marked “Obama.”

So she pushed Romney again. Obama came up again. Then it happened a third time.

“Maybe you make a mistake once, but not three times,” she told Fox News.

But of course this was not just happening in Ohio. There were also eyewitness accounts of this happening during early voting in quite a few other states including Nevada, Kansas, North Carolina, Missouri and Colorado.

Officials assured us that the voting machines would be “recalibrated” and that we would not have these kinds of problems on election day.

Unfortunately, it turned out that there were a whole bunch of reports of voting machines turning Romney votes into Obama votes on election day.

For example, an equipment manager who worked for Chicago’s election system on election day says that he repeatedly witnessed voting machines fail to register Romney votes…

Steve Pickrum said he worked for Chicago’s election system during the early voting and Election Day voting for the 2012 race.

As an equipment manager for the system, Pickrum said, he responded whenever there was a glitch with a voting machine.

“On early voting, when I did work on the floor when voters needed help using the equipment, I was able to see the preference of the voter, and every time that I saw [a] voter voted for Romney a ‘voter save failure’ message came up on the screen,’” he reported.

And guess what happened when he went to cast his own vote? The same thing happened to him…

Then when he went on Election Day to cast his own vote, he picked Romney and experienced the same error message.

Pickrum said he worked at both the Matteson voting area as well as in Precinct 70, and although he discussed the anomalies with his boss, had not yet filed a formal report.

He said when he voted, he was told by a precinct worker to just go ahead and assume that his vote had been tabulated, despite the error message. But since he knew the operations of the machines, he asked the poll workers to check the vote report, and they found his vote had not been counted.

Over in Pennsylvania, a poll watcher claims that “about 5 percent to 10 percent” of the votes were being switched from Romney to Obama by the voting machines in the polling location that he was monitoring. What he recently told WND is absolutely staggering…

It was in Upper Macungie Township, near Allentown, Pa., where an auditor, Robert Ashcroft, was dispatched by Republicans to monitor the vote on Election Day. He said the software he observed would “change the selection back to default — to Obama.”

He said that happened in about 5 percent to 10 percent of the votes.

He said the changes appeared to have been made by a software program.

Ashcroft said the format for computer programming has a default status, and in this case it appeared to be designating a vote for Obama each time it went to default.

But issues with the voting machines were not the only problems that poll watchers were observing on election day.

Down at one polling location in the swing state of Virginia, a poll watcher named Dara Fox says that voter fraud was “rampant”.

She recently told WMAL radio the following…

-That it appeared that voters for Obama were being bussed in.

-That many of them could not speak English at all.

-That many of them could not tell poll workers the correct address on their identification cards.

-That many of them were obviously far from the correct age.

-That many people were voting more than once at that same polling station throughout the day.

The following is a YouTube video of Dara Fox being interviewed by WMAL. Was there an organized effort to steal the vote in Virginia?…

According to the head of the Republican Party of Maine, a similar thing appeared to have happened in his state…

The head of the Maine Republican Party claims that “hundreds” of unfamiliar black voters may have cast fraudulent ballots in his state on Election Day.

“In some parts of rural Maine, there were dozens, dozens of black people who came in and voted on Election Day,” Charlie Webster told Portland’s NBC affiliate WCSH-TV on Wednesday.

“Everybody has a right to vote, but nobody in town knows anyone who’s black,” Webster said. “How did that happen? I don’t know. We’re going to find out.”

I have previously detailed a lot more evidence of potential voter fraud on election day right here.

If anyone out there has heard of any other reports such as these, please let me know.

If we do not speak up, nothing will be done.

The Democrats aren’t going to do anything about this.

The Republicans aren’t going to do anything about this.

The mainstream media is not going to do anything about this.

As far as they are all concerned, we are not supposed to question the results. We are just supposed to have blind faith in the system even though there is a mountain of evidence right in front of our eyes that is screaming that something is wrong.

Big Brother Business on Steroids?

0

Candace Talmadge |

Welcome to the world of Big Data, that tsunami of information flowing through the Internet from billions upon billions of handheld devices and machines like coffee makers or on-board automobile navigation systems.

Every time we use the Internet to search the web or a cell phone to text or make a call, we contribute to the Big Data deluge.

In an echo of the Internet boom of the late 1990s, companies like Alteryx, mentioned in the first part of this series, are springing up like flowers after a desert rain.

This prompts huge questions with no immediate answers. Will Big Data yield another economic boom like the Internet at the end of the 1990s? Is Big Data a big step toward the end of privacy?

Big Data ultimately will make available information that heretofore was impossible to capture, analyze, or exploit. We know Big Data is hot when a report presented at the World Economic Forum in Davos, Switzerland early in 2012 reclassified data as an asset like gold or oil.

Should not businesses that benefit from the data the rest of us generate compensate us in some way for it? Let’s not hold our breaths waiting for that to happen. So much for being paid a pittance to participate in focus groups or surveys. Big Data may well render these marketing practices moot.

Right now, most of the prognosticating is done by companies that want to sell big data-related services. But since Big Data is all about the numbers, and big business cleaves to numbers like a drunkard hugs his hooch, it won’t be long until these glowing forecasts morph into something more concrete.

And while it may usher in better economic times, Big Data also has the potential to bring Big Brother to life to an extent not even imagined in George Orwell’s worst totalitarian nightmares.

One seemingly mundane Big Data example is a high-end coffee brewer in a kitchen that connects via the Internet to its manufacturer’s servers. Every time its owners turn it on, and even in between brew cycles, the coffee maker sends information back to its manufacturer, which knows exactly how many times the owners use it.

Perhaps the manufacturer is tracking when critical components wear out, prompting the owner to replace the device. The manufacturer could e-mail the owner a discount coupon as an enticement to purchase the same brand. As Big Data collection and analysis grows more sophisticated, the manufacturer may even determine what kind of coffee the machine regularly serves up.

 

Is any of the preceding really any of the manufacturer’s business? The implications for whatever shreds of privacy remain are unnerving.

Maybe over-the-shoulder coffee pot snooping is benign, but consider rental cars. These vehicles already come equipped with black boxes that track how fast and where customers drive their rental vehicles. All of this digital driving information (Big Data) transmits back to the rental company’s hard drives, where it remains available for the rental company to use against individuals who speed or get into accidents while driving its cars or trucks.

In most of these actual or predicted scenarios, the Big Data flow is one way only. Customers certainly do not have the same inside track on the rental car company’s behavior, such as whether it tends to rent out recalled vehicles or skimps on maintenance.

This kind of Big Data-based information imbalance aids and abets abuse of power by putting customers in an even more unequal position than they already are against big businesses with access to far more money and resources.

As another example of Big Data-enabled spying, one auto insurance company dangles the promise of lower rates to lure new and current customers into sharing actual driving behavior. This is so much more revealing than a mere check of the public records for any traffic-related offenses.

The company gives them a device that taps into their car’s onboard processor, records everything, such as speed and location, and transmits it to the insurance company. This information can be matched quickly to legal driving speeds to find out whether or not the insurance candidate routinely speeds.

Big data equals Big Brother Business peering into potentially the most intimate details of our lives. The U.S. Constitution does not ban corporate intrusion the way it does the government, but perhaps it should.

Big Data is one of the hottest topics right now both in the telecommunications and the IT industries. There is excited chatter about how Big Data eventually will bring about the ultimate interconnection of people and machines, yielding some great new dawn. This all sounds about as appealing as the Borg out of Star Trek–The Next Generation. Do we really want to mind meld with our coffee makers?

On the other hand, given the inane blather that routinely passes for public discourse these days, maybe the coffee pot has decent insights.

(Under the byline C.L. Talmadge, Candace writes and publishes fiction that explores what happen when politics, passion, and piety collide. More on her series atwww.greenstoneofhealing.com. Follow her on Twitter @StoneScribe)

Social Security Admin helps identity thieves while claiming to protect your identity

0

James Smith, Activist Post | 

The Social Security Administration (SSA), a part of the United States Executive Branch, touts its commitment to the sanctity of your Social Security Number (SSN).

From Wikipedia: 

In the United States, a Social Security number (SSN) is a nine-digit number issued to U.S. citizens,permanent residents, and temporary (working) residents under section 205(c)(2) of the Social Security Act, codified as 42 U.S.C. § 405(c)(2). The number is issued to an individual by the Social Security Administration, anindependent agency of the United States government. Its primary purpose is to track individuals for Social Security purposes.[1]

A Social Security number may be obtained by applying on Form SS-5, “Application for A Social Security Number Card”.[2]

Over time, the number has been used for more diverse purposes than simply taxes, essentially making it a de facto national identification number.[3]

From 1961 to 1972, the card was imprinted with “For Social Security and Tax Purposes – Not For Identification.”

In recent years, most government agencies have changed their policies to remove Personally Identifiable Information (PII) placed on correspondences; they may only use the last 4 or 5 digits of the SSN, but never the full SSN. This is not the case for the sworn protectors of your Social Security benefits.

In fact, not only can you find the SSN on nearly every form sent out by the SSA, but complete SSN’s, addresses, dates of birth, can all be found by reading the bar-codes on these forms. As an example, this is what can be found on some forms:

While it may look confusing to you, an identity thief can decipher the hidden nuggets of data to reveal:

John Q Public 1155 N Main St Barstow CA 92311 111223333 01011950

With your social security number and date of birth now in the hand of thieves, your identity has been stolen and your credit is now compromised.

The SSA tries to protect you but their own policies and procedures defeat the expected level of protection.

But what can you expect from an agency that squanders taxpayer money to let employees smoke10 hours per pay period on your dime?

This article first appeared at Prepper Podcast Radio Network. 

Read other articles by James Smith HERE.

James is a father of four and grandfather to four. He and his wife of almost 30 years have been prepping since 2003. They live in a small town, with neighbors as close as 10 feet away and have raised chickens for 2 years covertly on less than 1/5 of an acre. He is a former corrections officer, insurance fraud investigator, and he served in the Navy for 6 years. He currently works for a corporation dealing with the disabled population and their benefits. He is the host of The Covert Prepper show and the Prepper Podcast Radio Network News, both heard on Blogtalk Radio.

Barclays must reveal names of Libor traders

0

Jess Harwood, FT Adviser |

A High Court judge has ordered Barclays Bank to hand over 42 names to Guardian Care Homes as part of its disclosure in the first British damages claim over alleged Libor manipulation.

After a two-day court hearing, Mr Justice Flaux said Barclays must give Guardian Care Homes the information on 42 individuals, said to be Libor traders and employees that made submissions on Libor.

He also ordered disclosure of their email communications, as well as transcripts of phone conversations that refer to Libor, minutes of board meetings and documents from the bank’s treasury committee during a lengthy case management conference at London’s High Court.

The court heard that a trial of the complex action may not take place until January 2014.

The judge declined Barclays’ request to make a confidentiality order in respect of the 42 names, but gave the individuals and any regulatory bodies still investigating the allegations of Libor manipulation 14 days in which to make their own application for confidentiality.

Following findings by regulators in both the UK and US of misconduct and wrongdoing against Barclays in relation to manipulation of Libor, the group claims Barclays mis-sold it £70m in interest rate swaps to refinance two loans in 2007.

It claims it was induced to enter into the transactions by false implied representations that Barclays had not attempted to manipulate Libor.

Did Israel Overstep The Line This Time?

0

Stephen Lendman, rinf.com |

Rogue states get away with murder only so long. Eventually their crimes catch up with them. Israeli policies are self-defeating. How long can killing civilian men, women, children, infants, and the elderly be called self-defense?

Palestinians and eyewitnesses explain best. Mondoweiss contributor Adie Mormech saw smoke rise after Israeli bombs exploded.

“Words fail me,” he said. Bombing feels almost constant.

“I can barely write a sentence with more news.”

Six injuries from one bombing.

A four-year old child struck playing in the street.

An elderly Zaytoun neighborhood man killed. Four others injured.

The same scenario plays out across Gaza. Trapped civilians have nowhere to hide. Israel terrorizes them. World leaders blame Palestinian victims. They’re complicit in Israeli crimes.

Adie teachers 12-year old Abdullah Samouni. “We’re really scared,” he said. He lost his father. During Cast Lead, his four-year old brother was shot. “In three days, Abdullah was injured and lost 29 members of his extended family.”

How much more can he and others take? Al Shifa Hospital admits patients constantly….”an elderly man, a young man, a child, two more children.”

A 10-month old child with brain damage and a fractured skull. Her tiny body wasn’t strong enough to survive.

Who knows what’s next. “The complete madness of this violence makes me wonder what we have done to ourselves. How do we allow humanity to manifest itself in this way.”

On November 14, Israel launched Operation Pillar of Cloud. Sunday is day five. Over 1,000 sorties were flown.

Ground and offshore shelling supplements them. Mostly civilians and non-military targets are attacked. Israel prioritizes noncombatant killing and destruction. Civilians comprised over 80% of Cast Lead casualties. Media scoundrels pretend otherwise.

Reality is Gaza is as follows. Around 1.7 million people are trapped under siege. Humanitarian crisis conditions are longstanding.

Prior to Operation Pillar of Cloud, Israel launched intermittent air, ground, and offshore attacks. Wives lose husbands. Husbands lose wives. Parents lose children. They lose siblings. Extended family members perish. So do good friends.

No one’s safe anywhere anytime. No one’s sure who’ll live or die. When Palestinians respond defensively, they’re called terrorists. Israeli aggression is called justifiable self-defense.

How many Palestinian deaths and injuries will prove otherwise? How much wanton destruction is needed to expose Israeli state terror?

How much human suffering will be permitted before leaders able to stop it say no more? How long will Israel be allowed to get away with murder?

Israel’s partnership with America threatens world peace. One day expect a tipping point to be reached. When public rage crosses a threshold of no return, all bets are off.

World outrage about Israeli crimes grows. Did Israel overstep this time? Millions of ordinary people say so. They support Palestine. They’re outraged about daily bombing, shelling, slaughter, and destruction.

Civilians are willfully targeted. Innocent men, women, children, infants and the elderly are dying. Many others are injured. Many are in serious condition. Some won’t survive. Others will be maimed for life.

Illegal terror weapons are used. Injuries sustained are horrific. Doctors see charred, scorched, ripped apart patients.

Some show up with horrible burns, lost limbs, brain damage, or other major injuries. Others arrive dead.

Every day is Kristallnacht in Palestine. Besieged Gaza replicates Warsaw ghetto conditions. Under attack, it resembles early days of its uprising. For European Jews, it was a seminal historic moment.

They were sealed off behind high walls 10 feet high and 11 miles long. Peak population exceeded 400,000. Overcrowding crammed residents into an area about two and a half miles long by a mile wide.

Conditions were horrific. Food was scare. Little was available. Hunger and malnutrition were extreme. Starvation was common. Sanitation collapsed. Disease was rampant. Medical treatment was nonexistent.

Thousands died monthly. Corpses lay in streets. By early 1943, only 60,000 remained. Others starved to death, perished from disease, or died in concentration camps.

In mid-February, final “resettlement” was ordered. Residents knew it meant gas chamber death. Many decided to resist at all costs. Positions were fortified in sewers, cellars, vaults, and other areas.

Residents had some small arms and homemade grenades. Mostly, they were determined to resist. In April, emptying the ghetto was ordered. Its size was reduced to about 1,000 by 300 yards.

On April 19, 5,000 SS and regular army troops stormed the ghetto. They were heavily armed with tanks, artillery, flame throwers and dynamite squads.

Against great odds, Jews stood their ground heroically. They resisted involuntary resettlement. Men and women fought together. Nazi ferocity increased.

Germans were vicious. Captives were tortured. Mother had babies torn from their arms. They watched helplessly as solders smashed their heads against walls to save bullets.

By May 16, resistance collapsed. Most held firm to the end. Captured survivors were murdered in Treblinka and other camps. Final resolution was never in doubt. Symbolically the Jews won. They fought Nazi viciousness because it mattered.

One observer said they “knew that they might not overcome their enemies but refused to suppress their recognition of what they were undergoing or deny their lack of hope while they resisted being overcome by despair and anguish.”

News of their struggle spread across Europe. Other ghetto residents, labor camp inmates, Eastern front partisans, and death camp victims were inspired by their example.

Courageous Gazans won’t surrender to Israeli viciousness. What’s ahead remains to play out. Unfolding events may have a long way to go.

If Israel invades, will ordinary Gazans resist the way Warsaw ghetto Jews did from April 19 to May 16 1943 against long odds? Perhaps now is their moment of truth.

Occupied Warsaw Jews were isolated on their own. Gazans have millions of worldwide supporters. Resistance will make alternative media headlines. Heroism will be too evident to hide.

Media scoundrels will try. Others will expose their lies, duplicity, and support for Israeli terror. Now’s the time to resist. Ordinary Gazans have a chance to make history.

What they do may hasten Palestinian liberation. Future generations will thank them. So will many others who believe might never makes right, and equity and justice matter most.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “How Wall Street Fleeces America: Privatized Banking, Government Collusion and Class War”

http://www.claritypress.com/Lendman.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

Activist Take Legal Action Against Undercover Cops

4

Press Association |

A number of people who claim they were tricked into forming intimate relationships with undercover officers from the Metropolitan Police are taking legal action against the force.

Eleven women and a man are reportedly seeking damages for emotional trauma following allegations that specialist officers infiltrated environmental activist groups and engaged in sexual relationships with members.

Their cases have been lodged in the High Court, but the Metropolitan Police has launched a counter-claim arguing that some cases should be hard by the Investigatory Powers Tribunal, according to The Times.

The judicial body, formed in 2000 by the Regulation of Investigatory Powers Act (Ripa), holds a number of hearings in private and has no obligation to take oral evidence.

Some of the claimants say they had relationships with Mark Kennedy, the undercover police officer who spent seven years spying on environmental activists posing as long-haired drop-out climber Mark “Flash” Stone.

One woman, who claims one of the undercover officers fathered her child, is also planning a landmark legal claim that will test whether the Met should bear some financial responsibility for its upbringing, according to The Times.

A Scotland Yard spokesman said: “They are very unusual and complex areas of law – our legal position is that the Investigatory Powers Tribunal is the proper authority to hear these cases because of the nature of them and the evidence involved, but the decision on this will be taken by a judge.”

Only half of the claimants face the Met’s challenge as the other alleged relationships took place before the Ripa was introduced, it is said.

Solicitor Harriet Wistrich, who is representing the women, told The Times: “These women are suing for a gross invasion of privacy and the Met’s response it to try and hive it off into a secret court.”

 

Britain is Becoming a Dictatorship

0

The UK’s coalition government of Tories and Lib Dems is about to push through legislation creating secret courts that will protect the State at the whim of Ministers and the Secret Services. It is an outrage.

ANTHONY BARNETT and DAVID DAVIS MP, Open Democracy  |

Imagine a country in which the state has access to all the personal communications of all citizens and, thanks to this official mastery of the electronic environment, access also to all personal files and photographs, which it can survey without a warrant and at the whim of the police and secret services, whose penetration by corporate corruption is well documented. Imagine the authorities of this country then passing legislation which gives those same authorities the right to claim any issue that exposes the behaviour or mis-behaviour of those same authorites to be an issue of ‘national security’ which cannot be exposed in court. Imagine, as a handy add-on, those authorities being able to borrow the interrogation teams of ‘lesser races’ so that they can exercise the use of torture while claiming clean hands, provided their collusion is not exposed. Who could we be talking about? Putin’s Russia? The ‘new’ China? They should be so lucky. Say hello to a Britain ruled for the first time in living memory by a government forged with the support of Liberals.

Tomorrow, Monday 19 November 2012, the House of Lords, better called the House of Cronies as even hereditary aristocrats would have spat out such a craven submission to the secret services, will be whipped into passing theJustice and Security Bill. If unamended, this will create a system of secret courts undermining the principles of justice as patiently explained by David Davis MP in his article below. To smokescreen their intentions the denizens of the secret state have renamed their intentions as ‘Closed Material Proceedings’. For a forensic examination of what the apparently harmless initials CMP will mean should they be branded into the British judicial system see the clinical exposé by Tim Otty we ran in April.

On its own the Bill is an appalling assault on principles of liberty as it threatens to extend impunity to the British regime. At the same time the regime is planning a massive extension of its powers with the Communications Data Bill. For an eloquent assessment of the consequences see this Observer columnby Henry Porter. It is the combination of the two pieces of legislation that is so toxic. The Communications Bill hugely expands the powers and reach of the State while exposing it to being abused and corrupted by corporate interests, especially in the age of marketisation. At the same time Justice and Security legislation being voted on tomorrow significantly enhances the ability of the State to cover up its own malfeasance. Together, if passed into law, they provide the two legs on which dictatorship walks: an arbitrary capacity to act against citizens at any time or place and the ability to do so in a lawless way.

If things are so bad, why are things so quiet? Where is the opposition? Its absence is not proof that there is no problem, but that the rot has gone deep. That many of the public know this and are just giving up hope is suggested by the historic low turnout in last week’s elections. There is a protest campaignagainst the Communications Bill – Stop the Snoopers Charter – organised by the Open Rights Group and Index on Censorship, who are co-hosting an event in London’s Free Word  on 24 November, backed by Liberty, GreenNet and others. But there is not yet a high energy alliance like the Convention on Modern Liberty we helped to run in 2009.

Which brings me to the Liberal Democrats. Their support was crucial then and it defies belief that the leaders of a party which pinned its reputation on its integrity should abandon their fundamental principles for a few weeks of high office. I had assumed that when the party conference this year voted down the leadership and opposed the Justice and Security Bill that that would decide things. After all, the other parties had abandoned internal democracy leading to the decomposition of their membership. Why should the Lib Dems discard such a vital asset – and one so important in a smaller party? Apparently how their mere members vote is of no consideration to the Lords of the Liberal Democrats. At the tug of their ermine they will follow their leaders like shameless scuttlebugs, preferring office to preventing the screams of innocent victims.

Which brings me to the BBC. Why isn’t the unpicking of the right to a fair trial, that can be traced back to Magna Carta, an item on the news? Part of the reason is that the Lib Dems and Labour refuse to oppose it in the way that forces the issue into the headlines as a ‘story’. But an equal part lies with the compliance of the press and broadcasters to the campaign of lobbying and persuasion mounted by the Security Services, journalist by journalist, editor by editor. It is astonishing. The ‘war’ against Leveson mounted in full pre-emptive fashion as Hugh Grant predicted is premised on the idea that any legal powers held by the state over the press are in themselves bound to undermine our fundamental freedoms, even if they are merely constituted to allow the poor and weak to effect redress against abuse. Yet the same press, the Murdoch titles especially as the Mail group is more consistent on liberty, regards a massive enhancement of State power over everyone else as benign. This then feeds back into a cautious Corporation and we get what is in effect a media encouraged fatalism towards the development of a surveillance society.

Which brings me, finally, to David Davis MP, whose article from today’s Mail on Sunday is cross-posted below. A right-wing free-marketeer, Davis is remarkable for putting integrity above love of office. In 2008 Gordon Brown forced the House of Commons to support legislation that would have permitted 42 days detention without trial. He was accused from his own benches of cajoling and bribing the ‘honourable members’. The Conservatives under Cameron voted against the Bill but conceded the argument, that the British public supported this grotesque perversion of justice. Appalled at his own party’s stand, Davis resigned from his position as shadow Home Secretary and from his seat and forced a by-election, storming out of the House of Commons when he was prevented from reading his statement within it. The country faced a triple onslaught on its liberty, from detention without trial, from the introduction of ID cards and from the surveillance society, he cried, and now the Commons, the last bastion of its defence, has been suborned. I applauded his extraordinary action at the time, and counter-attacked those who derided him, and later canvassed for him in his by-election which he won with Lib Dem support. His action galvanised opposition, swung public opinion against 42 days detention, helped inspire the Convention on Modern Liberty and contributed to the articulation of the principled element of the Coalition between the Tories and the Lib Dems, that was formed a year later.

Today, these principles such as they were, are traduced and ruined, as voters abandon the polling booths.

David Davis MP writes: In the aftermath of the 9/11 attack, British resident Binyam Mohamed was picked up by the Pakistani secret police and given to the CIA. He was subjected to systematic torture, ranging from being held in painful stress positions for days on end, to having his genitals cut with scalpels.

Then he was sent to Guantanamo where he was kept for years. All of this was done, it is now known, with British Government complicity. Eventually he was declared innocent of any crimes, and released.

Most of these events remained shrouded in secrecy until Mohamed brought a court case against the then Labour Government. For years David Miliband and the intelligence agencies tried to stop the courts disclosing the Government’s involvement in the rendition and torture regime.

The House of Commons was misled. The court was lied to. MI5 was criticised by one of the senior judges for its lack of candour, and Miliband tried desperately to cover up the hideous story. It nearly succeeded.

The English Court of Appeal was about to accept the Government’s arguments, when an American judge revealed what had happened to Mohammed in far more detail than the court had ever considered publishing.

So it issued a carefully phrased, very limited criticism of what the Government had got up to. Nobody in their right mind would have thought it a breach of security, but it was undoubtedly embarrassing.

The lesson that should have been learnt from this sorry tale is that State secrecy should be used to protect real secrets essential to national security, not to cover up crimes committed by agencies of the State. Instead, the current Government has decided to try to gag the courts. Under a new Justice and Security Bill, it is proposing to give the power to Ministers to decide which evidence cannot be heard in court, even when the case is against that same Minister!

The House of Lords will debate this proposed law tomorrow, and the Government parties, including the Liberal Democrats, are going to be whipped to vote for it. If passed, this law would open the door to more secret court procedures in Britain. In certain narrowly defined cases relating to terrorism and immigration we already have secret courts.  In them defendants can be tried without knowing why they are in the dock.  Their lawyers are not able to discuss the case with them.

These secret courts have operated in the UK in a very limited way since 2005. Labour used them to impose control orders — the controversial measures that put terrorist suspects under house arrest if they could not be deported. The system was unfair from the outset, but few protested because so few people were affected.

The Justice and Security Bill would change that. It would extend the system of secret courts — now renamed Closed Material Procedures — from terrorism cases to any civil case where the Government claims ‘sensitive information’ is involved.

Of course some information must be kept secret in the national interest.

Despite this, the Government now wants to strip judges of this power and hand it to the Home Secretary. This is a dangerous development. In court cases involving secret evidence, the Government is almost always one of the parties involved. So how can it be fair to let Government Ministers influence what evidence the court can see?

However, we already have a fair system — called Public Interest Immunity — which balances national security with open justice. Under these rules,  a Minister must ask the judge for permission to withhold confidential information. The judge then examines the evidence and decides whether or not it should be kept secret. We have used this system for decades, and it has served us well. Ministers cannot point to a single case where judges have revealed documents that harmed our national interest.

The Government argues that Public Interest Immunity is unfair because evidence can be excluded from proceedings if a judge decides it is too sensitive to disclose. They argue it is fairer for judges to see all the evidence in private than to hear most of it in public. As an argument it is deceptively persuasive, but fatally flawed.

If the Government keeps its evidence secret, anyone who sues it cannot challenge that evidence. How can you identify inaccuracies in documents you cannot see? Or cross-examine a witness who never takes the stand? Under these conditions, the ‘evidence’ is not worth the paper it’s written on. What is more, letting Ministers choose what evidence is heard in secret could see them playing politics with justice — claiming information is ‘sensitive’ when really it is merely politically embarrassing.

Take the case of Libyan Abdel Belhadj. A critic of Colonel Gaddafi’s murderous regime, he fled the country with his family. In 2004, as a favour to Gaddafi, MI6 had Belhadj (and his pregnant wife) abducted and returned to Libya, where he was imprisoned and brutally tortured.

Belhadj has since sued the British Government, but we know about his treatment only because, by chance, MI6 papers were found in the office of Gaddafi’s spy chief, abandoned during the chaos of the Arab Spring.

It is exactly this sort of wrongdoing that the Justice and Security Bill would keep quiet. Any evidence relating to the intelligence agencies would be classed as ‘sensitive’. The court hearing the key parts of the case would be heard in secret, with no lawyers, victims, press or public present to challenge or report what was said.

In the Lib Dems’ Election manifesto, Nick Clegg promised to ‘restore and protect hard-won civil liberties’. Yet their peers have been told to back this Bill. They ought to defy the whip and vote down this dreadful proposal.

I am cross enough with my own party for swallowing such an illiberal proposal. But if the ‘Liberal Democrats’ are not prepared to oppose a measure that undermines the fundamentals of both liberty and democracy, then what exactly is the point of them?

Bankers, Bradburys, Carnage And Slaughter On The Western Front

0

As I start to write this article, today is Remembrance Sunday and I’m listening live to the sombre but magnificent strains of Elgar’s Nimrod as the parade at The Cenotaph assembles for the nation’s annual act of remembrance to the fallen. Like almost everyone else, I’m always humbled and moved by the veterans’ march-pass to pay their respects to fallen friends and comrades — but this year I will find it particularly poignant in the light of my recent research concerning a little known fact about the outbreak of the First World War. Let me explain.

Yesterday, I watched by sheer chance the spectacle of the Lord Mayor’s Show on television. This year’s parade for the inauguration of the 685th Lord Mayor of London, Alderman Roger Gifford, was no different from any other. As ever it was a combination of centuries old, corporate traditions, with floats and vintage vehicles representing the various Worshipful Companies, combined with local units from the armed forces along with enthusiastic and diverse community groups of children and young people. It was pageantry and modern day life parading together side by side to show off all that is best about our capital city.

Alderman Roger Gifford, the new Lord Mayor of London, enjoying his big day.

All very innocent and benign you would think. There was Roger Gifford, a banker by trade, smiling and clearly enjoying himself hugely as he doffed his large black tricorne hat to the passing parade. All around him on the VIP stand were his family, friends, business acquaintances and representatives from the City of London – people who just seemed relaxed, normal and happy.

Looking at this joyous and colourful scene on the streets of London, I was reminded of the fictional character Richard Hannay in John Buchan’s pre-First World War famous spy novel The Thirty-nine Steps. The final scene sees the hero Hannay confronting The Black Stone, the network of ingenious German spies who had morphed into the higher echelons of British society and had discovered, by the use of magnificent disguise and deception, the war-time dispositions of the Royal Navy. Having tracked them down to their secret lair on the Kentish coastline, Hannay is confronted by a scene of complete domestic normality. There is nothing about the Germans or the villa that could suggest anything other than a typical British upper middle class household at ease with itself enjoying a seaside holiday. But just one sudden flicker of recognition restored Hannay’s confidence that he had discovered The Black Stone.

Well, such a flicker of recognition also restored my confidence. As soon as I saw the giant wicker effigies of Gog and Magog on the parade, the mythical ‘protectors’ of the City of London, my confusion disappeared. The façade of decency and respectability was gone in an instant – the truth of what we were really looking at had once again been restored.

Gog and Magog

For those of us who, after many years of careful and detailed research, now understand the hidden machinations of global finance and who are aware of the secretive network of criminals and traitors who seek world government on their terms, this annual spectacle of corporate celebration and respectability by people who are not household names clearly masks an evil that must now be exposed quickly and effectively.

With the exception of a few thousand very powerful people, the entire world’s population, all seven billion of us, are trapped … trapped into a criminal debt creating banking ‘system’ that has taken hundreds of years to perfect and to come to fruition. This ‘system’ results in enslavement and servitude. It creates dreadful unhappiness amongst ordinary decent people and causes wars, debt, starvation, pollution and environmental destruction. It feeds on greed, fear and division. It forces people onto the corporate treadmills of mass mindless production and mass mindless consumption. It uses lies, deception, intimidation and entrapment at all times. It is a system that is so clever and so cunning that most of the world is completely oblivious to its existence. It is a system that allows a few winners at the expense of a huge number of losers. It is a system that considers itself to be unbeatable and indestructible and is now so arrogant that it believes it can control everything and everyone on its terms. It is a system where psychopaths and sociopaths can flourish. And without question the centre of this system, the heart of this global corporate beast is the innocent sounding Square Mile known as the City of London.

Put very simply, the banking dynasties, such as the House of Rothschild, control the political processes around the world to such an extent that their network of private central banks have the right to create money completely out of thin air and then charge interest on that ‘nothingness’. The polite term is ‘Fractional Reserve Lending’ but in reality it is just simple fraud. The result is that the whole world is currently drowning in a sea of fraudulent debt.

The USA now has a National Debt of over 16 trillion dollars, whilst the UK owes its creditors over one trillion pounds. The planned contagion of spiralling and unlawful debt is now sweeping over Europe with a renewed vigour. Greece and Spain are being torn apart by appalling austerity measures to the point that civil war or military intervention are now being openly talked about on the streets. Italy is giving all the signs that its economy is now entering into very stormy waters indeed. Ireland, Portugal, France and Belgium are already in a mess and are unlikely to see their debts become more manageable. Tens of millions of people have experienced a major downturn in their quality of life, along with their prospects for a more secure and better future, as unlawful austerity measures brought in by corrupt politicians begin to bite. Even the stronger economies of Germany, The Netherlands and Luxembourg have now been downgraded by Moody’s, the Rothschild controlled credit rating agency.

A Simple Solution To End This Madness — The Greenback:

What is happening to all of us is criminal. However, there is a very simple solution that the banking dynasties do not want you to know about.

At the height of the American Civil War, the US Treasury warned President Lincoln that further funding would be needed if the Federal North was to have the resources needed to defeat the Confederate South. The President initially went to the Rothschilds and the private banks who wanted between 24 and 36 per cent interest. Lincoln knew that if he agreed to take loans from the bankers that he would be putting his country into a debt noose that would strangle the economic prosperity out of his country and which would be almost impossible to pay off.

On the advice of a businessman with proven integrity, Colonel Dick Taylor from Illinois, Abraham Lincoln made the decision to print debt-free and interest-free paper money based on nothing more than the honour of the American Government. Called ‘Greenbacks’ because they were coloured green on one side only, the US Treasury issued 450 million dollars worth of these notes and they were immediately accepted as legal tender by a willing and grateful nation. The war was eventually won and this very popular new paper currency seemed set to continue. In the words of Lincoln himself:

The government should create issue and circulate all the currency and credit needed to satisfy the spending power of the government and the buying power of consumers….. The privilege of creating and issuing money is not only the supreme prerogative of Government, but it is the Government’s greatest creative opportunity. By the adoption of these principles, the long-felt want for a uniform medium will be satisfied. The taxpayers will be saved immense sums of interest, discounts and exchanges. The financing of all public enterprises, the maintenance of stable government and ordered progress, and the conduct of the Treasury will become matters of practical administration. The people can and will be furnished with a currency as safe as their own government. Money will cease to be the master and become the servant of humanity. Democracy will rise superior to the money power.

Senate document 23, Page 91. 1865

$5 Greenback

However, the response by the private bankers to this sudden threat to their banking empire was swift and brutal as this extract from The Times of London in 1865 shows:  

If that mischievous financial policy, which had its origin in the North American Republic, should become indurated down to a fixture, then that Government will furnish its own money without cost. It will pay off debts and be without a debt. It will have all the money necessary to carry on its commerce. It will become prosperous beyond precedence in the history of the civilised governments of the world. The brains and the wealth of all countries will go to North America. That government must be destroyed, or it will destroy every monarchy on the globe.

On Good Friday, April 14th 1865, a lone gunman ended the presidency of Abraham Lincoln. Sadly, his Greenback legacy died with him as the private bankers managed to ‘persuade’ Congress to revoke this successful initiative in favour of the debt creating National Banking Act which eventually led to the formation of the privately run Federal Reserve in 1913. Since then, America’s unlawful debt has risen to over 16 trillion dollars.

“I have two enemies; the Southern army in front of me and the financial institutions in the rear. Of the two, the one in the rear is my greatest foe.” Abraham Lincoln

The solution for dealing with private debt-creating bankers is simple. There is nothing, absolutely nothing, to stop any sovereign government from issuing through its treasury its own interest-free money based on nothing more than the wealth and integrity of the nation. This is the big secret that the City of London would rather keep to itself. If this simple fact were to become mainstream then people everywhere would simply walk away and the entire banking system would completely collapse.

And now we come to a very little known historical episode that I alluded to at the beginning that takes this concept of the debt-free ‘Greenback’ from America to Britain … and in so doing exposes the truly appalling values that are prevalent even today within the City of London.

The Great War And The Debt-free Bradbury Treasury Note:

Three weeks ago, as part of my ongoing research into the banking elite, I came across a fascinating book entitled The Financiers and the Nation by the Rt. Hon. Thomas Johnston, P.C., ex-Lord Privy Seal. It was written in 1934 and republished in 1994 by Ossian Publishers Ltd.

The text of this quite remarkable and rare book is available here.

In Chapter 6, entitled ‘Usury on the Great War’, I’ve selected the following paragraphs which I believe are both shocking and self-explanatory:

WHEN the whistle blew for the start of the Great War in August 1914 the Bank of England possessed only nine millions sterling of a gold reserve, and, as the Bank of England was the Bankers’ Bank, this sum constituted the effective reserve of all the other Banking Institutions in Great Britain.

The bank managers at the outbreak of War were seriously afraid that the depositing public, in a panic, would demand the return of their money. And, inasmuch as the deposits and savings left in the hands of the bankers by the depositing public had very largely been sunk by the bankers in enterprises which, at the best, could not repay the borrowed capital quickly, and which in several and large-scale instances were likely to be submerged altogether in the stress of war and in the collapse of great areas of international trade, it followed that if there were a widespread panicky run upon the banks, the banks would be unable to pay and the whole credit system would collapse, to the ruin of millions of people.

Private enterprise banking thus being on the verge of collapse, the Government (Mr. Lloyd George at the time was Chancellor of the Exchequer) hurriedly declared a moratorium, i.e. it authorized the banks not to pay out (which in any event the banks could not do), and it extended the August Bank Holiday for another three days. During these three or four days when the banks and stock exchanges were closed, the bankers held anxious negotiation with the Chancellor of the Exchequer. And one of them has placed upon record the fact that ‘he (Mr. George) did everything that we asked him to do.’ When the banks reopened, the public discovered that, instead of getting their money back in gold, they were paid in a new legal tender of Treasury notes (the £1 notes in black and the 10s. notes in red colours). This new currency had been issued by the State, was backed by the credit of the State, and was issued to the banks to prevent the banks from utter collapse. The public cheerfully accepted the new notes; and nobody talked about inflation.

To return, however, to the early war period, no sooner had Mr. Lloyd George got the bankers out of their difficulties in the autumn of 1914 by the issue of the Treasury money, than they were round again at the Treasury door explaining forcibly that the State must, upon no account, issue any more money on this interest free basis; if the war was to be run, it must be run with borrowed money, money upon which interest must be paid, and they were the gentlemen who would see to the proper financing of a good, juicy War Loan at 31/2 per cent, interest, and to that last proposition the Treasury yielded. The War was not to be fought with interest-free money, and/or/with conscription of wealth; though it was to be fought with conscription of life. Many small businesses were to be closed and their proprietors sent overseas as redundant, and without any compensation for their losses, while Finance, as we shall see, was to be heavily and progressively remunerated.

Emergency Bradbury Treasury Notes (printed only on one side)

The real values of the private bankers and the City of London have been exposed for all to see. Whilst hundreds of thousands of British soldiers were dying on the killing fields of Flanders and elsewhere doing what they saw as their patriotic duty, British bankers, safely out of danger and not sharing the appalling conditions on the Western Front, were only interested in one thing — how to make obscene profits from Britain’s desperate efforts to win the war. To say that the private bankers and the City of London have the morals of sewer rats is to be extremely unkind to our little rodent friends. But this is the clincher. As a direct result of the greed and treason of the British private bankers in preventing the continuance of the Bradbury Treasury Notes, Britain’s National Debt went up from £650 million in 1914 to a staggering £7,500 million in 1919.

And this is where it all gets particularly interesting. The following is an extract from the official and current HM Treasury’s Debt Management Office website … and it appears to be completely at odds with the account given by the Rt. Hon. Thomas Johnston.

The threat of World War One pushed British banks into crisis; exacerbated further as half the world’s trade was financed by British banks and as a consequence international payments dried up. In response to this crisis, John Maynard Keynes (the renowned economist), persuaded the Chancellor Lloyd George to use the Bank of England’s gold reserves to support the banks, which ended the immediate crisis. Keynes stayed with the Treasury until 1919. The war years of 1914-18 had seen an increase in the National Debt from £650 million at the start of the war to £7,500 million by 1919. This ensured that the Treasury developed new expertise in foreign exchange, currency, credit and price control skills and were put to use in the management of the post-war economy. The slump of the 1930s necessitated the restructuring of the economy following World War II (the national debt stood at £21 billion by its end) and the emphasis was placed on economic planning and financial relations.

Why is there is no mention whatsoever of the £300 million of Bradbury debt-free paper Treasury Notes issued in 1914? Instead, it says Lloyd George, on the advice of John Maynard Keynes, used the Bank of England’s gold reserves which, according to Johnston, only amounted to £9 million. What is going on here? Who is telling the truth? Could it be that HM Government, the puppets of the City of London, don’t want you to know about the simple but effective concept of debt-free and interest-free Treasury Notes?

What Do The System-serving Politicians And “Economists” Say About The issuance Of Treasury Notes?

As soon as the concept of the debt-free and interest-free Greenback Dollar (and now the Bradbury Pound) is raised in polite conversation with either a politician or an economist, two immediate knee jerk verbal reactions occur from these system-servers.

The first is to say that if a government suddenly starts printing its own money through its treasury based on the credit and wealth of the country, instead of going through its central bank, we would be heading towards what happened in the Weimar Republic in Germany in the early 1920s where hyperinflation spiralled out of control and a loaf of bread was bought with a barrow load of almost worthless paper money.

To this I just say look again at what actually happened in Germany at that time. It was not the Weimar’s treasury but it was the privately controlled central bank, the Reichsbank, who was printing the money, coupled with the extreme actions of currency speculators and foreign investors that caused all of the problems.

Hyperinflation could not happen as a result of the Bradbury Pound, because the democratically elected government would actually ‘govern’ … now that is novel! Speculation would be prevented, and most importantly, the newly created money would be spent on a productive economy, rather than bankers bonuses.

The second reaction from system-servers is that the country is already printing its own money — it is called Quantative Easing, that mysterious cash injection into the economy which only seems to get as far as the banks and not to where it is actually needed. Only trouble is, it is the Bank of England doing the printing and not HM Treasury. Based around government issued Bonds (promissory notes based on the wealth of the nation), this complex process only increases the National Debt and it certainly doesn’t solve anything.

The simple truth is that people who serve the system and who have been ‘educated’ by such organisations as the Fabian inspired London School of Economics (LSE), are not suddenly going to bite the hand that gives them a very good living.

So what does all of this mean for us, the people?

Before looking at this, let’s just consider for a moment what ‘money’ actually is. It is simply a convenient unit of exchange for goods and services that people have COMPLETE CONFIDENCE in. Now if HM Government were to issue debt-free and interest-free treasury notes through HM Treasury rather than the Bank of England in order to meet the needs and happiness of all the people whilst getting them out of unlawful debt, my guess is that people might have a lot of confidence in such a benign and benevolent financial system.

There is absolutely no defence for the present system whereby private bankers create money completely out of thin air for themselves to lend and then charge interest on that ‘nothingness’. The Bank of England, with its hidden controller the Bank for International Settlements based in Basel, Switzerland (often described as the Central Bank of Central Banks), dictate behind the scenes the fiscal policies and direction that our supposed sovereign and independent government must take. We are all prisoners of this utterly corrupt system and it’s time to confront it head on to collapse it.

If our government were to go down the path of a new Bradbury Treasury Note (as well as pursuing the banksters with Common Law for their crimes against humanity) then our debt burden would be removed overnight — there would be no deficit and no national debt. Under Common Law, all debts involving the use of fractional reserve lending by the central and private banks will be written off as they were arrived at by the use of fraud. Money would be immediately made available by HM Treasury to meet the essential needs of the country. The nation’s happiness, well-being and security would be taken care of without the need for an invasive and complex tax system. We would have Gross Domestic Happiness instead of Gross Domestic Product dictating humanity’s future.

None of this is rocket science — if the Spanish and Greek governments genuinely wanted to put right overnight the economic woes of their countries, they would immediately start printing and supplying interest-free and debt-free treasury notes based on the wealth and integrity of their respective countries. They would also tell the IMF, the EU and the Bank for International Settlements to go and whistle for their ‘money’! Why? Because it was created out of thin air, it didn’t exist in the first place, and the whole banking system is fraudulent … in other words, see you in a common law court in front of a jury!!!!

Banks, money and finance must exist to serve humanity, not the other way round. Our enslavement by unlawful debt can be ended overnight with one signature by the Chancellor of the Exchequer. It really is that simple!

Straight Talk on Gaza

0

Stephen Lendman, rinf.com |

Palestine’s democratically elected government is targeted. West Bank coup d’etat authority has no legitimacy. Abbas’ term as president expired in January 2009. Israel rigged his 2005 election.

What’s ongoing is illegal aggressive war. Israeli provocations caused it. Israel’s entire history reflects belligerence. It lives by the sword. It’s a modern-day Sparta.

Operation Pillar of Cloud was planned months ago. All military campaigns take many weeks or months of planning. Attacking Gaza coincides with Israel’s January elections.

Netanyahu hopes war will ensure his reelection. On January 22 he’ll know. Also at issue is subverting Palestine’s November 29 UN non-member observer status bid. Israel and Washington are going all out to sabotage it. As of now it looks certain.

More on what’s ongoing below, what’s at stake, and why it matters.

Hundreds of global protests condemn Israel’s naked aggression. Many thousands across the Middle East, Europe, North America, and elsewhere denounce Israel’s cold-blooded premeditated murder.

Innocent civilians are being slaughtered and injured. Hundreds of sorties caused widespread destruction. Mostly non-military sites were targeted.

They include residential neighborhoods, schools, mosques, government buildings, factories and workshops, fishermen, agricultural areas, an electricity transmitter, UN facilities, and civilian infrastructure.

Cuba condemned Israel’s attacks. So did Russia, Malaysia, Egypt, other regional leaders, and Venezuela.

Hugo Chavez denounced Israeli aggression. “Barbarism” he called it, saying:

“Another aggression against the Gaza strip has begun. Savage, savage: the state of Israel bombing the Gaza strip again.”

Chavez always supported Palestine. He’s a rare leader who says what he means and means what he says. Vice President Nicolas Maduro said Venezuela will vote for Palestine’s UN upgrade.

He stressed his government’s support of “the long march of the Palestinian people towards full recognition of having a state, as an independent nation, the right to peace, and their ancestral territories.”

Press TV said Non-Aligned Movement (NAM) countries strongly censured Israel. On November 15, a unanimously approved statement said:

“The Non-Aligned Movement strongly condemns the recent military actions against the Palestinian people and believes that the Israeli regime’s aggression and its resort to bullying against defenseless people requires the immediate attention of the international community.”

Security Council action was urged. Washington’s veto assures resolutions condemning Israel never pass.

Western leaders and media scoundrels support Tel Aviv’s worst crimes. They’re always in lockstep with Israeli crimes of war and against humanity. Lost civilian lives, widespread destruction, and human suffering don’t matter.

Israel’s imperial ambitions count most. Middle East hegemonic status is sought. Tel Aviv wants all regional rivals removed. War is prioritized when other ways fall short.

Western leaders and media scoundrels ignore key issues. Collective punishment is policy. So is targeting civilians in all Israeli wars. It’s called “Dahiya.”

It’s named after the Beirut suburb destroyed in Israel’s 2006 Lebanon war. Then Northern Command General Gabi Eisenkot explained, saying:

“What happened in the Dahiya quarter of Beirut in 2006 will happen in every village from which Israel is fired on.”

“We will apply disproportionate force at the heart of the enemy’s weak spot (civilians) and cause great damage and destruction.”

“From our standpoint, these are not civilian villages (towns or cities). They are military bases. This is not a recommendation. This is a plan. And it has been approved.”

Israel’s former chief of staff Dan Halutz said Lebanon would be “turn(ed) back 20 years.”

In October 2008, Col. Gabriel Siboni said:

“The idea is to use enough “disproportionate force (to inflict) damage and met(e) out punishment to an extent that will demand long and expensive reconstruction processes.”

“With the outbreak of hostilities, the IDF will need to act immediately, decisively, and with force that is disproportionate to the enemy’s actions and threat it poses.”

“The strike must be carried out as quickly as possible, and must prioritize damag(ing) assets….be aimed at decision makers and the power elite (and at) economic interests and the centers of civilian power.”

Former Southern Command General Yoav Galant led Israel’s Cast Lead war. Strategy he said was to “send Gaza decades into the past.”

The Goldstone report discussed Israel’s military doctrine. It “views disproportionate destruction and creating maximum disruption in the lives of many people as a legitimate means to achieve military and political goals.”

Retired General Giora Eiland’s war strategy was quoted. It reflects Israeli policy in all wars. It prioritizes eliminating military threats. It’s also to destroy “the national infrastructure and (inflict) intense suffering among the population.”

What kind of country operates this way and calls itself civilized? How can democratic credentials be claimed? How can mass slaughter and destruction be justified? Israel and America claim it all the time.

Dahiya tactics are prioritized in all Israeli wars. Crimes of war and against humanity follow. Cast Lead was Israel’s most barbaric conflict since 1948. Reports suggest what’s now planned will exceed its savagery.

Israel’s cabinet authorized calling up 75,000 reserves. Mobilization is accelerating. Israeli forces and heavy armor positioned along Gaza’s border. Invasion, full-scale war, mass slaughter, and widespread destruction loom.

IDF spokesman General Yoav Mordechai said Israel is “in the process of expanding the campaign.” At least 30,000 troops are positioned to invade. Others may follow.

Gazans are terrified. Young children are traumatized. The sights, sounds, and smell of death permeate the Strip. A November 16 Mondoweiss article headlined “Dead mothers, teachers and babies in Gaza yet media overwhelmingly focus on rocket fire into Israel.”

It’s minor by comparison. Few casualties were reported. Gaza is isolated under siege. It’s been bombed and shelled mercilessly for days. Reports are that white phosphorous and other illegal weapons are used. Hundreds of sites were struck. Now ground invasion looms.

Days earlier, Israel assassinated Ahmed Jabari. He led Hamas’ Qassam Brigades. He was also important politically. A previous article said killing him had a purpose.

Peace was at hand. A draft truce agreement was consummated. It included ways to establish ceasefires in future flare-ups.

Israel abhors peace and stability. It depends on conflict and violence. Jabari was murdered to assure what was planned.

Killing him, a 12-year old boy, and others assured retaliation. Israel planned it that way. Hamas and other resistance groups responded defensively. Blame the victim followed.

Self-defense is inviolable under international law. Israel calls it terrorism. So do Western leaders and media scoundrels. They support lawless aggression and denounce defensive actions.

Israel and America benefit from conflict and violence. Both claim added justification for large-scale regional military readiness.

Peace and stability are easily attainable. Achieving them subverts imperial aims. Enemies are invented to stoke fear. Conflict follows. Victims are blamed.

The same destructive cycle repeats. Israel and Washington prioritize it. Middle East tensions are on the boil. Full-scale Gaza war looms. Others rage across the region.

Israel and America assure permanent conflict. A cycle of violence is perpetuated. Gaza now shares regional ground zero status with Syria. How this ends who knows.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “How Wall Street Fleeces America: Privatized Banking, Government Collusion and Class War”

http://www.claritypress.com/Lendman.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

Who’s snooping through your rubbish?

0

Kirsty Buchanan, Express |

A NEW breed of bin snoopers is being sent to the council tip to rip through your rubbish, the Sunday Express can reveal.

Guidelines published by waste quango WRAP outline plans for town halls to appoint teams to sift through black bag household waste dumped at recycling centres.

While the practice is designed to weed out items for recycling, it has raised fears that sensitive documents innocently thrown away could be sold by unscrupulous staff to crime gangs.

The startling revelation drew swift condemnation from Local Government Minister Brandon Lewis who accused WRAP of drawing up a blueprint for “invading the privacy of hardworking members of the public”.

The guidelines have been drafted for councils running recycling plants where residents can dump anything from old clothes to metal, garden waste and household rubbish in a series of skips. The authority recycles what it can and sends the rest to landfill.

The WRAP guidelines concede: “Some residents may be sensitive to their waste being segregated by site staff.

“Not all council members will be comfortable with [this policy] because of fears over monitoring residents and privacy.”

Town hall officers, it adds, are “generally supportive” of the practice provided “staff follow appropriate confidentiality and health and safety procedures”. The guidelines are not designed to be prescriptive but as a blueprint for “best practice”, raising concerns that more councils will take up the suggestion for bin snooping.

Local Government Minister Brandon Lewis said: “This is a totally unnecessary and disproportionate measure which would invade the privacy of hardworking members of the public.

“For too long Labour allowed the bin police to run riot, punishing people for making innocent mistakes with heavy- handed fines. We have consigned the bin police to the dustbin of history and won’t be allowing an unelected quango to sneakily resurrect them through the back door.”

Identity theft is now a multi-million-pound industry with personal details stolen and traded on the black market.

On average 100,000 people a year have their basic personal or bank details stolen because they throw sensitive mail out with the trash which is then sold to gangs.

Despite campaigns encouraging homeowners to shred sensitive or personal documentation, research suggests 85 per cent of us still throw out personal details.

Nick Pickles, director of civil rights group Big Brother Watch, said: “Rather than paying people to root through rubbish left behind, why not ask people when they are leaving bags if there is anything that can be recycled in them?

“This will allow them to make their own decision on opening bags without putting their privacy at risk.”

Energy and Transportation Solutions

0

Edwin M. Basye, Activist Post | 

achieve solutions to societies current problems, I believe that reliance on individual responsibility and action is more effective than reliance on government policies and programs. Information is the key. When people are aware of possible solutions, they can take action to implement them in their daily lives and occupations.

Once new ideas spread, and in some cases new technologies are implemented, the solutions largely take care of themselves by self-interested people taking action.

Transportation and energy are perhaps the easiest problems to solve. There is really no need to use oil or coal for energy or transportation; far better choices exist. Three clear, practical choices exist, and an additional possibility is worth further exploration.

Once new ideas spread, and in some cases new technologies are implemented, the solutions largely take care of themselves by self-interested people taking action.

Transportation and energy are perhaps the easiest problems to solve. There is really no need to use oil or coal for energy or transportation; far better choices exist. Three clear, practical choices exist, and an additional possibility is worth further exploration.

Energy Conservation 

The most obvious but most often overlooked solution is energy conservation. Homes can be retrofitted to be better insulated and use passive solar for space heating, and solar hot water. Usually these improvements pay for themselves fairly quickly. After space heating and cooling, refrigeration is usually the biggest consumption of electricity. More efficient refrigerators are now available, and can substantially reduce electrical consumption.

Alcohol Fuel 

Alcohol has been around for a very long time, and was the primary fuel for the first cars. Before Rockefeller destroyed this option, many farmers produced alcohol for their own farm equipment and transportation vehicles. Alcohol can be a locally-produced fuel, and is a renewable resource when the carbohydrates used to make the fuel are produced sustainably. It is sun energy stored by living plants, and processed by simple human technology. It has a carbon-neutral footprint, having zero impact on the CO2 levels of the atmosphere. As carbohydrates used to make alcohol absorb CO2 from the atmosphere, and then the carbon is re-released as CO2 when the fuel is burned.

The biggest complaint with alcohol fuel is that it takes away from food production. This is a false argument for at least the following reasons:

  • Corn has been used as the primary source for alcohol fuel because there has historically been a surplus of corn in the US. Growing more corn has kept the farmers profitable and has avoided paying farmers NOT to grow, a counterproductive program.
  • Corn is a very inefficient source for alcohol fuel. Sugar beets are a much better option, but cattails offer the biggest promise. Cattails can be grown from sewage waste, cleaning up our water supplies while producing the carbohydrates needed to produce alcohol. If every sewage treatment plant in the US were converted to use cattails, a large portion of our fuel needs could be produced essentially for free.
  • There are also many other crops that can be grown on marginal lands unsuitable for food crops, that can be successfully used to produce alcohol. Permaculture methods can be applied to grow compatible “plant guilds” to increase yields. An example is the use of mesquite, prickly pear cactus, and buffalo gourds in combination to produce multiple carbohydrate-rich crops in desert areas.

Alcohol can also be used for heating homes, especially for homes currently using heating oil. Current industrial and office heating could also be converted.

As the demand for oil goes to zero, wars to protect oil fields in foreign lands would no longer have any economic justification. Fighting for our freedom to burn as much gasoline as we like to would be a thing of the past. The cost of alcohol production, when done properly, would be significantly less than the cost of gasoline.

Many cars produced today are flex fuel, meaning they can burn any ratio of alcohol/gasoline. Those that are not flex fuel can be retrofitted for a few hundred dollars.

When alcohol becomes the fuel of choice, flex fuel cars would become the de-facto standard.

If you wish to become an alcohol fuel producer on a small or medium scale, David Blume’s Alcohol Can Be a Gas book is the definitive bible on the subject.

Evacuated Tube Transportation Technology 

Evacuated Tube Transportation (ETT) is a new transportation technology which can be implemented mostly with off-the shelf components. It promises a 98% reduction in energy usage compared to current transportation methods. The 2% of energy it does use could come from wind, solar, and/or alcohol fuel using fuel cells. But it gets better: the evacuated tube system will be the fastest and the safest transportation system ever implemented.

What is ETT?

ETT consists of a tube, 5 or 6 feet in diameter, emptied of all air, with computer-controlled individual capsules suspended by magnetic levitation (maglev), and accelerated electrically using linear motors. Deceleration will use recapturing technology which will recycle most of the energy used by the acceleration. Regional travel, analogous to current metro mass-transit systems will achieve 300MPH. Since the system uses individual capsules and not trains, it is an on-demand system which would not require pre-scheduling or significant wait time. Longer distance travel will achieve 4000MPH, making commuting between LA and New York feasible, with a one-way trip time of approximately 45 minutes. The high speeds are achievable by totally frictionless travel. Air resistance and rolling resistance has been totally eliminated, creating a contained environment similar to outer space.

The capsules will also be designed to accommodate pallets of freight and will revolutionize shipping of most commodities, being enormously cheaper and faster than any current form of transportation.

ETT has the potential to obsolete air travel, rail, and most automobiles and trucks, and provide inexpensive, fast transportation to the entire planet. It also has the potential to revitalize our economy, providing jobs in manufacturing and construction of the system, and reducing the cost of doing business both in transportation of people and commodities. Some of the manufacturing base left in the country could be re-purposed to build the capsules, vacuum pumps, and other components of the system.

Get Involved

Learn more about ETT, and participate in ETT by purchasing an ET3 license, or donating to the ET3 Foundation.

Liquid Fluoride Thorium Reactors 

I’ll be honest: nuclear power scares me, and especially after the Japan incident I want nothing to do with existing nuclear power plants. However, looking a little into thorium reactors has changed my perspective. We must keep an open, but skeptical mind when exploring new technologies.

Liquid Fluoride Thorium Reactors (LFTR) promise the possibility of much cleaner nuclear power plants that have nearly zero risk of containment problems. One of the main reasons thorium reactors have not been used is that they don’t produce weapons-grade radioactive byproducts. In fact, they have the potential to “burn up” all the radioactive waste from existing power plants, which would essentially become a free source of fuel until it is used up. Of the radioactive waste left, most is safe within 10 years, and the remainder is safe after 300 years, compared to 10,000 years or more from existing nuclear waste. LFTR promises to be a peace-friendly and environmentally friendly solution.

Because of the design of a LFTR, any malfunction would automatically shut the system down safely. More research needs to be done to prove these claims, especially the closed-system turbines in the proposed power plant designs, but they are definitely worth pursuing, as the payoff could be enormous.

Russia criticises US Trade Bill linked to Human Rights

0

Russia kept up its criticism of the United States over the Magnitsky Act on Friday, as the legislation won overwhelming approval from the US House of Representatives.

The act, added to a bill granting Russia permanent normal trade status, would impose sanctions on Russians deemed to have violated human rights.

“I can confirm that our response will be tough, but not necessarily symmetrical,” Russian Deputy Foreign Minister Sergei Ryabkov said Friday before the House acted, in comments reported by the Interfax news agency.

“Owing to certain sentiments that prevail in the U.S., including on Capitol Hill, our relations with the U.S. seriously lack what we call three basic principles – mutual respect, equal rights and noninterference in internal affairs,” Ryabkov said.

The bill, which the House approved 365 to 43 and which now goes to the Senate, did accomplish a goal that Russia has long sought. It repeals the Cold War-era Jackson-Vanik amendment, which tied trade relations to the free immigration of persecuted religious minorities, principally Jews. Since the fall of the Soviet Union more than 20 years ago, Russia has had no exit restrictions, and the amendment has been a source of constant irritation here.

Congress finally moved to repeal it after Russia joined the World Trade Organization this summer. Jackson-Vanik, under WTO rules, put American exporters at a disadvantage.

But the Magnitsky Act was tied to it. It requires the United States to place financial and visa restrictions on a list of officials associated with the torture and death, three years ago Friday, of Sergei Magnitsky, a whistleblower who uncovered a $230 million tax refund fraud. Russian officials have denounced the act as interference in domestic affairs.

White House officials told the act’s supporters that the administration would prefer to handle sanctions by way of executive action, not legislation, but support for the bill has been widespread and bipartisan.

“We will signal that corrupt thugs who attack whistleblowers and human rights activists will be held to account in America, if not Russia,” said Rep. Devin Nunes, R-Calif.

“We must hold Magnitsky’s killers accountable,” said Rep. Steve Cohen, D-Tenn., who also denounced Russia’s prosecution this summer of the female punk band Pussy Riot after it took over a cathedral altar last February and sang a song against Vladimir Putin. Two members of the band have since been sentenced to two years in a penal colony, following a trial that Cohen called “little more than a farce.”

He called on the band’s persecutors to be added to the list of sanctioned Russian officials.

“These are exactly the sorts of victims contemplated in this legislation,” he said.

Russian human rights activists support the bill. Lev Ponomaryov, leader of the For Human Rights group, told Interfax it is “a step in the right direction.” Putin, who was elected president in March, met with German Chancellor Angela Merkel on Friday, and she also brought up human rights issues in their talks.

Most of the debate on the House floor Friday was devoted to the advantages to American business if Jackson-Vanik is repealed. Rep. Richard Neal, D-Mass., said U.S. exports to Russia, now worth about $11 billion a year, could “double or triple.”

Several lawmakers emphasized that Russia’s accession to the WTO gives the United States and other countries an opportunity to try to ensure that Moscow follows international trade rules.

“Clearly, part of Russia’s economy is little better than a kleptocracy,” said Rep. James Moran, D-Va. Both parts of the bill – the Jackson-Vanik repeal and the Magnitsky sanctions – would help to nudge Russia in the right direction, he said.

The bill approved Friday also grants permanent normal trade status to Moldova, the one other former Soviet republic still covered by the Jackson-Vanik provision.

Source

Protester fined for heckling war criminal Blair

Tom Peck, The Independent |

A protestor who interrupted Tony Blair’s evidence at the Leveson Inquiry in May has been fined £100.

David Lawley-Wakelin, who made a documentary called Alternative Iraq, said “excuse me” before heckling Mr Blair, but was nonetheless found guilty of causing alarm or distress to Lord Leveson and the former Prime Minister. The case was moved to a larger courtroom at Haringey Magistrates’ Court in north London, to accommodate Mr Lawley-Wakelin’s 20 supporters.

“I said excuse me when I entered because I was interrupting someone who was speaking,” Mr Lawley-Wakelin, 49, told the court. “There is evidence that shows Blair lied and deceived the country into a war, so the suggestion he might be a war criminal when over 100,000 people have died is perfectly reasonable.”

A news report of the incident was played several times, showing Mr Lawley-Wakelin bursting into the room near to Lord Leveson’s seat. The court heard specialist officers were drafted in that day specifically to make the courtroom secure for Mr Blair’s testimony. The court heard Mr Lawley-Wakelin had an expired press pass on him when arrested, and co-operated fully with officers once he had been bundled out of the room.

At one point, when the footage was paused on Mr Blair, one of his supporters in the gallery asked another: “Do we have to keep seeing his face?”

Defence barrister James Mason described Mr Lawley-Wakelin as “charming”, adding: “There doesn’t seem to be anyone who looks particularly concerned at all.

There was no use of bad language or adjectives of swearing. There was no actual threat made to Mr Blair on anyone else.

“There was irritation, and professional annoyance, and it is perfectly understandable why his Lordship [Leveson] felt the way he did,” he said. It was Lord Leveson who had pushed for prosecution. “But what has followed is sledge hammer to crack a very polite and modest nut.”

District Judge Robin McPhee did not agree, finding Mr Lawley-Wakelin in breach of Section 5 of the Public Order Act 1986. “I have come to the certain conclusion that in a democratic society which establishes a system of public inquiry, that it is a legitimate aim to ensure that such inquiries run properly,” he said. “That witnesses can attend without fear of being caused alarm at the hand of a third party unconnected with the inquiry and give their evidence freely and without fear of interruption by disorderly behaviour.”

Mr Lawley-Wakelin was fined £100, are ordered to pay £250 court costs, and a £15 victim surcharge. Speaking on the steps outside the court afterwards, Mr Lawley-Wakelin revealed he had received messages of support from the Nobel Laureate Mairead Maguire and Archbishop Desmond Tutu.

“The world needs more people like you,” he said the archbishop had written to him. “People should not abuse their freedom nor their authority. We have agitated for this and similar causes.”

Mr Lawley-Wakelin said: “For me to now be found guilty of causing Tony Blair harassment, alarm and distress for calling him a war criminal while he is giving evidence to an inquiry about the lies and deceit of others is the greatest hypocrisy I have heard for a very long time.”

Majority of organic companies owned by mega corporations

0

Carolanne Wright, NaturalNews |

One of the most beneficial aspects of the Yes on 37 campaign is the transparency it created regarding seemingly ‘natural’ and organic brands. Mega conglomerates like Dean Foods, Coca Cola, Hain, Kraft, PepsiCo and Heinz have gobbled up most of the organic food industry, leaving little to spare — spawning the term ‘Big Organic.’ These very same companies have a track record of destroying healthy food through industrial, genetically modified and conventional farming practices. The bottom line for these corporations — profit, plain and simple. While they take their share of the $30 billion-a-year organic food industry, small and true organics are laid to waste.

Insatiable appetite for profit driven organics

Over the last decade, the natural and organic food industry has become very lucrative for big business. A form of greenwashing, corporations such as Hain Celestial buy up small organic companies, then hide behind bucolic-sounding labels like Health Valley and Walnut Acres. Or worse, conglomerates like Dean Foods snapping up the Silk brand in 2002 and immediately reducing sustainable ingredients. This behemoth also bought Horizon Organic in 2004 and soon after began purchasing dairy from suppliers operating factory farms. The demand for organics has apparently compromised the entire industry by attracting profit hungry corporations. See the infographic here for a list of all the organic and ‘natural’ companies that have been swallowed up by conglomerates.

To make matters more appalling, the National Organic Standards Board is controlled by members from big business who do not necessarily hold the consumers best interests at heart. Keep in mind this is the board that wields considerable power over the organic industry — choosing whether an ingredient can be included in certified organic products or not. The board is supposed to represent the “diversity of the American public and of organic agriculture,” according to the National Organic Program. Unfortunately, this is far from the case. The standards board is filled with members who strive to represent their specific interest groups and vote with bias. Consider Katrina Heinze, an executive at General Mills who was selected to serve as consumer representative in 2005. General Mills is famous for promoting nanotechnology and genetic engineering — not exactly a stunning organic model. Or take Ms. Beck, who is the national organic program manager at Driscoll’s and has a board seat as a ‘farmer.’ The problem is, Beck is not a farmer. But she does have special interests. Evidently, this is all that is needed to gain board influence.

The last holdouts

Sadly, only a few truly independent organic companies remain. Examples include: Eden, Nature’s Path, Cedarlane and Organic Valley. For a full list, click here.

With the failure of Prop. 37, American consumers cannot rely on the government for food transparency or safety. It is up to us. By purchasing produce from local organic farms, supporting independent organic companies and boycotting ‘Big Organic,’ we can make a difference by casting votes with our dollars and our forks.

Sources for this article include:

“Has ‘Organic’ Been Oversized?” Stephanie Strom, New York Times, July 7, 2012. Retrieved on November 13, 2012 from: http://www.nytimes.com

“The Defeat of Prop 37 Means Go Back To Voting With Your Fork” Sayer Ji, Wake-Up World, November 9, 2012. Retrieve on November 13, 2012 from: http://wakeup-world.com

“Big Food Behemoths Embarrass Their Organic Offshoots” Jim Hightower, Truth-Out, October 10, 2012. Retrieved on November 13, 2012 from: http://truth-out.org

“Big Organic Joins Monsanto in Fighting Prop 37” Corey Hill, East Bay Express, September 12, 2012. Retrieved on November 13, 2012 from: http://www.eastbayexpress.com

“Organic Food Industry Bought Up by Corporations Like Coca-Cola” Anthony Gucciardi, Natural Society, April 3, 2012. Retrieved on November 13, 2012 from: http://naturalsociety.com

“Who Owns Organic?” Cornucopia Institute. Retrieved on November 13, 2012 from: http://www.cornucopia.org/who-owns-organic/

“The Stories (And Money) Behind 10 of Your Favorite Organic and Natural Brands” Vanessa Barrington, EcoSalon, October 28, 2009. Retrieved on November 13, 2012 from: http://ecosalon.com

About the author:
Carolanne enthusiastically believes if we want to see change in the world, we need to be the change. As a nutritionist, natural foods chef and wellness coach, Carolanne has encouraged others to embrace a healthy lifestyle of organic living, gratefulness and joyful orientation for over 13 years. Through her website www.Thrive-Living.netshe looks forward to connecting with other like-minded people from around the world who share a similar vision.

Learn more: http://www.naturalnews.com/037972_organic_companies_corporations_sellout.html?#ixzz2CPid4CsC

Occupy Wall St protesters wipe $5m off America’s debt

0

A group of campaigners linked to the Occupy Wall Street movement has raised enough cash to write-off $5m in “distressed” student loans and outstanding medical bills.

, The Telegraph |

The campaigners founded the Rolling Jubilee project to buy-up distressed loans, where repayments are in arrears, for pennies in the pound and then cancel them free of charge to “liberate debtors at random”. That debt will include large amounts of student loans and oustanding medical bills owed by people struggling to meet repayments.

Individuals or companies can buy debt from lenders at knock-down prices if it the borrower is in default or behind with payments and are then free to do with it as they see fit, including cancelling it free of charge.

Campaigners estimate that 77pc of American households are in debt and that 62pc of all bankrupcies in the country are caused by large medical bills, which can be virtually impossible to pay for those without insurance. An estimated one in seven people in the US is currently being pursued by a debt collector.

As a test run the group spent $500 on distressed debt, buying $14,000 worth of outstanding loans and pardoning the debtors. They also consulted lawyers on the legality of doing this on a large scale.

Yesterday they launched a fundraising campaign with a variety show and telethon in New York and have already raised $269,913 (£170,206) – enough to buy over $5m worth of debt and write it off.

Strike Debt, a campaign group behind the project, said that it had no way of targetting which person’s debt they were buying: “Anonymous accounts get bundled together by other firms and sold as a whole. We have no input into whose debt is included.

“We hope to buy as much debt as we can and, more fundamentally, to get people asking why it is that debt can be so cheap to everyone except the debtor. Remember: you are not a loan, and you are not alone.”

63% of Brits do not trust newspapers

0

Hacked Off |

The YouGov Poll commissioned by The Sun, published today on p.6 and headlined “State-run watchdog will gag free press: 75% of Brits see threat to the papers” also found a result less sympathetic to vested interests in the newspaper industry.

Asked to what extent, if at all, would you trust newspapers to set up a fair system of press regulation?

Percentage of the public that trust newspapers a lot: 1%

Percentage of the public that trust newspapers a fair amount: 26%

Percentage of the public that do not trust newspapers a lot or at all: 63%

See the full YouGov poll results here.

Responding to the finding, Professor Brian Cathcart, Director of Hacked Off, said:

This is another example of selective and biased reporting of the debate over press regulation that we have seen in most of the national press.

The newspapers are under scrutiny and surely have an obligation to present the facts fully and fairly to their readers.

The finding on trust levels is a damning one, which supports earlier polls showing the public no longer believe they can rely on the press to police itself and want a new regulator, independent of both politicians and the newspaper industry.

To see the results of the Hacked Off, the Media Standards Trust and YouGov poll click here.
To see the results of the Carnegie Trust and Demos poll click here.

Independent journalists hounded and arrested

0

RWB |

Reporters Without Borders condemns a worrying increase in harassment of dissidents in recent months, which has yet again contradicted the intentions manifested by the Cuban government when signing two United Nations human rights agreements in 2008.

Neither of these agreements — the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights and the International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights — has yet been ratified.

“The hopes raised by the release of the ‘Black Spring’ prisoners in 2010 are fading,” Reporters Without Borders said. “This renewed crackdown should be condemned by the international community, especially the Latin American countries, which must put human rights and freedom of information at the centre of their relations with Cuba as it seeks regional integration.”

Reporters Without Borders has also learned that José Antonio Torres, a correspondent for the government newspaper Granma in Santiago, Cuba’s second largest city, is considering the possibility of appealing against his conviction on a charge of spying but fears that his sentence could be increased if he does.

Arrested in 2011 after writing articles about mismanagement of a Santiago aqueduct project and the installation of fibre-optic cable between Venezuela and Cuba, Torres was sentenced in July to 14 years in prison and withdrawal of his university degree in journalism.

Calixto Ramón Martínez Arias, a journalist with the independent Hablemos Press news agency, began a hunger strike six days ago in protest against conditions in Valle Grande prison, to which he was transferred on 10 November.

Arrested on 16 September after writing about a cholera and dengue epidemic before the government had issued any statement on the subject, he is facing a sentence of up to three years in prison on a charge of insulting the president.

Commenting on the case, Reporters Without Borders said: “Martínez has been detained for too long. We call on the Cuban authorities to release this journalist, who was just doing his duty to report the news.”

Hablemos Press journalists have repeatedly been the victims of threats and arbitrary detention in the course of the crackdown of the past few months.

In one of the most recent instances, Hablemos Press director Roberto de Jesus Guerra Perezwas interrogated and threatened for several hours on 8 November, a week after one of the news agency’s reporters, Jaime Leygonier, was subjected to a similar ordeal.

Enyor Díaz Allen, the Hablemos Press correspondent in the eastern city of Guantánamo, was arrested on the morning of 6 November and was held for three days while all of his work equipment (a computer, two cameras and a mobile phone) were confiscated.

Eleven dissidents were arrested when they went to a Havana police station on 7 November to enquire about Yaremis Flores, a lawyer held on a charge of “crime against the state.” They included the blogger and political activist Antonio Rodiles, who is still being held and is facing a sentence of three months to a year in prison on charges of resisting the authorities.

The next day, when a second group of dissidents went to the police station to find out what had happened to their colleagues, 16 of them, including the blogger Yoani Sánchez, were arrested on charges of public disorder, “social indiscipline” and activities “deliberately orchestrated by the US authorities.”

This was Sánchez’s second arrested in two months. She and her husband, independent journalistReynaldo Escobar, were arrested on 4 October and held for 30 hours when they went to the eastern city of Bayamo to cover the trial of Angel Carromero, a Spanish political activist accused of dangerous driving causing Cuban opposition activist Oswaldo Payá’s death in July.

The day after her first release, she wrote on Twitter: “During my detention, I refused to eat or drink any liquid. This is the first glass of water that I am having on arriving home, for an oesophagus on fire.” She also reported that she was mistreated, as a result of which one of her teeth was broken.

The Inter-American Court of Human Rights announced on 12 November that it is requesting preventive measures to guarantee the life and physical integrity of Sánchez and her relatives in response to the complaint that she brought before the court accusing the Cuban state of systematically violating her rights and freedom of movement.

Sánchez has been refused 20 foreign travel permits since 2007. On 8 November, the day of her second arrest, the Inter-American Press Association appointed her as the regional vice-chairperson for Cuba of its Press Freedom Committee.

The Classified Report DHS Doesn’t Want You To See

0

Mac Slavo, SHTFplan.com |

In 2007 the National Academy of Sciences completed an extensive review of the national power grid infrastructure in a 164 page report titled Terrorism and the Electric Power Delivery System. In it the NAS detailed a wide array of physical, personnel and cyber vulnerabilities that could pose a significant risk to the national security of the United States.

Even though the report was originally written for public release, notes Madison Ruppert of End the Lie, the entire document was almost immediately classified by the Department of Homeland Security and hasn’t seen the light of day until this week. That release came after five years of committee reviews, reversals, deliberations and pressure from the Academy itself.

The contents of the report make it clear why DHS wanted to keep it out of public view, as it illustrates severe deficiencies within the whole of the national power grid infrastructure.

So serious are the problems, that a coordinated attack by just a few people in just a few critical components could wreak such havoc that the effects would be measured in hundreds of billions of dollars and thousands of lives:

The electric power delivery system that carries electricity from large central generators to customers could be severely damaged by a small number of well-informed attackers. The system is inherently vulnerable because transmission lines may span hundreds of miles, and many key facilities are unguarded. This vulnerability is exacerbated by the fact that the power grid, most of which was originally designed to meet the needs of individual vertically integrated utilities, is now being used to move power between regions to support the needs of new competitive markets for power generation. Primarily because of ambiguities introduced as a result of recent restructuring of the industry and cost pressures from consumers and regulators, investment to strengthen and upgrade the grid has lagged, with the result that many parts of the bulk high-voltage system are heavily stressed.

A terrorist attack on the power system would lack the dramatic impact of the attacks in New York, Madrid, or London. It would not immediately kill many people or make for spectacular television footage of bloody destruction. But if it were carried out in a carefully planned way, by people who knew what they were doing, it could deny large regions of the country access to bulk system power for weeks or even months. An event of this magnitude and duration could lead to turmoil, widespread public fear, and an image of helplessness that would play directly into the hands of the terrorists. If such large extended outages were to occur during times of extreme weather, they could also result in hundreds or even thousands of deaths due to heat stress or extended exposure to extreme cold.

The largest power system disruptions experienced to date in the United States have caused high economic impacts. Considering that a systematically designed and executed terrorist attack could cause disruptions that were even more widespread and of longer duration, it is no stretch of the imagination to think that such attacks could entail costs of hundreds of billions of dollars.

…

Terrorist attacks on multiple-line transmission corridors could cause cascading blackouts.High-voltage transformers are of particular concern because they are vulnerable to attack, both from within and from outside the substation where they are located. These transformers are very large, difficult to move, custom-built, and difficult to replace.

Most are no longer made in the United States, and the delivery time for new ones can run to months or years. The industry has made some progress toward building an inventory of spares, but these efforts could be overwhelmed by a large attack. Although easier to move and replace, other large components, such as high voltage circuit breakers, are also a concern.

These problems are exacerbated by the current state of the transmission grid. It is aging and increasingly stressed, leaving it especially vulnerable to multiple failures following an attack. Many important pieces of equipment are decades old and lack improved technology that could help limit outages.

Full Report: National Academy of Sciences

The NAS originally compiled the report under direction of Homeland Security. Their intent was that DHS would take the information and use it to improve the grid by reducing vulnerabilities and upgrading outdated components.

Because DHS sat on this for five years, none of the proactive measures recommended by the report have been taken, so we are exactly where we were in 2007.

If we look to the most recent grid failure in the north east as a guide, a rogue attack on essential components of the regional and national power infrastructure, or a powerful enough solar storm, could do some serious damage.

No electricity, as we have seen recently, means no refrigeration, no fuel, no clean water, no transportation and no rapid emergency response.

In an isolated area where 50,000 to 100,000 people are affected the situation can be managed.

But what happens when we’re talking about fifty or more major metropolitan areas and tens of millions of people from coast-to-coast?

President Obama Signs ‘Secret Directive’ On Cybersecurity

0

TechDirt |

While we’re hearing that the Senate is likely to take up (though not pass) the Cybersecurity Act yet again either today or tomorrow, and the White House is still sitting on a cybersecurity “executive order,” in the meantime it’s being reported that President Obama has signed a “secret directive” to allow the military to “act more aggressively to thwart cyberattacks.”This is limited to the military, but that means we’re talking about the NSA (which is a part of the Defense Department). Considering that it seems to view a stronger offensive effort (i.e.,collecting all data) a key part of a strong “defense,” this is worrisome.

The really troubling part in all of this is the really unnecessary level of secrecy. We keep being told scary bogeyman stories about online attacks without any evidence or proof. And now the President is signing a “secret” order allowing the military to do more in response? Without any real scrutiny, it’s not difficult to see how these things expand unceasingly and are wide open for abuse. Given the NSA’s track record here, it’s inevitable that these efforts will be massively abused.

House Grills TSA On Faking Of Body Scanner Tests

0

Steve Watson, Prisonplanet.com |

A TSA official was given a grilling in a House hearing yesterday concerning information suggesting that one of the vendors of the agency’s x-ray body scanning machines may have faked tests on software which was supposed to eliminate naked images of passengers passing through the devices.

The House Homeland Security subcommittee on transportation chaired a hearing entitled “TSA’s Recent Scanner Shuffle: Real Strategy or Wasteful Smokescreen?”

During the hearing, the subject of Rapiscan allegedly manipulating operational tests on the machines was raised.

As we reported yesterday, on November 9, Rapiscan received a show-cause letter from the TSA demanding to know why the company was not complying with the TSA’s terms in failing to develop the privacy friendly software.

Read more…

What’s the Point of Having Laws Against Torture if They Don’t Apply to the Powerful?

0
Katherine Gallagher, Counterpunch |

One thing brings these four men together. Hassan bin Attash, Sami el-Hajj, Muhammed Khan Tumani and Murat Kurnaz–they are all survivors of the systematic torture program the Bush administration authorized and carried out in locations including Afghanistan, Iraq, Guantánamo, and numerous prisons and CIA “black sites” around the world. Between them, they have been beaten, hung from walls or ceilings, deprived of sleep, food and water, and subjected to freezing temperatures and other forms of torture and abuse while held in U.S. custody. None was charged with a crime, two were detained while still minors, and one of them remains at Guantánamo.

This week, in a complaint filed with the United Nations Committee against Torture, they are asking one question: how can the man responsible for ordering these heinous crimes, openly enter a country that has pledged to prosecute all torturers regardless of their position and not face any legal action?

The Center for Constitutional Rights (CCR) and the Canadian Centre for International Justice (CCIJ) filed the complaint on the men’s behalf.

The country in question is Canada, visited last year by former U.S. President George W. Bush during a paid speaking engagement in Surrey, British Columbia. Bush’s visit drew hundreds in protest, calling for his arrest, and it also provided bin Attash, el-Hajj, Tumani and Kurnaz the opportunity to call on the Canadian government to uphold its legal obligation under the U.N. Convention against Torture, and conduct a criminal investigation against Bush while he was on Canadian soil.

To this end, the four men, submitted a 69-page draft indictment that CCR and CCIJ had presented to Canada’s attorney general ahead of Bush’s arrival in support of their private prosecution. The submission included thousands of pages of evidence against Bush consisting of extensive reports and investigations conducted by multiple U.S. agencies and the U.N. The evidence is overwhelming, not to mention the fact that Bush has admitted, even, boasted of his crimes, saying “damn right” when asked if it was permissible to waterboard a detainee — a recognized act of torture.

Canada should have investigated these crimes. The responsibility to do so is embedded in its domestic criminal code that explicitly authorizes the government to prosecute torture occurring outside Canadian borders. There is no reason it cannot apply to former heads of state, and indeed, the Convention has been found to apply to such figures including Hissène Habré and Augusto Pinochet. A criminal investigation into the allegations was the lawful thing to do. It was also what Canada had agreed to do when it pledged its support to end impunity for torture by ratifying the Convention.

But Canada looked the other way. Not only did federal Attorney General Robert Nicholson refuse to investigate Bush, but the Attorney General of British Columbia swiftly intervened to shut down a private criminal prosecution submitted to a provincial court in his jurisdiction the morning of Bush’s visit.

Thanks to the Obama administration’s call to look only “forward” — even in the face of torture that demands a proper reckoning — and a court system in the U.S. that has readily closed its doors to torture survivors, the crimes of the Bush era are effectively beyond the reach of justice in the U.S. But the immunity — the impunity — granted to these criminals here should not follow them into other countries, particularly those that are signatories to international laws and treaties against torture.

If the Convention against Torture is to have any hope of fulfilling its mission of preventing torture, the committee must send countries like Canada a clear message: it is their legal obligation to ensure there is no safe haven for torturers and any action to the contrary makes these states effectively complicit in furthering impunity for some of the worst crimes of the past decade.

These four survivors are asking the U.N. to enforce its own convention, nothing more and nothing less. They call upon the U.N., unlike Canada, to unequivocally reject a worldview in which the powerful are exempt from rules, treaties and prohibitions against senseless acts of barbarity. Will the U.N. hear their call?

Katherine Gallagher is Senior Staff Attorney at the Center for Constitutional Rights.

Naked Israeli Aggression

0

Stephen Lendman, rinf.com |

Since 1948, Israel waged varying intensity war on Palestine. Crimes of war, against humanity, and genocide are committed regularly. World community inaction lets Israel get away with murder.

Operation Pillar of Cloud (aka Cloud Column/Pillar of Defense) is Israel’s latest naked aggression.

“And the Lord went before them by day in a pillar of cloud to lead them the way, and by night in a pillar of fire; to give them the light; to go by day and night:” Exodus 13.21.

Israel apparently believes Almighty God sanctifies cold-blooded murder. Self-defense claims don’t wash. They never do.

Killing Hamas military commander Ahmed Jabari in cold blood intensified Israeli attacks. They began Saturday. They replicate what Israel did so often before.

Israel bombs, shells, ravages, and murders civilian men, women and children with impunity. A special place in hell awaits responsible rogues in charge. Palestinian supporters worldwide condemn them.

Cast Lead 2.0 looms. The lives of 1.7 innocent people are at risk. They’re trapped inside the world’s largest open air prison. They’re sitting ducks. There’s no place to hide. Israel takes full advantage.

Mondoweiss published a list of scheduled Emergency Global Actions for Gaza. Silence and inaction aren’t options. Accountability time is long overdue.

Evening November 14:

â–ª Jerusalem – Damascus Gate, 7:00PM
â–ª Ramallah – al Manara Square, 7:00PM
â–ª Bethlehem – Manger Square, 7:30PM
â–ª Tel Aviv – Ehud Barak’s doorstep, 8:00PM
â–ª Istanbul | al Fateh Mosque, 9:00PM
â–ª London | Israeli Embassy
â–ª Quebec | Hall Building, Concordia University, 1455 de Maisonneuve West, 6:00PM

November 15:

â–ª George Mason Univesity – Free Speech Square, 1:30PM
â–ª Nashville – Centennial Park, 3:00PM
â–ª Washington DC – Israeli Embassy, 3:30PM
â–ª San Francisco – Israeli Consulate, 5:15PM
â–ª New York – Israeli Consulate, 42nd Street & 2nd Ave, 5:00PM
â–ª Boston – Copley Square, 4:30PM
â–ª Chicago – Outside Obama HQ, 130 E Randolph Street, 4:00PM
â–ª Montreal – Hall Building, Concordia University, 5:00PM
â–ª Vancouver – The Art Gallery, 5:00PM
â–ª Toronto – Israeli Consulate, 180 Bloor Street (east of St. George TTC), 6:00PM
â–ª London – Israeli Embassy, 5:30PM
â–ª Brighton (UK) – Outside EcoStream HQ, 12:00PM
â–ª Brighton (UK) – Victoria Gardens, 5:30PM
â–ª Bradford (UK) – 4.30PM
â–ª Oxford (UK) – Cornmarket Street, 4:00PM
â–ª Dublin – Israeli Embassy, 5:30PM
â–ª Belfast – City Hall, 7:00PM
â–ª Paris – Ministry of Justice, 6PM
â–ª Jerusalem – Outside Hebrew University, 12:00PM
â–ª Beirut – Cola, 10:00AM
â–ª Sydney – Parmatta Town Hall, 6PM

November 16:
Cairo – Tahrir Square
â–ª Washington DC – March from State Department, 6:00PM
â–ª San Francisco | Israeli Consulate, 4:00PM
â–ª Manchester (UK) – Picadilly Gardens, 5:00PM

SATURDAY, 17 Nov

â–ª Stockholm – 3PM
â–ª Oslo – 3PM

Mondoweiss co-editor Philip Weiss is in Bethlehem. He called the West Bank mood “resigned” and “edgy.” Demonstrations were urged.

Scattered ones occurred in Nablus, Jenin, Qalqilia, Hebron, Bethlehem, and near Ofer military base. Israel responded violently. Protesters were attacked with rubber bullets, sound bombs, and tear gas. Injuries were reported.

Gaza’s health minister Mofeed al-Mkhallalaty said what’s happening is “a comprehensive war launched by Israel against the civilian population of Gaza killing the elderly, children and infants.”

He called for international action to stop it. Gaza’s main Al Shifa Hospital and other medical facilities can’t handle the severe casualties needing urgent treatment. At least 15 Palestinians were killed. Over 150 were injured. Expect casualty totals to rise. Israel shows no mercy.

Unconfirmed reports suggest the IDF is using white phosphorous and other illegal weapons. It’s likely. Israel uses them in all its wars. New ones are tested in real time. Doctors report injuries never seen before.

Mondoweiss contributor Waleed al-Meadana headlined “Almost Dead: An eyewitness report from Gaza,” saying:

“Death smells! Blood stains the walls. Pieces of grained human flesh spread everywhere, and broken glass is scattered. I can recognize a hand, and some parts of the head.”

“Trees are torn apart some steps away. They are laying dead. And a car is still firing. Or what is left of it. Appalled faces. Shaking voices.”

“The sky is weird. Gloomy clouds, bleak scenes, some kind of strange feeling alongside the smell of human blood, and children. Children are gathering up the remnants of the fragmented body.”

He lives in Gaza. He’s never been this close to Israeli crimes, he added. He’s witnessing Israeli barbarity firsthand. Before it ends, he may be lucky to survive in one piece. “Israeli arrogance….showers us with bombs and hate.”

Israel said a ground invasion “is only a matter of time.” An emergency November 14 Security Council meeting was held. Ban Ki-moon made his usual dismissive comment. He urged both sides to exercise “maximum restraint and to respect international law.”

Washington blocked possible condemnation of Israel. Ambassador Susan Rice is an unprincipled defender of naked aggression and mass murder.

She ignored Israel’s premeditated war on Gaza. She condemned the victims.

“There is no justification for the violence that Hamas and other terrorist organizations are employing against the people of Israel,” she said. “We call on those responsible to stop these cowardly acts immediately.”

“Hamas claims to have the best interests of the Palestinian people at heart, yet it continues to engage in violence that does nothing but set back the Palestinian cause.”

“Attacking Israel on a near daily basis does nothing to help Palestinians in Gaza nor to move the Palestinian people any closer to achieving self determination and independence.”

Comments like these don’t rise to the level of bad fiction. What’s happening in Gaza is very real. Since December 27, 2008, Israel murdered well over 1,500 Gazans, injured around 6,000, and caused widespread destruction of non-military related sites.

PA UN ambassador Riyad Mansour said:

“Once again the international community is witness to Israel’s malicious onslaught, using the most lethal military means and illegal measures against the defenseless Palestinian civilian population.”

“A direct firm message must be sent to Israel to cease immediately its military campaign against the Palestinian people and to abide…. by its obligations under international law.”

“The Israeli occupying forces are now mobilizing on the ground as we speak. Fear and panic are spreading among the Palestinian civilian population.”

Israel perhaps is readying a large-scale invasion. The Palestine News Network (PNN) reported Israeli paratroopers and Givati Brigade members heading for Gaza’s border. IDF officials said Israel “will do whatever is needed to restore calm to Israeli towns in the south.”

PNN said IDF forces held training exercises in recent weeks. They’re preparing for a possible Gaza offensive. Increasingly it looks likely. Military commanders said its scale will exceed Cast Lead.

Netanyahu addressed Israelis on nationwide TV. He said Israel is prepared and ready for a large-scale offensive.

In his November 14 press conference, Obama said nothing about Israeli aggression. He told Netanyahu and Egyptian President Mohamed Morsi by phone that Israel has the “right to self-defense.”

State Department spokesman Mark Toner said the following:

“We strongly condemn the barrage of rocket fire from Gaza into southern Israel, and we regret the death and injury of innocent Israeli and Palestinian civilians caused by the ensuing violence.”

“There is no justification for the violence that Hamas and other terrorist organizations are employing against the people of Israel. We call on those responsible to stop these cowardly acts immediately.”

“We support Israel’s right to defend itself, and we encourage Israel to continue to take every effort to avoid civilian casualties.”

Iranian Foreign Ministry spokesman Ramin Mehmanparast strongly condemned Israeli attacks and atrocities, saying:

“We believe one of the objective of these crimes is covering up the domestic problems of the Zionist regime.”

Syria also denounced what it called “barbaric Israeli crimes.” It called on the international community to condemn them. Condolences were extended to the families of victims. Arab solidarity is needed. So is worldwide support for a people victimized by Israeli savagery.

US television so far ignored it. Print media reports one-sidedly support Israel. Naked aggression is called self-defense. On November 14, The New York Times headlined “Another Israel-Gaza War?” saying:

“No country should have to endure the rocket attacks that Israel has endured from militants in Gaza, most recently over the past four days. The question is how to stop them permanently.”

Blaming Israel’s victims is official editorial policy. Hamas and other resistance groups are condemned for defending themselves against savage Israeli attacks.

At the same time, The Times called another full-scale ground war “especially risky.” Concern isn’t about mass killing and destruction. Cast Lead didn’t “solve the problem,” it said.

The unexplained problem is millions of Palestinians wanting to live free in their own country, on their own land. They want occupation harshness ended. They want Israeli aggression condemned and punished. They want long denied equity, justice and freedom.

Hamas is Palestine’s legitimate government. The Times calls it “a dangerous adversary that may never accept Israel’s right to exist.”

It won’t ever accept Israeli belligerence and oppression. Nor do millions of Palestinians and worldwide supporters. The Times and other media scoundrels won’t explain.

Haaretz did no better. It editorialized irresponsibly. “Calm thing down,” it said. Assassinated Hamas leader Ahmed Jabari “dedicated his life to war against Israel.” Killing him tells Hamas to choose “more moderate” officials.

Southern Israeli security “became impossible in recent days.” Gaza rocket attacks threaten residents, said Haaretz. Calming things down depends on pointing fingers the right way.

Hamas, other resistance groups, and all Gazans are victims. Israel provocatively committed aggression. Days of bombing, shelling, and killing were premeditated. Self-defense is inviolable.

Responsible journalists should explain it. Running cover for lawlessness is unconscionable. So is global community silence.

International law obligates world leaders to condemn crimes of war and against humanity. It’s long past time Israel was held fully accountable.

Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

His new book is titled “How Wall Street Fleeces America: Privatized Banking, Government Collusion and Class War”

http://www.claritypress.com/Lendman.html

Visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to cutting-edge discussions with distinguished guests on the Progressive Radio News Hour on the Progressive Radio Network Thursdays at 10AM US Central time and Saturdays and Sundays at noon. All programs are archived for easy listening.

http://www.progressiveradionetwork.com/the-progressive-news-hour

RFID to predict human behaviour

0

Mick Meaney, rinf.com |

Researchers at Adelaide University in Australia are adapting RFID and sensor technologies to automatically monitor and predict human behaviour.

By using a network of sensors, which are attached to objects in a person’s home, they now have the ability to track a person’s daily routine and feed the information back to let ‘Big Brother’ know what you’re doing.

“Our work will be among the first few projects in the world conducting large-scale common-sense reasoning in automatic human activity recognition”, claimed Chief Investigator and researcher Michael Sheng.

The technology is currently being branded as a way to help the elderly, which takes existing RFID “solutions” to the next level by predicting if someone is in trouble.

With sensors attached to household items like televisions, toilets and cooking stoves, the software will analyze data about someone’s daily activity and if they significantly deviate from their routine, will call for help.

While the intention of the researchers might appear good on the surface, all too often we have seen surveillance technology being used to restrict freedoms and personal privacy.

The potential to use this technology in order to decide if suspected criminals, activists, or even children are conforming to “normal” behaviour, is nothing short of alarming.

Wearable police surveillance cameras on the rise

0

Mick Meaney, rinf.com |

A decision has been made by a police chief in Salt Lake City, Utah, that will force all Police officers to wear surveillance cameras.

Officers will have the cameras clipped to the the side of all headwear, including glasses, helmets or hats.

274 US law enforcement agencies in the United States are currently using the devices and agencies in Australia, New Zealand and the UK are also testing the equipment.

Officers in Scotland have been using body cameras since 2010, but The Association of Chief Police Officers cannot say how many are in use across the UK.

Privacy campaign group, Big Brother Watch, has spoken out against the devices:

“We’re already seeing traffic wardens, bailiffs and council officials using them in Britain and it’s a sad indictment of authorities who see every member of the public as a suspect.

“What is the problem they are trying to solve? Are lots of police officers being assaulted and people getting off because there’s no CCTV? Of course not.

“This is a one-sided tool. How would police officers react if members of the public routinely filmed them?”

RINF Video: Obama Accused of using Mind Control Techniques

0

RINF News |

President Obama and the United Nations have been accused of using ‘mind control’ techniques in order to manipulate and brainwash Americans.

Watch footage of the meeting here here:

Agenda 21 Full Video from Bryan Long on Vimeo.

One Million Robots: Our Replacements Have Arrived

0

Nicholas West, Activist Post | 

In the ongoing debate as to whether robots will help or hurt the job market in the U.S. and overseas, some concrete answers are beginning to appear.

Foxconn is a Chinese electronics manufacturer of mobile devices and gaming consoles. The company has been the target of negative news lately about work conditions that have led to mutiny and suicides. They are a supplier of Apple, Kindle, Xbox 360 and others, so the spotlight has been shining.

Now it seems that Foxconn would like to replace these troublesome humans demanding rights and fair pay with robots.

The first fleet has arrived …

Foxconn’s plants have the population of entire cities; the largest is known as “Foxconn City” is estimated to have upwards of 450,000 workers and covers 1.6 square miles. The Foxconn plants are together responsible for the assembly of 40% of the world’s consumer electronic products. What happens at Foxconn should signal a trend for what is likely to happen elsewhere. (Source)

As Singularity Hub reports, Foxconn’s president Terry Gau did not hide the fact that his company was seeking to replace parts of his human force with robots; he indicated last year that he intended to replace 1 million workers within 3 years:

It appears as if Gou has started the ball in motion. Since the announcement, a first batch of 10,000 robots – aptly named Foxbots – appear to have made its way into at least one factory, and by the end of 2012, another 20,000 more will be installed. (Source)

International pressure on Foxconn seems to be a valid excuse for human replacement rather than actual fundamental policy changes. Globalization and outsourcing has forced American companies doing business overseas to account for some of the human rights abuses occurring there.

There is no doubt that robots are changing the world; it is an industry that is growing magnificently. In China alone the industrial robotics market has grown 136% in three years between 2008-2011, with an additional 15% projected for 2012. This trend is leading to predictions that by 2014 China will become the world’s top consumer of robotics as well.

With such outstanding results in both production and consumption beginning to transform China’s economy, will this force a “reshoring initiative” in America as some proponents of robotics suggest? Or is this merely the first salvo fired against the increasingly expensive employment and management of the human race?

Robots can often perform complex or difficult tasks impossible for their human counterparts, and can also improve energy efficiency – a top priority in China’s developing economy. In addition, as education rates rise, fewer young people may be happy to work in basic labor jobs, especially when improved healthcare means that working-age Chinese people may also have to support their ageing parents. (Source)

While robots are still being sold as replacements only for menial jobs that humans don’t want, there is every indication with the rise of artificial intelligence that we are likely to see more skilled jobs going to robots. And with advances in autonomous robots, even the current corporate management who seeks to replace their employees might one day find themselves out of a job.

Interview with Critical Mass Radio founder, Paul Giovanni

0

Paul Giovanni, founder of Critical Mass Radio (CMR), joins Mick Meaney to discuss a forthcoming CMR ‘truth’ event in Manchester. Alternative media, unified action and radical change is also discussed.

Mick Meaney: Thanks for joining us today Paul. So the event is on the 24th November, how organised are you? Is everything ready to go?

Paul Giovanni: Well a few more bits and pieces before I’m happy but the room the set the speakers are ready.

Mick Meaney: You’ve got quite a line up… 7 speakers in total?

Paul Giovanni: Yes. Some great speakers we are looking at solution based talks, not just people trying to sell DVDs.

Mick Meaney: That’s something that’s been missing for a long time, solutions. It’s one thing to give people information, to wake them up, but without offering solutions, the information alone can often make people feel helpless and trapped.

Paul Giovanni: Agreed.

Mick Meaney: What topics are going to be discussed, and which solutions are going to be offered?

Paul Giovanni: Well everything from setting personal goals, to what’s going on with the British policing system to UFO disclosure, freeman on the land, and our court system, the constitution laws and regulations of the EU.

Mick Meaney: So you’ll be encouraging individual action, or group action, or a mix of both?

Paul Giovanni: Well individual action but also to come together, we need to ACT AS ONE NOW. So many people are just looking to sort themselves out but not concentrating on the big picture.

Mick Meaney: I agree, although it’s not always their fault… Society – or the ruling elite have always pushed an ideology of ‘me first’.

Paul Giovanni: Sure but if we are ever to going to make real change we need to link arms.

Mick Meaney: Absolutely. So how did the idea for the event first emerge?

Paul Giovanni: Well I just kept going to these conferences, and no one, was offering any solutions???? I thought right; I’m going to change that.

Mick Meaney: I know what you mean, of the conferences I’ve attended — granted I haven’t gone to any for about 5 years, I left feeling disempowered.

Paul Giovanni: Yeah you come away thinking; ok I know all that, so what’s the answer?

Mick Meaney: Yes, exactly. What’s the connection with Critical Mass Radio — a ‘truth’ radio station that’s really needed in this country.

Paul Giovanni: Well I work with groups such as We are Change Manchester and Freedom NorthWest etc, and I though there is no voice for the common person, there is no hub, so I started CMR to bring people together unite and share.

Mick Meaney: WAC Manchester is doing some great work… Also WAC Liverpool and WAC Leeds are doing a terrific job of flying the flag in the North.

Paul Giovanni: Yes I must say that the cities mentioned are just bubbling ready to boil over, you can sense there is about to be an uprising

Mick Meaney: Let’s hope so. It’s ok to want to remove the current system, but there must be something to replace it with… a better way, and it seems to be that’s what you and these groups are trying to do. I think this is the first time since I ‘woke up’ that I’ve seen so much unity and a direct effort to make real change.

Paul Giovanni: Yeah the Hosts and every one at CMR are all attached to groups and all working on many ideas I sometimes think the system must fall before enough people wake up, but then as you said everyone will be looking to be taken care of.

Mick Meaney: You’ve got Ben Emlyn-Jones on board, whom… if I remember correctly, was one of the first parents to speak out against the use of biometrics in schools.

Paul Giovanni: Yes GREAT chap is Ben, we also have at the station a lady called Pippa who has done sterling work, and taken it right to the top.

Mick Meaney: How did you first wake up, what was your journey?

Paul Giovanni: Wow. OK. So like many, from an early age from as early as I can remember I used to look round and think, this is all crazy adults working themselves into the ground for what? No one is happy. Then I watched the Zeitgeist films and BOOOOOOM.

Mick Meaney: What was your next move?

Paul Giovanni: Ok, I felt cheated and also I told myself that everything i thought was right, THIS IS NOT THE WAY IT HAS TO BE, we have just been told it has to be this way by the mainstream media and generations before. Then I though right so I started awakened people a forum then joined WAC then started Futurestar radio, which has all led to Critical Mass Radio. I was at Manchester Radio Online for six months.

Mick Meaney: How is CMR funded?

Paul Giovanni: OK the set up was from my savings I was due to move to Italy to be with my ex, and then we split early this year so i put all my savings in CMR, ALL THE HOSTS PAY FOR THEIR SHOWS. It’s very hard because people in the truth movement want everything for free.

Mick Meaney: It’s very difficult to monetize anything in the movement. You accept donations from the public too?

Paul Giovanni: Some stations advertise companies such as STARBUCKS? I DON’T GET THAT. YES DONATIONS are most welcome and we get the odd ten pounds which is great.

Mick Meaney: What people need to realise is, and most of them do… this alternative media, all the content, shows, articles, videos, events, everything costs money. We don’t live in a free world. If people want the alt media to exist, which they obviously do because they are coming to our websites in the millions, they need to support it. If they don’t support the alt media, it will cease to exist. It’s that simple. This is their media, it’s for them. If they want it they need to keep it alive or go back to being presented with one choice again – the corporate media.

Paul Giovanni: Wow can we use that one?

Mick Meaney: Course you can.

Paul Giovanni: Thank you.

Mick Meaney: At the same time, it’s a choice we make… nobody asked us or forced us to become active in the alt media… we knew the score…

So what are the core issues that concern you… what do you want to see changed?

Paul Giovanni: I just want people to be able to chose, to be free to say look, I want to live of the land and make my own way, or if people want to stay in the matrix then that’s their choice. We should not be pushed into a corner. MANY PEOPLE ARE HAPPY IN THE MATRIX, well that’s up to them.

Mick Meaney: Well.. They believe they are happy, they’ve been told that being able to afford things like Gucci shoes equals happiness. Material gain, consume, consume, consume equals happiness.

I agree with you, we should be able to live off the land, become independent… And especially become financially independent.

Paul Giovanni: I have learnt that you cannot force people to wake up, but we all have our own path, people will get left behind.

Mick Meaney: Yep, in fact you can really piss people off by trying to wake them up. A few years ago myself and Andrew Jonson went around Manchester handing out 9/11 flyers – ok maybe handing them out in pubs at 9pm at night wasn’t the best choice of place to do it, it got pretty tense.

Paul Giovanni: Yeah I think, or should I say I hope all this child abuse in the mainstream will wake a few. Really that is brave of you. I can imagine that’s the sort of thing you do only once.

Mick Meaney: I’ve stuck to daylight activism after that. It’s not worth going to hospital over… no wait. Yes it IS worth going to hospital over, but not because of some pissed up idiot whose looking for a fight.

Paul Giovanni: Agreed mate. But you can say YOU TRIED.

Mick Meaney: I suppose so. When my kids are growing up to live in a nightmare.. even more of a nightmare than what we’re in right now, yes I want to be able to look them in the eye and tell them I did my best, I tried. Hopefully it won’t come to that, because the elite… these people only survive on the illusion of being all-powerful… When you and I both know that’s a complete lie.

You’re right… Who else is going to do it? It’s up to us, and anyone who hears our message… because if you read RINF, Activist Post, David Icke, Rense, Infowars.. whatever, or you listen to CMR, watch Edge Media or however you get your real news, and if you do nothing about it… if you just consume it and then go back to your “normal” reality without doing a thing to either spread the word, take action or contribute to the fight… then what is the alternative media, really? It becomes just another form of entertainment.

So anyway, how many are you expecting to turn up on the 24th?

Paul Giovanni: Well hope to get around 100 or so. We were hoping for double that.

Mick Meaney: So hopefully this will be the first of many events in Manchester, are you filming the talks?

Paul Giovanni: Yeah we will be filming and if it works well we will be going up and down the country.

Mick Meaney: Events all over the country?

Paul Giovanni: Yes depending on how well we do in Manchester.

Mick Meaney: Manchester has always been receptive to this kind of thing.

Paul Giovanni: Yes and is my claim that Manchester will be the new capital. I MUST SAY I COULD’NT do this without the help of the host’s they are amazing all of them.

Well I thank you for the opportunity and also THANK YOU FOR ALL THE WORK YOU DO.

Mick Meaney: Thank you. CMR is a fantastic resource and I hope people give it the support it deserves. One final question… What are you plans for the future of CMR?

Paul Giovanni: Well I hope we can link up with other alternative media, but failing that we hope that we can become the station that delvers or tries to deliver the truth and hope and a connection to the new guys waking up.

‘Time to Act’ takes place on Saturday 24th November 2012, visit criticalmassradio.co.uk to book your ticket.

Major Media Breakthrough – Leveson Inquiry Exposed

0

Leveson Exposed

Today’s Daily Mail carries fantastic coverage of the Common Purpose, Leveson, David Bell operation to destroy the freedom of the press and free speech – a subject we have been covering since January 2012.

Today’s Daily Mail carries fantastic coverage of the Common Purpose, Leveson, David Bell operation to destroy the freedom of the press and free speech – a subject we have been covering since January 2012.

Article | November 16, 2012 – 9:55am